EPA-

September 1996

HYDROLOGICAL SIMULATION PROGRAM - FORTRAN

USER'S MANUAL FOR RELEASE 11

Brian R. Bicknell
John C. Imhoff
John L. Kittle, Jr.
Anthony S. Donigian, Jr.

AQUA TERRA Consultants

Mountain View, California 94043

Robert C. Johanson

University of the Pacific

Stockton, California 95204

Project Officer

Thomas O. Barnwell
Assessment Branch
Environmental Research Laboratory
Athens, Georgia 30613

IN COOPERATION WITH

OFFICE OF SURFACE WATER

WATER RESOURCES DIVISION
U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
RESTON, VIRGINIA 20192

ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH LABORATORY

OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
ATHENS, GEORGIA 30613
 DISCLAIMER

This report has been reviewed by the Environmental Research Laboratory, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Athens, Georgia and approved for publication.
Approval does not signify that the contents necessarily reflect the views and
policies of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, nor does mention of trade
names or commercial products constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.

ii
 FOREWORD

As environmental controls become more costly to implement and the penalties of

judgment errors become more severe, environmental quality management requires more
efficient analytical tools based on greater knowledge of the environmental
phenomena to be managed. As part of this Laboratory's research on the occurrence,
movement, transformation, impact, and control of environmental contaminants,
the Assessment Branch develops management or engineering tools to help pollution
control officials achieve water quality goals through watershed management.

The development and application of mathematical models to simulate the movement of

pollutants through a watershed and thus to anticipate environmental problems has
been the subject of intensive EPA research for a number of years. An important
tool in this modeling approach is the Hydrological Simulation Program - FORTRAN
(HSPF), which uses computers to simulate hydrology and water quality in natural and
man-made water systems. HSPF is designed for easy application to most watersheds
using existing meteorologic and hydrologic data. Although data requirements are
extensive and running costs are significant, HSPF is thought to be the most
accurate and appropriate management tool presently available for the continuous
simulation of hydrology and water quality in watersheds.

Rosemarie C. Russo, Ph.D.

Director
Environmental Research Laboratory
Athens, Georgia

iii
 ABSTRACT

The Hydrological Simulation Program - FORTRAN (HSPF) is a set of computer codes

that can simulate the hydrologic, and associated water quality, processes on
pervious and impervious land surfaces and in streams and well-mixed impoundments.
The manual discusses the structure of the system, and presents a detailed
discussion of the algorithms used to simulate various water quantity and quality
processes. It also contains all of the information necessary to develop input
files for applying the program, including descriptions of program options,
parameter definitions, and detailed input formatting data.

The original version of this report was submitted in fulfillment of Grant No.
R804971-01 by Hydrocomp, Inc., under the sponsorship of the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency. That work was completed in January 1980.

Extensive revisions, modifications, and corrections to the original report and the
HSPF code were performed by Anderson-Nichols and Co. under Contract No. 68-03-2895,
also sponsored by the U.S. EPA. That work was completed in January 1981. Versions
7 and 8 of HSPF and the corresponding documents were prepared by Linsley, Kraeger
Associates, Ltd. and Anderson-Nichols under Contract No. 68-01-6207, the HSPF
maintenance and user support activities directed by the U.S. EPA laboratory in
Athens, GA.

The HSPF User's Manual for Versions 10 and 11 were prepared by AQUA TERRA
Consultants of Mountain View, CA, incorporating code modifications, corrections,
and documentation of algorithm enhancements sponsored by the U.S. Geological
Survey, the U.S. EPA Chesapeake Bay Program, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, and
the U.S. EPA Athens Environmental Reasearch Laboratory. The Version 11 manual and
code were prepared under sponsorship of the U.S. Geological Survey under Contract
No. 14-08-0001-23472. The manual is available in WordPerfect format.

iv
 CONTENTS

Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Abstract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Part

A Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
B General Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
C Standards and Conventions (not included). . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
D Visual Table of Contents (not included) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
E Functional Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
F Format for the Users Control Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Appendices

I Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744

II Time Series Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752

v
 Introduction

PART A

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

1.0 Purpose and Scope of the HSPF Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2.0 Requirements for HSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.0 Purpose and Organization of this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.0 Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
5.0 Notice of User Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
6.0 Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1
 Introduction

1.0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF THE HSPF SOFTWARE

The use of models which simulate continuously the quantity/quality processes

occurring in the hydrological cycle is increasing rapidly. Recently there has been
a proliferation in the variety of models and in the range of processes they
simulate. This has been a mixed blessing to a user. To get the benefits of
simulation, a user must select a model from a bewildering array and then spend much
effort amassing and manipulating the huge quantities of data which the model
requires. If the modeler wishes to couple two or more subprocess models to
simulate a complete process, he often encounters further difficulties. The
underlying assumptions and/or structures of the subprocess models may make them
somewhat incompatible. More frequently, the data structures are so different that
coupling requires extensive data conversion work.

One reason for these problems is that the boom in modeling work has not included
enough work on the development of good model structures. That is, very few
software packages for water resource modeling are built on a systematic framework
in which a variety of process modules can fit.

With HSPF we have attempted to overcome these problems as far as possible. HSPF
consists of a set of modules arranged in a hierarchical structure, which permit the
continuous simulation of a comprehensive range of hydrologic and water quality
processes. Our experience with sophisticated models indicates that much of the
human effort is associated with data management. This fact, often overlooked by
model builders, means that a successful comprehensive model must include a sound
data management component. Otherwise, the user may become so entangled in data
manipulation that his progress on the simulation work itself is drastically
retarded. Consequently, the HSPF software is planned around a time series
management system operating on direct access principles. The simulation modules
draw input from time series storage files and are capable of writing output to
them. Because these transfers require very few instructions from the user, the
problems referred to above are minimized.

The system is designed so that the various simulation and utility modules can be
invoked conveniently, either individually or in tandem. A top down approach
emphasizing structured design has been followed. First, the overall framework and
the Time Series Management System were designed. Then, work progressed down the
structure from the highest, most general level to the lowest, most detailed one.
Every level was planned before the code was written. Uniform data structures,
logic figures, and programming conventions were used throughout. Modules were
separated according to function so that, as much as possible, they contained only
those activities which are unique to them. Structured design has made the system
relatively easy to extend, so that users can add their own modules with relatively
little disruption of the existing code.

2
 Introduction

Now, a note on the initial contents of the system. Presently, it includes modules
which can handle almost all the functions which are available in the following
existing models:

(1) HSP (LIBRARY, UTILITY, LANDS, CHANNEL, QUALITY)

(2) ARM
(3) NPS
(4) SERATRA

The HSPF software is not merely a translation of the above models, but a new system
with a framework designed to accommodate a variety of simulation modules; the
modules described above are the initial contents. Many extensions have been made
to the above models in the course of restructuring them into the HSPF system.

It is hoped that HSPF will become a valuable tool for water resource planners.
Because it is more comprehensive than most existing systems, it should permit more
effective planning. More specifically, the package can benefit the user in the
following ways:

1. The time-series-oriented direct access data system and its associated modules
can serve as a convenient means of inputting, organizing, and updating the
large files needed for continuous simulation.

2. The unified user-oriented structure of the model makes it relatively simple

to operate. The user can select those modules and options that are needed in
one run, and the system will ensure that the correct sets of code are invoked
and that internal and external transfers of data are handled. This is
achieved with a minimum of manual intervention. Input of control information
is simplified because a consistent system is used for this data for all the
modules.

3. Because the system has been carefully planned using top-down programming
techniques, it is relatively easy to modify and extend. The use of uniform
programming standards and conventions has assisted in this respect.

4. Since the code is written almost entirely in ANSI standard Fortran,

implementation on a wide variety of computers is possible.

3
 Introduction

2.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR HSPF

In awarding the grant for development of HSPF, the EPA set the following
requirements:

1. It must manage and perform deterministic simulation of a variety of aquatic

processes which occur on and under land surfaces and in channels and
reservoirs.

2. It must readily accommodate alternate or additional simulation modules.

3. It must permit easy operation of several modules in series, and thus be

capable of feeding output from any operation to subsequent operations.

4. It must be in ANSI Fortran with minor specified extensions.

With the concurrence of the EPA, we expanded on these requirements:

1. It must have a totally new design. Existing modules should not merely be
translated, but should be fitted into a new framework.

2. It must be designed from the top down, using some of the new improved
programming techniques, such as Structured Design and Structured Programming.

3. Duplication of blocks of code which perform similar or identical functions

should be avoided.

4. The user's control input must have a logically consistent structure throughout
the package.

5. Uniform standards and practices must be followed throughout the design,

development and documentation of the system.

6. It must have a conveniently operated disk-based time series storage file built
on the principle of direct access.

7. The design must be geared to implementation on larger models of the current

generation of minicomputers. It must be compatible with Operating Systems
which share memory using either the virtual memory approach or a conventional
overlay technique.

4
 Introduction

3.0 PURPOSE AND ORGANIZATION OF THIS DOCUMENT

This report contains all the documentation of the HSPF system. It is designed to:

1. introduce new users to the principles and concepts on which the system is
founded

2. describe the technical foundations of the algorithms in the various

application (simulation) modules

3. describe the input which the user supplies to run the system

To meet these needs and, at the same time, to produce a document which is
reasonably easy to use, we have divided this report into several distinct parts,
each with its own organization and table of contents.

Part A (this one) contains introductory material.

Part B outlines the general principles on which the HSPF system is based. This
includes a discussion of the "world view" which our simulation modules embody. A
firm grasp of this material is necessary before the detailed material can be
properly understood.

Part C Standards and Conventions (not included)

Part D Visual Table of Contents (not included)

Part E documents the function of each part of the software. The organization of
this part follows the layout of the software itself. The relationship between, and
the functions of, the various modules are described, starting at the highest most
general level and proceeding down to the lowest most detailed level. The algorithms
used to simulate the quantity and quality processes which occur in the real world
are described in this part.

Part F describes the User's Control Input; that is, the information which the user
must provide in order to run HSPF.

Material which might obscure the structure of this document if it were included in
the body of the report appears in Appendices. These include a glossary of terms
and descriptions of sample runs.

5
 Introduction

4.0 DEFINITION OF TERMS

In this document, terms which have a special meaning in HSPF, are enclosed in
quotes the first time they occur. Usually an explanation follows immediately. A
glossary of terms can be found in Appendix I.

5.0 NOTICE OF USER RESPONSIBILITY

This product has been carefully developed. Although the work included testing of
the software, the ultimate responsibility for its use and for ensuring correctness
of the results obtained, rests with the user.

The EPA and the developers of this software make no warranty of any kind with
regard to this software and associated documentation, including, but not limited
to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
They shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with the furnishing, performance or use of this material.

While we intend to correct any errors which users report, we are not obliged to do
so. We reserve the right to make a reasonable charge for work which is performed
for a specific user at his request.

6.0 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The original development of HSPF was sponsored by the Environmental Research

Laboratory in Athens, Georgia. David Duttweiler was the laboratory director and
Robert Swank the head of the Technology Development and Applications Branch, which
supervised the project during the code development period. Mr. Jim Falco was the
Project Officer initially on the HSPF development work; he was succeeded by Mr. Tom
Barnwell who continues to oversee HSPF support activities for EPA.

Recent development of HSPF has been sponsored by the U.S. Geological Survey Water
Resources Division in Reston, Virginia. Dr. Alan Lumb is the Contract Officer and
directs that effort for the USGS.

The initial HSPF and user manual development work was performed by Hydrocomp, Inc.;
members of the entire project team are acknowledged in the original (Release 5.0)
version of the user manual (EPA Publication No. EPA-600/9-80-015) published in
April 1980. Subsequent revisions and extensions to the HSPF code and user manual
were performed by Anderson-Nichols & Co., Inc. and AQUA TERRA Consultants. The
primary participants in the work noted above, and their contributions, are
discussed below.

Robert Johanson was Project Manager for Hydrocomp on the initial development work,
and provided consulting assistance to Anderson-Nichols & Co., Inc. and Linsley,
Kraeger Associates on subsequent development and maintenance work.

John Imhoff had primary responsibility for the RCHRES water quality sections, both
during the initial development work for Hydrocomp and subsequent modifications and
development for Anderson-Nichols and AQUA TERRA.

6
 Introduction

Harley Davis designed, coded and documented much of the PERLND and IMPLND modules
for Hydrocomp during the initial development effort.

Delbert Franz participated in the overall design of the system and supervised the
work on the time series management system at Hydrocomp.

Jack Kittle performed or directed most HSPF software development activities since
1979. His focus has been on the software structure, time series improvements, and
addition of new components. He designed the MUTSIN (Multiple Timeseries Sequential
Input) module, water categories in the RCHRES module, conditional Special Actions,
major structural improvements to the software, and was responsible for production
of Releases 7, 8 and 9. He continues to be a principal advisor in HSPF development
and maintenance.

Tony Donigian participated in the design of the PERLND algorithms in the initial
project at Hydrocomp. Since 1980, he has been the Principal Investigator/Project
Manager, providing overall guidance and supervision, on all projects related to
HSPF algorithm development, with particular focus on the improvements to the AGCHEM
sections of the program.

Brian Bicknell has been involved in HSPF maintenance and software development since
1981. He has developed or directed all recent algorithm enhancements and software
corrections. He added the WDM file interaction, the MASS-LINK and SCHEMATIC
blocks, and the FILES block. He directed the development and documentation of
Versions 10 and 11, including major enhancements for simulating forest nitrogen,
atmospheric deposition, the DSS file interface, and sediment-nutrient interactions
and bed temperature interactions in RCHRES.

Tom Jobes has been the primary software engineer with day-to-day responsibility for
HSPF development and maintenance since 1992. He implemented most of the
enhancements and software corrections in Version 11, with particular responsibility
for the DSS file interface, atmospheric deposition, forest nitrogen and plant
uptake enhancements in AGCHEM, multiple WDM files, code structure improvements,
conditional Special Actions, and water categories.

7
 General Principles

PART B

GENERAL PRINCIPLES

CONTENTS

1.0 View of the Real World . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1.1 General Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.2 Nodes, Zones, and Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3 Processing Units and Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2.0 Software Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2.1 Concept of an Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2 Time Series Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3 Times Series Management for an Operation . . . . . . . . . 17
2.4 HSPF Software Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

3.0 Structure of a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

3.1 Elements of a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.2 Groups of Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

4.0 Conventions Used in Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . 23

5.0 Method of Documenting Data Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

5.1 Structure of Data in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.2 Structure of Data on Disk Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

6.0 Method of Handling Diagnostic Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

FIGURES

Number Page

1-1 Nodes, zones and elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

1-2 Directed and non-directed graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1-3 Single- and multi-element processing units . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2-1 Logical structure of the internal scratch pad . . . . . . . . . 15
2-2 Activities involved in an operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2-3 Overview of HSPF software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3-1 Schematic of data flow and storage in a single run . . . . . . . 21
3-2 Extract from typical User's Control Input, showing how
grouping of operations is specified . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

8
 General Principles

1.0 VIEW OF THE REAL WORLD

1.1 General Concepts

To design a comprehensive simulation system, one must have a consistent means of

representing the prototype; in our case, the real world. We view it as a set of
constituents which move through a fixed environment and interact with each other.
Water is one constituent; others are sediment, chemicals, etc. The motions and
interactions are called processes.

1.2 Nodes, Zones, and Elements

The prototype is a continuum of constituents and processes. Simulation of such a

system on a digital computer requires representation in a discrete fashion. In
general, we do this by subdividing the prototype into "elements" which consist of
"nodes" and "zones."

A node corresponds to a point in space. Therefore, a particular value of a

spatially variable function can be associated with it, for example, channel flow
rate and/or flow cross sectional area. A zone corresponds to a finite portion of
the real world. It is usually associated with the integral of a spatially variable
quantity, for example, storage in a channel reach. The zone the smallest unit into
which we subdivide the world. The relationship between zonal and nodal values is
similar to that between the definite integral of a function and its values at the
limits of integration.

An element is a collection of nodes and/or zones. Figure 1-1 illustrates these

concepts. We simulate the response of the land phase of the hydrological cycle
using elements called "segments." A segment is a portion of the land assumed to
have areally uniform properties. A segment of land with a pervious surface is
called a "Pervious Land-segment" (PLS). Constituents in a PLS are represented as
resident in a set of zones (Fig. 1-1a). A PLS has no nodes. As a further example,
consider our formulation of channel routing. We model a channel reach as a one
dimensional element consisting of a single zone situated between two nodes (Fig.
1-1b). We simulate the flow rate and depth at the nodes; the zone is associated
with storage.

The conventions of the finite element technique also fall within the scope of these
concepts. Figure 1-1c shows a two dimensional finite element used in the
simulation of an estuary. Three nodes define the boundaries of the triangular
element. A fourth node, situated inside, may be viewed as subdividing the element
into three zones. This last type of element is not presently used in any HSPF
module, but is included in this discussion to show the generality provided by HSPF.
The system can accommodate a wide variety of simulation modules.

9
 General Principles

Figure 1-1 Nodes, zones, and elements

10
 General Principles

There are no fixed rules governing the grouping of zones and nodes to form
elements. The model builder must decide what grouping is reasonable and
meaningful, based on his view of the real world processes being simulated. In the
foregoing material we presented some elements used in HSP and other systems. In
general, it is convenient to define elements so that a large portion of the real
world can be represented by a collection of conceptually identical elements. In
this way, a single parameter structure can be defined which applies to every
element in the group. Thus, each element is a variation on the basic theme. It
is then meaningful to speak of an "element type." For example, elements of type
"PLS" all embody the same arrangement of nodes and are represented by sets of
parameters with identical structure. Variations between segments are represented
only by variations in the values of parameters. The same applies to any other
element, such as a Reach, layered lake or a triangular finite element.

As illustrated in the above discussion, nodes are often used to define the
boundaries of zones and elements. A zone, characterized by storage, receives
inflows and disperses outflows; these are called "fluxes." Note that if the nodal
values of a field variable are known, it is often possible to compute the zonal
values (storages). The reverse process does not work.

1.3 Processing Units and Networks

To simulate a prototype we must handle the processes occurring within the elements
and the transfer of information and constituents between them. The simulation of
large prototypes is made convenient by designing a single "application module" for
a given type of element or element group, and applying it repetitively to all
similar members in the system. For example, we may use the RCHRES module to
simulate all the reaches in a watershed using storage routing. This approach is
most efficient computationally if one element or group of elements, called a
"processing unit" (PU), is simulated for an extended period of time before
switching to the next one. To permit this, we must be able to define a processing
sequence such that all information required by any PU comes from sources external
to the system or from PU's already simulated. This can only happen if the PU's and
their connecting fluxes form one or more networks which are "directed graphs." In
a directed graph there are no bi-directional paths and no cycles. Figure 1-2 shows
some directed and non-directed graphs.

The requirement that PU's form directed graphs provides the rule for grouping
elements into PU's. Any elements interacting with each other via loops or bi-
directional fluxes must be grouped into a single PU because none of them can be
simulated apart from the others.

Thus, we can have both single element and multi-element PU's. A PLS is an example
of the former and a channel network simulated using the full equations of flow
exemplifies the latter (Fig. 1-3). A multi-element PU is also known as a "feedback
region." The collection of PU's which are simulated in a given run is called a
"network."

11
 General Principles

Figure 1-2 Directed and Non-directed graphs

12
 General Principles

Figure 1-3 Single- and multi-element processing units

13
 General Principles

The processes which occur within a PU are represented mathematically in an

"application model." The corresponding computer code is called an "application
module" or "simulation module."

2.0 SOFTWARE STRUCTURE

2.1 Concept of an Operation

A great variety of activities are performed by HSPF; for example, input a time
series to the WDM file, find the cross correlation coefficient for two time series,
or simulate the processes in a land segment. They all incorporate two or more of
the following functions: get a set of time series, operate on the set of input
time series to produce other time series, and output the resulting time series.
This applies both to application modules (already discussed) and to utility
modules, which perform operations ancillary or incidental to simulation. Thus, a
simulation run may be viewed as a set of operations performed in sequence. All
operations have the following structure:

SUPERVISE
OPERATIONS
(subroutine OSUPER)
T
+)3,
R R R
GET TIME OPERATE PUT TIME
SERIES (utility SERIES
(subroutine group or (subroutine group
TSGET) application TSPUT)
module)

The OPERATE function is the central activity in the operation. This work is done
by an "operating module" (OM) and its subordinate subprograms. They operate for
a specified time on a given set of input time series and produce a specified set
of output time series, under control of the "operations supervisor" (OSUPER). All
of the pieces of time series involved in this internal operation have the same
interval and duration. They are therefore viewed as written on an "internal
scratch pad" (INPAD), resident in the memory of the computer (Fig. 2-1). The
operating module receives the scratch pad with some rows filled with input and,
after its work is done, returns control to the supervisor with another set of rows
filled with output. The operating module may overwrite an input row with its own
output. The computing module being executed, together with the options being
invoked, will determine the number of rows required in the INPAD. For example,
simulation of the hydraulic behavior of a stream requires relatively few time
series (eg. inflow, depth and outflow) but the inclusion of water quality
simulation adds many more time series to the list. Now, the total quantity of
memory space available for storage of time series is also fixed (specified in a
COMMON block) by the options in effect; this is the size (area) of the INPAD.
Since both the size (N*M) and number of rows (M) in the INPAD are known, the
"width" (no. of intervals,N) can be found. The corresponding physical time is
called the "internal scratch pad span (INSPAN)."

14
 General Principles

Figure 2-1 Logical structure of the internal scratch pad

15
 General Principles

The "get time series" function prepares the input time series. This work is done
by a subroutine group called TSGET. It obtains the correct piece of a time series
from the appropriate file, aggregates or disaggregates it to the correct time
interval, multiplies the values by a user specified constant (if required), and
places the data in the required row of the internal scratch pad. Subroutine group
TSPUT performs the reverse set of operations. TSGET and TSPUT are sometimes
bypassed if a required time series is already in the INPAD when the operation is
started, or if the output is being passed to the next operation via the internal
scratch pad.

2.2 Time Series Storage

The time series used and produced by an operation can reside in four types of
storage.

1. The Watershed Data Management (WDM) File

The WDM file has replaced the TSS as the principal library for storage of time
series. As far as the computer's operating system is concerned, it consists
of a single large direct access file. This space is subdivided into many data
sets containing individual time series. Each is logically self-contained but
may be physically scattered through the file. A directory keeps track of data
sets and their attributes. Before time series are written to the WDM file,
the file and its directory must be created using the interactive program
ANNIE, which is documented separately.

2. The Hydrologic Engineering Center Data Storage System (DSS)

The DSS is the primary hydrologic data storage system of the U.S. Army
Engineers Hydrologic Engineering Center (HEC). It is similar in design and
function to the WDM file. A DSS file consists of a single, large, direct-
access file containing many individual data sets that are identified by unique
identifiers called "pathnames". A pathname is a string of characters from 5
to 80 characters long, and similar in construction to a file pathname on
computer disk. Creation and maintenance of DSS files is typically performed
by a utility program such as DSSUTL, which is documented separately.

3. Sequential Files

These are ASCII, formatted disk files with a constant logical record length.
Time series received from agencies such as the National Weather Service are
typically stored in sequential files.

4. Internal Scratch Pad (INPAD)

If two or more operations performed in sequence use the same internal time
step, time series may be passed between them via the INPAD. Successive
operations may simply pick up the data written by the previous ones, without
any external (disk) transfer taking place. This is typically done when time
series representing the flow of water (and constituents) are routed from one
stream reach to the one next downstream.

16
 General Principles

2.3 Time Series Management For An Operation

Any operation involves a subset of the activities shown in Fig. 2-2. The operating
module expects a certain set of time series in the INPAD. The operations
supervisor, acting under user control, ensures that the appropriate input time
series are loaded from whichever source has been selected, and informs the
computing module of the rows in the INPAD where it will find its input. Similar
arrangements hold for output of time series.

2.4 HSPF Software Hierarchy

The hierarchy of functions in HSPF is shown in Fig. 2-3. Some explanatory notes
follow.

The "Run Interpreter" is the group of subprograms which reads and interprets the
"Users Control Input." It sets up internal information instructing the system
regarding the sequence of operations to be performed. It stores the initial
conditions and the parameters for each operation in the appropriate file on disk
and creates an instruction file which will ensure that time series are correctly
passed between operations, where necessary.

The "Operations Supervisor" is a subroutine which acts on information provided by

the Run Interpreter, invoking the appropriate "application" or "utility" modules.
It provides them with the correct values for parameters and state variables by
reading the files created by the Run Interpreter.

Operating modules are either "application modules" or "utility modules." They

perform the operations which make up a run. Each time one of those modules is
called, an operation is performed for a period corresponding to the span of the
internal scratch pad (INSPAN). The Operations Supervisor ensures that the correct
module is invoked.

"Service subprograms" perform tasks such as reading from and writing to time series
storage areas, adding T minutes to a given date and time, to get a new date and
time, etc.

The "Time Series Management System" (TSMS) consists of all the modules which are
only concerned with manipulation of time series or the files used to store time
series. It includes the WDM management functions, and TSGET and TSPUT.

17
 General Principles

Figure 2-2 Activities involved in an operation

18
 General Principles

Figure 2-3 Overview of HSPF software

19
 General Principles

3.0 STRUCTURE OF A JOB

3.1 Elements of a Job

A "JOB" is the work performed by HSPF in response to a complete set of Users

Control Input. It consists of one or more "RUNs". A RUN is a set of operations
which can be performed serially, and which all cover the same period of time
(span). The operations are performed in a sequence specified in the Users Control
Input. To avoid having to store large quantities of intermediate data on disk,
operations may be collected in a group in which they share a common INPAD (INGRP).

3.2 Groups Of Operations

In most runs, time series have to be passed between operations. As described in

Section 2.2, each operation can communicate with four different time series storage
areas: the WDM file, DSS file, the INPAD, and sequential files. This is
illustrated in Fig. 3-1.

Potentially, any time series required by or output by any operation can be stored
in the WDM file, DSS, or a sequential file. The user simply specifies the exact
origin or destination for the time series, and the HSPF system moves the data
between that device and the appropriate row of the INPAD. This system can also be
used to transfer data between operations. However, it does require that all
transferred data be written to the WDM file, DSS, or a sequential file. This may
be very cumbersome and/or inefficient and it is better to transfer data via the
INPAD, where possible.

To transfer data via the INPAD, operations must share the same pad. This means that
all time series placed in the pad have the same time interval and span. This
requirement provides a logical basis for grouping operations; those sharing a
common INPAD are called an INGRP (Fig. 3-1). The user specifies the presence of
groups in his "Users Control Input (UCI)." A typical sequence of input is shown in
Fig. 3-2.

The user also indicates (directly or indirectly) in the control input the source
and disposition of all time series required by or output by an operation. If the
user indicates that a time series must be passed to another operation then the
system assumes that the transfer will be made via the scratch pad. If they are not
in the same INGRP there is an error. Without a common INPAD, the data must go via
the WDM file or DSS. The structure of the Users Control Input is documented in
Part F.

20
 General Principles

Figure 3-1 Schematic of data flow and storage for a single run

21
 General Principles

The sequence of events in a run is as follows (refer to Fig.3-1).

a. Operation 1 is performed until its output rows in the INPAD are filled.

b. Data are transferred from those rows to other time series storage areas, as
required. If any of these data are not required by other operations in INGRP1,
their INPAD rows are available for reuse by other operations in INGRP1.

c. Steps (a) and (b) are repeated for each operation in INGRP1.

d. Steps (a), (b), and (c) are repeated, if necessary, until the run span is
complete.

e. The INPAD is reconfigured and work on operations 5 through 11 proceeds as in

steps (a-d) above. The step repeats until all INGRP's have been handled. The
run is now complete.

Note that reconfiguration of a scratch pad implies that its contents will be
overwritten.

OPN SEQUENCE
INGRP INDELT = 00:30
COPY 1
PERLND 1
END INGRP
PERLND 2 INDELT = 00:30
PERLND 3 INDELT = 00:20
INGRP INDELT = 00:30
COPY 2
RCHRES 1
RCHRES 3
RCHRES 5
RCHRES 20
RCHRES 22
RCHRES 23
RCHRES 7
RCHRES 8
RCHRES 50
RCHRES 100
RCHRES 200
END INGRP
INGRP INDELT = 00:10
DURANL 1
PLTGEN 1
END INGRP
END OPN SEQUENCE

Fig. 3-2 Extract from typical Users Control Input,

showing how grouping of operations is specified

22
 General Principles

4.0 CONVENTIONS USED IN FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

The primary purpose of the Functional Description (Part E) is:

1. to describe the functions performed by the various subprograms

2. to explain the technical algorithms and equations which the code implements.

Subprograms are described in numerical order in the text. This system provides a
logical progression for the descriptions. General comments regarding a group of
subprograms can be made when the "top" subprogram is described, while details
specific to an individual subordinate subprogram can be deferred until that part
is described. For example, a general description of the PERLND module (Section
4.2(1)) is followed by more detailed descriptions of its twelve sections, ATEMP
(Section 4.2(1).1) through TRACER (Section 4.2(1).12).

5.0 METHOD OF DOCUMENTING DATA STRUCTURES

5.1 Structure of Data in Memory

The way in which we arrange the variables used in our programs is important. We
structure them, as far as possible, using techniques like those used in Structured
Program Design. We try to group data items that logically belong together.

Most of the variables in an Operating Module are contained in the Operation Status
Vector (OSV). The OSVs for the application modules are shown in the Programmer's
Supplement (Johanson, et al. 1979). The format used to document a data structure
is similar to that used to declare a "structure" in PL/1. We do this because the
technique is logical and convenient, not because of language considerations.

5.2 Structure of Data on Disk Files

The HSPF system makes use of two different types of disk-based data files:

1. Watershed Data Management (WDM) file and HEC Data Storage System (DSS) files
contain time series data input and output.

2. The message/information file (HSPFMSG.WDM), is a read-only, binary file that

contains information used by the program, such as keyword names, input
formats, parameter defaults and limits, and error/warning messages.

23
 General Principles

6.0 METHOD OF HANDLING DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

HSPF makes use of two kinds of diagnostic message; error messages and warnings,
which are printed to the Run Interpreter Output file during both the Run
Interpretation and simulation phases of a run. These messages are all stored on
the "message/information" file: HSPFMSG.WDM. This system for storing the messages
has at least two advantages:

1. Because the messages are not embedded in the Fortran, they do not normally
occupy any memory. This reduces the length of the executable code.

2. The files are easier to maintain than if the messages were embedded in the
code. A user can obtain a listing of the contents by "exporting" data sets
from the message file using the ANNIE program's Archive function.

Each message has been given a "maximum count". If the count for a message reaches
this value, HSPF informs the user of the fact. Then:

1. If it is an error message, HSPF quits.

2. If it is a warning, HSPF continues but suppresses any future printing of this

message.

In addition to the above features, the Run Interpreter has been designed to:

1. Stop if 20 errors of any kind have been detected. This gives the user a fair
number of messages to work on, but avoids producing huge quantities of error
messages, many of which may be spurious (say, if the code could not recover
from early error conditions).

2. Stop at the end of its work if any errors have been detected by it. Thus,
HSPF will not enter any costly time loop if the Run Interpreter has found any
errors in the User's Control Input.

_______________________________________________________________________________

PART C

STANDARDS AND CONVENTIONS

This section has been omitted.

_______________________________________________________________________________

PART D

VISUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

This section has been omitted.

_______________________________________________________________________________

24
 Functional Description

PART E

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

CONTENTS

General Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

1.0 MAIN Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

2.0 Manage the Time Series Store (omitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

3.0 Interpret a RUN Data Set in the User's Control Input

(Module INTERP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

4.0 Supervise and Perform Operations (Module OSUPER) . . . . . . . . 32

4.03 Perform Special Actions (Subroutine SPECL). . . . . . . . . 33
4.1 Get Required Input Time Series (Module TSGET) . . . . . . . 34
4.2 Perform an Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.2(1) Simulate a Pervious Land Segment (Module PERLND). . 37
4.2(1).1 Correct Air Temperature for Elevation
Difference (Section ATEMP) . . . . . . . 39
4.2(1).2 Simulate Accumulation and Melting of
Snow and Ice (Section SNOW) . . . . . . . 40
4.2(1).3 Simulate Water Budget for a Pervious
Land Segment (Section PWATER) . . . . . . 54
4.2(1).4 Simulate Production and Removal of
Sediment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.2(1).5 Estimate Soil Temperatures
(Section PSTEMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.2(1).6 Estimate Water Temperature and Dissolved
Gas Concentrations (Section PWTGAS) . . . 83
4.2(1).7 Simulate Quality Constituents Using
Simple Relationships with Sediment and
Water Yield (Section PQUAL) . . . . . . . 84
4.2(1).8 Estimate Moisture Content of Soil Layers
and Fractional Fluxes (Section MSTLAY) . 92
4.2(1).9 Simulate Pesticide Behavior in Detail
(Section PEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.2(1).10 Simulate Nitrogen Behavior in Detail
(Section NITR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.2(1).11 Simulate Phosphorous Behavior in Detail
(Section PHOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
4.2(1).12 Simulate Movement of a Tracer
(Section TRACER) . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

25
 Functional Description

4.2(2) Simulate an Impervious Land Segment (Module IMPLND) 114

4.2(2).3 Simulate the Water Budget for an Imper-
vious Land Segment (Section IWATER) . . . 114
4.2(2).4 Simulate Accumulation and Removal of
Solids (Section SOLIDS) . . . . . . . . . 119
4.2(2).5 Estimate Water Temperature and Dissolved
Gas Concentrations (Section IWTGAS) . . . 123
4.2(2).6 Simulate Washoff of Quality Constituents
Using Simple Relationships with Solids
and Water Yield (Section IQUAL) . . . . . 124
4.2(3) Simulate a Free-flowing Reach or Mixed Reservoir
(Module RCHRES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.2(3).1 Simulate Hydraulic Behavior (Section HYDR) 132
4.2(3).2 Prepare to Simulate Advection of Fully
Entrained Constituents (Section ADCALC) . 153
4.2(3).3 Simulate Conservative Constituents
(Section CONS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
4.2(3).4 Simulate Heat Exchange and Water
Temperature (Section HTRCH) . . . . . . . 161
4.2(3).5 Simulate Behavior of Inorganic Sediment
(Section SEDTRN). . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4.2(3).6 Simulate the Behavior of a Generalized
Quality Constituent (Section GQUAL) . . . 185
4.2(3).7 Simulate Constituents Involved in
Biochemical Transformations
(Section RQUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
4.2(3).7.1 Simulate Primary DO and BOD
Balances (Subroutine Group OXRX) . . . 209
4.2(3).7.2 Simulate Primary Inorganic
Nitrogen and Phosphorous Balances
(Subroutine Group NUTRX) . . . . . . . 217
4.2(3).7.3 Simulate Plankton Populations
and Associated Reactions
(Subroutine Group PLANK) . . . . . . . 230
4.2(3).7.4 Simulate Ph, Carbon Dioxide,
Total Inorganic Carbon, and Alkalinity
(Subroutine Group PHCARB) . . . . . . 254
4.2(11) Copy Time Series (Utility Module COPY) . . . . . . 260
4.2(12) Prepare Time Series for Display on a Plotter
(Module PLTGEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
4.2(13) Display Time Series in a Convenient Tabular
Format (Utility Module DISPLY). . . . . . . . . . . 263
4.2(14) Perform Duration Analysis on a Time Series
(Utility Module DURANL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
4.2(15) Generate a Time Series from One or Two Other
Time Series (Utility Module GENER). . . . . . . . . 276
4.2(16) Multiple Sequential Input of Time Series from
a HSPF Stand-Alone Plotter File (Utility
Module MUTSIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
4.3 Module TSPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

26
 Functional Description

FIGURES
Number Page

3.0-1 Functions and data transfers involved in the operations

portion of HSPF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.2(1)-1 Structure chart for PERLND Module. . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.2(1).2-1 Snow accumulation and melt processes . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.2(1).2-2 Flow diagram of water movement, storages and phase
changes modeled in the SNOW section of the PERLND and
IMPLND Application Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.2(1).3-1 Hydrologic cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.2(1).3-2 Flow diagram of water movement and storages modeled in
the PWATER section of the PERLND Application Module. . . 57
4.2(1).3-3 Determination of infiltration and interflow inflow . . . 61
4.2(1).3-4 Fraction of the potential direct runoff retained by the
upper zone (FRAC) as a function of the upper zone soil
moisture ratio (UZRAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.2(1).3-5 Fraction of infiltration plus percolation entering
lower zone storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.2(1).3-6 Potential and actual evapotranspiration from the lower
zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.2(1).4-1 Erosion processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.2(1).4-2 Flow diagram for SEDMNT section of PERLND Application
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.2(1).7-1 Flow diagram for PQUAL section of PERLND Application
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.2(1).8-1 Flow diagram of the transport of moisture and solutes,
as estimated in the MSTLAY section of the PERLND
Application Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.2(1).9-1 Flow diagram showing modeled movement of chemicals in
solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.2(1).9-2 Freundlich isotherm calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.2(1).10-1 Flow diagram for nitrogen reactions. . . . . . . . . . . 104
4.2(1).11-1 Flow diagram for phosphorus reactions. . . . . . . . . . 112
4.2(2)-1 Impervious land segment processes. . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4.2(2)-2 Structure chart for IMPLND Module. . . . . . . . . . . . 116
4.2(2).3-1 Hydrologic processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
4.2(2).4-1 Flow diagram of the SOLIDS section of the IMPLND
Application Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4.2(2).6-1 Flow diagram for IQUAL section of IMPLND Application
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.2(3)-1 Flow of materials through a RCHRES . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4.2(3)-2 Structure chart for RCHRES Module. . . . . . . . . . . . 130
4.2(3).1-1 Flow diagram for the HYDR Section of the RCHRES
Application Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.2(3).1-2 Graphical representation of the equations used to compute
outflow rates and volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4.2(3).1-3 Typical RCHRES configurations and the method used to
represent geometric and hydraulic properties . . . . . . 137
4.2(3).1-4 Graphical representation of the work performed by
subroutine ROUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

27
 Functional Description

FIGURES (continued)
Number Page

4.2(3).1-5 Graphical representation of the work performed by

subroutine NOROUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4.2(3).1-6 Illustration of quantities involved in calculation of
depth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
4.2(3).1-7 Flow diagram for water categories in the HYDR Section
of the RCHRES Application Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4.2(3).2-1 Determination of weighting factors for advection
calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
4.2(3).3-1 Flow diagram for conservative constituents in the CONS
section of the RCHRES Application Module . . . . . . . . 157
4.2(3).4-1 Flow diagram for HTRCH section of the RCHRES Application
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.2(3).5-1 Flow diagram of inorganic sediment fractions in the
SEDTRN section of the RCHRES Application Module. . . . . 170
4.2(3).5-2 Toffaleti's Velocity, Concentration, and Sediment
Discharge Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
4.2(3).5-3 Factors in Toffaleti Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
4.2(3).5-4 Colby's Relationship for Discharge of Sands in Terms
of Mean Velocity for Six Median Sizes of Bed Sands,
Four Depths of Flow, and Water Temperature of 60 F . . . 182
4.2(3).5-5 Colby's Correction Factors for Effect of Water
Temperature, Concentration of Fine Sediment, and
Sediment Size to be Applied to Uncorrected
Discharge of Sand Given by Figure 4.2(3).5-4 . . . . . . 183
4.2(3).6-1 Flow diagram for generalized quality constituent in the
GQUAL section of the RCHRES Application Module . . . . . 186
4.2(3).6-2 Simplified flow diagram for important fluxes and
storages of sediment and associated qual used in
subroutine ADVQAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.2(3).7.1-1 Flow diagram for dissolved oxygen in the OXRX subroutine
group of the RCHRES Application Module . . . . . . . . . 210
4.2(3).7.1-2 Flow diagram for biochemical oxygen demand in the OXRX
subroutine group of the RCHRES Application Module. . . . 210
4.2(3).7.2-1 Flow diagram for inorganic nitrogen in the NUTRX
subroutine group of the RCHRES Application Module. . . . 218
4.2(3).7.2-2 Flow diagram for ortho-phosphate in the NUTRX group of
the RCHRES Application Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.2(3).7.3-1 Flow diagram for phytoplankton in the PLANK section of
the RCHRES Application Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.2(3).7.3-2 Flow diagram for dead refractory organics in the PLANK
section of the RCHRES Application Module . . . . . . . . 231
4.2(3).7.3-3 Flow diagram for zooplankton in the PLANK section of the
RCHRES Application Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.2(3).7.3-4 Flow diagram for benthic algae in the PLANK section of
the RCHRES Application Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.2(3).7.3-5 Relationship of parameters for special advection of
plankton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
4.2(3).7.3-6 Zooplankton assimilation efficiency. . . . . . . . . . . 246

28
 Functional Description

FIGURES (continued)
Number Page

4.2(3).7.4-1 Flow diagram of inorganic carbon in the PHCARB group

of the RCHRES Application Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
4.2(12)-1 Sample PLOTFL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
4.2(13)-1 Sample Short-Span Display (First Type) . . . . . . . . . 265
4.2(13)-2 Sample Short-Span Display (Second Type). . . . . . . . . 266
4.2(13)-3 Sample Long-Span (Annual) Display. . . . . . . . . . . . 267
4.2(14)-1 Definition of Terms Used in Duration Analysis Module . . 269
4.2(14)-2 Sample Duration Analysis Printout. . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4.2(14)-3 Sample Lethal Concentration (LC) Function for
Global Exceedance Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

29
 Functional Description

GENERAL COMMENTS

For a discussion on how this part of the documentation is organized, refer to

Section 4 in Part B "General Principles".

1.0 MAIN Program

The MAIN program calls, directly or indirectly, all the other modules in the
system. The functions performed are:

1. Preprocess the Users Control Input (UCI). Subroutine USRRDR transfers the UCI
to memory, sets up a pointer system to non-comment lines, and recognizes input
set headings and delimiters: RUN, END RUN.

2. If a RUN input set has been found, call subroutine INTERP to interpret it and
then call OSUPER to supervise execution of it.

2.0 Manage the Time Series Store (Omitted)

3.0 Interpret a RUN Data Set in the User's Control Input (Module INTERP)

General Description of Module INTERP

This module, known as the Run Interpreter, translates a RUN data set in the User's
Control Input (documented in Section 4 of Part F) into many elementary
instructions, for later use by other parts of the system, when the time series are
operated on. To do this, the Run Interpreter performs such tasks as:

1. Check and augment the data supplied by the user.

2. Decide which time series will be required and produced by each operation,
based on the user's data and built-in tables which contain information on the
various operations.

3. Allocate INPAD rows to the various time series.

4. Read the control data, parameters, and initial conditions supplied for each
operation, convert them to internal units, and supply default values where
required.

The output of the Run Interpreter is stored in memory arrays containing

instructions to be read by the Operations Supervisor, TSGET and TSPUT (Figure
3.0-1). The instruction arrays contain the following information:

30
 Run Interpreter

Figure 3.0-1 Functions and data transfers involved in the operations portion
of HSPF

31
 Run Interpreter

1. The Operations Supervisor Instructions Array. This array contains

instructions which the Operations Supervisor reads to manage the operations
in a run. This includes information on:

a) the configuration of the scratch pads (time intervals and widths)

b) the configuration of the INGROUPs, such as the number of INGROUPs,

operations in each INGROUP, etc.

2. The Operation Status Vector Array. The operations in a run are interrupted
every time an INPAD span is completed (Part B, Section 3.2). To save computer
memory, the system is designed so that the various operations all use the same
area of memory. This requires that upon interruption of an operation, all
information necessary to restart an operation be stored in a disk file or
another memory area. The data, called the "Operation Status Vector" (OSV),
reside in a string of contiguous locations in memory and have a structure
specified in the Programmer's Supplement (Johanson, et al., 1979). The array
OSVMEM contains an exact copy of the OSV for each operation. It is used to
restore the OSV in the common memory area when the operation is resumed after
interruption.

3. The Input Time Series Instruction Array (TSGETM) and the Output Time Series
Instruction Array (TSPUTM). These arrays contain instructions which govern the
transfer of pieces of time series into and out of the INPAD, respectively.
Each instruction enables module TSGET to retrieve a specified piece of time
series from one of the source volumes (Figure 3.0-1), transform it to the
interval and form required for the INPAD, and insert it in the desired row of
the INPAD. In the case of TSPUTM, the sequence is the reverse of that just
described.

Each operation has its own set of instructions in TSGETM and TSPUTM which are
read whenever modules TSGET and TSPUT are called upon to service that
operation (every INSPAN).

4. The Special Action Instruction Array (SPACM). Each record of this array
contains a single special action instruction, which specifies the action
required to be taken in a given operation at a specific time, e.g., report
operation state, modify a state variable.

4.0 Supervise and Perform Operations (module OSUPER)

Function of Operations Group

The Operations group of modules handles all the manipulations of time series and
thus, performs most of the work in a run. Subroutine OSUPER controls the group.
It performs some of the tasks itself, but it invokes subordinate modules to
do other tasks.

32
 Operations Group

General Description of Subroutine OSUPER

The primary tasks of subroutine OSUPER are to ensure that the various operations
in the run are called in the correct sequence and that the associated time series
and OSVs are input and/or output at the required junctures (see Part B, Section
3.2). OSUPER uses a nest of DO-loops to control the sequencing. The instruction
array OSUPM specifies the ranges of the loops and supplies information ("keys")
which enable OSUPER, TSGET and TSPUT to correctly access the other instruction
arrays. OSUPER reads an instruction each time an operation starts a new INSPAN.
Using this information, it then:

1. calls TSGET, to supply the required input time series

2. reads the OSV from disk or memory storage

3. calls the operating module

When the INSPAN is over, OSUPER:

1. writes the OSV to disk or memory storage

2. calls TSPUT, to output time series

4.03 Perform Special Actions (Subroutine SPECL)

HSPF permits the user to perform certain "Special Actions" during the course of a
run. A special action instruction specifies the following:

1. The operation on which the action is to be performed (e.g., PERLND 10)

2. The date/time at which the action is to be taken.

3. The variable name and element (if the variable is an array) or the type and
location within COMMON block SCRTCH of the data item to be updated.

4. The action to be performed. Two choices are available:

a) Reset the variable to a specified value

b) Increment the variable by a specified value

The special action facility is used to accommodate things such as:

1. Human intervention in a watershed. Events such as plowing, cultivation,

fertilizer and pesticide application, and harvesting are simulated in this
way.

33
 Operations Group

2. Changes to parameters. For example, a user may wish to alter the value of a
parameter for which 12 monthly values cannot be supplied. This can be done
by specifying a special action for that variable. The parameter could be
reset to its original value by specifying another special action, to be taken
at a later time.

Special Actions can be performed on variables in the PERLND, IMPLND, RCHRES, COPY,
PLTGEN, and GENER modules. The input is documented in Section 4.10 of Part F.

4.1 Get Required Input Time Series (module TSGET)

The task of this module is to insert in the INPAD all input time series required
by an operation. OSUPER calls it each time an operation is to commence an INSPAN,
passing to it the keys of the first and last records in the TSGET instruction array
which must be read and acted upon. Each instruction causes a row of the INPAD to
be filled. TSGET can draw its input time series from any of the following source
"volumes": WDM file, DSS file, sequential file and INPAD (Figure 3.0-1).

TSGET will, if necessary, automatically transform the time interval and "kind"
(Appendix V) of the time series, as it is transferred from the source location to
the INPAD (target). TSGET can also perform a linear transformation on the values
in a time series; for example, if the source contains temperatures in degrees C and
the INPAD needs them in degrees F.

4.2 Perform an Operation

Function of an Operating Module

An operating module is at the center of every operation (Part B, Section 2.1).

When the Operations Supervisor calls an operating module the time series which it
requires are already in the INPAD. The task of the operating module is to operate
on these input time series. The results of this work are:

1. updated state variables. The operating module constantly updates any state
variables. These are located in the OSV. Thus, when the operating module
returns control to the Operations Supervisor, which copies the OSV to disk or
memory storage area, the latest values of all state variables are
automatically preserved.

2. printed output. The operating module accumulates values, formats them and
routes these data to the line printer.

3. output time series. The operating module places these in the INPAD, but is not
concerned with their ultimate disposition; this is handled by module TSPUT.

34
 Operations Group

Note that all time series simultaneously present in an INPAD have the same constant
time interval. This implies that, internally, all time series involved in an
operation have the same time interval. Externally, the time series may have
differing time intervals. Part of the function of modules TSGET and TSPUT is to
convert time series from external to internal time intervals and vice versa.

Sub-divisions in an Operating Module

An operating module may be divided into several distinct sections, each of which
may be selectively activated in a given run, under the user's control, e.g., the
Pervious Land-segment module (PERLND) contains twelve sections, the first being air
temperature correction, and the last is tracer (conservative substance) simulation.
The operating procedure is as follows: in each time interval of the INSPAN, the
operating module calls each of its active sections in the order in which they are
built into the code (the sequence can not be altered by the user). When the INSPAN
has been covered, the operating module returns control to OSUPER which determines
the next action to be taken. This procedure implies that an operating module must
be arranged so that a section is called after any others from which it requires
information. For example, in the Pervious Land-segment module, the sediment
calculation section may use data computed by the snow and water balance sections,
but not by sections listed after sediment. This kind of information flow is called
an inter-section data transfer (ISDT).

Partitioning of an Operation

A user may activate one group of module sections in an initial run and other groups
in subsequent runs. Thus, it is possible to "partition" an operation. For
example, it is possible to calibrate the hydraulic response of a set of river
reaches before moving on to simulate the behavior of constituents contained in the
water. If this type of work involves ISDT's between the sections handled in
different runs, it follows that:

1. The time series involved in the ISDT's must be stored between runs, probably
in the WDM file.

2. In the second run the system will expect the user to specify external sources
for all of these time series.

Some users will be confused by the rules for partitioning operations, but our
experience indicates this will be outweighed by the flexibility which it brings.

35
 Operations Group

Numbering of Operating Modules

In principle, there is no limit to the number of operating modules which the system
can accommodate. Ultimately, we expect a large number of modules ranging from very
simple utility modules (e.g., COPY) to very complex simulation algorithms (e.g.,
PERLND). Although the size and complexity of the modules vary greatly, they all
are, logically, of equal rank (Figure 2-3, Part B). The adopted numbering system
reflects this. Every operating module is identified by the number 4.2 and is
distinguished from the others only by a subscript. For example, the Pervious
Land-segment Module is 4.2(1) and the Reach/Mixed Reservoir Module 4.2(3).

Inserting Additional Operating Modules

A programmer may insert additional modules. This requires the following tasks:

1. Write or adapt the operating module. This includes restructuring the data
into an OSV which conforms with the requirements of the HSPF system.

2. Add a section of code to the Run Interpreter to interpret the UCI for the new
module.

3. Add data to the message/information file (HSPFMSG.WDM).

4. Make minor changes to subroutines OPNBLK and OSUPER.

Types of Operating Modules

There are two types of operating modules; utility modules and application modules.
Utility modules perform any operations involving time series which are essentially
auxiliary to application operations, e.g., input time series data from ASCII
formatted files to the WDM file using COPY, multiply two time series together to
obtain a third one, plot several time series on the same graph. Application
(simulation) modules represent processes, or groups of processes, which occur in
the real world.

36
 Module PERLND

4.2(1) Simulate a Pervious Land Segment (Module PERLND)

A land segment is a subdivision of the simulated watershed. The boundaries are

established according to the user's needs, but generally, a segment is defined as
an area with similar hydrologic characteristics. For modeling purposes, water,
sediment, and water quality constituents leaving the watershed move laterally to
a downslope segment or to a reach/reservoir. A segment of land which has the
capacity to allow enough infiltration to influence the water budget is considered
pervious. In HSPF, PERLND is the module that simulates the water quality and
quantity processes which occur on a pervious land segment.

The primary module sections in PERLND simulate snow accumulation and melt (Section
SNOW), the water budget (section PWATER), sediment produced by land surface erosion
(section SEDMNT), and water quality constituents by various methods (section PQUAL
and the agri-chemical sections). Other sections perform the auxiliary functions
of correcting air temperature (section ATEMP) for use in snowmelt and soil
temperature calculations, producing soil temperatures (section PSTEMP) for
estimating the outflow temperatures and influencing reaction rates in the
agri-chemical sections, and determining outflow temperatures which influence the
solubility of oxygen and carbon dioxide. The structure chart for the PERLND module
(Figure 4.2(1)-1) shows these sections and their relationships to each other and
to PPTOT, PBAROT, and PPRINT. These last three sections manipulate the data
produced. Section PPTOT places state variables (point values) and PBAROT places
flux variables which are actually averages over the interval (mean values) into the
INPAD. PPRINT produces the printable results in the quantity and frequency that
the user specifies. The sections in the structure chart are executed from left to
right.

37
 Module PERLND

Figure 4.2(1)-1 Structure chart for PERLND Module

38
 Module Section ATEMP

4.2(1).1 Correct Air Temperature for Elevation Difference

(Section ATEMP of Modules PERLND and IMPLND)

Purpose

The purpose of ATEMP is to modify the input air temperature to represent the mean
air temperature over the land segment. This module section is used by both PERLND
and IMPLND. Air temperature correction is needed when the elevation of the land
segment is significantly different than the elevation at the temperature gage. If
no correction for elevation is needed, this module section can be skipped.

Method

The lapse rate for air temperature is dependent upon precipitation during the time
interval. If precipitation occurs, a wet lapse rate of 0.0035 degrees F per foot
difference in elevation is assumed. Otherwise, a dry lapse rate, that varies with
the time of day, is used. A table of 24 hourly dry lapse rates varying between
0.0035 to 0.005 is built into the system. A different, user-defined lapse rate may
be implemented by modifying the HSPF message/information file (HSPFMSG.WDM). The
corrected air temperature is:

AIRTMP = GATMP - LAPS*ELDAT (1)

where:
AIRTMP = corrected air temperature (degrees F)
GATMP = air temperature at gage (degrees F)
LAPS = lapse rate (degrees F/ft)
ELDAT = elevation difference between the land segment and the
gage (ft)

39
 Module Section SNOW

4.2(1).2 Simulate Accumulation and Melting of Snow and Ice

(section SNOW of modules PERLND and IMPLND)

Purpose

SNOW deals with the runoff derived from the fall, accumulation, and melt of snow.
This is a necessary part of any complete hydrologic package since much of the
runoff, especially in the northern half of the United States, is derived from snow
conditions.

Approach

Figure 4.2(1).2-1 illustrates the processes involved in snow accumulation and melt
on a land segment. The algorithms used are based on the work by the Corps of
Engineers (1956), Anderson and Crawford (1964), and Anderson (1968). Empirical
relationships are employed when physical ones are not well known. The snow
algorithms use meteorologic data to determine whether precipitation is rain or
snow, to simulate an energy balance for the snowpack, and to determine the effect
of the heat fluxes on the snowpack.

Five meteorologic time series are required by SNOW for each land segment simulated.
They are:

precipitation
air temperature
solar radiation
dewpoint
wind velocity

A value from each of these time series is input to SNOW at the start of each
simulation interval. However, some of the meteorological time series are only used
intermittently for calculating rates, such as in the calculation of the potential
rate of evaporation from the snowpack.

Air temperature is used to determine when snow is falling. Once snow begins to
accumulate on the ground, the snowpack accumulation and melt calculations take
place. Five sources of heat which influence the melting of the snowpack are
simulated:

1. net radiation heat (RADHT), both longwave and shortwave

2. convection of sensible heat from the air (CONVHT)
3. latent heat transfer by condensation of moist air on the snowpack (CONDHT)
4. heat from rain, sensible heat from rain falling (RNSHT) and latent heat from
rain freezing on the snowpack
5. conduction of heat from the underlying ground to the snowpack (GMELTR)

Other heat exchange processes such as latent heat from evaporation are considered
less significant and are not simulated.

40
 Module Section SNOW

Figure 4.2(1).2-1 Snow accumulation and melt proceses

41
 Module Section SNOW

The energy calculations for RADHT, CONVHT, and CONDHT are performed by subroutine
HEXCHR while GMELTR is calculated in subroutine GMELT. Latent heat from rain
freezing is considered in subroutine WARMUP. RNSHT is computed in the parent
subroutine SNOW. For uniformity and accounting, energy values are calculated in
terms of the water equivalent which they could melt. It takes 202.4 calories per
square cm on the surface to melt one inch water equivalent of snow at 32 degrees
F. All the sources of heat including RNSHT are considered to be positive (incoming
to the pack) or zero, except RADHT which can also be negative (leaving the pack).

Net incoming heat from the atmosphere (the sum of RADHT, CONVHT, CONDHT, and RNSHT)
is used to warm the snowpack. The snowpack can be further warmed by the latent
heat released upon rain freezing. Any excess heat above that required to warm the
snowpack to 32 degrees F is used to melt the pack. Likewise, net loss of heat is
used to cool the snowpack producing a negative heat storage. Furthermore, incoming
heat from the ground melts the snowpack from the bottom independent of the
atmospheric heat sources except that the rate depends on the temperature of the
snowpack.

Figure 4.2(1).2.2 gives a schematic view of the moisture related processes modeled
in section SNOW. Precipitation may fall as rain or snow on the snowpack or the
ground. Evaporation only occurs from the frozen portion of the pack (PACKF). The
frozen portion of the pack is composed of snow and ice. The ice portion of PACKF
is considered to be in the lower part of the snowpack, so it is the first to melt
when heat is conducted from the ground. Similarly, the snow portion of PACKF is
the first to melt when atmospheric heat increases. Melted PACKF and rain falling
on the snowpack produce the water portion of the total snowpack which may overflow
the capacity of the pack. The water yield and rain on the bare ground becomes
input to module section PWATER or IWATER. These moisture related processes as well
as the heat exchange processes are discussed later in more detail.

Heat transfer from incoming rain (RNSHT) to the snowpack is calculated in the
parent subroutine SNOW (Section 4.2(1).2). The following physically based equation
is used:

RNSHT = (AIRTMP - 32.0)*RAINF/144.0 (2)

where:
AIRTMP = temperature of the air (degrees F)
RAINF = rainfall (inches)
144.0 = factor to convert to equivalent depth of melt
32.0 = freezing point (degrees F)

Other characteristics of the snowpack are also determined in the main subroutine
SNOW. The fraction of the land segment covered by the snowpack is estimated by
merely dividing the depth of the snowpack by a cover index (COVINX) which is a
function of the parameter COVIND and the history of the pack as explained in
subroutine EFFPRC. The temperature of the snowpack is estimated by:

PAKTMP = 32.0 - NEGHTS/(0.00695*PACKF) (3)

42
 Module Section SNOW

Figure 4.2(1).2-2 Flow diagram of water movement, storages, and phase changes
modeled in the SNOW section of the PERLND and IMPLND
Application Modules

43
 Module Section SNOW

where:
PAKTMP = mean temperature of the snowpack (degrees F)
NEGHTS = negative heat storage (inches of water equivalent)
PACKF = frozen contents of the snowpack (inches of water equivalent)
0.00695 = physically based conversion factor

4.2(1).2.1 Estimate Meteorological Conditions (subroutine METEOR)

Purpose

Subroutine METEOR estimates the effects of certain meteorological conditions on

specific snow-related processes by the use of empirical equations. It determines
whether precipitation is falling as snow or rain. The form of precipitation is
critical to the reliable simulation of runoff and snowmelt. When snow is falling,
the density is calculated in order to estimate the depth of the new snowpack. The
fraction of the sky which is clear is also estimated for use in the radiation
algorithms, and the gage dewpoint temperature is corrected if it is warmer than air
temperature.

Method

The following expression is used to calculate hourly the effective air temperature
below which snowfall occurs:

SNOTMP = TSNOW + (AIRTMP - DEWTMP)*(0.12 + 0.008*AIRTMP) (4)

where:
SNOTMP = air temperature below which snowfall occurs (degrees F)
TSNOW = parameter (degrees F)
AIRTMP = air temperature (degrees F)
DEWTMP = dewpoint (degrees F)

SNOTMP is allowed to vary in this calculation by a maximum of one degree F from

TSNOW. When AIRTMP is equal to or greater than SNOTMP, precipitation is assumed
to be rain.

When snowfall occurs, its density is estimated as a function of air temperature

according to:

RDNSN = RDCSN + (AIRTMP/100.0)**2 (5)

where:
RDNSN = density of new snowfall (at zero degrees F or greater)
relative to liquid water
RDCSN = parameter designating density of new snow at an air temperature
of zero degrees F and lower, relative to liquid water

44
 Module Section SNOW

RDNSN is used in subroutine EFFPRC to calculate the new depth of the snowpack
resulting from the addition of the snow. This and all other snow density terms are
in water equivalent (inches) per depth of the snowpack (inches).

The fraction of the sky which is clear (SKYCLR) is needed for the calculation of
the longwave back radiation to the snowpack from the clouds (done in subroutine
HEXCHR). SKYCLR is set to the minimum value of 0.15 when precipitation occurs.
Otherwise, it is increased each simulation time interval as follows:

SKYCLR = SKYCLR + (0.0004*DELT) (6)

where:
DELT = simulation time interval (min)

SKYCLR increases until either it reaches unity or precipitation causes it to be

reset.

A gage dewpoint higher than air temperature is not physically possible and will
give erroneous results in the calculation of snowpack evaporation. Therefore,
dewpoint is set equal to the air temperature when this situation occurs.
Otherwise, the gage dewpoint is used.

4.2(1).2.2 Determine the Effect of Precipitation on the Pack

(subroutine EFFPRC)

Purpose

The purpose of this subroutine is to add the falling snow to the pack, determine
the amount of rain falling on the snowpack, and adjust the snowpack dullness to
take into account new snow.

Method

The amount of precipitation falling as snow or rain is determined in subroutine

METEOR. Subroutine EFFPRC accounts for the influence that snowfall and rain have
on the land segment. The subroutine begins by increasing the snowpack depth by the
amount of snow falling on the pack divided by its density.

The fraction of the land segment which is a covered by the snowpack (SNOCOV) is
determined by re-evaluating the index to areal coverage (COVINX). When the frozen
contents of the pack (PACKF) exceeds the value of the parameter describing the
maximum PACKF required to insure complete areal coverage by snow cover (COVIND),
then COVINX is set equal to COVIND. Otherwise, COVINX is equal to the largest
previous value of PACKF. SNOCOV is PACKF/COVINX if PACKF < COVINX. The amount of
rain falling on the snowpack is that fraction of the precipitation which falls as
rain multiplied by the SNOCOV. Rain falling on the snowpack will either freeze,
adding to the frozen portion of the pack and produce heat used to warm the pack
(see subroutine WARMUP), or it will increase the liquid water content of the pack
(see subroutine LIQUID). Any rain not falling on the pack is assumed to land on
bare ground.

45
 Module Section SNOW

When snowfall occurs, the index to the dullness of the snowpack (DULL) is decreased
by one thousand times the snowfall for that interval. However, if one thousand
times the snowfall is greater than the previous value for DULL, then DULL is set
to zero to account for a new layer of perfectly reflectable snow. Otherwise, when
snowfall does not occur, DULL is increased by one index unit per hour up to a
maximum of 800. Since DULL is an empirical term used as an index, it has no
physical units. DULL is used to determine the albedo of the snowpack, which in
turn is used in the shortwave energy calculations in subroutine HEXCHR.

4.2(1).2.3 Compact the Pack (subroutine COMPAC)

Purpose

The addition of new snow will reduce the density as well as increase the depth of
the snowpack as in subroutine EFFPRC. The pack will tend to compact with age until
a maximum density is reached. The purpose of subroutine COMPAC is to determine the
rate of compaction and calculate the actual change in the depth due to compaction.

Method

When the relative density is less than 55 percent, compaction is assumed to occur.
The rate of compaction is computed according to the empirical expression:

COMPCT = 1.0 - (0.00002*DELT60*PDEPTH*(0.55 - RDENPF)) (7)

where:
COMPCT = unit rate of compaction of the snowpack per interval
DELT60 = number of hours in an interval
PDEPTH = depth of the snowpack in inches of total snowpack
RDENPF = density of the pack relative to liquid water

The new value for PDEPTH is COMPCT times PDEPTH. PDEPTH is used to calculate the
relative density of the snowpack which affects the liquid water holding capacity
as determined in subroutine LIQUID.

4.2(1).2.4 Simulate Evaporation from the Pack (subroutine SNOWEV)

Purpose

The SNOWEV subroutine estimates evaporation from the snowpack (sublimation).

Method

Evaporation from the snowpack will occur only when the vapor pressure of the air
is less than that of the snow surface, that is, only when the air vapor pressure
is less than 6.108 mbar, which is the maximum vapor pressure that the thin surface
film of air over the snowpack can attain. When this condition is met the
evaporation is computed by the empirical relationship:

46
 Module Section SNOW

SNOWEP = SNOEVP*0.0002*WINMOV*(SATVAP - VAP)*SNOCOV (8)

where:
SNOWEP = potential rate of evaporation from the frozen part of the
snowpack (inches of water equivalent/interval)
SNOEVP = parameter used to adjust the calculation to field conditions
WINMOV = wind movement (miles/interval)
SATVAP = saturated vapor pressure of the air at the current air
temperature (mbar)
VAP = vapor pressure of the air at the current air temp (mbar)
SNOCOV = fraction of the land segment covered by the snowpack

The potential (SNOWEP) will be fulfilled if there is sufficient snowpack.

Otherwise, only the remaining pack will evaporate. For either case, evaporation
occurs only from the frozen content of the snowpack (PACKF).

4.2(1).2.5 Estimate Heat Exchange Rates (except ground melt and rain heat)
(subroutine HEXCHR)

Purpose

The purpose of this subroutine is to estimate the heat exchange from the atmosphere
due to condensation, convection, and radiation. All heat exchanges are calculated
in terms of equivalent depth of melted or frozen water.

Method of Determining Heat Supplied by Condensation

Transfer of latent heat of condensation can be important when warm moist air masses
travel over the snowpack. Condensation occurs when the air is moist enough to
condense on the snowpack. That is, when the vapor pressure of the air is greater
than 6.108 mbar. This physical process is the opposite of snow evaporation; the
heat produced by it is calculated by another empirical relationship:

CONDHT = 8.59*(VAP - 6.108)*CCFACT*0.00026*WINMOV (9)

where:
CONDHT = condensation heat flux to the snowpack (inches of water
equivalent/interval)
VAP = vapor pressure of the air at the current air temp (mbar)
CCFACT = parameter used to correct melt values to field conditions
WINMOV = wind movement (miles/interval)

CONDHT can only be positive or zero, that is, incoming to the pack.

47
 Module Section SNOW

Method of Determining Heat Supplied by Convection

Heat supplied by turbulent exchange with the atmosphere can occur only when air
temperatures are greater than freezing. This convection of heat is calculated by
the empirical expression:

CONVHT = (AIRTMP - 32.0)*(1.0 - 0.3*MELEV/10000.0)* (10)

CCFACT*0.00026*WINMOV

where:
CONVHT = convective heat flux to the snowpack (inches of water
equivalent/interval)
AIRTMP = air temperature (degrees F)
MELEV = mean elevation of the land segment above sea level (ft)

In the simulation, CONVHT also can only be positive or zero, that is, only
incoming.

Method of Determining Heat Supplied by Radiation

Heat supplied by radiation is determined by:

RADHT = (SHORT + LONG)/203.2 (11)

where:
RADHT = radiation heat flux to the snowpack (inches of
water equivalent/interval)
SHORT = net solar or shortwave radiation (langleys/interval)
LONG = net terrestrial or longwave radiation (langleys/interval)

The constant 203.2 is the number of langleys required to produce one inch of melt
from snow at 32 degrees F. RADHT can be either positive or negative, that is,
incoming or outgoing.

SHORT and LONG are calculated as follows. Solar radiation, a required time series,
is modified by the albedo and the effect of shading. The albedo or reflectivity
of the snowpack is a function of the dullness of the pack (see subroutine EFFPRC
for a discussion of DULL) and the season. The equation for calculating albedo
(ALBEDO) for the 6 summer months is:

ALBEDO = 0.80 - 0.10*(DULL/24.0)**0.5 (12)

The corresponding equation for the winter months is:

ALBEDO = 0.85 - 0.07*(DULL/24.0)**0.5 (13)

ALBEDO is allowed a minimum value of 0.45 for summer and 0.60 for winter. The
hemispheric location of the land segment is taken into account for determining
summer and winter in using the above equation. This is done through the use of the
latitude parameter which is positive for the northern hemisphere.

48
 Module Section SNOW

Once the albedo of the pack is found then solar radiation (SHORT) is modified
according to the equation:

SHORT = SOLRAD*(1.0 - ALBEDO)*(1.0 - SHADE) (14)

where:
SOLRAD = solar radiation (langleys/interval)
SHADE = parameter indicating the fraction of the land segment which
is shaded

Unlike shortwave radiation which is more commonly measured, longwave radiation

(LONG) is estimated from theoretical consideration of the emitting properties of
the snowpack and its environment. The following equations are based on Stefan's
law of black body radiation and are linear approximations of curves in Plate 5-3,
Figure 6 in Snow Hydrology (Corps of Engineers, 1956). They vary only by the
constants which depend on air temperature. For air temperatures above freezing:

LONG = SHADE*0.26*RELTMP + (1.0 - SHADE)*(0.2*RELTMP - 6.6) (15)

And for air temperatures at freezing and below:

LONG = SHADE*0.20*RELTMP + (1.0 - SHADE)*(0.17*RELTMP - 6.6) (16)

where:
RELTMP = air temperature minus 32 (degrees F)
6.6 = average back radiation lost from the snowpack in open areas
(langleys/hr)

Since the constants in these equations were originally based on hourly time steps,
both calculated values are multiplied by DELT60, the number of hours per interval,
so that they correspond to the simulation interval. In addition, LONG is
multiplied by the fraction of clear sky (SKYCLR) when it is negative, to account
for back radiation from clouds.

4.2(1).2.6 Simulate Loss of Heat from Pack (subroutine COOLER)

Purpose

The purpose of this code is to cool the snowpack whenever it is warmer than the
ambient air and thus loses heat. This is accomplished by accumulating negative
heat storage which increases the capacity of the pack to later absorb heat without
melting as simulated in subroutine WARMUP.

49
 Module Section SNOW

Method

In every interval where there is heat loss to the atmosphere and the temperature
of the snowpack is greater than the air temperature, the negative heat storage will
increase; that is, the pack will cool. However, there is a maximum negative heat
storage. The maximum negative heat storage that can exist at any time is found by
assuming a linear temperature distribution from the air temperature which is
considered to be above the pack to 32 degrees at the bottom of the snowpack. This
maximum negative heat storage is calculated hourly as follows:

MNEGHS = 0.00695*(PACKF/2.0)*(-RELTMP) (17)

where:
MNEGHS = maximum negative heat storage (inches of water equivalent)
PACKF = water equivalent of the frozen contents of the snowpack (inches)
RELTMP = air temperature above freezing (degrees F)

The accumulation of the negative heat storage is calculated hourly from the
following empirical relationship:

NEGHT = 0.0007*(PAKTMP - AIRTMP)*DELT60 (18)

where:
NEGHT = potential rate of cooling of the snowpack (inches of water
equivalent per interval)
PAKTMP = mean temperature of the snowpack (degrees F)
AIRTMP = air temperature (degrees F)
DELT60 = number of hours per interval

NEGHT is added to the negative heat storage (NEGHTS) every interval except when
limited by MNEGHS. NEGHTS is used in the parent subroutine SNOW to calculate the
temperature of the snowpack and in subroutine WARMUP to determine the extent that
the pack must be warmed to reach 32 degrees F.

4.2(1).2.7 Warm the Snowpack if Possible (subroutine WARMUP)

Purpose

This subroutine warms the snowpack to as much as 32 degrees F when possible.

Method

When there is negative heat storage in the pack (see subroutine COOLER for a
discussion of NEGHTS), and there is net incoming energy as calculated in previous
subroutines, then NEGHTS will decrease resulting in a warmer snowpack and possible
melt.

50
 Module Section SNOW

The calculations in this subroutine are merely accounting. They decrease NEGHTS
to a minimum of zero by subtracting the net incoming heat. If any negative heat
storage remains, then the latent heat released by the freezing of any incoming rain
is added to the pack. Since NEGHTS and all other heat variables are in units of
inches of melt, the inches of rain falling on the pack and freezing is subtracted
from NEGHTS without any conversion.

4.2(1).2.8 Melt the Pack Using Any Remaining Heat (subroutine MELTER)

Purpose

MELTER simulates the actual melting of the pack with whatever incoming heat
remains. Any heat which was not used to heat the snowpack in subroutine WARMUP can
now be used to melt the snowpack.

Method

This subroutine is also merely an accounting subroutine. The net incoming heat has
already been calculated in terms of water equivalents of melt. Hence, any
remaining incoming heat is used directly to melt the snowpack either partially or
entirely depending on the size of the snowpack.

4.2(1).2.9 Handle Liquid Water in the Pack (subroutine LIQUID)

Purpose

Subroutine LIQUID first determines the liquid storage capacity of the snowpack.
It then determines how much liquid water is available to fill the storage capacity.
Any liquid water above the capacity will leave the snowpack unless it freezes (see
subroutine ICING).

Method

The liquid water holding capacity of the snowpack can be at the maximum as
specified by the parameter MWATER, at zero, or somewhere in between depending on
the density of the pack: the less dense the snowpack the greater the holding
capacity. The following relationships define the capacity:

for RDENPF > 0.91,

PACKWC = 0.0 (19)

for 0.6 < RDENPF < 0.91,

PACKWC = MWATER*(3.0 - 3.33*RDENPF) (20)

51
 Module Section SNOW

for RDENPF < 0.61,

PACKWC = MWATER (21)

where:
PACKWC = liquid water holding capacity of the snowpack (in/in)
MWATER = parameter specifying the maximum liquid water content of
the snowpack (in/in)
RDENPF = density of the snowpack relative to liquid water

MWATER is a function of the mass of ice layers, the size, the shape, and spacing
of snow crystals and the degree of channelization and honeycombing of the snowpack.

Once PACKWC is calculated, it is compared to the available liquid water in the pack
PWSUPY. PWSUPY is calculated by summing any storage remaining at the start of the
interval, any melt, and any rain that fell on the pack which did not freeze. If
PWSUPY is more than PACKWC, then water is yielded to the land surface from the
snowpack.

4.2(1).2.10 Simulate Occurrence of Ice in the Pack (subroutine ICING)

Purpose

The purpose of subroutine ICING is to simulate the possible freezing of water which
would otherwise leave the snowpack. This freezing in turn produces ice or frozen
ground at the bottom of the snowpack. In this subroutine, the ice can be
considered to be at the bottom of the pack or frozen in the ground below the snow
portion of the pack thus extending the total pack into the soil. This subroutine
may only be applicable in certain areas; therefore, it is optional.

Method

The freezing of the water yield of the snowpack depends on the capacity of the
environment to freeze it. Every day at approximately 6 a.m. the capacity is
reassessed. A new value is estimated in terms of inches of melt by multiplying the
Fahrenheit degrees of the air temperature below 32.0 by 0.01. This estimate is
compared with the freezing capacity if any which remains from the previous 24-hr
period. If it is greater, then the new estimated capacity replaces the old, else
the old value remains as the potential. Any water yield that occurs freezes and
is added to the ice portion of the snowpack until the capacity is met. Any
subsequent water yield is released from the snowpack.

52
 Module Section SNOW

4.2(1).2.11 Melt the Pack Using Heat from the Ground

(subroutine GMELT)

Purpose

The purpose of the GMELT subroutine is to simulate the melt caused by heat
conducted from the surface underlying the snowpack. This ground heat melts the pack
only from below. Therefore, melt from this process is considered independent of
other previously calculated heat influences except for an indirect effect via the
temperature of the snowpack. Unlike the other melt processes, ground heat melts the
ice portion of the snowpack first since ice is considered to be located at the
lower depths of the pack.

Method

The potential rate of ground melt is calculated hourly as a function of snowpack

temperature (PAKTMP) and a lumped parameter (MGMELT). MGMELT is the maximum rate
of melt in water equivalent caused by heat from the ground at a PAKTMP of 32
degrees F. MGMELT would depend upon the thermal conductivity of the soil and the
normal depth of soil freezing. The potential ground melt is reduced below MGMELT
by 3 percent for each degree that PAKTMP is below 32 degrees F to a minimum of 19
percent of MGMELT at 5 degrees F or lower. As long as a snowpack is present, ground
melt occurs at this potential rate.

4.2(1).2.12 Reset State Variables When Snowpack Disappears

(subroutine NOPACK)

Purpose

This code resets the state variables (for example, SNOCOV) when the snowpack
completely disappears.

Method

The frozen contents of the snowpack required for complete areal cover of snow
(COVINX) is set to a tenth of the maximum value (COVIND). All other variables are
either set to zero or the "undefined" value of -1.0E30.

53
 Module Section PWATER

4.2(1).3 Simulate Water Budget for a Pervious Land Segment

(Section PWATER of Module PERLND)

Purpose

PWATER is used to calculate the components of the water budget, primarily to

predict the total runoff from a pervious area. PWATER is the key component of
module PERLND; subsequent major sections of PERLND (eg. SEDMNT) depend on the
outputs of this section.

Background

The hydrologic processes that are modeled by PWATER are illustrated in Figure
4.2(1).3-1. The algorithms used to simulate these land related processes are the
product of over 15 years of research and testing. They are based on the original
research for the LANDS subprogram of the Stanford Watershed Model IV (Crawford and
Linsley, 1966). LANDS has been incorporated into many models and used to
successfully simulate the hydrologic responses of widely varying watersheds. The
equations used in module section PWATER are nearly identical to the ones in the
current version of LANDS in the PTR Model (Crawford and Donigian, 1973), HSP
(Hydrocomp, 1976), and the ARM and NPS Models (Donigian and Crawford, 1976 a,b).
However, some changes have been made to LANDS to make the algorithms internally
more amenable to a range of calculation time steps. Also, many of the parameter
names have been changed to make them more descriptive, and some can be input on a
monthly basis to allow for seasonal variation.

Data Requirements and Manipulation

The number of time series required by module section PWATER depends on whether snow
accumulation and melt are considered. When such conditions are not considered,
only potential evapotranspiration and precipitation are required. However, when
snow conditions are considered, air temperature, rainfall, snow cover, water yield,
and ice content of the snowpack are also required. Also, the evaporation data are
adjusted when snow is considered. The input evaporation values are reduced to
account for the fraction of the land segment covered by the snowpack (determined
from the generated time series for snow cover), with an allowance for the fraction
of area covered by coniferous forest which, it is assumed, can transpire through
any snow cover. Furthermore, PET is reduced to zero when air temperature is below
the parameter PETMIN. If air temperature is below PETMAX but above PETMIN, PET
will be reduced to 50% of the input value, unless the first adjustment already
reduced it to less than this amount.

The estimated potential evapotranspiration (PET) is used to calculate actual ET in

subroutine group EVAPT.

54
 Module Section PWATER

Figure 4.2(1).3-1 Hydrologic cycle

55
 Module Section PWATER

Approach

Figure 4.2(1).3-2 represents the fluxes and storages simulated in module section
PWATER. The time series SUPY representing moisture supplied to the land segment
includes rain, and when snow conditions are considered, rain plus water from the
snowpack. SUPY is then available for interception. Interception storage is water
retained by any storage above the overland flow plane. For pervious areas,
interception storage is mostly on vegetation. Any overflow from interception
storage is added to the optionally supplied time series of surface external lateral
inflow to produce the total inflow into the surface detention storage.

Inflow to the surface detention storage is added to existing storage to make up the
water available for infiltration and runoff. Moisture which directly infiltrates
moves to the lower zone and groundwater storages. Other water may go to the upper
zone storage, may be routed as runoff from surface detention or interflow storage,
or may stay on the overland flow plane, from which it runs off or infiltrates at
a later time.

The processes of infiltration and overland flow interact and occur simultaneously
in nature. Surface conditions such as heavy turf on mild slopes restrict the
velocity of overland flow and reduce the total quantity of runoff by allowing more
time for infiltration. Increased soil moisture due to prolonged infiltration will
in time reduce the infiltration rate producing more overland flow. Surface
detention will modify flow. For example, high intensity rainfall is attenuated by
storage and the maximum outflow rate is reduced. The water in the surface
detention may also later infiltrate reoccurring as interflow, or it can be
contained in upper zone storage.

Water infiltrating through the surface and percolating from the upper zone storage
to the lower zone storage may flow to active groundwater storage or may be lost by
deep percolation. Active groundwater eventually reappears as baseflow, but deep
percolation is considered lost from the simulated system.

Lateral external inflows to interflow and active groundwater storages are also
possible in section PWATER. One may wish to use this option if an upslope land
segment is significantly different to merit separating it from a downslope land
segment and no channel exists between them.

Not only are flows important in the simulation of the water budget, but so are
storages. As stated, soil storage affects infiltration. The water holding
capacity of the two soil storages, upper zone and lower zone, in module section
PERLND is defined in terms of nominal capacities. Nominal, rather than absolute
capacities, serve the purpose of smoothing any abrupt change that would occur if
an absolute capacity is reached. Such capacities permit a smooth transition in
hydrologic performance as the water content fluctuates.

56
 Module Section PWATER

Figure 4.2(1).3-2 Flow diagram of water movement and storages modeled in the
PWATER section of the PERLND Application Module

57
 Module Section PWATER

Figure 4.2(1).3-2 Flow diagram of water movement and storages modeled in the
PWATER section of the PERLND Application Module (continued)

58
 Module Section PWATER

Storages also affect evapotranspiration loss. Evapotranspiration can be simulated

from interception storage, upper and lower zone storages, active groundwater
storage, and directly from baseflow.

Storages and flows can also be instrumental in the transformation and movement of
chemicals simulated in the agri-chemical module sections. Soil moisture levels
affect the adsorption and transformations of pesticides and nutrients. Soil
moisture contents may vary greatly over a land segment. Therefore, a more detailed
representation of the moisture contents and fluxes may be needed to simulate the
transport and reaction of agricultural chemicals.

The following subroutine descriptions explain the algorithms of the PWATER module
section in more detail. Further detail can be found in the reports cited above.

4.2(1).3.1 Simulate Interception (subroutine ICEPT)

Purpose

The purpose of this code is to simulate the interception of moisture by vegetal or

other ground cover. Moisture is supplied by precipitation, or under snow
conditions, it is supplied by the rain not falling on the snowpack plus the water
yielded by the snowpack.

Method

The user may supply the interception capacity on a monthly basis to account for
seasonal variations, or may supply one value designating a fixed capacity. The
interception capacity parameter can be used to designate any retention of moisture
which does not infiltrate or reach the overland flow plane. Typically for pervious
areas this capacity represents storage on grass blades, leaves, branches, trunks,
and stems of vegetation.

Moisture exceeding the interception capacity overflows the storage and is ready for
either infiltration or runoff as determined by subroutine group SURFAC. Water held
in interception storage is removed by evaporation; the amount is determined in
subroutine EVICEP.

59
 Module Section PWATER

4.2(1).3.2 Distribute the Water Available for Infiltration and Runoff

(subroutine SURFAC)

Purpose

Subroutine SURFAC determines what happens to the moisture on the surface of the
land. It may infiltrate, go to the upper zone storage or interflow storage, remain
in surface detention storage, or run off.

Method

The algorithms which simulate infiltration represent both the continuous variation
of infiltration rate with time as a function of soil moisture and the areal
variation of infiltration over the land segment. The equations representing the
dependence of infiltration on soil moisture are based on the work of Philip (1957)
and are derived in detail in the previously cited reports.

The infiltration capacity, the maximum rate at which soil will accept infiltration,
is a function of both the fixed and variable characteristics of the watershed.
Fixed characteristics include primarily soil permeability and land slopes, while
variables are soil surface conditions and soil moisture content. Fixed and
variable characteristics vary spatially over the land segment. A linear probability
density function is used to account for areal variation. Figure 4.2(1).3-3
represents the infiltration/interflow/surface runoff distribution function of
section PWATER. Careful attention to this figure and Figure 4.2(1).3-2 will
facilitate understanding of subroutine SURFAC and the subordinate subroutines
DISPOS, DIVISN, UZINF, and PROUTE.

The infiltration distribution represented by Figure 4.2(1).3-3 is focused around

the two lines which separate the moisture available to the land surface (MSUPY)
into what infiltrates and what goes to interflow. A number of the variables that
are used to determine the location of lines I and II are calculated in subroutine
SURFAC. They are calculated by the following relationships:

IBAR = (INFILT/(LZS/LZSN)**INFEXP)*INFFAC (1)

IMAX = INFILD*IBAR (2)

IMIN = IBAR - (IMAX - IBAR) (3)

RATIO = INTFW*(2.0**(LZS/LZSN)) (4)

where:
IBAR = mean infiltration capacity over the land segment (in/interval)
INFILT = infiltration parameter (in/interval)

60
 Module Section PWATER

Figure 4.2(1).3-3 Determination of infiltration and interflow inflow

61
 Module Section PWATER

LZS = lower zone storage (inches)

LZSN = parameter for lower zone nominal storage (inches)
INFEXP = exponent parameter greater than one
INFFAC = factor to account for frozen ground effects, if applicable
IMAX = maximum infiltration capacity (in/interval)
INFILD = parameter giving the ratio of maximum to mean infiltration
capacity over the land segment
IMIN = minimum infiltration capacity (in/interval)
RATIO = ratio of the ordinates of line II to line I
INTFW = interflow inflow parameter

The parameter INTFW can be input on a monthly basis to allow for variation
throughout the year.

The factor that reduces infiltration (and also upper zone percolation) to account
for the freezing of the ground surface (INFFAC) is calculated in one of two ways.
In the first method, it is derived from the water equivalent of ice in the snowpack
according to the equation:

INFFAC = 1.0- FZG*PACKI

where:
FZG = parameter indicating how much icing reduces infiltration (/inches)
PACKI = water equivalent of ice in snowpack (inches)

In this method, INFFAC is subject to a minimum, supplied as the dimensionless

parameter FZGL.

The second method determines INFFAC according to the soil temperature in the lower
layer. If this temperature is less than 0 degrees C, then INFFAC is set to the
parameter FZGL; otherwise it is set to 1.0. This method can only be used if
section PSTEMP is active.

4.2(1)3.2.1 Dispose of Moisture Supply

(subroutine DISPOS)

Purpose

Subroutine DISPOS determines what happens to the moisture supply (MSUPY) on the
land segment.

Method

This subroutine calls subordinate routines DIVISN, UZINF, and PROUTE. DIVISN is
called to determine how much of MSUPY falls above and below line I in Figure
4.2(1).3-3. The quantity under this line is considered to be infiltrated. The
amount over the line but under the MSUPY line (the entire shaded portion) is the
potential direct runoff (PDRO), which is the combined increment to interflow, and
upper zone storage plus the quantities which will stay on the surface and run off.
PDRO is subdivided by line II. The ordinates of line II are found by multiplying
the ordinates of line I by RATIO (see subroutine SURFAC for definition). The

62
 Module Section PWATER

quantity underneath both line II and the MSUPY line but above line I is called
potential interflow inflow. This consists of actual interflow plus an increment
to upper zone storage. Any amount above line II but below the MSUPY (potential
surface detention/runoff) is that portion of the moisture supply which stays on the
surface and is available for overland flow routing, plus a further increment to
upper zone storage. The fractions of the potential interflow inflow and potential
surface detention/runoff which are combined to compose the upper zone inflow are
determined in subroutine UZINF.

4.2(1).3.2.1.2 Compute Inflow to Upper Zone (subroutines UZINF1 and UZINF2)

Purpose

The purpose of this code is to compute the inflow to the upper zone when there is
some potential direct runoff (PDRO). PDRO, which is determined in subroutine
DISPOS, will either enter the upper zone storage or be available for either
interflow or overland flow. This subroutine determines what amount, if any, will
go to the upper zone storage.

Method

The fraction of the potential direct runoff which becomes inflow to the upper zone
storage is a function of the ratio (UZRAT) of the storage to the nominal capacity.
Figure 4.2(1).3-4 diagrams this relationship. The equations used to define this
curve follow:

FRAC = 1 - (UZRAT/2)*(1/(4 - UZRAT))**(3 - UZRAT) (7)

for UZRAT less than or equal to two. For UZRAT greater than two,

FRAC = (0.5/(UZRAT-1))**(2*UZRAT-3) (8)

where:
FRAC = fraction of PDRO retained by the upper zone storage
UZRAT = UZS/UZSN

Since UZS and FRAC are dynamically affected by the inflow process it becomes
desirable when using particularly large time steps to integrate over the interval
to find the inflow to the upper zone. This is done in subroutine UZINF1. The
solution is simplified by assuming that inflow to and outflow from the upper zone
are handled separately. Considering inflow, the following differential equation
results:

d(UZS)/dt = (d(UZRAT)/dt)*UZSN = PDRO*FRAC (9)

Thus

d(UZRAT)/FRAC = (PDRO/UZSN)*dt (10)

63
 Module Section PWATER

Now taking the definite integral of both sides of the equation:

!
UZRAT t2

INTGRL = =
d(UZRAT)

"
--------- = (PDRO/UZSN)(t2-t1) (11)
FRAC
UZRAT t1

where:
t1 = time at start of interval
t2 = time at end of interval

The integral on the left side must be evaluated numerically. Subroutine UZINF1
uses tabulated corresponding values of INTGRL and UZRAT to evaluate it. This
relationship, plus Equations 9 and 11, enable one to find the change in UZRAT over
the interval, and hence, the quantity of inflow.

Subroutine UZINF2, which is an alternative to UZINF1, uses the algorithm used in

the predecessor models HSP, ARM and NPS. That is, Equations 7 and 8 are used
directly to estimate the fraction of PDRO retained by the upper zone. Only the
value of UZRAT at the start of the simulation interval is used; thus, no account
is taken of the possible steady reduction in inflow to the upper zone within a
single time step, due to its being filled (Figure 4.2(1).3-4).

4.2(1).3.2.1.3 Determine Surface Runoff (subroutine PROUTE)

Purpose

The purpose of subroutine PROUTE is to determine how much potential surface

detention runs off in one simulation interval.

Method of Routing

Overland flow is treated as a turbulent flow process. It is simulated using the

Chezy-Manning equation and an empirical expression which relates outflow depth to
detention storage. A more detailed explanation and derivation can be found in the
reports cited in the initial background discussion. The rate of overland flow
discharge is determined by the equations:

for SURSM < SURSE

SURO = DELT60*SRC*(SURSM*(1.0 + 0.6(SURSM/SURSE)**3)**1.67 (12)

for SURSM >= SURSE

SURO = DELT60*SRC*(SURSM*1.6)**1.67

64
 Module Section PWATER

Figure 4.2(1).3-4 Fraction of the potential direct runoff retained by the upper
zone (FRAC) as a function of the upper zone soil moisture
ratio (UZRAT)

65
 Module Section PWATER

where:
SURO = surface outflow (in/interval)
DELT60 = DELT/60.0 (hr/interval)
SRC = routing variable, described below
SURSM = mean surface detention storage over the time interval (in)
SURSE = equilibrium surface detention storage (inches) for current
supply rate

DELT60 makes the equations applicable to a range of time steps (DELT). The first
equation represents the case where the overland flow rate is increasing, and the
second case where the surface is at equilibrium or receding. Equilibrium surface
detention storage is calculated by:

SURSE = DEC*SSUPR**0.6 (13)

where:
DEC = calculated routing variable, described below
SSUPR = rate of moisture supply to the overland flow surface

There are two optional ways of determining SSUPR and SURSM. One option - the same
method used in the predecessor models - HSP, ARM, and NPS - estimates SSUPR by
subtracting the surface storage at the start of the interval (SURS) from the
potential surface detention (PSUR) which was determined in subroutine DISPOS. The
units of SSUPR are inches per interval. SURSM is estimated as the mean of SURS and
PSUR. The other option estimates SSUPR by the same method except that the result
is divided by DELT60 to obtain a value with units of inches per hour. SURSM is set
equal to SURS. This option is dimensionally consistent for any time step.

The variables DEC and SRC are calculated daily in subroutine SURFAC, but their
equations will be given here since they pertain to routing. They are:

DEC = 0.00982*(NSUR*LSUR/SQRT(SLSUR))**0.6 (14)

SRC = 1020.0*(SQRT(SLSUR)/(NSUR*LSUR)) (15)

where:
NSUR = Manning's n for the overland flow plane
LSUR = length of the overland flow plane (ft)
SLSUR = slope of the overland flow plane (ft/ft)

NSUR can be input on a monthly basis to allow for variations in roughness of the
overland flow plane throughout the year.

66
 Module Section PWATER

4.2(1).3.3 Simulate Interflow (subroutine INTFLW)

Purpose

Interflow can have an important influence on storm hydrographs particularly when

vertical percolation is retarded by a shallow, less permeable soil layer.
Additions to the interflow component are retained in storage or routed as outflow
from the land segment. Inflows to the interflow component may occur from the
surface or from upslope external lateral flows. The purpose of this subroutine is
to determine the amount of interflow and to update the storage.

Method of Determining Interflow

The calculation of interflow outflow assumes a linear relationship to storage. Thus

outflow is a function of a recession parameter, inflow, and storage. Moisture that
remains will occupy interflow storage. Interflow discharge is calculated by:

IFWO = (IFWK1*INFLO) + (IFWK2*IFWS) (16)

where:
IFWO = interflow outflow (in/interval)
INFLO = inflow into interflow storage (in/interval)
IFWS = interflow storage at the start of the interval (inches)

IFWK1 and IFWK2 are variables determined by:

IFWK1 = 1.0 - (IFWK2/KIFW) (17)

IFWK2 = 1.0 - EXP(-KIFW) (18)

and

KIFW = -ALOG(IRC)*DELT60/24.0 (19)

where:
IRC = interflow recession parameter (per day)
DELT60 = number of hr per interval
24.0 = number of hours per day
EXP = exponential function
ALOG = natural logarithm function

IRC is the ratio of the present rate of interflow outflow to the value 24 hours
earlier, if there was no inflow. IRC can be input on a monthly basis to allow for
variation in soil properties throughout the year.

67
 Module Section PWATER

4.2(1).3.4 Simulate Upper Zone Behavior (subroutine UZONE)

Purpose

This subroutine and the subsidiary subroutine UZONES are used to calculate the
water percolating from the upper zone. Water not percolated remains in upper zone
storage available for evapotranspiration in subroutine ETUZON.

Method of Determining Percolation

The upper zone inflow calculated in DISPOS is first added to the upper zone storage
at the start of the interval to obtain the total water available for percolation
from the upper zone.

Percolation only occurs when UZRAT minus LZRAT is greater than 0.01. When this
happens, percolation from the upper zone storage is calculated by the empirical
expression:

PERC = 0.1*INFILT*INFFAC*UZSN*(UZRAT - LZRAT)**3 (20)

where:
PERC = percolation from the upper zone (in/interval)
INFILT = infiltration parameter (in/interval)
INFFAC = factor to account for frozen ground, if any
UZSN = parameter for upper zone nominal storage (inches)
UZRAT = ratio of upper zone storage to UZSN
LZRAT = ratio of lower zone storage to lower zone nominal storage (LZSN)

The upper zone nominal capacity can be input on a monthly basis to allow for
variations throughout the year. The monthly values are interpolated to obtain daily
values.

4.2(1).3.5 Simulate Lower Zone Behavior (subroutine LZONE)

Purpose

This subroutine determines the quantity of infiltrated and percolated water which
enters the lower zone. The infiltrated moisture supply is determined in subroutine
DISPOS. The percolated moisture from the upper zone is found in subroutine UZONE.

Method

The fraction of the direct infiltration plus percolation that enters the lower zone
storage (LZS) is based on the lower zone storage ratio of LZS/LZSN where LZSN is
the lower zone nominal capacity. The inflowing fraction is determined empirically
by:

68
 Module Section PWATER

LZFRAC = 1.0 - LZRAT*(1.0/(1.0 + INDX))**INDX (21)

when LZRAT is less than 1.0, and by

LZFRAC = (1.0/(1.0 + INDX))**INDX (22)

when LZRAT is greater than 1.0. INDX is defined by:

INDX = 1.5*ABS(LZRAT - 1.0) + 1.0 (23)

where:
LZFRAC = fraction of infiltration plus percolation entering LZS
LZRAT = LZS/LZSN
ABS = function for determining absolute value

These relationships are plotted in Figure 4.2(1).3-5. The fraction of the moisture
supply remaining after the surface, upper zone, and lower zone components are
subtracted is added to the groundwater storages.

4.2(1).3.6 Simulate Groundwater Behavior (subroutine GWATER)

Purpose

The purpose of this subroutine is to determine the amount of the inflow to

groundwater that is lost to deep or inactive groundwater and to determine the
amount of active groundwater outflow. These two fluxes will in turn affect the
active groundwater storage.

Method of Determining Groundwater Fluxes

The quantity of direct infiltration plus percolation from the upper zone which does
not go to the lower zone (determined in subroutine LZONE) will be inflow to either
inactive or active groundwater. The distribution to active and inactive
groundwater is user designated by parameter DEEPFR. DEEPFR is that fraction of the
groundwater inflow which goes to inactive groundwater. The remaining portion of
the percolating water and all external lateral inflow if any make up the total
inflow to the active groundwater storage.

The outflow from active groundwater storage is based on a simplified model. It

assumes that the discharge of an aquifer is proportional to the product of the
cross-sectional area and the energy gradient of the flow. Further, a representative
cross-sectional area of flow is assumed to be related to the groundwater storage
level at the start of the interval. The energy gradient is estimated as a basic
gradient plus a variable gradient that depends on past active groundwater
accretion.

69
 Module Section PWATER

Figure 4.2(1).3-5 Fraction of infiltration plus percolation entering lower

zone storage

70
 Module Section PWATER

Thus, the groundwater outflow is estimated by:

AGWO = KGW*(1.0 + KVARY*GWVS)*AGWS (24)

where:
AGWO = active groundwater outflow (in/interval)
KGW = groundwater outflow recession parameter (/interval)
KVARY = parameter which can make active groundwater storage to outflow
relation nonlinear (/inches)
GWVS = index to groundwater slope (inches)
AGWS = active groundwater storage at the start of the interval (inches)

GWVS is increased each interval by the inflow to active groundwater but is also
decreased by 3 percent once a day. It is a measure of antecedent active ground-
water inflow. KVARY is introduced to allow variable groundwater recession rates.
When KVARY is nonzero, a semilog plot of discharge versus time is nonlinear. This
parameter adds flexibility in groundwater outflow simulation which is useful in
simulating many watersheds.

The parameter KGW is calculated by the Run Interpreter using the relationship:

KGW = 1.0 - (AGWRC)**(DELT60/24.0) (25)

where:
AGWRC = daily recession constant of groundwater flow if KVARY or GWVS = 0.0
That is, the ratio of current groundwater discharge
to groundwater discharge 24-hr earlier
DELT60 = hr/interval

4.2(1).3.7 Simulate Evapotranspiration

(subroutine EVAPT)

Purpose

The purpose of EVAPT and its subordinate subroutines is to simulate evaporation and
evapotranspiration fluxes from all zones of the pervious land segment. Since in
most hydrologic regimes the volume of water that leaves a watershed as evapotrans-
piration exceeds the total volume of streamflow, this is an important aspect of the
water budget.

Method of Determining Actual Evapotranspiration

There are two separate issues involved in estimating evapotranspiration (ET).

First, potential ET must be estimated. ET potential or demand is supplied as an
input times series, typically using U.S. Weather Bureau Class A pan records plus
an adjustment factor. The data are further adjusted for cover in the parent
subroutine PWATER. Second, actual ET must be calculated, usually as a function of
moisture storages and the potential. The actual ET is estimated by trying to meet
the demand from five sources in the order described below. The sum of the ET from
these five sources is the total actual evapotranspiration from the land segment.

71
 Module Section PWATER

Subroutine ETBASE

The first source from which ET can be taken is the active groundwater outflow or
baseflow. This simulates effects such as ET from riparian vegetation in which
groundwater is withdrawn as it enters the stream. The user may specify by the
parameter BASETP the fraction, if any, of the potential ET that can be sought from
the baseflow. That portion can only be fulfilled if outflow exists. Any remaining
potential not met by actual baseflow evaporation will try next to be satisfied in
subroutine EVICEP.

Subroutine EVICEP

Remaining potential ET exerts its demand on the water in interception storage.

Unlike baseflow, there is no parameter regulating the rate of ET from interception
storage. The demand will draw upon all of the interception storage unless the
demand is less than the storage. When the demand is greater than the storage, the
remaining demand will try to be satisfied in subroutine ETUZON.

Subroutine ETUZON

There are no special ET parameters for the upper zone, but rather ET is based on
the moisture in storage in relation to its nominal capacity. Actual evapotrans-
piration will occur from the upper zone storage at the remaining potential demand
if the ratio of UZS/UZSN, upper zone storage to nominal capacity, is greater than
2.0. Otherwise the remaining potential ET demand on the upper zone storage is
reduced; the adjusted value depends on UZS/UZSN. Subroutine ETAGW will attempt to
satisfy any remaining demand.

Subroutine ETAGW

Like ET from baseflow, actual evapotranspiration from active groundwater is

regulated by a parameter. The parameter AGWETP is the fraction of the remaining
potential ET that can be sought from the active groundwater storage. That portion
of the ET demand can be met only if there is enough active groundwater storage to
satisfy it. Any remaining potential will try to be met in subroutine ETLZON.

Subroutine ETLZON

The lower zone is the last storage from which ET is drawn. Evapotranspiration from
the lower zone is more involved than that from the other storages. ET from the
lower zone depends upon vegetation transpiration. Evapotranspiration opportunity
will vary with the vegetation type, the depth of rooting, density of the vegetation
cover, and the stage of plant growth along with the moisture characteristics of the
soil zone. These influences on the ET opportunity are lumped into the LZETP
parameter. Unlike the other ET parameters LZETP can be input on a monthly basis
to account for temporal changes in the above characteristics.

72
 Module Section PWATER

If the LZETP parameter is at its maximum value of one, representing near complete
areal coverage of deep rooted vegetation, then the potential ET for the lower zone
is equal to the demand that remains. However, this is normally not the case.
Usually vegetation type and/or rooting depths will vary over the land segment. To
simulate this, a linear probability density function for ET opportunity is assumed
(Figure 4.2(1).3-6). This approach is similar to that used to handle areal
variations in infiltration/percolation capacity.

The variable RPARM, the index to maximum ET opportunity, is estimated by:

RPARM = (0.25/(1.0 - LZETP))*(LZS/LZSN)*DELT60/24.0 (26)

where:
RPARM = maximum ET opportunity (in/interval)
LZETP = lower zone ET parameter
LZS = current lower zone storage (inches)
LZSN = lower zone nominal storage parameter (inches)
DELT60 = hr/interval

The quantity of water lost by ET from the lower zone storage, when remaining
potential ET (REMPET) is less than RPARM, is given by the cross-hatched area of
Figure 4.2(1).3-6. When REMPET is more than RPARM the lower zone ET is equal to
the entire area under the triangle, RPARM/2.

ET from the lower zone storage is further reduced when LZETP is less than 0.5 by
multiplying by LZETP*2.0. This is designed to account for the fraction of the land
segment devoid of any vegetation that can draw from the lower zone.

73
 Module Section PWATER

Figure 4.2(1).3-6 Potential and actual evapotranspiration from the lower zone

74
 Module Section SEDMNT

4.2(1).4 Simulate Production and Removal of Sediment

(Section SEDMNT of Module PERLND)

Purpose

Module section SEDMNT simulates the production and removal of sediment from a
pervious land segment. Sediment can be considered to be inorganic, organic, or
both; the definition is up to the user.

Sediment from the land surface is one of the most common pollutants of waters from
urban, agricultural, and forested lands. It muddies waters, covers fish eggs, and
limits the capacity of reservoirs. Nutrients and toxic chemicals are carried by it.

Approach

The equations used to produce and remove sediment are based on the predecessor
models ARM and NPS (Donigian and Crawford, 1976 a,b). The algorithms representing
land surface erosion in these models were derived from a sediment model developed
by Moshe Negev (1967) and influenced by Meyer and Wischmeier (1969) and Onstad and
Foster (1975). The supporting management practice factor which has been added to
the soil detachment by rainfall equation was based on the "P" factor in the
Universal Soil Loss Equation (Wischmeier and Smith, 1965). It was introduced in
order to better evaluate agricultural conservation practices. The equation that
represents scouring of the matrix soil (which was not included in ARM or NPS) was
derived from Negev's method for simulating gully erosion.

Figure 4.2(1).4-1 shows the detachment, attachment, and removal involved in the
erosion processes on the pervious land surface, while Figure 4.2(1).4-2 schemat-
ically represents the fluxes and storages used to simulate these processes. Two
of the sediment fluxes, SLSED and NSVI, are added directly to the detached sediment
storage variable DETS in the parent routine SEDMNT while the other fluxes are
computed in subordinate routines. SLSED represents external lateral input from an
upslope land segment. It is a time series which the user may optionally specify.
NVSI is a parameter that represents any net external additions or removals of
sediment caused by human activities or wind.

Removal of sediment by water is simulated as washoff of detached sediment in

storage (WSSD) and scour of matrix soil (SCRSD). The washoff process involves two
parts: the detachment/attachment of sediment from/to the soil matrix and the
transport of this sediment. Detachment (DET) occurs by rainfall. Attachment
occurs only on days without rainfall; the rate of attachment is specified by
parameter AFFIX. Transport of detached sediment is by overland flow. The scouring
of the matrix soil includes both pick-up and transport by overland flow combined
into one process.

75
 Module Section SEDMNT

Figure 4.2(1).4-1 Erosion processes

76
 Module Section SEDMNT

Figure 4.2(1).4-2 Flow diagram for SEDMNT section of PERLND Application Module

77
 Module Section SEDMNT

Module section SEDMNT has two options for simulating washoff of detached sediment
and scour of soil. One uses subroutine SOSED1 which is identical to the method
used in the ARM and the NPS Models. However, some equations used in this method
are dimensionally nonhomogeneous, and were designed for 15- and 5-min intervals.
The results obtained are probably highly dependent on the simulation time step.
The other option uses subroutine SOSED2, which is dimensionally homogeneous and is,
generally less dependent on the time step.

4.2(1).4.1 Detach Soil By Rainfall

(subroutine DETACH)

Purpose

The purpose of DETACH is to simulate the splash detachment of the soil matrix
caused by impact of rain.

Method of Detaching Soil by Rainfall

Kinetic energy from rain falling on the soil detaches particles which are then
available to be transported by overland flow. The equation that simulates
detachment is:

DET = DELT60*(1.0 - CR)*SMPF*KRER*(RAIN/DELT60)**JRER (1)

where:
DET = sediment detached from the soil matrix by rainfall
(tons/ac/interval)
DELT60 = number of hours/interval
CR = fraction of the land covered by snow and other cover
SMPF = supporting management practice factor
KRER = detachment coefficient dependent on soil properties
RAIN = rainfall (in/interval)
JRER = detachment exponent dependent on soil properties

The variable CR is the sum of the fraction of the area covered by the snowpack
(SNOCOV), if any, and the fraction that is covered by anything else but snow
(COVER). SNOCOV is computed by section SNOW. COVER is a parameter which for
pervious areas will typically be the fraction of the area covered by vegetation and
mulch. It can be input on a monthly basis.

4.2(1).4.2 Remove by Surface Flow Using Method 1

(subroutine SOSED1)

Purpose

Subroutines SOSED1 and SOSED2 perform the same task but by different methods. They
simulate the washoff of the detached sediment and the scouring of the soil matrix.

78
 Module Section SEDMNT

Method

When simulating the washoff of detached sediment, the transport capacity of the
overland flow is estimated and compared to the amount of detached sediment
available. The transport capacity is calculated by the equation:

STCAP = DELT60*KSER*((SURS + SURO)/DELT60)**JSER (2)

where:
STCAP = capacity for removing detached sediment (tons/ac/interval)
DELT60 = hr/interval
KSER = coefficient for transport of detached sediment
SURS = surface water storage (inches)
SURO = surface outflow of water (in/interval)
JSER = exponent for transport of detached sediment

When STCAP is greater than the amount of detached sediment in storage, washoff is
calculated by:

WSSD = DETS*SURO/(SURS + SURO) (3)

If the storage is sufficient to fulfill the transport capacity, then

the following relationship is used:

WSSD = STCAP*SURO/(SURS + SURO) (4)

where:
WSSD = washoff of detached sediment (tons/ac/interval)
DETS = detached sediment storage (tons/ac)

WSSD is then subtracted from DETS.

Transport and detachment of soil particles from the soil matrix is simulated with
the following equation:

SCRSD = SURO/(SURS + SURO)*DELT60*KGER*((SURS + SURO)/DELT6O)**JGER (5)

where:
SCRSD = scour of matrix soil (tons/ac/interval)
KGER = coefficient for scour of the matrix soil
JGER = exponent for scour of the matrix soil

The sum of the two fluxes, WSSD and SCRSD, represents the total sediment outflow
from the land segment.

Subroutine SOSED1 differs from SOSED2 in that it uses the dimensionally

nonhomogeneous term (SURS + SURO)/DELT60 in the above equations, while SOSED2 uses
the homogeneous term SURO/DELT60.

79
 Module Section SEDMNT

4.2(1).4.3 Remove by Surface Flow Using Method 2

(subroutine SOSED2)

Purpose

The purpose of this subroutine is the same as SOSED1. It only differs in method.

Method of Determining Removal

This method of determining sediment removal makes use of the dimensionally

homogeneous term SURO/DELT60 instead of (SURO+SURS)/DELT60.

The capacity of the overland flow to transport detached sediment is determined in

this subroutine by:

STCAP = DELT60*KSER*(SURO/DELT60)**JSER (6)

When STCAP is more than the amount of detached sediment in storage, the flow washes
off all of the detached sediment storage (DETS). However, when STCAP is less than
the amount of detached sediment in storage, the situation is transport limiting,
so WSSD is equal to STCAP.

Direct detachment and transport of the soil matrix by scouring (e.g., gullying) is
simulated with the equation:

SCRSD = DELT60*KGER*(SURO/DELT60)**JGER (7)

Definitions of the above terms can be found in subroutine SOSED2. The coefficients
and exponents will have different values than in subroutine SOSED1 because they
modify different variables.

4.2(1).4.4 Simulate Re-attachment of Detached Sediment

(subroutine ATTACH)

Purpose

Subroutine ATTACH simulates the re-attachment of detached sediment (DETS) on the

surface (soil compaction).

Method

Attachment to the soil matrix is simulated by merely reducing DETS. Since the soil
matrix is considered to be unlimited, no addition to the soil matrix is necessary
when this occurs. DETS is diminished at the start of each day that follows a day
with no precipitation by multiplying it by (1.0 - AFFIX), where AFFIX is a
parameter. This represents a first-order rate of reduction of the detached soil
storage.

80
 Module Section PSTEMP

4.2(1).5 Estimate Soil Temperatures (Section PSTEMP of Module PERLND)

Purpose

PSTEMP simulates soil temperatures for the surface, upper, and lower/groundwater
layers of a land segment for use in module section PWTGAS and the agri-chemical
sections. Good estimates of soil temperatures are particularly important for
simulating first-order transformations in the agri-chemical sections.

Method

The two methods used for estimating soil temperatures are based on the regression
equation approach in the ARM Model (Donigian, et al., 1977) and the smoothing
factor approach used in HSP QUALITY (Hydrocomp, 1977) to simulate the temperatures
of subsurface flows.

Simulation of soil temperatures is done by layers which correspond to those

specified in the agri-chemical sections. The surface layer is the portion of the
land segment that affects overland flow water quality characteristics. The
subsurface layers are upper, lower, and groundwater. The upper layer affects
interflow quality characteristics while the lower layer is a transition zone to
groundwater. The temperature of the groundwater layer affects groundwater quality
transformations and outflow characteristics. Lower layer and groundwater
temperatures are considered approximately equal; a single value is estimated for
both layers.

Surface layer soil temperatures are estimated by the following regression equation:

SLTMP = ASLT + BSLT*AIRTC (1)

where:
SLTMP = surface layer temperature (degrees C)
ASLT = Y-intercept
BSLT = slope
AIRTC = air temperature (degrees C)

Temperatures of the other layers are simulated by one of two methods. If TSOPFG
is set equal to 1 in the User's Control Input, the upper layer soil temperature is
estimated by a regression equation as a function of air temperature (similar to
equation above), and the lower layer/groundwater layer temperature is specified by
a parameter which can vary monthly. This method is similar to that used in the ARM
Model except that ARM relates the upper layer temperature to the computed soil
surface temperature instead of directly to air temperature.

If TSOPFG is set equal to zero, both the upper layer and the lower layer/
groundwater layer temperatures are computed by using a mean departure from air
temperature plus a smoothing factor. The same basic equation is used with separate
state variables and parameters for each layer:

TMP = TMPS + SMO*(AIRTCS + TDIF - TMPS) (2)

81
 Module Section PSTEMP

where:
TMP = layer temperature at the end of the current interval (degrees C)
SMO = smoothing factor (parameter)
AIRTCS = air temperature at the start of the current interval (degrees C)
TDIF = parameter which specifies the difference between the mean air
temperature and the mean temperature of the soil layer (degrees C)
TMPS = layer temperature at the start of the current interval (degrees C)

If TSOPFG is set to 2, then the method is identical to the above, except that the
lower layer/groundwater layer temperature is estimated from the upper layer
temperature (ULTMP), instead of directly from the air temperature.

The values of the parameters for any of the layer computations can be linearly
interpolated from monthly input values to obtain daily variations throughout the
year. If this variation is not desired, the user may supply yearly (constant)
values.

82
 Module Section PWTGAS

4.2(1).6 Estimate Water Temperature and Dissolved Gas Concentrations

(Section PWTGAS of Module PERLND)

Purpose

PWTGAS estimates water temperature and concentrations of dissolved oxygen and

carbon dioxide in surface, interflow, and groundwater outflows from a land segment.

Method

The temperature of each outflow is considered to be the same as the soil

temperature of the layer from which the flow originates, except that water
temperature can not be less than freezing. Soil temperatures must either be
computed in module section PSTEMP or supplied directly as an input time series.
The temperature of the surface outflow is equal to the surface layer soil
temperature, the temperature of interflow to the upper layer soil temperature, and
the temperature of the active groundwater outflow equals the lower layer and
groundwater layer soil temperature.

The dissolved oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations of the overland flow are
assumed to be at saturation and are calculated as direct functions of water
temperature. PWTGAS uses the following empirical nonlinear equation to relate
dissolved oxygen at saturation to water temperature (Committee on Sanitary
Engineering Research, 1960):

SODOX = (14.652 + SOTMP*(-0.41022 +

SOTMP*(0.007991 - 0.000077774*SOTMP)))*ELEVGC (1)

where:
SODOX = concentration of dissolved oxygen in surface outflow (mg/l)
SOTMP = surface outflow temperature (degrees C)
ELEVGC = correction factor for elevation above sea level
(ELEVGC is calculated by the Run Interpreter dependent upon
mean elevation of the segment)

The empirical equation for dissolved carbon dioxide concentration of the overland
flow (Harnard and Davis, 1943) is:

SOCO2 = (10**(2385.73/ABSTMP - 14.0184 + 0.0152642*ABSTMP)) (2)

*0.000316*ELEVGC*12000.0

where:
SOCO2 = concentration of dissolved carbon dioxide in surface outflow (mg C/l)
ABSTMP = temperature of surface outflow (degrees K)

The concentrations of dissolved oxygen and carbon dioxide in the interflow and the
active groundwater flow cannot be assumed to be at saturation. Values for these
concentrations are provided by the user. They may be specified as constant values
or 12 monthly values. If monthly values are provided, daily variation in values
will automatically be obtained by linear interpolation between the monthly values.

83
 Module Section PQUAL

4.2(1).7 Simulate Quality Constituents Using Simple Relationships with

Sediment and Water Yield (Section PQUAL of Module PERLND)

Purpose

The PQUAL module section simulates water quality constituents or pollutants in the
outflows from a pervious land segment using simple relationships with water and/or
sediment yield. Any constituent can be simulated by this module section. The user
supplies the name, units and parameter values appropriate to each of the
constituents that are needed in the simulation. However, more detailed methods of
simulating sediment, heat, dissolved oxygen, dissolved carbon dioxide, nitrogen,
phosphorus, soluble tracers, and pesticide removal from a pervious land segment are
available, in other module sections.

Approach

The basic algorithms used to simulate quality constituents are a synthesis of those
used in the NPS Model (Donigian and Crawford, 1976b) and HSP QUALITY (Hydrocomp,
1977). However, some options and combinations are unique to HSPF.

Figure 4.2(1).7-1 shows schematically the fluxes and storages represented in module
section PQUAL. The occurrence of a water quality constituent in both surface and
subsurface outflow can be simulated. The behavior of a constituent in surface
outflow is considered more complex and dynamic than the behavior in subsurface
flow. A constituent on the surface can be affected greatly by adhesion to the soil
and by temperature, light, wind, atmospheric deposition, and direct human
influences. Section PQUAL is able to represent these processes in a general
fashion. It allows quantities in the surface outflow to be simulated by two
methods. One approach is to simulate the constituent by association with sediment
removal. The other approach is to simulate it using atmospheric deposition and/or
basic accumulation and depletion rates together with depletion by washoff; that is,
constituent outflow from the surface is a function of the water flow and the
constituent in storage. A combination of the two methods may be used in which the
individual outfluxes are added to obtain the total surface outflow. These
approaches will be discussed further in the descriptions of the corresponding
subroutines. Concentrations of quality constituents in the subsurface flows of
interflow and active groundwater are specified by the user. The concentration may
be linearly interpolated to obtain daily values from input monthly values.

The user has the option of simulating the constituents by any combination of these
surface and subsurface outflow pathways. The outflux from the combination of the
pathways simulated will be the total outflow from the land segment. In addition,
the user is able to select the units to be associated with the fluxes. These
options provide considerable flexibility. For example, a user may wish to simulate
coliforms in units of organisms/ac by association with sediment in the surface
runoff and use a concentration in the groundwater which varies seasonally. Or a
user may want to simulate total dissolved salts in pounds per acre by direct
association with overland flow and a constant concentration in interflow and
groundwater flow.

84
 Module Section PQUAL

Figure 4.2(1).7-1 Flow diagram for PQUAL section of the PERLND Application
Module

85
 Module Section PQUAL

PQUAL allows the user to simulate up to 10 quality constituents at a time. Each

of the 10 constituents may be defined as one or a combination of the following
types: QUALSD, QUALOF, QUALIF, and/or QUALGW. If a constituent is considered to
be associated with sediment, it is called a QUALSD. The corresponding terms for
constituents associated with overland flow, interflow, and groundwater flow are
QUALOF, QUALIF, and QUALGW, respectively. Note that only a QUALOF may receive
atmospheric deposition, since it is the only type to maintain a storage. However,
no more than seven of any one of the constituent types (QUALSD, QUALOF, QUALIF, or
QUALGW) may be simulated in one operation. The program uses a set of flag pointers
to keep track of these associations. For example, QSDFP(3) = 0 means that the
third constituent is not associated with sediment, whereas QSDFP(6) = 4 means that
the sixth constituent is the fourth sediment associated constituent (QUALSD).
Similar flag pointer arrays are used to indicate whether or not a quality
constituent is a QUALOF, QUALIF, or QUALGW.

4.2(1).7.1 Remove by Association with Sediment

(subroutine QUALSD)

Purpose

QUALSD simulates the removal of a quality constituent from a pervious land surface
by association with the sediment removal determined in module section SEDMNT.

Method

This approach assumes that the particular quality constituent removed from the land
surface is in proportion to the sediment removal. The relation is specified with
user-input "potency factors." Potency factors indicate the constituent strength
relative to the sediment removed from the surface. Various quality constituents
such as iron, lead, and strongly adsorbed toxicants are actually attached to the
sediment being removed from the land surface. Some other pollutants such as
ammonia, organics, pathogens, and BOD may not be extensively adsorbed, but can be
considered highly correlated to sediment yield.

For each quality constituent associated with sediment, the user supplies separate
potency factors for association with washed off and scoured sediment (WSSD and
SCRSD). Typically, the washoff potency factor would be larger than the scour
potency factor because washed off sediment is usually finer than the scoured
material and thus has a higher adsorption capacity. Organic nitrogen would be a
common example of such a constituent. The user is also able to supply monthly
potency factors for constituents that vary somewhat consistently during the year.
For instance, constituents that are associated with spring and fall fertilization
may require such monthly input values.

Removal of the sediment associated constituent by detached sediment washoff is

simulated by:

WASHQS = WSSD*POTFW (1)

86
 Module Section PQUAL

where:
WASHQS = flux of quality constituent associated with
detached sediment washoff (quantity/ac per interval)
WSSD = washoff of detached sediment (tons/ac per interval)
POTFW = washoff potency factor (quantity/ton)

Removal of constituents by scouring of the soil matrix is similar:

SCRQS = SCRSD*POTFS (2)

where:
SCRQS = flux of quality constituent associated with scouring
of the matrix soil (quantity/ac per interval)
SCRSD = scour of matrix soil (tons/ac per interval)
POTFS = scour potency factor (quantity/ton)

WASHQS and SCRQS are combined to give the total sediment associated flux of the
constituent from the land segment, SOQS.

The unit "quantity" refers to mass units (pounds or tons in the English system) or
some other quantity, such as number of organisms for coliforms. The unit is user-
specified.

4.2(1).7.2 Accumulate and Remove by a Constant Unit Rate and by Overland Flow
(subroutine QUALOF)

Purpose

QUALOF simulates the accumulation of a quality constituent on the pervious land

surface and its removal by a constant unit rate and by overland flow.

Method

This subroutine differs from the others in module section PQUAL in that the storage
of the quality constituent on the land surface is simulated. The constituent can
be accumulated and removed by processes which are independent of storm events such
as cleaning, decay, and wind erosion and deposition, or it can be washed off by
overland flow. The accumulation and removal rates can have monthly values to
account for seasonal fluctuations. A pollution indicator such as fecal coliform
from range land is an example of a constituent with accumulation and removal rates
which may need to vary throughout the year. The concentration of the coliform in
the surface runoff may fluctuate with the seasonal grazing density, and the
weather.

The constituent may, alternatively or additionally, receive atmospheric deposition.

Atmospheric deposition inputs can be specified in two possible ways depending on
the form of the available data. If the deposition is in the form of a flux (mass
per area per time), then it is considered "dry deposition". If the deposition is
in the form of a concentration in rainfall, then it is considered "wet deposition",
and the program automatically combines it with the input rainfall time series to
compute the resulting flux. Either type of deposition data can be input as a time

87
 Module Section PQUAL

series, which covers the entire simulation period, or as a set of monthly values
that is used for each year of the simulation. The specific atmospheric deposition
time series are documented in the EXTNL table of the Time Series Catalog for
PERLND, and are specified in the EXT SOURCES block of the UCI. The monthly values
are input in the MONTH-DATA block in the UCI.

If atmospheric deposition data are input to the model, the storage of qual is
updated as follows:

SQO = SQO + ADFX + PREC*ADCN (3)

where:
SQO = storage of available quality constituent on the surface (mass/area)
ADFX = dry or total atmospheric deposition flux (mass/area per interval)
PREC = precipitation depth
ADCN = concentration for wet atmospheric deposition (mass/volume)

When there is surface outflow and some quality constituent is in storage, washoff
is simulated using the commonly used relationship:

SOQO = SQO*(1.0 - EXP(-SURO*WSFAC)) (4)

where:
SOQO = washoff of the quality constituent from the land
surface (quantity/ac per interval)
SQO = storage of available quality constituent on the surface (quantity/ac)
SURO = surface outflow of water (in/interval)
WSFAC = susceptibility of the quality constituent to washoff (/in)
EXP = exponential function

The storage is updated once a day to account for accumulation and removal which
occurs independent of runoff by the equation:

SQO = ACQOP + SQOS*(1.0 - REMQOP) (5)

where:
ACQOP = accumulation rate of the constituent (quantity/ac per day)
SQOS = SQO at the start of the interval
REMQOP = unit removal rate of the stored constituent (per day)

The Run Interpreter computes REMQOP and WSFAC for this subroutine according to:

REMQOP = ACQOP/SQOLIM (6)

where:
SQOLIM = asymptotic limit for SQO as time approaches infinity
(quantity/ac), if no washoff occurs

and

WSFAC = 2.30/WSQOP (7)

88
 Module Section PQUAL

where:
WSQOP = rate of surface runoff that results in 90 percent washoff in
one hour (in/hr)

Since the unit removal rate of the stored constituent (REMQOP) is computed from two
other parameters, it does not have to be supplied by the user.

4.2(1).7.3 Simulate by Association with Interflow Outflow (subroutine QUALIF)

Purpose

QUALIF is designed to permit the user to simulate the occurrence of a constituent

in interflow.

Method

The user specifies a concentration for each constituent which is a QUALIF.

Optionally, one can specify 12 monthly values, to account for seasonal variation.
In this case, the system interpolates a new value each day.

4.2(1).7.4 Simulate by Association with Active Groundwater Outflow

(subroutine QUALGW)

Purpose

QUALGW is designed to permit the user to simulate the occurrence of a constituent

in groundwater outflow.

Method

The method is identical to that for QUALIF.

89
 Introduction to the Agri-Chemical Sections

Introduction to the Agri-chemical Sections

The introduction of agricultural chemicals into streams, lakes, and groundwater

from agricultural land may be detrimental. For example, persistent fat soluble
pesticides, such as DDT, have been known to concentrate in the fatty tissue of
animals causing toxic effects. Nitrogen and phosphorus are essential plant
nutrients which when introduced into certain surface waters will increase
productivity. This may or may not be desirable depending upon management
objectives. Significant productivity results in algal blooms, but some increase
in productivity will increase fish production. Drinking water containing high
nitrate concentrations may cause methomoglobinemia in small children.

Pesticide, nitrogen, and phosphorus compounds are important to agricultural

production, but prediction of their removal from the field is necessary for wise
management of both land and water resources. HSPF can be used to predict such
outflows. The agri-chemical sections of the PERLND module of HSPF simulate in
detail nutrient and pesticide processes, both biological and chemical, and the
movement of any nonreactive tracer in a land segment. These chemicals can also be
simulated in module section PQUAL, but in a simplified manner. The dynamic and
continuous processes that affect the storages and outflow of pesticides and of
nutrients from fertilized fields should be simulated in detail to fully analyze
agricultural runoff. If the situation does not require full representation of
these processes, or if data are not available, the PQUAL subroutines could be used.

Atmospheric deposition inputs can be specified in two possible ways depending on

the form of the available data. If the deposition is in the form of a flux (mass
per area per time), then it is considered "dry deposition". If the deposition is
in the form of a concentration in rainfall, then it is considered "wet deposition",
and the program automatically combines it with the input rainfall time series to
compute the resulting flux. Either type of deposition data can be input as a time
series, which covers the entire simulation period, or as a set of monthly values
that is used for each year of the simulation. The specific atmospheric deposition
time series are documented in the EXTNL table of the Time Series Catalog for module
PERLND, and are specified in the EXT SOURCES block of the UCI. The monthly values
are input in the MONTH-DATA block in the UCI.

An additional use of the atmospheric deposition time series is specifying inputs

of agricultural chemicals and fertilizers instead of changing soil storages in the
SPEC-ACTIONS block. For this purpose, deposition to the upper soil layer in
addition to the surface soil layer has been provided for in sections NITR, PHOS,
and TRACER. (Section PEST has time series only for the surface layer, since
pesticides are not normally incorporated into the soil as are fertilizers.)
Depending on the complexity of the agricultural practices being modeled, the user
should decide whether the SPEC-ACTIONS block or the time series is simpler to
construct.

The basic algorithms in the agri-chemical sections of HSPF were originally

developed for use on agricultural lands, but can be used on other pervious areas
where pesticides and plant nutrients occur, for example, orchards, nursery land,
parks, golf courses, and forests. All pervious land contains nitrogen and
phosphorus in the soil; it is possible to use this module to simulate the behavior
of agricultural chemicals in any such area.

90
 Introduction to the Agri-Chemical Sections

Comparison of HSPF and ARM

The methods used to simulate pesticide processes in the agri-chemical sections were
developed originally for the Pesticide Transport and Runoff (PTR) Model (Crawford
and Donigian, 1973), then expanded to include nutrients in the Agricultural Runoff
Management (ARM) Model (Donigian and Crawford, 1976) and tested and modified in ARM
Version II (Donigian, et al., 1977). In HSPF the ARM Version II algorithms were
recreated with some additional options. (For more detail on the basic methods,
refer to the above reports.)

The differences between HSPF and ARM Model Version II should, however, be
discussed. The biggest difference is the availability of new options to simulate
soil nutrient and pesticide adsorption and desorption. Ammonium and phosphate
adsorption/desorption in HSPF can be accomplished by using Freundlich isotherms as
well as by first-order kinetics. Pesticides can be adsorbed and desorbed by the
two Freundlich methods used in the ARM Model or by first-order kinetics. In
addition, the pesticide parameter values are now input for each separate soil layer
instead of inputting one parameter set for all the layers. HSPF also allows the
user to simulate more than one pesticide in a run. (The ARM Model only simulates
one per run). In addition to the percolation factors which can still be used to
retard any solute leaching from the upper layer and lower layer, a multiplication
factor has been introduced that can reduce leaching from the surface layer. Also,
in HSPF, nitrogen and phosphorus chemical and biochemical transformations can each
be simulated at different time steps to save computer time. Plant uptake of
ammonium is also available in HSPF.

Units

The fluxes and storages of chemicals modeled in these module sections are in mass
per area units. The user must supply the input in appropriate units; kg/ha for the
Metric system, and lb/ac for the English system. Internally, most of the code does
not differentiate between the unit systems. Fluxes are determined by either
proportionality constants, fractions of chemicals in storage, or unitless
concentrations. First-order kinetics makes use of proportionality constants for
determining reaction fluxes. Chemicals are transported based on the fractions of
that compound in storage. Freundlich adsorption/desorption is based on ppm
concentrations.

Module Sections

There are five agri-chemical module sections. They are shown in the structure
chart of PERLND (Figure 4.2(1)-1). Module section MSTLAY manipulates water
storages and fluxes calculated in module section PWATER. This section must be run
before the following sections can be run, since it supplies them with data for
simulating the storage and movement of solutes. Module section PEST simulates
pesticide behavior while NITR and PHOS simulate the plant nutrients of nitrogen and
phosphorus. Simulation of a nonreactive solute is accomplished in module section
TRACER.

91
 Module Section MSTLAY

4.2(1).8 Estimate Moisture Content of Soil Layers and Fractional Fluxes

(Section MSTLAY of Module PERLND)

Purpose

This module section estimates the storages of moisture in the four soil layers with
which the agricultural chemical sections deal (Figure 4.2(1).8-1); and the fluxes
of moisture between the storages. MSTLAY is required because the moisture storages
and fluxes computed by module section PWATER can not be directly used to simulate
solute transport through the soil. For example, in PWATER, some moisture which
infiltrates can reach the groundwater in a single time step (Figure 4.2(1).3-2).
While this phenomenon does not have any serious effect in simulating the hydrologic
response of a land segment, it does seriously affect the simulation of solute
transport.

Thus, MSTLAY takes the fluxes and storages computed in PWATER and adapts them to
fit the storage/flow path picture in Figure 4.2(1).8-1. The revised storages, in
inches of water, are also expressed in mass/area units (that is, lb/ac or kg/ha)
for use in the adsorption/desorption calculations.

Method

Figure 4.2(1).8-1 schematically diagrams the moisture storages and fluxes used in
subroutine MSTLAY. Note that the fluxes are represented in terms of both quantity
(e.g., IFWI, in inches/interval) and as a fraction of the contributing storage
(e.g., FII, as a fraction of UMST/interval). The reader should also refer to
Figure 4.2(1).3-2 in module section PWATER when studying this diagram and the
following discussion.

For the agri-chemical sections the moisture storages (the variables in Figure
4.2(1).8-1 ending in MST) are calculated by the general equation:

MST = WSTOR + WFLUX (1)

The variable WSTOR is the related storage calculated in module section PWATER
(Figure 4.2(1).3-2). For example, in the calculation of the lower layer moisture
storage (LMST), WSTOR is the lower zone storage (LZS). The variable WFLUX
generally corresponds to the flux of moisture through the soil layer. For the
computation of LMST, WFLUX is the sum of water percolating from the lower zone to
the inactive (IGWI) and active groundwater (AGWI) as determined in section PWATER.
Note that these equations are dimensionally non-homogeneous, because storages
(inches) and fluxes (inches/interval) are added together. Thus, the results given
are likely to be highly dependent on the simulation time step. The ARM Model, from
which the equations come, uses a time step of 5 minutes. Caution should be
exercised if the agricultural chemical sections (including MSTLAY) are run with any
other time step.

The upper layer has been subdivided into two storages, principal and transitory.
The transitory (interflow) storage is used to transport chemicals from the upper
layer to interflow outflow. The chemicals in it do not undergo any reactions.
However, reactions do occur in the principal storage.

92
 Module Section MSTLAY

Figure 4.2(1).8-1 Flow diagram showing transport of moisture and solutes as

estimated in the MSTLAY section of the PERLND Application
Module

93
 Module Section MSTLAY

The fluxes shown in Figure 4.2(1).8-1 are the same as those in Figure 4.2(1).3-2
with the exceptions of SDOWN and UDOWN. SDOWN encompasses all the water that moves
downward from the surface layer storage. It is the combination of the water
infiltrating from the surface detention storage directly to the lower zone (INFIL),
the inflow to the upper zone (UZI), and the water flowing into interflow storage
(IFWI). UDOWN is all the water percolating through the upper layer. It is INFIL
plus the percolation from the upper zone storage to the lower zone storage (PERC).

Each fractional solute flux is the appropriate moisture flux divided by the
contributing storage. For example, the fraction of chemical in solution that is
transported overland from the surface layer storage (FSO) is the surface moisture
outflow (SURO) divided by the surface layer moisture storage (SMST).

The above estimates are based on the assumption that the concentration of the
solute being transported is the same as that in storage. They also assume uniform
flow through the layers and continuous mixing of the solutes. However, these
assumptions may need to be revised or implemented differently for some of the
transport. Past testing has shown that the above method leads to excessive
leaching of solutes (Donigian, et al., 1977). Factors that retard solute leaching
were added in the ARM Model Version II to remedy this problem. For the surface
layer, the percolation factor (SLMPF) affects the solute fraction percolating (FSP)
by the relationship:

FSP = SLMPF*SDOWN/SMST (2)

The variables SDOWN and SMST are defined in Figure 4.2(1).8-1. FSP will typically
be between 0 and 1.

For the upper or lower layer percolating fraction (FUP, FLDP, or FLP), the
retardation factor only has an influence when the ratio of the respective zone
storage to the nominal storage times the factor (ZS/(ZSN*LPF)) is less than one.
The relationship under this condition is:

F = (ZS/(ZSN*LPF))*(PFLUX/MST) (3)

where:
F = layer solute percolating fraction
ZS = zone moisture storage, either UZS or LZS
ZSN = zone nominal moisture storage, either UZSN or LZSN
LPF = factor which retards solute leaching for the layer,
either ULPF or LLPF
PFLUX = percolation flux, either UDOWN, IGWI, or AGWI
MST = layer moisture storage, either UMST or LMST

94
 Module Section PEST

4.2(1).9 Simulate Pesticide Behavior in Detail

(Section PEST of Module PERLND)

Purpose

Because of the complexity of pesticide behavior on the land, simulation of the

processes frequently requires considerable detail. Pesticide applications vary in
amount and time during the year. Various pesticides adsorb and degrade
differently. Some, like paraquat, attach themselves strongly to the soil, thereby
appearing in low concentrations in water but in high concentrations on soil
particles. Others, like atrazine, undergo complex interactions with the soil and
are found in higher concentrations in the runoff water than on the eroded sediment.

Section PEST models pesticide behavior by simulating the processes of degradation

and adsorption as well as transport. The pesticides are simulated in the soil and
runoff in three forms: dissolved, adsorbed, and crystallized. These phases in the
soil affect the forms and amounts in the runoff.

Method

Pesticides are simulated by using the time series generated by other PERLND module
sections to transport and influence the adsorption and degradation processes.
Pesticides move with water flow or by association with the sediment. They also may
be adsorbed to the soil in varying degree as a function of the chemical character-
istics of the toxicant and the exchange capacity of the soil layer. Pesticide
degradation occurs to varying degrees depending upon the susceptibility of the
compound to volatilization and breakdown by light, heat, microorganisms and
chemical processes. The subroutines in module section PEST consider these
transport and reaction processes.

All the subroutines described in this module section except NONSV and DEGRAS are
accessed by other agri-chemical module sections because many of the basic transport
and reaction processes are similar. The subroutines are described here because
they are physically located in this subroutine group. Subroutine AGRGET is first
to be called. This subroutine has no computing function; it obtains any required
time series (that is not already available) from the INPAD.

Inputs of pesticide to the surface soil layer may be simulated using either or both
of two methods: 1) as changes to storage variables in the SPEC-ACTIONS block or 2)
as atmospheric deposition. However, atmospheric deposition affects only the
surface layer, so if a pesticide is incorporated into the upper soil layer, special
actions must be used.

Atmospheric deposition inputs of pesticide can be specified in two possible ways

depending on the form of the available data. If the deposition is in the form of
a flux (mass per area per time), then it is considered "dry deposition". If the
deposition is in the form of a concentration in rainfall, then it is considered
"wet deposition", and the program automatically combines it with the input rainfall
time series to compute the resulting flux. Either type of deposition data can be
input as a time series, which covers the entire simulation period, or as a set of

95
 Module Section PEST

monthly values that is used for each year of the simulation. The specific
pesticide atmospheric deposition time series are documented in the EXTNL table of
the Time Series Catalog for PERLND, and are specified in the EXT SOURCES block of
the UCI. The monthly values are input in the MONTH-DATA block in the UCI.

If atmospheric deposition data are input to the model, the surface storage is
updated for each of the three forms of each pesticide using the formula:

SPS = SPS + ADFX + PREC*ADCN (1)

where:
SPS = storage of pesticide form on the surface (mass/area)
ADFX = dry or total atmospheric deposition flux (mass/area per interval)
PREC = precipitation depth
ADCN = concentration for wet atmospheric deposition (mass/volume)

Subroutine SDFRAC determines the fraction of the surface layer soil that has
eroded. The amount eroded is the total sediment removed by scour and washoff as
determined in module section SEDMNT. The mass of soil in the surface layer is a
parameter value which does not vary even when material is removed. The chemical
which is associated with the sediment is assumed to be removed from the surface
layer storage in the same proportion that the layer has eroded. Chemical removal
is simulated in subroutine SEDMOV. A sediment associated chemical is one that may
be attached to the eroding soil or one which may move with the soil. With
pesticides the adsorbed form will be attached to the soil particle, while the
crystalline form will move with the soil particle being eroded but will not be
attached to it. Both forms are taken from their respective surface layer storages
in proportion to the fraction of the surface soil layer removed by overland flow.

Subroutines TOPMOV and SUBMOV perform a function similar to SEDMOV except they move
the solutes. Chemicals in solution move to and from the storages according to the
fractions calculated in section MSTLAY. Figure 4.2(1).9-1 schematically
illustrates the fluxes and storages used in these subroutines. The fractions
(variables beginning with the letter "F") of the storages are used to compute the
solute fluxes. The equations used to compute the solute transport fluxes from the
fractions and storages are given in the figure. Subroutine TOPMOV performs the
calculations of the fluxes and the resulting changes in storage for the topsoil
layers (surface and upper), while SUBMOV performs them for the subsurface layers
(lower and active groundwater).

Biological and chemical reactions are performed on the pesticides (and other
chemicals) in each layer storage. Chemicals in the upper layer principal storage
undergo reactions while those in the transitory (interflow) storage do not. The
upper layer transitory storage is a temporary storage of chemicals on their way to
interflow outflow. Subroutine PSTRXN is called to perform reactions on the
pesticide in each layer.

96
 Module Section PEST

Figure 4.2(1).9-1 Flow diagram showing modeled movement of chemicals in solution

97
 Module Section PEST

4.2(1).9.5 Perform Reactions on Pesticides

(subroutine PSTRXN)

Purpose

This code simulates the degradation and adsorption/desorption of pesticides. This

subroutine is called for each of the four soil layers and each pesticide.

Method of Reacting Pesticides

The user has the option of adsorbing/desorbing the pesticide by one of three
methods. The first method is by first-order kinetics. This method assumes that
the pesticide adsorbs and desorbs at a rate based on the amount in soil solution
and on the amount on the soil particle. It makes use of a proportionality constant
and is independent of the concentration. The second method is by use of the single
value Freundlich isotherm. This method makes use of a single adsorption/desorption
curve for determining the concentration on the soil and in solution. The third
method is by use of multiple curves based on a varying Freundlich K value. Further
details of these methods can be found in the discussion of the individual
subroutines that follows and in documentation of the ARM Model (Donigian and
Crawford, 1976; Donigian, et al., 1977).

Degradation is performed once a day in each of the four layers that contain
pesticide. The amount degraded is determined simply by multiplying a decay rate
parameter specified for each soil layer by each of the three forms (adsorbed,
solution, and crystalline) of pesticide in storage. The degraded amounts are then
subtracted from their respective storages. This method of simulating degradation
lumps complex processes in a simple parameter.

98
 Module Section PEST

4.2(1).9.5.1 Adsorb/Desorb Using First-Order Kinetics

(subroutine FIRORD)

Purpose

The purpose of this subroutine is to calculate the adsorption and desorption

reaction fluxes of chemicals using temperature dependent first-order kinetics.
These fluxes are calculated every simulation interval when the subroutine is called
by section PEST, but they are determined only at the designated chemical reaction
frequency when called by sections NITR and PHOS.

Method

The calculation of adsorption and desorption reaction fluxes by first-order

kinetics for soil layer temperatures less than 35 degrees C takes the form:

DES = CMAD*KDS*THKDS**(TMP-35.0) (1)

ADS = CMSU*KAD*THKAD**(TMP-35.0) (2)

where:
DES = current desorption flux of chemical (mass/area per interval)
CMAD = storage of adsorbed chemical (mass/area)
KDS = first-order desorption rate parameter (per interval)
THKDS = temperature correction parameter for desorption
TMP = soil layer temperature (degrees C)
ADS = current adsorption flux of chemical (mass/area per interval)
CMSU = storage of chemical in solution (mass/area)
KAD = first-order adsorption rate parameter (per interval)
THKAD = temperature correction parameter for adsorption
THKDS and THKAD are typically about 1.06

All of the variables except the temperature coefficients may vary with the layer
of the soil being simulated. The soil temperatures are time series which may be
input (e.g., using field data) or simulated in module section PSTEMP. The
temperature correction of the reaction rate parameter is based on the Arrhenius
equation. At temperatures of 35 degrees C or above, no correction is made. When
the temperature is at 0 degrees C or below or the soil layer is dry, no adsorption
and desorption occurs.

The storage of the solution chemical is updated every simulation interval in the
calling subroutine, that is, in PSTRXN, NITRXN, or PHORXN, by adding DES minus ADS.
Likewise, the storage of the adsorbed chemical is updated there also by adding ADS
minus DES. An adjustment is made in the calling subroutine if any of the fluxes
would cause a storage to go negative. When this happens a warning message is
produced and fluxes are adjusted so that no storage goes negative. This usually
occurs when large time steps are used in conjunction with large KAD and KDS values.

99
 Module Section PEST

4.2(1).9.5.2 Adsorb/Desorb Using the Single Value Freundlich Method

(subroutine SV)

Purpose

Subroutine SV calculates the adsorption and desorption and the resulting new
storages of a chemical using the single value Freundlich method.

Method

The Freundlich isotherm methods, unlike first-order kinetics, assume instantaneous

equilibrium. That is, no matter how much chemical is added to a particular phase,
equilibrium is assumed to be established between the solution and adsorbed phase
of the chemical. These methods also assume that for any given amount of chemical
in the soil, the equilibrium distribution of the chemical between the soil solution
and on the soil particle can be found from an isotherm. Figure 4.2(1).9-2
illustrates such an isotherm.

Three phases of the chemical are actually possible; crystalline, adsorbed, and
solution. The crystalline form is assumed to occur only when the soil layer is
dry, or when there is more chemical in the layer than the combined capacity to
adsorb and hold in solution. When the soil is dry, all the chemical is considered
to be crystalline salt. When there is more total chemical in the soil layer than
the soil adsorption sites can contain and more than that saturated in solution,
then the chemical content which exceeds these capacities is considered to be
crystalline salt. Module section PEST considers crystalline phase storage, but
module sections NITR and PHOS do not. Instead, any crystalline phosphate or
ammonium predicted by an isotherm is added to the adsorbed phase storage.

The adsorbed and solution phases of the chemical are determined in this subroutine
by the standard Freundlich equation as plotted by curve 1 in Figure 4.2(1).9-2.
When the amount of chemical is less than the capacity of the soil particle lattice
to permanently bind the chemical (XFIX), then all the material is consider fixed.
All the fixed chemical is contained in the adsorbed phase of the layer storage.
Otherwise, the Freundlich equation for curve 1 is used to determine the
partitioning of the chemical into the adsorbed and solution phases:

X = KF1*C**(1/N1) + XFIX (3)

where:
X = chemical adsorbed on soil (ppm of soil)
KF1 = single value Freundlich K coefficient
C = equilibrium chemical concentration in solution (ppm of solution)
N1 = single value Freundlich exponent
XFIX = chemical which is permanently fixed (ppm of soil)

The above equation is solved in subroutine ITER by an iteration technique. The

parameters used in the computation can differ for each layer of the soil.

100
 Module Section PEST

Figure 4.2(1).9-2 Freundlich isotherm calculations

101
 Module Section PEST

4.2(1).9.5.3 Adsorb/Desorb Using the Non-single Value Freundlich Method

(subroutine NONSV)

Purpose

The purpose of this subroutine is to calculate the adsorption/desorption of a

chemical by the nonsingle value Freundlich method. The single value Freundlich
method was found to inadequately represent the division of some pesticides between
the soil particle and solution phases, so this method was developed as an option
in the ARM Model (Donigian and Crawford, 1976). This routine is only available for
use by the PEST module section.

Method

The approach in this code uses the same algorithms and solution technique as
subroutine SV for determining curve 1 in Figure 4.2(1).9-2. However, curve 1 is
used solely for adsorption. That is, only when the concentration of the adsorbed
chemical is increasing. When desorption occurs a new curve (curve 2) is used:

X = KF2*C**(1/N2) + XFIX (4)

KF2 = (KF1/XDIF)**(N1/N2) * XDIF (5)

where:
KF2 = nonsingle value Freundlich coefficient
N2 = nonsingle value Freundlich exponent parameter
XDIF = XJCT - XFIX
XJCT = the adsorbed concentration where curve 1 joins curve 2
(i.e., where desorption started)
as shown in Figure 4.2(1).9-2 (ppm of soil)

The other variables are as defined for subroutine SV.

Once curve 2 is used, both desorption and adsorption follow it until the adsorbed
concentration is less than or equal to XFIX or until it reaches XJCT. Then,
adsorption will again take place following curve 1 until desorption reoccurs,
following a newly calculated curve 2. The solution of the Freundlich equations for
curves 1 and 2 utilizes the same iteration technique introduced in subroutine SV
(subroutine ITER).

102
 Module Section NITR

4.2(1).10 Simulate Nitrogen Behavior in Detail

(section NITR of module PERLND)

Purpose

NITR, like section PEST, simulates the behavior of chemicals in the soil profile
of a land segment. Section NITR handles the nitrogen species of nitrate, ammonia,
and organic nitrogen. This involves simulating nitrogen transport and soil
reactions. Nitrogen, like phosphorus, may be a limiting nutrient in the eutrophic-
ation process in lakes and streams. Nitrates in high concentrations may also pose
a health hazard to infants.

Method

Nitrogen species are transported by the same methods used for the pesticide forms.
The subroutines that are called to transport nitrogen are located in and described
with the PEST module section. Adsorbed ammonium and two forms of particulate
organic nitrogen (labile and refractory) are removed from the surface layer storage
by association with sediment. These processes are handled by subroutines SDFRAC
and SEDMOV. Nitrate, ammonium, and two forms of dissolved organic nitrogen (labile
and refractory) in the soil water are transported using the subroutines TOPMOV and
SUBMOV. Nitrogen reactions are simulated separately for each of the soil layers.
The methods are described below, in the discussion of subroutine NITRXN, and are
shown schematically in Figure 4.2(1).10-1.

Inputs of nitrogen to the soil

Natural and agricultural inputs of nitrogen to the surface and upper soil layers
can be simulated using either or both of two methods: 1) as changes to storage
variables in the SPEC-ACTIONS block, or 2) as atmospheric deposition inputs.
Atmospheric deposition inputs are implemented for three species: nitrate, ammonium,
and particulate labile organic nitrogen.

Atmospheric deposition inputs can be specified in two possible ways depending on

the form of the available data. If the deposition is in the form of a flux (mass
per area per time), then it is considered "dry deposition". If the deposition is
in the form of a concentration in rainfall, then it is considered "wet deposition",
and the program automatically combines it with the input rainfall time series to
compute the resulting flux. Either type of deposition data can be input as a time
series, which covers the entire simulation period, or as a set of monthly values
that is used for each year of the simulation. The specific atmospheric deposition
time series are documented in the EXTNL table of the Time Series Catalog for
PERLND, and are specified in the EXT SOURCES block of the UCI. The monthly values
are input in the MONTH-DATA block in the UCI.

If atmospheric deposition data are input to the model, the soil storage is updated
for each of the three species of nitrogen in each soil layer (surface and upper)
using the general formula:

NSTOR = NSTOR + ADFX + PREC*ADCN (1)

103
 Module Section NITR

Figure 4.2(1).10-1 Flow diagram for nitrogen reactions

104
 Module Section NITR

where:
NSTOR = storage of nitrogen species in the soil layer (mass/area)
ADFX = dry or total atmospheric deposition flux (mass/area per interval)
PREC = precipitation (depth per interval)
ADCN = concentration of nitrogen species in rainfall (mass/volume)4.2(1).10.1

Perform Reactions on Nitrogen Forms

(subroutine NITRXN)

Purpose

The purpose of NITRXN is to simulate soil nitrogen transformations. This includes

plant uptake of nitrate and ammonium, return of plant nitrogen to organic nitrogen,
denitrification or reduction of nitrate-nitrite, immobilization of nitrate-nitrite
and ammonium, mineralization of organic nitrogen, fixation of atmospheric nitrogen,
volatilization of ammonium, adsorption/desorption of ammonium, and partitioning of
two types of organic nitrogen between solution and particulate forms.

Method of Nitrogen Transformations

Adsorption/desorption of ammonium

Nitrogen reactions can be divided between those that are chemical in nature and
those that are a combination of chemical and biological reactions. The adsorption
and desorption of ammonium is a chemical process. The user has the option of
simulating ammonium adsorption and desorption by first-order kinetics with
subroutine FIRORD or by the Freundlich isotherm method with subroutine SV. These
subroutines are described in the PEST module section.

The user has the option of specifying how often the adsorption and desorption rates
are calculated. When adsorption/desorption is simulated by the Freundlich method,
the solution and adsorbed storages of ammonium are determined instantaneously at
the specified frequency of reaction. However, when the first-order method is used,
the temperature-corrected reaction fluxes (Figure 4.2(1).10-1) are recomputed
intermittently, but the storages are updated every simulation interval.

Organic Nitrogen Partitioning

Organic nitrogen is assumed to exist in the following four forms in each soil
layer.

Particulate labile
Solution labile
Particulate refractory
Solution refractory

The particulate labile species is the default form of organic N in the model; if
default values of organic N-related sorption parameters and reaction rates are
used, only this form will exist. This species is formed by immobilization of
nitrate and ammonia, and is converted back to ammonia by mineralization in the

105
 Module Section NITR

soil. It also is transported on the surface by association with sediment.

However, if the user inputs non-zero values of the parameters, it can undergo
conversion by first-order rate to the particulate refractory form, and it can also
desorb to the solution labile form. The particulate refractory species can also
desorb to the solution refractory form. The two solution species are available for
transport with surface runoff and within the soil profile, and the particulate
refractory form can be transported on the surface with sediment.

The organic nitrogen partitioning reactions (sorption-desorption) are described by

equilibrium isotherms as shown in the following equations:

KLON = PLON/SLON (2)

KRON = PRON/SRON

where:
KLON and KRON = partition coefficients for the labile and refractory
organic nitrogen, respectively (-)
PLON = particulate labile organic N (lb N/ac or kg N/ha)
SLON = solution labile organic N (lb N/ac or kg N/ha)
PRON = particulate refractory organic N (lb N/ac or kg N/ha)
SRON = solution refractory organic N (lb N/ac or kg N/ha)

The four organic nitrogen forms and their assorted reactions are illustrated in
Figure 4.2(1).10-1. Note that the storages and transformations in this figure are
generally repeated in each soil layer except for the aboveground plant N and the
litter compartments.

Note that the three new organic nitrogen state variables described above are always
present in the NITR module, i.e., they are not optional. However, in order to make
the program compatible with previous versions, the default inputs result in the
three new forms maintaining zero concentrations; therefore, there should be no
impact on the simulation results of existing applications when using the current
version of HSPF.

Other Nitrogen Transformations

The other reactions are a combination of biological and chemical transformations.

All of these reactions can be modeled using first-order kinetics; optional
algorithms can be used for plant uptake of N and immobilization of organic N. The
optimum first-order kinetic rate parameter is corrected for soil temperatures below
35 degrees C by the generalized equation:

KK = K*TH**(TMP-35.0) (3)

where:
KK = temperature-corrected first-order reaction rate (/interval)
K = optimum first-order reaction rate at 35 degrees C (/interval)
TH = temperature correction coefficient for reaction (typically about 1.06)
TMP = soil layer temperature (degrees C)

106
 Module Section NITR

When temperatures are greater than 35 degrees C, the rate is considered optimum,
that is, KK is set equal to K. When the temperature of the soil layer is below 4
degrees C or the layer is dry, no biochemical transformations occur.

The corrected reaction rate parameters are determined every biochemical reaction
interval and multiplied by the respective storages as shown in Figure 4.2(1).10-1
to obtain the reaction fluxes. Plant uptake can vary monthly and can be
distributed between nitrate and ammonium by the parameters NO3UTF and NH4UTF.
These parameters are intended to designate the fraction of plant uptake from each
species of N; the sum of NO3UTF and NH4UTF should be 1.0.

The biochemical reaction rate fluxes that are shown in Figure 4.2(1).10-1 are
coupled, that is, added to and subtracted from the storages simultaneously. The
coupling of the fluxes is efficient in use of computer time, but has a tendency to
produce unrealistic negative storages when large reaction intervals and large
reaction rates are used jointly. A method is used which modifies the reaction
fluxes so that they do not produce negative storages. A warning message is issued
when this modification occurs.

Immobilization of nitrate and ammonia (conversion to particulate labile organic N)

can be simulated using either first-order kinetics as described above, or a
saturation kinetics (Michaelis-Menten) method. The saturation kinetics option is
intended primarily for forests, and is activated when NUPTFG = 2 or -2. Details
of this option are presented below, under plant uptake optional methods.

Ammonia Volatilization

Ammonia volatilization is included as an optional (AMVOFG = 1) first-order reaction

in order to allow large concentrations of ammonia in the soil, resulting from
animal waste and fertilizer applications, to be attenuated by losses to the
atmosphere. The original formulation by Reddy et al., (1979) included adjustment
for variable soil cation exchange capacity (CEC) and wind speed, and it could be
"turned off" after seven days. In HSPF, it is assumed that: (1) the CEC factor can
be incorporated into the first-order rate constant by the user, and (2) the wind
(air flow) is always high enough to result in maximum loss; Reddy's original method
reduced the volatilization rate only when wind speed was less than 1.4 km/day.
Downward adjustment of the rate, after an initial period of high losses, requires
use of the Special Actions capability.

The temperature correction for volatilization of ammonia is slightly different than

the standard method used for the other reactions. The reference temperature is
user-specified, instead of 35 degrees C, since rates in the literature are often
given at a temperature of 20 degrees C. Also, instead of attaining a maximum value
at the reference temperature, the volatilization rate is adjusted upwards when the
soil temperature exceeds the reference temperature.

Plant nitrogen

The user can select between two optional scenarios for simulating plant nitrogen.
If ALPNFG = 0, plant N is simulated in each of the four standard soil layers (i.e.,
surface, upper, lower, and active groundwater). If ALPNFG = 1, plant N is also
simulated in above-ground and litter compartments, in addition to the standard

107
 Module Section NITR

below-ground layers. Plant N simulation involves uptake of ammonium and nitrate

by the plant, and "return" of plant N to organic N in the soil. Above-ground plant
N returns to the litter compartment, and litter plant N returns to the particulate
organic N compartments in the surface and upper soil layers. These return
"reactions" from above-ground plant N to litter and from litter to surface/upper
organic N are simulated using first-order kinetics. No other reactions affect
these nitrogen storages except for plant uptake to the above-ground compartment.

Return of plant N to particulate organic N is divided into labile and refractory

fractions. By using default values of the return parameters, all plant return
becomes labile organic N.

Optional Methods for Modeling Plant Uptake of Nitrogen

There are three optional methods for simulating plant uptake, including the
default, first-order method described above. These options are selected using the
input flag NUPTFG.

The second method for simulating plant uptake is to use a yield-based algorithm
(NUPTFG = 1). This approach is a modification of the algorithm used in the Nitrate
Leaching and Economic Analysis Package (NLEAP model) (Shaffer et al, 1991). It is
designed to be less sensitive to soil nutrient levels and nutrient application
rates than the first-order rate approach (NUPTFG = 0); thus, it allows crop needs
to be satisfied, subject to nutrient and moisture availability, without being
calculated as a direct function of the soil nutrient level. This approach allows
a better representation of nutrient management practices, since uptake levels will
not change dramatically with changes in application rates.

In this method, a total annual target, NUPTGT, is specified by the user, and is
then divided into monthly targets during the crop growing season; the target is
further divided into the four soil layers. The monthly target for each soil layer
is calculated as:

MONTGT= NUPTGT* NUPTFM(MON)* NUPTM(MON)* CRPFRC(MON,ICROP) (4)

where:
MONTGT= monthly plant uptake target for current crop (lb N/ac or kg N/ha)
NUPTGT= total annual uptake target (lb N/ac or kg N/ha)
NUPTFM= monthly fraction of total annual uptake target (-)
NUPTM = soil layer fraction of monthly uptake target (-)
CRPFRC= fraction of monthly uptake target for current crop (-)

This is 1.0 unless the month contains parts of two or more crop
seasons, in which case the monthly uptake target is divided
among the crops according to the number of days of the month
belonging to each season.
MON = current month
ICROP = index for current crop

Planting and harvesting dates can be specified for up to three separate crops
during the year. Plant uptake is assumed to occur only during a growing season,
defined as the time period between planting and harvest. When portions of two

108
 Module Section NITR

growing seasons are contained within one month, the total monthly target is divided
between the two crops in proportion to the number of days in each season in that
month. The daily target is calculated by starting at zero at the beginning of a
crop season and using a trapezoidal rule to solve for monthly boundaries; linear
interpolation is used to solve for daily values between the monthly boundaries, and
between a monthly boundary and a planting or harvest date.

Yield-based plant uptake only occurs when the soil moisture is above the wilting
point, which is specified by the user for each soil layer. No temperature rate
adjustment is performed, but all uptake is stopped when soil temperature is below
4 degrees C. If the uptake target is not met during a given interval, whether from
nutrient, temperature, or moisture stress, then an uptake deficit is accumulated,
and applied to the next interval's target. When uptake later becomes possible, the
program will attempt to make up the deficit by taking up nitrogen at a rate higher
than the normal daily target, up to a user-specified maximum defined as a multiple
of the target rate. The deficit is tracked for each soil layer, and is reset to
zero at harvest, i.e. it does not carry over from one crop season to the next.

When using the yield-based plant uptake option, it is also possible to represent
leguminous plants (e.g. soybeans) that will fix nitrogen from the atmosphere. The
algorithm is designed to allow N fixation only to make up any shortfall in soil
nitrogen, i.e., fixation is only allowed if the available soil nitrogen (nitrate
and solution ammonium) is insufficient to satisfy the target uptake. The maximum
daily nitrogen fixation rate is subject to the same limits as the uptake under
deficit conditions noted above.

The third option for simulating plant uptake is to use a Michaelis-Menten or

saturation kinetics method. This algorithm is included in HSPF primarily for
simulating forested areas, and whenever it is selected, the same method is also
used to simulate immobilization of ammonium and nitrate. Saturation kinetics is
activated for both uptake and immobilization by setting NUPTFG to 2 or -2.

The user specifies a maximum rate and a half-saturation constant for each of the
four processes (uptake of nitrate and ammonia, and immobilization of nitrate and
ammonia). The input maximum rates can vary monthly. The corresponding reaction
fluxes are computed using the general equation:

FLUX = KK * CONC / (CS + CONC) (5)

where:
FLUX = amount of flux (mg/l/interval)
KK = temperature corrected maximum rate (mg/l/interval)
CONC = concentration of nitrogen species in soil layer (mg/l)
CS = half-saturation constant (mg/l)

The flux is then converted to units of mass per interval.

Regardless of the option used to simulate plant uptake, if the above-ground and
litter compartments are being simulated, then the user can specify the fraction of
uptake from each layer that goes to the above-ground plant N storage. The
remainder is assumed to become plant N within that soil layer.

109
 Module Section PHOS

4.2(1).11 Simulate Phosphorous Behavior in Detail

(Section PHOS of Module PERLND)

Purpose

Module section PHOS simulates the behavior of phosphorus in a pervious land

segment. This involves modeling the transport, plant uptake, adsorption/
desorption, immobilization, and mineralization of the various forms of phosphorus.
Because phosphorus is readily tied to soil and sediment, it is usually scarce in
streams and lakes. In fact, in many cases it is the limiting nutrient in the
eutrophication process. Because of its scarcity, accurate simulation is
particularly important.

Method

The method used to transport and react phosphorus is the same as that used for
nitrogen in module section NITR. The subroutines used to transport phosphorus are
described in module section PEST. Organic phosphorus and adsorbed phosphate are
removed with sediment by calling subroutine SEDMOV. Phosphate in solution is
transported in the moving water using subroutines TOPMOV and SUBMOV. Phosphorus
reactions are simulated in the soil by subroutine PHORXN.

Inputs of the two species of phosphorus to the surface and upper soil layers,
natural or agricultural, can be simulated using either or both of two methods:
1) as changes to storage variables in the SPEC-ACTIONS block, or 2) as atmospheric
deposition.

Atmospheric deposition inputs can be specified in two possible ways depending on

the form of the available data. If the deposition is in the form of a flux (mass
per area per time), then it is considered "dry deposition". If the deposition is
in the form of a concentration in rainfall, then it is considered "wet deposition",
and the program automatically combines it with the input rainfall time series to
compute the resulting flux. Either type of deposition data can be input as a time
series, which covers the entire simulation period, or as a set of monthly values
that is used for each year of the simulation. The specific atmospheric deposition
time series are documented in the EXTNL table of the Time Series Catalog for
PERLND, and are specified in the EXT SOURCES block of the UCI. The monthly values
are input in the MONTH-DATA block in the UCI.

If atmospheric deposition data are input to the model, the soil storage is updated
for each of the two species of phosphorus for both affected soil layers using the
formula:

P = P + ADFX + PREC*ADCN (1)

where:
P = storage of phosphorus species in the soil layer (mass/area)
ADFX = dry or total atmospheric deposition flux (mass/area per interval)
PREC = precipitation depth
ADCN = concentration for wet atmospheric deposition (mass/volume)

110
 Module Section PHOS

In subroutine PHORXN, phosphate is adsorbed and desorbed by either first-order

kinetics or by the Freundlich method. The mechanics of these methods are described
in module section PEST. As with the simulation of ammonium adsorption/desorption,
the frequency of this chemical reaction for phosphate can also be specified.
Unlike ammonium, typically phosphate includes a large portion which is not attached
to the soil particle but is combined with cations. This is because phosphate is
much less soluble with the ions found in soils than ammonium.

Other reactions performed by subroutine PHORXN include mineralization,

immobilization, and plant uptake. These are accomplished using temperature
dependent, first-order kinetics; the same method used for the nitrogen reactions.
As for nitrogen, a yield-based plant uptake option is available for phosphorus and
is activated with PUPTFG = 1. The saturation-kinetics option for uptake and
immobilization, however, is not available for phosphorus. The only other
difference between nitrogen and phosphorus plant uptake is that only solution
phosphate can be taken up by the plant and no fixation process is modeled. The
general description of these processes is in module section NITR. Figure
4.2(1).11-1 shows the parameters and equations used to calculate the reaction
fluxes for phosphorus. Reactions are simulated for each of the four soil layers
using separate parameter sets for each layer. As with nitrogen, the biochemical
phosphate reaction fluxes of mineralization, immobilization, and plant uptake can
be determined at an interval less frequent than the basic simulation interval.

111
 Module Section PHOS

Figure 4.2(1).11-1 Flow diagram for phosphorus reactions

112
 Module Section TRACER

4.2(1).12 Simulate Movement of a Tracer (Section TRACER of Module PERLND)

Purpose

The purpose of this code is to simulate the movement of any nonreactive tracer
(conservative) in a pervious land segment. Chloride, bromide, and dyes are
commonly used tracers which can be simulated by section TRACER. Also, total
dissolved salts could possibly be modeled by this section. Typically, this code
is applied to chloride to calibrate solute movement through the soil profile. This
involves adjustment of the percolation retardation factors (see section MSTLAY)
until good agreement with observed chloride concentrations has been obtained. Once
these factors have been calibrated, they are used to simulate the transport of
other solutes, such as nitrate.

Method of Simulating Tracer Transport

Tracer simulation uses the agri-chemical solute transport subroutines TOPMOV and
SUBMOV which are described in section PEST. No reactions are modeled.

Inputs of the tracer substance to the surface and upper soil layers can be
simulated using either or both of two methods: 1) as changes to storage variables
in the SPEC-ACTIONS block, or 2) as atmospheric deposition.

Atmospheric deposition inputs can be specified in two possible ways depending on

the form of the available data. If the deposition is in the form of a flux (mass
per area per time), then it is considered "dry deposition". If the deposition is
in the form of a concentration in rainfall, then it is considered "wet deposition",
and the program automatically combines it with the input rainfall time series to
compute the resulting flux. Either type of deposition data can be input as a time
series, which covers the entire simulation period, or as a set of monthly values
that is used for each year of the simulation. The specific atmospheric deposition
time series are documented in the EXTNL table of the Time Series Catalog for
PERLND, and are specified in the EXT SOURCES block of the UCI. The monthly values
are input in the MONTH-DATA block in the UCI.

If atmospheric deposition data are input to the model, then the soil storage of
tracer is updated for both affected soil layers using the formula:

T = T + ADFX + PREC*ADCN (1)

where:
T = storage of tracer in the soil layer (mass/area)
ADFX = dry or total atmospheric deposition flux (mass/area per interval)
PREC = precipitation depth
ADCN = concentration for wet atmospheric deposition (mass/volume)

113
 Module IMPLND

4.2(2) Simulate an Impervious Land Segment (Module IMPLND)

In an impervious land segment, little or no infiltration occurs. However, land

surface processes do occur as illustrated in Figure 4.2(2)-1. Snow may accumulate
and melt, and water may be stored or may evaporate. Various water quality
constituents accumulate and are removed. Water, solids, and various pollutants
flow from the segments by moving laterally to a downslope segment or to a
reach/reservoir.

Module IMPLND simulates these processes. The sections of IMPLND and their
functions are given in the structure chart shown in Figure 4.2(2)-2. They are
executed from left to right. Many of them are similar to the corresponding
sections in the PERLND module. In fact, since sections SNOW and ATEMP perform
functions that can be applied to pervious or impervious segments, they are shared
by both modules. IWATER is analogous to PWATER in module PERLND; SOLIDS is
analogous to SEDMNT; IWTGAS is analogous to PWTGAS; and IQUAL is analogous to
PQUAL. However, the IMPLND sections are simpler since they contain no infiltration
function and consequently no subsurface flows.

4.2(2).3 Simulate the Water Budget for an Impervious Land Segment

(Section IWATER of Module IMPLND)

Purpose

Section IWATER simulates the retention, routing, and evaporation of water from an
impervious land segment.

Method

Section IWATER is similar to section PWATER of the PERLND module. However, IWATER
is simpler because there is no infiltration and consequently no subsurface
processes. IWATER is composed of the parent subroutine plus three subordinate
subroutines: RETN, IROUTE, and EVRETN. RETN is analogous to ICEPT, IROUTE is
analogous to PROUTE, and EVRETN is analogous to EVICEP in module section PWATER.
The time series requirements are the same as for section PWATER.

Figure 4.2(2).3-1 schematically represents the fluxes and storages simulated in

module section IWATER. Moisture (SUPY) is supplied by precipitation, or under snow
conditions, it is supplied by the rain not falling on the snowpack plus the water
yielded by the snowpack. This moisture is available for retention; subroutine RETN
performs the retention functions. Lateral surface inflow (SURLI) may also be
retained if the user so specifies by setting the flag parameter RTLIFG=1.
Otherwise, retention inflow (RETI) equals SUPY. Moisture exceeding the retention
capacity overflows the storage and is available for runoff.

114
 Module IMPLND

Figure 4.2(2)-1 Impervious land segment processes

115
 Module IMPLND

Figure 4.2(2)-2 Structure chart for IMPLND Module

116
 Module IMPLND

Figure 4.2(2).3-1 Hydrologic Processes

117
 Module Section IWATER

The retention capacity, defined by the parameter RETSC, can be used to designate
any retention of moisture which does not reach the overland flow plane. RETSC may
be used to represent roof top catchments, asphalt wetting, urban vegetation,
improper drainage, or any other containment of water that will never flow from the
land segment. The user may supply the retention capacity on a monthly basis to
account for seasonal variations, or may supply one value designating a fixed
capacity.

Water held in retention storage is removed by evaporation (IMPEV). The amount

evaporated is determined in subroutine EVRETN. Potential evaporation is an input
time series.

Retention outflow (RETO) is combined with any lateral inflow when RTLIFG=0
producing the total inflow to the detention storage (SURI). Water remaining in the
detention storage plus any inflow is considered the moisture supply. The moisture
supply is routed from the land surface in subroutine IROUTE.

4.2(2).3.2 Determine How Much of the Moisture Supply Runs Off

(subroutine IROUTE)

Purpose

The purpose of subroutine IROUTE is to determine how much of the moisture supply
runs off the impervious surface in one simulation interval.

Method of Routing

A method similar to that used in module PERLND (Section 4.2(1).3.2.1.3) is employed

to route overland flow.

118
 Module Section SOLIDS

4.2(2).4 Simulate Accumulation and Removal of Solids

(Section SOLIDS of Module IMPLND)

Purpose

Module section SOLIDS simulates the accumulation and removal of solids by runoff
and other means from the impervious land segment. The solids outflow may be used
in section IQUAL to simulate quality constituents associated with particulates.

Method

The equations used in this section are based on those in the NPS Model (Donigian
and Crawford, 1976b). Figure 4.2(2).4-1 schematically represents the fluxes and
storages simulated by section SOLIDS. Lateral input of solids by water flow is a
user designated option. Washoff of solids may be simulated by one of two ways.
One subroutine is similar to the method used in the NPS Model. However, this
method is dimensionally nonhomogeneous. That is, a flux and a storage are added
making the answer more interval dependent. This technique was designed for 15-min
intervals. The other subroutine is dimensionally homogenous, since only a flux
term is used in the solution.

The accumulation and removal of solids which occurs independently of runoff (e.g.,
by atmospheric fallout, street cleaning) is handled in subroutine ACCUM.

4.2(2).4.1 Washoff Solids Using Method 1

(subroutine SOSLD1)

Purpose

Subroutines SOSLD1 and SOSLD2 perform the same task, but by different methods.
They simulate the washoff of solids from an impervious land segment.

Method

When simulating the washoff of solids, the transport capacity of the overland flow
is estimated and compared to the amount of solids available. The transport
capacity is calculated by the equation:

STCAP = DELT60*KEIM*((SURS + SURO)/DELT60)**JEIM (1)

where:
STCAP = capacity for removing solids (tons/ac per interval)
DELT60 = hours per interval
KEIM = coefficient for transport of solids
SURS = surface water storage (inches)
SURO = surface outflow of water (in/interval)
JEIM = exponent for transport of solids

119
 Module Section SOLIDS

Figure 4.2(2).4-1 Flow diagram of the SOLIDS section of the IMPLND Application
Module

120
 Module Section SOLIDS

When STCAP is greater than the amount of solids in storage, washoff is calculated
by:

SOSLD = SLDS*SURO/(SURS + SURO) (2)

If the storage is sufficient to fulfill the transport capacity, then the following
relationship is used:

SOSLD = STCAP*SURO/(SURS + SURO) (3)

where:
SOSLD = washoff of solids (tons/ac per interval)
SLDS = solids storage (tons/ac)

SOSLD is then subtracted from SLDS.

Subroutine SOSLD1 differs from SOSLD2 in that it uses the dimensionally

nonhomogeneous term (SURS + SURO)/DELT60 in the above equations, while SOSLD2 uses
the homogeneous term SURO/DELT60.

4.2(2).4.2 Washoff Solids Using Method 2

(subroutine SOSLD2)

Purpose

The purpose of this subroutine is the same as SOSLD1. It only differs in method.

Method of Determining Removal

Unlike subroutine SOSLD1, this method of determining sediment removal makes use of
the dimensionally homogeneous term SURO/DELT60 instead of (SURO+SURS)/DELT60 in the
following equation.

STCAP = DELT60*KEIM*(SURO/DELT60)**JEIM (4)

When STCAP is more than the amount of solids in storage, the flow washes off all
of the solids storage (SLDS). However, when STCAP is less than the amount of
solids in storage, the situation is transport limiting, so SOSLD is equal to STCAP.

121
 Module Section SOLIDS

4.2(2).4.3 Accumulate and Remove Solids Independently of Runoff

(subroutine ACCUM)

Purpose

Subroutine ACCUM simulates the accumulation and removal of solids independently of

runoff; for example, atmospheric fallout and street cleaning.

Method

The storage is updated once a day, on those days when precipitation did not occur
during the previous day, using the equation:

SLDS = ACCSDP + SLDSS*(1.0 - REMSDP) (5)

where:
ACCSDP = accumulation rate of the solids storage (tons/ac per day)
SLDS = solids in storage at end of day (tons/ac)
SLDSS = solids in storage at start of day (tons/ac)
REMSDP = unit removal rate of solids in storage
(i.e., fraction removed per day)

ACCSDP and REMSDP may be input on a monthly basis to account for seasonal
variations.

Note: if no runoff occurs, Equation 5 will cause the solids storage to

asymptotically approach a limiting value. The limit, found by setting SLDS and
SLDSS to the same value (SLDSL), is:

SLDSL = ACCSDP/REMSDP (6)

122
 Module Section IWTGAS

4.2(2).5 Estimate Water Temperature and Dissolved Gas Concentrations

(Section IWTGAS of Module IMPLND)

Purpose

IWTGAS estimates the water temperature and concentrations of dissolved oxygen and
carbon dioxide in the outflow from the impervious land segment.

Method

Outflow temperature is estimated by the following regression equation:

SOTMP = AWTF + BWTF*AIRTC (1)

where:
SOTMP = impervious surface runoff temperature (degrees C)
AWTF = Y-intercept
BWTF = slope
AIRTC = air temperature (degrees C)

The parameters AWTF and BWTF may be input on a monthly basis. When snowmelt
contributes to the outflow, SOTMP is set equal to 0.5.

The dissolved oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations of the overland flow are
assumed to be at saturation and are calculated as direct functions of water
temperature. IWTGAS uses the following empirical nonlinear equation to relate
dissolved oxygen at saturation to water temperature (Committee on Sanitary
Engineering Research, 1960):

SODOX = (14.652 + SOTMP*(-0.41022 +

SOTMP*(0.007991 - 0.000077774*SOTMP)))*ELEVGC (2)

where:
SODOX = concentration of dissolved oxygen in surface outflow (mg/l)
SOTMP = surface outflow temperature (degrees C)
ELEVGC = correction factor for elevation above sea level
(ELEVGC is calculated by the Run Interpreter dependent
upon mean elevation of the segment)

The empirical equation for dissolved carbon dioxide concentration of the overland
flow (Harnard and Davis, 1943) is:

SOCO2 = (10**(2385.73/ABSTMP - 14.0184 + 0.0152642*ABSTMP)) (3)

*0.000316*ELEVGC*12000.0

where:
SOCO2 = concentration of dissolved carbon dioxide in
surface outflow (mg C/l)
ABSTMP = absolute temperature of surface outflow (degrees K)

123
 Module Section IQUAL

4.2(2).6 Simulate Washoff of Quality Constituents Using Simple Relationships

with Solids and Water Yield (Section IQUAL of Module IMPLND)

Purpose

The IQUAL module section simulates water quality constituents or pollutants in the
outflows from an impervious land segment using simple relationships with water
yield and/or solids. Any constituent can be simulated by this module section. The
user supplies the name, units and parameter values appropriate to each of the
constituents that are needed in the simulation. Note that more detailed methods
of simulating solids, heat, dissolved oxygen, and dissolved carbon dioxide removal
from the impervious land segment are available in other sections of IMPLND.

Approach

The basic algorithms used to simulate quality constituents are a synthesis of those
used in the NPS Model (Donigian and Crawford, 1976b) and HSP QUALITY (Hydrocomp,
1977). However, some options and combinations are unique to HSPF.

Figure 4.2(2).6-1 shows schematically the fluxes and storages represented in module
section IQUAL. A quality constituent may be simulated by two methods. One
approach is to simulate the constituent by association with solids removal. The
other approach is to simulate it by using atmospheric deposition and/or basic
accumulation and depletion rates together with depletion by washoff; that is,
constituent outflow from the surface is a function of the water flow and the
constituent in storage. A combination of the two methods may be used in which the
individual fluxes are added to obtain the total surface outflow. These approaches
will be discussed further in the descriptions of the corresponding subroutines.

IQUAL allows the user to simulate up to 10 quality constituents at a time. If a

constituent is considered to be associated with solids, it is called a QUALSD. The
corresponding term for constituents associated directly with overland flow is
QUALOF. Each of the 10 constituents may be defined as either a QUALSD or a QUALOF
or both. Note that only a QUALOF may receive atmospheric deposition, since it is
the only type to maintain a storage. However, no more than seven of any one of
the constituent types (QUALSD or QUALOF) may be simulated in one operation. The
program uses a set of flag pointers to keep track of these associations. For
example, QSDFP(3)=0 means that the third constituent is not associated with solids,
whereas QSDFP(6)=4 means that the sixth constituent is the fourth solids associated
constituent (QUALSD). Similar flag pointer arrays are used to indicate whether or
not a quality constituent is a QUALOF.

4.2(2).6.1 Remove by Association with Solids (subroutine WASHSD)

Purpose

WASHSD simulates the removal of a quality constituent from the impervious land
surface by association with the solids removal determined in section SOLIDS.

124
 Module Section IQUAL

Figure 4.2(2).6-1 Flow diagram for IQUAL section of IMPLND Application Module

125
 Module Section IQUAL

Method

This approach assumes that the particular quality constituent removed from the land
surface is in proportion to the solids removal. The relation is specified by
user-input "potency factors." Potency factors indicate the constituent strength
relative to the solids removal from the surface. For each quality constituent
associated with solids, the user supplies separate potency factors. The user is
also able to supply monthly potency factors for constituents that vary somewhat
consistently throughout the year.

Removal of the solids associated constituent by solids washoff is simulated by:

SOQS = SOSLD*POTFW (1)

where:
SOQS = flux of constituent associated with solids washoff
(quantity/ac per interval)
SOSLD = washoff of detached solids (tons/ac per interval)
POTFW = washoff potency factor (quantity/ton)

The unit "quantity" refers to mass units (pounds or tons in the English system) or
some other quantity, such as number of organisms for coliforms. The user specifies
the units of "quantity."

4.2(2).6.2 Accumulate and Remove by a Constant Unit Rate and by Overland Flow
(subroutine WASHOF)

Purpose

WASHOF simulates the accumulation of a quality constituent on the impervious land

surface and its removal by a constant unit rate and by overland flow.

Method

This subroutine differs from subroutine WASHSD in that the storage of the quality
constituent is simulated. The stored constituent can be accumulated and removed
by processes which are independent of storm events, such as cleaning, decay, and
wind deposition, and it is washed off by overland flow. The accumulation and
removal rates can have monthly values to account for seasonal fluctuations. The
constituent may, alternatively or additionally, receive atmospheric deposition.

Atmospheric deposition inputs can be specified in two possible ways depending on

the form of the available data. If the deposition is in the form of a flux (mass
per area per time), then it is considered "dry deposition". If it is in the form
of a concentration in rainfall, then it is considered "wet deposition", and HSPF
automatically combines it with the input rainfall time series to compute the
resulting flux. Either type of deposition data can be input as a time series,
which covers the entire simulation period, or as a set of monthly values that is
used for each year of the simulation. The atmospheric deposition time series are
documented in the EXTNL table of the Time Series Catalog for IMPLND, and are input
in the EXT SOURCES block. The monthly values are input in the MONTH-DATA block.

126
 Module Section IQUAL

If atmospheric deposition data are input, the surface storage is updated:

SQO = SQO + ADFX + PREC*ADCN (1)

where:
SQO = storage of available quality constituent on the surface
(mass/area)
ADFX = dry or total atmospheric deposition flux (mass/area per interval)
PREC = precipitation depth
ADCN = concentration for wet atmospheric deposition (mass/volume)

When there is surface outflow and some quality constituent is in storage, then
washoff is simulated using the commonly used relationship:

SOQO = SQO*(1.0 - EXP(-SURO*WSFAC)) (2)

where:
SOQO = washoff of the quality constituent from the land
surface (quantity/ac per interval)
SQO = storage of the quality constituent on the surface (quantity/ac)
SURO = surface outflow of water (in/interval)
WSFAC = susceptibility of the quality constituent to washoff (/inch)
EXP = exponential function

The storage is updated once a day to account for accumulation and removal which
occurs independent of runoff by the equation:

SQO = ACQOP + SQOS*(1.0 - REMQOP) (3)

where:
ACQOP = accumulation rate of the constituent (quantity/ac per day)
SQOS = SQO at the start of the interval
REMQOP = unit removal rate of the stored constituent (per day)

The Run Interpreter computes REMQOP and WSFAC for this subroutine according to:

REMQOP = ACQOP/SQOLIM (4)

where:
SQOLIM = asymptotic limit for SQO as time approaches infinity,
if no washoff occurs (quantity/ac),
and

WSFAC = 2.30/WSQOP (5)

where:
WSQOP = rate of surface runoff that results in 90% washoff in 1 hour (in/hr)

Since the unit removal rate (REMQOP) is computed from two other parameters, it is
not supplied directly by the user.

127
 Module RCHRES

4.2(3) Simulate a Free-flowing Reach or Mixed Reservoir

(Module RCHRES)

This module simulates the processes which occur in a single reach of open or closed
channel or a completely mixed lake. For convenience, such a processing unit is
referred to as a RCHRES throughout this documentation. In keeping with the
assumption of complete mixing, the RCHRES consists of a single zone situated
between two nodes, which are the extremities of the RCHRES.

Flow through a RCHRES is assumed to be unidirectional. The inflow and outflow of

materials through a RCHRES are illustrated in Figure 4.2(3)-1. Water and other
constituents which arrive from other RCHRES's and local sources enter the RCHRES
through a single gate (INFLO). Outflows may leave the RCHRES through one of
several gates or exits (OFLO). A RCHRES can have up to five OFLO exits.
Precipitation, evaporation, and other fluxes also influence the processes which
occur in the RCHRES, but do not pass through the exits.

The ten major subdivisions of the RCHRES module and their functions are shown in
Figure 4.2(3)-2. RPTOT, RBAROT, and RPRINT perform the storage and printout of
results from the other module sections of RCHRES (HYDR through RQUAL). Within a
module section, simulation of physical processes (longitudinal advection, sinking,
benthal release) is always performed before simulation of biochemical processes.

The user specifies which module sections are active. If any "quality" sections
(CONS through RQUAL) are active, section ADCALC must also be active; it computes
certain quantities needed to simulate advection of the quality constituents.
Besides fulfilling this requirement, the user must ensure that all the time series
required by the active sections are available, either as supplied input time series
or as data computed by another module section. For example, if RQUAL is active,
the water temperature must be supplied, either as an input time series or by
activating section HTRCH which will compute it.

Water Rights Categories

The HYDR section of RCHRES allows the optional simulation of water "categories",
which are used to facilitate the modeling of water rights or ownership. If this
option is turned on (by including the CATEGORY block in the UCI), each RCHRES in
the run keeps track of the user-defined categories of all inflows, storages, and
outflows, as well as precipitation and evaporation fluxes. Up to 100 categories
can be specified in the CATEGORY block. Details of this option are provided in the
discussion of HYDR below (Section 4.2(3).1), and the CATEGORY block documentation
(Section 4.12 of Part F). Also, refer to the description of HYDR inputs in Section
4.4(3).2 of Part F.

128
 Module RCHRES

Figure 4.2(3)-1 Flow of materials through a RCHRES

129
 Module RCHRES

Figure 4.2(3)-2 Structure chart for RCHRES Module

130
 Module RCHRES

4.2(3).01 Simulate Sinking of Suspended Material

(subroutine SINK)

Purpose

SINK calculates the quantity of material settling out of a RCHRES and determines
the resultant change in concentration of the material within the RCHRES.

Method

The portion of material settling out of a RCHRES during an interval is calculated

by the equation:

SNKOUT = CONC*(KSET/AVDEPE) (1)

where:
SNKOUT = fraction of material which settles out (reduction of
concentration/interval)
CONC = concentration of material before deposition
KSET = sinking rate (ft/interval) (dependent upon RCHRES
characteristics and type of material)
AVDEPE = average depth of water (feet)

In any interval in which KSET is greater than AVDEPE, all the material in the
RCHRES sinks out of the water.

The mass of material sinking out of the RCHRES is calculated as:

SNKMAT = SNKOUT*VOL (2)

where:
SNKMAT = mass of material that settles out during the interval
(mass.ft3/l/interval or mass.m3/l/interval)
VOL = volume of water in RCHRES (ft3 or m3)

131
 Module Section HYDR

4.2(3).1 Simulate Hydraulic Behavior (Section HYDR of Module RCHRES)

Purpose

The purpose of this code is to simulate the hydraulic processes occurring in a

reach or a mixed reservoir (RCHRES). The final goal of the process may be to route
floods, study reservoir behavior, or analyze constituents dissolved in the water.

Schematic View of Fluxes and Storage

Figure 4.2(3).1-1 shows the principal state variable (stored volume) and fluxes
with which this part of HSPF deals.

All water entering the RCHRES from surface and subsurface sources arrives through
"gate" INFLO; this quantity is called IVOL. The user indicates the time series
which enter this gate in the EXT SOURCES or NETWORK Block in the User's Control
Input (UCI). If no time series are specified, the system assumes the RCHRES has
zero inflow.

The volume of water which leaves the RCHRES during a simulation time interval,
through gate OFLO(N), is called OVOL(N). The total outflow is ROVOL.

The input of water from precipitation falling directly on the water surface and the
loss of water by evaporation from the surface can also be considered. The user
activates these options by supplying the time series PREC and/or POTEV in the
User's Control Input (External Sources block). These time series are in units of
depth/interval. The code multiplies these quantities by the current surface area
of the RCHRES to obtain volumes of input or output. If either time series is
absent from the UCI it is assumed that the option is inactive and the corresponding
flux is zero.

The basic equation is that of continuity:

VOL - VOLS = IVOL + PRSUPY - VOLEV - ROVOL (1)

where:
VOL = volume at the end of the interval
VOLS = volume at the start of the interval

This can be written as:

VOL = VOLT - ROVOL (2)

where:
VOLT = IVOL + PRSUPY - VOLEV + VOLS

The principal task of this subroutine is to estimate ROVOL and, hence, the volume
at the end of the interval (VOL).

132
 Module Section HYDR

Figure 4.2(3).1-1 Flow diagram for the HYDR Section of the RCHRES
Application Module

133
 Module Section HYDR

Calculation of Outflows and VOL

If water is available, it is assumed that the total volume of water leaving a

RCHRES in an interval is:

ROVOL = (KS*ROS + COKS*ROD)*DELTS (3)

where:
KS = weighting factor (0 <= KS <= 0.99)
COKS = 1.0 - KS (complement of KS)
ROS = total rate of outflow from the RCHRES at the start of the interval
ROD = total rate of demanded outflow for the end of the interval
DELTS = simulation interval in seconds

That is, the mean rate of outflow is assumed to be a weighted mean of the rates at
the start and end of the interval. The weighting factor KS is supplied either by
the user or by default. Care should be exercised in selecting a value because, as
KS increases from 0.0 to 1.0, there is an increasing risk that the computation of
outflow rates will become unstable. Theoretically, a value of 0.5 gives the most
accurate results, provided oscillations do not occur. The default value of 0.0 has
zero risk, but gives less accurate results. Users are advised to be very careful
if a nonzero value is used; users should not select a value greater than 0.5.

Combination of Equations 2 and 3 yields:

VOL = VOLT - (KS*ROS + COKS*ROD)*DELTS (4)

There are two unknown values in this equation: VOL and ROD. Thus, a second
relation is required to solve the problem. To provide this function, it is assumed
that outflow demands for the individual exits are of the form:

OD(1) = f1(VOL,t)
OD(2) = f2(VOL,t)
.
.
OD(NEXITS) = fNEXITS(VOL,t) (5)

That is, the outflow demand for each exit is a function of volume or time or a
combination. This topic is discussed in greater detail in Section 4.2(3).1.1.2.
It follows that the total outflow demand is of similar form:

ROD = funct(VOL,t) (6)

At a given time in the simulation, t is known and the above functions reduce to:
OD(N) = fN(VOL) (7)
ROD = funct(VOL) (8)

Equation 8 provides the second relation required to solve the problem.

134
 Module Section HYDR

Equations 4, 7, and 8 are shown in Figure 4.2(3).1-2. The point of intersection

of Equations 4 and 8 gives the values RO, VOL, and hence O(1), O(2), etc.

where:
RO = total rate of outflow from the RCHRES at the end of the interval
O(N) = rate of outflow through exit N at the end of the interval

In HSPF, it is assumed that each outflow demand can be represented by one or both
of the following types of components:

Component = function(VOL). This is most useful in simulating RCHRES's where

there is no control over the flow or where gate settings are only a function
of water level. This component is supplied to the program in the form of an
FTABLE.

Component = function(time). This is most useful for handling demands for

municipal, industrial, or agricultural use. The function may be cyclic (for
example, annual cycle) or general (for example, annual cycle superimposed on
an increasing trend). The user must supply this component in the form of an
input time series.

If a user indicates that both types of component are present in an outflow demand,
then the user must also specify how they are to be combined to get the demand.
HSPF allows the following options:

1. OD(N) = Min [fN(VOL),gN(t)]. This is useful in cases such as the following:

Suppose a water user has an optimum demand which may be expressed as a

function of time (g(t)); however, his pump has a limited capacity to deliver
water. This capacity is a function of the water level in the RCHRES from
which the pump is drawing the water. Thus, it can be expressed as a function
of the volume in the RCHRES (f(VOL)). Then, his actual demand for water will
be the minimum of the two functions. Note that g(t) is an input time series
(OUTDGT). See the Time Series Catalog (Section 4.7).

2. OD(N) = Max [fN(VOL),gN(t)]

3. OD(N) = fN(VOL) + gN(t)

If one or more outflow demands have an f(VOL) component (Fig.4.2(3).1-2a),

subroutine ROUTE is called to solve the routing equations. In this case, the
evaluation of the outflow demands and the solution of the equations can be quite
complicated.

If there is no f(VOL) component in any demand, the process is much simpler (Figure
4.2(3).1-2b). Subroutine NOROUT is called in this case.

135
 Module Section HYDR

Figure 4.2(3).1-2 Graphical representation of the equations used to compute

outflow rates and volume

136
 Module Section HYDR

Figure 4.2(3).1-3 Typical RCHRES configurations and the method used to

represent geometric and hydraulic properties

137
 Module Section HYDR

Representing the Geometry and Hydraulic Properties of a RCHRES

HSPF makes no assumptions regarding the shape of a RCHRES. It does not require
that the cross-section be trapezoidal or even that the shape be prismoidal. This
is one reason why both free flowing reaches and reservoirs can be handled by the
same application module. Both of the shapes shown in Figure 4.2(3).1-3a are
acceptable. However, HSPF does assume that:

1. There is a fixed relation between depth (at the deepest point in the RCHRES),
surface area, and volume.

2. For any outflow demand with an f(VOL) component, the functional relation is
constant in time (with the exception discussed in Section 4.2(3).2.1.1).

These assumptions rule out cases where the flow reverses direction or where one
RCHRES influences another upstream of it in a time-dependent way. No account is
taken of momentum. The routing technique falls in the class known as "storage
routing" or "kinematic wave" methods.

The user specifies the properties of a RCHRES in a table called RCHTAB (Figure
4.2(3).1-3b). It has columns for the depth, surface area, volume, and volume
dependent functions (fN(VOL)). Each row contains values appropriate to a specified
water surface elevation. The system obtains intermediate values by interpolation.
Thus, the number of rows in RCHTAB depends on the size of the cross section and the
desired resolution. The table is either included in the User's Control Input (in
the function tables (FTABLES) block) or it may be stored in a Watershed Data
Management (WDM) file. A subsidiary, stand-alone program can be used to generate
this table for RCHRES's with simple properties (for prismoidal channels with
uniform flow, use Manning's equation).

Auxiliary Variables

Besides calculating outflow rates and the volume in a RCHRES, HSPF can compute the
values of some auxiliary state variables:

1. If AUX1FG=1, DEP, STAGE, SAREA, AVDEP, TWID, and HRAD are computed, where: DEP
is the depth at the deepest point; STAGE is the water stage at a related
point; SAREA is the surface area of water in the RCHRES; AVDEP is the average
depth (volume/surface area); TWID is the top width (surface area/length); HRAD
is the hydraulic radius.

2. If AUX2FG=1, AVSECT and AVVEL are computed, where: AVSECT is the average cross
section (volume/length); AVVEL is the average velocity (discharge/AVSECT).

3. If AUX3FG=1, USTAR and TAU are computed, where: USTAR is the bed shear
velocity; TAU is the bed shear stress.

Note that these are point-valued time series; that is, they apply at the boundaries
(start or end) of simulation time intervals.

The user specifies whether AUX1FG, AUX2FG, and AUX3FG are ON or OFF. If certain

138
 Module Section HYDR

constituents are being simulated, one or more of these flags might be required to
be ON. For example, simulation of oxygen (group OXRX) requires that both AUX1FG
and AUX2FG be ON. AUX3FG must be ON if sediment is simulated (group SEDTRN).

4.2(3).1.1 Calculate Outflows Using Hydraulic Routing (subroutine ROUTE)

Purpose

ROUTE computes the rates and volumes of outflow from a RCHRES and the new volume
in cases where at least one outflow demand has an f(VOL) component.

Method

The problem is to solve simultaneously Equations 4 and 8. The cases which arise
are shown graphically in Figure 4.2(3).1-4. Equations 7 and 8 are represented by
a series of straight line segments. The breakpoints in the lines correspond to a
row of entries in RCHTAB (the FTABLE). A segment of Equation 8 can be represented
by the equation:

(VOL - V1)/(ROD - ROD1) = (V2 - V1)/(ROD2 - ROD1) (9)

where V1,V2 are volumes specified in adjacent rows of RCHTAB, for the lower and
upper extremities of the straight-line segment, respectively. ROD1 and ROD2 are
the corresponding total outflow demands.

The first step is to find the intercept of Equation 4 on the volume axis:

VOLINT = VOLT - KS*ROS*DELTS (10)

If VOLINT is less than zero, the equations cannot be solved (case 3). Equation 4
will give a negative value for VOL, even if ROD is zero. Physically, this means
that we started the interval with too little water to satisfy the projected outflow
demand, even if the outflow rate at the end of the interval is zero. Accordingly,
the code does the following:

VOL = 0.0
RO = 0.0
O(*) = 0.0
ROVOL = VOLT

If VOLINT is greater than or equal to zero, the outflow rate at the end of the
interval will be nonzero (case 1 or 2). To determine the case:

1. The intercept of Equation 4 on the Volume axis is found:

OINT = VOLINT/(DELTS*COKS) (11)

2. The maximum outflow demand for which the volume is still zero (RODZ) is found.

139
 Module Section HYDR

Figure 4.2(3).1-4 Graphical representation of the work performed by

subroutine ROUTE

140
 Module Section HYDR

If OINT is greater than RODZ, Equations 4 and 8 can be solved (case 1). The
solution involves searching for the segment of Equation 8 which contains the point
of intersection of the graphs, and finding the coordinates of the point (RO,VOL).
This is done by subroutine SOLVE.

If OINT is less than or equal to RODZ, Equations 4 and 8 cannot be solved (case 2).
Physically this means that the RCHRES will instantaneously go dry at the end of the
interval with total outflow rate at that time equal to OINT. Accordingly, the code
assigns a zero value to the RCHRES volume, and the total outflow is equal to the
intercept of Equation 4 on the volume axis in Figure 4.2(3).1-4. As many of the
individual demands (O(*)) as possible are satisfied in full by the available water.
The remaining water is used to partially satisfy the demand of next highest
priority, and any others are not satisfied at all.

4.2(3).1.1.2 Find the Outflow Demands which Correspond to a Specified

Row in RCHTAB (subroutine DEMAND)

Purpose

DEMAND finds the individual and total outflow demands which apply at the end of the
present interval for a specified level (row) in RCHTAB.

General Method

The approach is to determine the outflow demand for each active exit and accumulate
them to find the total demand.

Evaluating the Demand for Exit N

The outflow demand for an individual exit consists of one or both of two
components. Their presence or absence is indicated by two flags:

Component Flag
fN(VOL) ODFVFG(N)
gN(t) ODGTFG(N)

Finding the fN(VOL) Component

If ODFVFG(N) is zero, there is no fN(VOL) component.

If ODFVFG(N) is greater than zero, there is a fN(VOL) component. The value of the
flag is the column number in RCHTAB containing the value to be used to find the
component:

141
 Module Section HYDR

col = ODFVFG(N)
ODFV = fN(VOL) = (column value)*CONVF (12)

where CONVF is a conversion factor which can vary throughout the year. It is
supplied by the user in the RCHRES Block of the User's Control Input. It can be
used to incorporate effects into the simulation of, for example, seasonal variation
in channel roughness.

If ODFVFG(N) is less than zero, there is an fN(VOL) component, but the function fN
is time varying. In this case the determination of the component is less direct.
The absolute value of ODFVFG(N), say I, gives the element number of a vector
COLIND() which contains a user-supplied time series. The values in this time
series indicate which pair of columns in RCHTAB are used to interpolate fN(VOL).
For example, if COLIND(I) = 4.6 for a given time step, then the value is
interpolated between those in columns 4 and 5:

ODFV = fN(VOL) = [0.6*(column5 value) + 0.4*(column4 value)]*CONVF (13)

If the user has selected this option, the time series COLIND(I) must be supplied
in the EXT SOURCES Block of the UCI.

This method of outflow demand specification is useful where a set of rule curves
(f(VOL)) are specified for releases from a reservoir, and it is necessary to move
from one curve to another (gradually or suddenly) as time progresses in the
simulation.

Finding the gN(t) Component

If ODGTFG(N) is zero, there is no gN(t) component. If ODGTFG(N) is greater than

zero, there is a gN(t) component. The value of this flag is the element number of
vector OUTDGT() which contains the required time series:

FG2 = ODGTFG(N)
ODGT = gN(t) = OUTDGT(FG2) (14)

Combining the fN(VOL) and gN(t) Components

If an outflow demand has both of the components described above, the system expects
the user to indicate which of the following options to use in combining them:

1. OD(N) = Min [fN(VOL),gN(t)]

2. OD(N) = Max [fN(VOL),gN(t)]
3. OD(N) = fN(VOL) + gN(t) (15)

142
 Module Section HYDR

4.2(3).1.1.3 Solve Routing Equations used in Case 1.

(subroutine SOLVE)

Purpose

SOLVE finds the point where Equations 4 and 8 intersect (case 1 in Figure
4.2(3).1-4).

General Approach

The general idea is to select a segment of Equation 8, and determine the point of
intersection with Equation 4. If this point lies outside the selected segment, the
code will select the adjacent segment (in the direction in which the point of
intersection lies) and repeat the process. This continues until the point lies
within the segment under consideration. To minimize searching, the segment in
which the point of intersection was last located is used to start the process.

Solving the Simultaneous Linear Equations

Equations 4 and 9 can be written as:

A1*VOL+ B1*ROD = C1 (16)

A2*VOL+ B2*ROD = C2 (17)

These equations can be solved by evaluating the determinants:

* A1 B1* * C1 B1* * A1 C1*

DET = * * DETV = * * DETO = * * (18)
* A2 B2* * C2 B2* * A2 C2*

In the code of this subroutine:

FACTA1 = A1 = 1.0/(COKS*DELTS) (19)

FACTA2 = A2 = ROD1 - ROD2 (20)
FACTB1 = B1 = 1.0 (21)
FACTB2 = B2 = V2 - V1 (22)
FACTC1 = C1 = OINT (23)
FACTC2 = C2 = (V2*ROD1) - (V1*ROD2) (24)

By substituting Equations 19 through 24 in Equation 18, the determinants are

evaluated as:

DET = FACTA1*FACTB2 - FACTA2 (25)

DETV = OINT*FACTB2 - FACTC2 (26)
DETO = FACTA1*FACTC2 - FACTA2*OINT (27)

The coordinates of the point of intersection are:

VOL = DETV/DET (28)

RO = DETO/DET (29)

143
 Module Section HYDR

4.2(3).1.2 Calculate Outflows Without Using Hydraulic Routing

(subroutine NOROUT)

Purpose

NOROUT is used to compute the rates and volumes of outflow from a RCHRES and the
new volume in cases where no outflow demand has an f(VOL) component; that is, where
all outflow demands are functions of time only.

Method

Equations 4 and 8 are illustrated for this situation in Figure 4.2(3).1-5. The
solution procedure is similar to that used in subroutine ROUTE, except that:
because no outflow demands depend on volume, no table look-up and interpolation is
required to evaluate them, and the simultaneous solution of Equations 4 and 8 is
easier.

The intercept of Equation 4 on the volume axis is found, as before, using Equation
10. If VOLINT is less than 0.0, there is no solution (case 3). The code takes
similar action to that taken by subroutine ROUTE for this case.

If VOLINT is greater than or equal to 0.0, the solution is either case 1 or case
2, as before. In either case, the first step is to evaluate the outflow demands:

FG = ODGTFG(N)
OD(N) = OUTDGT(FG) (30)
ROD = OD(1) + ... OD(NEXITS) (31)

The intercept of Equation 4 on the volume axis (OINT) is found using Equation 11.
If OINT is greater than ROD, Equations 4 and 8 can be solved (case 1):

RO = ROD
O(*) = OD(*) (32)

And from Equations 4 and 10,

VOL = VOLINT - COKS*RO*DELTS (33)

If OINT is less than or equal to ROD, Equations 4 and 8 cannot be solved (case 2).
The physical meaning and the action taken by the code are identical to that
described for subroutine ROUTE.

144
 Module Section HYDR

Figure 4.2(3).1-5 Graphical representation of the work performed by

subroutine NOROUT

145
 Module Section HYDR

4.2(3).1.3 Compute Values of Auxiliary State Variables (subroutine AUXIL)

Purpose

AUXIL is used to compute the depth, stage, surface area, average depth, top width,
and hydraulic radius corresponding to a given volume of water in a RCHRES.

Method of Computing Depth

The basic problem is to interpolate a depth value between those given for discrete
values of volume in RCHTAB. This raises the question of how the interpolation
should be performed; for example, linear or quadratic. Whatever method is used,
it should be consistent with the fact that volume is the integral of surface area
with respect to depth.

Most RCHRES's are long and relatively narrow (Figure 4.2(3).1-6). To perform
interpolation, it is assumed that surface area varies linearly with depth between
neighboring levels (rows) in RCHTAB:

SAREA = SA1 + (SA2 - SA1)*RDEP (34)

where SAREA is the surface area at depth DEP; SA1, SA2 are the tabulated values of
surface area immediately above and below SAREA; RDEP is the relative depth
(DEP-DEP1)/(DEP2-DEP1); DEP1, DEP2 are the tabulated values of depth immediately
above and below DEP.

By integrating the above equation with respect to depth and equating the result to
volume:

(A*RDEP**2) + (B*RDEP) + C = 0.0 (35)

where:
A = SA2 - SA1
B = 2.0*SA1
C = -(VOL - VOL1)/(VOL2 - VOL1)*(B + A)

Equation 35 provides a means of interpolating depth, given volume. There is a

quadratic relation between RDEP and VOL. The equation can be solved for RDEP
analytically, but, in HSPF, Newton's method of successive approximations is used
because it is generally faster in execution:

1. Calculation starts with an estimate of RDEP: RDEP1 = 0.5

2. The function FRDEP = (A*RDEP1**2) + (B*RDEP1) + C is evaluated
3. The derivative DFRDEP = 2.0*A*RDEP1 + B is evaluated
4. A new value RDEP2 = RDEP1 - FRDEP/DFRDEP is calculated
5. Steps 2-4 are repeated with RDEP1 = RDEP2 until the change in RDEP
is small

146
 Module Section HYDR

Figure 4.2(3).1-6 Illustration of quantities involved in calculation of depth

147
 Module Section HYDR

The depth is found using:

DEP = DEP1 + RDEP2*(DEP2 - DEP1) (36)

Computation of Other State Variables

STAGE is the name for any quantity which differs from DEP by a constant:

STAGE = DEP + STCOR (37)

where:
STCOR = the difference, supplied by the user

Surface area is computed using a formula based on Equation 34:

SAREA = SA1 + A*RDEP2 (38)

Average depth is computed as:

AVDEP = VOL/SAREA (39)

The mean top width is found using:

TWID = SAREA/LEN (40)

where:
LEN = length of the RCHRES, supplied by the user

The hydraulic radius is calculated as a function of average water depth (AVDEP) and
mean top width (TWID):

HRAD = (AVDEP*TWID)/(2.*AVDEP + TWID) (41)

148
 Module Section HYDR

4.2(3).1.4 Calculate Bed Shear Stress and Shear Velocity

(subroutine SHEAR)

Purpose

SHEAR is used to compute the bed shear velocity and shear stress, based on the mean
particle size of bed sediment and the hydraulic properties of the RCHRES (i.e.,
average water depth, average velocity, hydraulic radius, and slope).

The method of calculating shear velocity and shear stress depends on whether the
RCHRES is a lake or a river. If the RCHRES is a lake (LKFG=1), shear velocity is
computed using Equation 8.49 from "Hydraulics of Sediment Transport", by W. H.
Graf:

USTAR = AVVEL/(l7.66 + (ALOG10 (AVDEP/(96.5*DB50)))*2.3/AKAPPA) (42)

where:
USTAR = shear velocity (ft/s or m/s)
AVVEL = average flow velocity (ft/s or m/s)
AVDEP = average water depth (ft or m)
DB5O = median diameter of bed material (ft or m)
AKAPPA = Karman constant (AKAPPA = 0.4)

The shear stress (TAU) on a lake bed is calculated as:

TAU = GAM*(USTAR**2)/GRAV (43)

where:
TAU = bed shear stress (lb/ft2 or kg/m2)
GAM = unit weight, or density, of water (62.4 lb/ft3 or 1000 kg/m3)
GRAV = acceleration due to gravity (32.2 ft/sec2 or 9.8l m/sec2)

If the RCHRES being simulated is a stream or river, both shear velocity and shear
stress are determined as functions of the slope and hydraulic radius of the reach:

USTAR = SQRT(GRAV*SLOPE*HRAD) (44)

where:
SLOPE = slope of the RCHRES (-)
HRAD = hydraulic radius (ft or m)

and

TAU = SLOPE*GAM*HRAD (45)

where:
TAU = stream bed shear stress (lb/ft2 or kg/m2)

149
 Module Section HYDR

Water Rights Categories

Categories can be used to facilitate the modeling of water rights in a RCHRES. If

categories are being simulated (NCAT > 0) in the CATEGORY block), each RCHRES in
the run keeps track of the categories of all inflows, storages, and outflows, as
well as precipitation and evaporation fluxes. Up to 100 categories may be
specified in the CATEGORY block.

The storage of each category of water in a RCHRES is called CVOL(C). The inflows
of each category are CIVOL(C). The category outflows from exit gate OFLO(N) are
called COVOL(C,N), and the total outflow of each category is CROVOL(C). These
quantities are illustrated in Figure 4.2(3).1-7.

The initial storage of water in a RCHRES may be assigned to a single category, or

fractions of the storage can be assigned to specified categories. The default is
to divide the storage equally among all active categories.

All water entering a RCHRES must be assigned a category. The inflow to each
category is input as time series CIVOL, and IVOL is computed as the sum.

By default, precipitation is divided proportionally among all categories present

in a RCHRES according to their current storage fraction CFRAC(C), which is
calculated as CVOL(C) divided by VOL. Optionally, it may be assigned to either a
single category or to several categories by user-defined fractions.

Assigning evaporation losses to categories is somewhat more complicated. By

default, evaporation is taken from all categories proportionally based on CFRAC.
If a single category is specified, evaporation is taken from that category as long
as sufficient water is present. For more complex situations, a priority may be
assigned to each of several categories. Multiple categories may be given the same
priority, and losses may be divided among them by either user-specified fractions
or by CFRAC (the default). When all specified categories are exhausted, any
remaining loss is distributed among the other categories by CFRAC.

F(VOL) outflows are calculated from the FTABLE normally. Most free-flowing reaches
will use the default algorithm, which is to pass all categories downstream
unchanged, i.e. according to CFRAC. For more complex situations, categories can
be assigned in the same way as for evaporation, with separate priorities and
categories specified for each exit.

Time series demands (g(t) releases) are handled differently. The time series
OUTDGT is replaced by COTDGT, which is an array specifying the demand from each
category for each exit. If there is not enough water in a category to satisfy the
demand, the release is cut back, and the storage of that category is reduced to
zero. Water is not "borrowed" from other categories to make up the flow. Any
deficit in the demand is accumulated throughout the run in the time series CDFVOL.
If a category is drawn from more than one exit, a priority may be established for
each demand. The priority may be specified as either a real number or a date, such
as an ownership date.

150
 Module Section HYDR

Figure 4.2(3).1-7 Flow diagram for water categories in the HYDR Section of
the RCHRES Application Module

151
 Module Section HYDR

If an exit uses FUNCT to combine f(VOL) and g(t) demands, then OUTDGT is calculated
as the sum of COTDGT for that exit, and the combining function is applied normally.

COVOL is then the result of the actual releases of g(t) demands COTDGT and the
apportionment of f(VOL) flows by category. The outflow rate is called CO(C,N).
The total category outflow volume and rate are CROVOL and CRO, respectively.

152
 Module Section ADCALC

4.2(3).2 Prepare to Simulate Advection of Fully Entrained Constituents

(Section ADCALC of Module RCHRES)

Purpose

ADCALC calculates values for variables which are necessary to simulate longitudinal
advection of dissolved or entrained constituents. These variables are dependent
upon the volume and outflow values calculated in the hydraulics section (HYDR).

Approach

The outflow of an entrained constituent is a weighted mean of two quantities: one

is an estimate based on conditions at the start of the time step, the other
reflects conditions at the end of the time step. The weighting factors are called
JS and COJS (complement of JS), respectively. The values of the weighting
coefficients depend on (1) the relative volume of stored water in the RCHRES
compared to the volume leaving in a single time step and (2) the uniformity of the
velocity across a cross-section of the RCHRES. In order to represent these
factors, two variables are defined: RAT and CRRAT. RAT is the ratio of RCHRES
volume at the start of the interval to the outflow volume based on the outflow rate
at the start of the interval:

RAT = VOLS/(ROS*DELTS) (1)

where:
VOLS = volume of water at the start of interval (ft3 or m3)
ROS = outflow rate at start of interval (ft3/s or m3/s)
DELTS = number of seconds in interval

The parameter CRRAT is defined as the ratio of maximum velocity to mean velocity
in the RCHRES cross-section under typical flow conditions. CRRAT must always have
a value of 1.0 or greater. A value of 1.0 corresponds to a totally uniform
velocity (plug flow) across the RCHRES.

Determination of JS and COJS

If the value of RAT is greater than that of CRRAT, it is assumed that all outflow
over a given time interval was contained in the RCHRES at the start of the
interval, and the mean rate of outflow of material is entirely dependent upon the
rate of outflow at the start of the interval (JS = 1.0). If the value of RAT is
less than CRRAT, it is assumed that part of the water in the outflow entered the
RCHRES as inflow during the same interval; in this case, the concentration of
inflowing material will affect the outflow concentration in the same interval, and
JS will have a value less than 1.0. The relationship of RAT, CRRAT, and JS is
illustrated in Figure 4.2(3).2-1. COJS is (1.0 - JS).

Another way to interpret the relationship of these variables is that no inflowing

material is present in the outflow in the same interval if the outflow volume is
less than (VOLS/CRRAT).

153
 Module Section ADCALC

Figure 4.2(3).2-1 Determination of weighting factors for advection

calculations

154
 Module Section ADCALC

Calculation of Components of Outflow Volume

Components of outflow volume based on conditions at the start of the interval

(SROVOL) and the end of the interval (EROVOL) are calculated as:

SROVOL = JS*ROS*DELTS (2)

EROVOL = COJS*RO*DELTS

where:
SROVOL = outflow volume component based on start of interval
(ft3/interval or m3/interval)
EROVOL = outflow volume component based on end of interval
(ft3/interval or m3/interval)
ROS = outflow rate at start of interval (ft3/s or m3/s)
RO = outflow rate at end of interval (ft3/s or m3/s)
DELTS = number of seconds in interval

Likewise, if there is more than one exit gate for the RCHRES, the corresponding
outflow components for each unit, based on conditions at the start and end of each
interval, are calculated as:

SOVOL(N) = JS*OS(N)*DELTS (3)

EOVOL(N) = COJS*O(N)*DELTS

where:
SOVOL(N) = outflow volume component based on start of interval for exit
gate N (ft3/interval or m3/interval)
EOVOL(N) = outflow volume component based on end of interval for exit gate N
(ft3/interval or m3/interval)
OS(N) = outflow rate at start of interval for exit gate N (ft3/s or m3/s)
O(N) = outflow rate at end of interval for exit gate N (ft3/s or m3/s)
DELTS = number of seconds in interval

It should be noted that SROVOL, EROVOL, SOVOL(N), and EOVOL(N) are not actual
outflows from the RCHRES, but instead are components of outflow based on conditions
at the start or end of the interval. These variables are used in subroutine ADVECT
to estimate the advection of constituents.

155
 Module Section CONS

4.2(3).3 Simulate Conservative Constituents

(Section CONS of Module RCHRES)

Purpose

CONS simulates constituents which, for all practical purposes, do not decay with
time or leave the RCHRES by any mechanism other than advection. Examples include:
total dissolved solids, chlorides, and pesticides and herbicides which decay very
slowly. Figure 4.2(3).3-1 illustrates the fluxes of conservative material that are
modeled in CONS.

Method

Subroutine CONS performs three functions. First, a value for inflow of material
(INCON) is obtained and converted to internal units. The inflow is the sum of
inputs from upstream reaches, tributary land areas, and atmospheric deposition:

INCON = ICON + SAREA*ADFX + SAREA*PREC*ADCN (1)

where:
INCON = total input to reach (mass/interval)
ICON = input from upstream reaches and tributary land (mass/interval)
SAREA = surface area of reach (area)
ADFX = dry or total atmospheric deposition flux (mass/area per interval)
PREC = precipitation (depth)
ADCN = concentration for wet atmospheric deposition in mass/volume

The atmospheric deposition inputs can be specified in two possible ways depending
on the form of the available data. If the deposition is in the form of a flux
(mass per area per time), then it is considered "dry deposition". If the
deposition is in the form of a concentration in rainfall, then it is considered
"wet deposition", and the program automatically combines it with the input rainfall
time series to compute the resulting flux. Either type of deposition data can be
input as a time series, or as a set of monthly values. The atmospheric deposition
time series are documented in the EXTNL table of the Time Series Catalog for
RCHRES, and are specified in the EXT SOURCES block of the UCI. Monthly values are
input in the MONTH-DATA block.

After computing inflows, CONS calls subroutine ADVECT to perform longitudinal

advection of this material and the material already contained in the RCHRES.
Finally, CONS calculates the mass of material remaining in the RCHRES after
advection; this value, RCON, is necessary for the mass balance checks on
conservatives and is calculated as:

RCON = CON*VOL (2)

where:
RCON = mass of material in RCHRES after advection
CON = concentration of conservative after advection
VOL = volume of water in RCHRES at end of interval (ft3 or m3)

156
 Module Section CONS

Figure 4.2(3).3-1 Flow diagram for conservative constituents in the CONS

section of the RCHRES Application Module

157
 Module Section CONS

Additional Requirements

HSPF allows a maximum of ten conservative constituents. The user selects the units
for each constituent; thus, different conservative constituents may have different
units. However, in order to provide this flexibility, additional input is
required. For each constituent the following information must be provided in the
User's Control Input:

1. CONID: the name of the constituent (up to 20 characters long)

2. QTYID: this string (up to 8 characters) contains the units used to

describe the quantity of constituent entering or leaving the
RCHRES, or the total quantity of material stored in it.
Examples of possible units for QTYID are 'kg' for kilograms
or 'lbs' for pounds

3. CONCID: the concentration units for each conservative (up to 8

characters long); examples are 'mg/l' or 'lbs/ft3'

4. CONV: conversion factor from QTYID/VOL to desired concentration

units: CONC = CONV*(QTY/VOL) (in English system, VOL is
expressed in ft3) (in metric system, VOL is expressed in m3)
For example, if:
CONCID is mg/l
QTYID is kg
VOL is in m3
then CONV = 1000.0

158
 Module Section CONS

4.2(3).3.1 Simulate Advection of Constituent Totally Entrained in Water

(subroutine ADVECT)

Purpose

ADVECT computes the concentration of material in a RCHRES and the quantities of

material that leave the RCHRES due to longitudinal advection through active exits.
ADVECT is a generalized subroutine, and is called by each module section which
simulates constituents which undergo normal longitudinal advection.

Assumptions

Two assumptions are made in the solution technique for normal advection:

1. Each constituent advected by calling subroutine ADVECT is uniformly dispersed

throughout the waters of the RCHRES.

2. Each constituent is completely entrained by the flow; that is, the material
moves at the same horizontal velocity as the water.

Method

The equation of continuity may be written as:

IMAT - ROMAT = (CONC*VOL) - (CONCS*VOLS) (2)

where:
IMAT = inflow of material over the interval
ROMAT = total outflow of material over the interval
CONCS = concentration at the start of the interval
CONC = concentration at the end of the interval
VOLS = volume of water stored in the RCHRES at the start of the interval
VOL = volume of water stored in the RCHRES at the end of the interval

The other basic equation states that the total outflow of material over the time
interval is a weighted mean of two estimates; one based on conditions at the start
of the interval, the other on ending conditions:

ROMAT = ((JS*ROS*CONCS) + (COJS*RO*CONC))*DELTS (3)

where:
JS = weighting factor
COJS = 1.0 - JS
ROS = rates of outflow at the start of the interval (m3/s or ft3/s)
RO = rates of outflow at the end of the interval (m3/s or ft3/s)
DELTS = length of interval (seconds)

Using Equations (2) in Section 4.2(3).2 (Subroutine ADCALC), Equation (3) can be
written:

ROMAT = (SROVOL*CONCS) + (EROVOL*CONC) (4)

159
 Module Section CONS

where SROVOL and EROVOL are as defined earlier.

By combining Equations (2) and (4) we can solve for CONC:

CONC = (IMAT + CONCS*(VOLS - SROVOL))/(VOL + EROVOL) (5)

The total amount of material leaving the RCHRES during the interval is calculated
from equation (4).

If there is more than one active exit from the RCHRES, the amount of material
leaving through each exit is calculated as:

OMAT = SOVOL*CONCS + EOVOL*CONC (6)

where:
OMAT = amount of material leaving RCHRES through individual exit
SOVOL = outflow volume component for individual exit based on start
of interval
EOVOL = outflow volume component for individual exit based on end
of interval

(SOVOL and EOVOL are defined in Section 4.2(3).2)

If the RCHRES goes dry during the interval, the concentration at the end of the
interval is undefined. The total amount of material leaving the RCHRES is:

ROMAT = IMAT + (CONCS*VOLS) (7)

If there is more than one active exit from the RCHRES, the amount of material
leaving through each exit from a RCHRES which has gone dry during the interval is
calculated as:

OMAT = (SOVOL/SROVOL)*ROMAT (8)

The units in the preceding equations are:

VOLS,VOL m3 or ft3 (call these volunits)

SROVOL,etc volunits/interval
CONCS,CONC user defined (call these concunits)
IMAT,ROMAT,etc concunits * volunits/interval

160
 Module Section HTRCH

4.2(3).4 Simulate Heat Exchange and Water Temperature

(Section HTRCH of Module RCHRES)

Purpose

The purpose of this code is to simulate the processes which determine the water
temperature in a reach or mixed reservoir. Water temperature is one of the most
fundamental indices used to determine the nature of an aquatic environment. Most
processes of functional importance to an environment are affected by temperature.
For example, the saturation level of dissolved oxygen varies inversely with
temperature. The decay of reduced organic matter, and hence oxygen demand caused
by the decay, increases with increasing temperature. Some form of temperature
dependence is present in nearly all processes. The prevalence of individual
phytoplankton and zooplankton species is often temperature dependent.

Required Time Series

Five time series of meteorological data are required to simulate the temperature
balance within a RCHRES. These are:

1. solar radiation in langleys/interval

2. cloud cover expressed as tenths
3. air temperature in degrees F (English) or degrees C (Metric)
4. dewpoint temperature in degrees F (English) or degrees C (Metric)
5. wind speed in miles/interval (English) or km/interval (Metric)

Note that solar radiation data are usually available as daily totals. The user
must generally convert these data to hourly or two hourly values before using them
in HSPF. If the standard HSPF disaggregation rule were used, a daily value would
be divided into equal increments for each interval of the day; this would not
account for the rising and setting of the sun. A similar kind of preprocessing
needs to be done if daily max/min air temperatures are used.

Schematic View of Fluxes and Storages

Figure 4.2(3).4-1 illustrates the fluxes involved in this module section. There
are no significant internal sources or sinks of temperature within a RCHRES.
Changes in heat content are due only to transport processes across the RCHRES
boundaries. Module section HTRCH considers three major processes: heat transfer
by advection, heat transfer across the air-water interface, and optionally, heat
transfer across the water-sediment (bed) interface. The processes of diffusion and
dispersion are not considered in HSPF.

Heat transfer by advection is simulated by treating water temperature as a thermal

concentration. This enables the use of subroutine ADVECT, a standard subroutine
which calculates advective transport of constituents totally entrained in the
moving water.

161
 Module Section HTRCH

Figure 4.2(3).4-1 Flow diagram for HTRCH section of the RCHRES Application
Module

162
 Module Section HTRCH

Heat is transported across the air-water interface by a number of mechanisms, and

each must be evaluated individually. The net transport across the air-water
interface is the sum of the individual effects. Mechanisms which can increase the
heat content of the water are absorption of solar radiation, absorption of longwave
radiation, and conduction-convection. Mechanisms which decrease the heat content
are emission of longwave radiation, conduction-convection, and evaporation.

Shortwave Solar Radiation

The shortwave radiation absorbed by a RCHRES is approximated by the following

equation:

QSR = 0.97*CFSAEX*SOLRAD*10.0 (1)

where:
QSR = shortwave radiation (kcal/m2/interval)
0.97 = fraction of incident radiation which is assumed absorbed
(3 percent is assumed reflected)
CFSAEX = ratio of radiation incident to water surface to radiation
incident to gage where data were collected. This factor also
accounts for shading of the water body, e.g., by trees
SOLRAD = solar radiation (langleys/interval)
10.0 = conversion factor from langleys to kcal/m2

Longwave Radiation

All terrestrial surfaces, as well as the atmosphere, emit longwave radiation. The
rate at which each source emits longwave radiation is dependent upon its temper-
ature. The longwave radiation exchange between the atmosphere and the RCHRES is
estimated using the formula:

QB = SIGMA*((TWKELV**4) - KATRAD*(10**-6)*CLDFAC*(TAKELV**6))*DELT60 (2)

where:
QB = net transport of longwave radiation (kcal/m2/interval)
SIGMA = Stephan-Boltzman constant multiplied by 0.97 to account
for emissivity of water
TWKELV = water temperature (degrees Kelvin)
KATRAD = atmospheric longwave radiation coefficient with a typical
value of 9.0
CLDFAC = 1.0 + (.0017*C**2)
TAKELV = air temperature corrected for elevation difference (deg K)
C = cloud cover, expressed as tenths (range = 0 - 10)
DELT60 = DELT(minutes) divided by 60

Both atmospheric radiation to the water body and back radiation from the water body
to the atmosphere are considered in this equation. QB is positive for transport
of energy from the water body to the atmosphere.

163
 Module Section HTRCH

Conduction-Convection

Conductive-convective transport of heat is caused by temperature differences

between the air and water. Heat is transported from the warmer medium to the
cooler medium; heat can therefore enter or leave a water body, depending upon its
temperature relative to air temperature. HSPF assumes that the heat transport is
proportional to the temperature difference between the two media. The equation
used is:

QH = CFPRES*(KCOND*10**-4)*WIND*(TW - AIRTMP) (3)

where:
QH = conductive-convective heat transport (kcal/m2/interval)
CFPRES = pressure correction factor (dependent on elevation)
KCOND = conductive-convective heat transport coefficient
(typically in the range 1 - 20)
WIND = wind speed (m/interval)
TW = water temperature (deg C)
AIRTMP = air temperature (deg C)

QH is positive for heat transfer from the water to the air.

Evaporative Heat Loss

Evaporative heat transport occurs when water evaporates from the water surface.
The amount of heat lost depends on the latent heat of vaporization for water and
on the quantity of water evaporated. For purposes of water temperature simulation,
HSPF uses the following equation to calculate the amount of water evaporated:

EVAP = (KEVAP*10**-9)*WIND*(VPRESW - VPRESA) (4)

where:
EVAP = quantity of water evaporated (m/interval)
KEVAP = evaporation coefficient with typical values of 1 - 5
WIND = wind movement 2 m above the water surface (m/interval)
VPRESW = saturation vapor pressure at the water surface (mbar)
VPRESA = vapor pressure of air above water surface (mbar)

The heat removed by evaporation is then calculated:

QE = HFACT*EVAP (5)

where:
QE = heat loss due to evaporation (kcal/m2/interval)
HFACT = heat loss conversion factor (latent heat of vaporization
multiplied by density of water)

164
 Module Section HTRCH

Heat Content of Precipitation

In module section HYDR, an option exists to include the input of water from
precipitation falling directly on the water surface. If this option is activated,
it is necessary to assign a temperature to the water added to the RCHRES in this
manner. HSPF assumes that precipitation has the same temperature as the water
surface on which it falls.

Bed conduction

Heat movement between water and bed sediment contributes significantly to the
diurnal variation of water temperature, especially in shallow streams and rivers.
Simulation of bed conduction is optional, and the user may select from three
alternative methods to represent this process.

Method 1:

If BEDFLG = 1, streambed conduction is computed as a simple function of the

difference in temperature between the water-streambed interface (temperature =
water temperature) and the streambed at an equilibrium ground temperature at some
depth below the bed. The equation is:

QBED = KMUD * (TGRND - TW)

where:
QBED = heat flux from ground to water (kcal/m2/interval)
TGRND = equilibrium ground temperature (C)
TW = water temperature (C)
KMUD = water-ground heat conduction coefficient (kcal/m2/C/interval)

KMUD can be estimated as the thermal conductivity of the streambed material divided
by the depth (below the water-sediment interface) where equilibrium temperature is
assumed to occur.

Method 2:

If BEDFLG = 2, bed conduction is based on the method of Caupp et al. (1994) that
was used in modeling the Truckee River. The method is an extension of Method 1 to
include a finite sediment or mud layer (consisting of water-saturated sediment)
overlying the ground, which is at an equilibrium temperature. Heat fluxes between
the ground and sediment and between the sediment and water are computed, as well
as sediment and water temperatures. The algorithm, which includes a differencing
scheme for updating the sediment temperature is described below:

The heat transfer between the ground and sediment is computed as follows:

QGRMUD = KGRND*(TGRND - TMUD)

165
 Module Section HTRCH

where:
QGRMUD = heat transfer from ground to sediment layer (kcal/m2/interval)
KGRND = ground-sediment heat conduction coefficient
(kcal/m2/C/interval); (default value = 1.419)
TGRND = equilibrium ground temperature (C)
TMUD = sediment temperature (C)

This heat transfer is used to update the sediment temperature as follows:

TMUD = TMUD + QGRMUD/CPR/MUDDEP

where:
CPR = heat capacity of sediment (1000 kcal/m3/C)
(CPR is assumed to be the heat capacity of water)
MUDDEP = depth of sediment layer (m)

Finally, the new sediment temperature is used to compute the heat transfer between
the sediment and water column:

QBED = KMUD*(TMUD - TW)

where:
QBED = heat flux from sediment to water (kcal/m2/hr)
KMUD = water-sediment heat conduction coefficient (kcal/m2/C/hr)
TW = water temperature (C)

Method 3:

If BEDFLG = 3, the bed conduction computation is based on the method proposed by

Jobson (1977, 1979) in which the advection-dispersion equation for heat is solved
analytically. Jobson's solution reduces the bed conduction to a convergent series
consisting of the product of the following quantities:

1. Temperature change (deg C) of the water over a specific period (TSTOP

intervals) prior to the current time interval. ( )T)

2. Heat flux per degree C between the bed and water (over the TSTOP time period).
The units are kcal/m 2/C/interval. ()H)

Assuming time intervals of one hour, the equation is:

QBED = '(I=1,TSTOP) [DELH(I) * DELTT(I)]

'(I=1,TSTOP) = summation over the past TSTOP hours

where:

DELH(I) = heat flux from bed to water at current interval resulting from
a 1.0 degree C temperature increase at hour I (kcal/m2/C/hr)
DELTT(I) = temperature change over hour I

166
 Module Section HTRCH

Therefore, at each time step, the total bed conduction flux is simply the
summation, over TSTOP, of the product of these two arrays. As implemented in HSPF,
the temperature change at the current time step is computed twice. The first
computation includes all heat flux components except bed conduction; then the
resulting temperature change is used to compute the bed conduction flux, which is
used to compute the final water temperature change.

Values of DELH and TSTOP can be developed from Jobson's equations; a utility
program is available to compute these inputs as a function of the thickness and
thermal properties of the bed. Note: The input values of DELH depend upon time-
step, i.e., the units are kcal/m2/C/interval. Also, DELH values are negative.

Net heat exchange

The net heat exchange at the water surface is represented as:

QT = QSR - QB - QH - QE + QP + QBED (6)

where:
QT = net heat exchange in kcal/m2/interval
QSR = net heat transport from incident shortwave radiation
QB = net heat transport from longwave radiation
QH = heat transport from conduction-convection
QE = heat transport from evaporation
QP = heat content of precipitation
QBED= net heat exchange with bed

Calculation of Water Temperature

Of the five heat transport mechanisms across the air-water interface, three are
significant and dependent upon water temperature. In order to obtain a stable
solution for water temperature, these three terms (QB, QH, QE) are evaluated for
the temperature at both the start and end of the interval, and the average of the
two values is taken (trapezoidal approximation). For this purpose, the unknown
ending temperature is approximated by performing a Taylor series expansion about
the starting temperature, and ignoring nonlinear terms. This formulation leads to
the following equation for the change in water temperature over the interval:

DELTTW = CVQT*QT/(1.0 + SPD*CVQT) (7)

where:
DELTTW = change in water temperature (deg C)
CVQT = conversion factor to convert total heat exchange expressed in
kcal/m2/interval to deg C/interval (volume dependent)
QT = net heat exchange in kcal/m2/interval (with terms evaluated at
starting temperature)
SPD = sum of partial derivatives of QB, QH, and QE with respect to
water temperature

167
 Module Section HTRCH

The heat exchange calculations do not give realistic results when the water body
becomes excessively shallow. Consequently, heat transport processes are not
considered if the average depth of water in the RCHRES falls below 2 inches. When
this happens, the water temperature is set equal to the air temperature.

4.2(3).4.1 Correct Air Temperature for Elevation Difference

(subroutine RATEMP)

Purpose

The purpose of this code is to correct air temperature for any elevation difference
between the RCHRES and the temperature gage.

Approach

The lapse rate for air temperature is dependent upon whether or not precipitation
occurs during the time interval. If precipitation does occur, a wet lapse rate of
1.94E-3 degrees C/ft is assumed. Otherwise, a dry lapse rate which is a function
of the time of day is used. A table of 24 hourly dry lapse rates is built into
HSPF. The corrected air temperature is:

AIRTMP = GATMP - LAPS*ELDAT (8)

where:
AIRTMP = corrected air temperature (deg C)
GATMP = air temperature at gage
LAPS = lapse rate (degrees C/ft)
ELDAT = elevation difference between mean RCHRES elevation and gage
elevation (feet) (ELDAT is positive if the mean RCHRES
elevation is greater than the gage elevation)

168
 Module Section HTRCH

4.2(3).5 Simulate Behavior of Inorganic Sediment

(Section SEDTRN of Module RCHRES)

Purpose

The purpose of this code is to simulate the transport, deposition, and scour of
inorganic sediment in free-flowing reaches and mixed reservoirs. The modeling of
sediment in channels may be needed for analysis of such problems as:

1. Structural instability of bridge piers or water intakes caused by scouring.

2. Reduction of reservoir capacity and clogging of irrigation canals and

navigable waterways due to deposition.

3. Reduction of light available to aquatic organisms caused by suspended

sediment.

4. Transport of adsorbed pollutants such as fertilizers, herbicides, and

pesticides.

Schematic View of Fluxes and Storages

Figure 4.2(3).5-1 shows the principal state variables and fluxes with which module
section SEDTRN deals.

Both the migration characteristics and the adsorptive capacities of sediment vary
significantly with particle size. Consequently, HSPF divides the inorganic
sediment load into three components (sand, silt, and clay), each with its own
properties. Parametric information required for cohesive sediments (silt and clay)
include:

1. particle diameter - D
2. particle settling velocity in still water - W
3. particle density - RHO
4. critical shear stress for deposition - TAUCD
5. critical shear stress for scour - TAUCS
6. erodibility coefficient - M

Parameter values required for noncohesive, or sand, particles depend on the method
used to compute sandload (alternate methods are described in the functional
description of subroutines SANDLD, TOFFAL, and COLBY). If the Toffaleti method is
used, values must be defined for median bed sediment diameter (DB5O) and particle
settling velocity (W). The Colby method requires a value for DB5O, and the power
function method requires both a coefficient (KSAND) for the power function and an
exponent (EXPSND).

As Figure 4.2(3).5-1 indicates, the same material fluxes are modeled for all three
fractions of sediment. Only the methodology used to determine fluxes between
suspended storage and bed storage differ.

169
 Module Section SEDTRN

Figure 4.2(3).5-1 Flow diagram of inorganic sediment fractions in the SEDTRN

section of the RCHRES Application Module

170
 Module Section SEDTRN

HSPF assumes that scour or deposition of inorganic sediment does not affect the
hydraulic properties of the channel. Furthermore, it is assumed that sand, silt,
and clay deposit in different areas of the RCHRES bed; consequently, the deposition
or scour of each material is not linked to the other fractions (i.e., "armoring"
is not modeled). Longitudinal movement of bed sediments is not modeled.

The details of the transport, deposition, and scour techniques are outlined in the
functional descriptions of the lower level routines of the SEDTRN module section.
Following these calculations, the depth of sediment in the RCHRES bed is determined
in order to warn the user whenever the deposited sediment exceeds a pre-specified
level. First, the volume occupied by each fraction of bed sediment is calculated:

VOLSED(J) = RSED(J+3)/RHO(J)*1.0E06 (1)

where:
VOLSED(J) = volume occupied by bed sediment of fraction J (m3 or ft3)
RSED(J+3) = bed storage of sediment fraction J (mg.m3/l or mg.ft3/l)
RHO(J) = particle density of fraction J (gm/cm3)

The volumes of the three fractions of bed sediment are summed, and the total bed
volume is adjusted to account for the fraction of the volume which is void of
sediment (i.e., the porosity):

VOLSEDA = VOLSED/(l.0 - POR) (2)

where:
VOLSEDA = volume of bed adjusted to account for volume occupied
by materials other than sediment
VOLSED = volume of sediment contained in the bed (sand + silt + clay)
POR = porosity of bed sediment (ratio of pore volume to total volume)

Finally, the depth of bed sediment is calculated for use as an indicator of

excessive deposition:

BEDDEP = VOLSEDA/(LEN*BEDWID) (3)

where:
BEDDEP = depth of bed (m or ft)
VOLSEDA = volume of bed (m3 or ft3)
LEN = length of RCHRES (m or ft)
BEDWID = effective width of bed for calculation of bed thickness
(an input parameter expressed in m or ft)

If the calculated value for BEDDEP exceeds a user specified value, a warning
message is printed to alert the user to potential modeling problems.

The PERLND module of HSPF simulates removal of total inorganic sediment due to
washoff from the land surface and erosion from gullies. Therefore, the user must
divide this total sediment into the three components (sand, silt, and clay) so that
this material can be routed through the channel system in the RCHRES module.

171
 Module Section SEDTRN

4.2(3).5.1 Simulate Cohesive Sediments (subroutine COHESV)

Purpose

COHESV simulates the deposition, scour, and transport processes of cohesive

sediments (silt and clay).

Method

The modeling effort consists of two steps. First, subroutine ADVECT is called to
perform advective transport (see section 4.2(3).3.1). Then subroutine BDEXCH is
called, and deposition or scour is calculated based on the bed shear stress and the
Krone and Partheniades equations. (see section 4.2(3).5.1.1).

4.2(3).5.1.1 Simulate Exchange with Bed

(subroutine BDEXCH)

Purpose

BDEXCH simulates the deposition and scour of cohesive sediment fractions (silt and
clay).

Approach

Exchange of cohesive sediments with the bed is dependent upon the shear stress
exerted upon the bed surface. The shear stress within the RCHRES is calculated in
subroutine SHEAR of the HYDR section. Whenever shear stress (TAU) in the RCHRES
is less than the user-supplied critical shear stress for deposition (TAUCD),
deposition occurs; whenever shear stress is greater than the user-supplied critical
shear stress for scour (TAUCS), scouring of cohesive bed sediments occurs. The
rate of deposition for a particular fraction of cohesive sediment is based on a
simplification of Krone's (1962) equation to the following form:

D = W*CONC*(1.0 - TAU/TAUCD) (4)

where:
D = rate at which sediment fraction settles out of suspension
(mass/len2.ivl)
W = settling velocity for cohesive sediment fraction (len/ivl)
CONC = concentration of suspended sediment fraction (mass/len3)
TAU = shear stress (lb/ft2 or kg/m2)
TAUCD = critical shear stress for deposition (lb/ft2 or kg/m2)

The rate of change of suspended sediment fraction concentration in the RCHRES due
to deposition can be expressed as:

d(CONC)/dt = -(D/AVDEPM) (5)

172
 Module Section SEDTRN

where:
AVDEPM = average depth of water in RCHRES (m)

By substituting the expression for deposition rate (D) from Equation 4, the
following equation is obtained:

d(CONC)/dt = -(W*CONC/AVDEPM)*(1 - TAU/TAUCD) (6)

By integrating and rearranging this equation, a solution may be obtained for the
concentration of suspended sediment lost to deposition during a simulation interval
(DEPCONC):

DEPCONC = CONC*(1.0 - EXP((-W/AVDEPM)*(1.0 - TAU/TAUCD)) (7)

where:
CONC = concentration of suspended sediment at start of interval (mg/l)
W = settling velocity for sediment fraction (m/ivl)
AVDEPM = average depth of water in RCHRES in meters (calculated in HYDR)
TAU = shear stress (lb/ft2 or kg/m2)
TAUCD = critical shear stress for deposition (lb/ft2 or kg/m2)

The user must supply values for settling velocity (W) and critical shear stress for
deposition (TAUCD) for each fraction of cohesive sediment (silt and clay).

Following the calculation of DEPCONC, the storage of sediment in suspension and in

the bed is updated:

SUSP = SUSP - (DEPCONC*VOL) (8)

BED = BED + (DEPCONC*VOL) (9)

where:
SUSP = suspended storage of sediment fraction (mg.ft3/l or mg.m3/l)
BED = storage of sediment fraction in bed (mg.ft3/l or mg.m3/l)
VOL = volume of water in RCHRES (ft3 or m3)

The rate of resuspension, or scour, of cohesive sediments from the bed is derived
from a modified form of Partheniades'(1962) equation:

S = M*(TAU/TAUCS - 1.0) (10)

where:
S = rate at which sediment is scoured from the bed (mass/len2.ivl)
M = erodibility coefficient for the sediment fraction (kg/m2.ivl)
TAUCS = critical shear stress for scour (lbs/ft2 or kg/m2)

The rate of change of suspended sediment fraction concentration in the RCHRES due
to scour can be expressed as:

d(CONC)/dt = S/AVDEPM (11)

173
 Module Section SEDTRN

By substituting the expression for scour rate (S) from Equation 10 the following
equation is obtained:

d(CONC)/dt = (M/AVDEPM)*(TAU/TAUCS - 1.0) (12)

By integrating and rearranging this equation, a solution may be obtained for the
concentration of suspended sediment added to suspension by scour during a
simulation interval (SCRCONC):

SCRCONC = M/AVDEPM*1000*(TAU/TAUCS - 1.0) (13)

where:
M = erodibility coefficient (kg/m2.ivl)
AVDEPM = average depth of water (m)
1000 = conversion from kg/m3 to mg/l

The user is required to supply values for the erodibility coefficient (M) and
critical shear stress for scour (TAUCS) for each fraction of cohesive sediment
(silt and clay) which is modeled.

Following the calculation of SCRCONC, the storage of sediment in suspension and in

the bed is updated:

BED = BED - (SCRCONC*VOL) (14)

SUSP = SUSP + (SCRCONC*VOL) (15)

If the amount of scour calculated is greater than available storage in the bed, the
bed scour is set equal to the bed storage, and the bed storage is set equal to
zero. Since the value specified for TAUCS should be greater than that for TAUCD,
only one process (deposition or scour) occurs during each simulation interval.

4.2(3).5.2 Simulate Behavior of Sand/Gravel (subroutine SANDLD)

Purpose

SANDLD simulates the deposition, scour, and transport processes of the sand
fraction of inorganic sediment.

Method

Erosion and deposition of sand, or noncohesive sediment, is affected by the amount

of sediment the flow is capable of carrying. If the amount of sand being
transported is less than the flow can carry for the hydrodynamic conditions of the
RCHRES, sand will be scoured from the bed. This occurs until the actual sand
transport rate becomes equal to the carrying capacity of the flow or until the
available bed sand is all scoured. Conversely, deposition occurs if the sand
transport rate exceeds the flow's capacity to carry sand.

174
 Module Section SEDTRN

Subroutine SANDLD allows the user to calculate sand transport capacity for a RCHRES
by any one of three methods. Depending on the value of SANDFG specified in the
User's Control Input, either the Toffaleti equation (SANDFG=1), the Colby method
(SANDFG=2), or an input power function of velocity (SANDFG=3) is used. If sand
transport capacity is calculated using the Toffaleti or Colby methods, the
potential sandload concentration is determined by the following conversion:

PSAND = (GSI*TWIDE*10.5)/ROM (16)

where:
PSAND = potential sandload (mg/l)
GSI = sand transport capacity (tons/day/ft of width)
(calculated in COLBY or TOFFAL)
TWIDE = width of RCHRES (ft)
10.5 = conversion factor
ROM = total rate of outflow of water from the RCHRES (m3/sec)

If carrying capacity is a power function of velocity, PSAND is calculated as:

PSAND = KSAND*AVVELE**EXPSND (17)

where:
KSAND = coefficient in the sandload suspension equation (input parameter)
EXPSND = exponent in sandload suspension equation (input parameter)
AVVELE = average velocity (ft/sec)

The potential outflow of sand during the interval is:

PROSND = (SANDS*SROVOL) + (PSAND*EROVOL) (18)

where:
PROSND = potential sand outflow
SANDS = concentration of sand at start of interval (mg/1)
SROVOL and EROVOL are as defined in Section 4.2(3).2

The potential scour from, or deposition to, the bed storage is found using the
continuity equation:

PSCOUR = (VOL*PSAND) - (VOLS*SANDS) + PROSND - ISAND (19)

where:
PSCOUR = potential scour (+) or deposition (-)
VOL = volume of water in RCHRES at the end of the interval (ft3 or m3)
VOLS = volume of water in RCHRES at the start of interval (ft3 or m3)
ISAND = total inflow of sand into RCHRES during interval

175
 Module Section SEDTRN

The terms in Equations 18 and 19 have the units of concentration. The potential
scour is compared to the amount of sand material on the bottom surface available
for resuspension. If scour demand is less than available bottom sands, the demand
is satisfied in full, and the bed storage is adjusted accordingly. The new
suspended concentration is PSAND. If the potential scour cannot be satisfied by
bed storage, all of the available bed sand is suspended, and bed storage is
exhausted. The concentration of suspended sandload is calculated as:

SAND = (ISAND + SCOUR + SANDS*(VOLS - SROVOL))/(VOL + EROVOL) (20)

where:
SAND = concentration of sand at end of interval
SCOUR = sand scoured from, or deposited to, the bottom
SANDS = concentration of sand at start of interval

The total amount of sand leaving the RCHRES during the interval is:

ROSAND = SROVOL*SANDS + EROVOL*SAND (21)

If a RCHRES goes dry during an interval, or if there is no outflow from the RCHRES,
all the sand in suspension at the beginning of the interval is assumed to settle
out, and the bed storage is correspondingly increased.

4.2(3).5.2.1 Calculate Sand Transport Capacity by Using Toffaleti's Method

(subroutine TOFFAL)

Purpose

TOFFAL uses Toffaleti's method to calculate the capacity of the RCHRES flow to
transport sand.

Method

In Toffaleti's methodology, the actual stream for which the sand discharge is to
be calculated is assumed to be equivalent to a two-dimensional stream of width
equal to that of the real stream and of depth equal to the hydraulic radius of the
real stream (FHRAD).

For the purposes of calculation, the depth, FHRAD, of the hypothetical stream is
divided into four zones shown in Figure 4.2(3).5-2. These are: (1) the bed zone
of relative thickness Y/FHRAD = 2*FDIAM/FHRAD; (2) the lower zone extending from
Y/FHRAD = 2*FDIAM/FHRAD to Y/FHRAD = 1/11.24; (3) the middle zone extending from
Y/FHRAD = 1/11.24 to Y/FHRAD = 1/2.5; and (4) the upper zone extending from Y/FHRAD
= 1/2.5 to the surface. (FDIAM is the median bed sediment diameter). The velocity
profile is represented by the power relation:

U = (1 + CNV)*V*(Y/FHRAD)**CNV (22)

176
 Module Section SEDTRN

Figure 4.2(3).5-2 Toffaleti's velocity, concentration, and sediment discharge

relations

177
 Module Section SEDTRN

where:
U = flow velocity at distance Y above the bed (ft/sec)
V = mean stream velocity (ft/sec)
CNV = exponent derived empirically as a function of water
temperature (0.1198 + 0.00048*TMPR)
TMPR = water temperature (degrees F)

The concentration distribution of sand is given by a power relation for each of the
three upper zones; i.e., by Equations 23-25 in Figure 4.2(3).5-2. The exponent,
ZI, in Equations 23-25 is given by:

ZI = (VSET*V)/(CZ*FHRAD*SLOPE) (26)

where:
VSET = settling velocity for sand (ft/s)
SLOPE = slope of RCHRES (ft/ft)
CZ = empirical factor derived as a function of water
temperature (260.67 - 0.667*TMPR)

Expressions for the sand transport capacity of the lower (GSL), middle (GSM), and
upper (GSU) zones are obtained by substituting U from Equation 22 and the
appropriate value for sand particle concentration (CI) for each zone into the
following equation and integrating between the vertical limits of the zone:

GSI = INT [LLI to ULI] (CI*Udy) (27)

where:
GSI = sand transport capacity for zone I
INT = integral of function in ( ) over limits in [ ]
ULI = depth Y at upper limit of zone I
LLI = depth Y at lower limit of zone I
CI = concentration of sand in zone I

The resulting equations for sand transport capacity in the three zones are:

GSL = CMI*(((HRAD/11.24)**(1.0 + CNV - 0.758*ZI) - (28)

(2*FDIAM)**(1.0 + CNV - 0.756*ZI))/(1.0 + CNV - 0.756*ZI))

GSM = CMI*(((HRAD/11.24)**(0.244*ZI)*((HRAD/2.5)**(1.0 + CNV - ZI) -

(HRAD/11.24)**(1.0 + CNV - ZI)))/(1.O + CNV - ZI)) (29)

GSU = CMI*(((HRAD/11.24)**(0.244*ZI)*(HRAD/2.5)**(0.5*ZI)* (30)

(HRAD**(1.0 + CNV - 1.5*ZI) - (HRAD/2.5)**(1.0 + CNV - 1.5*ZI)))/
(1.0 + CNV - 1.5*ZI))

in which

CMI = 43.2*CLI*(1.0 + CNV)*V*HRAD**(0.758*ZI - CNV) (31)

178
 Module Section SEDTRN

A value for CLI, the concentration of sand in the lower zone, can be obtained by
setting the expression for GSL in Equation 28 equal to the following empirical
expression and solving for CLI:

GSL = 0.6/((TT*AC*K4/V**2)**(1.67)*ããDIAM/0.00058)**(1.67)) (32)

where:
GSL = sand transport capacity
TT = empirical factor derived as a function of water
temperature (1.10*(0.051 + 0.00009*TMPR))
AC = empirical factor derived as a function of the kinematic
viscosity of water (VIS) and shear velocity based on
shear stress due to sand grain roughness (USTAR)
K4 = empirical factor derived as a function of AC, slope
of the RCHRES (SLOPE), and particle diameter for which
65% by weight of sediment is finer (D65).
V = mean stream velocity (ft/sec)
FDIAM = median bed sediment diameter (ft)

Values for factors AC and K4 are given in Figure 4.2(3).5-3. The dimensions of AC
are such that GSL is expressed in tons per day per foot of width. Consequently,
when CLI is evaluated and substituted back into Equations 28-30 the resulting units
of sand transport capacity for all three zones are tons per day per foot of width.

Prior to calculation of sand transport capacity for the zones, Equation 25 is

solved to be sure that the value for concentration at Y=2*FDIAM does not exceed 100
lbs/ft3. If it does, the concentration at this depth is set equal to 100 lbs/ft3
and an adjusted value of CLI is calculated and used in Equations 28-30. The
transport capacity of the final zone, the bed zone (Figure 4.2(3).5-2), is also
determined using the adjusted value of CLI and the following equation:

GSB = CMI*(2*FDIAM)**(1.0 + CNV - 0.758*ZI) (33)

The total sand transport capacity (GSI) for the RCHRES is the sum of the transport
capacities for the four zones:

GSI = GSB + GSL + GSM + GSU (34)

179
 Module Section SEDTRN

Figure 4.2(3).5-3 Factors in Toffaleti relations

180
 Module Section SEDTRN

4.2(3).5.2.2 Calculate Sand Transport Capacity by Using Colby's Method

(subroutine COLBY)

Purpose

COLBY calculates the capacity of the RCHRES to transport sand based on the median
bed sediment diameter (DB50), average stream velocity (V), hydraulic radius (HRAD),
fine sediment load concentration (FSL), and water temperature (TEMPR).

Method

The solution technique used in this subroutine is based on empirical relationships

developed from Figures 4.2(3).5-4 and 4.2(3).5-5. In general terms, the solution
consists of three operations:

1. Obtain one value for sediment transport capacity from a matrix of values by
interpolation. The dimensions of the matrix (G) are 4x8x6 and correspond to
ranges of hydraulic radius, velocity, and mean diameter of bed sediment,
respectively. Since Colby's curves were developed on a log-log scale, it is
necessary to perform a series of three linear interpolations of logarithmic
values to derive the value for sediment transport appropriate for the
hydraulic parameters in the RCHRES. This value (GTUC) is not corrected for
the effects of fine sediment concentration or water temperature.

2. Correct sand transport capacity value to account for water temperature in

RCHRES. A multiplier is obtained from a matrix of values by interpolation.
The dimensions of the matrix (T) are 7x4 and correspond to ranges of water
temperature and hydraulic radius, respectively. A linear interpolation of
logarithmic values is performed to derive the appropriate temperature
correction factor. Generally speaking sand transport capacity, measured in
tons per day per foot of stream width, decreases with increasing stream width
(see Figure 4.2(3).5-5).

3. Correct sand transport capacity value to account for fine sediment load in
RCHRES. A multiplier is obtained from a matrix of values by interpolation.
The dimensions of the matrix (F) are 5x9 and correspond to ranges of fine
sediment load concentration and hydraulic radius, respectively. Again, a
linear interpolation of logarithmic values is performed to derive the
appropriate correction factor. Sand transport capacity increases with
increasing fine sediment load and with increasing stream width (Figure
4.2(3).5-5). It should be noted, however, that the correction factor is not
large for typical stream conditions. For example, the multiplier
corresponding to a fine sediment load of 10,000 ppm (with hydraulic radius of
1 foot) is 1.17.

181
 Module Section SEDTRN

Figure 4.2(3).5-4 Colby's relationship for discharge of sands in terms of

mean velocity for six median sizes of bed sands, four
depths of flow, and water temperature of 60 F

182
 Module Section SEDTRN

Figure 4.2(3).5-5 Colby's correction factors for effect of water temperature,

concentration of fine sediment, and sediment size; applied
to uncorrected discharge of sand given by Figure 4.2(3).5-4

183
 Module Section SEDTRN

The following additional comments are important to understanding and using the
COLBY subroutine in HSPF:

1. Fine sediment load is defined as the sum of suspended silt and clay.

2. If the value for median bed sediment diameter, hydraulic radius, or average
velocity for the RCHRES for a given simulation interval falls outside the
range of values considered in Colby's graphs, a solution for sand transport
capacity cannot be obtained by the Colby method. In this case, an error
message is printed which specifies which parameter is out of range, and
subroutine TOFFAL is automatically called to obtain a solution using the
Toffaleti method.

Acceptable ranges of parameter values for COLBY are:

(a) median bed sediment diameter 0.1-0.8 mm
(b) hydraulic radius 0.1-100 ft
(c) average velocity 1.0-10.0 ft/s

3. Both the Colby and Toffaleti formulations equate depth of flow to hydraulic
radius. This approximation is best for wide rivers. Subroutines COLBY and
TOFFAL were obtained and modified from Battelle Northwest Laboratories'
SERATRA model (Onishi and Wise, 1979). In this model, the depth of flow
values in Figures 4.2(3).5-4 and 4.2(3).5-5 are equated to hydraulic radius
values, and the HSPF version of COLBY has done the same. To the best of our
knowledge the accuracy of this approximation for narrow streams has not been
documented.

184
 Module Section GQUAL

4.2(3).6 Simulate the Behavior of a Generalized Quality Constituent

(Module Section GQUAL)

Purpose

The purpose of this code is to enable the model user to simulate the behavior of
a generalized constituent. The constituent which is modeled may be present in the
RCHRES only in a dissolved state, or it may also be sediment-associated. If the
generalized quality constituent, which will be called a "qual" throughout this
discussion, is not associated with sediment, module section GQUAL only considers
the following processes:

1. Advection of dissolved material

2. Decay processes. One or more of the following can be modeled:

a. hydrolysis
b. oxidation by free radical oxygen
c. photolysis
d. volatilization
e. biodegradation
f. generalized first-order decay

3. Production of one generalized quality constituent as a result of decay of

another generalized quality constituent by any of the listed decay processes
except volatilization. This capability is included to allow for situations
in which the decay products of a chemical are of primary interest to the user.

The following additional processes are considered if the generalized quality

constituent being modeled is sediment-associated:

4. Advection of adsorbed suspended material

5. Deposition and scour of adsorbed material with sediment

6. Decay of suspended and bed material

7. Adsorption/desorption between dissolved and sediment-associated phase.

Schematic View of Fluxes and Storage

Figure 4.2(3).6-1 illustrates the fluxes and storages modeled in section GQUAL.
Note that the arrows indicating fluxes from each of the sediment fraction storages
are not all labeled. For instance, although deposition and scour transfer
materials between the suspended storage and bed storage of all three sediment
fractions (sand, silt, clay), only the flux arrow for deposition/scour of clay is
labeled. Deposition/scour flux arrows for sand and silt are left unlabeled so that
the flow diagram does not become overly cluttered and incomprehensible. The same
convention is used for the other fluxes contained in the flow diagram (i.e., an
unlabeled flux arrow indicates that a flux of the same nature as a parallel labeled
flux occurs).

185
 Module Section GQUAL

Figure 4.2(3).6-1 Flow diagram for generalized quality constituent in the

GQUAL section of the RCHRES Application Module

186
 Module Section GQUAL

Approach

The first portion of GQUAL evaluates the nature of the data which will be used for
the GQUAL simulation. Since it is anticipated that some users of section GQUAL
will be using this section independently of many of the other sections of the
RCHRES application module, a variety of data types are allowed. In particular,
most data required for simulation of individual decay processes can be supplied in
the form of a single constant, 12 monthly constants, a time series value from the
INPAD, or in cases where the data value is calculated in another active section of
RCHRES, the last computed value may be used. Data types which may be obtained from
any one of these sources include:

1. water temperature
2. pH (for hydrolysis)
3. free radical oxygen (for oxidation)
4. total suspended sediment (for photolysis)
5. phytoplankton (for photolysis)
6. cloud cover (for photolysis)
7. wind (for volatilization on lakes)

GQUAL utilizes six routines to perform the simulation of a generalized quality

constituent. These six routines and their functions are:

1. OXREA: compute oxygen reaeration rate (used to simulate volatilization)

2. ADVECT: simulate advection of dissolved material
3. DDECAY: simulate decay of dissolved material
4. ADVQAL: advect sediment-associated material
5. ADECAY: simulate decay of qual adsorbed to suspended and bed sediment
6. ADSDES: simulate exchange of materials due to adsorption and desorption

Details on the methods used by these routines are provided in functional

descriptions 4.2(3)3.1, 4.2(3).7.1.2, and 4.2(3).6.1 through 4.2(3).6.4,
respectively.

Before ADVECT is called, GQUAL sums the inputs of dissolved qual from upstream
reaches, tributary land areas, and atmospheric deposition:

INDQAL = IDQAL + SAREA*ADFX + SAREA*PREC*ADCN (1)

where:
INDQAL = total input of dissolved qual to reach
IDQAL = input of dissolved qual from upstream reaches and tributary land
SAREA = surface area of reach
ADFX = dry or total atmospheric deposition flux in mass/area per interval
PREC = precipitation depth
ADCN = concentration for wet atmospheric deposition in mass/volume

187
 Module Section GQUAL

Atmospheric deposition inputs can be specified in two possible ways depending on

the form of the available data. If the deposition is in the form of a flux (mass
per area per time), then it is considered "dry deposition". If the deposition is
in the form of a concentration in rainfall, then it is considered "wet deposition",
and the program automatically combines it with the input rainfall time series to
compute the resulting flux. Either type of deposition data can be input as a time
series, which covers the entire simulation period, or as a set of monthly values
that is used for each year of the simulation. The specific atmospheric deposition
time series are documented in the EXTNL table of the Time Series Catalog for
RCHRES, and are specified in the EXT SOURCES block of the UCI. The monthly values
are input in the MONTH-DATA block in the UCI.

GQUAL is also responsible for the calculation of increases in qual resulting from
decay of a "parent" chemical. The HSPF code is designed so that a user may specify
that a "daughter" chemical is produced by any or all of the six decay processes
(except volatilization) which degrade a parent qual. However, certain restrictions
are placed on the daughter/parent relationship. Simulation of up to three
generalized quality constituents is allowed. Qual #2 may be produced by decay of
qual #1. Qual #3 may be produced by decay of qual #1 and/or qual #2. Other
relationships are not allowed. The user should sequence quality constituents
accordingly. The amount of daughter qual produced by decay of a parent by a
particular decay process is computed as:

PDQAL(I) = DDQAL(K,J)*C(I,J,K) (1)

where:
PDQAL(I) = amount of daughter qual I produced by decay of parent qual J
through process K (concu/l)*(ft3/ivl) or (concu/l)*(m3/ivl)
DDQAL(K,J) = amount of parent material decayed by process K
expressed in same units as PDQAL(I)
C(I,J,K) = amount of qual I produced per unit of qual J
degraded by process K in units of concu I/concu J

After the amount of decay resulting from all active decay processes and the amount
of input of qual produced by decay of parent qual(s) have been calculated, the new
dissolved concentration of a qual is computed as:

DQAL(I) = DQAL(I) + (PDQAL(I) - DDQAL(7,I))/VOL (2)

where:
DQAL(I) = concentration of dissolved qual I
PDQAL(I) = amount of qual I produced by decay of parent qual(s)
DDQAL(7,I) = total amount of qual I degraded by the decay processes
VOL = volume of water in the RCHRES

188
 Module Section GQUAL

Additional Requirements

HSPF allows a maximum of 3 general quality constituents. The user selects the
units for each constituent; thus, different constituents may have different units.
For example, the user may simulate fecal and total coliforms expressed in organisms
per ml and a pesticide expressed in milligrams per liter in the same simulation.
In order to provide this flexibility, additional input is required. For each
constituent the following information must be provided in the User's Control Input:

GQID: the name of the constituent (up to 20 characters long)

QTYID: this string (up to 8 characters) contains the units used to describe the
quantity of constituent entering or leaving the RCHRES, and the total
quantity of material stored in it. Examples of possible units for QTYID
are 'Morg' for millions of organisms or 'lbs' for pounds

CONCID: the concentration units for each decay constituent (up to 4 characters
long); examples are '#' or 'mg'. It is implied that these units are "per
l".

CONV: conversion factor from QTYID/VOL to desired concentration units: CONC =

CONV*(QTY/VOL) (in English system, VOL is expressed in ft3; in metric
system, VOL is expressed in m3)

For example, if:

CONCID is mg/l,
QTYID is kg, and
VOL is m3,
then CONV = 1000.

4.2(3).6.1 Simulate Decay of Dissolved Material (subroutine DDECAY)

Purpose

DDECAY simulates the degradation of generalized quality constituents by chemical

and/or biological means. Six processes are considered:

1. hydrolysis
2. oxidation by free radical oxygen
3. photolysis
4. volatilization
5. biodegradation
6. generalized first-order decay

189
 Module Section GQUAL

Discussion

HSPF includes detailed degradation methods only for the dissolved state of the
quality constituent (qual); decay of qual material in the adsorbed state is handled
by a lumped first-order decay function in subroutine ADECAY. Formulations of the
degradation processes are based on studies conducted by Smith et al. (1977, 1979),
Zepp and Cline (1977), Falco et al. (1976), and Mill et al. (1980). Most
formulations are similar to those included in the SERATRA model (Onishi and Wise,
1979). All degradation processes modeled in DDECAY contain a temperature
correction factor.

Methods

Hydrolysis

Hydrolysis is defined as any reaction that takes place in water, without the aid
of light or microorganisms, in which a compound is transformed to a different
compound as a result of reaction with water. The rate of change of dissolved qual
concentration due to hydrolysis is sensitive to changes in pH and water
temperature. In HSPF, the equation presented by Smith et al. (1977) is modified
to include a temperature correction factor and rewritten as:

KHYD = (KA*10.0**(-PHVAL) + KB*10.0**(PHVAL - 14.0) + KN)* (3)

THHYD**TW20

where:
KHYD = hydrolysis rate constant for qual adjusted for pH
and water temperature conditions of RCHRES
KA = hydrolysis rate coefficient for qual in acidic solution (pH5)
KB = hydrolysis rate coefficient for qual in basic solution (pH9)
KN = hydrolysis rate coefficient for qual in neutral solution (pH7)
PHVAL = pH of water in RCHRES
THHYD = temperature correction parameter for hydrolysis
TW20 = TW (water temperature in degrees C) - 20.0

The hydrolysis rate coefficients (KA, KB, KN) for a particular qual are determined
by standard laboratory tests (ASTM, 1980). Depending on the availability of data
and the needs of the model user, pH information for the hydrolysis equation can be
supplied as (1) one constant value, (2) twelve monthly values, or (3) a time
series. The time series can either be an input time series or the results of pH
simulation if section RQUAL is active and pH is simulated.

Oxidation by Free Radical Oxygen

Two general types of oxidation reactions can be distinguished for evaluating

chemical oxidation processes in an aquatic environment (Mill et al., 1980):

1. Reaction of an excited state of a molecule with oxygen, in which the excited

state is produced by direct photolysis or by interaction with a
photosensitizer; this process is termed photo-oxidation.

190
 Module Section GQUAL

2. Reaction of the ground state of the chemical with oxidants in solution, in

which the oxidants are formed by reactions of dissolved or suspended natural
materials in solution; these reactions are termed thermal oxidation,
autoxidation, or simply oxidation. The ultimate driving force for oxidant
formation may, however, often be photochemical reactions of the natural
materials.

In HSPF, photo-oxidation is considered as one of the photo-initiated degradation

processes collectively labelled as photolysis. Consequently, only thermal
oxidation is considered in the following formulation. The rate of oxidation of
dissolved qual is expressed as a function of free radical oxygen concentration
(ROC) and water temperature:

KROX = KOX*ROC*(THOX**TW20) (4)

where:
KROX = oxidation rate constant for qual adjusted for free
radical oxygen concentration and water temperature
KOX = base oxidation rate coefficient for qual
ROC = free radical oxygen concentration (moles/l (M))
THOX = temperature correction parameter for oxidation
TW20 = TW (water temperature in degrees C) - 20.0

The oxidation rate coefficient (KOX) for a qual is determined from laboratory
tests. Mill et al. (1980) cites two groups of oxidants which are likely to be
important in natural waters: alkylperoxy radicals and singlet molecular oxygen.
The overall free radical oxygen concentration can be specified by the user as a
constant value, twelve monthly values, or a time series.

Photolysis

Photochemical transformation of chemicals can occur when energy in the form of

light is absorbed by a molecule, placing it in an excited state from which reaction
can occur. Direct photolysis of chemicals occurs when the chemical molecule itself
absorbs light and undergoes reaction from its excited state. Indirect photolysis
occurs when another chemical species, called a sensitizer, absorbs light and the
sensitizer transfers energy from its excited state to another chemical, which then
undergoes reaction. There are many types of photochemical reactions, including
oxidation, reduction, hydrolysis, substitution, and rearrangement. In practice it
is possible to measure the rate constant for photochemical reaction or a reaction
quantum yield without knowing the types of reactions which are occurring (Mill et
al., 1980). The formulation of photolysis developed for HSPF is intended to
measure the net degradation of a generalized quality constituent which results from
photochemical reactions.

The basic equation for rate of loss of a qual in dilute solution in an environ-
mental water body due to absorbance of light of wavelength lambda is given by:

KPHOL = ((PHI*INLITL)/DEP)*FSLAM*FQLAM (5)

191
 Module Section GQUAL

where:
KPHOL = rate of loss of qual due to photolysis by light of wavelength lambda
PHI = reaction quantum yield for photolysis of qual (moles/einstein)
INLITL = incident light intensity of wavelength lambda (einsteins/cm2.day)
DEP = depth of water
FSLAM = fraction of light absorbed by the system
FQLAM = fraction of absorbed light that is absorbed by qual

The solution technique outlined by Mill and implemented in HSPF uses seasonal
day-averaged, 24-hour light intensity values (LLAM) for 18 wavelength intervals
from 300 nm to 800 nm. In order to use these values, the relationship between the
light intensity variable (INLITL) in Equation 5 and the tabulated values for LLAM
must be defined. The relationship derived by Mill for relatively clear water or
shallow depths can be written as:

INLITL = LLAM/2.3*BETA (6)

where:
BETA = LLIT/DEP
LLIT = path length of light through water
DEP = depth of water

Further, the effects of cloud cover on light intensity are introduced by adding
factor CLDLAM:

INLITL = (LLAM/2.3*BETA)*CLDLAM (7)

where:
CLDLAM = fraction of total light intensity of wavelength
lambda which is not absorbed or scattered by clouds

CLDLAM is calculated as:

CLDLAM = (10.0 - CC*KCLDL)/10.0 (8)

where:
CC = cloud cover in tenths
KCLDL = efficiency of cloud cover in intercepting light
of wavelength lambda, a user supplied parameter (default value 0.0)

By substitution of Equation 7 into Equation 5, the general equation for the

photolysis rate of a qual due to absorbance of light of wavelength lambda can be
expressed as:

KPHOL = ((PHI*LLAM*CLDLAM)/2.3*BETA*DEP)*FSLAM*FQLAM (9)

The general mathematical expression for the fraction of light absorbed by the water
system (FSLAM) is:

FSLAM = 1.0 - 10**(-KLAM*LLIT) (10)

192
 Module Section GQUAL

The exponential coefficient, KLAM, in this equation has two components for
laboratory conditions:

KLAM = ALPHL + EPSLAM*C (11)

where:
ALPHL = base absorbance term for light of wavelength lambda
for the system (/cm)
EPSLAM = absorbance term for light of wavelength lambda
absorbed by qual (l/mole.cm)
C = concentration of qual (moles/l)

For environmental systems, the effects of light absorbance by suspended sediment

and phytoplankton are introduced to the formulation, and KLAM is expanded to:

KLAM = ALPHL + EPSLAM*C + GAMLAM*SED + DELLAM*PHYTO (12)

where:
GAMLAM = absorbance term for light absorbed by suspended sediment (l/mg/cm)
SED = total suspended sediment (mg/l)
DELLAM = absorbance term for light absorbed by phytoplankton (l/mg/cm)
PHYTO = phytoplankton concentration (mg/l)

Because the concentration of qual is assumed small, the fraction of total

absorbance of light in the water system resulting from absorbance by the qual is
assumed negligible, and the term (EPSLAM*C) is dropped from Equation 12. By
substituting the modified value of KLAM into Equation 9 , setting LLIT = BETA*DEP
(from Equation 6), and assuming that BETA = 1.2 (Mill, 1980), the final form of the
expression for FSLAM is obtained:

FSLAM = 1.0 - 10**(-1.2*KLAM*DEP) (13)

The remaining term of the general equation for photolysis (Equation 9) which must
be evaluated is FQLAM, the fraction of total absorbed light that is absorbed by the
qual. This term is evaluated as:

FQLAM = (EPSLAM*C)/KLAM (14)

Equation 9 can be rewritten as:

PHOFXL = ((PHI*LLAM*CLDLAM)/2.3*BETA*DEP)* (15)

(1.0 - 10**(-1.2*KLAM*DEP))*(EPSLAM*C/KLAM)

To obtain the rate of loss of qual due to photolysis from absorption of light of
all wavelength intervals, Equation 15 must be summed over LLAM:

KPHO = (PHI/(2.76*DEP))*(SUM [1 to 18] ((LLAM* (16)

CLDLAM*EPSLAM/KLAM)*(1.0 - EXP(-2.76*KLAM*DEP))

193
 Module Section GQUAL

The equation for the degradation rate due to photolysis used in HSPF is further
complicated by correction factors for surface shading and water temperature. The
final rearranged and expanded formulation is:

KPHO = (CF*DELT60/24.)*PHI*(SUM [1 to 18] ((LLAM*CLDLAM/2.76* (17)

KLAM*DEP)*(1.0 - EXP(-2.76*KLAM*DEP))*EPSLAM))*THPHO**TW20

where:
SUM = summation of function in ( ) over limits in [ ]
CF = factor accounting for surface shading
DELT60/24 = conversion from day to interval
THPHO = temperature correction parameter for photolysis
TW20 = TW (water temperature in degrees C) - 20.0

For simulation intervals of less than 24 hours, photolysis is assumed to occur only
between 6:00 AM and 6:00 PM during approximate daylight hours. In order to obtain
a solution which is reasonably consistent with the input seasonal, day-averaged,
24-hour light intensity values, the daily light intensity is assumed to be
uniformly distributed over the 12 hours from 6:00 AM to 6:00 PM. Consequently,
calculated photolysis rates are doubled during daylight hours and set equal to zero
for non-daylight hours. It should be noted that five look-up tables for solar
intensity values (LLAM) are incorporated into HSPF. Tables 4.2(3).6-l through
4.2(3).6-5 show the values for seasonal day-averaged, 24 hour light intensity at
1O, 20, 30, 40, and 50 degrees latitude. The Run Interpreter checks the input
latitude for the study area and selects the appropriate table from which to extract
values. Additional input required to simulate photolysis in subroutine DDECAY
include:

1. Molar absorption coefficients for each of the 18 wavelengths

2. Reaction quantum yield for qual (PHI)
3. Temperature correction parameter for photolysis (THPHO)
4. 18 values for base absorbance term for water system (ALPHL)
5. 18 values for absorbance for light absorbed by suspended sediment (GAMLAM)
6. 18 values for absorbance for light absorbed by phytoplankton (DELLAM)
7. Cloud cover values. Either a time series or 12 monthly values may be supplied.
8. Total suspended sediment values. Either a time series or 12 monthly values.
9. Phytoplankton values. Either a time series or 12 monthly.

194
 Module Section GQUAL

Table 4.2(3).6-1 Solar Intensity Values for Latitude 10 N

Wavelength, Solar Intensity, milli-einsteins/cm2/day

Nanometers Spring Summer Fall Winter

300 1.02E-2 4.66E-4 4.19E-4 3.20E-4

303.75 1.78E-2 3.16E-3 2.87E-3 2.39E-3
308.75 2.85E-2 9.37E-3 8.51E-3 7.26E-3
313.75 3.27E-2 1.90E-2 1.73E-3 1.51E-2
318.75 4.18E-2 2.91E-2 2.66E-2 2.38E-2
323.1 3.70E-2 2.65E-2 2.91E-2 2.36E-2
346 3.39E-1 3.29E-1 2.99E-1 2.92E-1
370 4.33E-1 4.38E-1 3.85E-1 3.44E-1
400 8.40E-1 8.37E-1 7.64E-1 6.96E-1
430 1.16 1.17 1.07 9.80E-1
460 1.47 1.47 1.36 1.23
490 1.50 1.50 1.37 1.27
536.25 2.74 2.69 2.46 2.26
587.5 2.90 2.79 2.52 2.35
637.5 2.90 2.80 2.60 2.43
687.5 2.80 2.80 2.60 2.30
756 2.70 2.70 2.50 2.40
800 3.00 2.50 2.30 2.10

Table 4.2(3).6-2 Solar Intensity Values for Latitude 20 N

Wavelength, Solar Intensity, milli-einsteins/cm2/day

Nanometers Spring Summer Fall Winter

300 3.51E-4 4.44E-4 2.74E-4 1.47E-4

303.75 2.51E-3 3.15E-3 2.20E-3 1.47E-3
308.75 8.09E-3 9.61E-3 6.89E-3 5.34E-3
313.75 1.81E-2 1.97E-2 1.48E-2 1.15E-2
318.75 2.82E-2 3.02E-2 2.33E-2 1.88E-2
323.1 2.83E-2 3.03E-2 2.33E-2 1.88E-2
340 3.29E-1 3.47E-1 2.68E-1 2.21E-1
370 4.24E-1 4.47E-1 3.45E-1 2.86E-1
406 8.41E-1 8.83E-1 6.96E-1 5.97E-1
430 1.17 1.23 9.80E-1 8.40E-1
460 1.47 1.55 1.24 1.06
490 1.50 1.58 1.26 1.09
536.25 2.68 2.81 2.30 1.95
587.5 2.80 2.96 2.35 2.03
637.5 2.80 2.90 2.42 2.07
687.5 2.80 3.00 2.40 2.10
750 2.76 2.80 2.20 2.36
800 2.50 2.70 2.26 1.60

195
 Module Section GQUAL

Table 4.2(3).6-3 Solar Intensity Values for Latitude 30 N

Wavelength, Solar Intensity, milli-einsteins/cm2/day

Nanometers Spring Summer Fall Winter

300 2.30E-4 3.65E-4 1.35E-4 4.10E-5

303.75 2.13E-3 2.32E-3 1.44E-3 6.50E-4
308.73 7.26E-3 9.02E-3 4.84E-3 2.76E-3
313.75 1.65E-2 1.92E-2 1.16E-2 7.55E-3
318.75 2.64E-2 3.02E-2 1.89E-2 1.31E-2
323.1 2.69E-2 3.04E-2 2.30E-2 1.34E-2
340 3.20E-1 3.74E-1 2.23E-1 1.70E-1
370 4.14E-1 4.37E-1 2.84E-1 2.19E-1
400 8.27E-1 9.07E-1 6.23E-1 4.75E-1
430 1.15 1.34 8.50E-1 6.69E-1
460 1.45 1.59 1.09 8.50E-1
490 1.48 1.62 1.11 8.80E-1
536.25 2.64 2.89 2.00 1.57
587.5 2.74 3.03 2.07 1.63
637.5 2.76 3.00 2.09 1.67
687.5 2.80 3.00 2.10 1.73
750 2.70 2.90 2.10 1.63
800 2.50 2.80 1.90 1.60

Table 4.2(3).6-4 Solar Intensity Values for Latitude 40 N

Wavelength, Solar Intensity, milli-einsteins/cm2/day

Nanometers Spring Summer Fall Winter

300 1.09E-4 2.49E-4 1.09E-4 5.38E-6

303.75 1.37E-3 2.32E-3 1.37E-3 1.56E-4
308.75 2.96E-3 7.93E-3 5.35E-3 1.02E-3
313.75 7.99E-3 1.81E-2 1.38E-2 3.79E-3
318.75 1.38E-2 2.91E-2 2.319E-2 7.53E-3
323.1 1.42E-2 2.97E-2 2.39E-2 8.10E-3
340 1.78E-1 3.54E-1 1.08E-1 7.52E-2
370 2.30E-1 4.58E-1 3.84E-1 1.47E-1
400 5.26E-1 9.71E-1 7.91E-1 3.38E-1
430 6.76E-1 1.28 1.11 4.80E-1
460 8.90E-1 1.43 1.39 6.10E-1
490 9.23E-1 1.63 1.42 6.20E-1
536.25 1.69 2.92 2.52 1.12
587.5 1.73 3.05 2.62 1.16
637.5 1.78 3.00 2.60 1.19
687.5 1.50 3.10 4.70 1.39
750 1.70 2.90 2.60 1.20
800 1.60 2.90 2.50 1.16

196
 Module Section GQUAL

Table 4.2(3).6-5 Solar Intensity Values for Latitude 50 N

Wavelength, Solar Intensity, milli-einsteins/cm2/day

Nanometers Spring Summer Fall Winter

300 3.71E-5 7.88E-6 1.52E-4 4.00E-7

303.75 7.10E-4 1.75E-3 2.25E-4 1.57E-5
308.75 3.55E-3 6.53E-3 1.29E-3 1.78E-4
313.75 7.30E-3 1.63E-2 4.39E-3 1.20E-3
318.75 1.84E-3 2.67E-2 8.64E-3 2.93E-3
323.1 1.96E-2 2.77E-2 9.20E-3 3.68E-3
340 2.66E-1 3.43E-1 1.24E-1 6.29E-2
370 3.48E-1 4.44E-1 1.66E-1 8.21E-2
400 7.24E-1 9.04E-1 3.65E-1 1.96E-1
430 1.02 1.26 5.17E-1 2.75E-1
460 1.29 1.60 6.60E-1 3.51E-1
470 1.32 1.63 6.80E-1 3.55E-1
536.25 2.34 2.90 1.22 6.30E-1
587.5 2.40 3.04 1.25 6.40E-1
637.5 2.44 3.00 1.31 6.90E-1
687.5 2.50 3.10 1.34 7.10E-1
750 2.50 2.90 1.31 7.10E-1
800 2.30 2.90 1.24 6.90E-1

197
 Module Section GQUAL

Volatilization

Volatilization of a chemical that is dissolved in water is defined as the transport

of the chemical from the water to the atmosphere. The concentration of the
chemical in water decreases even though a transformation does not occur. Thus,
volatilization is not a degradation process in the strict sense, since the chemical
which leaves a water body by volatilization is not biologically or chemically
degraded. Current evidence suggests that volatilization is likely to be the major
aquatic fate of low molecular weight, nonpolar compounds that are not rapidly
biodegraded or chemically transformed. Volatilization rates of higher molecular
weight compounds can also be significant under certain conditions (Smith, 1979).

In HSPF, the volatilization rate of a qual is tied to the oxygen reaeration

coefficient:

KVOL = KOREA*CFGAS (18)

where:
KVOL = rate of loss of qual from water due to volatilization
KOREA = oxygen reaeration coefficient calculated by subroutine OXREA
CFGAS = ratio of volatilization rate of qual to oxygen reaeration
rate, an input parameter.

The value for input parameter CFGAS can be determined as the ratio of the molecular
diameter of oxygen to the molecular diameter of the qual.

Biodegradation

Biodegradation is one of the most important processes for transformation of

chemical compounds when they enter natural environments. Many organic chemicals
are used by living cells for carbon and energy sources. Microorganisms metabolize
a wide variety of organic compounds, including many man-made chemicals (Chou,
1980). The rate of biodegradation of a dissolved qual is expressed as a function
of the concentration of biomass which degrades the qual (BIO) and water
temperature:

KBIO = KBMASS*BIO*(THBIO**TW20) (19)

where:
KBIO = biodegradation rate constant for qual adjusted for
biomass concentration and water temperature
BIOCON = base biodegradation rate coefficient for qual
BIO = concentration of biomass that is involved in qual degradation
THBIO = temperature correction parameter for biodegradation
TW20 = TW (water temperature in degrees C) - 20.0

198
 Module Section GQUAL

Biomass data may be supplied as a constant, 12 monthly values, or a time series.

HSPF allows for the fact that a different population of microorganisms can be
involved in the biodegradation of each different generalized quality constituent
by requiring the user to specify a unique set of biomass data for each constituent
which is simulated.

Generalized First-order Decay

Generalized first-order decay of dissolved qual may be simulated in addition to,

or instead of, the individual decay processes outlined above. The equation used
to calculate rate of decay is:

KGEN = KGEND*THGEN**TW20 (20)

where:
KGEN = generalized first-order decay rate for a qual
corrected for temperature
KGEND = base first-order decay rate for a qual
THGEN = temperature correction parameter for first-order decay

After decay rates for all of the processes which are active for a qual have been
calculated, they are summed to determine a total decay rate. At this point the
total loss of qual material resulting from decay is evaluated:

DDQALT = DQAL*(1.0 - EXP(-KTOTD))*VOL (21)

where:
DDQALT = loss of qual due to all forms of degradation,
expressed in (concu/l)*(ft3/ivl) or (concu/l)*(m3/ivl)
DQAL = concentration of dissolved qual (concu/l)
KTOTD = total decay rate of qual per interval
VOL = volume of water in the RCHRES

Finally, to determine the amount of material degraded by each individual process,

a linear proration is performed based on the total decay of material:

DDQAL(I) = (K(I)/KTOTD)*DDQALT (22)

where:
DDQAL(I) = loss of qual due to decay by process I, expressed
in (concu/l)*(ft3/ivl) or (concu/l)*(m3/ivl)
K(I) = decay rate due to process I (/ivl)

199
 Module Section GQUAL

4.2(3).6.2 Simulate Advection of Material on Sediment

(subroutine ADVQAL)

Purpose

ADVQAL simulates the advective processes for the quality constituent attached to
one sediment size fraction. Processes handled in this subroutine include:

1. Inflow to the RCHRES of qual attached to suspended sediment.

2. Migration of qual from suspension in the water to the bed as a result of

deposition of the sediment to which the qual is adsorbed.

3. Migration of qual from the bed into suspension in the water as a result of
scour of the bed sediments to which the qual is adsorbed.

4. Outflow from the RCHRES of qual attached to suspended sediment.

Method

The movement of adsorbed qual is completely determined by the movement of the

sediment to which it is attached. All fluxes of adsorbed qual are expressed as the
product of the flux of a sediment fraction (sand, silt, or clay) and the
concentration of qual associated with that fraction (expressed in concu per mg of
sediment). Likewise, storages of adsorbed qual are expressed as the product of the
sediment fraction storage and the associated concentration of qual. A simplified
flow diagram of sediment and associated qual fluxes and storages is provided in
Figure 4.2(3).6-2 to facilitate the following discussion. Note that ADVQAL is
designed to operate on one sediment fraction and one qual each time it is called
by GQUAL.

If the sediment simulation in module section SEDTRN indicates that scour of bed
storage of a sediment fraction occurs, the following actions are taken in ADVQAL:

1. Bed storage of adsorbed qual is updated.

2. Flux of qual from bed to suspension (DSQAL) is set equal to the bed storage
of the qual (RBQAL) if the entire bed storage of the sediment fraction is
scoured.

3. If only part of the bed storage of the sediment fraction is scoured, the flux
of qual from bed to suspension is calculated as:

DSQAL = BQAL*DEPSCR (23)

200
 Module Section GQUAL

Figure 4.2(3).6-2 Simplified flow diagram for important fluxes and storages
of sediment and associated qual used in subroutine ADVQAL

201
 Module Section GQUAL

where:
DSQAL = amount of qual scoured from bed and added to suspension
expressed in (concu/1)*(ft3/ivl) or (concu/1)*(m3/ivl)
BQAL = concentration of qual on bed sediment fraction
under consideration in concu/mg sediment
DEPSCR = amount of sediment fraction which is scoured from
the bed expressed in mg.ft3/1.ivl or mg.m3/l.ivl

4. Concentration of adsorbed qual in suspension is updated to account for scour:

SQAL = (ISQAL + RSQALS - DSQAL)/(RSED + ROSED) (24)

where:
SQAL = concentration of adsorbed qual in suspension
expressed as concu/mg suspended sediment fraction
ISQAL = inflow of qual to the RCHRES as a result of inflowing sediment
fraction, expressed as (concu/l)*(ft3/ivl) or (concu/l)*(m3/ivl)
RSQALS = storage of qual on suspended sediment fraction
expressed in (concu/l)*ft3 or (concu/l)*m3
RSED = amount of sediment fraction in suspension at end of interval
expressed in mg.ft3/l or mg.m3/l
ROSED = amount of sediment fraction contained in outflow from the RCHRES
during the interval expressed in mg.ft3/l.ivl or mg.m3/l.ivl

5. Amount of qual leaving the RCHRES as outflow is determined as:

ROSQAL = ROSED*SQAL (25)

If the sediment simulation in module section SEDTRN indicates that deposition of

suspended sediment occurs, ADVQAL performs the following operations:

1. Concentration of qual on total suspended sediment fraction (inflow + suspended

storage) for the RCHRES is calculated:

SQAL = (ISQAL + RSQALS)/(RSED + DEPSCR + ROSED) (26)

2. Amount of qual leaving the RCHRES due to outflow of sediment fraction is

determined:

ROSQAL = ROSED*SQAL (27)

3. Amount of qual leaving suspension due to deposition of the sediment to which

it is adsorbed is found by:

DSQAL = DEPSCR*SQAL (28)

202
 Module Section GQUAL

4. The concentration of qual on sediment in suspension is set equal to zero if

the suspended storage of sediment is zero.

5. The concentration of qual on bed sediment is set equal to zero if the storage
of bed sediment at the end of the interval is zero.

6. If there is bed sediment at the end of the interval, the bed storage of qual
associated with the sediment fraction is calculated as:

RBQAL = DSQAL + RBQALS (29)

7. The concentration of qual on bed sediment is determined:

BQAL = RBQAL/BSED (30)

where:
BSED = storage of sediment fraction (sand, silt, or clay)
in the bed, expressed as mg.ft3/l or mg.m3/l

The final operation which ADVQAL performs is the computation of outflow of adsorbed
qual through individual exits (when more than one exit is specified). The algorithm
is:

OSQAL (I) = ROSQAL*OSED(I)/ROSED (31)

where:
OSQAL(I) = outflow of adsorbed qual through exit gate I
ROSQAL = total outflow of adsorbed qual from RCHRES
OSED(I) = outflow of sediment fraction through exit gate I

4.2(3).6.3 Simulate Decay of Adsorbed Material

(subroutine ADECAY)

Purpose

ADECAY is a generalized subroutine which calculates the amount of decay experienced

by a generalized quality constituent (qual) adsorbed to inorganic sediment. This
subroutine is called twice (once for decay on suspended sediment and once for decay
on bed sediment) for each generalized quality constituent which is sediment-
associated. (The user specifies that a qual is sediment-associated by setting
QALFG(7)=1 for the qual in the User's Control Input.) HSPF assumes that the decay
rate of a particular adsorbed qual is the same for all fractions of sediment (sand,
silt, and clay), but may be different for suspended sediment than it is for bed
sediment.

203
 Module Section GQUAL

Method

Necessary information which must be supplied to the subroutine includes:

1. ADDCPM(1) - decay rate for qual on sediment being

considered (suspended or bed)

2. ADDCPM(2) - temperature correction coefficient for decay

3. RSED(1-3) - the storage of each sediment fraction

expressed in mg.ft3/l or mg.m3/l (for
either suspended or bed sediment)

4. SQAL(1-3) - the concentration of qual associated with

the 3 fractions of sediment (concu/mg)

First, the temperature-adjusted decay rate is calculated:

DK = ADDCPM(1)*ADDCPM(2)**TW20 (32)

where:
TW20 = TW (water temperature) - 20.0 in degrees C.

Next, the fraction of adsorbed qual which decays during the simulation interval
(FACT) is calculated using the general form for first-order decay:

FACT = 1.0 - EXP(-DK) (33)

The concentration of qual decayed from each sediment fraction (DCONC) is

determined, and the concentration of qual associated with each fraction is updated:

DCONC = SQAL(I)*FACT (34)

SQAL(I) = SQAL(I) - DCONC (35)

Finally, the mass of qual decayed from each sediment fraction is calculated:

SQDEC(I) = DCONC*RSED(I) (36)

where:
SQDEC(I) = amount of qual decayed from sediment fraction I expressed in
(concu/l)*(ft3/ivl) or (concu/l)*(m3/ivl)
DCONC = concentration of qual decayed from sediment fraction (concu/mg)
RSED(I) = storage of sediment fraction I (mg.ft3/l or mg.m3/l)

204
 Module Section GQUAL

4.2(3).6.4 Simulate Adsorption/Desorption of a Generalized Quality Constituent

(subroutine ADSDES)

Purpose

ADSDES simulates the exchange of a generalized quality constituent (qual) between

the dissolved state and adsorbed state. Kinetic equilibrium between dissolved
state and six adsorption sites is modeled: suspended sand, silt, and clay, and bed
sand, silt, and clay.

Method

The basic equation (Onishi and Wise, 1979) for the transfer of a chemical between
the dissolved state and an adsorbed state on sediment type J is:

-d(RSEDJ*SQALJ)/dt + RSEDJ*KJT*(KDJ*DQAL - SQALJ) = 0 (37)

where:
RSEDJ = total quantity of sediment type J in the RCHRES
(mg.ft3/l or mg.m3/l)
SQALJ = concentration of qual on sediment type J (concu/mg)
DQAL = concentration of dissolved qual (concu/l)
KDJ = distribution coefficient between dissolved state and sediment type
J (liters/mg) (adsorbed concentration/dissolved concentration)
KJT = temperature corrected transfer rate between dissolved
state and sediment type J

Thus, adsorption of a qual by sediment or desorption from sediment is assumed to

occur toward an equilibrium condition with transfer rate KJT if the particulate
qual concentration differs from its equilibrium value. Equation 37 is actually 6
equations (one for each sediment type J) with 7 unknowns (DQAL and 6 values of
SQALJ). The necessary seventh equation is that of conservation of material. The
following relation gives the total quantity of qual in the RCHRES, both before and
after exchange due to adsorption/desorption:

SUM [1 to 6](RSEDJ*SQALJ) + VOL*DQAL = TOT (38)

where:
VOL = volume of water in the RCHRES

To solve numerically, Equation 37 is expressed in finite difference form:

-RSEDJ*(SQALJ - SQALJO) + RSEDJ*KJT*KDJ*DQAL*DELT (39)

- RSEDJ*KJT*SQALJ*DELT = 0

where:
SQALJ = concentration of qual on sediment type J at end of
simulation interval (subsequent to adsorption/desorption)
SQALJO = concentration of qual on sediment type J at start of interval
DELT = simulation time step

205
 Module Section GQUAL

The product of the transfer rate for sediment type J and the simulation time step
is calculated (AKJ = KJT*DELT), and the resulting value is substituted into
Equations 38 and 39. Two forms of Equation 38 are written. Equation 40 expresses
conservation of material at the beginning of the simulation interval and Equation
41 expresses conservation of material at the end of the interval:

- SUM [1 to 6] ((RSEDJ*SQALJO) - VOL*DQALO) = -TOT (40)

- SUM [1 to 6] ((RSEDJ*SQALJ) - VOL*DQAL ) = -TOT (41)

Equation 39 is rewritten as:

RSEDJ((1.0 + AKJ)/(AKJ*KDJ))*SQALJ - RSEDJ*DQAL = (42)

(RSEDJ*SQALJO)/(AKJ*KDJ)

Equations 41 and 42 can be written in matrix form and solved for unknowns SQALJ and
DQAL using standard procedures such as Gaussian elimination or the Crout reduction.
The solutions are:

DQAL = (TOT - SUM [1 to 6] (RSEDJ*CJ)/AJJ)/ (43)

(VOL + SUM [1 to 6] (RSEDJ/AJJ))

SQALJ = (CJ/AJJ) + (DQAL/AJJ) (44)

where:
DQAL = concentration of dissolved qual after adsorption/desorption
SQALJ = concentration of qual on sediment type J after adsorption/desorption
AJJ = (1 + AKJ)/(AKJ*KDJ)
CJ = (SQALJO/AKJ*KDJ)

By combining Equations 40 and 43, TOT can be eliminated, and a final solution for
DQAL can be obtained:

DQAL = (VOL*DQALO + SUM [1 to 6] (SQALJO - CJ/AJJ)*RSEDJ)) (45)

/(VOL + SUM [1 to 6] (RSEDJ/AJJ))

In subroutine ADSDES, the following variables are used to facilitate the evaluation
of Equations 44 and 45:

AINVJ = 1.0/AJJ = (AKJ*KDJ)/(1.0 + AKJ) (46)

CAINVJ = CJ/AJJ = (SQALJO/(1.0 + AKJ)) (47)

206
 Module Section RQUAL

4.2(3).7 Simulate Constituents Involved in Biochemical Transformations

(Section RQUAL of Module RCHRES)

RQUAL is the parent routine to the four subroutine groups which simulate
constituents involved in biochemical transformations. Within module section RQUAL
the following constituents may be simulated:

dissolved oxygen
biochemical oxygen demand
ammonia
nitrite
nitrate
orthophosphorus
phytoplankton
benthic algae
zooplankton
dead refractory organic nitrogen
dead refractory organic phosphorus
dead refractory organic carbon
total inorganic carbon
pH
carbon dioxide

Four additional quantities are estimated from simulation of these constituents.

These quantities are total organic nitrogen, total organic phosphorus, total
organic carbon, and potential biochemical oxygen demand. The definition of these
quantities is determined by their method of calculation:

TORN = ORN + CVBN*(ZOO + PHYTO + BOD/CVBO) (1)

TORP = ORP + CVBP*(ZOO + PHYTO + BOD/CVBO) (2)
TORC = ORC + CVBC*(ZOO + PHYTO + BOD/CVBO) (3)
POTBOD = BOD + CVNRBO*(ZOO + PHYTO) (4)

where:
TORN = total organic nitrogen (mg N/l)
TORP = total organic phosphorus (mg P/l)
TORC = total organic carbon (mg C/l)
POTBOD = potential BOD (mg O/l)
ORN = dead refractory organic nitrogen (mg N/l)
ORP = dead refractory organic phosphorus (mg P/l)
ORC = dead refractory organic carbon (mg C/l)
BOD = biochemical oxygen demand from dead nonrefractory organic
materials (mg O/l)
CVBN = conversion from mg biomass to mg nitrogen
CVBP = conversion from mg biomass to mg phosphorus
CVBC = conversion from mg biomass to mg carbon
CVNRBO = conversion from mg biomass to mg biochemical oxygen demand
(with allowance for non-refractory fraction)
CVBO = conversion from mg biomass to mg oxygen
ZOO = zooplankton (mg biomass/l)
PHYTO = phytoplankton (mg biomass/l)

207
 Module Section RQUAL

Subroutine RQUAL performs two tasks. First, RQUAL is responsible for calling the
four subroutine groups which simulate the constituents listed above. These four
groups and their functions are:

1. OXRX: simulate primary dissolved oxygen and biochemical oxygen

demand balances
2. NUTRX: determine inorganic nitrogen and phosphorus balances
3. PLANK: simulate plankton populations and associated reactions
4. PHCARB: simulate pH and inorganic carbon species

The four groups are listed in their order of execution, and the execution of a
group is dependent upon the execution of the groups listed above it. For example,
subroutine group PHCARB cannot be activated unless OXRX, NUTRX, and PLANK are
active. On the other hand, the reactions in OXRX can be performed without the
reactions contained in the other three subroutine groups.

The other function of RQUAL is to determine the values for variables which are used
jointly by the four subroutine groups. The following variables are evaluated:

1. AVVELE: the average velocity of water in the RCHRES (ft/s)

2. AVDEPE: the average depth of water in the RCHRES (ft)
3. DEPCOR: conversion factor from square meters to liters
(used for changing areal quantities from the benthal
surface to equivalent volumetric values based on the
depth of water in the RCHRES)
4. SCRFAC: scouring factor to be used for calculation of benthal
release rates of inorganic nitrogen, orthophosphorus,
carbon dioxide, and biochemical oxygen demand

SCRFAC has one of two values depending on the average velocity (AVVELE) of the
water in the RCHRES. AVVELE is compared to the value of parameter SCRVEL, the user-
specified velocity at and above which scouring occurs. If AVVELE is less than the
value of parameter SCRVEL, then SCRFAC is set equal to 1.0, and there is no
increase of benthal release rates due to scouring. If AVVELE is greater than
SCRVEL, SCRFAC is set equal to the value of parameter SCRMUL, which is a constant
multiplication factor applied directly to the release rates to account for scouring
by rapidly moving water.

208
 Subroutine Group OXRX

4.2(3).7.1 Simulate Primary DO and BOD Balances

(Subroutine Group OXRX of Module RCHRES)

Purpose

The purpose of this code is to simulate the primary processes which determine the
dissolved oxygen concentration in a reach or mixed reservoir. Dissolved oxygen
concentration is generally viewed as an indicator of the overall well-being of
streams or lakes and their associated ecological systems. In relatively unpolluted
waters, sources and sinks of oxygen are in approximate balance, and the
concentration remains close to saturation. By contrast, in a stream receiving
untreated waste waters, the natural balance is upset, bacteria predominate, and a
significant depression of dissolved oxygen results (O'Connor and DiToro, 1970).

Schematic View of Fluxes and Storages

Figures 4.2(3).7.1-1 and 4.2(3).7.1-2 illustrate the fluxes and storages modeled
in this subroutine group. In order to account for temporal variations in oxygen
balance, state variables for both dissolved oxygen and biochemical oxygen demand
must be maintained. The state variable DOX represents the oxygen dissolved in
water and immediately available to satisfy the oxygen requirements of the system.
The BOD state variable represents the total quantity of oxygen required to satisfy
the first-stage (carbonaceous) biochemical oxygen demand of dead nonrefractory
organic materials in the water.

Subroutine OXRX considers the following processes in determining oxygen balance:

1. longitudinal advection of DOX and BOD

2. sinking of BOD material
3. benthal oxygen demand
4. benthal release of BOD material
5. reaeration
6. oxygen depletion due to decay of BOD materials

Additional sources and sinks of DOX and BOD are simulated in other sections of the
RCHRES module. If module section NUTRX (Section 4.2(3).7.2) is active, the effects
of nitrification on dissolved oxygen and denitrification on BOD balance can be
considered. If module section PLANK (Section 4.2(3).7.3) is active, the dissolved
oxygen balance can be adjusted to account for photosynthetic and respiratory
activity by phytoplankton and/or benthic algae and respiration by zooplankton.
Adjustments to the BOD state variable in section PLANK include increments due to
death of plankton and nonrefractory organic excretion by zooplankton.

209
 Subroutine Group OXRX

Figure 4.2(3).7.1-1 Flow diagram for dissolved oxygen in the OXRX

subroutine group of the RCHRES Application Module

Figure 4.2(3).7.1-2 Flow diagram for biochemical oxygen demand in the OXRX
subroutine group of the RCHRES Application Module

210
 Subroutine Group OXRX

Subroutine OXRX uses five subroutines to simulate dissolved oxygen and biochemical
oxygen demand. Advection of DOX and BOD is performed by ADVECT. Sinking of BOD
material is carried out by SINK. OXBEN calculates benthal oxygen demand and
benthal release of BOD materials. The oxygen reaeration coefficient is determined
by utilizing OXREA, and BOD decay calculations are performed in BODDEC.

Since subroutine OXREA may also be called by module section GQUAL to obtain the
oxygen reaeration coefficient (KOREA) for calculation of volatilization rates for
generalized quality constituents, the change in dissolved oxygen concentration in
water due to reaeration is calculated in OXRX rather than OXREA. The equation for
reaeration is:

DOX = DOXS + KOREA*(SATDO - DOXS) (1)

where:
DOX = dissolved oxygen concentration after reaeration (mg/l)
DOXS = dissolved oxygen concentration at start of interval (mg/l)
KOREA = reaeration coefficient calculated in OXREA
SATDO = saturated concentration of dissolved oxygen (mg/l)

The saturation concentration of dissolved oxygen is computed at prevalent

atmospheric conditions by the equation:

SATDO = (14.652 + TW*(-0.41022 + TW*(0.007991 - 0.7777E-4*TW)))* (2)

CFPRES

where:
SATDO = saturated concentration of dissolved oxygen (mg/l)
TW = water temperature (deg C)
CFPRES = ratio of site pressure to sea level pressure
(CFPRES is calculated by the Run Interpreter dependent upon
mean elevation of RCHRES)

211
 Subroutine Group OXRX

4.2(3).7.1.1 Simulate Benthal Oxygen Demand and Benthal Release of BOD

(subroutine OXBEN)

Purpose

OXBEN accounts for two possible demands exerted on available oxygen by the benthos.
These two demands are categorized as benthal oxygen demand and benthal release of
BOD materials. Benthal oxygen demand results from materials in the bottom muds
which require oxygen for stabilization. This process results in a direct loss of
oxygen from the RCHRES. The second demand on oxygen caused by the release and
suspension of BOD materials is a less direct form of oxygen demand. This process
increases the pool of BOD present in the RCHRES and exerts a demand on the
dissolved oxygen concentration at a rate determined by the BOD decomposition
kinetics.

Benthal Oxygen Demand

The user approximates the oxygen demand of the bottom muds at 20 degrees Celsius
by assigning a value to BENOD for each RCHRES. The effects of temperature and
dissolved oxygen concentration on realized benthal demand are determined by the
following equation:

BENOX = BENOD*(TCBEN**TW20)*(1.0 - Exp(-EXPOD*DOX)) (3)

where:
BENOX = amount of oxygen demand exerted by benthal muds (mg/m2/interval)
BENOD = reach dependent benthal oxygen demand at 20 degrees C
(mg/m2/interval)
TCBEN = temperature correction factor for benthal oxygen demand
TW20 = water temperature - 20.0 (deg C)
EXPOD = exponential factor to benthal oxygen demand function
(default value = 1.22)
DOX = dissolved oxygen concentration (mg/l)

The first portion of the above equation adjusts the demand at 20 degrees Celsius
to a demand at any temperature. The second portion of the equation indicates that
low concentrations of dissolved oxygen suppress realized oxygen demand. For
example, 91 percent of BENOD may be realized at a dissolved oxygen concentration
of 2 mg/l, 70 percent at 1 mg/l, and none if the waters are anoxic.

After the value of BENOX has been calculated, the dissolved oxygen state variable
is updated:

DOX = DOX - BENOX*DEPCOR (4)

where:
DEPCOR = factor which converts from mg/m2 to mg/l, based on the average
depth of water in the RCHRES during the simulation interval
(DEPCOR is calculated in subroutine RQUAL

212
 Subroutine Group OXRX

Benthal Release of BOD

Bottom releases of BOD are a function of scouring potential and dissolved oxygen
concentration. The equation used to calculate BOD release is:

RELBOD = (BRBOD(1) + BRBOD(2)*Exp(-EXPREL*DOX))*SCRFAC (5)

where:
RELBOD = BOD released by bottom muds (mg/m2 per interval)
BRBOD(1) = base release rate of BOD materials (aerobic conditions)
(mg/m2/interval)
BRBOD(2) = increment to bottom release rate due to decreasing
dissolved oxygen concentration
EXPREL = exponential factor to BOD benthal release function
(default value = 2.82)
DOX = dissolved oxygen concentration (mg/l)
SCRFAC = scouring factor dependent on average velocity of water
(SCRFAC is calculated in subroutine RQUAL)

The above equation accounts for the fact that benthal releases are minimal during
conditions of low velocity and ample dissolved oxygen. Under these conditions a
thin layer of hardened, oxidized material typically retards further release of
materials from the benthos. However, anaerobic conditions or increased velocity
of overlying water disrupts this layer, and release rates of BOD and other
materials are increased. Solution of Equation 3 indicates that 6 percent of the
incremental release rate (BRBOD(2)) occurs when 1 mg/l of dissolved oxygen is
present, 75 percent occurs when 0.1 mg/l is present, and the entire increment
occurs under anoxic conditions.

4.2(3).7.1.2 Calculate Oxygen Reaeration Coefficient (subroutine OXREA)

Purpose

Various methods have been used to calculate atmospheric reaeration coefficients,

and experience has shown that the most effective method of calculation in any given
situation depends upon the prevalent hydraulic characteristics of the system
(Covar, 1976). Based upon user instructions, subroutine OXREA calculates oxygen
reaeration by using one of four built-in solution techniques.

Approach

The general equation for reaeration is:

DOX = DOXS + KOREA*(SATDO - DOXS) (6)

where:
DOX = dissolved oxygen concentration after reaeration (mg/l)
KOREA = reaeration coefficient (greater than zero and less than one)
SATDO = oxygen saturation level for given water temperature (mg/l)
DOXS = dissolved oxygen concentration at start of interval (mg/l)

213
 Subroutine Group OXRX

Lake Reaeration

In a lake or reservoir, calculation of reaeration is dependent upon surface area,

volume, and wind speed. The wind speed factor is determined using the following
empirical relationship:

WINDF = WINDSP*(-0.46 + 0.136*WINDSP) (7)

where:
WINDF = wind speed factor in lake reaeration calculation
WINDSP = wind speed (m/sec)

For low wind speeds, less than 6.0 m/s, WINDF is set to 2.0. The reaeration
coefficient for lakes is calculated as:

KOREA = (.032808*WINDF*CFOREA/AVDEPE)*DELT60 (8)

where:
CFOREA = correction factor to reaeration coefficient for lakes; for lakes
with poor circulation characteristics, CFOREA may be less than
1.0, and lakes with exceptional circulation characteristics may
justify a value greater than 1.0
AVDEPE = average depth of water in RCHRES during interval (ft)
DELT60 = conversion from hourly time interval to simulation interval

Stream Reaeration

One of three approaches to calculating stream reaeration may be used:

1. Energy dissipation method (Tsivoglou-Wallace, 1972). Oxygen reaeration is

calculated based upon energy dissipation principles:

KOREA = REAKT*(DELTHE/FLOTIM)*(TCGINV**(TW - 20.))*DELTS (9)

where:
REAKT = escape coefficient with a typical value between
0.054/ft and 0.110/ft.
DELTHE = drop in energy line along length of RCHRES (ft)
FLOTIM = time of flow through RCHRES (seconds)
TCGINV = temperature correction coefficient for gas invasion rate
with a default value of 1.047
DELTS = conversion factor from units of /second to units of /interval

DELTHE, the drop in elevation over the length of the RCHRES, is supplied by the
user. REAKT, the escape coefficient, referred to in Tsivoglou's work, is also
supplied by the user. The value for FLOTIM is calculated by dividing the length
of the RCHRES by the average velocity for the simulation interval. Tsivoglou's
method of calculation is activated by setting the reaeration method flag (REAMFG)
to 1.

214
 Subroutine Group OXRX

2. Covar's method of determining reaeration (Covar, 1976). Reaeration is

calculated as a power function of hydraulic depth and velocity. The general
equation is:

KOREA = REAK*(AVVELE**EXPREV)*(AVDEPE**EXPRED) (10)

*(TCGINV**(TW - 20.))*DELT60

where:
KOREA =
reaeration coefficient (per interval)
REAK =
empirical constant for reaeration equation (/hour)
AVVELE =
average velocity of water (ft/s)
EXPREV =
exponent to velocity function
AVDEPE =
average water depth (ft)
EXPRED =
exponent to depth function
TCGINV =
temperature correction coefficient for reaeration
defaulted to 1.047
DELT60 = conversion factor from units of per hour to units of per interval

Depending on current depth and velocity, one of three sets of values for REAK,
EXPREV, and EXPRED is used. Each set corresponds to an empirical formula
which has proven accurate for a particular set of hydraulic conditions. The
three formulas and their associated hydraulic conditions and coefficients are:

1. Owen's formula (Owen et al., 1964). This formula is used for depths of
less than 2 ft. For this formula, REAK = 0.906, EXPREV = 0.67, and
EXPRED = -1.85.

2. Churchill's formula (1962). This formula is used for high velocity

situations in depths of greater than 2 ft. For this formula, REAK =
0.484, EXPREV = 0.969, and EXPRED = -1.673.

3. O'Connor-Dobbins formula (1958). This formula is used for lower velocity

situations in depths of greater than 2 ft. The coefficient values are:
REAK = 0.538, EXPREV = 0.5, and EXPRED = -1.5.

This method of calculation of reaeration is activated by setting the

reaeration method flag (REAMFG) to 2.

3. Users may select their own power function of hydraulic depth and velocity for
use under all conditions of depth and velocity. In this case, the user
supplies values for REAK, EXPREV, and EXPRED. This option is selected by
setting the reaeration method flag (REAMFG) to 3.

Reaeration may be modeled as a constant process for any given temperature. In this
case, the user must supply a value for REAK, and a value of zero for both EXPREV
and EXPRED. Note that subroutine OXREA requires input values for REAK, EXPREV, and
EXPRED only if REAMFG is 3.

215
 Subroutine Group OXRX

4.2(3).7.1.3 Calculate BOD Decay (subroutine BODDEC)

Purpose

Subroutine BODDEC adjusts the dissolved oxygen concentration of the water to

account for the oxygen consumed by microorganisms as they break down complex
materials to simpler and more stable products. Only carbonaceous BOD is considered
in this subroutine. The BOD decay process is assumed to follow first-order
kinetics and is represented by:

BODOX = (KBOD20*(TCBOD**(TW - 20.)))*BOD (11)

where:
BODOX = quantity of oxygen required to satisfy BOD decay (mg/l per interval)
KBOD20 = BOD decay rate at 20 degrees C (/interval)
TCBOD = temperature correction coefficient, defaulted to 1.075
TW = water temperature (degrees C)
BOD = BOD concentration (mg/l)

If there is not sufficient dissolved oxygen available to satisfy the entire demand
exerted by BOD decay, only the fraction which can be satisfied is subtracted from
the BOD state variable, and the DOX variable is set to zero.

216
 Subroutine Group NUTRX

4.2(3).7.2 Simulate Primary Inorganic Nitrogen and Phosphorus Balances

(Subroutine Group NUTRX of Module RCHRES)

Purpose

This code simulates the primary processes which determine the balance of inorganic
nitrogen and phosphorus in natural waters. When modeling the water quality of an
aquatic system, consideration of both nitrogen and phosphorus is essential.
Nitrogen, in its various forms, can deplete dissolved oxygen levels in receiving
waters, stimulate aquatic growth, exhibit toxicity toward aquatic life, or present
a public health hazard (EPA, 1975). Phosphorus is vital in the operation of energy
transfer systems in biota, and in many cases is the growth limiting factor for
algal communities. Consequently, it is necessary to model phosphorus in any study
concerned with eutrophication processes.

Schematic View of Fluxes and Storages

Figures 4.2(3).7.2-1 and 4.2(3).7.2-2 illustrate the fluxes and storages of four
constituents which are introduced into the RCHRES modeling system in subroutine
group NUTRX. In addition to these constituents, the state variables for dissolved
oxygen and BOD are also updated. If subroutine group NUTRX is active (NUTFG = 1),
nitrate will automatically be simulated; the user must specify whether or not
nitrite, total ammonia, and/or orthophosphorus are to be simulated in addition to
nitrate by assigning appropriate values to NO2FG, TAMFG, and PO4FG in the User's
Control Input. In addition, if ammonia or orthophosphorus is simulated, the user
may specify whether to simulate the adsorbed (particulate) forms of ammonia and
orthophosphorus. If either adsorbed nutrient is simulated, Section SEDTRN must be
active to provide the inorganic sediment (sand, silt, and clay) concentrations and
fluxes. If all possible constituents are simulated, subroutine NUTRX considers the
following processes:

1. longitudinal advection of dissolved NO3, NO2, NH3, and PO4

2. benthal release of inorganic nitrogen (NH3) and PO4 (if BENRFG = 1)
3. ammonia ionization (NH3/NH4 + equilibrium)
4. ammonia vaporization (if AMVFG = 1)
5. nitrification of NH3 and NO2
6. denitrification of NO3 (if DENFG = 1)
7. ammonification due to degradation of BOD materials
8. adsorption/desorption of NH3 and PO4 to inorganic sediment in
the water column (if ADNHFG = 1 or ADPOFG = 1)
9. deposition/scour and longitudinal advection of adsorbed NH3 and PO4
(if ADNHFG = 1 or ADPOFG = 1)

Additional sources and sinks of NO3, NH3, and PO4 are simulated in the PLANK
section (4.2(3).7.3) of this module. If section PLANK is active, the state
variables for these three constituents can be adjusted to account for nutrient
uptake by phytoplankton and/or benthic algae, and for respiration and inorganic
excretion by zooplankton.

217
 Subroutine Group NUTRX

Figure 4.2(3).7.2-1 Flow diagram for inorganic nitrogen in the NUTRX

subroutine group of the RCHRES Application Module

218
 Subroutine Group NUTRX

Figure 4.2(3).7.2-2 Flow diagram for ortho-phosphate in the NUTRX subroutine

group of the RCHRES Application Module

219
 Subroutine Group NUTRX

Subroutine NUTRX utilizes nine principal routines to simulate inorganic nitrogen

and phosphorus. Advection of dissolved NO3, NO2, NH3, and PO4 is performed by
ADVECT. BENTH determines the amount of inorganic nitrogen and phosphorus which is
released to the overlying waters from the benthos. The nitrification and
denitrification processes are simulated by NITRIF and DENIT, respectively.
Adsorption/desorption of NH3 and PO4 is computed by ADDSNU, and the advection and
deposition/scour of the adsorbed forms are simulated in ADVNUT. The ammonia
ionization and volatilization calculations are performed in AMMION and NH3VOL,
respectively. Finally, the production of inorganic nitrogen and phosphorus
resulting from decay of BOD materials is simulated by DECBAL.

Before ADVECT is called, NUTRX sums the inputs of dissolved NO3, NH3, and PO4 from
upstream reaches, tributary land areas, and atmospheric deposition (deposition of
NO2 is not considered):

INNUT = INUT + SAREA*ADFX + SAREA*PREC*ADCN (1)

where:
INNUT = total input of dissolved nutrient to reach
INUT = input of dissolved nutrient from upstream reaches and tributary land
SAREA = surface area of reach
ADFX = dry or total atmospheric deposition flux in mass/area per interval
PREC = precipitation depth
ADCN = concentration for wet atmospheric deposition in mass/volume

Atmospheric deposition inputs can be specified in two possible ways depending on

the form of the available data. If the deposition is in the form of a flux (mass
per area per time), then it is considered "dry deposition". If the deposition is
in the form of a concentration in rainfall, then it is considered "wet deposition",
and the program automatically combines it with the input rainfall time series to
compute the resulting flux. Either type of deposition data can be input as a time
series, which covers the entire simulation period, or as a set of monthly values
that is used for each year of the simulation. The specific atmospheric deposition
time series are documented in the EXTNL table of the Time Series Catalog for
RCHRES, and are specified in the EXT SOURCES block of the UCI. Monthly values are
input in the MONTH-DATA block in the UCI.

220
 Subroutine Group NUTRX

4.2(3).7.2.1 Simulate Benthal Release of Constituents (subroutine BENTH)

Purpose

This subroutine checks to see whether present water conditions are aerobic or
anaerobic, calculates benthal release for a constituent based on this check, and
updates the concentration of the constituent.

Approach

The equation used to calculate release is:

RELEAS = BRCON(I)*SCRFAC*DEPCOR (1)

where:
RELEAS = amount of constituent released (mg/l per interval)
BRCON(I) = benthal release rate (BRTAM or BRPO4) for constituent
(mg/m2 per interval)
SCRFAC = scouring factor, dependent on average velocity of the water
(SCRFAC is computed in RQUAL)
DEPCOR = conversion factor from mg/m2 to mg/l (computed in RQUAL)

The dissolved oxygen concentration below which anaerobic conditions are considered
to exist is determined by the input parameter ANAER. Two release rates are
required for each of the constituents: one for aerobic conditions and one for
anaerobic conditions. Typically, the aerobic release rate is less than the
anaerobic rate, because a layer of oxidized materials forms on the benthal surface
during aerobic periods, and this layer retards the release rate of additional
benthal materials. BRCON(1) is the aerobic release rate and BRCON(2) is the
anaerobic rate. The choice of which release rate is used is determined by
comparing the current value of DOX to ANAER.

If ammonia is simulated, the inorganic nitrogen release from the benthos is assumed
to be in the form of ammonia, and the NH3 (TAM) state variable is updated. If
ammonia is not simulated, benthal release of inorganic nitrogen is assumed to not
occur. If orthophosphate is simulated, an additional call is made to BENTH to
account for release of PO4.

Simulation of benthal release processes is activated by assigning a value of one

to BENRFG in the User's Control Input for RQUAL.

221
 Subroutine Group NUTRX

4.2(3).7.2.2 Simulate Nitrification (subroutine NITRIF)

Purpose

NITRIF simulates the oxidation of ammonium and nitrite by chemoautotrophic

bacteria. This oxidation provides energy for bacteria much the same way that
sunlight provides energy for photosynthetic algae. The Nitrosomonas genera are
responsible for conversion of ammonium to nitrite, and Nitrobacter perform
oxidation of nitrite to nitrate. Oxidation of inorganic nitrogen is dependent upon
a suitable supply of dissolved oxygen; subroutine NITRIF does not simulate
nitrification if the DO concentration is below 2 mg/l.

Method

The rate of nitrification is represented by a first order equation in which

nitrification is directly proportional to the quantity of reactant present, either
ammonia or nitrite. The equation used to calculate the amount of NH3 oxidized to
NO2 is:

TAMNIT = KTAM20*(TCNIT**(TW - 20.))*TAM (2)

where:
TAMNIT = amount of NH3 oxidation (mg N/l per interval)
KTAM20 = ammonia oxidation rate coefficient at 20 degrees C (/interval)
TCNIT = temperature correction coefficient, defaulted to 1.07
TW = water temperature (degrees C)
TAM = total ammonia concentration (mg N/l)

Similarly, if nitrite is simulated, the amount of nitrite oxidized to nitrate is

determined by the equation:

NO2NIT = KNO220 * (TCNIT**(TW - 20.)) * NO2 (3)

where:
NO2NIT = amount of NO2 oxidation (mg N/l/interval
KNO220 = NO2 oxidation rate coefficient at 20 degrees C (/interval)
NO2 = nitrite concentration (mg N/l)

The amount of oxygen used during nitrification is 3.43 mg oxygen per mg NH3-N
oxidized to NO2-N, and 1.14 mg oxygen per mg NO2-N oxidized to NO3-N. In the
RCHRES module, these figures are adjusted to 3.22 mg and 1.11 mg, respectively, to
account for the effects of carbon dioxide fixation by bacteria (Wezerak and Gannon,
1968). Thus, the oxygen demand due to nitrification is evaluated as:

DODEMD = 3.22 * TAMNIT + 1.11 * NO2NIT (4)

where:
DODEMD = loss of dissolved oxygen from the RCHRES due to nitrification
(mg O/l per interval)

222
 Subroutine Group NUTRX

If the value of DODEMD is greater than available dissolved oxygen, the amounts of
oxidation from NH3 to NO2 and from NO2 to NO3 are proportionally reduced, so that
the state variable DOX maintains a non-negative value. If nitrite is not
simulated, the calculated amount of oxidized ammonia is assumed to be fully
oxidized to nitrate.

4.2(3).7.2.3 Simulate Denitrification (subroutine DENIT)

Purpose

DENIT simulates the reduction of nitrate by facultative anaerobic bacteria such as

Pseudomonas, Micrococcus, and Bacillus. These bacteria can use NO3 for respiration
in the same manner that oxygen is used under aerobic conditions. Facultative
organisms use oxygen until the environment becomes nearly or totally anaerobic, and
then switch over to NO3 as their oxygen source. In HSPF, the end product of
denitrification is assumed to be nitrogen gas.

Approach

Denitrification does not occur in the RCHRES module unless the dissolved oxygen
concentration is below a user-specified threshold value (DENOXT). If that
situation occurs, denitrification is assumed to be a first-order process based on
the NO3 concentration. The amount of denitrification for the interval is
calculated by the following equation:

DENNO3 = KNO320 * (TCDEN**(TW-20)) * NO3 (5)

where:
DENNO3 = amount of NO3 denitrified (mg N/l per interval)
KNO320 = NO3 denitrification rate coefficient at 20 degrees C (/interval)
TCDEN = temperature correction coefficient for denitrification
NO3 = nitrate concentration (mg N/l)

4.2(3).7.2.4 Simulate Adsorption/Desorption of Ammonia and Orthophosphorus

(subroutine ADDSNU)

Purpose

This subroutine simulates the exchange of nutrient (ammonium and orthophosphorus)

between the dissolved state and adsorption on suspended sediment. The sorbents
considered are suspended sand, silt, and clay, which are simulated in section
SEDTRN. The adsorption/desorption process is not simulated in bed sediments.

Approach

The adsorption/desorption for each sediment fraction is represented with an

equilibrium, linear isotherm, i.e., a standard Kd approach, which is described as
follows:

223
 Subroutine Group NUTRX

SNUT(J) = DNUT * ADPM(J) (6)

where:
SNUT(J) = equilibrium concentration of adsorbed nutrient on sediment
fraction J (mg/kg)
DNUT = the equilibrium concentration of dissolved nutrient (mg/l)
ADPM(J) = adsorption parameter (or Kd) for sediment fraction J (l/kg)

This expression for SNUT(J) is substituted into the following mass balance
expression for total nutrient in the reach:

NUM = DNUT*VOL + 3 [SNUT(J)*RSED(J)] = total nutrient in reach (7)

J=1,3

where:
NUM = variable used to represent total nutrient mass in the reach (mg)
VOL = volume of reach (l)
RSED(J) = mass of sediment fraction J in suspension (kg)

After substituting, rearranging, and solving for DNUT, the following expression is
obtained:

NUM
DNUT = )QS (8)
VOL + 3 [RSED(J)*ADPM(J)]
J=1,3

In the above equation, the value of NUM is obtained from a "non-equilibrium"

version of Equation (7) in which temporary DNUT and SNUT values include the effects
of other processes such as advection, scour/deposition, nitrification, etc, that
have occurred during the interval. Therefore, the overall procedure involves
performing all processes that affect the nutrient concentrations, and then
partitioning (equilibrating) the total mass of nutrient among the four phases,
i.e., dissolved phase and three sediment fractions.

Note, the units listed for some variables in the preceding discussion are
simplified from the internal (code) HSPF units.

4.2(3).7.2.5 Simulate Advection and Deposition/Scour of Adsorbed

Ammonia and Orthophosphorus (subroutine ADVNUT)

Purpose

ADVNUT simulates the advective processes for a nutrient (NH3 or PO4) attached to
one sediment size fraction. Processes handled in this routine include:

1. Inflow to the RCHRES of nutrient attached to suspended sediment.

2. Migration of nutrient from suspension in the water to the bed as a result of

deposition of the sediment to which the nutrient is adsorbed.

224
 Subroutine Group NUTRX

3. Migration of nutrient from the bed into suspension in the water as a result
of scour of the bed sediments to which the nutrient is adsorbed.

4. Outflow from the RCHRES of nutrient attached to suspended sediment.

Method

The movement of adsorbed nutrient is completely determined by the movement of the

sediment to which it is attached. All fluxes of adsorbed nutrient are expressed
as the product of the flux of a sediment fraction (sand, silt, or clay) and the
concentration of nutrient associated with that fraction (expressed in mg per kg of
sediment). Likewise, storages of adsorbed nutrient are expressed as the product
of the sediment fraction storage and the associated concentration of nutrient.
Note that the nutrient storage in the bed is essentially infinite. Nutrients that
deposit to the bed are assumed to be lost from the RCHRES, and scoured sediment is
assumed to have a constant (user-specified) adsorbed nutrient concentration; thus
the scoured nutrient flux is limited only by the storage of sediment in the bed.
A simplified flow diagram of sediment and associated nutrient fluxes and storages
is provided in Figure 4.2(3).7.2-3 to facilitate the following discussion. ADVNUT
is designed to operate on one sediment fraction and one nutrient each time it is
called by subroutine NUTRX.

If the sediment simulation in module section SEDTRN indicates that scour of bed
storage of a sediment fraction occurs, the following actions are taken in ADVNUT:

1. The flux of nutrient from bed to suspension is calculated as:

DSNUT = BNUT*DEPSCR (9)

where:
DSNUT = amount of nutrient scoured from bed and added to suspension
(mg/l)*(ft3/ivl) or (mg/l)*(m3/ivl)
BNUT = constant concentration of nutrient on bed sediment fraction
under consideration (mg/mg sediment)
DEPSCR = amount of sediment fraction which is scoured from
the bed (mg.ft3/l.ivl or mg.m3/l.ivl)

2. The concentration of adsorbed nutrient in suspension is updated to account for

scour:

SNUT = (ISNUT + RSNUTS - DSNUT)/(RSED + ROSED) (10)

225
 Subroutine Group NUTRX

where:
SNUT = concentration of adsorbed nutrient in suspension
(mg/mg suspended sediment)
ISNUT = inflow of nutrient to the RCHRES as a result of inflowing
sediment fraction ((mg/l)*(ft3/ivl) or (mg/l)*(m3/ivl))
RSNUTS = storage of nutrient on suspended sediment fraction
((mg/l)*ft3 or (mg/l)*m3)
RSED = amount of sediment fraction in suspension
at end of interval (mg.ft3/l or mg.m3/l)
ROSED = amount of sediment fraction contained in outflow from the RCHRES
during the interval (mg.ft3/l.ivl or mg.m3/l.ivl)

3. The concentration of nutrient on bed sediment is set equal to zero if the

storage of bed sediment at the end of the interval is zero.

5. Amount of nutrient leaving the RCHRES as outflow is determined as:

ROSNUT = ROSED*SNUT (11)

If the sediment simulation in module section SEDTRN indicates that deposition of

suspended sediment occurs, ADVNUT performs the following operations:

1. Concentration of nutrient on total suspended sediment fraction (inflow +

suspended storage) for the RCHRES is calculated:

SNUT = (ISNUT + RSNUTS)/(RSED + DEPSCR + ROSED) (12)

2. Amount of nutrient leaving the RCHRES due to outflow of sediment fraction is

determined:

ROSNUT = ROSED*SNUT (13)

3. Amount of nutrient leaving suspension due to deposition of the sediment to

which it is adsorbed is found by:

DSNUT = DEPSCR*SNUT (14)

4. The concentration of nutrient on sediment in suspension is set equal to zero

if the suspended storage of sediment is zero.

The final operation which ADVNUT performs is the computation of outflow of adsorbed
nutrient through individual exits (when more than one exit is specified). The
algorithm is:

OSNUT(I) = ROSNUT*OSED(I)/ROSED (15)

where:
OSNUT(I) = outflow of adsorbed nutrient through exit gate I
ROSNUT = total outflow of adsorbed nutrient from RCHRES
OSED(I) = outflow of sediment fraction through exit gate I

226
 Subroutine Group NUTRX

4.2(3).7.2.6 Simulate Ionization of Ammonia to Ammonium

(subroutine AMMION)

Approach

The total dissolved ammonia state variable (TAM) consists of two forms, NH 4+ and
NH3. The ionized form is dominant at typical pH's and temperatures found in nature;
however, the un-ionized form is toxic to aquatic species at fairly low
concentrations, and may be significant at some extreme environmental pH's.
Therefore, while the process formulations in HSPF are based on the total ammonia,
the un-ionized form is computed and output.

The fraction (FRAC) of total ammonia that is present as un-ionized ammonia is

calculated as:

10 pH
FRAC = ) (16)
10 pH + RATIO

where:

RATIO = ratio of ionization products for water k w and ammonia (k b)

RATIO is computed using an empirical relationship based on pH and temperature as

described by Loehr et al. (1973):

RATIO = -3.39753 log e(0.02409 TW) 10 9 (17)

The pH used in Equation 16 may be obtained from Section PHCARB (if it is active)
or specified by the user in the form of a constant value, 12 monthly values, or an
input time series.

4.2(3).7.2.7 Simulate Ammonia Volatilization

(subroutine NH3VOL)

Approach

The amount of total ammonia lost from the RCHRES due to ammonia volatilization is
calculated by a standard two-layer model of mass transfer across the air-water
interface; this is based on Henry's Law and the flux of mass through the water and
air films. The inverse of the overall mass transfer coefficient is given by the
following expression:

1 1 8.21x10 -5 * TWKELV
S)Q = KRINV = S)Q + S)Q (18)
KR NH3KL HCNH3 * NH3KG

227
 Subroutine Group NUTRX

where:
KR = overall mass transfer coefficient (cm/hr)
KRINV = inverse of coefficient (hr/cm)
NH3KL = liquid film mass transfer coefficient (cm/hr)
NH3KG = gas film mass transfer coefficient (cm/hr)
HCNH3 = Henry's Law Constant for ammonia (atm-m 3/mole)
8.21E-5 = the ideal gas constant (atm-m 3/K/mole)
TWKELV = water temperature (degrees K)

Computation of the liquid-film coefficient is based on correlation with the

reaeration rate (i.e., the rate of transfer of oxygen gas across the interface).
The proportionality constant is a function of the ratio of the molecular weights.
Therefore, the liquid-film coefficient is given by:

NH3KL = [KOREA * AVDEPM * 100/DELT60] * [1.878**(EXPNVL/2.)] (19)

where:
KOREA = the oxygen reaeration rate (per interval)
AVDEPM = average depth of the reach (m)
100 = conversion from meters to centimeters
DELT60 = conversion from units of per interval to units of per hour
1.878 = ratio of molecular weight of oxygen (32) to ammonia (17)
EXPNVL = user-specified exponential factor

Note that in the first part of the above equation, KOREA is being converted to the
same units as NH3KL, i.e., cm/hr.

In a similar manner to the liquid-film coefficient, the gas-film coefficient is

computed from the water evaporation rate which is primarily driven by the wind.
The gas film coefficient is computed as:

NH3KG = 700. * WINDSP * 1.057**(EXPNVG/2.) (20)

where:
700 = an empirical constant relating the wind speed in m/s and the
evaporation rate in cm/hr
WINDSP = wind speed (m/s)
1.057 = ratio of water molecular weight to that of ammonia
EXPNVG = user-specified exponential factor

The Henry's constant for ammonia (HCNH3) is interpolated from a table of values
based on temperature and pH.

The reach-specific, first-order rate constant for volatilization is computed by:

KNVOL = KR * DELT60/(AVDEPM * 100) (21)

where:
KNVOL = first-order rate constant for volatilization (/interval)
100 = conversion from units of 1/cm to 1/m

228
 Subroutine Group NUTRX

Finally, the volatilization loss is computed as:

NH3VLT = KNVOL * TAM (22)

where:
NH3VLT = volatilization loss during the interval (mg N/l)
TAM = concentration of total ammonia (mg N/l)

Simulation of ammonia volatilization is activated by setting AMVFG equal to one in

the User's Control Input. Of course, total ammonia simulation must also be
activated by setting TAMFG equal to 1.

4.2(3).7.2.8 Perform Materials Balance for Transformation from Organic to

Inorganic Material (subroutine DECBAL)

Purpose

DECBAL adjusts the inorganic nitrogen and orthophosphorus state variables to

account for decomposition of organic materials.

Method

In subroutine NUTRX the total BOD decay for the time interval is used to compute
the corresponding amounts of inorganic nitrogen and orthophosphorus produced by the
decay are determined as:

DECNIT = BODOX*CVON (23)

DECPO4 = BODOX*CVOP (24)

where:
BODOX = total BOD decay (mg O/l per interval)
CVON = stoichiometric conversion factor from mg oxygen to mg nitrogen
CVOP = stoichiometric conversion factor from mg oxygen to mg phosphorus

The values for DECNIT and DECPO4 are passed to subroutine DECBAL. If ammonia is
simulated, the value of DECNIT is added to the NH3 (TAM) state variable; if not,
DECNIT is added to the NO3 state variable. If orthophosphorus is simulated, the
value of DECPO4 is added to the PO4 state variable.

229
 Subroutine Group PLANK

4.2(3).7.3 Simulate Plankton Populations and Associated Reactions

(Subroutine Group PLANK of Module RCHRES)

Purpose

PLANK simulates phytoplankton, zooplankton, and/or benthic algae.

Schematic View of Fluxes and Storages

Figures 4.2(3).7.3-1 through 4.2(3).7.3-4 illustrate the fluxes and storages of the
six constituents which are introduced into the RCHRES modeling system in subroutine
PLANK. In addition to these constituents, the state variables for dissolved
oxygen, biochemical oxygen demand, nitrate, total ammonia, and orthophosphorus are
also updated. If subroutine group PLANK is active (PLKFG = 1), dead refractory
organics will automatically be simulated. The state variables for these organics
are ORN (dead refractory organic nitrogen), ORP (dead refractory organic
phosphorus), and ORC (dead refractory organic carbon). The user must specify
whether or not phytoplankton, zooplankton, and/or benthic algae are simulated by
assigning appropriate values to PHYFG, ZOOFG, and BALFG in the User's Control
Input. The state variable PHYTO represents the free floating photosynthetic algae,
ZOO represents the zooplankton which feed on PHYTO, and BENAL is the state variable
for algae attached to the benthal surface.

Subroutine group PLANK is a large and complex code segment. It uses twelve
subroutines to perform simulation of the three types of plankton. Longitudinal
advection of PHYTO and ZOO is performed by ADVPLK, a special advection routine for
plankton. ORN, ORP, and ORC are advected by ADVECT. The sinking of PHYTO, ORN,
ORP, and ORC is performed by subroutine SINK. The user controls the sinking rate
of these constituents by assigning values to parameters PHYSET and REFSET in the
User's Control Input. PHYSET is the rate of phytoplankton settling, and REFSET is
the settling rate for all three of the dead refractory organic constituents.
Advection and sinking are performed every interval.

Before ADVECT is called, PLANK sums the inputs of ORN, ORP, and ORC from upstream
reaches, tributary land areas, and atmospheric deposition:

INORG = IORG + SAREA*ADFX + SAREA*PREC*ADCN (1)

where:
INORG = total input of organic to reach
IORG = input of organic from upstream reaches and tributary land
SAREA = surface area of reach
ADFX = dry or total atmospheric deposition flux in mass/area per interval
PREC = precipitation depth
ADCN = concentration for wet atmospheric deposition in mass/volume

Atmospheric deposition inputs can be specified in two possible ways depending on

the form of the available data. If the deposition is in the form of a flux (mass
per area per time), then it is considered "dry deposition". If the deposition is
in the form of a concentration in rainfall, then it is considered "wet deposition",
and the program automatically combines it with the input rainfall time series to

230
 Subroutine Group PLANK

Figure 4.2(3).7.3-1 Flow diagram for phytoplankton in the PLANK

section of the RCHRES Application Module

Figure 4.2(3).7.3-2 Flow diagram for dead refractory organics in the PLANK
section of the RCHRES Application Module

231
 Subroutine Group PLANK

Figure 4.2(3).7.3-3 Flow diagram for zooplankton in the PLANK

section of the RCHRES Application Module

Figure 4.2(3).7.3-4 Flow diagram for benthic algae in the PLANK

section of the RCHRES Application Module

232
 Subroutine Group PLANK

compute the resulting flux. Either type of deposition data can be input as a time
series, which covers the entire simulation period, or as a set of monthly values
that is used for each year of the simulation. The specific atmospheric deposition
time series for NUTRX are documented in the EXTNL table of the Time Series Catalog
for RCHRES, and are specified in the EXT SOURCES block of the UCI. The monthly
values are input in the MONTH-DATA block in the UCI.

The remainder of the processes modeled in PLANK are only performed when the average
depth of water in the RCHRES is at least 2 inches. Experience has shown that the
algorithms used to represent these processes are not accurate for excessively
shallow waters. If 2 inches or more of water is present in the RCHRES, PLANK
performs a series of operations which are necessary to determine the availability
of light to support algal growth. First the light intensity at the RCHRES surface
is calculated by the following equation:

INLIT = 0.97*CFSAEX*SOLRAD/DELT (1)

where:
INLIT = light intensity immediately below water surface (langleys/min)
0.97 = correction factor for surface reflection (assume 3 percent)
CFSAEX = input parameter that specifies the ratio of radiation at water
surface to gage radiation values. This factor also accounts
for shading of the water body, e.g. by trees and streambanks
SOLRAD = solar radiation (langleys/interval)
DELT = conversion from units of per interval to per minute

After the light intensity at the water surface has been calculated, PLANK
determines the factors which diminish the intensity of light as it passes through
the water. In addition to the natural extinction due to passage through water,
extinction may result from interference caused by suspended sediment or
phytoplankton. If SDLTFG is assigned a value of one, the contribution of total
suspended sediment to light extinction is calculated as:

EXTSED = LITSED*SSEDT (2)

where:
EXTSED = increment to base extinction coefficient due to total
suspended sediment (/ft)
LITSED = multiplication factor to total suspended sediment conc.
(supplied in User's Control Input)
SSEDT = total suspended sediment (sand + silt + clay) (mg/l)

The contribution of suspended phytoplankton to light extinction is determined by

the empirical relationship:

EXTCLA = 0.00452*PHYCLA (3)

where:
EXTCLA = increment to base extinction coefficient due to phytoplankton (/ft)
0.00452 = multiplication factor to phytoplankton chlorophyll a concentration
PHYCLA = phytoplankton concentration (micromoles/l of chlorophyll a)

233
 Subroutine Group PLANK

After values for INLIT, EXTSED, and EXTCLA have been calculated, PLANK calls
subroutine LITRCH to determine the light correction factor to algal growth and the
amount of light available to phytoplankton and benthic algae. Once these
calculations have been completed, PLANK checks a series of flags to determine which
types of plankton are to be simulated. If PHYFG is assigned a value of one,
simulation of phytoplankton is performed. Zooplankton are simulated if ZOOFG is
given a value of one. Zooplankton simulation can be performed only if the
phytoplankton section is active. Finally, a value of one for BALFG activates
benthic algae simulation.

4.2(3).7.3.1 Advect Plankton (subroutine ADVPLK)

Purpose

ADVPLK performs the advection of phytoplankton and zooplankton. The normal

advection method (subroutine ADVECT) used in the RCHRES module assumes that each
constituent concentration is uniform throughout the RCHRES. This assumption is not
valid for plankton. Both phytoplankton and zooplankton locate their breeding
grounds near the channel boundaries. Since the water near the boundaries moves
downstream much more slowly than the mean water velocity, the plankton populations
have a much longer residence time in the RCHRES than would be indicated by the mean
flowtime. The geographical extent of the plankton breeding grounds is inversely
related to the flow rate. At low flows, large areas of slow moving waters which
are suitable for breeding exist along the channel boundaries. As flowrates
increase, more and more of these areas are subject to flushing. The special
advection routine is critical to plankton simulation, because the only source of
plankton is within the reach network. Thus an upstream RCHRES with no plankton
inflows can maintain a significant plankton population only if the growth rate of
plankton exceeds the rate at which plankton are advected out of the RCHRES. Since
biological growth rates are typically much slower than "normal" advection rates,
few free-flowing RCHRES's could maintain a plankton population without the use of
the special advection routine.

Method

Figure 4.2(3).7.3-5 illustrates the relationships used to perform plankton

advection.

ADVPLK assumes that a certain concentration of plankton (STAY) is not subject to

advection, but any excess of organisms will be advected in the normal way. A small
population (SEED) of plankton are never subject to advection, even during the
periods of greatest flow. The maximum concentration of plankton which is not
subject to advection (MXSTAY) occurs during low flow conditions. Each simulation
interval ADVPLK calculates STAY based on the values of these two parameters and
OREF. OREF is the outflow rate at which STAY has a value midway between SEED and
MXSTAY. First, the average flow rate through the RCHRES for the interval is
calculated:

OFLO = (SROVOL + EROVOL)/DELTS (4)

234
 Subroutine Group PLANK

Figure 4.2(3).7.3-5 Relationship of parameters for special advection of plankton

235
 Subroutine Group PLANK

where:
OFLO = average flow rate (ft3/s or m3/s)
DELTS = number of seconds per interval
SROVOL and EROVOL are as defined in Section 4.2(3).2

The concentration of plankton which is not subject to advection is then determined:

STAY = (MXSTAY - SEED)*(2.0**(-OFLO/OREF)) + SEED (5)

where:
STAY = plankton concentration not advected (mg/l)
MXSTAY = maximum concentration not subject to advection
SEED = concentration of plankton never subject to advection
OREF = outflow rate at which STAY has a value midway between
SEED and MXSTAY (ft3/s or m3/s)

The amount of plankton not subject to advection is converted to units of mass

(MSTAY) by multiplying STAY by the volume in the RCHRES at the start of the
interval (VOLS). The concentration of plankton which is advected is:

PLNKAD = PLANK - STAY (6)

ADVPLK calls subroutine ADVECT to perform longitudinal advection of the quantity

PLNKAD. The updated value of PLNKAD is then added to the amount of plankton which
did not undergo advection to determine the concentration of plankton in the RCHRES
at the end of the interval:

PLANK = PLNKAD + MSTAY/VOL (7)

where:
PLANK = concentration of plankton at end of interval
PLNKAD = concentration of advected plankton which remain in RCHRES
MSTAY = mass of plankton not advected
VOL = volume in RCHRES at end of interval

If the concentration of plankton in the RCHRES at the start of the interval is less
than the value assigned to SEED, advection of plankton is not performed in the
RCHRES, and the value of PLANK at the end of the interval is calculated as:

PLANK = (MSTAY + IPLANK)/VOL (8)

where:
IPLANK = mass of plankton which enters RCHRES during interval

236
 Subroutine Group PLANK

4.2(3).7.3.2 Calculate Light-related Information Needed for Algal Simulation

(subroutine LITRCH)

Purpose

Subroutine LITRCH determines the light correction factor to algal growth and the
amount of light available to phytoplankton and benthic algae.

Method

The overall light extinction factor for the interval is obtained by adding EXTSED
and EXTCLA to the base extinction coefficient (EXTB). The value of EXTB is assumed
constant for a particular RCHRES and must be assigned in the User's Control Input.
The resulting sum (EXTCO) is used to calculate the euphotic depth, which is the
distance below the surface of the water body at which 1 percent of the light
incident on the surface is still available:

EUDEP = 4.60517/EXTCO (9)

where:
EUDEP = euphotic depth (ft)
EXTCO = total light extinction coefficient (/ft)

HSPF assumes that growth of algae occurs only in the euphotic zone (that is, the
water above euphotic depth). When EUDEP has been calculated, it is possible to
assign a value to CFLIT, the light correction factor to algal growth. A value of
1.0 is assigned to CFLIT if the calculated euphotic zone includes all the water of
the RCHRES. CFLIT = EUDEP/AVDEPE, if the euphotic depth is less than the average
depth of water (AVDEPE). CFLIT is used in subroutine ALGRO, to adjust the computed
rate of algal growth.

Finally, the amount of light available to phytoplankton and benthic algae is

calculated. The equation used to calculate the amount of light available to
phytoplankton assumes that all phytoplankton are at mid-depth in the RCHRES or the
middle of the euphotic zone, whichever is closer to the surface:

PHYLIT = INLIT*Exp(-EXTCO*(.5*Min(EUDEP,AVDEPE))) (10)

where:
PHYLIT = light available to phytoplankton (langleys/min)
INLIT = light available at water surface (langleys/min)
EXTCO = light extinction coefficient (/ft)
AVDEPE = average depth of water in the RCHRES (ft)
Exp = Fortran exponential function
Min = Fortran minimum function

The equation used to calculate the amount of light available to benthic algae
assumes that all benthic algae are at AVDEPE below the surface of the RCHRES:

BALLIT = INLIT*Exp(-EXTCO*AVDEPE) (11)

237
 Subroutine Group PLANK

4.2(3).7.3.3 Simulate Phytoplankton (subroutine PHYRX)

Purpose

PHYRX simulates the algae which float in the water of a RCHRES. Because these
organisms use energy from light to produce organic matter, they are called primary
producers and are considered the first trophic level in the aquatic ecosystem. The
biological activity of the ecosystem depends upon the rate of primary production
by these photosynthetic organisms. The activities of the phytoplankton are in turn
affected by the physical environment. Through the process of photosynthesis,
phytoplankton consume carbon dioxide and release oxygen back into the water. At
the same time, algal respiration consumes oxygen and releases carbon dioxide.
Phytoplankton reduce the concentration of nutrients in the water by consuming
phosphates, nitrate, and ammonia. Through assimilation these nutrients are
transformed into organic materials which serve as a food source for higher trophic
levels. A portion of the organic matter that is not used for food decomposes,
which further affects the oxygen and nutrient levels in the water. Where the
phytoplankton population has grown excessively, much of the available oxygen supply
of the water may be depleted by decomposition of dead algae and respiration. In
this situation, phytoplankton place a serious stress upon the system.

Approach

To describe quantitatively the dynamic behavior of phytoplankton populations, a

number of assumptions must be made. PHYRX treats the entire phytoplankton
population as if it were one species, and the mean behavior of the population is
described through a series of generalized mathematical formulations. While such
an approach obscures the behavior of individual species, the overall effect of the
phytoplankton population on the water quality can be modeled with reasonable
accuracy.

The HSPF system assumes that biomass of all types (phytoplankton, zooplankton,
benthic algae, dead organic materials) has a consistent chemical composition. The
user specifies the biomass composition by indicating the carbon:nitrogen:
phosphorus ratio and the percent-by-weight carbon. This is done by assigning
values to the following parameters:

1. CVBPC: number of moles of carbon per mole of phosphorus in biomass

(default = 106)

2. CVBPN: number of moles of nitrogen per mole of phosphorus in

biomass (default = 16)

3. BPCNTC: percentage of biomass weight which is carbon (default = 49)

The algorithms used in PHYRX and its subroutines require that the phytoplankton
population be expressed in units of micromoles of phosphorus per liter. PHYRX
converts the value for state variable PHYTO in milligrams biomass per liter into
micromoles phosphorus per liter and assigns this value to the internal state
variable STC (standing crop).

238
 Subroutine Group PLANK

PHYRX uses five routines to simulate phytoplankton. ALGRO computes unit growth and
respiration rates and determines the growth limiting factor for the phytoplankton.
If the amount of growth exceeds the amount of respiration for the interval, GROCHK
adjusts growth to account for nutrient limitations. PHYDTH calculates the amount
of death occurring during the interval. State variables ORN, ORP, ORC, and BOD are
updated by ORGBAL to account for materials resulting from phytoplankton death.
Finally, NUTRUP adjusts the values for PO4, NO3, and TAM (total ammonia) to account
for uptake of nutrients by phytoplankton. In addition to these updates, the
dissolved oxygen state variable is adjusted in PHYRX to account for the net effect
of phytoplankton photosynthesis and respiration:

DOX = DOX + (CVPB*CVBO*GROPHY) (12)

where:
CVPB = conversion factor from micromoles phosphorus to mg biomass
CVBO = conversion factor from mg biomass to mg oxygen
GROPHY = net growth of phytoplankton (micromoles phosphorus/l per interval)

After all the operations in PHYRX and its subroutines have been performed, the
value of STC is converted back into units of milligrams biomass per liter and
becomes the updated value of PHYTO.

4.2(3).7.3.3.1 Calculate Unit Growth and Respiration Rates for Algae

(subroutine ALGRO)

Purpose

ALGRO calculates the unit growth rate of algae based on light, temperature, and
nutrients. Each time step, ALGRO determines the rate limiting factor for growth,
and passes a label which identifies the limiting factor to the subroutines
responsible for printed output. The labels and their meanings are as follows:

'LIT' Growth is light limited.

'NON' Insufficient nutrients are available to support growth.
'TEM' Water temperature does not allow algal growth.
'NIT' Growth is limited by availability of inorganic nitrogen.
'PO4' Growth is limited by availability of orthophosphorus.
'NONE' There is no limiting factor to cause less than maximal growth.
'WAT' Insufficient water is available to support growth.

ALGRO is also responsible for calculating the unit respiration rate for algae.
This routine is used in the simulation of both phytoplankton and benthic algae.

239
 Subroutine Group PLANK

Approach

ALGRO performs a series of initial checks to determine whether or not conditions

are suitable for growth during the interval. If the light intensity for the
interval is less than 0.001 langleys/min, insufficient light is available for
growth, and growth is not calculated. Likewise, if the concentration of either
inorganic nitrogen or orthophosphorus is less than 0.001 mg/l, no growth occurs.
If these checks indicate that conditions are suitable for growth, ALGRO next
determines the effects of water temperature on the growth potential.

Temperature Control

The user specifies the temperature preferences of the algae by assigning values to
three parameters: TALGRL, TALGRM, and TALGRH. If the water temperature is less
than the value assigned to TALGRL or greater than the value assigned to TALGRH, no
growth occurs. For water temperatures between TALGRL and TALGRH, a correction
factor to maximum growth rate (MALGR) is calculated. This correction factor
increases in value linearly from 0.0 at TALGRL to 1.0 at TALGRM. Thus, TALGRM
specifies the minimum temperature at which growth can occur at a maximum rate.
ALGRO assumes that there is no temperature retardation of maximum growth rate for
temperatures between TALGRM and TALGRH. The temperature corrected maximum growth
rate is:

MALGRT = MALGR*TCMALG (13)

where:
MALGRT = temperature corrected maximum algal growth rate (/interval)
MALGR = maximum unit growth rate for algae
TCMALG = temperature correction to growth (TCMALG ranges between 0 and 1)

Once the temperature correction to potential growth rate has been made, ALGRO uses
Monod growth kinetics with respect to orthophosphorus, inorganic nitrogen, and
light intensity to determine the actual growth rate. The procedure taken in ALGRO
is to consider each possible limiting factor separately to determine which one
causes the smallest algal growth rate during each simulation interval. This method
does not preclude that interactions between factors affect the actual growth rate;
in cases where it has been established that there is such an interaction, as in the
uptake of phosphate, the phenomena are included in the model. If none of the
factors considered is limiting, growth will be maximal and temperature dependent.

Phosphorus Limited Growth

Algae are dependent upon uptake of orthophosphorus to provide the continual supply
of phosphorus necessary for ordinary cellular metabolism and reproductive
processes. In phosphorus-limited situations, the resultant growth rate has been
shown to be dependent not only on the concentration of phosphate ions, but on
nitrate concentration as well (DiToro, et al., 1970). The phosphorus limited
growth rate is determined by:

GROP = MALGRT*PO4*NO3/((PO4 + CMMP)*(NO3 + CMMNP)) (14)

240
 Subroutine Group PLANK

where:
GROP = unit growth rate based on phosphorus limitation (/interval)
MALGRT = temperature corrected maximum algal growth rate
PO4 = orthophosphorus concentration (mg P/l)
NO3 = nitrate concentration (mg N/l)
CMMP = orthophosphorus Michaelis-Menten constant for phosphorus
limited growth (mg P/l) (CMMP is defaulted to 0.015 mg P/l)
CMMNP = nitrate Michaelis-Menten constant for phosphorus limited
growth (mg N/l) (CMMNP is defaulted to 0.0284 mg N/l)

Nitrogen Limited Growth

Nitrogen is essential to algae for assimilation of proteins and enzymes. In the

form of nitrate, nitrogen serves as the essential hydrogen acceptor in the
metabolic pathways which enable organisms to grow. ALGRO allows for two different
sources of inorganic nitrogen. If ammonia is being simulated and a value of one
is assigned to the nitrogen source flag (NSFG), both ammonia and nitrate are used
by algae to satisfy their nitrogen requirements. Otherwise, only nitrate is
considered in the kinetics formulations. High ratios of ammonia to nitrate have
been found to retard algal growth. If a value of one is assigned to the ammonia
retardation flag (AMRFG), this phenomenon is simulated by the equation:

MALGN = MALGRT - 0.757*TAM + 0.051*NO3 (15)

where:
MALGN = maximum unit growth rate corrected for ammonia retardation
(/interval)
MALGRT = temperature corrected maximum unit growth rate

Nitrogen limitation on growth is calculated by the equation:

GRON = MALGN*MMN/(MMN + CMMN) (16)

where:
GRON = unit growth rate based on nitrogen limitation (per interval)
MALGN = maximum unit growth rate (MALGN has the same value
as MALGRT if AMRFG is set to zero)
MMN = total pool of inorganic nitrogen considered available for growth
CMMN = Michaelis-Menten constant for nitrogen limited growth (mg N/l)
(CMMN is defaulted to 0.045 mg N/l)

Light Limited Growth

The equation used to determine the limitation on growth rate imposed by light
intensity was derived by Dugdale and Macisaac (1971) based on uptake rates of
inorganic nitrogen under varying light intensities:

GROL = MALGRT*LIGHT/(CMMLT + LIGHT) (17)

241
 Subroutine Group PLANK

where:
GROL = unit growth rate based on light limitation (/interval)
MALGRT = temperature corrected maximum unit growth rate (/interval)
LIGHT = light intensity available to algae in RCHRES (langleys/min)
CMMLT = Michaelis-Menten constant for light limited growth (langleys/min)
(CMMLT is defaulted to 0.033 langleys/min)

Algal Respiration

Algal respiration is dependent upon water temperature and is calculated by the

equation:

RES = ALR20*(TW/20.) (18)

where:
RES = unit algal respiration rate (/interval)
ALR20 = unit respiration rate at 20 degrees C
TW = water temperature (deg C)

4.2(3).7.3.3.2 Check Nutrients Required for Computed Growth (subroutine GROCHK)

GROCHK assures that a minimum concentration of 0.001 mg/l of each nutrient remains
in the RCHRES waters after growth occurs. If this condition is not satisfied, the
computed growth rate is adjusted accordingly. Orthophosphorus and inorganic
nitrogen are always considered as nutrients. If pH is simulated (PHFG = 1), the
user may specify that carbon dioxide concentration also be considered as a limiting
nutrient by setting the value of DECFG equal to zero.

4.2(3).7.3.3.3 Calculate Phytoplankton Death (subroutine PHYDTH)

Purpose

PHYDTH calculates algal death each interval by using one of two unit death rates
specified in the User's Control Input. ALDL, the low unit death rate, is used when
environmental conditions encourage sustained life. In situations where nutrients
are scarce or the phytoplankton population becomes excessive, ALDH, the high algal
death rate, is used.

Method

The high algal death rate, which has a default value of 0.01/hr, is used
if any one of three conditions exists:

1. the concentration of PO4 is less than the value of parameter PALDH

2. the concentration of inorganic nitrogen is less than the value of parameter
NALDH
3. the concentration of phytoplankton is greater than the value of parameter
CLALDH

242
 Subroutine Group PLANK

Regardless of whether these tests indicate that ALDH or ALDL should be used, an
additional increment to death occurs if anaerobic conditions prevail during the
interval. The increment to death rate due to anaerobic conditions is determined
by the value of parameter OXALD. The amount of phytoplankton death which occurs
during the interval is calculated as:

DTHPHY = ALD*STC (19)

where:
DTHPHY = amount of phytoplankton death (micromoles P/l per interval)
ALD = unit algal death rate determined by environmental conditions
(/interval)
STC = concentration of phytoplankton (micromoles P/l)

4.2(3).7.3.3.4 Perform Materials Balance for Transformation from Living

to Dead Organic Material (subroutine ORGBAL)

Purpose

ORGBAL increments the concentrations of dead organics to account for plankton

death. Plankton death may either be algal death, zooplankton death, or
phytoplankton ingested by zooplankton but not assimilated. In each case in which
ORGBAL is called, the increments to ORP, ORN, ORC, and BOD are calculated in the
subroutine which makes the call and passed on to ORGBAL. ORGBAL is merely a
service program which performs the additions to these state variables.

4.2(3).7.3.3.5 Perform Materials Balance for Transformation from Inorganic

to Organic Materials (subroutine NUTRUP)

Purpose

NUTRUP adjusts the concentrations of inorganic chemicals to account for net growth
of algae. Net growth may be either positive or negative depending on the relative
magnitude of growth and respiration. The state variables which are updated by
NUTRUP include PO4, NO3, TAM, and CO2.

Method

The adjustments to PO4 and CO2 are straightforward. The PO4 state variable is
always updated; the CO2 state variable is only updated if pH is simulated (PHFG =
1) and carbon dioxide is considered as a limiting nutrient (DECFG = 0). Adjustment
of the inorganic nitrogen state variables is more complex. If ammonia is not
specified as a source of inorganic nitrogen for growth (NSFG = 0), only the NO3
state variable is updated to account for net growth. If ammonia is considered a
nutrient (NSFG = 1), negative net growth is accounted for by adding the total flux
of nitrogen to the TAM state variable. If net growth is positive, a portion of the
nitrogen flux is subtracted from both the NO3 and TAM state variables. The
relative proportions of NO3 and TAM are governed by the value of parameter ALNPR,
which is the fraction of nitrogen requirements for growth which are preferably
satisfied by nitrate.

243
 Subroutine Group PLANK

4.2(3).7.3.4 Simulate Zooplankton (subroutine ZORX)

Purpose

ZORX simulates the growth and death of zooplankton, and the resultant changes in
the biochemical balance of the RCHRES. Zooplankton play an important role in
determining the water quality of rivers and lakes. By feeding on the algal,
bacterial, and detrital mass, they are a natural regulator in the aquatic
environment. At the same time zooplankton are a source of food material for higher
trophic levels such as fish. Through excretion, zooplankton provide nutrients for
phytoplankton growth. HSPF is only concerned with those zooplankton which feed on
phytoplankton, although in reality zooplankton may be herbivores, omnivores, or
carnivores.

Schematic View of Fluxes and Storages

Figure 4.2(3).7.3-3 illustrates the fluxes and storage of zooplankton modeled in

ZORX. In addition to zooplankton, the state variables for dissolved oxygen,
biochemical oxygen demand, total ammonia, nitrate, orthophosphate, and refractory
organics are also updated. Subroutine ZORX considers the following processes:

1. filtering and ingestion of phytoplankton by zooplankton

2. assimilation of ingested materials to form new zooplankton biomass
3. zooplankton respiration
4. inorganic and organic zooplankton excretion
5. zooplankton death

Filtering and Ingestion

The amount of phytoplankton ingested per milligram zooplankton is calculated by the

equation:

ZOEAT = ZFIL20*(TCZFIL**(TW - 20.))*PHYTO (20)

where:
ZOEAT = unit ingestion rate (mg phyto/mg zoo per interval)
ZFIL20 = zooplankton filtering rate at 20 degrees C
(liters filtered/mg zoo per interval)
TCZFIL = temperature correction coefficient for filtering
TW = water temperature (deg C)
PHYTO = phytoplankton concentration (mg phyto/l)

The filtering rate is dependent upon water temperature and phytoplankton concen-
tration. Rates for most biological activities double for every 10 degrees Centri-
grade increase in temperature. The filtering rate meets this criterion if the
default value of 1.17 is used for the temperature correction coefficient TCZFIL.

244
 Subroutine Group PLANK

When the phytoplankton biomass is below a critical concentration, the unit

filtering rate will be maximal and constant. As the phytoplankton biomass
increases above the critical concentration, the limiting rate is dependent on
ingestive and digestive capabilities, and not on the concentration of the food
source. Under these conditions, the filtering rate decreases proportionally such
that the algal biomass ingested remains constant at the value of the parameter
MZOEAT, which is defaulted to 0.055 mg phytoplankton/mg zooplankton per hour. The
code simulates this by reducing ZOEAT to MZOEAT, if Equation 20 gives a value
greater than MZOEAT. HSPF assumes that the filtering activities of zooplankton are
100 percent efficient; that is, the zooplankton ingest all of the food which is
contained in the water which they filter. The total amount of phytoplankton
ingested by the zooplankton is calculated as:

ZEAT = ZOEAT*ZOO (21)

where:
ZEAT = ingested phytoplankton (mg biomass/l per interval)
ZOEAT = unit ingestion rate
ZOO = zooplankton concentration (mg biomass/l)

ZORX checks that the calculated amount of ingestion does not reduce the
phytoplankton population to less than 0.0025 micromoles of phosphorus per liter;
if it does, the ingestion rate is adjusted to maintain a phytoplankton
concentration at this level.

Assimilation

Assimilation is the process by which ingested phytoplankton are converted to new

zooplankton mass. The process of assimilation is never 100 percent efficient in
biological systems. Unassimilated food is excreted as organic and inorganic waste
products. Zooplankton assimilation efficiency is dependent upon quality and
concentration of food. High quality food is assimilated at high efficiency,
whereas low quality food is mostly excreted as waste resulting in low assimilation
efficiency. The relationship between food concentration and assimilation
efficiency is more complex. If the concentration of available food and the
filtering rate of an organism are such that the organism ingests more food than can
be readily used for growth and metabolism, the organism's assimilation efficiency
decreases. The model represents the effect of food quality and concentration on
assimilation as shown in Figure 4.2(3).7.3-6.

The quality of the zooplankton food is assigned in the User's Control Input by the
parameter ZFOOD. Three qualities of food are allowed. From these, one type must
be chosen to represent the overall food source available to the zooplankton:

1 = high quality food

ZFOOD = 2 = medium quality
3 = low quality

Depending on the value assigned to ZFOOD, the assimilation efficiency ZEFF is

calculated by one of the following equations:

245
 Subroutine Group PLANK

Figure 4.2(3).7.3-6 Zooplankton assimilation efficiency

246
 Subroutine Group PLANK

IF ZFOOD = 1 THEN ZEFF = -0.06*PHYTO + 1.03 (22)

IF ZEFF > 0.99 THEN ZEFF = 0.99

IF ZFOOD = 2 THEN ZEFF = -0.03*PHYTO + 0.47

IF ZEFF < 0.20 THEN ZEFF = 0.20

IF ZFOOD = 3 THEN ZEFF = -0.013*PHYTO + 0.17

IF ZEFF < 0.03 THEN ZEFF = 0.03

These equations are extrapolations from research on Daphnia (Schindler, 1968). The
corrections to ZEFF set reasonable upper or lower limits on efficiency for
assimilating each type of food. The mass of ingested phytoplankton assimilated by
zooplankton is calculated as:

ZOGR = ZEFF*ZEAT (23)

where:
ZOGR = zooplankton growth (mg biomass/l per interval)
ZEFF = assimilation efficiency (dimensionless)
ZEAT = ingested phytoplankton (mg biomass/l per interval)

Respiration

Respiration is the biochemical process by which organic molecules are broken down,
resulting in a release of energy which is essential for cellular and organismal
activities. The oxidized molecules may either be carbohydrates and fats stored
within the organism or food passing through the organism's digestive system. In
either case, the end result of respiration is a decrease in zooplankton mass and
a subsequent release of inorganic nutrients. The equation governing zooplankton
respiration is:

ZRES = ZRES20*(TCZRES**(TW - 20.))*ZOO (24)

where:
ZRES = zooplankton biomass respired (mg zoo/l per interval)
ZRES20 = respiration rate at 20 degrees C (default= 0.0015/hr)
TCZRES = temperature correction factor for respiration (default = 1.07)
ZOO = zooplankton (mg biomass/l)

Excretion Products

Excretion is the ingested food which is not assimilated by the zooplankton. These
waste products contain both refractory and nonrefractory materials. The amount of
refractory organic excretion is calculated as:

ZREFEX = REFR*ZEXMAS (25)

247
 Subroutine Group PLANK

where:
ZREFEX = refractory organic material excreted by zooplankton
(mg refractory biomass/l per interval)
ZEXMAS = total mass of zooplankton excretion
(ZEXMAS is the difference between ZEAT and ZOGR)
REFR = fraction of biomass which is refractory
(REFR is the complement of parameter NONREF)

The nonrefractory portion of the excretion is released to the water in the form of
inorganic nutrients and undegraded BOD materials. The relative abundance of the
materials is dependent upon the unit ingestion rate of the zooplankton (ZOEAT).
At higher ingestion rates, a larger fraction of the nonrefractory excretion is not
decomposed and is released as BOD materials. In the model, the parameter ZEXDEL
is the fraction of nonrefractory excretion which is immediately decomposed and
released to the water as inorganic nutrients when the unit ingestion rate of the
zooplankton is maximal. If the unit ingestion rate is less than maximal, the model
assumes that all the nonrefractory excretion is released to the water as inorganic
nutrients. Thus, the amount of excretion released as inorganic materials is:

ZINGEX = ZEXDEC*(ZEXMAS - ZREFEX) (26)

where:
ZINGEX = amount of biomass decomposed to inorganic excretion
(mg biomass/l per interval)
ZEXDEC = fraction of nonrefractory inorganic excretion
(ZEXDEC = 1 for ZOEAT <= MZOEAT and ZEXDEC = ZEXDEL for
ZOEAT > MZOEAT. Value of ZOEAT is that given by equation
20, i.e., prior to adjustment.)

The remaining portion of the excretion is considered to be BOD materials, and is

calculated as:

ZNRFEX = ZEXMAS - ZREFEX - ZINGEX (27)

where:
ZNRFEX = amount of biomass released as nonrefractory organic excretion
(mg biomass/l per interval)

Death

Zooplankton death is the termination of all ingestion, assimilation, respiration,

and excretion activities. After death, zooplankton contribute both refractory and
nonrefractory materials to the system. Under aerobic conditions, the mass rate of
zooplankton death is determined by multiplying the natural zooplankton death rate,
ZD, by the zooplankton concentration. If anaerobic conditions exist, an increase
in zooplankton death rate is modeled by adding the value of the anaerobic death
rate parameter, OXZD, to ZD. The default value of ZD is 0.0001/hr and that of OXZD
is 0.03/hr.

248
 Subroutine Group PLANK

Materials Balance for Related Constituents

Research has shown that 1.10 mg of oxygen are consumed for every gram of
zooplankton mass which is respired (Richman, 1958). The DOX state variable is
reduced accordingly in ZORX. If there is not sufficient oxygen available to
satisfy respiration requirements, the deficit is added to the BOD state variable,
and DOX is set equal to zero.

ZORX makes use of subroutine DECBAL to update the state variables TAM, NO3, and PO4
to account for additions from zooplankton respiration and inorganic excretion. The
amount of inorganic constituents produced by these two processes is calculated by
the following equations:

ZNIT = (ZINGEX + ZRES)*CVBN (28)

ZPO4 = (ZINGEX + ZRES)*CVBP
ZCO2 = (ZINGEX + ZRES)*CVBC

where:
ZNIT = increment to TAM or NO3 state variable (mg N/l per interval)
ZPO4 = increment to PO4 state variable (mg P/l per interval)
ZCO2 = increment to CO2 state variable (mg C/l per interval)
ZINGEX = biomass decomposed to inorganic excretion (mg biomass/l per interval)
ZRES = biomass respired by zooplankton (mg biomass/l per interval)
CVBN = conversion factor from biomass to equivalent nitrogen
CVBP = conversion factor from biomass to equivalent phosphorus
CVBC = conversion factor from biomass to equivalent carbon

If ammonia is simulated, the inorganic nitrogen released is added to the TAM

variable; otherwise, it is added to the NO3 variable. The value of ZCO2 is
computed for use in subroutine group PHCARB if pH simulation is performed.
Finally, ZORX calls subroutine ORGBAL to update the state variables for ORN, ORP,
ORC, and BOD to account for additions from zooplankton death and organic excretion.
The amounts of organic constituents produced by these processes are calculated as:

ZORN = ((REFR*ZDTH) + ZREFEX)*CVBN (29)

ZORP = ((REFR*ZDTH) + ZREFEX)*CVBP
ZORC = ((REFR*ZDTH) + ZREFEX)*CVBC
ZBOD = (ZDTH*CVNRBO) + (ZNRFEX*CVBO)

where:
ZORN = increment to ORN state variable (mg N/l per interval)
ZORP = increment to ORP state variable (mg P/l per interval)
ZORC = increment to ORC state variable (mg C/l per interval)
ZBOD = increment to BOD state variable (mg O/l per interval
REFR = refractory fraction of biomass
ZDTH = zooplankton death (mg biomass/l per interval)
ZREFEX = refractory organic excretion (mg biomass/l per interval)
ZNRFEX = nonrefractory organic excretion (mg biomass/l per interval)
CVBO = conversion from biomass to equivalent oxygen
CVNRBO = conversion from nonrefractory biomass to equivalent oxygen,
times NONREF

249
 Subroutine Group PLANK

4.2(3).7.3.5 Simulate Benthic Algae (subroutine BALRX)

Purpose

BALRX simulates those algae in the RCHRES which are attached to rocks or other
stable structures. In free flowing streams, large diurnal fluctuations of oxygen
can be attributed to benthic algae. During the sunlight hours, if sufficient
nutrients exist to support photosynthesis, oxygen is produced in such large
quantities that supersaturation often occurs. However, at night, when
photosynthesis cannot occur, the benthic algae can exert a significant demand on
the oxygen supply of the RCHRES due to respiratory requirements. Benthic algae
influence the nutrient balance of the RCHRES by their extraction of nutrients for
growth.

Approach

The growth and death of benthic algae are modeled in much the same manner as their
free floating relatives, the phytoplankton. In fact, four of the five subroutines
that are used for phytoplankton simulation are also used in the benthic algae
simulation. These routines are ALGRO, GROCHK, ORGBAL, and NUTRUP. There are two
major differences in modeling the two types of algae. First, since the benthic
algae are attached to materials in the RCHRES, they are not subject to longitudinal
advection. Second, the manner in which death of benthic algae is modeled is
sufficiently different from the method used for phytoplankton that a special
routine, BALDTH, is used. Within BALRX benthic algae are in units of micromoles
phosphorus per liter so that the benthic algae simulation can take advantage of the
same subroutines used by PHYRX. In order to obtain these units, the following
conversion is performed:

BAL = BENAL*DEPCOR/CVPB (30)

where:
BAL = benthic algae (micromoles phosphorus/l)
BENAL = benthic algae (mg biomass/m2)
CVPB = conversion factor from micromoles phosphorus to mg biomass
DEPCOR = conversion from square meters to liters based on average depth of
water in RCHRES during the interval (DEPCOR is computed in RQUAL)

Net Growth

Unit growth and respiration rates for benthic algae are calculated by subroutine
ALGRO. The user has the option of multiplying either of these rates by a constant
factor if there is evidence that the benthic algae population does not exhibit the
same growth and respiration rates as the phytoplankton population. Thus, net
growth rate is calculated as:

GROBAL = (GRO*CFBALG - RES*CFBALR)*BAL (31)

250
 Subroutine Group PLANK

where:
GROBAL = net growth rate of benthic algae (micromoles P/l per interval
GRO = unit growth rate as calculated in subroutine ALGRO
CFBALG = ratio of benthic algae to phytoplankton growth rates
under identical growth conditions (default = 1.0)
RES = unit respiration rate as calculated in subroutine ALGRO
CFBALR = ratio of benthic algae to phytoplankton respiration rates
(default = 1.0)
BAL = benthic algae concentration (micromoles P/l)

After GROBAL has been calculated, subroutine GROCHK is called to assure that the
calculated growth does not reduce any nutrient to a concentration less than 0.001
mg/l. If it does, GROBAL is adjusted to satisfy this requirement.

Death of Benthic Algae

Subroutine BALDTH calculates the amount of benthic algae death and passes this
information back to BALRX (variable DTHBAL). BALRX updates the state variable BAL
to account for net growth and death. The value of BAL is not allowed to fall below
0.0001 micromoles of phosphorus per square meter.

Materials Balance for Related Constituents

The DOX state variable is updated to account for the net effect of benthic algae
photosynthesis and respiration according to the following equation:

DOX = DOX + (CVPB*CVBO*GROBAL) (32)

where:
DOX = concentration of dissolved oxygen (mg/l)
CVPB = conversion factor from micromoles phosphorus to mg biomass
CVBO = conversion factor from mg biomass to mg oxygen
GROBAL = net growth of benthic algae (micromoles phosphorus/l per interval)

The additions to ORN, ORP, ORC, and BOD resulting from benthic algae death are
calculated as:

BALORN = REFR*DTHBAL*CVBPN*.014 (33)

BALORP = REFR*DTHBAL*.031
BALORC = REFR*DTHBAL*CVBPC*.012
BALBOD = CVNRBO*CVPB*DTHBAL

251
 Subroutine Group PLANK

where:
BALORN = increment to ORN state variable (mg N/l per interval)
BALORP = increment to ORP state variable (mg P/l per interval)
BALORC = increment to ORC state variable (mg C/l per interval)
BALBOD = increment to BOD state variable (mg O/l per interval)
REFR = refractory fraction of biomass
DTHBAL = benthic algae death (micromoles P/l per interval)
CVNRBO = conversion from mg biomass to equivalent mg
oxygen demand (allowing for refractory fraction)
CVPB = conversion from micromoles phosphorus to mg biomass
CVBPN = conversion from micromoles phosphorus to micromoles nitrogen
CVBPC = conversion from micromoles phosphorus to micromoles carbon

When BALORN, BALORP, BALORC, and BALBOD have been evaluated, subroutine ORGBAL is
called to perform the actual increments to the appropriate state variables.
Finally, subroutine NUTRUP is called to update the inorganic state variables to
account for net growth.

External Units

The output values for benthic algae are in units of milligrams biomass per square
meter and micrograms chlorophyll a per square meter.

4.2(3).7.3.5.1 Calculate Benthic Algae Death (subroutine BALDTH)

Purpose

BALDTH calculates algal death each interval by using one of two unit death rates
specified in the User's Control Input. ALDL, the low unit death rate, is used when
environmental conditions encourage sustained life; in situations where nutrients
are scarce or the benthic algae population becomes excessive, ALDH, the high algal
death rate, is used.

Method

The high algal death rate, which has a default value of 0.01/hr, is used if any one
of three conditions exists:

1. the concentration of PO4 is less than the value of parameter PALDH

2. the concentration of inorganic nitrogen is less than the value of parameter
NALDH
3. the areal density of benthic algae is greater than the value of parameter MBAL

252
 Subroutine Group PLANK

Regardless of whether these tests indicate that ALDH or ALDL (default equals
0.001/hr) should be used, an additional increment to death occurs if anaerobic
conditions are prevalent during the interval. The increment to death rate due to
anaerobic conditions is determined by the value of parameter OXALD. When the
benthic algae population grows to a size greater than that which may be supported
on the bottom surface, algae begin to break away from the bottom, a phenomenon
known as sloughing. Whenever the population calculated exceeds the maximum
allowable bottom density (MBAL), the sloughing process removes the excess algae.
The amount of benthic algae death which occurs during the interval is calculated
as:

DTHBAL = (ALD*BAL) + SLOF (34)

where:
DTHBAL = amount of benthic algae death (micromoles P/l per interval)
ALD = unit algal death rate determined by environmental conditions
(/interval)
BAL = concentration of benthic algae (micromoles P/l)
SLOF = amount of benthic algae sloughed (micromoles P/l per interval)

253
 Subroutine Group PHCARB

4.2(3).7.4 Simulate pH, Carbon Dioxide, Total Inorganic Carbon,

and Alkalinity (Subroutine Group PHCARB of Module RCHRES)

Purpose

PHCARB calculates the pH of the water within a RCHRES. The primary value of pH is
as an indicator of the chemical environment of the system. Under normal
circumstances, pH is near neutral, that is, near seven. Most life sustaining
processes are impaired at extremes of pH.

Method

Figure 4.2(3).7.4-1 illustrates the fluxes and storages of constituents introduced

in this section. Determination of pH requires simulation of alkalinity, carbon
dioxide, and total inorganic carbon. Within PHCARB, state variables for alkalinity
(ALK), carbon dioxide (CO2), and total inorganic carbon (TIC) are expressed as
molar concentrations to correspond to the equilibrium expressions necessary to
determine pH. The conversion from mg/l to moles/l takes place after longitudinal
advection has been considered. Externally, ALK, CO2, and TIC are expressed in
mg/l.

Alkalinity

Alkalinity is defined as the amount of acid required to attain a pH value equal to

that of a total inorganic carbon molar solution of H2CO3. This pH value is near
4.5, which is approximately the lowest pH value tolerated by most forms of aquatic
life. Alkalinity is interpreted as the acid neutralizing capacity of natural
waters.

Alkalinity is simulated as a conservative constituent, in module section CONS.

Parameter ALKCON, in the User's Control Input for PHCARB, specifies which
conservative substance is alkalinity. For example, if ALKCON = 3 then subroutine
PHCARB will assume that alkalinity is the 3rd conservative constituent.

Carbon Dioxide and Total Inorganic Carbon

HSPF assumes that changes in the TIC concentration occur only as changes in CO2
concentration. Thus, the sources of TIC are:

1. carbon dioxide invasion (input) from the atmosphere

2. zooplankton respiration
3. carbon dioxide released by BOD decay
4. net growth of algae (if negative)
5. benthal release of carbon dioxide (if BENRFG = 1)

254
 Subroutine Group PHCARB

Figure 4.2(3).7.4-1 Flow diagram of inorganic carbon in the PHCARB group of the
RCHRES Application Module

255
 Subroutine Group PHCARB

The sinks of TIC are:

1. carbon dioxide release to the atmosphere

2. net growth of algae (if positive)

All of these quantities except carbon dioxide invasion are calculated in other
subroutines and passed into PHCARB.

Carbon Dioxide Invasion

In order to calculate carbon dioxide invasion, the saturation concentration of CO2

must be determined. First, Henry's constant for CO2, defined as the molar
concentration of atmospheric CO2 divided by the partial pressure of CO2, is
calculated by the equation:

S = 10.**(2385.73/TWKELV - 14.0184 + 0.0152642*TWKELV) (1)

where:
S = Henrys's constant for CO2
TWKELV = temperature of water (deg K)

Using Henry's constant, the saturation concentration of CO2 is calculated as:

SATCO2 = 3.16E-04*CFPRES*S (2)

where:
SATCO2 = saturation concentration of CO2 (moles CO2-C/l)
CFPRES = correction to atmospheric pressure resulting from elevation
difference (calculated in the Run Interpreter)
S = Henry's constant for CO2

The carbon dioxide invasion is then calculated by the following equation:

ATCO2 = KCINV*(SATCO2 - CO2) (3)

where:
ATCO2 = carbon dioxide invasion expressed as moles CO2-C/l
per interval
KCINV = carbon dioxide invasion coefficient (/interval)
SATCO2 = saturation concentration of CO2 (moles CO2-C/l)
CO2 = concentration of CO2 after longitudinal advection (moles CO2-C/l)

A positive value for ATCO2 indicates addition of CO2 to the water; a negative value
indicates a release of CO2 from water to the atmosphere. The value of KCINV is
dependent upon the value calculated for KOREA, the oxygen reaeration coefficient,
in subroutine group OXRX:

256
 Subroutine Group PHCARB

KCINV = CFCINV*KOREA (4)

where:
KCINV = carbon dioxide invasion coefficient (/interval)
CFCINV = parameter specifying ratio of CO2 invasion rate to O2
reaeration rate
KOREA = oxygen reaeration coefficient (/interval)

Net Carbon Dioxide Flux

The net carbon dioxide flux is determined by the following equation:

DELTCD = ATCO2 + (ZCO2 - ALGCO2 + DECCO2 + BENCO2)/12000. (5)

where:
DELTCD = net CO2 flux (moles CO2-C/l per interval)
ATCO2 = CO2 invasion (moles CO2-C/l per interval)
ZCO2 = CO2 released by zooplankton excretion and respiration
(mg CO2-C/l per interval)
ALGCO2 = CO2 flux due to net growth of algae (mg CO2-C/l per interval)
DECCO2 = CO2 released by BOD decay (mg CO2-C/l per interval)
BENCO2 = benthal release of CO2 (mg CO2-C/l per interval)
12000. = conversion from mg CO2-C/l to moles CO2-C/l

If DECFG, the flag which decouples CO2 from the algal simulation, has a value of
one, ALGCO2 has a value of zero in this equation. Benthal release rates for both
aerobic and anaerobic conditions must be included in the User's Control Input if
benthal release of CO2 is simulated. Since HSPF assumes that changes in total
inorganic carbon concentration only occur as changes in carbon dioxide, the update
to the TIC state variable for each simulation interval is:

TIC = TIC + DELTCD (6)

where:
TIC = total inorganic carbon (moles C/l)

The Carbonate System

The value of pH is controlled by the carbonate system. There are three species of
importance to the system: [H2CO3*], [HCO3], and [CO3]. [H2CO3*] is defined as the
sum of [H2CO3] and [CO2]; for modeling purposes [H2CO3] is negligible relative to
[CO2]. The carbonate system can be described by the following equations:

[H]*[HCO3]/[H2CO3*] = K1EQU (7)

[H]*[CO3]/[HCO3] = K2EQU
[H]*[OH] = KWEQU
[H2CO3*] + [HCO3] + [CO3] = TIC
[HCO3] + 2*[CO3] + [OH] - [H] = ALK

257
 Subroutine Group PHCARB

where:
[H] = hydrogen ion concentration (moles/l)
[OH] = hydroxide ion concentration (moles/l)
[CO3] = carbonate ion concentration (moles/l)
[HCO3] = bicarbonate ion concentration (moles/l)
[H2CO3*] = carbonic acid/carbon dioxide concentration (moles/l)
K1EQU = first dissociation constant for carbonic acid
K2EQU = second dissociation constant for carbonic acid
KWEQU = ionization product of water

The five unknown values ([H2CO3*], [HCO3], [CO3], [H], [OH]) can be determined when
K1EQU, K2EQU, KWEQU, TIC, and ALK are known. K1EQU, K2EQU, and KWEQU are all
functions of water temperature and are evaluated by the following equations:

K1EQU = 10.**(-3404.71/TWKELV + 14.8435 - 0.032786*TWKELV) (8)

K2EQU = 10.**(-2902.39/TWKELV + 6.4980 - 0.02379*TWKELV)
KWEQU = 10.**(-4470.99/TWKELV + 6.0875 - 0.01706*TWKELV)

where:
TWKELV = absolute temperature of water (deg K)

Calculation of pH and CO2

Once values have been determined for K1EQU, K2EQU, KWEQU, TIC, and ALK, an
equilibrium equation can be developed for hydrogen ion concentration ([H]). The
five equations representing the carbon system (Equation 7) can be reduced to a
fourth order polynomial expression:

[H]**4 + COEFF1*([H]**3) + COEFF2*([H]**2) + COEFF3*[H] + COEFF4 = 0 (9)

where:
COEFF1 = ALK + K1EQU
COEFF2 = -KWEQU + ALK*K1EQU + K1EQU*K2EQU - TIC*K1EQU
COEFF3 = -2.*K1EQU*K2EQU*TIC - K1EQU*KWEQU + ALK*K1EQU*K2EQU
COEFF4 = -K1EQU*K2EQU*KWEQU
[H] = hydrogen ion concentration (moles/l)

The solution of this equation is performed by subroutine PHCALC. Based on the

hydrogen ion concentration calculated in PHCALC, the concentration of CO2 is
recalculated as:

CO2 = TIC/(1. + K1EQU/HPLUS + K1EQU*K2EQU/(HPLUS**2)) (10)

where:
CO2 = carbon dioxide concentration (moles C/l)
TIC = total inorganic carbon concentration (moles C/l)

258
 Subroutine Group PHCARB

K1EQU = first dissociation constant of carbonic acid

K2EQU = second dissociation constant of carbonic acid
HPLUS = hydrogen ion concentration (moles H/l)

Finally, the units of TIC, CO2, and ALK are converted back to mg/l for use outside
of PHCARB.

4.2(3).7.4.1 Calculate pH (subroutine PHCALC)

PHCALC uses the Newton-Raphson method to solve the fourth order polynomial
expression for the hydrogen ion concentration (Equation 9). The user specifies the
maximum number of iterations performed by assigning a value to parameter PHCNT.
PHCALC continues the iteration process until the solutions for pH concentration of
two consecutive iterations differ by no more than one tenth of a pH unit. If the
solution technique does not converge within the maximum allowable number of
iterations, PHCALC passes this information back to PHCARB by assigning a value of
zero to CONVFG. An error message is printed and then PHCALC is called again, to
repeat the unsuccessful iteration process. This time, the "debug flag" (PHDBFG)
is set ON so that, for each iteration, PHCALC will print information which will
help the user track down the source of the problem.

259
 Module COPY

4.2(11) Copy Time Series (Utility Module COPY)

This utility module is used to copy one or more time series from a source specified
in the EXT SOURCES or NETWORK Block of the User's Control Input (UCI), to a target
specified in the NETWORK or EXT TARGETS Block (Part F, Section 4.6).

To operate the COPY module, the user must specify the time interval used in the
internal scratch pad (INDELT) and the number of point-valued and mean-valued time
series to be copied (NPT and NMN in Part F, Section 4.4(11).1). Up to 20
point-valued and/or 20 mean-valued time series may be copied in a single operation.

Module TSGET transfers the time series from the source(s), which may be either
external (e.g. WDM or DSS data set or sequential file) or the output(s) from one
or more preceding operations, to the INPAD. DSS Data sets with time steps other
than the internal scratch pad time interval (INDELT) will be automatically
aggregated or disaggregated. Data from sequential files must be at the INDELT
interval. It also automatically alters the "kind" of time series, if appropriate,
and can multiply each value by a user-specified factor.

Module TSPUT then transfers the time series from the INPAD to the target which,
again, can be either external or internal. The work performed is a mirror image
of that done by TSGET; time series can be aggregated/disaggregated and/or
transformed in the same way.

Module COPY is typically used to transfer time series, such as precipitation and
potential evapotranspiration data, from a sequential file (e.g., ASCII data) to a
data set in the WDM file or DSS. Thereafter, when these data are used as inputs
to simulation operations, they are read directly from the WDM or DSS.

COPY can also be used to change the "kind" and/or interval of one or more time
series. For example, a WDM data set containing hourly precipitation data could be
input to COPY and the output stored in another WDM data set with a daily time step.
The data would automatically be aggregated.

260
 Module PLTGEN

4.2(12) Prepare Time Series for Display on a Plotter (Utility Module PLTGEN)

This utility module prepares one or more time series for simultaneous display on
a plotter. As with the COPY module (Section 4.2(11)), the user must specify the
input(s) (sources), using entries in the EXT SOURCES or NETWORK Blocks in his
control input (UCI). The internal time-step and the number of point- and/or
mean-valued time series to be displayed must also be specified.

TSGET transfers the time series from the source(s) to the INPAD (as in COPY).
PLTGEN then outputs these data to a plot file (PLOTFL). This is a sequential file;
the first 25 records contain general information, such as the plot heading, number
of curves to be plotted, scaling information, etc. Each subsequent record
contains:

Cols Contents
1 - 4 Identifier (first 4 characters of title)
6 - 10 Year
11 - 13 Month
14 - 16 Day
17 - 19 Hour
20 - 22 Minute
25 - 36 Value for curve 1, for this date/time
39 - 50 Value for curve 2, for this date/time
etc (repeats until data for all curves are supplied)

Format: A4,1X,I5,4I3,10(2X,G12.5)

The time resolution of the PLOTFL is the INDELT of the run, an integer multiple
of the INDELT which is also evenly divisible into one day, one month, or one year.

A PLOTFL may contain only records greater than a certain threshold value, THRESH,
or during a certain span of time specified in the Special Actions Block.

The contents of a sample PLOTFL are listed in Figure 4.2(12)-1. To keep the
listing short, only the first four values have been included

A plot file is intended to be read by a stand-alone plot program, which translates

its contents into information used to drive a plotting device. Alternative uses
of a PLOTFL are:

1. To display one or more time series in printed form. For example: To examine
the contents of a data set in the WDM file, input it to PLTGEN and list the
contents of the PLOTFL on a line printer or terminal.

2. To transfer time series to some other stand-alone program, such as a

spreadsheet or graphical display program. For example, one could specify the
contents of a PLOTFL as input to a program which performs statistical analysis
or computes cross correlations between time series.

261
 Module PLTGEN

Plot HSPF FILE FOR DRIVING SEPARATE PLOT PROGRAM

Plot Time interval: 30 mins Last month in printout year: 9
Plot No. of curves plotted: Point-valued: 2 Mean-valued: 0 Total: 2
Plot Label flag: 0 PIVL: 1 IDELT: 30
Plot Plot title: Plot of reservoir flowrates
Plot Y-axis label: Flow (ft3/sec)
Plot Scale info: Ymin: .00000E+00
Plot Ymax: 1000.0
Plot Time: 48.000 intervals/inch
Plot Data for each curve (Point-valued first, then mean-valued):
Plot Label LINTYP INTEQ COLCOD TRAN TRANCOD
Plot Inflow 0 0 1 SUM 1
Plot Outflow 0 0 1 SUM 1
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot Time series (pt-valued, then mean-valued):
Plot
Plot Date/time Values
Plot
Plot 1974 5 31 24 0 .00000E+00 1.0000
Plot 1974 6 1 0 30 .82838 1.0000
Plot 1974 6 1 1 0 1.5071 1.0000
Plot 1974 6 1 1 30 2.0631 1.0000

Figure 4.2(12)-1 Sample PLOTFL (showing four time points)

262
 Module DISPLY

4.2(13) Display Time Series in a Convenient Tabular Format

(Utility Module DISPLY)

The purpose of this module is to permit any time series to be displayed (at a
variety of time intervals) in a tabular format. Sample outputs are shown in
Figures 4.2(13)-1 through -3. Salient features of this module are:

1. Any time series (input or computed) can be displayed. The user specifies the
time series in the EXT SOURCES or NETWORK Block, as with any other module.

2. As with any other module, the data are first placed in the INPAD, by module
TSGET. At this point they are at the time interval specified for this
operation in the OPN SEQUENCE Block (INDELT). This might have involved
aggregation or disaggregation if the data were brought in from the WDM file.
In general, INDELT can be any of the 19 HSPF supported time steps, ranging
from 1 minute to 1 day.

3. The user can elect to display the data in a "long-span table" or a "short-span
table". The term "span" refers to the period covered by each table. A short-
span table (Figures 4.2(13)-1 and -2) covers a day or a month at a time and
a long-span table (Figure 4.2(13)-3) covers a year.

4. The user selects the time-step for the individual items in a short-span
display (the display interval) by specifying it as a multiple (PIVL) of
INDELT. For example, the data in Figure 4.2(13)-1 are displayed at an
interval of 5 minutes. This could have been achieved with the following
scenarios:

INDELT PIVL

5 min 1
1 min 5

If the display interval is less than one hour, one hours worth of data are
displayed on one printed "row" (Figure 4.2(13)-1). The number of items in a
row depends on their interval (e.g., 60 for one minute, 12 for 5 minutes, 2
for 30 mins.). A "row" may actually occupy up to 5 physical lines of printout
because a maximum of 12 items is placed on a line. The entire table spans one
day.

263
 Module DISPLY

If the display interval is greater than or equal to one hour, a day's worth
of data are displayed on one "row" (Figure 4.2(13)-2). Again, the number of
items in a row depends on the display interval. In this case the entire table
spans a month.

5. A long-span table always covers one year; the display interval for the
individual items in the table is one day (Figure 4.2(13)-3). The user can
select the month which terminates the display (December in the example) so
that the data can be presented on a calendar year, water year or some other
basis.

6. For the purpose of aggregating the data from the interval time step (INDELT)
to the display interval, day-value, month-value, or year-value, one of five
"transformation codes" can be specified:

Code Meaning

SUM Sum of the data

AVER Average of the data
MAX Take the max of the values at the smaller time step
MIN Take the minimum
LAST Take the last of the values belonging to the shorter
time step

SUM is appropriate for displaying data like precipitation; AVER is useful for
displaying data such as temperatures.

7. The module incorporates a feature designed to permit reduction of the quantity

of printout produced when doing short-span displays. If the "row-value"
("hour-sum" in Figure 4.2(13)-1; "day-average" in Figure 4.3(13)-2) is less
than or equal to a threshold value, printout of the entire row is suppressed.
The default threshold is 0.0. Thus, in Figure 4.2(13)-1; data for dry hours
are not printed.

8. The user can also specify the following:

a. The number of decimal digits to use in a display.

b. A title for the display.

c. A linear transformation, to be performed on the data when they are at the

INDELT time interval (i.e. before module DISPLY performs any
aggregation). By default, no transformation is performed.

264
 WDM 39 Precip. (in/100)
Summary for DAY 1976/10/4
Date interval: 5 mins

HOUR SUM Interval Number

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

3: 2.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 1.0

4: 3.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0

5: 5.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.0 2.0

6: 6.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

7: 3.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0

8: 3.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0

265
9: 3.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0

10: 3.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0

11: 3.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0

12: 4.0 1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0

13: 3.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0

14: 2.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0

15: 4.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0

16: 7.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.0 1.0 0.0

17: 3.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0

18: 6.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 1.0 1.0 0.0 1.0 1.0

19: 5.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0
Module DISPLY
 WDM 121 Temperature (Deg. F)
Summary for MONTH 1976/8/
Data interval: 120 mins
DAY AVER Interval Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 67.7 58.0 61.3 55.1 61.3 69.0 75.6 79.8 81.8 77.4 71.4 65.9 61.2
2 67.2 57.5 55.2 54.2 60.8 69.1 76.1 80.7 82.8 77.6 70.4 64.0 58.4
3 66.7 54.1 51.5 50.2 57.8 67.2 75.1 80.4 82.8 78.6 72.8 67.5 62.8
4 72.8 59.3 57.2 56.2 63.5 72.7 80.3 85.4 87.8 84.4 79.6 75.4 71.6
5 73.0 68.8 67.0 66.1 69.8 74.3 78.2 80.7 81.9 78.6 74.1 69.9 66.3
6 68.3 63.6 61.9 61.1 65.4 70.8 75.4 78.4 79.9 74.9 68.2 62.2 56.9
7 65.2 52.8 50.4 49.2 57.0 66.7 74.8 80.3 82.8 77.4 70.1 63.5 57.7
8 66.0 53.2 50.5 49.2 57.2 67.1 75.6 81.1 83.8 78.6 71.4 65.0 59.4
9 71.4 55.1 52.5 51.2 59.9 70.8 79.9 85.9 88.8 85.2 80.2 75.8 71.9
10 76.5 68.9 67.1 66.1 71.2 77.4 82.7 86.2 87.9 84.4 79.6 75.4 71.6
11 75.9 68.8 67.0 66.1 70.9 76.9 81.9 85.3 86.9 83.4 78.6 74.4 70.6

266
12 75.5 67.8 66.0 65.1 70.4 76.9 82.4 86.2 87.9 83.7 78.1 73.1 68.6
13 70.7 65.2 63.2 62.2 66.2 71.3 75.7 78.6 79.9 77.0 73.2 69.7 66.6
14 68.6 64.2 62.8 62.1 66.0 70.8 74.9 77.6 78.9 74.6 68.8 63.5 58.8
15 63.4 55.3 53.2 52.2 57.9 64.9 71.0 74.9 76.9 72.2 65.9 60.3 55.4
16 63.3 51.6 49.3 48.2 54.8 63.0 70.1 74.7 76.8 73.7 69.4 65.5 62.1
17 71.5 59.5 57.9 57.1 63.8 72.1 79.1 83.7 85.8 82. 76.9 72.2 68.2
18 73.0 65.0 63.1 62.1 67.4 73.9 79.4 83.2 84.9 81.2 76.2 71.8 67.9
19 72.8 64.9 63.1 62.1 67.6 74.5 80.2 84.1 85.9 81.4 75.4 69.9 65.1
20 72.6 61.5 59.2 58.2 65.1 73.6 80.8 85.6 87.8 83.4 77.4 71.9 67.1
21 75.9 63.5 61.2 60.2 67.5 76.7 84.3 89.4 91.8 87.4 81.4 75.9 71.1
22 76.2 67.5 65.2 64.2 69.9 76.9 83.0 86.9 88.9 85.1 79.9 75.2 71.2
23 74.9 68.0 66.1 65.1 70.2 76.4 81.7 85.2 86.9 82.7 77.1 72.1 67.6
24 73.0 64.2 62.2 61.2 66.6 73.5 79.2 83.1 84.9 81.6 77.1 72.9 69.3
25 75.6 66.6 64.9 64.1 69.9 76.9 83.0 86.9 88.9 84.6 78.8 73.5 68.9
26 78.5 65.3 63.2 62.2 69.5 78.7 86.3 91.4 93.8 90.1 84.9 80.2 76.2
27 73.4 73.0 71.1 70.1 72.8 76.2 79.1 81.1 81.9 77.4 71.4 65.9 61.2
Module DISPLY
 WDM 121 Temperature (Deg. F)
Annual data display: Summary for period ending 1976/12

DAY JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
1 27.6 9.4 33.1 49.2 49.4 67.5 67.0 67.7 68.3 68.2 45.7 11.8
2 18.4 17.7 33.3 48.5 45.3 66.3 67.3 67.2 68.9 66.8 42.7 9.1
3 7.0 21.9 29.8 49.3 49.7 65.1 70.5 66.7 72.7 65.9 35.3 13.4
4 13.8 12.6 28.6 48.9 59.7 68.7 73.0 72.8 67.8 58.5 33.0 16.5
5 20.3 15.9 25.0 52.0 57.3 71.0 72.7 73.0 66.1 46.5 36.7 18.0
6 18.0 24.8 25.7 50.8 49.0 71.4 72.8 68.2 71.8 42.4 32.9 4.2
7 0.5 32.5 31.1 47.8 50.6 73.1 76.1 65.2 71.8 43.4 29.1 2.5
8 5.5 36.7 32.7 46.1 55.2 74.0 77.4 66.0 65.4 45.5 34.1 17.7
9 9.9 39.0 35.1 53.6 64.2 72.6 82.0 71.4 63.2 51.5 35.5 23.1
10 16.6 36.5 38.8 54.1 60.9 75.2 84.9 76.5 62.3 56.0 25.2 9.3
11 30.4 44.2 36.4 43.6 58.8 77.2 81.9 75.9 66.3 62.6 20.3 11.3
12 26.7 46.0 32.2 48.7 57.0 78.8 77.7 75.5 68.6 59.9 20.7 11.7

267
13 27.5 37.1 34.0 54.8 58.5 72.2 80.9 70.7 69.0 59.5 23.9 20.4
14 30.1 41.2 33.2 64.7 63.0 72.2 81.3 68.6 68.0 57.2 27.5 29.7
15 28.5 44.0 27.5 67.6 60.1 69.6 73.8 63.4 59.1 43.5 32.8 28.4
16 13.5 34.6 30.7 71.1 58.2 68.2 68.1 63.3 60.4 39.4 36.7 35.2
17 11.6 33.6 44.1 65.7 56.2 69.8 69.9 71.5 66.9 34.8 46.0 38.9
18 21.5 39.6 55.7 59.2 58.3 65.5 72.7 73.0 62.2 32.9 40.8 36.5
19 20.7 39.6 55.8 48.4 68.3 65.8 78.9 72.8 62.5 40.1 35.5 27.7
20 18.8 34.2 48.1 48.0 71.5 66.7 76.0 72.6 58.9 37.4 29.7 9.7
21 25.5 27.7 35.7 54.9 65.3 67.1 71.8 75.9 61.9 37.8 27.6 17.1
22 25.7 29.0 43.8 50.8 58.8 69.6 78.9 76.2 58.2 35.5 23.1 17.1
23 28.6 36.3 55.2 50.6 59.2 66.5 79.8 74.9 54.4 38.8 28.8 22.3
24 27.2 40.8 55.8 47.0 58.1 71.1 74.3 73.0 51.0 42.1 41.0 23.8
25 22.6 47.5 49.3 43.4 60.1 72.5 71.9 75.6 54.3 36.9 41.7 25.1
26 10.1 44.8 45.5 43.8 62.0 73.9 75.4 78.5 56.1 37.1 28.7 30.5
27 18.1 41.2 47.3 46.3 65.9 74.1 73.8 73.4 53.7 37.3 10.3 22.3
28 22.2 39.2 45.3 48.5 62.5 72.2 73.9 65.8 57.6 40.2 6.3 3.8
Module DISPLY
 Module DURANL

4.2(14) Perform Duration Analysis on a Time Series (Utility Module DURANL)

This module examines the behavior of a time series, computing a variety of

statistics relating to its excursions above and below certain specified levels
(Figure 4.2(14)-1). Sample printout is shown in Figure 4.2(14)-2. The quantity of
printout produced can be regulated by the user with a print-level-flag (PRFG),
which has a valid range of values from 1 through 6.

The basic principles are:

1. The module works on the time series after it has been placed in the INPAD.
The data are, thus, at the internal time step of the operation (INDELT). This
module operates on a mean-valued input time series. Therefore, if a point-
valued time series is routed to it, TSGET will, by default, generate mean
values for each time step, and these will be analyzed.

2. When the value of the time series rises above the user-specified level, a
positive excursion commences. When it next falls below the level, this
excursion ends. A negative excursion is defined in the reverse way. (Figure
4.2(14)-1).

3. If the time series has a value less than -10.0**10 this is considered to be
an undefined event (e.g., the concentration of a constituent when there is no
water). In this case the value is in a special category - it is in neither
a positive nor a negative excursion.

4. The above is true if the specified duration is one time step. In this case,
the results produced include a conventional frequency analysis (e.g., flow
duration) of the data. However, the user may specify up to 10 durations; each
is given as a multiple (N) of the basic time step (INDELT), Then, for an
excursion or undefined event to be considered, it has to endure for at least
N consecutive intervals; else it is ignored.

5. The user may specify an analysis season. This is a period (the same in each
year) for which the data will be analyzed (e.g., Oct 1 through May 10). Data
falling outside the analysis season will not be considered.

268
 Module DURANL

Value | Time
(of time | .---. <====Time Series -------->
series or| | |
"level") | .--' | .------.
| | | | .---. | |
| | .--' | | | | '---.
| | | 3+ '--. | '---' 3+ | 3rd
V +10|-----|------------|-----------------------|------------------|--------
| | | 3- | | level
| .--' | | |
| | | | '---.
0| | | | |
|--' | .---. | |
| | | | | '----
| | .--' | .---'
| 2+ '---.2-| 2+ | 2- | 2+
-10|----------------------|--|------|-----|-------------------------------
| | | | | 2nd level
| 1+ '--' | | 1+
-20|--------------------------------|-----|-------------------------------
| |1-.--' 1st level
| | |
| '--'
|

Legend: 2+ excursion above second level (duration >=1)

2- excursion below second level (duration >=1)
etc.

Figure 4.2(14)-1 Definition of terms used in duration analysis module

269
 Module DURANL

The analyses performed, and printout produced (Figure 4.2(14)-2), are:

1. Introductory information - Title, start and end date/time, analysis season.

2. The next seven sets of tables are all similar in format; each contains data
on positive and negative excursions, for each level and duration, and
information on undefined event conditions which persisted for each of the
specified durations. The value of PRFG required to generate each of these,
and the table heading and the data displayed in it are:

a) PRFG > 0. "Fraction of time spent in excursions at each level with

duration greater than or equal the specified durations. The fraction is
relative to the total time span." These are the fractions of total
considered time that each of the above-defined conditions existed.

b) PRFG > 1. "Fraction of time spent in excursions at each level with

duration greater than or equal the specified durations. The fraction is
relative to the time spent in excursions at each level." In the
"Positive Excursions" table, this gives, for each specified level, the
total time that an excursion of duration N existed, divided by the total
time that an excursion of duration 1 existed. A similar definition holds
for the numbers in the "Negative Excursions" table.

c) PRFG > 2. "Time spent in excursions at each level with duration greater
than or equal the specified durations." The tables give the total number
of time steps for which the various conditions occurred.

d) PRFG > 3. "Number of excursions at each level with duration greater than
or equal the specified durations". These give the total number of events
that were found (number of positive and negative excursions for each
level and duration, and number of "undefined occurrences" of each
duration).

e) PRFG > 4. "Average duration of excursions at each level given that the
duration is greater than or equal the specified durations". These values
answer the question: "given that a specified excursion or undefined con-
dition occurred, what was the mean number of time steps that it
persisted?"

f) PRFG > 5. "Standard deviation of duration of excursions at each level

given that the duration is greater than or equal the specified
durations." These tables are similar to those discussed in (e) above,
except that the standard deviation, instead of the mean, is considered.

g) PRFG > 6. "Fraction of excursions with duration N with respect to the

total number of excursions (duration 1) for each level". These tables
give the number of excursions at each duration divided by the number of
excursions at duration 1 for each level.

3. Summary information: Total number of time intervals analyzed, total number

of time intervals for which values were "undefined", total number of days
analyzed, sample size, max, min, mean, standard deviation.

270
 Module DURANL

Duration analysis operation no. 1

Analysis of Subb. 4 Outflow (cfs)
Start date: 1972/12/31 24: 0 End date: 1974/12/31 24: 0
Analysis season starts: 2/28 24: 0 Ends: 11/30 24: 0

PERCENT OF TIME TABLES (WITH RESPECT TO THE TOTAL SPAN OF TIME)

POSITIVE EXCURSIONS
DURATIONS
1 12 24
LEVELS
.0000E+00 1.000 1.000 1.000
10.00 .7308 .7259 .7235
20.00 .5128 .5062 .5034
50.00 .1790 .1674 .1633
500.0 .2273E-02 .0000E+00 .0000E+00

NEGATIVE EXCURSIONS
DURATIONS
1 12 24
LEVELS
.0000E+00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00
10.00 .2692 .2655 .2645
20.00 .4872 .4813 .4762
50.00 .8210 .8121 .8030
500.0 .9977 .9977 .9977

UNDEFINED EVENTS (NO WATER)

DURATIONS
1 12 24
.0000E+00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00

Figure 4.2(14)-2 Sample Duration Analysis Printout

[Continued on next 2 pages]

271
 Module DURANL

PERCENT OF TIME TABLES (WITH RESPECT TO THE TIME SPENT IN EXCURSIONS)

POSITIVE EXCURSIONS
DURATIONS
1 12 24
LEVELS
.0000E+00 1.000 1.000 1.000
10.00 1.000 .9933 .9899
20.00 1.000 .9871 .9817
50.00 1.000 .9353 .9124
500.0 1.000 .0000E+00 .0000E+00

NEGATIVE EXCURSIONS
DURATIONS
1 12 24
LEVELS
.0000E+00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00
10.00 1.000 .9862 .9828
20.00 1.000 .9879 .9775
50.00 1.000 .9892 .9780
500.0 1.000 1.000 1.000

UNDEFINED EVENTS (NO WATER)

DURATIONS
1 12 24
.0000E+00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00

TIME SPENT IN EXCURSIONS

POSITIVE EXCURSIONS
DURATIONS
1 12 24
LEVELS
.0000E+00 .1320E+05 .1320E+05 .1320E+05
10.00 9647. 9582. 9550.
20.00 6769. 6682. 6645.
50.00 2363. 2210. 2156.
500.0 30.00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00

NEGATIVE EXCURSIONS
DURATIONS
1 12 24
LEVELS
.0000E+00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00
10.00 3553. 3504. 3492.
20.00 6431. 6353. 6286.
50.00 .1084E+05 .1072E+05 .1060E+05
500.0 .1317E+05 .1317E+05 .1317E+05
UNDEFINED EVENTS (NO WATER)
DURATIONS
1 12 24
.0000E+00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00

272
 Module DURANL

STANDARD DEVIATION OF TIME SPENT IN EXCURSIONS

POSITIVE EXCURSIONS
DURATIONS
1 12 24
LEVELS
.0000E+00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00
10.00 922.9 2032. 2181.
20.00 321.6 581.1 602.0
50.00 71.65 132.1 128.7
500.0 .7423 .0000E+00 .0000E+00

NEGATIVE EXCURSIONS
DURATIONS
1 12 24
LEVELS
.0000E+00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00
10.00 107.2 113.8 113.3
20.00 127.0 140.0 141.4
50.00 167.6 188.1 191.6
500.0 1202. 1202. 1202.

UNDEFINED EVENTS (NO WATER)

DURATIONS
1 12 24
.0000E+00 .0000E+00 .0000E+00

SUMMARY
TOTAL LENGTH OF DEFINED EVENTS: 13200. INTERVALS
TOTAL LENGTH OF UNDEFINED EVENTS: 0. INTERVALS
TOTAL LENGTH OF ANALYSIS: 550. DAYS
SAMPLE SIZE: 13200
SAMPLE MAXIMUM: .1307E+05
SAMPLE MINIMUM: 2.290
SAMPLE MEAN: 37.80
SAMPLE STANDARD DEVIATION: 164.0

273
 Module DURANL

4. Lethality analysis:

The function of this section of the DURANL module is to assess the risk associated
with any contaminant concentration time series generated by the HSPF application
modules. The methodology links frequency data on instream contaminant levels to
toxicity information resulting from both acute and chronic laboratory bioassays.
The methodology is based on the Frequency Analysis of Concentration (FRANCO)
program developed by Battelle, Pacific Northwest Laboratories as part of their
Chemical Migration and Risk Assessment (CRMA) Methodology.

Laboratory toxicity experiments provide the main basis for developing a risk
analysis for fish or other aquatic organisms. A common method of summarizing the
results of these experiments is to use a lethal concentration where 50% of the fish
die (LC50). Usually information for LC50 concentrations at 24, 48, and 96 hours
can be derived from laboratory experiments in the form of pairs of lethal
concentration and duration values. By connecting these pairs with straight line
segments and extending the function in a reasonable manner at each end, a function
is defined such that an event defined by a particular concentration level with a
particular duration can be classified as exceeding or not exceeding the function,
i.e., exceeding an LC50 value. (Figure 4.2(14)-3). An event exceeds the LC
function when the concentration defining the event and the duration of the event
results in the pair falling above and to the right of the combined LC50, or global
exceedance, curve.

If LCNUM is greater than zero, a global exceedance summary table is printed which
gives the fraction of time that a global exceedance curve is exceeded. Up to 5 LC
curves can be analyzed at one time. It should be noted that the global exceedance
summary eliminates double counting by reporting only those exceedance events with
the lowest concentrations that occur in different contaminant peaks. (FRANCO
documentation should be consulted for more detailed discussion).

If LCOUT=1 and LCNUM=0, a lethal event summary is printed to supplement the global
exceedance information. The table gives a summary of all lethal events including
ending time, lethal curve number, number of intervals in event, and concentration
level. Printout is to unit PUNIT, which should be unique to the duration analysis;
otherwise, the output from the lethal event summary will be mixed with the printout
from application modules.

274
 Module DURANL

Figure 4.2(14)-3 Sample Lethal Concentration (LC) Function for Global

Exceedance Calculation

275
 Module GENER

4.2(15) Generate a Time Series from One or Two Other Time Series (Utility
Module GENER)

This module is designed to perform any one of several possible transformations on

input time series. The transformation is specified by supplying an "option code"
(OPCODE). If A and B are the input time series and C is the computed time series,
then the transformations performed for each possible value of OPCODE are:

OPCODE Action

1 C= Abs value (A)

2 C= Square root (A)
3 C= Truncation (A)
e.g. If A=4.2, C=4.0
A=-3.5, C=-3.0
4 C= Ceiling (A). The "ceiling" is
the integer >= given value.
e.g. If A=3.5, C=4.0
A=-2.0, C=-2.0
5 C= Floor (A). The "floor" is the
integer <= given value.
e.g. If A=3.0, C=3.0
A=-2.7, C=-3.0
6 C= loge (A)
7 C= log10 (A)
8 C= K(1)+K(2)*A+K(3)*A**2 (up to 7 terms)
The user supplies the number of
terms and the values of the
coefficients (K).
9 C= K**A
10 C= A**K
11 C= A+K
12 C= Sin (A)
13 C= Cos (A)
14 C= Tan (A)
15 C= Sum (A)
16 C= A+B
17 C= A-B
18 C= A*B
19 C= A/B
20 C= MAX (A,B)
21 C= MIN (A,B)
22 C= A**B
23 C= cumulative departure of A below B
24 C= K
25 C= Max (A,K)
26 C= Min (A,K)

276
 Module GENER

Note that if OPCODE is less than 15, or OPCODE equals 25 or 26, only one input time
series is involved (unary operators); if OPCODE is 24, no inputs are required
(constant); otherwise two inputs are required (binary operators). As with the
other operating modules, the input time series are first placed in the INPAD by
module TSGET (This may involve a change of time step and/or "kind"). Therefore,
by the time module GENER works on them, they are mean valued time series with a
time step equal to INDELT.

277
 Module MUTSIN

4.2(16) Multiple Sequential Input of Time Series from an HSPF

Stand Alone Plotter File (Utility Module MUTSIN)

This utility module reads a sequential external file previously written on disk.
This file has the same format as the PLOTFL produced with utility module PLTGEN
(Section 4.2(12)). The user specifies the number of point and/or mean-valued time
series to be read and the number of lines to skip at the beginning of the external
file.

The missing data flag, MISSFG, is used to specify how MUTSIN reacts to missing
data. A MISSFG value of 0 indicates that MUTSIN is to report an error and quit if
any data are missing. Therefore, in this case, the internal time-step (DELT) must
equal the time-step of the external file, the starting time of the run must
correspond with the first entry read from the external file, and no entries may be
missing. A MISSFG value of 1 indicates that MUTSIN is to fill missing sequential
file entries with 0.0. A MISSFG value of 2 indicates that MUTSIN is to fill
missing entries with -1.0E30. A MISSFG value of 3 indicates that MUTSIN is to fill
missing values with the value of the next available entry.

Note that the date and time appearing in each record of the file must be in the
same format as that used by the PLTGEN module to write a PLOTFL. (Section
4.2(12)). That is, the full year/month/day/hour/minute string must be present and
a time, e.g., midnight is coded as 74 01 02 24 00, not 75 01 03 00 00.

The EXT TARGETS and/or NETWORK blocks are used to specify where TSPUT places the
time series data read in from the external file.

MUTSIN has four potential uses:

1. It may be used to form a simple interface with other continuous models. The
other model can output its results in the form of an HSPF PLOTFL (or a format
conversion program can be used), and MUTSIN can be used to input this data to
HSPF. Conversely, data can be output from HSPF, using the PLTGEN module, for
input to the other model.

2. MUTSIN may be used to transfer data in a WDM file to another WDM file. This
transfer requires the use of PLTGEN to output the data from the source file
and MUTSIN to input to the target file.

3. MUTSIN can be used to transfer data between different types of computer

hardware where WDM or DSS files are incompatible (e.g., Unix to personal
computer and vice versa).

4. MUTSIN may also be used to input point valued data or data with a time
interval not included in the standard HSPF sequential input formats (Part F,
Section 4.9).

278
 Module TSPUT

4.3 Module TSPUT

Module TSPUT is complementary to, and may be viewed as a mirror image of, module
TSGET (Section 4.1). TSGET obtains time series from a WDM file, DSS, sequential
file, or the INPAD and places its output in the INPAD. Conversely, TSPUT obtains
a time series from the INPAD and places its output in the WDM file, DSS, or back
in the INPAD. It has similar capabilities to TSGET, to alter the time step, "kind"
or to perform a linear transformation on the time series with which it deals.

Compared to TSGET, module TSPUT contains one major complicating factor. When a
time series is to be written to a WDM or DSS data set, the action taken depends on
how any pre-existing data are to be treated. The possible access modes, ADD and
REPL, are discussed in Part F, Section 4.6.

279
 REFERENCES

REFERENCES

American Society for Testing and Materials. 1980. Annual Book of ASTM Standards:
Part 31, Water, Philadelphia, PA.

Anderson, E.A. 1968. Development and Testing of Snow Pack Energy Balance
Equations, Water Resources Research, 4(1):19-37.

Anderson, E.A., and N.H. Crawford. 1964. The Synthesis of Continuous Snowmelt
Runoff Hydrographs on a Digital Computer, Department of Civil Engineering,
Stanford University, Stanford, California, Technical Report No. 36, 103 p.

Caupp, C.L., J.T. Brock, and H.M. Runke. 1994. Model formulation and program
description of the Dynamic Stream Simulation and Assessment Model (DSSAMt):
Application to the Truckee River, Nevada for Truckee River Operating Agreement
(TROA) DEIS/DEIR. Technical Report No. RCR94-1. Submitted to the U.S. Bureau
of Reclamation, Carson City, NV, Rapid Creek Research, Inc., Boise, Idaho.

Chou, T.-W. 1980. Aquatic Biodegradation, Chapter 6 in Mill et al., 1980.

Churchill, M.A., H.L. Elmore, and R.A. Buckingham. 1962. The Prediction of Stream
Reaeration Rates. Amer. Soc. Civil Engineers Journ. 88(SA4), p. 1-46.

Committee on Sanitary Engineering Research. 1960. Solubility of Atmospheric

Oxygen in Water. Twenty-ninth Progress Report. ASCE, Journal of the
Sanitation Engineering Div., 86(SA4):41.

Covar, A.P. 1976. Selecting the Proper Reaeration Coefficient for Use in Water
Quality Models, Proceedings of the Conference on Environmental Modeling and
Simulation, Cincinnati, OH, EPA 600/9-76-016, 861p.

Crawford, N.H., and A.S. Donigian, Jr. 1973. Pesticide Transport and Runoff Model
for Agricultural Lands. Office of Research and Development, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Washington D.C. EPA 660/2-74-013. 211p.

Crawford, H.H. and R.K. Linsley. 1966. Digital Simulation in Hydrology: Stanford
Watershed Model IV, Technical Report No. 39, Dept. of Civil Engineering,
Stanford University, Stanford, CA, 210p.

Di Toro, D.M., D.T. O'Connor, and R.V. Thomann. 1970. A Dynamic Model of
Phytoplankton Populations in Natural Waters, Environmental Engineering and
Science Program, Manhattan College, New York.

Donigian, A.S., Jr., and N.H. Crawford. 1976a. Modeling Pesticides and Nutrients
on Agricultural Lands, Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA, EPA
600/2-7-76-043, 317 p.

Donigian, A.S., Jr., and N.H. Crawford. 1976b. Modeling Nonpoint Pollution From
the Land Surface, Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA, EPA
600/3-76-083, 280p.

280
 REFERENCES

Donigian, A.S, Jr., D.C. Beyerlein, H.H. Davis, Jr., and N.H. Crawford. 1977.
Agricultural Runoff Management (ARM) Model Version II: Refinement and Testing,
Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA, EPA 600/3-77-098, 294p.

Dugdale, R.C., and J.J. Macisaac. 1971. A Computational Model for the Uptake of
Nitrate in the Peru Upwelling. Prepublication Copy.

Falco, J.W., K.T. Sampson, and R.F. Carsel. 1976. Physical Modeling of Pesticide
Degradation. Proceedings of Symposium on Model Ecosystem Approach to
Biodegradation Studies, Society for Industrial Microbiology, pp. 193-202.

Harnard, H.S. and R. Davis. 1943. The Ionization Constant of Carbonic Acid in
Water and the Solubility of CO2 in Water and Aqueous Salt Solution from 0 to
50 C, Journal of the American Chemical Society, 65:2030.

Hydrocomp, Inc. 1977. Hydrocomp Water Quality Operations Manual, Palo Alto, CA.

Hydrocomp, Inc. 1976. Hydrocomp Simulation Programming: Operations Manual, Palo

Alto, CA, 2nd ed.

Jobson, H.E. 1977. Bed Conduction Computation for Thermal Models, J. Hydraulics
Div., ASCE, 103(HY10), 1213-1217.

Jobson, H.E. and T.N. Keefer. 1979. Modeling Highly Transient Flow, Mass, and Heat
Transport in the Chattahoochee River near Atlanta, Georgia. U.S. Geological
Survey Professional Paper No. 1136.

Johanson, R,C., J.C. Imhoff and H.H. Davis, Jr. 1979. Programmer's Supplement for
the Hydrological Simulation Program - Fortran (HSPF).

Krone, R.B. 1962. Flume Studies of the Transport of Sediment in Estuarial

Shoaling Processes. Hydraulic Engineering Laboratory and Sanitary Engineering
Research Laboratory, University of California, Berkeley, CA.

Loehr, R.C., T.B.S. Prakasam, E.G. Srinath, and Y.D. Joo. 1973. Development and
Demonstration of Nutrient Removal from Animal Wastes, U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Washington, D.C. EPA R2-73-095.

Mabey, W.R., T. Mill, and D.G. Hendry. 1980. Photolysis in Water, Chapter 3 in
Mill et al., 1980.

Meyer, L.D., and W.H. Wischmeier. 1969. Mathematical Simulation of the Process
of Soil Erosion by Water. Trans. Am. Soc. Agric. Eng. 12(6):754-758,762.

Mill, T., W.R. Mabey, D.C. Bomberger, T.-W. Chou, D.G. Hendry, and J.H. Smith.
1980. Laboratory Protocols for Evaluating the Fate of Organic Chemicals in
Air and Water. SRI International, Menlo Park, CA, Environmental Research
Laboratory, Athens, GA.

Mill, T., W.R. Mabey, and D.G. Hendry. 1980. Hydrolysis in Water, Chapter 2 in
Mill et al., 1980.

281
 REFERENCES

Mill, T., W.R. Mabey, and D.G. Hendry. 1980. Oxidation in Water, Chapter 4 in
Mill et al., 1980.

Negev, M. 1967. A Sediment Model on a Digital Computer, Department of Civil

Engineering, Stanford University, Stanford, CA, Technical Report No. 76, 109p.

O'Connor, D.J., and D.M. Di Toro. 1970. Photosynthesis and Oxygen Balance in
Streams. ASCE, Journal of Sanitation Engineering Div., 96(SA2):7240.

O'Connor, D.J., and W.E. Dobbins. 1958. Mechanism of Reaeration in Natural

Streams. Trans. of the ASCE, Vol. 123, p. 641-684.

Onishi, Y. and S.E. Wise. 1979. Mathematical Model, SERATRA, for

Sediment-Contaminant Transport in Rivers and its Application to Pesticide
Transport in Four Mile and Wolf Creeks in Iowa. Battelle, Pacific Northwest
Laboratories, Richland, WA.

Onstad, C.A., and G.R. Foster. 1975. Erosion Modeling on a Watershed, Trans. of
ASAE, 18(2):288-292.

Owens, M., R.W. Edwards, and J.W. Gibbs. 1964. Some Reaearation Studies in
Streams, Intl. Journal of Air and Water Pollution, Vol. 8, p. 469-486.

Partheniades, E. 1962. A Study of Erosion and Deposition of Cohesive Soils in

Salt Water, Ph.D. Thesis, University of California, Berkeley, CA.

Philips, J.R. 1957. The Theory of Infiltration: The Infiltration Equation and
Its Solution, Soil Science, 83:345-375.

Reddy, K.R, R. Khaleel, M.R. Overcash, and P.W. Westerman. 1979. A Nonpoint Source
Model for Land Areas Receiving Animal Wastes: II. Ammonia Volatilization,
Trans. of ASAE, 22(6):1398-1405.

Richman, S. 1958. The Transformation of Energy by Daphnia pulex. Ecolog. Monogr.

Vol. 28, p. 273-291.

Schindler, D.W. 1968. Feeding, Assimilation and Respiration Rates of Daphnia

magna Under Various Environmental Conditions and their Relation to Production
Estimates, Journal of Animal Ecology, Vol. 37, p. 369-385.

Shaffer, M.J., A.D. Halvorson, and F.J. Pierce. 1991. Nitrate Leaching and Economic
Analysis Package (NLEAP): Model Description and Application. In: Managing
Nitrogen for Groundwater Quality and Farm Profitability. R.F. Follett, D.R.
Keeney, and R.M. Cruse (eds.). Soil Science Society of America, Inc.

Smith, J.H., and D.C. Bomberger. 1980. Volatilization from Water, Chapter 7 in
Mill et al., 1980.

Smith, J.H., W.R. Mabey, N. Bohonos, B.R. Holt, S.S. Lee, T.-W. Chou, D.C.
Bomberger, and T. Mill. 1977. Environmental Pathways of Selected Chemicals
in Freshwater Systems, Part I: Background and Experimental Procedures.
Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA, EPA 600/7-77-113.

282
 REFERENCES

Thomann, R.V. 1972. Systems Analysis and Water Quality Management. McGraw-Hill,
Inc., New York, 286p.

Tsivoglou, E.C., and J.R. Wallace. 1972. Characterization of Stream Reaeration

Capacity, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, EPA R3-72-012.

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 1956. Snow Hydrology, Summary Report of the Snow
Investigations, North Pacific Division. Portland, OR, 437p.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1975. Process Design Manual for Nitrogen
Control, Office of Technology Transfer, Washington D.C.

Vanomi, V.A., Editor. 1975. Sedimentation Engineering. Prepared by the ASCE Task
Committee for the Preparation of the Manual on Sedimentation of the
Sedimentation Committee of the Hydraulics Division, New York.

Wezerak, C.G., and J.J. Gannon. 1968. Evaluation of Nitrification in Streams.

ASCE, Journal of the Sanitation Engineering Div., 94(SA5):6159.

Wischmeier, W.H., and D.D. Smith. 1965. Predicting Rainfall Erosion Losses from
Cropland East of the Rocky Mountains. U.S. Department of Agriculture,
Agricultural Handbook No. 282. 47p.

Zepp, R.G. and D.M. Cline. 1977. Rates of Direct Photolysis in Aquatic
Environments, Environmental Science and Technology, 11:359-366.

283
 User's Control Input

PART F

FORMAT FOR THE USER'S CONTROL INPUT

CONTENTS

1.0 General Information and Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

1.1 The Users Control Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
1.2 General Comments on Method of Documentation . . . . . . . . 286

2.0 Format of a TSSMGR Input Set (omitted). . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

3.0 Sample TSSMGR Input Set (omitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

4.0 Format of the Users Control Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

4.1 GLOBAL Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
4.2 FILES Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.3 OPN SEQUENCE Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
4.3.1 Optimization of Operation Sequencing . . . . . . . . . 296
4.4 <Operation-type> Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
4.4(1) PERLND Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
4.4(1).1 General input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
4.4(1).2 Section ATEMP input . . . . . . . . . . . 307
4.4(1).3 Section SNOW input . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
4.4(1).4 Section PWATER input . . . . . . . . . . . 317
4.4(1).5 Section SEDMNT input . . . . . . . . . . . 334
4.4(1).6 Section PSTEMP input . . . . . . . . . . . 342
4.4(1).7 Section PWTGAS input . . . . . . . . . . . 354
4.4(1).8 Section PQUAL input . . . . . . . . . . . 363
4.4(1).9 Section MSTLAY input . . . . . . . . . . . 376
4.4(1).10 Section PEST input . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
4.4(1).11 Section NITR input . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
4.4(1).12 Section PHOS input . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
4.4(1).13 Section TRACER input . . . . . . . . . . . 452
4.4(2) IMPLND Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
4.4(2).1 General input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
4.4(2).2 Section ATEMP input . . . . . . . . . . . 463
4.4(2).3 Section SNOW input . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
4.4(2).4 Section IWATER input . . . . . . . . . . . 463
4.4(2).5 Section SOLIDS input . . . . . . . . . . . 471
4.4(2).6 Section IWTGAS input . . . . . . . . . . . 477
4.4(2).7 Section IQUAL input . . . . . . . . . . . 483

284
 User's Control Input

4.4(3)RCHRES Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

4.4(3).1 General input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
4.4(3).2 Section HYDR input . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
4.4(3).3 Section ADCALC input . . . . . . . . . . . 513
4.4(3).4 Section CONS input . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
4.4(3).5 Section HTRCH input . . . . . . . . . . . 520
4.4(3).6 Section SEDTRN input . . . . . . . . . . . 528
4.4(3).7 Section GQUAL input . . . . . . . . . . . 537
4.4(3).8 Input for RQUAL sections . . . . . . . . . 572
4.4(3).8.1 Section OXRX input . . . . . . 575
4.4(3).8.2 Section NUTRX input . . . . . 586
4.4(3).8.3 Section PLANK input . . . . . 597
4.4(3).8.4 Section PHCARB input . . . . . 609
4.4(11) COPY Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
4.4(12) PLTGEN Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
4.4(13) DISPLY Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
4.4(14) DURANL Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
4.4(15) GENER Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
4.4(16) MUTSIN Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
4.5 FTABLES Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
4.6 Time Series Linkages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
4.7 Time Series Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
4.7.1 Connection of Surface and Instream Modules . . . . . 669
4.7.2 Atmospheric Deposition of Water Quality
Constituents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
4.7(1) Catalog for PERLND Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
4.7(2) Catalog for IMPLND Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
4.7(3) Catalog for RCHRES Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
4.7(11) Catalog for COPY Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
4.7(12) Catalog for PLTGEN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
4.7(13) Catalog for the DISPLY Module. . . . . . . . . . . . 723
4.7(14) Catalog for the DURANL Module. . . . . . . . . . . . 724
4.7(15) Catalog for the GENER Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
4.7(16) Catalog for the MUTSIN Module. . . . . . . . . . . . 726
4.8 FORMATS Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
4.9 Sequential and PLTGEN/MUTSIN File Formats . . . . . . . . . 728
4.10 SPEC-ACTIONS Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
4.11 MONTH-DATA Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
4.12 CATEGORY Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

FIGURES

Number Page

4.7(1)-1 Groups of time series associated with the PERLND module . . 673
4.7(2)-1 Groups of time series associated with the IMPLND module . . 693
4.7(3)-1 Groups of time series associated with the RCHRES module . . 700

285
 User's Control Input

1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION AND CONVENTIONS

1.1 The User's Control Input

The User's Control Input (UCI) consists of text lines limited to 80 characters.
A general feature of the UCI is that the lines are collected into groups.
Groups may contain subordinate groups; that is, they may be nested. In every
case, a group commences with a heading (such as RUN) and ends with a delimiter
(such as END RUN).

The HSPF system will ignore any line in the UCI which contains three or more
consecutive asterisks (***), just as a computer language compiler bypasses
comments in a source program. Blank lines are also ignored. This feature can
be used to insert headings and comments which make the text more intelligible to
the reader, but are not required or read by the HSPF system itself.

The body of the User's Control Input consists of one or more major groups of
text, called RUN input sets:

<RUN input set 1>

<RUN input set 2>
-----
-----

A RUN input set contains all the input needed to perform a single RUN. A RUN is
a set of operations with a common START date-time and END date-time.

1.2 General Comments on Method of Documentation

The documentation of each portion of the UCI is divided into three sections:
"layout", "details", and "explanation".

The "layout" section shows how the input is arranged. Text always appearing in
the same form (e.g., RUN) is shown in upper case. Text which varies from job to
job is shown by lower case symbols enclosed in angle brackets (<spa>). Lines
containing illustrative text, not actually required by the system, have three
consecutive asterisks, just as they might have in the UCI. Optional material,
or that which is not always required, is enclosed in brackets []. The column
numbers printed at the head of each layout show the starting location of each
keyword and symbol.

The "details" section describes the input values required for each symbol
appearing in the layout. The Fortran identifiers used to store the value(s) in
the code are given, followed by the format. The field(s) specified in this
format start in the column containing the < which immediately precedes the
symbol in the layout. For example, < range >, which consists of the starting
and ending operations that the current line applies to, starts in column 1 and
ends in column 10. Where relevant, the Details section also indicates default
values and minimum and maximum values for each item in the UCI.

286
 User's Control Input

The "explanation" section contains any necessary explanatory material which

could not fit into the details section.

287
 User's Control Input

2.0 FORMAT OF A TSSMGR DATA SET (omitted)

Note: the TSSMGR module and all other TSS functionality is no longer documented
or maintained; refer to Version 10 (or earlier) documentation for details.

3.0 SAMPLE TSSMGR INPUT SET (omitted)

288
 RUN Input Set

4.0 FORMAT OF THE USERS CONTROL INPUT

Summary

The User's Control Input starts with a RUN heading and ends with an END RUN
delimiter. The body of the text consists of several groups, called "blocks,"
which may appear in any sequence:

RUN

GLOBAL Block

Contains information of a global nature. It applies to every

operation in the RUN.

FILES Block

Specifies disk files to be used by the run and their file unit
numbers.

OPN SEQUENCE Block

Specifies the operations to be performed in the RUN, in the sequence

they will be executed. It indicates any grouping (INGROUPs).

<Operation-type> Block

Deals with data pertaining to all the operations of the same

<Operation-type>, for example, parameters and initial conditions for
all Pervious Land-segments in a RUN. It is not concerned with
relationships between operations, or with external sources or targets
for time series. There is one <Operation-type> Block for each
<operation-type> involved in the RUN.

[FTABLES Block]

A collection of function tables (FTABLES). A function table is used

to document, in discrete numerical form, a functional relationship
between two or more variables. FTABLES are used to specify the depth-
volume-discharge relationship for RCHRES operations.

[EXT SOURCES Block]

Specifies time series which are input to the operations from external
sources (WDM file, DSS file, or sequential (SEQ) files).

[NETWORK Block]

Specifies any time series which are passed between operations.

289
 RUN Input Set

[EXT TARGETS Block]

Specifies those time series which are output from operations to

external destinations (WDM or DSS file).

[SCHEMATIC Block]

Specifies structure of watershed, i.e., connections of land segments

and stream reaches to each other. Operates in tandem with MASS-LINK
block to simplify definition of complex watersheds.

[MASS-LINK Block]

Specifies groups of time series to combine with network connections

defined in the SCHEMATIC block in order to specify mass flows in the
watershed.

[MONTH-DATA Block]

Specifies monthly values of atmospheric deposition fluxes and

concentrations (in rain) for water quality constituents.

[CATEGORIES Block]

Specifies the number of water categories to be simulated in the

streams and reservoirs represented by RCHRES operations.

[PATHNAMES Block]

Associates DSS pathnames with data-set ID numbers for all DSS data
sets in the EXT SOURCES and EXT TARGETS blocks.

[FORMATS Block]

Contains any user-supplied formats which may be required to read time

series on external sequential (SEQ) files.

[SPEC-ACTIONS Block]

Specifies operation, variable location, type or name, date/time and

action code in order to change a variable's value during a run.

END RUN

Usually, a User's Control Input will not include all of the above blocks. Their
presence will be dictated by the operations performed in the RUN and the options
which are selected.

290
 GLOBAL Block

4.1 GLOBAL Block

This block must always be present in a RUN input set.

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
GLOBAL
<------------------------------- run-info ---------------------------------->
START <---s-date-time----> END<---e-date-time---->
RUN INTERP OUTPT LEVELS<lev><spa>
RESUME <res> RUN <run> UNITS <ufg>
END GLOBAL

********************************************************************************
Example
*******

GLOBAL
Seven Mile River - Water quality run
START 1980/01/01 00:00 END 1987/12/31 12:00
RUN INTERP OUTPT LEVELS 4 3
RESUME 0 RUN 1 UNITS 1
END GLOBAL
********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<run-info> RUNINF(20) A78 none none none
<s-date-time> SYR, I8, none 1 32767
SMO, 1X,I2, 1 1 12
SDA, 1X,I2, 1 1 varies
SHR, 1X,I2, 0 0 23
SMI 1X,I2 0 0 59
<e-date-time> EYR, I8, none 1 32767
EMO, 1X,I2, 12 1 12
EDA, 1X,I2, varies 1 varies
EHR, 1X,I2, #24 0 24 #only if EMI is 0
EMI 1X,I2 0 0 59
<lev> OUTLEV I5 0 0 10
<spa> SPOUT I5 2 0 10
<res> RESMFG I5 0 0 1
<run> RUNFG I5 0 0 1
<ufg> EMFG I5 1 1 2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

291
 GLOBAL Block

Explanation

RUNINF stores the users title/comments regarding the RUN.

Users conventionally label the same point in time differently, depending whether
they are looking forward or backward towards it. For example, if we say that a
RUN starts on 1978/05 we mean that it commences at the start of May 1978. On
the other hand, if we say it ends on 1978/05 we mean it terminates at the end of
May 1978. Thus, HSPF has two separate conventions for the external labeling of
time. When supplying values for a date/time field a user may omit any element in
the field except the year, which must be supplied as a 4 digit figure. HSPF will
substitute the defaults given above for any blank or zero values. The completed
starting and ending date/time fields are translated into another format, which
is the only one used to label intervals and time points internally. It has a
resolution of 1 minute. Thus, time is recorded as a year/month/day/hour/minute
set, to completely specify either a time interval or point. The date/time used
by the internal clock uses the "contained within" principle. For example, the
first minute in an hour is numbered 1 (not 0) and the last is numbered 60 (not
59). The same applies to the numbering of hours. Thus, the time conventionally
labeled 11:15 is in the 12th hour of the day so is labeled 12:15 internally; the
last minute of 1978 is labeled 1978/12/31 24:60. This convention is extended to
the labeling of points by labeling it with the minute that immediately precedes
it. Thus, midnight New Year's eve 1978/1979 is 1978/12/31 24:60, not 1979/01/01
00:00. This gives a system for uniquely labeling each point internally.

OUTLEV is a flag which governs the quantity of informative output produced by

the Run Interpreter. A value of 0 results in minimal output; 10 results in very
detailed output useful primarily for debugging the software. A value of 3 or 4
is appropriate for most runs. OUTLEV does not affect error or warning messages.

SPOUT is a flag that governs the quantity of output produced in the Run
Interpreter Output file whenever a Special Action is performed during the
simulation. A value of 1 results in minimal output, and a value of 10 results
in maximum output.

RESMFG represents a feature that is not supported in this version of HSPF. It

should be set to 0.

If RUNFG is 1, the system will both interpret the input and execute the RUN. If
it is 0, only the interpretation will be done.

EMFG is the UCI units system flag for all simulation operations (i.e., PERLND,
IMPLND and RCHRES operations). If EMFG is 1, all input values in the UCI file
will be interpreted using the English units defined in the tables in this
section (Part F) of this manual. If EMFG is 2, Metric units are assumed for UCI
values.

292
 FILES Block

4.2 FILES Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
FILES
<ftyp> <un#> <-------filename----------------------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all files are specified)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END FILES

*******
Example
*******

FILES
<FTYP> UNIT# FILE NAME ***
WDM1 24 test.wdm
MESSU 21 test.mes
61 test.dsp
33 test.pls
END FILES

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Comment
Name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

<ftyp> FTYPE A6 File type; valid values are: MESSU,

WDM, WDM1, WDM2, WDM3, WDM4, DSS1,
DSS2, DSS3, DSS4, DSS5, PLTGEN
(for VAX only), and blank (" ").

<un#> FUNIT I5 File unit number; valid values are 1-99

(21-99 recommended).

<filename> FNAME A64 File name; complete path name or local

name if in default/current directory.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

293
 FILES Block

Explanation

The FILES Block contains the names of input and output files used by the program
during the run; this block associates the unit numbers specified in various parts
of the UCI file with actual disk file names. It is designed to eliminate the need
for a separate command file, such as a DOS batch (BAT) file or VAX command (COM)
file, where the correspondence between file name and unit number is often performed
for batch programs such as HSPF. Since the FILES Block requires that the program
be able to locate the UCI file, HSPF prompts the user for its name. Alternatively,
on DOS-based PCs, the command line for invoking HSPF may include the name of the
UCI file. The syntax is as follows:

hspf uci-file-name <RET>

FTYPE is a keyword that identifies the type of file. There are twelve FTYPE's that
HSPF recognizes, and FTYPE must be specified for these types of files. Note,
however, that the WDM and WDM1 keywords are synonymous, and should not appear
together in the same FILES block. For all other files, this field should be left
blank. The FTYPE keyword should be left-justified in columns one through six. The
valid FTYPE values are shown below:

DESCRIPTION FTYPE

Run interpreter output MESSU

Watershed Data Management WDM, WDM1, WDM2, WDM3, WDM4
HEC Data Storage System files DSS1, DSS2, DSS3, DSS4, DSS5
VAX (only) PLTGEN output file PLTGEN
Other input and output files (blank)

FUNIT is the file unit number of the file. This corresponds to the unit number of
those files specified in other parts of the UCI file. FUNIT is an integer value
that should be right-justified in columns 9 through 13; valid values are 1-99.
Each value of FUNIT in the FILES Block should be unique, and the values 7 and 9 are
reserved for internal scratch files. Preferably, values of 21 and greater should
be used to avoid any conflicts.

FNAME is the name of the file. If the file is not in the current (default)
directory, the complete path name should be specified. FNAME should be left-
justified in columns 17 through 80.

The FILES Block is usually required. In particular, if a WDM or DSS file is needed
by the run, it must be specified in the FILES Block, since the program does not
have a default name for these files.

294
 FILES Block

Similarly, for the operating modules (PERLND, IMPLND, RCHRES, DISPLY, PLTGEN,
DURANL, and MUTSIN), and sequential (SEQ) time series input, the user must specify
file unit numbers as the destination for printout (or source for MUTSIN or
sequential time series input). Also, it is recommended that these files be
explicitly assigned names in the FILES Block. However, if the user does not
include an entry in the FILES block for one of these operations, a file is
automatically opened by HSPF with the default name "hspfxx.dat", where xx is the
unit number (except for the MESSU file, which defaults to "hspfecho.out").

295
 OPN SEQUENCE Block

4.3 OPN SEQUENCE Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
OPN SEQUENCE
[INGRP INDELT <idt>]
<-opn-id----->
. . . . . . .
<-opn-id----->
[END INGRP ]
<-opn-id-----> INDELT <idt>
. . . . . . .
<-opn-id-----> INDELT <idt>
[INGRP INDELT <idt>]
<-opn-id----->
. . . . . . .
[END INGRP ]
. . . . . .
END OPN SEQUENCE

*******
Example
*******
OPN SEQUENCE
INGRP INDELT 02:00
PERLND 20
PERLND 21
PERLND 22
END INGRP
RCHRES 1 INDELT 12:00
END OPN SEQUENCE
********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Comment
Name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<idt> HRMIN(2) I2,1X,I2 Time interval (hour:min) used in the
INPAD e.g., 00:05

<-opn-id-> OPTYP,OPTNO A6,5X,I3 Type and number of this operation.

e.g., RCHRES 100
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

296
 OPN SEQUENCE Block

Explanation

This block specifies the various operations to be performed in the RUN and,
optionally, their grouping into INGROUPs. The operations will be performed in the
sequence specified in the block, apart from repetition implied by grouping. A
maximum of 200 operations can be specified in one run.

Every <-opn-id-> consists of OPTYP and OPTNO. The OPTYP field must contain an
identifier of up to 6 characters which corresponds to one of the operating module
identifiers in the HSPF system. The OPTNO field contains an integer which
distinguishes operations of the same type from one another. Every <opn-id> (OPTYP
plus OPTNO) must be unique.

The time intervals of the INGROUPs (or the RUN) are specified in this block. These
appear on the INGROUP lines, except where the user has not placed an operation in
an INGROUP. In that case <idt> is specified alongside <-opn-id->.

4.3.1 Optimization of Operation Sequencing

The sequence of operations within the Operations Sequence block should be optimized
to make most efficient use of the internal scratch pad (INPAD). Optimal use of the
INPAD is accomplished by reducing the maximum number of time series (rows) on the
INPAD. This increases the length of each row and the INSPAN, which reduces
swapping between operations.

A time series occupies a row on the INPAD from the moment it is either read from
an external source or is created by an operation until the moment it is used by the
last operation requiring it. HSPF automatically optimizes the reading of data from
external sources and writing of data to external targets.

Optimal sequencing of operations requires that an operation be executed as soon as

all input timeseries produced by other operations have been created. For example,
a DISPLY operation which displays outflow from a PERLND operation should
immediately follow the PERLND operation. A RCHRES operation representing a section
of stream should immediately follow any RCHRES operations representing reaches
upstream and any PERLND operations which contribute local inflow.

For example, a watershed is represented by 4 PERLND operations, 5 RCHRES

operations, 2 PLTGEN operations, 4 DISPLY operations, and 1 DURANL operation.
These are defined as follows:

297
 OPN SEQUENCE Block

PERLND 1 - rain gage 1, land use of pasture

PERLND 2 - rain gage 1, land use of corn
PERLND 3 - rain gage 2, land use of pasture
PERLND 4 - rain gage 2, land use of corn
RCHRES 1 - local inflow from PERLND 1 and 2
RCHRES 2 - upstream inflow from RCHRES 1, local inflow from PERLND 1 and 2
RCHRES 3 - local inflow from PERLND 3 and 4
RCHRES 4 - upstream inflow from RCHRES 2 and 3, local inflow from
PERLND 3 and 4
RCHRES 5 - upstream inflow from RCHRES 4, local inflow from PERLND 3 and 4
DISPLY 1 - outflow from RCHRES 5
DISPLY 2 - outflow from RCHRES 3
DISPLY 3 - unit flow from PERLND 2
DISPLY 4 - unit flow from PERLND 4
PLTGEN 1 - outflow from RCHRES 5, measured flow at bottom of RCHRES 5
PLTGEN 2 - outflow from RCHRES 1, area weighted sum of unit flow from
PERLND 1 and 2
DURANL 1 - outflow from RCHRES 5

The optimum order for these operations is:

PERLND 1
PERLND 2
DISPLY 3
RCHRES 1
PLTGEN 2
RCHRES 2
PERLND 3
PERLND 4
DISPLY 4
RCHRES 3
DISPLY 2
RCHRES 4
RCHRES 5
DISPLY 1
DURANL 1
PLTGEN 1

298
 Operation-type Block

4.4 <Operation-type> Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

<otyp>
General input
Section 1 input --
Section 2 input | Only supplied if the operating module contains sections
. | and the section is active
. |
Section N input --
END <otyp>

********************************************************************************

Details

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Comment
Name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

<otyp> OPTYP A6 Type of operation covered in this

block, e.g., RCHRES, PERLND

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This type of block deals with data which pertain to all operations of the same
<Operation-type>, e.g., the parameters and initial conditions for all the Pervious
Land segments in a RUN. It is not concerned with relationships between operations
or with external sources or targets for time series.

This type of block provides for general input and for input which is specific to
individual sections of the operating module. The latter only apply to modules
which are sectioned (PERLND, IMPLND, and RCHRES). The general input contains all
of the information which simple (non-sectioned) modules require; for sectioned
modules it contains input which is not specific to any one section.

The general organization of the <Operation-type> blocks is as follows:

299
 Operation-type Block

The user supplies his input in a set of tables (e.g., ACTIVITY, Sect 4.4(1).1.1
below). Each table has a name (eg. ACTIVITY), called the "Table-type". A table
starts with the heading <Table-type> and ends with the delimiter END <Table-type>.
The body of the table consists of:

<range><------------values-------------------------->

where <range> is the range of operation-type numbers to which the <values> apply.
If the second field in <range> is blank, the range is assumed to consist of a
single operation. Thus, in the example in Sect 4.4(1).1.1, Pervious Land-segments
(PERLNDs) 1 through 7 have the same set of active sections, while PERLND 9 has a
different set.

Thus, a table lists the values given to a specified set of variables (occupying
only 1 line) for all the operations of a given type. The input was designed this
way to minimize the quantity of data supplied when many operations have the same
values for certain sets of input.

HSPF will only look for a given Table-type if the options already specified by the
user require data contained within it. Thus, Table-type MON-INTERCEP (Sect
4.4(1).4.6) is relevant only if VCSFG in Table-type PWAT-PARM1 (4.4(1).4.1) is set
to 1 for one or more PERLNDs. The system has been designed to ignore redundant
information. Thus, if VCSFG is 0 and Table-type MON-INTERCEP is supplied, the table
will be ignored.

On the other hand, if an expected value is not supplied, the system will attempt
to use a default value. This situation can arise in one of three ways:

1. The entire table may be missing from the UCI.

2. The table may be present but not contain an entry (line) for the operation
in question. The example in Sect 4.4(1).1.1 has no entry for PLS No. 8.
Thus, all values in its active sections vector will have the default of 0.

3. A field may be left blank. In the example in Section 4.4(1).4.2, KVARY will
acquire the default value 0.0 for PLS's 1 through 7.

When appropriate, the HSPF system will also check that a value supplied by the user
alls within an allowable range. If it does not, an error message is generated.

Note that a table contains either integers or real values, but generally not both.
For example, Table-type ACTIVITY (Sect 4.4(1).1.1) contains only integer flags,
while Table-type PWAT-PARM2 (4.4(1).4.2) contains only real numbers. For tables
containing real-valued data, the documentation gives separate defaults, minima and
maxima for the English and Metric unit systems. The user specifies the units
system for the UCI in the GLOBAL block.

300
 PERLND Block

4.4(1) PERLND Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PERLND
General input
[section ATEMP input]
[section SNOW input]
[section PWATER input]
[section SEDMNT input]
[section PSTEMP input]
[section PWTGAS input]
[section PQUAL input]
[section MSTLAY input]
[section PEST input]
[section NITR input]
[section PHOS input]
[section TRACER input]
END PERLND

********************************************************************************

Explanation

This block contains the data which are domestic to all the Pervious Land Segments
in the RUN. The general input is always relevant: other input is only required
if the module section concerned is active.

301
 PERLND -- General Input

4.4(1).1 PERLND BLOCK -- General input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

Table-type ACTIVITY
[Table-type PRINT-INFO]
Table-type GEN-INFO

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.

Tables enclosed in brackets [] above are not always required; for example, because
all the values can be defaulted.

302
 PERLND -- General Input

4.4(1).1.1 Table-type ACTIVITY -- Active Sections Vector

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

ACTIVITY
<-range><-----------------a-s-vector------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END ACTIVITY

*******
Example
*******

ACTIVITY
<PLS > Active Sections ***
# - # ATMP SNOW PWAT SED PST PWG PQAL MSTL PEST NITR PHOS TRAC***
1 7 1 1 1
9 0 0 0 1
END ACTIVITY

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<a-s-vector> ASVEC(12) 12I5 0 0 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

The PERLND module is divided into 12 sections. The values supplied in this table
specify which sections are active and which are not, for each operation involving
the PERLND module. A value of 0 means inactive and 1 means active. Any meaningful
subset of sections may be active.

303
 PERLND -- General Input

4.4(1).1.2 Table-type PRINT-INFO -- Printout information for PERLND

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PRINT-INFO
<-range><-----------------------print-flags------------------------><piv><pyr>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PRINT-INFO

*******
Example
*******

PRINT-INFO
<PLS > ********************* Print-flags ************************* PIVL PYR
# - # ATMP SNOW PWAT SED PST PWG PQAL MSTL PEST NITR PHOS TRAC *********
1 7 2 4 6 4 3 2 10 12
END PRINT-INFO

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<print-flags> PFLAG(12) 12I5 4 2 6

<piv> PIVL I5 1 1 1440

<pyr> PYREND I5 9 1 12
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

304
 PERLND -- General Input

Explanation

HSPF permits the user to vary the printout level (maximum frequency) for the
various active sections of an operation. The meaning of each permissible value for
PFLAG() is:

2 means every PIVL intervals

3 means every day
4 means every month
5 means every year
6 means never

In the example above, output from Pervious Land-segments 1 thru 7 will occur as
follows:

Section Maximum frequency

ATEMP 10 intervals
SNOW month
PWATER never
SEDMNT --
thru | month (defaulted)
PEST --
NITR month
PHOS day
TRACER 10 intervals

A value need only be supplied for PIVL if one or more sections have a printout
level of 2. For those sections, printout will occur every PIVL intervals (that is,
every PIVL*DELT minutes, where DELT is the number of minutes in the time step or
the RUN or INGROUP). PIVL must be chosen such that there are an integer number of
printout periods in a day.

HSPF will automatically provide printed output at all standard intervals greater
than the specified interval. In the above example, output for section PHOS will
be printed at the end of each day, month, and year.

PYREND is the calendar month which will terminate the year for printout purposes.
Thus, the annual summary can reflect the situation over the past water year or the
past calendar year, etc.

305
 PERLND -- General Input

4.4(1).1.3 Table-type GEN-INFO -- Other general information for PERLND

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GEN-INFO
<-range><---PLS-id---------> <unit-sys><-printu->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GEN-INFO

*******
Example
*******

GEN-INFO
<PLS > PLS Name Units Printout ***
# - # t-series Engl Metr ***
in out ***
1 Yosemite Valley 1 1 23 24
2 Kings river 1 1 23 24
END GEN-INFO

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<PLS-id> LSID(5) 5A4 none none none

<unit-sys> IUNITS,OUNITS 2I5 1 1 2

<printu> PUNIT(2) 2I5 0 0 99

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

306
 PERLND -- General Input

Explanation

Any string of up to 20 characters may be supplied as the identifier (LSID) for a

PERLND.

The values supplied for <unit-sys> indicate the system of units for data in the
input time series and output time series, respectively: 1 means English units, 2
means Metric units.

Note: All operations in the run must use the same units system for data in the UCI
file; therefore, this system of units is specified by EMFG in the GLOBAL block.

The values supplied for PUNIT(*) indicate the destinations (files) of printout in
English and metric units, respectively. A value of 0 means no printout is required
in that unit system. A non-zero value means printout is required in that system,
and the value is the unit number of the file to which printout is to be written.
The unit number is associated with a filename in the FILES BLOCK.

Note that printout for each Impervious Land Segment can be obtained in either the
English or Metric systems, or both (irrespective of the system used to supply the
inputs).

307
 PERLND -- Section ATEMP Input

4.4(1).2 PERLND BLOCK -- Section ATEMP input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type ATEMP-DAT]

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of the table mentioned above is detailed in the documentation
which follows.

Tables enclosed in brackets [] above are not always required; for example, because
all the values can be defaulted.

308
 PERLND -- Section ATEMP Input

4.4(1).2.1 Table-type ATEMP-DAT -- Elevation difference between gage & PLS

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

ATEMP-DAT
<-range><el-diff-><-airtmp->
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END ATEMP-DAT

*******
Example
*******

ATEMP-DAT
<PLS > El-diff ***
# - # (ft) ***
1 7 150.
END ATEMP-DAT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<el-diff> ELDAT F10.0 0.0 none none ft Engl
0.0 none none m Metric

<airtmp> AIRTMP F10.0 60 -60 140 Deg F Engl

15 -50 60 Deg C Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

ELDAT is the difference in elevation between the temperature gage and the PERLND;
it is used to estimate the temperature over the segment by application of a lapse
rate. ELDAT is positive if the segment is higher than the gage, and vice versa.

AIRTMP is the air temperature over the land segment at the start of the RUN.

309
 PERLND -- Section SNOW Input

4.4(1).3 PERLND BLOCK -- Section SNOW input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type ICE-FLAG]
Table-type SNOW-PARM1
[Table-type SNOW-PARM2]
[Table-type SNOW-INIT1]
[Table-type SNOW-INIT2]

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.

Tables enclosed in brackets [] above are not always required; for example, because
all the values can be defaulted.

310
 PERLND -- Section SNOW Input

4.4(1).3.1 Table-type ICE-FLAG -- governs simulation of ice formation in snow

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

ICE-FLAG
<-range><ice>
. . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . .
END ICE-FLAG

*******
Example
*******

ICE-FLAG
<PLS > Ice- ***
# - # flag ***
1 7 1
END ICE-FLAG

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ice> ICEFG I5 0 0 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

A value of 0 means ice formation in the snow pack will not be simulated; 1 means
it will.

311
 PERLND -- Section SNOW Input

4.4(1).3.2 Table-type SNOW-PARM1 -- First group of SNOW parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SNOW-PARM1
<-range><----------------snowparm1----------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SNOW-PARM1

*******
Example
*******

SNOW-PARM1
<PLS > Latitude Mean- SHADE SNOWCF COVIND ***
# - # elev ***
1 7 39.5 3900. 0.3 1.2 10.
END SNOW-PARM1

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<snowparm1> LAT 5F10.0 40.0 -90.0 90.0 degrees Both

MELEV 0.0 0.0 30000.0 ft Engl

0.0 0.0 10000.0 m Metric

SHADE 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both

SNOWCF none 1.0 100.0 none Both

COVIND none 0.01 none in Engl

none 0.25 none mm Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

312
 PERLND -- Section SNOW Input

Explanation

LAT is the latitude of the pervious land segment (PLS). It is positive for the
northern hemisphere, and negative for the southern hemisphere.

MELEV is the mean elevation of the PLS above sea level.

SHADE is the fraction of the PLS which is shaded from solar radiation, by trees for
example.

SNOWCF is the factor by which the input precipitation data will be multiplied, if
the simulation indicates it is snowfall, to account for poor catch efficiency of
the gage under snow conditions.

COVIND is the maximum snowpack (water equivalent) at which the entire PLS will be
covered with snow (see SNOW section in Functional Description).

4.4(1).3.3 Table-type SNOW-PARM2 -- Second group of SNOW parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SNOW-PARM2
<-range><--------------------snowparm2----------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SNOW-PARM2

*******
Example
*******

SNOW-PARM2
<PLS > ***
# - # RDCSN TSNOW SNOEVP CCFACT MWATER MGMELT ***
1 7 0.2 33.
END SNOW-PARM2

********************************************************************************

313
 PERLND -- Section SNOW Input

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<snowparm2> RDCSN F10.0 0.15 0.01 1.0 none Both

TSNOW F10.0 32.0 30.0 40.0 degF Engl

0.0 -1.0 5.0 degC Metric

SNOEVP F10.0 0.1 0.0 1.0 none Both

CCFACT F10.0 1.0 0.0 2.0 none Both

MWATER F10.0 0.03 0.0 1.0 none Both

MGMELT F10.0 0.01 0.0 1.0 in/day Engl

0.25 0.0 25. mm/day Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

RDCSN is the density of cold, new snow relative to water. This value applies to
snow falling at air temperatures lower than or equal to 0 degrees F. At higher
temperatures the density of snow is adjusted.

TSNOW is the air temperature below which precipitation will be snow, under
saturated conditions. Under non-saturated conditions the temperature is adjusted
slightly.

SNOEVP is a parameter which adapts the snow evaporation (sublimation) equation to

field conditions.

CCFACT is a parameter which adapts the snow condensation/convection melt equation

to field conditions.

MWATER is the maximum water content of the snow pack, in depth of water per depth
of water.

MGMELT is the maximum rate of snowmelt by ground heat, in depth of water per day.
This is the value which applies when the pack temperature is at the freezing point.

314
 PERLND -- Section SNOW Input

4.4(1).3.4 Table-type SNOW-INIT1 -- First group of initial values for SNOW

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SNOW-INIT1
<-range><-------------------snowinit1------------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SNOW-INIT1

*******
Example
*******

SNOW-INIT1
<PLS > ***
# - # Pack-snow Pack-ice Pack-watr RDENPF DULL PAKTMP***
1 7 2.1 .02 .40
END SNOW-INIT1

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<snowinit1> Pack-snow F10.0 0.0 0.0 none in Engl
0.0 0.0 none mm Metric

Pack-ice F10.0 0.0 0.0 none in Engl

0.0 0.0 none mm Metric

Pack-watr F10.0 0.0 0.0 none in Engl

0.0 0.0 none mm Metric

RDENPF F10.0 0.2 .01 1.0 none Both

DULL F10.0 400. 0.0 800. none Both

PAKTMP F10.0 32. none 32. degF Engl

0.0 none 0.0 degC Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

315
 PERLND -- Section SNOW Input

Explanation

Pack-snow is the quantity of snow in the pack (water equivalent).

Pack-ice is the quantity of ice in the pack (water equivalent).

Pack-watr is the quantity of liquid water in the pack.

RDENPF is the density of the frozen contents (snow and ice) of the pack, relative
to water.

DULL is an index to the dullness of the snow pack surface, from which albedo is
estimated.

PAKTMP is the mean temperature of the frozen contents of the snow pack.

316
 PERLND -- Section SNOW Input

4.4(1).3.5 Table-type SNOW-INIT2 -- Second group of initial values for SNOW

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
SNOW-INIT2
<-range><--------snowinit2----------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SNOW-INIT2

*******
Example
*******
SNOW-INIT2
<PLS > ***
# - # COVINX XLNMLT SKYCLR***
1 7 0.50
END SNOW-INIT2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<snowinit2> COVINX F10.0 0.01 0.01 none in Engl
0.25 0.25 none mm Metric

XLNMLT F10.0 0.0 0.0 none in Engl

0.0 0.0 none mm Metric

SKYCLR F10.0 1.0 .15 1.0 none Both

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

COVINX is the current snow pack depth (water equivalent) required to obtain
complete areal coverage of the PLS. If the pack is less than this amount, areal
cover is prorated (PACKF/COVINX).

XLNMLT is the current remaining possible increment to ice storage in the pack (see
Functional Description). It is relevant if ice formation is simulated (ICEFG= 1).

SKYCLR is the fraction of sky which is assumed to be clear at the present time.

317
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

4.4(1).4 PERLND BLOCK -- Section PWATER input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type PWAT-PARM1]
Table-type PWAT-PARM2
[Table-type PWAT-PARM3]
Table-type PWAT-PARM4
[Table-type PWAT-PARM5]
[Table-type MON-INTERCEP] --
[Table-type MON-UZSN] |
[Table-type MON-MANNING] | only required if the relevant quantity
[Table-type MON-INTERFLW] | varies through the year
[Table-type MON-IRC] |
[Table-type MON-LZETPARM] --
[Table-type PWAT-STATE1 ]

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.

Tables enclosed in brackets [] above are not always required; for example, because
all the values can be defaulted.

318
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

4.4(1).4.1 Table-type PWAT-PARM1 -- First group of PWATER parameters (flags)

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PWAT-PARM1
<-range><--------------pwatparm1------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PWAT-PARM1

*******
Example
*******

PWAT-PARM1
<PLS > Flags ***
# - # CSNO RTOP UZFG VCS VUZ VNN VIFW VIRC VLE IFFC ***
1 7 1 1
END PWAT-PARM1

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<pwatparm1> CSNOFG I5 0 0 1
RTOPFG I5 0 0 1
UZFG I5 0 0 1
VCSFG I5 0 0 1
VUZFG I5 0 0 1
VNNFG I5 0 0 1
VIFWFG I5 0 0 1
VIRCFG I5 0 0 1
VLEFG I5 0 0 1
IFFCFG I5 1 1 2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

319
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

Explanation

If CSNOFG is 1, section PWATER assumes that snow accumulation and melt is being
considered. It will, therefore, expect that the time series produced by section
SNOW are available, either internally (produced in this RUN) or from external
sources (e.g., produced in a previous RUN). If CSNOFG is 0, no such time series
are expected. See the Functional Description for further information.

RTOPFG is a flag that selects the algorithm for computing overland flow. Two
optional methods are provided. If RTOPFG is 1, routing of overland flow is done in
the same way as in the predecessor models HSPX, ARM and NPS. A value of 0 results
in a different algorithm (see Functional Description for details).

UZFG selects the method for computing inflow to the upper zone. If UZFG is 1,
upper zone inflow is computed in the same way as in the predecessor models HSPX,
ARM and NPS. A value of 0 results in the use of a different algorithm, which is
less sensitive to changes in DELT (see functional description).

The flags beginning with "V" indicate whether or not certain parameters will be
assumed to vary through the year on a monthly basis: 1 means they do vary, 0 means
they do not. The quantities which can vary on a monthly basis are:

VCSFG interception storage capacity

VUZFG upper zone nominal storage
VNNFG Manning's n for the overland flow plane
VIFWFG interflow inflow parameter
VIRCFG interflow recession constant
VLEFG lower zone evapotranspiration (E-T) parameter

If any of these flags are on (1), monthly values for the parameter concerned must
be supplied (see Table-types MON-xxx, documented later in this section).

If IFFCFG is 1, then the effect of frozen ground on infiltration rate is computed

from the amount of ice in the snow pack (PACKI). CSNOFG must be turned on, and if
section SNOW does not compute PACKI (because ICEFG is off or the section is
inactive) PACKI must be supplied as an input time series. If IFFCFG is 2, then the
infiltration adjustment factor is determined from the soil temperature in the lower
layer/groundwater layer, which is either computed in section PSTEMP or must be
supplied as an input time series. (See Table-type PWAT-PARM5 for more details.)

320
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

4.4(1).4.2 Table-type PWAT-PARM2 -- Second group of PWATER parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PWAT-PARM2
<-range><--------------------------pwatparm2--------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PWAT-PARM2

*******
Example
*******

PWAT-PARM2
<PLS > ***
# - # ***FOREST LZSN INFILT LSUR SLSUR KVARY AGWRC
1 7 0.2 8.0 0.7 400. .001 .98
END PWAT-PARM2

********************************************************************************

321
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

Details

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<pwatparm2> FOREST F10.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both

LZSN F10.0 none .01 100. in Engl

none .25 2500. mm Metric

INFILT F10.0 none 0.0001 100. in/hr Engl

none 0.0025 2500. mm/hr Metric

LSUR F10.0 none 1.0 none ft Engl

none 0.3 none m Metric

SLSUR F10.0 none .000001 10. none Both

KVARY F10.0 0.0 0.0 none 1/in Engl

0.0 0.0 none 1/mm Metric

AGWRC F10.0 none 0.001 0.999 1/day Both

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

FOREST is the fraction of the PLS which is covered by forest, and which will
therefore continue to transpire in winter. This is only relevant if snow is being
considered (i.e., CSNOFG = 1).

LZSN is the lower zone nominal storage.

INFILT is an index to the infiltration capacity of the soil.

LSUR is the length of the assumed overland flow plane.

SLSUR is the slope of the overland flow plane.

KVARY is a parameter which affects the behavior of groundwater recession flow,

enabling it to be non-exponential in its decay with time.

AGWRC is the basic groundwater recession rate if KVARY is zero and there is no
inflow to groundwater; AGWRC is defined as the rate of flow today divided by the
rate of flow yesterday.

322
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

4.4(1).4.3 Table-type PWAT-PARM3 -- Third group of PWATER parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PWAT-PARM3
<-range><------------------------pwatparm3----------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PWAT-PARM3

*******
Example
*******
PWAT-PARM3
<PLS >***
# - #*** PETMAX PETMIN INFEXP INFILD DEEPFR BASETP AGWETP
1 7
9 39 33 3.0 1.5
END PWAT-PARM3

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<pwatparm3> PETMAX F10.0 40. none none degF Engl
4.4 none none degC Metric

PETMIN F10.0 35. none none degF Engl

1.7 none none degC Metric

INFEXP F10.0 2.0 0.0 10.0 none Both

INFILD F10.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 none Both

DEEPFR F10.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both

BASETP F10.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both

AGWETP F10.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

323
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

Explanation

PETMAX is the air temperature below which E-T will arbitrarily be reduced below the
value obtained from the input time series, and PETMIN is the temperature below
which E-T will be zero regardless of the value in the input time series. These
values are only used if snow is being considered (CSNOFG= 1).

INFEXP is the exponent in the infiltration equation, and INFILD is the ratio
between the maximum and mean infiltration capacities over the PLS.

DEEPFR is the fraction of groundwater inflow which will enter deep (inactive)
groundwater, and, thus, be lost from the system as it is defined in HSPF.

BASETP is the fraction of remaining potential E-T which can be satisfied from
baseflow (groundwater outflow), if enough is available.

AGWETP is the fraction of remaining potential E-T which can be satisfied from
active groundwater storage if enough is available.

4.4(1).4.4 Table-type PWAT-PARM4 -- Fourth group of PWATER parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PWAT-PARM4
<-range><--------------------pwatparm4----------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PWAT-PARM4

Example
*******

PWAT-PARM4
<PLS > ***
# - # CEPSC UZSN NSUR INTFW IRC LZETP***
1 7 0.1 1.3 0.1 3. 0.5 0.7
END PWAT-PARM4

********************************************************************************

324
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<pwatparm4> CEPSC F10.0 0.0 0.0 10.0 in Engl
0.0 0.0 250. mm Metric

UZSN F10.0 none 0.01 10.0 in Engl

none 0.25 250. mm Metric

NSUR F10.0 0.1 0.001 1.0 complex Both

INTFW F10.0 none 0.0 none none Both

IRC F10.0 none 1.0E-30 0.999 1/day Both

LZETP F10.0 0.0 0.0 0.999 none Both

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

Values in this table need only be supplied for those parameters which do not vary
through the year. If they do vary (as specified in Table-type PWAT-PARM1), monthly
values are supplied in the tables documented below (MON-xxx).

CEPSC is the interception storage capacity.

UZSN is the upper zone nominal storage.

NSUR is Manning's n for the assumed overland flow plane.

INTFW is the interflow inflow parameter.

IRC is the interflow recession parameter. Under zero inflow, this is the ratio of
today's interflow outflow rate to yesterday's rate.

LZETP is the lower zone E-T parameter. It is an index to the density of

deep-rooted vegetation.

325
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

4.4(1).4.5 Table-type PWAT-PARM5 -- Fifth group of PWATER parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PWAT-PARM5
<-range><---pwatparm5------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PWAT-PARM5

*******
Example
*******
PWAT-PARM3
<PLS >***
# - #*** FZG FZGL
1 7
9 0.9 0.1
END PWAT-PARM3

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<pwatparm5> FZG F10.0 1.0 0.0001 none /in Engl
F10.0 0.0394 0.0001 none /mm Metr

FZGL F10.0 0.1 0.0001 1.0 none Both

--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Explanation

FZG is the parameter that adjusts for the effect of ice in the snow pack on
infiltration when IFFCFG is 1. It is not used if IFFCFG is 2.

FZGL is the lower limit of INFFAC as adjusted by ice in the snow pack when IFFCFG
is 1. If IFFCFG is 2, FZGL is the value of INFFAC when the lower layer temperature
is at or below freezing.

326
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

4.4(1).4.6 Table-type MON-INTERCEP -- Monthly interception storage capacity

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-INTERCEP
<-range><-----------------mon-icep--------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-INTERCEP

*******
Example
*******

MON-INTERCEP
<PLS > Interception storage capacity at start of each month ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .02 .03 .03 .04 .05 .08 .12 .15 .12 .05 .03 .01
END MON-INTERCEP

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-icep> CEPSCM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 10. in Engl
0.0 0.0 250. mm Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

Monthly values of interception storage. Only required if VCSFG is 1 in Table-type

PWAT-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

327
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

4.4(1).4.7 Table-type MON-UZSN -- Monthly upper zone nominal storage

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-UZSN
<-range><------------------mon-uzsn-------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-UZSN

*******
Example
*******

MON-UZSN
<PLS > Upper zone storage at start of each month ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 7 .30 .35 .30 .45 .56 .57 .45 .67 .64 .54 .56 .40
END MON-UZSN

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-uzsn> UZSNM(12) 12F5.0 none .01 10. in Engl
none .25 250. mm Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

Monthly values of upper zone nominal storage. This table is only required if VUZFG
is 1 in Table-type PWAT-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

328
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

4.4(1).4.8 Table-type MON-MANNING -- Monthly Manning's n values

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-MANNING
<-range><----------------mon-Manning------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-MANNING

*******
Example
*******

MON-MANNING
<PLS > Manning's n at start of each month ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 7 .23 .34 .34 .35 .28 .35 .37 .35 .28 .29 .30 .30
END MON-MANNING

********************************************************************************

Details
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-Manning> NSURM(12) 12F5.0 .10 .001 1.0 complex Both
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

Monthly values of Manning's constant for overland flow. This table is only
required if VNNFG is 1 in Table-type PWAT-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

329
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

4.4(1).4.9 Table-type MON-INTERFLW -- monthly interflow inflow parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-INTERFLW
<-range><----------------mon-interflw------------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-INTERFLW

*******
Example
*******

MON-INTERFLW
<PLS > Interflow inflow parameter for start of each month ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 7 2.0 3.3 3.6 3.8 4.2 5.6 5.6 7.6 7.5 5.6 4.6 3.4
END MON-INTERFLW

********************************************************************************

Details
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-interflw> INTFWM(12) 12F5.0 none 0.0 none none Both
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

Monthly values of the interflow inflow parameter. This table is only required if
VIFWFG is 1 in Table-type PWAT-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

330
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

4.4(1).4.10 Table-type MON-IRC -- Monthly interflow recession constants

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-IRC
<-range><--------------mon-irc------------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-IRC

*******
Example
*******

MON-IRC
<PLS > Interflow recession constant at start of each month ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .35 .40 .40 .40 .40 .43 .45 .45 .50 .45 .45 .40
END MON-IRC

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-irc> IRCM(12) 12F5.0 none 1.0E-30 0.999 /day Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

Monthly values of the interflow recession parameter. This table is only required
if VIRCFG is 1 in Table-type PWAT-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

331
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

4.4(1).4.11 Table-type MON-LZETPARM -- Monthly lower zone E-T parameter

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-LZETPARM
<-range><---------------mon-lzetparm------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-LZETPARM

*******
Example
*******

MON-LZETPARM
<PLS > Lower zone evapotranspiration parm at start of each month ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .30 .30 .35 .35 .40 .40 .45 .45 .45 .45 .42 .38
END MON-LZETPARM

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-lzetparm> LZETPM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 0.999 none Both
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

Monthly values of the lower zone ET parameter. This table is only required if
VLEFG is 1 in Table-type PWAT-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

332
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

4.4(1).4.12 Table-type PWAT-STATE1 -- PWATER initial state variables

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PWAT-STATE1
<-range><--------------pwat-state1------------------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PWAT-STATE1

*******
Example
*******

PWAT-STATE1
<PLS > PWATER state variables***
# - #*** CEPS SURS UZS IFWS LZS AGWS GWVS
1 7 0.05 0.10 0.25 0.01 8.2 2.0 .025
END PWAT-STATE1

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<pwat-state1> CEPS 7F10.0 0.0 0.0 100 inches Engl
0.0 0.0 2500 mm Metric
SURS 0.0 0.0 100 inches Engl
0.0 0.0 2500 mm Metric
UZS .001 .001 100 inches Engl
.025 .025 2500 mm Metric
IFWS 0.0 0.0 100 inches Engl
0.0 0.0 2500 mm Metric
LZS .001 .001 100 inches Engl
.025 .025 2500 mm Metric
AGWS 0.0 0.0 100 inches Engl
0.0 0.0 2500 mm Metric
GWVS 0.0 0.0 100 inches Engl
0.0 0.0 2500 mm Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

333
 PERLND -- Section PWATER Input

Explanation

This table is used to specify the initial water storages in the soil.

CEPS is the initial interception storage.

SURS is the initial surface (overland flow) storage.

UZS is the initial upper zone storage.

IFWS is the initial interflow storage.

LZS is the initial lower zone storage.

AGWS is the initial active groundwater storage.

GWVS is the initial index to groundwater slope; it is a measure of antecedent

active groundwater inflow.

334
 PERLND -- Section SEDMNT Input

4.4(1).5 PERLND BLOCK -- Section SEDMNT input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type SED-PARM1] Tables in brackets [] are

Table-type SED-PARM2 not always required.
Table-type SED-PARM3
[Table-type MON-COVER]
[Table-type MON-NVSI]
[Table-type SED-STOR]

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.

335
 PERLND -- Section SEDMNT Input

4.4(1).5.1 Table-type SED-PARM1 -- First group of SEDMNT parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SED-PARM1
<-range><--sed-parm1-->
. . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . .
END SED-PARM1

Example
*******

SED-PARM1
<PLS >***
# - # CRV VSIV SDOP***
1 7 0 1 0
END SED-PARM1

********************************************************************************

Details
-----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
-----------------------------------------------------------
<sed-parm1> CRVFG 3I5 0 0 1
VSIVFG 0 0 2
SDOPFG 0 0 1
-----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

If CRVFG is 1, erosion-related cover may vary throughout the year. Values are
supplied in Table-type MON-COVER.

If VSIVFG is 1, the rate of net vertical sediment input may vary throughout the
year. If VSIVFG is 2, the vertical sediment input is added to the detached
sediment storage only on days when no rainfall occurred during the previous day.
Values are supplied in Table-type MON-NVSI.

SDOPFG is a flag that determines the algorithm used to simulate removal of sediment
from the land surface. If SDOPFG is 1, sediment removal will be simulated with the
algorithm used in the predecessor models ARM and NPS. If it is 0, a different
algorithm will be used (see the Functional Description for details).

336
 PERLND -- Section SEDMNT Input

4.4(1).5.2 Table-type SED-PARM2 -- Second group of SEDMNT parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SED-PARM2
<-range><---------------sed-parm2---------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SED-PARM2

*******
Example
*******

SED-PARM2
<PLS >***
# - # SMPF KRER JRER AFFIX COVER NVSI***
1 7 0.9 0.08 1.90 0.01 0.5 -0.100
END SED-PARM2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<sedparm2> SMPF 6F10.0 1.0 0.001 1.0 none Both
KRER 0.0 0.0 none complex Both
JRER none none none complex Both
AFFIX 0.0 0.0 1.0 /day Both
COVER 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
NVSI 0.0 none none lb/ac/day Engl
0.0 none none kg/ha/day Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

337
 PERLND -- Section SEDMNT Input

Explanation

SMPF is a "supporting management practice factor." It is used to simulate the

reduction in erosion achieved by use of erosion control practices.

KRER is the coefficient in the soil detachment equation.

JRER is the exponent in the soil detachment equation.

AFFIX is the fraction by which detached sediment storage decreases each day as a
result of soil compaction.

COVER is the fraction of land surface which is shielded from rainfall erosion (not
considering snow cover, which is handled by the program).

NVSI is the rate at which sediment enters detached storage from the atmosphere.
A negative value can be supplied, for example, to simulate removal by human
activity or wind.

If monthly values for COVER and NVSI are being supplied, values supplied for these
variables in this table are not relevant.

338
 PERLND -- Section SEDMNT Input

4.4(1).5.3 Table-type SED-PARM3 -- Third group of SEDMNT parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SED-PARM3
<-range><------------sed-parm3----------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SED-PARM3

*******
Example
*******

SED-PARM3
<PLS >***
# - # KSER JSER KGER JGER***
1 7 0.08 1.7 0.06 1.4
END SED-PARM3

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<sedparm3> KSER 4F10.0 0.0 0.0 none complex Both
JSER none none none complex Both
KGER 0.0 0.0 none complex Both
JGER none none none complex Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

KSER and JSER are the coefficient and exponent in the detached sediment washoff
equation.

KGER and JGER are the coefficient and exponent in the matrix soil scour equation,
which simulates gully erosion.

339
 PERLND -- Section SEDMNT Input

4.4(1).5.4 Table-type MON-COVER -- Monthly erosion-related cover values

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-COVER
<-range><---------------mon-cover---------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-COVER

*******
Example
*******

MON-COVER
<PLS > Monthly values for erosion related cover ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 0.0 .12 .12 .24 .24 .56 .67 .56 .34 .34 .23 .12
END MON-COVER

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-cover> COVERM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

Monthly values of the COVER parameter. This table is only required if CRVFG is 1
in Table-type SED-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

340
 PERLND -- Section SEDMNT Input

4.4(1).5.5 Table-type MON-NVSI -- Monthly net vertical sediment input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-NVSI
<-range><---------------mon-nvsi----------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-NVSI

*******
Example
*******

MON-NSVI
<PLS > Monthly net vertical sediment input***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 -.01 -.02 -.03 -.04 -.05 -.03 -.02 -.01 0.0 .01 .03 .01
END MON-NVSI

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-nvsi> NVSIM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 none none lb/ac/day Engl
0.0 none none kg/ha/day Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

Monthly values of the net vertical sediment input. This table is only required if
VSIVFG is greater than 0 in Table-type SED-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

341
 PERLND -- Section SEDMNT Input

4.4(1).5.6 Table-type SED-STOR -- Initial storage of detached sediment

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SED-STOR
<-range><-------->
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END SED-STOR

*******
Example
*******

SED-STOR
<PLS > Detached sediment storage (tons/acre) ***
# - # ***
1 7 0.2
END SED-STOR

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<sed-stor> DETS F10.0 0.0 0.0 none tons/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none tonnes/ha Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

DETS is the initial storage of detached sediment.

342
 PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input

4.4(1).6 PERLND BLOCK -- Section PSTEMP input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1]
Table-type PSTEMP-PARM2 Tables in brackets [] are
[Table-type MON-ASLT] not always required
[Table-type MON-BSLT]
[Table-type MON-ULTP1]
[Table-type MON-ULTP2]
[Table-type MON-LGTP1]
[Table-type MON-LGTP2]
[Table-type PSTEMP-TEMPS]

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.

343
 PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input

4.4(1).6.1 Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1 -- Flags for section PSTEMP

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PSTEMP-PARM1
<-range><---pstemp-parm1--->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PSTEMP-PARM1

*******
Example
*******

PSTEMP-PARM1
<PLS > Flags for section PSTEMP***
# - # SLTV ULTV LGTV TSOP***
1 7 0 0 0 1
END PSTEMP-PARM1

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<pstemp-parm1> SLTVFG 4I5 0 0 1
ULTVFG 0 0 1
LGTVFG 0 0 1
TSOPFG 0 0 2
----------------------------------------------------------

344
 PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input

Explanation

If SLTVFG is 1, parameters for estimating surface layer temperature can vary

throughout the year. Thus, Table-types MON-ASLT and MON-BSLT will be expected.

ULTVFG serves the same purpose for upper layer temperature calculations. Tables
MON-ULTP1 and MON-ULTP2 will be expected of ULTVFG is 1. LGTVFG serves the same
purpose for the lower layer and active groundwater layer temperature calculations.
Table-types MON-LGTP1 and MON-LGTP2 will be expected if LGTVFG is 1.

TSOPFG governs the methods used to estimate subsurface soil temperatures. If

TSOPFG is 0, they are computed using a mean departure from air temperature,
together with smoothing factors. If TSOPFG is 2, the method is identical, except
that the lower layer/groundwater layer temperature is calculated from the upper
layer soil temperature, instead of directly from the air temperature. If TSOPFG
is 1, upper layer soil temperature is estimated by regression on air temperature
(like surface temperature). The lower layer/ground-water layer temperature is
supplied directly by the user (a different value may be specified for each month).

4.4(1).6.2 Table-type PSTEMP-PARM2 -- Second group of PSTEMP parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PSTEMP-PARM2
<-range><--------------pstemp-parm2-------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PSTEMP-PARM2

*******
Example
*******

PSTEMP-PARM2
<PLS >***
# - # ASLT BSLT ULTP1 ULTP2 LGTP1 LGTP2***
1 7 24. .5 24. .5 40. 0.0
END PSTEMP-PARM2

********************************************************************************

345
 PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input

Details

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<pstemp-parm2> ASLT 6F10.0 32. 0.0 100. deg F Engl
0. -18. 38. deg C Metric

BSLT 1.0 0.001 2.0 deg F/F Engl

1.0 0.001 2.0 deg C/C Metric

Definition of remaining quantities depends on soil temperature option flag

(TSOPFG in Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1)

TSOPFG = 0 or 2:
ULTP1 none none none none Both
ULTP2 none none none F deg Engl
none none none C deg Metric
LGTP1 none none none none Both
LGTP2 none none none F deg Engl
none none none C deg Metric

TSOPFG = 1:
ULTP1 none none none Deg F Engl
none none none Deg C Metric
ULTP2 none none none Deg F/F Engl
none none none Deg C/C Metric
LGTP1 none none none Deg F Engl
none none none Deg C Metric
LGTP2 not used
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

ASLT is the surface layer temperature when the air temperature is 32 degrees F (0
degrees C). It is the intercept of the surface layer temperature regression
equation.

BSLT is the slope of the surface layer temperature regression equation.

If TSOPFG = 0 then:

ULTP1 is the smoothing factor in the upper layer temperature calculation.

ULTP2 is the mean difference between upper layer soil temperature and air
temperature.

LGTP1 and LGTP2 are the smoothing factor and mean departure from air
temperature for calculating lower layer/groundwater soil temperature.

346
 PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input

If TSOPFG = 1 then:

ULTP1 and ULTP2 are the intercept and slope in the upper layer soil temperature
regression equation (like ASLT and BSLT for the surface layer). LGTP1 is the
lower layer/groundwater layer soil temperature. LGTP2 is not used.

If TSOPFG = 2 then:

ULTP1 is the smoothing factor in the upper layer temperature calculation.

ULTP2 is the mean difference between upper layer soil temperature and air
temperature.

LGTP1 and LGTP2 are the smoothing factor and mean departure from the upper layer
soil temperature for calculating lower layer/groundwater soil temperature.

If monthly values are being supplied for any of these quantities (in Table-type
MON-xxx), the value appearing in this table is not relevant.

347
 PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input

4.4(1).6.3 Table-type MON-ASLT -- Monthly values for ASLT

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-ASLT
<-range><-----------------mon-aslt--------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-ASLT

*******
Example
*******
MON-ASLT
<PLS > Value of ASLT at start of each month (deg F)***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 44. 41. 40.
END MON-ASLT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-aslt> ASLTM(12) 12F5.0 32. 0. 100. deg F Engl
0. -18. 38. deg C Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explanation

This table is only required if SLTVFG is 1 in Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1.

The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month; values for inter-
mediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

348
 PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input

4.4(1).6.4 Table-type MON-BSLT -- Monthly values for BSLT

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-BSLT
<-range><-----------------mon-bslt--------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-BSLT

*******
Example
*******

MON-BSLT
<PLS > Value of BSLT at start of each month (deg F/F)***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .3 .3 .3 .4 .4 .5 .5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .3
END MON-BSLT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-bslt> BSLTM(12) 12F5.0 1.0 0.001 2.0 deg F/F Engl
1.0 0.001 2.0 deg C/C Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if SLTVFG is 1 in Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

349
 PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input

4.4(1).6.5 Table-type MON-ULTP1 -- Monthly values for ULTP1

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-ULTP1
<-range><----------------mon-ultp1--------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-ULTP1

*******
Example
*******

MON-ULTP1
<PLS > Value of ULTP1 at start of each month (TSOPFG=1) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 37. 38. 39. 40. 42. 44. 47. 44. 42. 39. 39. 39.
END MON-ULTP1

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-ultp1> ULTP1M(12) 12F5.0 see notes for Table-type PSTEMP-PARM2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if ULTVFG is 1 in Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

350
 PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input

4.4(1).6.6 Table-type MON-ULTP2 -- Monthly values for ULTP2

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-ULTP2
<-range><---------------mon-ultp2---------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-ULTP2

*******
Example
*******

MON-ULTP2
<PLS > Value of ULTP2 at start of each month (TSOPFG=1) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .3 .3 .4 .5 .5 .5 .6 .6 .5 .4 .4 .3
END MON-ULTP2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-ultp2> ULTP2M(12) 12F5.0 see notes for Table-type PSTEMP-PARM2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if ULTVFG is 1 in Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

351
 PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input

4.4(1).6.7 Table-type MON-LGTP1 -- Monthly values for LGTP1

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-LGTP1
<-range><---------------mon-lgtp1---------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-LGTP1

*******
Example
*******

MON-LGTP1
<PLS > Value of LGTP1 at start of each month (TSOPFG=1) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 35. 38. 41. 43. 51. 45. 46. 45. 39. 37. 35. 35.
END MON-LGTP1

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-lgtp1> LGTP1M(12) 12F5.0 see notes for Table-type PSTEMP-PARM2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if LGTVFG is 1 in Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

352
 PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input

4.4(1).6.8 Table-type MON-LGTP2 -- Monthly values for LGTP2

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-LGTP2
<-range><---------------mon-lgtp2---------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-LGTP2

*******
Example
*******

MON-LGTP2
<PLS > Value for LGTP2 at start of each month (F deg) (TSOPFG=0) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 2.0
END MON-LGTP2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-lgtp2> LGTP2M(12) 12F5.0 none none none F deg Engl
none none none C deg Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if LGTVFG is 1 in Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1, and TSOPFG

is 0 or 2.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

353
 PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input

4.4(1).6.9 Table-type PSTEMP-TEMPS -- Initial temperatures

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PSTEMP-TEMPS
<-range><------------pstemp-temps-------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PSTEMP-TEMPS

Example
*******

PSTEMP-TEMPS
<PLS > Initial temperatures***
# - # AIRTC SLTMP ULTMP LGTMP***
1 7 48. 48. 48. 48.
END PSTEMP-TEMPS

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<pstemp-temps> AIRTC 4F10.0 60. -20. 120. deg F Engl
16. -29. 49. deg C Metric
SLTMP 60. -20. 120. deg F Engl
16. -29. 49. deg C Metric
ULTMP 60. -20. 120. deg F Engl
16. -29. 49. deg C Metric
LGTMP 60. -20. 120. deg F Engl
16. -29. 49. deg C Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

These are the initial temperatures:

AIRTC - air temperature
SLTMP - surface layer soil temperature
ULTMP - upper layer soil temperature
LGTMP - lower layer/groundwater layer soil temperature

354
 PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input

4.4(1).7 PERLND BLOCK -- Section PWTGAS input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type PWT-PARM1]
[Table-type PWT-PARM2] Tables in brackets [] are not
[Table-type MON-IFWDOX] always required
[Table-type MON-IFWCO2]
[Table-type MON-GRNDDOX]
[Table-type MON-GRNDCO2]
[Table-type PWT-TEMPS]
[Table-type PWT-GASES]

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.

355
 PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input

4.4(1).7.1 Table-type PWT-PARM1 -- Flags for section PWTGAS

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PWT-PARM1
<-range><----pwt-parm1----->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PWT-PARM1

Example
*******

PWT-PARM1
<PLS > Flags for section PWTGAS***
# - # IDV ICV GDV GVC***
1 7 0 0 1 0
END PWT-PARM1

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<pwt-parm1> IDVFG 4I5 0 0 1
ICVFG 0 0 1
GDVFG 0 0 1
GCVFG 0 0 1
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

Each of these flags indicate whether or not a parameter is allowed to vary

throughout the year, and thus, whether or not the corresponding table of monthly
values will be expected:

FLAG PARAMETER TABLE FOR MONTHLY VALUES

IDVFG Interflow dissolved oxygen concentration MON-IFWDOX

ICVFG Interflow CO2 concentration MON-IFWCO2
GDVFG Groundwater dissolved oxygen concentration MON-GRNDDOX
GCVFG Groundwater CO2 concentration MON-GRNDCO2

356
 PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input

4.4(1).7.2 Table-type PWT-PARM2 -- Second group of PWTGAS parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PWT-PARM2
<-range><-----------------pwt-parm2---------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PWT-PARM2

Example
*******

PWT-PARM2
<PLS > Second group of PWTGAS parameters ***
# - # ELEV IDOXP ICO2P ADOXP ACO2P***
1 7 1281. 8.2 0.2 8.2 0.3
END PWT-PARM2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<pwt-parm2> ELEV 5F10.0 0.0 -1000. 30000. ft Engl
0.0 -300. 9100. m Metric
IDOXP 0.0 0.0 20. mg/l Both
ICO2P 0.0 0.0 1.0 mg C/l Both
ADOXP 0.0 0.0 20. mg/l Both
ACO2P 0.0 0.0 1.0 mg C/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

ELEV is the elevation of the PLS above sea level; it is used to adjust the
saturation concentrations of dissolved gases in surface outflow.

IDOXP is the concentration of dissolved oxygen in interflow outflow.

ICO2P is the concentration of dissolved CO2 in interflow outflow.
ADOXP is the concentration of dissolved oxygen in active groundwater outflow.
ACO2P is the concentration of dissolved CO2 in active groundwater outflow.

357
 PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input

4.4(1).7.3 Table-type MON-IFWDOX -- Monthly interflow dissolved oxygen

concentration

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-IFWDOX
<-range><----------------mon-ifwdox-------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-IFWDOX

*******
Example
*******

MON-IFWDOX
<PLS > Value at start of each month for interflow DO concentration***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 4.5 4.7 5.7 6.5 7.6 7.6 7.4 6.3 4.3 5.3 4.3 3.5
END MON-IFWDOX

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-ifwdox> IDOXPM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 20.0 mg/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if IDVFG is 1 in Table-type PWT-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

358
 PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input

4.4(1).7.4 Table-type MON-IFWCO2 -- Monthly interflow CO2 concentration

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-IFWCO2
<-range><---------------mon-ifwco2--------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-IFWCO2

*******
Example
*******

MON-IFWCO2
<PLS > Value at start of each month for interflow CO2 concentration***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .123 .171 .142 .145 .157 .178 .122 .123 .143 .145 .176 .145
END MON-IFWCO2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-ifwco2> ICO2PM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 mg C/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if ICVFG is 1 in Table-type PWT-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

359
 PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input

4.4(1).7.5 Table-type MON-GRNDDOX -- Monthly groundwater dissolved oxygen

concentration

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-GRNDDOX
<-range><---------------mon-grnddox-------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-GRNDDOX

*******
Example
*******

MON-GRNDDOX
<PLS > Value at start of each month for groundwater DO concentration***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 4.5 4.7 4.9 4.9 4.9 4.9 5.0 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.4 5.1
END MON-GRNDDOX

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-grnddox> ADOXPM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 20.0 mg/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if GDVFG is 1 in Table-type PWT-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

360
 PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input

4.4(1).7.6 Table-type MON-GRNDCO2 -- Monthly groundwater CO2 concentration

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-GRNDCO2
<-range><--------------mon-grndco2--------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-GRNDCO2

*******
Example
*******

MON-GRNDCO2
<PLS > Value at start of each month for groundwater CO2 concentration***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .23 .22 .22 .23 .24 .25 .24 .23 .22 .22 .22 .22
END MON-GRNDCO2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-grndco2> ACO2PM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 mg C/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if GCVFG is 1 in Table-type PWT-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

361
 PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input

4.4(1).7.7 Table-type PWT-TEMPS -- Initial water temperatures

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PWT-TEMPS
<-range><----------pwt-temps--------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PWT-TEMPS

*******
Example
*******

PWT-TEMPS
<PLS > Initial water temperatures***
# - # SOTMP IOTMP AOTMP***
1 7 47. 47. 53.
END PWT-TEMPS

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<pwt-temps> SOTMP 3F10.0 60. 32. 100. deg F Engl
16. 0. 38. deg C Metric

IOTMP 60. 32. 100. deg F Engl

16. 0. 38. deg C Metric

AOTMP 60. 32. 100. deg F Engl

16. 0. 38. deg C Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

These are the initial values of outflow water temperatures:

SOTMP is surface outflow temperature.
IOTMP is interflow outflow temperature.
AOTMP is active groundwater outflow temperature.

362
 PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input

4.4(1).7.8 Table-type PWT-GASES -- Initial dissolved oxygen and CO2

concentrations

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PWT-GASES
<-range><---------------pwt-gases---------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PWT-GASES

*******
Example
*******

PWT-GASES
<PLS > Initial DO and CO2 concentrations***
# - # SODOX SOCO2 IODOX IOCO2 AODOX AOCO2***
1 7 8.9 .122 7.8 .132 3.5 .132
END PWT-GASES

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<pwt-gases> SODOX 6F10.0 0.0 0.0 20. mg/l Both
SOCO2 0.0 0.0 1.0 mg C/l Both
IODOX 0.0 0.0 20. mg/l Both
IOCO2 0.0 0.0 1.0 mg C/l Both
AODOX 0.0 0.0 20. mg/l Both
AOCO2 0.0 0.0 1.0 mg C/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

These are the initial concentrations of dissolved gases in outflow:

SODOX is DO concentration in surface outflow.
SOCO2 is CO2 concentration in surface outflow.
IODOX is DO concentration in interflow outflow.
IOCO2 is CO2 concentration in interflow outflow.
AODOX is DO concentration in active groundwater outflow.
AOCO2 is CO2 concentration in active groundwater outflow.

363
 PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input

4.4(1).8 PERLND BLOCK -- Section PQUAL input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type NQUALS]
[Table-type PQL-AD-FLAGS]
---
Table-type QUAL-PROPS |
[Table-type QUAL-INPUT] |
[Table-type MON-POTFW] |
[Table-type MON-POTFS] | repeat for each
[Table-type MON-ACCUM] | quality constituent
[Table-type MON-SQOLIM] |
[Table-type MON-IFLW-CONC] |
[Table-type MON-GRND-CONC] |
---
********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.

Tables enclosed in brackets [] are not always required; for example, because all
the values can be defaulted.

364
 PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input

4.4(1).8.1 Table-type NQUALS -- Total number of quality constituents simulated

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NQUALS
<-range><nql>
. . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . .
END NQUALS

*******
Example
*******

NQUALS
<PLS > ***
# - #NQUAL***
1 7 8
END NQUALS

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<nql> NQUAL I5 1 1 10
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

The total number of quality constituents simulated in Section PQUAL is indicated

in this table. The set of tables below Table-type PQL-AD-FLAGS is repeated for
each quality constituent.

365
 PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input

4.4(1).8.2 Table-type PQL-AD-FLAGS -- Atmospheric deposition flags for PQUAL

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PQL-AD-FLAGS
<-range> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PQL-AD-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******
PQL-AD-FLAGS
<PLS > Atmospheric deposition flags ***
*** QUAL1 QUAL2 QUAL3 QUAL4 QUAL5 QUAL6 QUAL7 QUAL8 QUAL9 QAL10
#*** # <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C>
1 7 -1 10 -1 -1 11 12 13 -1 0 0 0 11 0 -1 0 0 -1 0
END PQL-AD-FLAGS

********************************************************************************

Details
------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
------------------------------------------------------------
<f><c> PQADFG(*) (1X,2I3) 0 -1 none
------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

PQADFG is an array of flags indicating the source of atmospheric deposition data.

The QUAL ID number is determined by the order in which the QUALS are input in the
tables below. Each QUAL has two flags. The first is for dry or total deposition
flux, and the second is for wet deposition concentration. The flag values
indicate:
0 No deposition of this type is simulated
-1 Deposition of this type is input as time series PQADFX or
PQADCN
>0 Deposition of this type is input in the MONTH-DATA table
with the corresponding table ID number.
refer to the MONTH-DATA Block (Section 4.11)

It is an error to specify a non-zero flag value for a non-QUALOF.

366
 PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input

4.4(1).8.3 Table-type QUAL-PROPS -- Identifiers and flags for a quality

constituent

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

QUAL-PROPS
<-range><-qualid---> <qt><------------------flags-------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END QUAL-PROPS

*******
Example
*******

QUAL-PROPS
<PLS > Identifiers and Flags***
# - #*** qualid QTID QSD VPFW VPFS QSO VQO QIFW VIQC QAGW VAQC
1 7 BOD kg 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
END QUAL-PROPS

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<qualid> QUALID 3A4 none none none
<qt> QTYID A4 none none none
<flags> QSDFG 9I5 0 0 1
VPFWFG 0 0 2
VPFSFG 0 0 1
QSOFG 0 0 1
VQOFG 0 0 1
QIFWFG 0 0 1
VIQCFG 0 0 4
QAGWFG 0 0 1
VAQCFG 0 0 4
----------------------------------------------------------

367
 PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input

Explanation

QUALID is a string of up to 10 characters which identifies the quality constituent.

QTYID is a string of up to 4 characters which identifies the units associated with

this constituent (e.g., kg, or lb). These are the units referred to as "qty" in
subsequent tables (e.g., Table-type QUAL-INPUT).

If QSDFG is 1 then:
1. This constituent is a QUALSD; it is assumed to be sediment-associated.
2. If VPFWFG is 1 or greater, the washoff potency factor may vary throughout
the year. Table-type MON-POTFW is expected. If VPFWFG is 2, the daily
factors are not computed by interpolation between the monthly values.
3. If VPFSFG is 1, the scour potency factor may vary throughout the year.
Table-type MON-POTFS is expected.

If QSOFG is 1 then:
1. This constituent is a QUALOF; it is assumed to be directly associated with
overland flow.
2. If VQOFG is 1 then the rate of accumulation and the limiting storage of the
QUALOF may vary throughout the year. Table-types MON-ACCUM and MON-SQOLIM
are expected for this QUAL.

If QIFWFG is 1 then:
1. This constituent is a QUALIF; it is assumed to be associated with interflow.
2. If VIQCFG 1 or greater, the concentration of this constituent in interflow
outflow may vary throughout the year. Table-type MON-IFLW-CONC is expected.
If VIQCFG is 2 or 4, the daily values are obtained directly from the monthly
values; no interpolation between monthly values is performed. If VIQCFG is
3 or 4, the units of the input concentrations are mg/l; note: this option
requires that the "qty" units be pounds (English system) or kilograms
(Metric system).

If QAGWFG is 1 then:
1. This constituent is a QUALGW (groundwater associated).
2. If VAQCFG is 1 or greater, the concentration of this constituent in
groundwater outflow may vary throughout the year. Table-type MON-GRND-CONC
is expected. If VAQCFG is 2 or 4, the daily values are obtained directly
from the monthly values; no interpolation between monthly values is
performed. If VAQCFG is 3 or 4, the units of the input concentrations are
mg/l; note: this option requires that the "qty" units be pounds (English
system) or kilograms (Metric system).

368
 PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input

4.4(1).8.4 Table-type QUAL-INPUT -- Nonseasonal PQUAL parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

QUAL-INPUT
<-range><---------------qual-input------------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END QUAL-INPUT

*******
Example
*******

QUAL-INPUT
<PLS > Storage on surface and nonseasonal parameters***
# - # SQO POTFW POTFS ACQOP SQOLIM WSQOP IOQC AOQC***
1 7 1.21 17.2 1.1 0.02 2.0 1.70 15.2 17.1
END QUAL-INPUT

********************************************************************************

369
 PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input

Details

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<qual-input> SQO 8F8.0 0.0 0.0 none qty/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty/ha Metric
POTFW 0.0 0.0 none qty/ton Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty/tonne Metric
POTFS 0.0 0.0 none qty/ton Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty/tonne Metric
ACQOP 0.0 0.0 none qty/ac/day Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty/ha/day Metric
SQOLIM .000001 .000001 none qty/ac Engl
.000002 .000002 none qty/ha Metric
WSQOP 1.64 0.01 none in/hr Engl
41.7 0.25 none mm/hr Metric
IOQC 0.0 0.0 none qty/ft3 Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty/l Metric
AOQC 0.0 0.0 none qty/ft3 Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty/l Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

The following variables are applicable only if the constituent is a QUALSD:

1. POTFW is the washoff potency factor.
2. POTFS is the scour potency factor.

A potency factor is the ratio of constituent yield to sediment (washoff or scour)

outflow.

The following variables are applicable only if the constituent is a QUALOF:

1. SQO is the initial storage of QUALOF on the surface of the PLS.
2. ACQOP is the rate of accumulation of QUALOF.
3. SQOLIM is the maximum storage of QUALOF.
4. WSQOP is the rate of surface runoff which will remove 90 percent of stored
QUALOF per hour.

IOQC is the concentration of the constituent in interflow outflow; it is meaningful

only if this QUAL is a QUALIF. AOQC is the concentration of the constituent in
active groundwater outflow; it is meaningful only if this QUAL is a QUALGW.

If monthly values are being supplied for any of these quantities, the value in this
table is not relevant; instead, the system expects and uses values supplied in
Table-type MON-xxx.

370
 PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input

4.4(1).8.5 Table-type MON-POTFW -- Monthly washoff potency factor

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-POTFW
<-range><--------------mon-potfw----------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-POTFW

*******
Example
*******

MON-POTFW
<PLS > Value at start of each month for washoff potency factor (lb/ton)***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 1.2 2.4 3.6 5.8 10.2 20.2 25.2 30.8 40.2 10.1 2.5 1.7
END MON-POTFW

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-potfw> POTFWM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none qty/ton Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty Metric
/tonne
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if VPFWFG is greater than 0 in Table-type QUAL-PROPS.

If VPFWFG is 1 or 3, the input monthly values apply to the first day of the month,
and values for intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive
monthly values. If VPFWFG is 2 or 4, the input monthly values apply directly to
all days of the month.

371
 PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input

4.4(1).8.6 Table-type MON-POTFS -- Monthly scour potency factor

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-POTFS
<-range><--------------mon-potfs----------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-POTFS

*******
Example
*******

MON-POTFS
<PLS > Value at start of each month for scour potency factor (lb/ton)***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.3 1.0 0.9 0.9
END MON-POTFS

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-potfs> POTFSM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none qty/ton Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty Metric
/tonne
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if VPFSFG is 1 in Table-type QUAL-PROPS.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

372
 PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input

4.4(1).8.7 Table-type MON-ACCUM -- Monthly accumulation rates of QUALOF

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-ACCUM
<-range><---------------mon-accum---------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-ACCUM

*******
Example
*******

MON-ACCUM
<PLS > Value at start of month for accum rate of QUALOF (lb/ac.day)***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 0.0 0.0 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.05 0.04 0.02 0.01 0.0 0.0
END MON-ACCUM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-accum> ACQOPM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none qty/ac/day Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty/ha/day Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if VQOFG is 1 in Table-type QUAL-PROPS.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

373
 PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input

4.4(1).8.8 Table-type MON-SQOLIM -- Monthly limiting storage of QUALOF

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-SQOLIM
<-range><-----------------mon-sqolim------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-SQOLIM

*******
Example
*******

MON-SQOLIM
<PLS > Value at start of month for limiting storage of QUALOF (lb/acre)***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 10 12 14 18 20 25 30 26 20 13 10 7
END MON-SQOLIM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-sqolim> SQOLIM(12) 12F5.0 1.E-6 1.E-6 none qty/ac Engl
2.E-6 2.E-6 none qty/ha Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if VQOFG is 1 in Table-type QUAL-PROPS.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

374
 PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input

4.4(1).8.9 Table-type MON-IFLW-CONC -- Monthly concentration of QUAL

in interflow

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-IFLW-CONC
<-range><----------------mon-iflw-conc----------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-IFLW-CONC

*******
Example
*******

MON-IFLW-CONC
<PLS > Conc of QUAL in interflow outflow for each month (lb/ft3)***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7.0012.0010.0005 0.0 0.0.0002 .005 .002 .001.0016.0014.0012
END MON-IFLW-CONC

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-iflw-conc>IOQCM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none qty/ft3 Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty/l Metric

If VIQCFG = 3 or 4 in
Table-type QUAL-PROPS: 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if VIQCFG is greater than 0 in Table-type QUAL-PROPS.

If VIQCFG is 1 or 3, the input monthly values apply to the first day of the month,
and values for intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive
monthly values. If VIQCFG is 2 or 4, the input monthly values apply directly to
all days of the month.

375
 PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input

4.4(1).8.10 Table-type MON-GRND-CONC -- Monthly concentration of QUAL in

active groundwater

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-GRND-CONC
<-range><---------------mon-grnd-conc------------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-GRND-CONC

*******
Example
*******

MON-GRND-CONC
<PLS > Value at start of month for conc of QUAL in groundwater (lb/ft3)**
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7.0013.0014.0012.0012.0012.001 .001 .001 .0011.0012.0012.0013
END MON-GRND-CONC

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-grnd-conc>AOQCM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none qty/ft3 Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty/l Metric

If VAQCFG = 3 or 4 in
Table-type QUAL-PROPS: 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if VAQCFG is greater than 0 in Table-type QUAL-PROPS.

If VAQCFG is 1 or 3, the input monthly values apply to the first day of the month,
and values for intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive
monthly values. If VAQCFG is 2 or 4, the input monthly values apply directly to
all days of the month.

376
 PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input

4.4(1).9 PERLND BLOCK -- Section MSTLAY input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
---
Table-type VUZFG | only if Section
Table-type UZSN-LZSN | PWATER is
Table-type MON-UZSN if VUZFG= 1 | inactive
---
Table-type MST-PARM

Table-type MST-TOPSTOR
Table-type MST-TOPFLX

Table-type MST-SUBSTOR
Table-type MST-SUBFLX

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above, except MON-UZSN, is
detailed in the documentation which follows. MON-UZSN is documented under the
input for Section PWATER (4.4(1).4).

Note that if all the fields in a table have default values, the table can be
omitted from the User's Control Input. Then, the defaults will be used.

Table-types MST-TOPSTOR through MST-SUBFLX should usually not be supplied. See the
documentation of those tables for further details.

377
 PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input

4.4(1).9.1 Table-type VUZFG -- Variable upper zone flag

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

VUZFG
<-range><vuz>
. . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . .
END VUZFG

*******
Example
*******

VUZFG
<PLS >VUZFG***
# - # ***
1 7 1
END VUZFG

********************************************************************************

Details
---------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
---------------------------------------------------------
<vuz> VUZFG I5 0 0 1
---------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

VUZFG is a flag which indicates whether or not the upper zone nominal storage
varies throughout the year or not. A value of zero means it does not vary, a value
of 1 means it does. If it does vary, the system will expect a table of type
MON-UZSN in the User's Control Input.

Note that Table VUZFG is only required if Section PWATER is inactive. If that
section is active VUZFG would have already been provided in the input for PWATER
(Table-type PWAT-PARM1).

378
 PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input

4.4(1).9.2 Table-type UZSN-LZSN -- Values of UZSN, LZSN and initial

surface storage

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

UZSN-LZSN
<-range><-uzsn-><-lzsn-><-surs->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END UZSN-LZSN

*******
Example
*******

UZSN-LZSN
<PLS > UZSN LZSN SURS ***
# - # in in in ***
1 7 1.0 6.0 .02
END UZSN-LZSN

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<uzsn> UZSN F8.0 none 0.01 10.0 in Engl
none 0.25 250. mm Metric
<lzsn> LZSN F8.0 none 0.01 100. in Engl
none 0.25 2500. mm Metric
<surs> SURS F8.0 .001 .001 100. in Engl
.025 .025 2500. mm Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

379
 PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input

Explanation

This table is only required if Section PWATER is inactive; otherwise, the data
would have already been supplied in the input for Section PWATER.

UZSN is the nominal upper zone storage. The value supplied here is irrelevant if
VUZFG has been set to 1; in that case monthly values for UZSN are supplied in
Table-type MON-UZSN.

LZSN is the nominal lower zone storage.

SURS is the initial surface detention storage.

380
 PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input

4.4(1).9.3 Table-type MST-PARM -- Factors used to adjust solute leaching rates

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MST-PARM
<-range><--------leach-parms--------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MST-PARM

*******
Example
*******

MST-PARM
<PLS > SLMPF ULPF LLPF***
# - # ***
1 7 0.5 2.0 2.0
END MST-PARM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<leach-parms> SLMPF 3F10.0 1.0 .001 1.0 none Both
ULPF 1.0 1.0 10.0 none Both
LLPF 1.0 1.0 10.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

These are the factors that are used to adjust solute percolation rates. SLMPF
affects percolation from the surface layer storage to the upper layer principal
storage. ULPF affects percolation from the upper layer principal storage to the
lower layer storage. LLPF affects percolation from the lower layer storage to the
active and inactive groundwater.

381
 PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input

4.4(1).9.4 Table-type MST-TOPSTOR -- Initial moisture storage in each

topsoil layer

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MST-TOPSTOR
<-range><---------topstor------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MST-TOPSTOR

Example
*******

MST-TOPSTOR
<PLS > Topsoil storages (lb/ac)***
# - # SMSTM UMSTM IMSTM***
1 7 100000 400000 300000
END MST-TOPSTOR

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<topstor> SMSTM 3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none lb/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
UMSTM 0.0 0.0 none lb/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
IMSTM 0.0 0.0 none lb/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is used to specify the initial moisture content in the surface, upper
principal and upper transitory (interflow) storages, respectively.

Note that the values given in this table only affect the water storages for the
start of the first interval in the run; there is no carry-over of the values beyond
the starting instant. Therefore, in most runs, this table need not be supplied;
the default zero values will not cause any problems.

382
 PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input

4.4(1).9.5 Table-type MST-TOPFLX -- Initial fractional fluxes in topsoil layers

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MST-TOPFLX
<-range><-------------------top-flux--------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MST-TOPFLX

*******
Example
*******

MST-TOPFLX
<PLS > Fractional fluxes in topsoil layers (/ivl) ***
# - # FSO FSP FII FUP FIO***
1 7 .07 .03
END MST-TOPFLX

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<top-flux> FSO,FSP,FII, 5F10.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 /ivl Both
FUP,FIO
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

These are the initial values of the fractional fluxes of soluble chemicals through
the topsoil layers of a PLS.

Note that the values supplied in this table apply at the instant that the run
starts. The program computes new values each time step and there is no carry-over
of values from one time step to the next. Therefore, in most runs, you can omit
this table; the default zero values will not cause any problems.

383
 PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input

4.4(1).9.6 Table-type MST-SUBSTOR -- Initial moisture storage in subsurface

layers

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MST-SUBSTOR
<-range><-----substor------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MST-SUBSTOR

*******
Example
*******

MST-SUBSTOR
<PLS >Subsoil moisture (kg/ha)***
# - # LMSTM AMSTM ***
1 7 800000 1000000
END MST-SUBSTOR

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<substor> LMSTM,AMSTM 2F10.0 0.0 0.0 none lb/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

These are the initial moisture storages in the lower layer and active groundwater
layers, respectively.

Usually, this table should be omitted and the default values used. The comments
made on this subject in the explanation for Table-type MST-TOPSTOR are also
applicable here.

384
 PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input

4.4(1).9.7 Table-type MST-SUBFLX -- Initial fractional fluxes in subsurface

layers

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MST-SUBFLX
<-range><----------subflux----------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MST-SUBFLX

*******
Example
*******

MST-SUBFLX
<PLS >Subsurface fractional fluxes (/ivl) ***
# - # FLP FLDP FAO ***
1 7 0.1 0.05
END MST-SUBFLX

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<subflux> FLP,FLDP,FAO 3F10.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 /ivl Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

These are the initial fractional fluxes of soluble chemicals through the subsoil
layers.

Usually, this table should be omitted and the default values taken. The comments
on this subject in the explanation for Table-type MST-TOPFLX are applicable here.

385
 PERLND -- Section PEST Input

4.4(1).10 PERLND BLOCK -- Section PEST input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type PEST-FLAGS]
[Table-type PEST-AD-FLAGS]
Table-type SOIL-DATA
------------------
Table-type PEST-ID |
--- |
Table-type PEST-THETA | |
Table-type PEST-FIRSTPM for surface layer | if |
Table-type PEST-FIRSTPM for upper layer | ADOPFG |
Table-type PEST-FIRSTPM for lower layer | =1 |
Table-type PEST-FIRSTPM for groundwater layer | |
--- |
--- |
Table-type PEST-CMAX | |
Table-type PEST-SVALPM for surface layer | if |
Table-type PEST-SVALPM for upper layer | ADOPFG |
Table-type PEST-SVALPM for lower layer | =2 |
Table-type PEST-SVALPM for groundwater layer | |
--- | repeat for
--- | each
Table-type PEST-CMAX | | pesticide
Table-type PEST-NONSVPM for surface layer | if |
Table-type PEST-NONSVPM for upper layer | ADOPFG |
Table-type PEST-NONSVPM for lower layer | =3 |
Table-type PEST NONSVPM for groundwater layer | |
--- |
Table-type PEST-DEGRAD |
|
Table-type PEST-STOR1 for surface layer storage |
Table-type PEST-STOR1 for upper layer principal storage |
Table-type PEST-STOR2 for upper layer transitory storage |
|
Table-type PEST-STOR1 for lower layer storage |
Table-type PEST-STOR1 for groundwater layer storage |
------------------
********************************************************************************

386
 PERLND -- Section PEST Input

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.

The comments given alongside the table names above indicate under what
circumstances a table is expected.

Note that if all the fields in a table have default values, the table can be
omitted from the User's Control Input. Then, the defaults will be adopted.
However, any tables that are repeated for multiple soil layers should generally not
be omitted because the "nth" occurrence of one of these tables refers to the
corresponding "nth" layer. If a table for layer i is omitted, the next occurrence
of the table (intended for layer i+1) will be applied to layer i, and unintended
results may occur.

ADOPFG is the adsorption/desorption option flag. It is described in the

documentation for Table-type PEST-FLAGS (Sect. 4.4(1).10.1) below.

4.4(1).10.1 Table-type PEST-FLAGS -- Flags for pesticide simulation

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PEST-FLAGS
<-range><nps><----itmax----><----adopt---->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PEST-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******

PEST-FLAGS
<PLS > NPST|Max iterations|Adsorp option ***
# - # |Pst1 Pst2 Pst3|Pst1 Pst2 Pst3***
1 7 2 20 20 1 3
END PEST-FLAGS

********************************************************************************

387
 PERLND -- Section PEST Input

Details

---------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
---------------------------------------------------------
<nps> NPST I5 1 1 3
<itmax> ITMXPS(*) 3I5 30 1 100
<adopt> ADOPFG(*) 3I5 2 1 3
---------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

NPST is the number of pesticides being simulated in the PERLND. NPST is limited
to 3.

ITMXPS is the maximum number of iterations that will be made in trying to solve for
adsorbed and dissolved equilibrium using the Freundlich isotherm. A separate value
may be supplied for each pesticide being simulated. If the Freundlich method is
not being used, these values have no effect.

ADOPFG(*) are flags which indicate which method will be used to simulate
adsorption/desorption for each pesticide:

1 - first-order kinetics
2 - single-value Freundlich method
3 - non-single value Freundlich method

388
 PERLND -- Section PEST Input

4.4(1).10.2 Table-type PEST-AD-FLAGS -- Atmospheric deposition flags for

pesticides

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PEST-AD-FLAGS
<-range> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PEST-AD-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******

PEST-AD-FLAGS
<PLS > Atmospheric deposition flags ***
*** PESTICIDE #1 PESTICIDE #2 PESTICIDE #3
*** CRYS ADSB SOLN CRYS ADSB SOLN CRYS ADSB SOLN
#*** # <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C>
1 7 -1 10 -1 -1 11 12 13 -1 10 0 11 -1 0 0 -1 0
END PEST-AD-FLAGS

********************************************************************************

Details
------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
------------------------------------------------------------
<f><c> PEADFG(*) (1X,2I3) 0 -1 none
------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

PEADFG is an array of flags indicating the source of pesticide atmospheric

deposition data. Each pesticide has three forms: crystalline, adsorbed, and
solution. Each form has two flags. The first is for dry or total deposition flux
(<f>), and the second is for wet deposition concentration (<c>). The flag values
indicate:

0 No deposition of this type is simulated

-1 Deposition of this type is input as time series PEADFX or PEADCN
>0 Deposition of this type is input in the MONTH-DATA table with
the corresponding table ID number. (Refer to Section 4.11 for details)

389
 PERLND -- Section PEST Input

4.4(1).10.3 Table-type SOIL-DATA -- Soil layer depths and bulk densities

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SOIL-DATA
<-range><------------depths------------><-----------bulkdens----------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SOIL-DATA

*******
Example
*******

SOIL-DATA
<PLS >| Depths (ins) | Bulk density (lb/ft3) |***
# - #|Surface Upper Lower Groundw|Surface Upper Lower Groundw|***
1 7 .12 6.0 40.0 80. 80. 120.
END SOIL-DATA

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<depths> none 4F8.0 none .001 1000 in Engl
none .0025 2500 cm Metric
<bulkdens> none 4F8.0 103 50 150 lb/ft3 Engl
1.65 0.80 2.40 g/cm3 Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

The first four values are the depths (thicknesses) of the surface, upper, lower and
groundwater layers, respectively; the second group of four values are the
corresponding bulk densities of the soil in those layers.

The depth and bulk density are multiplied together by the program to obtain the
mass of soil in each layer. This is used to compute the concentrations of adsorbed
chemicals.

390
 PERLND -- Section PEST Input

4.4(1).10.4 Table-type PEST-ID -- Name of pesticide

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PEST-ID
<-range><------pestid------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PEST-ID

*******
Example
*******

PEST-ID
<PLS > Pesticide***
# - # ***
1 7 Atrazine
END PEST-ID

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<pestid> PESTID(*) 5A4 none none none
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table specifies the name of the pesticide to which the data in the following
tables apply.

391
 PERLND -- Section PEST Input

4.4(1).10.5 Table-type PEST-THETA -- Pesticide first-order reaction

temperature correction parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PEST-THETA
<-range><------theta------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PEST-THETA

*******
Example
*******

PEST-THETA
<PLS > Temperature parms ***
# - # THDSPS THADPS ***
1 7 1.07
END PEST-THETA

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<theta> THDSPS,THADPS 2F10.0 1.05 1.00 2.00 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

These parameters are used to adjust the desorption and adsorption rate parameters
(respectively), using a modified Arrhenius equation:

Rate at T = (Rate at 35 deg C) * (theta)**(T-35)

This table is only required if first-order kinetics are used to simulate

adsorption/desorption (ADOPFG=1 in Table-type PEST-FLAGS).

392
 PERLND -- Section PEST Input

4.4(1).10.6 Table-type PEST-FIRSTPM -- Pesticide first-order parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PEST-FIRSTPM
<-range><----firstparm----->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PEST-FIRSTPM

*******
Example
*******

PEST-FIRSTPM
<PLS >First-order parms (/day)***
# - # KDSPS KADPS ***
1 7 .07 .04
END PEST-FIRSTPM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<firstparm> KDSPS,KADPS 2F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

KDSPS and KADPS are the desorption and adsorption rates at 35 deg C.

This table is only required if ADOPFG=1 (first-order kinetics) for this pesticide.

393
 PERLND -- Section PEST Input

4.4(1).10.7 Table-type PEST-CMAX -- Maximum solubility of pesticide

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PEST-CMAX
<-range><--cmax-->
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END PEST-CMAX

*******
Example
*******

PEST-CMAX
<PLS > CMAX***
# - # (ppm)***
1 7 25.0
END PEST-CMAX

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<cmax> CMAX F10.0 0.0 0.0 none ppm Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

CMAX is the maximum solubility of the pesticide in water.

This table is only required if ADOPFG= 2 or 3 for this pesticide (Freundlich method
of simulating adsorption/desorption).

394
 PERLND -- Section PEST Input

4.4(1).10.8 Table-type PEST-SVALPM -- Pesticide parameters for single-value

Freundlich method

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
PEST-SVALPM
<-range><----------svalpm------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PEST-SVALPM

*******
Example
*******
PEST-SVALPM
<PLS > XFIX K1 N1***
# - # (ppm) ***
1 7 20. 4.0 1.5
END PEST-SVALPM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<svalpm> XFIX 3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none ppm Both
K1 0.0 0.0 none l/kg Both
N1 none 1.0 none none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

XFIX is the maximum concentration (on the soil) of pesticide which is permanently
fixed to the soil. K1 and N1 are the coefficient and exponent parameters for the
Freundlich adsorption/desorption equation:

X= K1*C**(1/N1) + XFIX

This table is only used if ADOPFG= 2 for this pesticide (single-value Freundlich
method). Then, the system expects it to appear four times for this pesticide;
first, for the surface layer, second for the upper layer, third for the lower
layer, and fourth for the active groundwater layer.

395
 PERLND -- Section PEST Input

4.4(1).10.9 Table-type PEST-NONSVPM -- Pesticide parameters for non-single

value Freundlich method

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PEST-NONSVPM
<-range><----------------nonsvpm--------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PEST-NONSVPM

*******
Example
*******

PEST-NONSVPM
<PLS > XFIX K1 N1 N2***
# - # (ppm) ***
1 7 15. 5.0 1.5 1.7
END PEST-NONSVPM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<nonsvpm> XFIX 4F10.0 0.0 0.0 none ppm Both
K1 0.0 0.0 none l/kg Both
N1 none 1.0 none none Both
N2 none 1.0 none none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

XFIX is the maximum concentration (on the soil) of pesticide which is permanently
fixed in the soil. K1 and N1 are the coefficient and exponent parameters for the
Freundlich curve used for adsorption. N2 is the exponent parameter for the
auxiliary ("desorption") curve.

This table is only used if ADOPFG= 3 for this pesticide (non-single value
Freundlich method).

396
 PERLND -- Section PEST Input

4.4(1).10.10 Table-type PEST-DEGRAD -- Pesticide degradation rates

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PEST-DEGRAD
<-range><----------------degrad---------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PEST-DEGRAD

*******
Example
*******

PEST-DEGRAD
<PLS > Pesticide degradation rates (/day) ***
# - # Surface Upper Lower Groundw***
1 7 .05 .02 .01
END PEST-DEGRAD

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<degrad> SDGCON,UDGCON, 4F10.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 /day Both
LDGCON,ADGCON
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

These are the degradation rates of the pesticide in the surface, upper, lower and
groundwater layers, respectively. These rates are not adjusted for temperature.

397
 PERLND -- Section PEST Input

4.4(1).10.11 Table-type PEST-STOR1 -- Initial pesticide storage in surface,

upper, lower or groundwater layer

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PEST-STOR1
<-range><-cryst--><---ads--><--soln-->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PEST-STOR1

*******
Example
*******

PEST-STOR1
<PLS >Initial pesticide in surface layer (lb/ac)***
# - # Cryst Ads Soln ***
1 7 10.0 25.0 50.0
END PEST-STOR1

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<cryst>,<ads>, PSCY,PSAD, 3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none lb/ac Engl
<soln> PSSU 0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

PSCY is the pesticide in crystalline form, PSAD is the pesticide in adsorbed form
and PSSU is the pesticide in solution.

The values given in this table apply to one of the following four soil storages:
surface, upper principal, lower or groundwater. The table should appear four
times, once for each layer.

398
 PERLND -- Section PEST Input

4.4(1).10.12 Table-type PEST-STOR2 -- Initial pesticide stored in upper layer

transitory (interflow) storage

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PEST-STOR2
<-range><--ips--->
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END PEST-STOR2

*******
Example
*******

PEST-STOR2
<PLS > Interflow ***
# - # storage(kg/ha)***
1 7 20.0
END PEST-STOR2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ips> IPS F10.0 0.0 0.0 none lb/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

IPS is the initial storage of pesticide in the upper layer transitory (interflow)
storage. Since only dissolved pesticide is modeled in that storage, only one value
is needed (no crystalline or adsorbed material).

399
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11 PERLND BLOCK -- Section NITR input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

Table-type SOIL-DATA if section PEST is inactive

Table-type NIT-FLAGS
Table-type NIT-AD-FLAGS
Table-type NIT-FSTGEN
Table-type NIT-FSTPM for surface layer
Table-type NIT-FSTPM for upper layer
Table-type NIT-FSTPM for lower layer
Table-type NIT-FSTPM for groundwater layer
Table-type NIT-ORGPM for surface layer
Table-type NIT-ORGPM for upper layer
Table-type NIT-ORGPM for lower layer
Table-type NIT-ORGPM for groundwater layer
Table-type NIT-AMVOLAT ---- if AMVOFG= 1
---
Table-type NIT-CMAX |
Table-type NIT-SVALPM for surface layer |
Table-type NIT-SVALPM for upper layer | if FORAFG= 1
Table-type NIT-SVALPM for lower layer |
Table-type NIT-SVALPM for groundwater layer |
---
---
Table-type NIT-UPTAKE ---------------------- if VNUTFG= 0 |
--- |
Table-type MON-NITUPT for surface layer | if VNUTFG= 1 | if NUPTFG=0
Table-type MON-NITUPT for upper layer | |
Table-type MON-NITUPT for lower layer | |
Table-type MON-NITUPT for groundwater layer | |
--- ---
---
Table-type SOIL-DATA2 |
Table-type CROP-DATES |
|
Table-type NIT-YIELD |
Table-type MON-NUPT-FR1 | if NUPTFG= 1
Table-type MON-NUPT-FR2 for surface layer |
Table-type MON-NUPT-FR2 for upper layer |
Table-type MON-NUPT-FR2 for lower layer |
Table-type MON-NUPT-FR2 for groundwater layer |
---

400
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

---
Table-type NIT-UPIMCSAT |
|
Table-type NIT-UPIMKMAX ---- if VNUTFG= 0 |
--- |
Table-type MON-NITUPNI | |
Table-type MON-NITUPAM | if VNUTFG= 1 | if NUPTFG= 2 or -2
Table-type MON-NITIMNI | |
Table-type MON-NITIMAM | |
--- ---
Note: The preceding group of tables each repeat four times, once for each soil
layer, if NUPTFG= 2, but appear only once for all soil layers if NUPTFG= -2
---
Table-type NIT-BGPLRET | if VPRNFG= 0
---
---
Table-type MON-NPRETBG for surface layer |
Table-type MON-NPRETBG for upper layer |
Table-type MON-NPRETBG for lower layer | if VPRNFG=1
Table-type MON-NPRETBG for groundwater layer |
Table-type MON-NPRETFBG |
---
---
Table-type NIT-AGUTF -------------------------- if VNUTFG= 0 |
--- |
Table-type MON-NITAGUTF for surface layer | |
Table-type MON-NITAGUTF for upper layer | |
Table-type MON-NITAGUTF for lower layer | if VNUTFG= 1 |
Table-type MON-NITAGUTF for groundwater layer | | if ALPNFG=1
--- |
|
Table-type NIT-AGPLRET ------------------------- if VPRNFG= 0 |
--- |
Table-type MON-NPRETAG | |
Table-type MON-NPRETLI for surface layer | |
Table-type MON-NPRETLI for upper layer | if VPRNFG= 1 |
Table-type MON-NPRETFLI | |
--- ---
Table-type NIT-STOR1 for surface layer storage
Table-type NIT-STOR1 for upper layer principal storage
Table-type NIT-STOR2 for upper layer transitory storage, above ground plant
and litter storage
Table-type NIT-STOR1 for lower layer storage
Table-type NIT-STOR1 for groundwater layer storage

********************************************************************************

401
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above, except SOIL-DATA, is
detailed in the documentation which follows. SOIL-DATA is documented under the
input for Section PEST (4.4(1).10).

This section is complex, and has many possible tables. Users are cautioned to
carefully observe the options selected and the tables that are required. The
comments given alongside the table names in the above list indicate under what
circumstances a table is expected. The flags that determine the expected/required
tables are described below as well as under the table where they are input
(Table-type NIT-FLAGS in Sect. 4.4(1).11.1, below).

AMVOFG is the ammonia volatilization flag.

FORAFG is the ammonium adsorption/desorption method flag.
VNUTFG is the variable nitrogen plant uptake flag.
NUPTFG is the plant uptake method flag.
ALPNFG is the "above-ground plant N and litter compartment" flag.
VPRNFG is the variable plant return flag.

Note that if all the fields in a table have default values, the table can be
omitted from the User's Control Input. Then, the defaults will be adopted.
However, any tables that are repeated for multiple soil layers should generally
not be omitted because the "nth" occurrence of one of these tables refers to the
corresponding "nth" layer. If a table for layer i is omitted, the next occurrence
of the table (intended for layer i+1) will be applied to layer i, and unintended
results may occur.

402
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.1 Table-type NIT-FLAGS -- Flags for nitrogen simulation

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-FLAGS
<-range><------nitflags--------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******

NIT-FLAGS
<PLS > Nitrogen flags ***
x - x VNUT FORA ITMX BNUM CNUM NUPT FIXN AMVO ALPN VNPR ***
1 7 1 3 1 2 1 1
END NIT-FLAGS

********************************************************************************
Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<nitflags> VNUTFG 10I5 0 0 1
FORAFG 0 0 1
ITMAXA 30 1 100
BNUMN none 1 1000
CNUMN none 1 1000
NUPTFG 0 -2 2
FIXNFG 0 0 1
AMVOFG 0 0 1
ALPNFG 0 0 1
VNPRFG 0 0 1
----------------------------------------------------------

403
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

Explanation

If VNUTFG = 1, the first-order plant uptake parameters for nitrogen are allowed
to vary throughout the year and four tables of type MON-NITUPT (or MON-NITUPNI and
MON-NITUPAM if saturation kinetics are being simulated) are expected in the User's
Control Input. The first appearance is for the surface layer, 2nd for upper
layer, 3rd for the lower layer, and 4th for the groundwater layer. If VNUTFG = 0,
the uptake rates do not vary through the year and a value for each layer is
specified in a single table (Table-type NIT-UPTAKE if first-order kinetics are
being simulated or NIT-UPIMKMAX if saturation kinetics are being simulated).

FORAFG indicates which method is to be used to simulate adsorption and desorption

of ammonium:
0 first-order kinetics
1 single-value Freundlich method

ITMAXA is the maximum number of iterations that will be attempted in solving the
Freundlich equation; applicable only if FORAFG= 1.

BNUMN is the number of time steps that will elapse between recalculation of
biochemical reaction fluxes. For example, if BNUMN = 10 and the simulation time
step is 5 minutes, then these fluxes will be recalculated every 50 minutes. All
reactions except adsorption/desorption fall into this category. CNUMN is the
corresponding number for the chemical (adsorption/desorption) reactions.

NUPTFG indicated which method is to be used to simulate plant uptake of nitrogen:

0 first-order kinetics
1 yield-based algorithm
2 saturation (Michaelis-Menton) kinetics
-2 same as for 2, but with parameters constant over all soil layers

If FIXNFG is 1, nitrogen fixation is simulated. For this option, NUPTFG must also
be 1. If FIXNFG is zero, or if NUPTFG is not 1, then N fixation is turned off.

If AMVOFG is 1, ammonia volatilization is simulated.

If ALPNFG is 1, above-ground and litter compartments for plant nitrogen are

simulated.

If VNPRFG is 1, then the parameters for describing the return of plant nitrogen
to the soil are allowed to vary monthly.

404
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.2 Table-type NIT-AD-FLAGS -- Atmospheric Deposition Flags for

Nitrogen Species

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-AD-FLAGS
<-range> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-AD-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******

NIT-AD-FLAGS
<PLS > Atmospheric deposition flags ***
*** NITRATE AMMONIA ORGANIC N
*** SURF UPPR SURF UPPR SURF UPPR
#*** # <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C>
1 7 -1 10 -1 -1 11 12 13 -1 10 0 11
END NIT-AD-FLAGS
************************************************* *******************************

Details
------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
------------------------------------------------------------
<f><c> NIADFG(*) (1X,2I3) 0 -1 none
------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

NIADFG is an array of flags indicating the source of atmospheric deposition data.

Each species can be deposited into either the surface or upper soil layers. Each
species/layer combination has two flags. The first is for dry or total deposition
flux, and the second is for wet deposition concentration. The flag values
indicate:

0 No deposition of this type is simulated

-1 Deposition of this type is input as time series NIADFX or NIADCN
>0 Deposition of this type is input in the MONTH-DATA table with
the corresponding table ID number. (Refer to Section 4.11 for details)

405
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.3 Table-type NIT-FSTGEN -- Nitrogen first-order general parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-FSTGEN
<-range><upt-fact><------------temp-parms---------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-FSTGEN

*******
Example
*******

NIT-FSTGEN
<PLS > Upt-facts<--------- Temp-parms (theta) ---------> ***
# - # NO3 NH4 PLN KDSA KADA KIMN KAM KDNI KNI KIMA ***
1 7 .5 .5 1.07 1.08
END NIT-FSTGEN

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<upt-fact> NO3UTF 2F5.0 1.0 0.001 1.0 none Both
NH4UTF 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both

<temp-parms> THPLN 8F5.0 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both

THKDSA 1.05 1.0 2.0 none Both
THKADA 1.05 1.0 2.0 none Both
THKIMN 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
THKAM 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
THKDNI 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
THKNI 1.05 1.0 2.0 none Both
THKIMA 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

406
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

Explanation

These general parameters apply to nitrogen reactions in all the layers; thus, this
table only appears once (or not at all, if defaults are used).

NO3UTF and NH4UTF designate which fraction of nitrogen uptake comes from nitrate
and ammonium, respectively. Their sum must be unity; otherwise an error message
is generated. They are used only if first-order or yield-based plant uptake is
being used (NUPTFG = 0 or 1 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS).

The remaining fields specify the temperature coefficients (theta) for the various
reactions:
THPLN Plant uptake (not relevant if NUPTFG = 1)
THKDSA Ammonium desorption (only relevant if FORAFG = 0)
THKADA Ammonium adsorption (only relevant if FORAFG = 0)
THKIMN Nitrate immobilization
THKAM Organic N ammonification
THKDNI NO3 denitrification
THKNI Nitrification
THKIMA Ammonium immobilization

4.4(1).11.4 Table-type NIT-FSTPM -- Nitrogen first-order reaction parameters

for the surface, upper, lower or active groundwater layer

***************************** ***************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789 0123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-FSTPM
<-range><----------------------fstparms-------------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-FSTPM

*******
Example
*******

NIT-FSTPM
<PLS >*** Nitrogen first-order parameters for lower layer (/day)
# - #*** KDSAM KADAM KIMNI KAM KDNI KNI KIMAM
1 7 .05 .03 .02 .05
END NIT-FSTPM

***************************** ***************************************************

407
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

Details

----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<fstparms> KDSAM,KADAM, 7F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
KIMNI,KAM,KDNI,
KNI,KIMAM
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------

Explanation

These are the first-order reaction rate parameters for a layer of soil:
KDSAM Ammonium desorption (only relevant if FORAFG = 0)
KADAM Ammonium adsorption (only relevant if FORAFG = 0)
KIMNI Nitrate immobilization (only relevant if NUPTFG = 0 or 1)
KAM Organic N ammonification
KDNI Denitrification of NO3
KNI Nitrification
KIMAM Ammonium immobilization (only relevant if NUPTFG = 0 or 1)

HSPF expects this table to appear four times in the User's Control Input; first
for the surface layer, second for the upper layer, third for the lower layer, and
fourth for the active groundwater layer. If one or more occurrences of the table
are missing, all reaction parameters for the affected layer(s) will be defaulted
to zero.

408
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.5 Table-type NIT-ORGPM -- Organic nitrogen transformation parameters

for the surface, upper, lower, or groundwater layer

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-ORGPM
<-range><------------------orgpm--------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-ORGPM

*******
Example
*******

NIT-ORGPM
<PLS > KLON KRON KONLR THNLR ***
# - # /day ***
1 3 250. 200. .02 1.07
END NIT-ORGPM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<orgpm> KLON 4F10.0 1.0E20 0.0 1.0E20 none Both
KRON 1.0E20 0.0 1.0E20 none Both
KONLR 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
THNLR 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required in order to simulate detailed organic nitrogen

transformations and transport (designed primarily for forests). The table is
supplied four times - once for each soil layer. If one or more occurrences of the
table are missing, all parameters for the affected layer(s) will be defaulted.

KLON is the particulate/soluble partitioning coefficient for labile organic N.

KRON is the particulate/soluble partitioning coefficient for refractory organic
N. KONLR is the first-order conversion rate of labile to refractory particulate
organic N and THNLR is the associated temperature correction coefficient.

409
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.6 Table-type NIT-AMVOLAT -- Ammonia volatilization parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-AMVOLAT
<-range><-------------------------amvopm--------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-AMVOLAT

*******
Example
*******

NIT-AMVOLAT
<PLS > SKVOL UKVOL LKVOL AKVOL THVOL TRFVOL ***
x - x (/day) (/day) (/day) (/day) (-) (deg C) ***
1 3 0.4 0.2 0.1 0.0 1.07 20.0
END NIT-AMVOLAT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<amvopm> SKVOL,UKVOL, 6F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
LKVOL,AKVOL
THVOL 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
TRFVOL 20.0 0.0 35.0 deg C Both
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------

Explanation

SKVOL, UKVOL, LKVOL, and AKVOL are the ammonia volatilization rates in the
surface, upper, lower, and groundwater layers, respectively. THVOL is the
temperature correction coefficient. TRFVOL is the reference temperature for the
correction.

This table is only used if volatilization of ammonia is simulated (AMVOFG = 1 in

Table-type NIT-FLAGS).

410
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.7 Table-type NIT-CMAX -- Maximum solubility of ammonium

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-CMAX
<-range><--cmax-->
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END NIT-CMAX

*******
Example
*******

NIT-CMAX
<PLS > CMAX***
# - # (ppm)***
1 5 15.0
END NIT-CMAX

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<cmax> CMAX F10.0 0.0 0.0 none ppm Both
------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------

Explanation

CMAX is the maximum solubility of ammonium in water. This table only appears
once, and is only required if FORAFG = 1 (adsorption/desorption is simulated using
single-value Freundlich method).

411
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.8 Table-type NIT-SVALPM -- Nitrogen single value Freundlich

adsorption/desorption parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-SVALPM
<-range><-----------svalpm----------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-SVALPM

*******
Example
*******

NIT-SVALPM
<PLS > XFIX K1 N1***
# - # (ppm) ***
1 3 10.0 5.0 1.2
END NIT-SVALPM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<svalpm> XFIX 3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none ppm Both
K1 0.0 0.0 none l/kg Both
N1 none 1.0 none none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if FORAFG = 1; that is, adsorption and desorption of
ammonium is simulated using the single-value Freundlich method.

This table is exactly analogous to Table-type PEST-SVALPM.

412
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.9 Table-type NIT-UPTAKE -- Nitrogen plant uptake rate parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-UPTAKE
<-range><---------------uptake----------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-UPTAKE

*******
Example
*******

NIT-UPTAKE
<PLS >Nitrogen plant uptake rates (/day) ***
# - # Surface Upper Lower Groundw***
1 2 0.01 0.02 0.01
END NIT-UPTAKE

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<uptake> SKPLN,UKPLN, 4F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
LKPLN,AKPLN
------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------

Explanation

SKPLN, UKPLN, LKPLN and AKPLN are the plant nitrogen uptake reaction rate
parameters for the surface, upper, lower, and active groundwater layers,
respectively. This table is required when first-order plant uptake is being used,
and uptake parameters do not vary monthly (NUPTFG = 0 and VNUTFG = 0 in Table-type
NIT-FLAGS).

413
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.10 Table-type MON-NITUPT -- Monthly plant uptake parameters for

nitrogen, for the surface, upper, lower or groundwater layer

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-NITUPT
<-range><------------------------mon-uptake------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-NITUPT

*******
Example
*******

MON-NITUPT
<PLS > Plant uptake parms for nitrogen in upper layer (/day) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 4 .01 .03 .05 .05 .03 .01
END MON-NITUPT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<mon-uptake> KPLNM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is required if first-order plant uptake is being used and the plant
uptake parameters vary throughout the year (NUPTFG = 0 and VNUTFG = 1 in
Table-type NIT-FLAGS). The entire table is supplied four times; first for the
surface layer, second for the upper layer, third for the lower layer, and fourth
for the active groundwater layer. If omitted, default values will be supplied.
For example, if the third and fourth occurrences of the table are omitted, the
parameters for the lower and groundwater layers will default to zero.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

414
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.11 Table-type SOIL-DATA2 -- Wilting points for yield-based plant

uptake

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SOIL-DATA2
<-range><----wiltpt---------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SOIL-DATA2

*******
Example
*******

SOIL-DATA2
<PLS > Wilting points for each soil layer ***
# - # SURFACE UPPER LOWER ACT GW ***
1 7 .02 .01 .01 .015
END SOIL-DATA2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<wiltpt> SWILTP,UWILTP 4F10.0 0.0 0.0 none none Both
LWILTP,AWILTP
------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------

Explanation

The wilting point, which is input as a fraction (volume-basis) is used to

determine when the soil is too dry for plant uptake to occur when the yield-based
method of plant uptake is being used (NUPTFG = 1 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS and/or
PUPTFG = 1 in Table-type PHOS-FLAGS). This table should only be entered once for
the NITR and PHOS sections.

415
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.12 Table-type CROP-DATES -- Planting and harvesting dates for yield-

based plant uptake

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

CROP-DATES
<-range><ncr> <m><d> <m><d> <m><d> <m><d> <m><d> <m><d>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END CROP-DATES

*******
Example
*******

CROP-DATES
<PLS > CROP 1 CROP 2 CROP 3 ***
# - # NCRP PM PD HM HD PM PD HM HD PM PD HM HD ***
1 2 4 15 8 20 9 5 9 29
END CROP-DATES

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<ncr> NCRP I5 1 1 3
<m> CRPDAT(*) 2I3 1 1 12
<d> 1 1 31
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

NCRP is the number of crops per year.

CRPDAT is the month and day of planting and harvesting for each crop. Crop
seasons cannot overlap, but a season may wrap around the end of the calendar year.

Cropping dates are required only when the yield-based method of plant uptake is
being used (NUPTFG = 1 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS and/or PUPTFG = 1 in Table-type
PHOS-FLAGS). This table should only be entered once for the NITR and PHOS
sections.

416
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.13 Table-type NIT-YIELD -- Yield-based nitrogen plant uptake

parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-YIELD
<-range><-target-><-maxrat->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-YIELD

*******
Example
*******

NIT-YIELD
<PLS > NUPTGT NMXRAT ***
# - # (LB/AC) ***
1 100.00 1.5
END NIT-YIELD

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<-target-> NUPTGT F10.0 0.0 0.0 none lb/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
<-maxrat-> NMXRAT F10.0 1.0 1.0 none none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

NUPTGT is the total annual target for plant uptake of nitrogen for all soil layers
and all crops during the calendar year.

NMXRAT is the ratio of the maximum uptake rate to the optimum (target) rate when
the crop is making up a deficit in nitrogen uptake.

This table is required only when yield-based plant uptake is being used (i.e.,
NUPTFG = 1 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS).

417
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.14 Table-type MON-NUPT-FR1 -- Monthly fractions for yield-based plant

uptake of nitrogen

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-NUPT-FR1
<-range><------------------------mon-nuptfr------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-NUPT-FR1

*******
Example
*******

MON-NUPT-FR1
<PLS > Monthly fractions for plant uptake target ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 .1 .2 .2 .2 .1 .2
2 .1 .1 .05 .05 .1 .1 .1 .05 .05 .1 .1 .1
END MON-NUPT-FR1

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<mon-nuptfr> NUPTFM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------

Explanation

These are the fractions of the total annual nitrogen plant uptake target (NUPTGT
in Table-type NIT-YIELD) applied to each month. The fractions across the year
must sum to unity; otherwise, an error message is generated. This table is only
required when yield-based plant uptake of nitrogen is being used (NUPTFG = 1 in
Table-type NIT-FLAGS).

418
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.15 Table-type MON-NUPT-FR2 -- Monthly fractions for yield-based plant

uptake of nitrogen from a soil layer

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-NUPT-FR2
<-range><------------------------mon-layfr------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-NUPT-FR2

*******
Example
*******

MON-NUPT-FR2
<PLS > Monthly fractions for plant uptake target from surface ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
2 .15 .15 .15 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .15 .12 .12 .1
END MON-NUPT-FR2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<mon-layfr> SNUPTM(*),UNUPTM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
LNUPTM(*),ANUPTM(*)
------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------

Explanation

These are the fractions of the monthly nitrogen plant uptake target (NUPTGT in
Table-type NIT-YIELD times NUPTFM in Table-type MON-NUPT-FR1) applied to each soil
layer: surface, upper, lower, and active groundwater. The fractions across the
four layers (NOT across the 12 months, as for MON-NUPT-FR1) must sum to unity;
otherwise an error message is generated. This table is only required when yield-
based plant uptake of nitrogen is being used (NUPTFG = 1 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS).
Then, the system expects it to appear four times: first, for the surface layer,
second for the upper layer, etc. If one or more occurrences of the table are
missing, all parameters for the affected layer(s) will be defaulted to zero.

419
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.16 Table-type NIT-UPIMCSAT -- Half saturation constants for nitrogen

uptake and immobilization when using saturation kinetics method
(for surface, upper, lower, or groundwater layer)

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

NIT-UPIMCSAT
<-range><---------------csatpm----------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-UPIMCSAT

*******
Example
*******

NIT-UPIMCSAT
<PLS > CSUNI CSUAM CSINI CSIAM ***
x - x (ug/l) (ug/l) (ug/l) (ug/l) ***
1 3 40. 15. 4.0 1.5
END NIT-UPIMCSAT

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<csatpm> CSUNI,CSUAM 4F10.0 0.0 0.0 none ug/l Both
CSINI,CSIAM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explanation

CSUNI and CSUAM are the nitrate and ammonia half saturation constants for uptake.
CSINI and CSIAM are the nitrate and ammonia half saturation constants for
immobilization.

This table is only required if nitrogen uptake and immobilization are being
simulated using the saturation kinetics method (NUPTFG = 2 or -2 in Table-type
NIT-FLAGS). If NUPTFG = 2, HSPF expects this table to appear four times in the
User's Control Input, once for each soil layer. If one or more occurrences of the
table are missing, all parameters for the affected layer(s) will be defaulted to
zero. If NUPTFG = -2, HSPF expects one occurrence of this table, and uses the
same parameters for all four soil layers.

420
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.17 Table-type NIT-UPIMKMAX -- Maximum rate constants for nitrogen

uptake and immobilization when using saturation kinetics method
(for surface, upper, lower, or groundwater layer)

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

NIT-UPIMKMAX
<-range><---------------kmaxpm----------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-UPIMKMAX

*******
Example
*******

NIT-UPIMKMAX
<PLS > Maximum plant uptake and immobilization rates (mg/l/day) ***
x - x KUPNI KUPAM KIMNI KIMAM ***
1 3 1.0 0.6 .05 .02
END NIT-UPIMKMAX

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<kmaxpm> KUPNI,KUPAM 4F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l/day Both
KIMNI,KIMAM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explanation

KUPNI and KUPAM are the nitrate and ammonia maximum uptake rates. KIMNI and KIMAM
are the nitrate and ammonia maximum immobilization rates.

This table is only required if nitrogen uptake and immobilization are being
simulated using the saturation kinetics method (NUPTFG = 2 or -2 in Table-type
NIT-FLAGS). If NUPTFG = 2, HSPF expects this table to appear four times in the
User's Control Input, once for each soil layer. If one or more occurrences of the
table are missing, all parameters for the affected layer(s) will be defaulted to
zero. If NUPTFG = -2, HSPF expects one occurrence of this table, and uses the
same parameters for all four soil layers.

421
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.18 Table-type MON-NITUPNI -- Monthly nitrate uptake maximum rates

when using saturation kinetics method (for the surface, upper,
lower or groundwater layer)

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

MON-NITUPNI
<-range><------------------------mon-upnipm------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-NITUPNI

*******
Example
*******

MON-NITUPNI
<PLS > Maximum plant uptake rate for nitrate (mg/l/day) ***
x - x JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 4 .05 .25 .75 1.2 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 1.2 .75 .25
END MON-NITUPNI

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<mon-upnipm> KUNIM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l/day Both
------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------
Explanation

This table contains the maximum nitrate uptake rates when using the saturation
kinetics method. The table is required if saturation kinetics are being simulated
for uptake and the rates vary monthly (NUPTFG = 2 or -2 and VNUTFG = 1 in Table-
type NIT-FLAGS). If NUPTFG = 2, HSPF expects this table to appear four times in
the User's Control Input, once for each soil layer. If one or more occurrences
of the table are missing, all parameters for the affected layer(s) will be
defaulted to zero. If NUPTFG = -2, HSPF expects one occurrence of this table, and
uses the same parameters for all four soil layers.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

422
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.19 Table-type MON-NITUPAM -- Monthly ammonia uptake maximum rates

when using saturation kinetics method (for the surface, upper,
lower or groundwater layer)

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

MON-NITUPAM
<-range><------------------------mon-upampm------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-NITUPAM

*******
Example
*******

MON-NITUPAM
<PLS > Max ammonia uptake rate in upper layer (mg/l/day) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 4 .03 .06 .12 .30 .45 .60 .60 .60 .45 .30 .15 .08
END MON-NITUPAM

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<mon-upampm> KUAMM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l/day Both
------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------
Explanation

This table contains the maximum ammonia uptake rates when using the saturation
kinetics method. The table is required if saturation kinetics are being simulated
for uptake and the rates vary monthly (NUPTFG = 2 or -2 and VNUTFG = 1 in Table-
type NIT-FLAGS). If NUPTFG = 2, HSPF expects this table to appear four times in
the User's Control Input, once for each soil layer. If one or more occurrences
of the table are missing, all parameters for the affected layer(s) will be
defaulted to zero. If NUPTFG = -2, HSPF expects one occurrence of this table, and
uses the same parameters for all four soil layers.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

423
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.20 Table-type MON-NITIMNI -- Monthly nitrate immobilization rates

when using saturation kinetics method (for the surface, upper,
lower or groundwater layer)

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

MON-NITIMNI
<-range><------------------------mon-imnipm------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-NITIMNI

*******
Example
*******

MON-NITIMNI
<PLS > Nitrate immobilization rate in upper layer (mg/l/day) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 4 .01 .01 .02 .02 .03 .04 .04 .04 .03 .03 .02 .01
END MON-NITIMNI

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<mon-imnipm> KINIM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l/day Both
------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------
Explanation

This table contains the maximum nitrate immobilization rates when using the
saturation kinetics method. The table is required if saturation kinetics are
being simulated for immobilization, and the rates vary monthly (NUPTFG = 2 or -2
and VNUTFG = 1 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS). If NUPTFG = 2, HSPF expects this table
to appear four times in the User's Control Input, once for each soil layer. If
one or more occurrences of the table are missing, all parameters for the affected
layer(s) will be defaulted to zero. If NUPTFG = -2, HSPF expects one occurrence
of this table, and uses the same parameters for all four soil layers.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

424
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.21 Table-type MON-NITIMAM -- Monthly ammonia immobilization rates

when using saturation kinetics method (for the surface, upper,
lower or groundwater layer)

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

MON-NITIMAM
<-range><------------------------mon-imampm------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-NITIMAM

*******
Example
*******

MON-NITIMAM
<PLS > Ammonia immobilization rate in upper layer (mg/l/day) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 4 .01 .01 .01 .02 .02 .02 .03 .03 .02 .02 .02 .01
END MON-NITIMAM

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<mon-imampm> KIAMM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l/day Both
------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------
Explanation

This table contains the maximum ammonia immobilization rates when using the
saturation kinetics method. The table is required if saturation kinetics are
being simulated for immobilization, and the rates vary monthly (NUPTFG = 2 or -2
and VNUTFG = 1 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS). If NUPTFG = 2, HSPF expects this table
to appear four times in the User's Control Input, once for each soil layer. If
one or more occurrences of the table are missing, all parameters for the affected
layer(s) will be defaulted to zero. If NUPTFG = -2, HSPF expects one occurrence
of this table, and uses the same parameters for all four soil layers.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

425
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.22 Table-type NIT-BGPLRET -- Below-ground plant nitrogen return rates.

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-BGPLRET
<-range><---------------plrepm--------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-BGPLRET

*******
Example
*******

NIT-BGPLRET
Below-ground plant return rates and refractory fraction ***
<PLS> SKPRBN UKPRBN LKPRBN AKPRBN BGNPRF ***
x - x (/day) (/day) (/day) (/day) ***
1 3 .02 .01 .01 0.0 0.1
END NIT-BGPLRET

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<plrepm> SKPRBN F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
UKPRBN F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
LKPRBN F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
AKPRBN F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
BGNPRF F10.0 0.0 0.0 none none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

SKPRBN, UKPRBN, LKPRBN, and AKPRBN are the first-order return rates of
below-ground plant N to organic N storage in the four layers. BGNPRF is the
fraction of plant N return that becomes particulate refractory organic N. (The
rest becomes particulate labile organic N.)

This table is only used when plant return rates are constant (VPRNFG = 0 in
Table-type NIT-FLAGS).

426
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.23 Table-type MON-NPRETBG -- Monthly below-ground plant N return

rates for the surface, upper, lower or groundwater layer

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-NPRETBG
<-range><------------------------mon-plrepm------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-NPRETBG

*******
Example
*******

MON-NPRETBG
<PLS > Return rates for below-ground plant N in upper layer (/day) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 4 .01 .03 .05 .05 .03 .01
END MON-NPRETBG

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<mon-plrepm> KRBNM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table contains the first-order return rates of below-ground plant N to

organic N. The table is used if the plant N return parameters vary throughout the
year (VPLRFG = 1 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS). The entire table is supplied four
times; first for the surface layer, second for the upper layer, third for the
lower layer, and fourth for the active groundwater layer. If omitted, default
values will be supplied. For example, if the third and fourth occurrences of the
table are omitted, the parameters for the lower and groundwater layers will
default to zero.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

427
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.24 Table-type MON-NPRETFBG -- Monthly refractory fractions for

below-ground plant N return

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-NPRETFBG
<-range><------------------------mon-plrefr------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-NPRETFBG

*******
Example
*******

MON-NPRETFBG
<PLS > Monthly refractory fractions for below-ground plant N return ***
x - x JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 4 .02 .02 .03 .04 .04 .05 .05 .05 .04 .04 .03 .03
END MON-NPRETFBG

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<mon-plrefr> BNPRFM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table contains the fractions of below-ground plant N return which become
particulate refractory organic N. (The rest becomes particulate labile organic
N.) The table is used only if the plant N return parameters vary throughout the
year (VPLRFG = 1 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS).

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

428
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.25 Table-type NIT-AGUTF -- Above-ground plant uptake fractions

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-AGUTF
<-range><---------------agutf------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-AGUTF

*******
Example
*******

NIT-AGUTF
<PLS > Above-ground plant uptake fractions ***
x - x SANUTF UANUTF LANUTF AANUTF ***
1 3 0.8 0.8 0.7 0.7
END NIT-AGUTF

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<agutf> SANUTF,UANUTF, 4F10.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
LANUTF,AANUTF
------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------
Explanation

SANUTF, UANUTF, LANUTF and AANUTF are the above-ground plant uptake fractions for
the surface, upper, lower, and active groundwater layers, respectively. This table
is used only when the above-ground compartment is being simulated and uptake
parameters do not vary monthly (ALPNFG = 1 and VNUTFG = 0 in Table-type
NIT-FLAGS).

429
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.26 Table-type MON-NITAGUTF -- Monthly above-ground plant uptake

fractions for nitrogen, for the surface, upper, lower or
groundwater layer

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

MON-NITAGUTF
<-range><------------------------mon-agutf------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-NITAGUTF

*******
Example
*******

MON-NITAGUTF
<PLS > Monthly above-ground fractions for plant uptake ***
x - x JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 4 .70 .70 .70 .75 .75 .80 .80 .80 .75 .75 .70 .70
END MON-NITAGUTF

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<mon-agutf> ANUFM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------

Explanation

This table contains the fractions of plant uptake which go to above-ground plant
N storage. The table is used only if the above-ground compartment is being
simulated and the plant uptake parameters vary throughout the year (ALPNFG = 1 and
VNUTFG = 1 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS). The table is supplied four times; first for
the surface layer, second for the upper layer, third for the lower layer, and
fourth for the active groundwater layer. If omitted, default values will be
supplied. For example, if the third and fourth occurrences of the table are
omitted, the parameters for the lower and groundwater layers will default to zero.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

430
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.27 Table-type NIT-AGPLRET -- Above-ground plant nitrogen return rates.

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-AGPLRET
<-range><------------plrepm-------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-AGPLRET

*******
Example
*******

NIT-AGPLRET
Above-ground plant return rates and refractory fraction
<PLS> AGKPRN SKPRLN UKPRLN LINPRF
x - x (/day) (/day) (/day)
1 3 .01 .02 .01 0.1
END NIT-AGPLRET

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<plrepm> AGKPRN F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
SKPRLN F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
UKPRLN F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
LINPRF F10.0 0.0 0.0 none none Both
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Explanation

AGKPRN is the first-order return rate of above-ground plant N to litter N. SKPRLN

and UKPRLN are the first-order return rates of litter N to organic N storage in
the surface and upper soil layers, respectively. LINPRF is the fraction of litter
N return that becomes particulate refractory organic N. (The rest becomes
particulate labile organic N.)

This table is only used when the above-ground and litter compartments are being
simulated for nitrogen, and plant return rates are constant (i.e., ALPNFG = 1 and
VPRNFG = 0 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS).

431
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.28 Table-type MON-NPRETAG -- Monthly above-ground plant N return

rates to litter N

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-NPRETAG
<-range><------------------------mon-plrepm------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-NPRETAG

*******
Example
*******

MON-NPRETAG
<PLS > Return rates for above-ground plant N to litter N (/day) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 4 .01 .03 .05 .05 .03 .01
END MON-NPRETAG

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<mon-plrepm> KRANM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table contains the first-order return rate of above-ground plant N to litter
N. The table is used only when the above-ground compartment is being simulated
and the plant N return parameters vary throughout the year (i.e., ALPNFG = 1 and
VPLRFG = 1 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS).

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

432
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.29 Table-type MON-NPRETLI -- Monthly litter plant N return

rates for the surface or upper layer

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-NPRETLI
<-range><------------------------mon-plrepm------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-NPRETLI

*******
Example
*******

MON-NPRETLI
<PLS > Return rates for litter plant N to upper layer (/day) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 4 .01 .03 .05 .05 .03 .01
END MON-NPRETLI

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<mon-plrepm> KRLNM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table contains the return rates of litter plant N to particulate labile
organic N in the surface or upper layer. The table is required if the plant N
return parameters vary throughout the year (VPLRFG = 1 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS).
The entire table is supplied two times; first for the surface layer and second for
the upper layer. If omitted, default values will be supplied. For example, if
the second occurrence of the table is omitted, the parameters for the upper layer
will default to zero.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

433
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.30 Table-type MON-NPRETFLI -- Monthly refractory fractions for

litter N return

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-NPRETFLI
<-range><------------------------mon-plrefr------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-NPRETFLI

*******
Example
*******

MON-NPRETFLI
<PLS > Monthly refractory fractions for litter N return ***
x - x JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 4 .02 .02 .03 .04 .04 .05 .05 .05 .04 .04 .03 .03
END MON-NPRETFLI

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<mon-plrefr> LNPRFM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table contains the fractions of litter N return which become particulate
refractory organic N. (The rest becomes particulate labile organic N.) The table
is used only if the litter compartment is being simulated and the plant N return
parameters vary throughout the year (ALPNFG = 1 and VPLRFG = 1 in Table-type
NIT-FLAGS).

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

434
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.31 Table-type NIT-STOR1 -- Initial storage of nitrogen in the surface,

upper, lower, or groundwater layer

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-STOR1
<-range><-----------------------nit-stor1-------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-STOR1

*******
Example
*******

NIT-STOR1
<PLS > Initial storage of N (lb/ac) ***
x - x LORGN AMAD AMSU NO3 PLTN RORGN ***
1 4 100. 500. 50.
END NIT-STOR1

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<nit-stor1> LORGN,AMAD,AMSU, 6F10.0 0.0 0.0 none lb/ac Engl
NO3,PLTN,RORGN 0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is similar in organization to Table-type PEST-STOR1. It specifies the

initial storage of N in one of the four major soil layers. The values in the
table are:

LORGN Labile organic nitrogen

AMAD Adsorbed ammonium
AMSU Solution ammonium
NO3 Nitrate
PLTN Nitrogen stored in plants
RORGN Refractory organic nitrogen

435
 PERLND -- Section NITR Input

4.4(1).11.32 Table-type NIT-STOR2 -- Initial storage of nitrogen in upper

layer transitory (interflow) storage

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NIT-STOR2
<-range><-------------------------nit-stor2------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NIT-STOR2

*******
Example
*******

NIT-STOR2
<PLS > Initial N in interflow, above-ground, and litter storage (lb/ac) ***
x - x IAMSU INO3 ISLON ISRON AGPLTN LITTRN ***
1 2 100. 10.
END NIT-STOR2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<nit-stor2> IAMSU,INO3,ISLON, 6F10.0 0.0 0.0 none lb/ac Engl
ISRON,AGPLTN,LITTRN 0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------

Explanation

This table specifies the initial storage of N in the upper layer transitory
(interflow) storage. If the above-ground and litter compartments are being
simulated (ALPNFG = 1 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS), then the initial storage for these
compartments is also specified.

IAMSU Solution ammonium

INO3 Nitrate
ISLON Solution labile organic nitrogen
ISRON Solution refractory organic nitrogen
AGPLTN Above-ground plant nitrogen (only relevant if ALPNFG = 1)
LITTRN Litter nitrogen (only relevant if ALPNFG = 1)

436
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

4.4(1).12 PERLND BLOCK -- Section PHOS input

***************************** ***************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789 0123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

Table-type SOIL-DATA if sections PEST and NITR are inactive

Table-type PHOS-FLAGS
Table-type PHOS-AD-FLAGS
Table-type PHOS-FSTGEN
Table-type PHOS-FSTPM for surface layer
Table-type PHOS-FSTPM for upper layer
Table-type PHOS-FSTPM for lower layer
Table-type PHOS-FSTPM for groundwater layer
---
Table-type PHOS-CMAX |
Table-type PHOS-SVALPM for surface layer | if (single value
Table-type PHOS-SVALPM for upper layer | FORPFG= Freundlich
Table-type PHOS-SVALPM for lower layer | 1 method)
Table-type PHOS-SVALPM for groundwater layer |
---
---
Table-type PHOS-UPTAKE ---------------------- if VPUTFG= 0 |
--- |
Table-type MON-PHOSUPT for surface layer | if VPUTFG= 1 | if PUPTFG= 0
Table-type MON-PHOSUPT for upper layer | |
Table-type MON-PHOSUPT for lower layer | |
Table-type MON-PHOSUPT for groundwater layer | |
--- ---
--- ---
Table-type SOIL-DATA2 | if NITR is inactive |
Table-type CROP-DATES | or NUPTFG= 0 |
--- |
Table-type PHOS-YIELD |
Table-type MON-PUPT-FR1 | if PUPTFG= 1
Table-type MON-PUPT-FR2 for surface layer |
Table-type MON-PUPT-FR2 for upper layer |
Table-type MON-PUPT-FR2 for lower layer |
Table-type MON-PUPT-FR2 for groundwater layer |
---
Table-type PHOS-STOR1 for surface layer storage
Table-type PHOS-STOR1 for upper layer principal storage
Table-type PHOS-STOR2 for upper layer transitory storage
Table-type PHOS-STOR1 for lower layer storage
Table-type PHOS-STOR1 for groundwater layer storage

*********************************************************** *********************

437
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

Explanation:

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above, except for SOIL-DATA,
SOIL-DATA2 and CROP-DATES, is detailed in the documentation which follows.
SOIL-DATA is documented under the input for Section PEST (4.4(1).10). SOIL-DATA2
and CROP-DATES are documented under the input for Section NITR (4.4(1).11).

The comments given alongside the table names above indicate under what
circumstances a table is expected. Note that if all the fields in a table have
default values, the table can be omitted from the User's Control Input. Then, the
defaults will be adopted. However, any tables that are repeated for multiple soil
layers should generally not be omitted because the "nth" occurrence of one of
these tables refers to the corresponding "nth" layer. If a table for layer i is
omitted, the next occurrence of the table (intended for layer i+1) will be applied
to layer i, and unintended results may occur.

NUPTFG and PUPTFG are the plant uptake method flag for nitrogen and phosphorus,
respectively. VPUTFG and FORPFG are the phosphorus plant uptake flag and the
phosphate adsorption/desorption method flag, respectively. NUPTFG is described
under Table-type NIT-FLAGS (Sect. 4.4(1).11.1) above. The others are described
under Table-type PHOS-FLAGS (Sect. 4.4(1).12.1) below.

438
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

4.4(1).12.1 Table-type PHOS-FLAGS -- Flags governing simulation of phosphorus

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PHOS-FLAGS
<-range><-------phosflags------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PHOS-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******

PHOS-FLAGS
<PLS > VPUT FORP ITMX BNUM CNUM PUPT ***
# - #
1 4 1 10 10 1
END PHOS-FLAGS

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<phosflags> VPUTFG 5I5 0 0 1
FORPFG 0 0 1
ITMAXP 30 1 100
BNUMP none 1 1000
CNUMP none 1 1000
PUPTFG 0 0 1
----------------------------------------------------------

439
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

Explanation

If VPUTFG = 1, the first-order plant uptake parameters for phosphorus are allowed
to vary throughout the year and four tables of type MON-PHOSUPT are expected in
the User's Control Input. The first appearance is for the surface layer, 2nd for
upper layer, 3rd for the lower layer, and 4th for the groundwater layer. If VPUTFG
= 0, the uptake rates do not vary through the year and a value for each layer is
specified in a single table (Table-type PHOS-UPTAKE).

FORPFG indicates which method is to be used to simulate adsorption and desorption

of phosphate:
0 first-order kinetics
1 single-value Freundlich method

ITMAXP is the maximum number of iterations that will be attempted in solving the
Freundlich equation; applicable only if FORPFG= 1.

BNUMP is the number of time steps that will elapse between recalculation of
biochemical reaction fluxes. For example, if BNUMP = 10 and the simulation time
step is 5 minutes, then these fluxes will be recalculated every 50 minutes. All
reactions except adsorption/desorption fall into this category. CNUMP is the
corresponding number for the chemical (adsorption/desorption) reactions.

PUPTFG indicated which method is to be used to simulate plant uptake of

phosphorus:
0 first-order kinetics
1 yield-based algorithm

440
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

4.4(1).12.2 Table-type PHOS-AD-FLAGS -- Atmospheric deposition flags for PHOS

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PHOS-AD-FLAGS
<-range> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PHOS-AD-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******

PHOS-AD-FLAGS
<PLS > Atmospheric deposition flags ***
*** PHOSPHATE ORGANIC P
*** SURF UPPR SURF UPPR
#*** # <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C>
1 7 -1 10 -1 -1 11 12 13 -1
END PHOS-AD-FLAGS
************************************************* *******************************

Details
------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
------------------------------------------------------------
<f><c> PHADFG(*) (1X,2I3) 0 -1 none
------------------------------------------------------------
Explanation

PHADFG is an array of flags indicating the source of atmospheric deposition data.

Each species can be deposited into either the surface or upper soil layers. Each
species/layer combination has two flags. The first is for dry or total deposition
flux, and the second is for wet deposition concentration. The flag values
indicate:
0 No deposition of this type is simulated
-1 Deposition of this type is input as time series PHADFX or
PHADCN
>0 Deposition of this type is input in the MONTH-DATA table with
the corresponding table ID number. (Refer to Section 4.11 for details)

441
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

4.4(1).12.3 Table-type PHOS-FSTGEN -- Temperature correction parameters

for phosphorus reactions

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PHOS-FSTGEN
<-range><-------------------theta------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PHOS-FSTGEN

Example
*******

PHOS-FSTGEN
<PLS > Temperature correction parameters (theta) ***
# - # THPLP THKDSP THKADP THKIMP THKMP***
1 1.07 1.05
END PHOS-FSTGEN

****************************************************** *************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<theta> THPLP 5F10.0 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
THKDSP 1.05 1.0 2.0 none Both
THKADP 1.05 1.0 2.0 none Both
THKIMP 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
THKMP 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is analogous to Table-type NIT-FSTGEN, except for the first two values
in that table. The temperature correction parameters supplied in this table (and
the reactions they affect) are:

THPLP Plant uptake (only relevant if PUPTFG=0 in Table PHOS-FLAGS)

THKDSP Phosphate desorption (only relevant if FORPFG=0 in Table PHOS-FLAGS)
THKADP Phosphate adsorption (only relevant if FORPFG=0 in Table PHOS-FLAGS)
THKIMP Phosphate immobilization
THKMP Organic P mineralization

442
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

4.4(1).12.4 Table-type PHOS-FSTPM -- Phosphorus first-order reaction parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PHOS-FSTPM
<-range><---------------phos-fstpm------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PHOS-FSTPM

*******
Example
*******

PHOS-FSTPM
<PLS > Phosphorus first-order parameters for surface layer (/day) ***
# - # KDSP KADP KIMP KMP ***
1 5 .04
END PHOS-FSTPM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<phos-fstpm> KDSP,KADP, 4F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
KIMP,KMP
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is analogous to Table-type NIT-FSTPM. The reaction rate parameters

supplied in this table are:

KDSP Phosphate desorption (only used if FORPFG=0 in Table-type PHOS-FLAGS)

KADP Phosphate adsorption (only used if FORPFG=0 in Table-type PHOS-FLAGS)
KIMP Phosphate immobilization
KMP Organic P mineralization

443
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

4.4(1).12.5 Table-type PHOS-CMAX -- Maximum solubility of phosphate

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PHOS-CMAX
<-range><--cmax-->
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END PHOS-CMAX

*******
Example
*******

PHOS-CMAX
<PLS > CMAX***
# - # (ppm)***
1 2 5.0
END PHOS-CMAX

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<cmax> CMAX F10.0 0.0 0.0 none ppm Both
------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------

Explanation

This table is exactly analogous to Table-type NIT-CMAX.

CMAX is the maximum solubility of phosphate in water. This table only appears
once, and is only required if FORPFG = 1 in Table-type PHOS-FLAGS
(adsorption/desorption is simulated using single-value Freundlich method).

444
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

4.4(1).12.6 Table-type PHOS-SVALPM -- Phosphorus single value Freundlich

adsorption/desorption parameters

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

PHOS-SVALPM
<-range><---------svalpm------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PHOS-SVALPM

*******
Example
*******

PHOS-SVALPM
<PLS > Parameters for Freundlich method (lower layer) ***
# - # XFIX K1 N1 ***
1 30. 5.0 1.5
END PHOS-SVALPM

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<svalpm> XFIX 3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none ppm Both
K1 0.0 0.0 none Both
N1 none 1.0 none Both
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is exactly analogous to Table-type NIT-SVALPM. It is only used if

FORPFG= 1 in Table-type PHOS-FLAGS.

445
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

4.4(1).12.7 Table-type PHOS-UPTAKE -- Phosphorus plant uptake parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PHOS-UPTAKE
<-range><--------------phos-uptake------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PHOS-UPTAKE

*******
Example
*******

PHOS-UPTAKE
<PLS > Phosphorus plant uptake parms (/day) ***
# - # SKPLP UKPLP LKPLP AKPLP***
1 .005 .03 .05 .01
END PHOS-UPTAKE

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<phos-uptake> SKPLP,UKPLP, 4F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
LKPLP,AKPLP
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is exactly analogous to Table-type NIT-UPTAKE.

SKPLP, UKPLP, LKPLP and AKPLP are the plant phosphorus uptake reaction rate
parameters for the surface, upper, lower, and active groundwater layers,
respectively. This table is required when first-order plant uptake is being used,
and uptake parameters do not vary monthly (PUPTFG = 0 and VPUTFG = 0 in Table-type
PHOS-FLAGS).

446
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

4.4(1).12.8 Table-type MON-PHOSUPT -- Monthly plant uptake parameters for

phosphorus, for the surface, upper, lower or groundwater layer

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******
MON-PHOSUPT
<-range><------------------------mon-phosupt----------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-PHOSUPT

*******
Example
*******
MON-PHOSUPT
<PLS > Monthly phosphorus uptake parameters for surface layer (/day)***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
1 2 .01 .03 .07 .07 .04 .01
END MON-PHOSUPT

***************************** ***************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<mon-phosupt> KPLPM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is exactly analogous to Table-type MON-NITUPT.

This table is required if first-order plant uptake is being used and the plant
uptake parameters vary throughout the year (PUPTFG = 0 and VPUTFG = 1 in
Table-type PHOS-FLAGS). The entire table is supplied four times; first for the
surface layer, second for the upper layer, third for the lower layer, and fourth
for the active groundwater layer. If omitted, default values will be supplied.
For example, if the third and fourth occurrences of the table are omitted, the
parameters for the lower and groundwater layers will default to zero.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

447
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

4.4(1).12.9 Table-type PHOS-YIELD -- Yield-based phosphorus plant uptake

parameters

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

PHOS-YIELD
<-range><-target-><-maxrat->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PHOS-YIELD

*******
Example
*******
PHOS-YIELD
<PLS > PUPTGT PMXRAT ***
# - # (LB/AC) ***
1 100.00 1.5
END PHOS-YIELD

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<-target-> PUPTGT F10.0 0.0 0.0 none lb/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
<-maxrat-> PMXRAT F10.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is exactly analogous to Table-type NIT-YIELD.

PUPTGT is the total annual target for plant uptake of phosphorus for all soil
layers and all crops during the calendar year.

PMXRAT is the ratio of the maximum uptake rate to the optimum (target) rate when
the crop is making up a deficit in phosphorus uptake.

This table is required only when yield-based plant uptake is being used (i.e.,
PUPTFG = 1 in Table-type PHOS-FLAGS).

448
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

4.4(1).12.10 Table-type MON-PUPT-FR1 -- Monthly fractions for yield-based plant

uptake of phosphorus

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

MON-PUPT-FR1
<-range><------------------------mon-puptfr------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-PUPT-FR1

*******
Example
*******

MON-PUPT-FR1
<PLS > Monthly fractions for plant uptake target ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 .1 .2 .2 .2 .1 .2
2 .1 .1 .05 .05 .1 .1 .1 .05 .05 .1 .1 .1
END MON-PUPT-FR1

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-puptfr> PUPTFM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is exactly analogous to Table-type MON-NUPT-FR1.

These are the fractions of the total annual phosphorus plant uptake target (PUPTGT
in Table-type PHOS-YIELD) applied to each month. The fractions across the year
must sum to unity; otherwise, an error message is generated. This table is only
required when yield-based plant uptake of phosphorus is being used (PUPTFG = 1 in
Table-type PHOS-FLAGS).

449
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

4.4(1).12.11 Table-type MON-PUPT-FR2 -- Monthly fractions for yield-based plant

uptake of phosphorus from a soil layer

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

MON-PUPT-FR2
<-range><------------------------mon-layfr------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-PUPT-FR2

*******
Example
*******

MON-PUPT-FR2
<PLS > Monthly fractions for plant uptake target from surface ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
2 .15 .15 .15 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .15 .12 .12 .1
END MON-PUPT-FR2

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<mon-layfr> SPUPTM(*),UPUPTM(*) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
LPUPTM(*),APUPTM(*)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is exactly analogous to Table-type MON-NUPT-FR2. Refer to that table

for details.

450
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

4.4(1).12.12 Table-type PHOS-STOR1 -- Initial phosphorus storage in the surface,

upper, lower or groundwater layer

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

PHOS-STOR1
<-range><--------------phos-stor1-------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PHOS-STOR1

*******
Example
*******

PHOS-STOR1
<PLS >Initial phosphorus in upper layer (lb/ac) ***
# - # ORGP P4AD P4SU PLTP ***
1 3 50. 2000. 200.
END PHOS-STOR1

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<phos-stor1> ORGP,P4AD, 4F10.0 0.0 0.0 none lb/ac Engl
P4SU,PLTP 0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is analogous to Table-type NIT-STOR1. It specifies the initial storage

of P in one of the four major soil layers. The values in the table are:

ORGP Organic phosphorus

P4AD Adsorbed phosphate
P4SU Solution phosphate
PLTP Phosphorus stored in plants

451
 PERLND -- Section PHOS Input

4.4(1).12.13 Table-type PHOS-STOR2 -- Initial storage of phosphate in upper

layer transitory (interflow) storage

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

PHOS-STOR2
<-range><--phos-->
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END PHOS-STOR2

*******
Example
*******

PHOS-STOR2
<PLS >Phosphate in interflow (kg/ha) ***
# - # IP4SU ***
1 6 100.
END PHOS-STOR2

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<phos> IP4SU F10.0 0.0 0.0 none lb/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is analogous to Table-type NIT-STOR2. It specifies the initial storage

of solution phosphate in the upper layer transitory (interflow) storage.

452
 PERLND -- Section TRACER Input

4.4(1).13 PERLND BLOCK -- Section TRACER input

***************************** ***************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789 0123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

Table-type TRAC-ID
[Table-type TRAC-AD-FLAGS]
[Table-type TRAC-TOPSTOR]
[Table-type TRAC-SUBSTOR]

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.

Note: if all the fields in a table have default values, the table can be omitted
from the User's Control Input. Then, the defaults will be adopted.

453
 PERLND -- Section TRACER Input

4.4(1).13.1 Table-type TRAC-ID -- Name of conservative substance (tracer)

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

TRAC-ID
<-range><-----trac-id------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END TRAC-ID

*******
Example
*******

TRAC-ID
<PLS >Name of tracer ***
# - # ***
1 10 Chloride
END TRAC-ID

********************************************************************************

Details
-----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
-----------------------------------------------------------
<trac-id> TRACID(*) 5A4 none none none
-----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

Any 20 character string can be supplied as the name of the tracer substance.

454
 PERLND -- Section TRACER Input

4.4(1).13.2 Table-type TRAC-AD-FLAGS -- Atmospheric deposition flags for TRACER

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

TRAC-AD-FLAGS
<-range> <f><c> <f><c>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END TRAC-AD-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******

TRAC-AD-FLAGS
<PLS > Atmospheric deposition flags ***
*** SURF UPPR
#*** # <F><C> <F><C>
1 7 -1 10 -1 -1
END TRAC-AD-FLAGS
********************************************************************************

Details
------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
------------------------------------------------------------
<f><c> TRADFG(*) (1X,2I3) 0 -1 none
------------------------------------------------------------
Explanation

TRADFG is an array of flags indicating the source of atmospheric deposition data.

The tracer substance can be deposited into either the surface or upper soil
layers. Each layer has two flags. The first is for dry or total deposition flux,
and the second is for wet deposition concentration. The flag values indicate:

0 No deposition of this type is simulated

-1 Deposition of this type is input as time series TRADFX or TRADCN
>0 Deposition of this type is input in the MONTH-DATA table with
the corresponding table ID number. (Refer to Section 4.11 for details)

455
 PERLND -- Section TRACER Input

4.4(1).13.3 Table-type TRAC-TOPSTOR -- Initial quantity of tracer in topsoil

storages

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

TRAC-TOPSTOR
<-range><---------trac-topstor------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END TRAC-TOPSTOR

*******
Example
*******

TRAC-TOPSTOR
<PLS >Initial storage of chloride in topsoil (kg/ha) ***
# - # STRSU UTRSU ITRSU ***
1 200.
END TRAC-TOPSTOR

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<trac-topstor> STRSU,UTRSU, 3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none lb/ac Engl
ITRSU 0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table specifies the initial storage of tracer (conservative) in the surface,
upper principal, and upper transitory (interflow) storages.

456
 PERLND -- Section TRACER Input

4.4(1).13.4 Table-type TRAC-SUBSTOR -- Initial quantity of tracer in lower and

active groundwater storages

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

TRAC-SUBSTOR
<-range><---trac-substor--->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END TRAC-SUBSTOR

*******
Example
*******

TRAC-SUBSTOR
<PLS >Initial storage of chloride in subsoil layers (lb/ac) ***
# - # LTRSU ATRSU ***
1 300. 500.
END TRAC-SUBSTOR

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<trac-substor> LTRSU,ATRSU 2F10.0 0.0 0.0 none lb/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table specifies the initial storage of conservative (tracer) material in the
lower and active groundwater layers.

457
 IMPLND Block

4.4(2) IMPLND Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

IMPLND
General input
[section ATEMP input]
[section SNOW input]
[section IWATER input]
[section SOLIDS input]
[section IWTGAS input]
[section IQUAL input]
END IMPLND

************************************************* *******************************

Explanation

This block contains the data which are domestic to all the Impervious Land-
segments in the RUN. The General input is always relevant: other input is only
required if the module section concerned is active.

4.4(2).1 IMPLND BLOCK -- General input

*************************************** *****************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789 012345678901234567890
***************************** ***************************************************
Layout
******

Table-type ACTIVITY
[Table-type PRINT-INFO]
Table-type GEN-INFO

***************************** ***************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.

Tables enclosed in brackets [] above are not always required; for example, because
all the values can be defaulted.

458
 IMPLND -- General Input

4.4(2).1.1 Table-type ACTIVITY -- Active Sections Vector

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

ACTIVITY
<-range><---------a-s-vector--------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END ACTIVITY

*******
Example
*******

ACTIVITY
<ILS > Active Sections ***
# - # ATMP SNOW IWAT SLD IWG IQAL ***
1 7 1 1 1
9 0 0 0 1
END ACTIVITY

************************************************* *******************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------------------
<a-s-vector> AIRTFG,SNOWFG,IWATFG, 6I5 0 0 1
SLDFG,IWGFG,IQALFG
----------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

The IMPLND module is divided into 6 sections. The values supplied in this table
specify which sections are active and which are not, for each operation involving
the IMPLND module. A value of 0 means inactive and 1 means active. Any meaningful
subset of sections may be active.

459
 IMPLND -- General Input

4.4(2).1.2 Table-type PRINT-INFO -- Printout information for IMPLND

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PRINT-INFO
<-range><--------print-flags---------><piv><pyr>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PRINT-INFO

*******
Example
*******

PRINT-INFO
<ILS > ******** Print-flags ******** PIVL PYR
# - # ATMP SNOW IWAT SLD IWG IQAL *********
1 7 2 4 6 10 12
END PRINT-INFO

********************************************************************************

Details
-------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
-------------------------------------------------------------
<print-flags> PFLAG(6) 6I5 4 2 6

<piv> PIVL I5 1 1 1440

<pyr> PYREND I5 9 1 12
-------------------------------------------------------------

460
 IMPLND -- General Input

Explanation

HSPF permits the user to vary the printout level (maximum frequency) for the
various active sections of an operation. The meaning of each permissible value
for PFLAG() is:

2 means every PIVL intervals

3 means every day
4 means every month
5 means every year
6 means never

In the example above, output from Impervious Land-segments 1 thru 7 will occur as
follows:

Section Maximum frequency

ATEMP 10 intervals
SNOW month
IWATER never
SOLIDS --
thru | month (defaulted)
IQUAL --

A value need only be supplied for PIVL if one or more sections have a printout
level of 2. For those sections, printout will occur every PIVL intervals (that
is, every PDELT=PIVL*DELT minutes). PIVL must be chosen such that there are an
integer number of PDELT periods in a day.

HSPF will automatically provide printed output at all standard intervals greater
than the specified minimum interval. In the above example, output for section
ATEMP will be printed at the end of each 10 intervals, day, month and year.

PYREND is the calendar month which will terminate the year for printout purposes.
Thus, the annual summary can reflect the situation over the past water year or the
past calendar year, etc.

461
 IMPLND -- General Input

4.4(2).1.3 Table-type GEN-INFO -- Other general information for IMPLND

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GEN-INFO
<-range><---ILS-id---------> <unitsyst><-printu->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GEN-INFO

*******
Example
*******

GEN-INFO
<ILS > Name UnitSysts Printout ***
# - # t-series Engl Metr ***
in out ***
1 Chicago loop
2 Astrodome 1 23
END GEN-INFO

********************************************************************************

Details
-------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
-------------------------------------------------------------
<ILS-id> LSID(5) 5A4 none none none

<unit-syst> IUNITS,OUNITS 2I5 1 1 2

<printu> PUNIT(2) 2I5 0 0 99

-------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

Any string of up to 20 characters may be supplied as the identifier for an IMPLND.

The values supplied for IUNITS and OUNITS indicate the system of units for input
and output time series, respectively. 1 means English units, 2 means Metric units.

462
 IMPLND -- General Input

Note: All operations in the run must use the same units system for data in the UCI
file; therefore, this system of units is specified by EMFG in the GLOBAL block.

The values supplied for PUNIT(*) indicate the destinations (files) of printout in
English and metric units, respectively. A value of 0 means no printout is
required in that unit system. A non-zero value means printout is required in that
system and is the unit number of the file to which printout is to be written. The
unit number is associated with a filename in the FILES BLOCK.

Note that printout for each Impervious Land Segment can be obtained in either the
English or Metric systems, or both (irrespective of the system used to supply the
inputs).

463
 IMPLND -- Section IWATER Input

4.4(2).2 IMPLND BLOCK -- SECTION ATEMP INPUT

Section ATEMP is common to the PERLND and IMPLND modules. See Section 4.4(1).2
for documentation.

4.4(2).3 IMPLND BLOCK -- SECTION SNOW INPUT

Section SNOW is common to the PERLND and IMPLND modules. See Section 4.4(1).3 for
documentation.

4.4(2).4 IMPLND BLOCK -- Section IWATER input

***************************** ***************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789 0123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
[Table-type IWAT-PARM1 ]
Table-type IWAT-PARM2
[Table-type IWAT-PARM3 ]
---
[Table-type MON-RETN ] | only required if the relevant quantity
[Table-type MON-MANNING] | varies through the year
---
[Table-type IWAT-STATE1]
********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.

Tables enclosed in brackets [] above are not always required; for example, because
all the values can be defaulted.

464
 IMPLND -- Section IWATER Input

4.4(2).4.1 Table-type IWAT-PARM1 -- First group of IWATER parameters (flags)

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

IWAT-PARM1
<-range><-------iwatparm1------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END IWAT-PARM1

*******
Example
*******

IWAT-PARM1
<ILS > Flags ***
# - # CSNO RTOP VRS VNN RTLI ***
1 7 1 1
END IWAT-PARM1

********************************************************************************

Details
------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
------------------------------------------------------------
<iwatparm1> CSNOFG,RTOPFG, 5I5 0 0 1
VRSFG,VNNFG,
RTLIFG
------------------------------------------------------------

465
 IMPLND -- Section IWATER Input

Explanation

If CSNOFG is 1, section IWATER assumes that snow accumulation and melt is being
considered. It will, therefore, expect that the time series produced by section
SNOW are available, either internally (produced in this RUN) or from external
sources (produced in a previous RUN). If CSNOFG is 0, no such time series are
expected. See the functional description for further information.

RTOPFG is a flag that selects the algorithm for computing overland flow. Two
optional methods are provided. If RTOPFG is 1, routing of overland flow is done
in the same way as in the NPS Model. A value of 0 results in a different
algorithm. (See the functional description for details).

The flags beginning with "V" indicate whether or not certain parameters will be
assumed to vary through the year: 1 means they do vary, 0 means they do not. The
quantities concerned are:

VRSFG retention storage capacity

VNNFG Manning's n for the overland flow plane

If either of these flags are on, monthly values for the parameter concerned must
be supplied (see Table-types MON-RETN and MON-MANNING).

If RTLIFG is 1, any lateral surface inflow to the ILS will be subject to retention
storage; if it is 0, lateral inflow is not subject to retention storage.

466
 IMPLND -- Section IWATER Input

4.4(2).4.2 Table-type IWAT-PARM2 -- Second group of IWATER parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

IWAT-PARM2
<-range><-------------iwatparm2----------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END IWAT-PARM2

*******
Example
*******

IWAT-PARM2
<ILS > ***
# - # LSUR SLSUR NSUR RETSC ***
1 7 400. .001
END IWAT-PARM2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<iwatparm2> LSUR F10.0 none 1.0 none ft Engl
none 0.3 none m Metric
SLSUR F10.0 none .000001 10. none Both
NSUR F10.0 0.1 0.001 1.0 Both
RETSC F10.0 0.0 0.0 10.0 in Engl
0.0 0.0 250. mm Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

LSUR is the length of the assumed overland flow plane, and SLSUR is the slope.

NSUR is Manning's n for the overland flow plane.

RETSC is the retention (interception) storage capacity of the surface.

467
 IMPLND -- Section IWATER Input

4.4(2).4.3 Table-type IWAT-PARM3 -- Third group of IWATER parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

IWAT-PARM3
<-range><----iwatparm3----->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END IWAT-PARM3

*******
Example
*******
IWAT-PARM3
<ILS >***
# - #*** PETMAX PETMIN
1 7
9 39 33
END IWAT-PARM3

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<iwatparm3> PETMAX F10.0 40. none none degF Engl
4.4 none none degC Metric
PETMIN F10.0 35. none none degF Engl
1.7 none none degC Metric
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------

Explanation

PETMAX is the air temperature below which E-T will arbitrarily be reduced below
the value obtained from the input time series.

PETMIN is the temperature below which E-T will be zero regardless of the value in
the input time series. These values are only used if snow is being considered
(i.e., CSNOFG= 1 in Table-type IWAT-PARM1).

468
 IMPLND -- Section IWATER Input

4.4(2).4.4 Table-type MON-RETN -- Monthly retention storage capacity

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-RETN
<-range><-----------------mon-retn--------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-RETN

*******
Example
*******

MON-RETN
<ILS > Retention storage capacity at start of each month ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .02 .03 .03 .04 .05 .08 .12 .15 .12 .05 .03 .01

END MON-RETN

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-retn> RETSCM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 10. in Engl
0.0 0.0 250. mm Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if VRSFG = 1 in Table-type IWAT-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

469
 IMPLND -- Section IWATER Input

4.4(2).4.5 Table-type MON-MANNING -- Monthly Manning's n values

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-MANNING
<-range><----------------mon-Manning------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-MANNING

*******
Example
*******

MON-MANNING
<ILS > Manning's n at start of each month ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 7 .23 .34 .34 .35 .28 .35 .37 .35 .28 .29 .30 .30
END MON-MANNING

********************************************************************************

Details
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mon-Manning> NSURM(12) 12F5.0 0.1 .001 1.0 complex Both
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if VNNFG = 1 in Table-type IWAT-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

470
 IMPLND -- Section IWATER Input

4.4(2).4.6 Table-type IWAT-STATE1 -- IWATER initial state variables

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

IWAT-STATE1
<-range><----iwat-state1--->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END IWAT-STATE1

*******
Example
*******

IWAT-STATE1
<ILS > IWATER state variables***
# - #*** RETS SURS
1 7 0.05 0.10
END IWAT-STATE1

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<iwat-state1> RETS 2F10.0 .001 .001 100 inches Engl
.025 .025 2500 mm Metric
SURS .001 .001 100 inches Engl
.025 .025 2500 mm Metric
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is used to specify the initial water storages.

RETS is the initial retention storage.

SURS is the initial surface (overland flow) storage.

471
 IMPLND -- Section SOLIDS Input

4.4(2).5 IMPLND BLOCK -- Section SOLIDS input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type SLD-PARM1]
Table-type SLD-PARM2
[Table-type MON-SACCUM]
[Table-type MON-REMOV]
[Table-type SLD-STOR ]

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.

Tables enclosed in brackets [] above are not always required; for example, because
all the values can be defaulted.

472
 IMPLND -- Section SOLIDS Input

4.4(2).5.1 Table-type SLD-PARM1 -- First group of SOLIDS parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SLD-PARM1
<-range><--sld-parm1-->
. . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . .
END SLD-PARM1

*******
Example
*******
SLD-PARM1
<ILS > ***
# - # VASD VRSD SDOP***
1 7 0 1 0
END SLD-PARM1

***************************** ***************************************************

Details
-----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
-----------------------------------------------------------
<sld-parm1> VASDFG 3I5 0 0 1
VRSDFG 0 0 1
SDOPFG 0 0 1
-----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

If VASDFG is 1, the accumulation rate of solids is allowed to vary throughout the

year and Table-type MON-SACCUM is expected. If the flag is zero, the accumulation
rate is constant, and is specified in Table-type SLD-PARM2. The corresponding
flag for the unit removal rate is VRSDFG.

SDOPFG is a flag that determines the algorithm used to simulate removal of

sediment from the land surface. If SDOPFG is 1, sediment removal will be
simulated with the algorithm used in the NPS model. If it is 0, a different
algorithm will be used. (See the functional description for details).

473
 IMPLND -- Section SOLIDS Input

4.4(2).5.2 Table-type SLD-PARM2 -- Second group of SOLIDS parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
SLD-PARM2
<-range><-------------sld-parm2---------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SLD-PARM2

Example
*******
SLD-PARM2
<ILS >***
# - # KEIM JEIM ACCSDP REMSDP***
1 7 0.08 1.90 0.01 0.5
END SLD-PARM2
*************************************** *****************************************

Details
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<sld-parm2> KEIM 4F10.0 0.0 0.0 none complex Both
JEIM none none none complex Both
ACCSDP 0.0 0.0 none tons/ac/day Engl
0.0 0.0 none tonnes/ha/day Metric
REMSDP 0.0 0.0 1.0 /day Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

KEIM is the coefficient in the solids washoff equation.

JEIM is the exponent in the solids washoff equation.

ACCSDP is the rate at which solids accumulate on the land surface.

REMSDP is the fraction of solids storage which is removed each day when there is
no runoff, for example, because of street sweeping.

If monthly values for the accumulation and unit removal rates are being supplied,
values supplied for these variables in this table are not used by the program.

474
 IMPLND -- Section SOLIDS Input

4.4(2).5.3 Table-type MON-SACCUM -- Monthly solids accumulation rates

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-SACCUM
<-range><---------------mon-accum---------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-SACCUM

*******
Example
*******

MON-SACCUM
<ILS > Monthly values for solids accumulation (tonnes/ha.day) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 0.0 .12 .12 .24 .24 .56 .67 .56 .34 .34 .23 .12
END MON-SACCUM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<mon-accum> ACCSDM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none tons/ac/day Engl
0.0 0.0 none tonnes/ha/day Metr
------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if VASDFG = 1 in Table-type SLD-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

475
 IMPLND -- Section SOLIDS Input

4.4(2).5.4 Table-type MON-REMOV -- Monthly solids unit removal rates

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-REMOV
<-range><---------------mon-remov---------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-REMOV

*******
Example
*******

MON-REMOV
<ILS > Monthly solids unit removal rate ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .05 .05 .07 .15 .15 .20 .20 .20 .20 .10 .05 .05
END MON-REMOV

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
<mon-remov> REMSDM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 /day Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if VRSDFG = 1 in Table-type SLD-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

476
 IMPLND -- Section SOLIDS Input

4.4(2).5.5 Table-type SLD-STOR -- Initial solids storage

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SLD-STOR
<-range><sld-stor>
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END SLD-STOR

*******
Example
*******

SLD-STOR
<ILS > Solids storage (tons/acre) ***
# - # ***
1 7 0.2
END SLD-STOR

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<sld-stor> SLDS F10.0 0.0 0.0 none tons/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none tonnes/ha Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

SLDS is the initial storage of solids on the impervious surface.

477
 IMPLND -- Section IWTGAS Input

4.4(2).6 IMPLND BLOCK -- Section IWTGAS input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type IWT-PARM1]
[Table-type IWT-PARM2] Tables in brackets [] are not
[Table-type MON-AWTF] always required
[Table-type MON-BWTF]
[Table-type IWT-INIT]

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.

478
 IMPLND -- Section IWTGAS Input

4.4(2).6.1 Table-type IWT-PARM1 -- Flags for section IWTGAS

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

IWT-PARM1
<-range><iwtparm1>
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END IWT-PARM1

*******
Example
*******

IWT-PARM1
<ILS > Flags for section IWTGAS***
# - # WTFV CSNO ***
1 7 0 0
END IWT-PARM1

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
-----------------------------------------------------------
<iwtparm1> WTFVFG 2I5 0 0 1
CSNOFG 0 0 1
-----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

WTFVFG indicates whether or not the water temperature regression parameters (AWTF
and BWTF) are allowed to vary throughout the year, and thus, whether or not
Table-types MON-AWTF and MON-BWTF are expected.

If CSNOFG=1, the effects of snow accumulation and melt are being considered; if
it is zero, they are not. If section IWATER is active, the value of CSNOFG
supplied here is ignored because it was first supplied in the input for that
section (Table-type IWAT-PARM1).

479
 IMPLND -- Section IWTGAS Input

4.4(2).6.2 Table-type IWT-PARM2 -- Second group of IWTGAS parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

IWT-PARM2
<-range><---------iwt-parm2---------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END IWT-PARM2

*******
Example
*******
IWT-PARM2
<ILS > Second group of IWTGAS parms***
# - # ELEV AWTF BWTF***
1 7 1281. 40.0 0.8
END IWT-PARM2

***************************** ***************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<iwt-parm2> ELEV 3F10.0 0.0 -1000. 30000. ft Engl
0.0 -300. 9100. m Metric
AWTF 32. 0.0 100. DegF Engl
0.0 -18. 38. DegC Metr
BWTF 1.0 0.001 2.0 DegF/F Engl
1.0 0.001 2.0 DegC/C Metr
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------

Explanation

ELEV is the elevation of the ILS above sea level; it is used to adjust saturation
concentrations of dissolved gases in surface outflow.

AWTF is the surface water temperature when the air temperature is 32 deg F (0 deg
C). It is the intercept of the surface water temperature regression equation.

BWTF is the slope of the surface water temperature regression equation.

480
 IMPLND -- Section IWTGAS Input

4.4(2).6.3 Table-type MON-AWTF -- Monthly values for AWTF

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-AWTF
<-range><-----------------mon-awtf--------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-AWTF

*******
Example
*******

MON-AWTF
<ILS > Value of AWTF at start of each month (deg F) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 44. 41. 40.
END MON-AWTF

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<mon-awtf> AWTFM(12) 12F5.0 32. 0. 100. deg F Engl
0. -18. 38. deg C Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if WTFVFG = 1 in Table-type IWT-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

481
 IMPLND -- Section IWTGAS Input

4.4(2).6.4 Table-type MON-BWTF -- Monthly values for BWTF

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-BWTF
<-range><-----------------mon-bwtf--------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-BWTF

*******
Example
*******

MON-BWTF
<ILS > Value of BWTF at start of each month (deg F/F) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .3 .3 .3 .4 .4 .5 .5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .3
END MON-BWTF

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<mon-bwtf> BWTFM(12) 12F5.0 1.0 0.001 2.0 deg F/F Engl
1.0 0.001 2.0 deg C/C Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required if WTFVFG = 1 in Table-type IWT-PARM1.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

482
 IMPLND -- Section IWTGAS Input

4.4(2).6.5 Table-type IWT-INIT -- Initial conditions for section IWTGAS

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

IWT-INIT
<-range><---------iwt-init----------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END IWT-INIT

*******
Example
*******

IWT-INIT
<ILS > SOTMP SODOX SOCO2***
# - # DegC mg/l mg C/l***
1 7 16.
END IWT-INIT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
<iwt-init> SOTMP 3F10.0 60.0 32. 100. Deg F Engl
16.0 .01 38.0 Deg C Metric
SODOX 0.0 0.0 20.0 mg/l Both
SOCO2 0.0 0.0 1.0 mg C/l Both
--------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------

Explanation

These are the initial values for the temperature, dissolved oxygen concentration,
and CO2 concentration of the surface runoff. The values given in this table do
not affect anything in the simulation beyond the start of the first interval of
the run. Therefore, in most simulations, this table can be omitted.

483
 IMPLND -- Section IQUAL Input

4.4(2).7 IMPLND BLOCK -- Section IQUAL input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type NQUALS]
[Table-type IQL-AD-FLAGS]
---
Table-type QUAL-PROPS |
[Table-type QUAL-INPUT] |
[Table-type MON-POTFW] | repeat this group of tables for each
[Table-type MON-ACCUM] | quality constituent
[Table-type MON-SQOLIM] |
---
********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows or in the documentation for the PERLND module.

Tables enclosed in brackets [] are not always required;for example, because all
the values can be defaulted.

4.4(2).7.1 Table-type NQUALS -- Total number of quality constituents simulated

This table is identical to the corresponding table for the PERLND module. See
Section 4.4(1).8.1 (Module Section PQUAL) for documentation.

484
 IMPLND -- Section IQUAL Input

4.4(2).7.2 Table-type IQL-AD-FLAGS -- Atmospheric deposition flags for IQUAL

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

IQL-AD-FLAGS
<-range> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END IQL-AD-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******
IQL-AD-FLAGS
<ILS > Atmospheric deposition flags ***
*** QUAL1 QUAL2 QUAL3 QUAL4 QUAL5 QUAL6 QUAL7 QUAL8 QUAL9 QAL10
#*** # <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C>
1 7 -1 10 -1 -1 11 12 13 -1 0 0 0 11 0 -1 0 0 -1 0
END IQL-AD-FLAGS

********************************************************************************

Details
------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
------------------------------------------------------------
<f><c> IQADFG(*) (1X,2I3) 0 -1 none
------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

IQADFG is an array of flags indicating the source of atmospheric deposition data

for QUALs. Each QUAL has two flags. The first is for dry or total deposition
flux, and the second is for wet deposition concentration. The flag values
indicate:
0 No deposition of this type is simulated
-1 Deposition of this type is input as time series IQADFX or IQADCN
>0 Deposition of this type is input in the MONTH-DATA table with the
corresponding table ID number. (Refer to Section 4.11 for details)

Note: atmospheric deposition can only be specified for QUALOF's; it is an error

to specify a non-zero flag value for a non-QUALOF.

485
 IMPLND -- Section IQUAL Input

4.4(2).7.3 Table-type QUAL-PROPS -- Identifiers and flags for a quality

constituent

************************************************* *******************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************** *****************************************
Layout
******

QUAL-PROPS
<-range><-qualid---> <qt><------flags------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END QUAL-PROPS

*******
Example
*******

QUAL-PROPS
<ILS > Identifiers and Flags ***
# - # QUALID QTID QSD VPFW QSO VQO***
1 7 B0D kg 0 0 1 1
END QUAL-PROPS

************************************************* *******************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<qualid> QUALID 3A4 none none none
<qt> QTYID A4 none none none
<flags> QSDFG 4I5 0 0 1
VPFWFG 0 0 1
QSOFG 0 0 1
VQOFG 0 0 1
----------------------------------------------------------

486
 IMPLND -- Section IQUAL Input

Explanation

QUALID is a string of up to 10 characters which identifies the quality

constituent.

QTYID is a string of up to 4 characters which identifies the units associated with

this constituent (e.g., kg, # (for coliforms)). These are the units referred to
as "qty" in subsequent tables (e.g., Table-type QUAL-INPUT).

If QSDFG is 1 then:
1. This constituent is a QUALSD (sediment associated).
2. If VPFWFG is 1, the washoff potency factor may vary throughout the year.
Table-type MON-POTFW is expected.

If QSOFG is 1 then:
1. This constituent is a QUALOF (directly associated with overland flow).
2. If VQOFG is 1, the rate of accumulation and the limiting storage of QUALOF
may vary throughout the year. Table-types MON-ACCUM and MON-SQOLIM are
expected.

4.4(2).7.4 Table-type QUAL-INPUT -- Surface storage of qual and nonseasonal

parameters

*********************************************************** *********************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
************************************************* *******************************
Layout
******

QUAL-INPUT
<-range><------------qual-input---------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END QUAL-INPUT

*******
Example
*******

QUAL-INPUT
<ILS > Storage on surface and nonseasonal parameters***
# - # SQO POTFW ACQOP SQOLIM WSQOP ***
1 7 1.21 .172 0.02 2.0 1.70
END QUAL-INPUT

*********************************************************** *********************

487
 IMPLND -- Section IQUAL Input

Details

----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<qual-input> SQO 5F8.0 0.0 0.0 none qty/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty/ha Metric
POTFW 0.0 0.0 none qty/ton Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty/tonne Metric
ACQOP 0.0 0.0 none qty/ac/day Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty/ha/day Metric
SQOLIM 0.000001 0.000001 none qty/ac Engl
0.000002 0.000002 none qty/ha Metric
WSQOP 1.64 0.01 none in/hr Engl
41.7 0.25 none mm/hr Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

The following variable is relevant only if the constituent is a QUALSD:

1. POTFW, the washoff potency factor.

POTFW (washoff potency factor) is the ratio of constituent yield to sediment

outflow.

The following variables are applicable only if the constituent is a QUALOF:

1. SQO, the initial storage of QUALOF on the surface of the ILS.
2. ACQOP, the rate of accumulation of QUALOF on the surface.
3. SQOLIM, the maximum storage of QUALOF on the surface.
4. WSQOP, the rate of surface runoff that will remove 90 percent of stored
QUALOF per hour.

If monthly values are being supplied for any of these quantities, the value in
this table is not relevant; instead,the system expects and uses values supplied
in the corresponding monthly table (Table-types MON-POTFW, MON-ACCUM, MON-SQOLIM).

488
 IMPLND -- Section IQUAL Input

4.4(2).7.5 Table-type MON-POTFW -- Monthly washoff potency factor

This table is identical to the corresponding table in the PERLND module. See
Section 4.4(1).8 for documentation.

4.4(2).7.6 Table-type MON-ACCUM -- Monthly accumulation rates of QUALOF

This table is identical to the corresponding table in the PERLND module. See
Section 4.4(1).8 for documentation.

4.4(2).7.7 Table-type MON-SQOLIM -- Monthly limiting storage of QUALOF

This table is identical to the corresponding table in the PERLND module. See
Section 4.4(1).8 for documentation.

489
 RCHRES Block

4.4(3) RCHRES Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

RCHRES
General input
[section HYDR input]
[section ADCALC input]
[section CONS input]
[section HTRCH input]
[section SEDTRN input]
[section GQUAL input]
[input for RQUAL sections]
[section OXRX input]
[section NUTRX input]
[section PLANK input]
[section PHCARB input]
END RCHRES
********************************************************************************

Explanation

This block contains the data that are domestic to all RCHRES processing units in
the RUN. The general input is always relevant; other input is only required if the
module section concerned is active.

4.4(3).1 RCHRES BLOCK -- General input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

Table-type ACTIVITY
[Table-type PRINT-INFO]
Table-type GEN-INFO
********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows. Tables enclosed in brackets [], above, are not always
required; for example, because all values can be defaulted.

489
 RCHRES -- General Input

4.4(3).1.1 Table-type ACTIVITY -- Active Sections Vector

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout:

ACTIVITY
<-range><-----------------a-s-vector-------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END ACTIVITY

Example:

ACTIVITY
RCHRES Active sections***
# - # HYFG ADFG CNFG HTFG SDFG GQFG OXFG NUFG PKFG PHFG ***
1 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
END ACTIVITY

********************************************************************************

Details
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
<a-s-vector> HYDRFG,ADFG,CONSFG,HTFG,SEDFG 10I5 0 0 1
GQALFG,OXFG,NUTFG,PLKFG,PHFG
-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

The RCHRES module is divided into eleven sections. The values supplied in this
table specify which sections are active and which are not, for each operation
involving the RCHRES module. A value of 0 means inactive and 1 means active (see
below). Any meaningful subset of sections may be active, with the following
provisos: 1) Section ADCALC must be active if any "quality" sections (CONS through
PHCARB) are active. 2) If any section in the RQUAL group (Section OXRX through
PHCARB) is active, all preceding RQUAL sections must also be active.

490
 RCHRES -- General Input

4.4(3).1.2 Table-type PRINT-INFO -- Printout information for RCHRES

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PRINT-INFO
<-range><---------------print-flags----------------------><piv><pyr>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PRINT-INFO

*******
Example
*******

PRINT-INFO
RCHRES Printout level flags***
# - # HYDR ADCA CONS HEAT SED GQL OXRX NUTR PLNK PHCB PIVL PYR***
1 7 2 2 2 5 5 2 3 3 10 12
END PRINT-INFO

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<print-flags> PFLAG(10) 10I5 4 2 6
<pivl> PIVL I5 1 1 1440
<pyr> PYREND I5 9 1 12
----------------------------------------------------------

491
 RCHRES -- General Input

Explanation

HSPF permits the user to vary the printout level (maximum frequency) for the
various active sections of an operation. The meaning of each permissible value for
PFLAG(*) is:

2 means every PIVL intervals

3 means every day
4 means every month
5 means every year
6 means never

In the example above, output from RCHRESs 1 through 7 will occur as follows:

Section Maximum frequency

HYDR 10 intervals
ADCALC 10 intervals
CONS 10 intervals
HTRCH year
SEDTRN year
GQUAL 10 intervals
OXRX day
NUTRX day
PLANK month (defaulted)
PHCARB month (defaulted)

A value need only be supplied for PIVL if one or more sections have a printout
level of 2. For those sections, printout will occur every PIVL intervals (that is,
every PDELT=PIVL*DELT minutes. PIVL must be chosen such that there are an integer
number of PDELT periods in a day.

HSPF will automatically provide printed output at all standard intervals greater
than the specified minimum interval. In the above example, output for section
NUTRX will be printed at the end of each day, month, and year.

PYREND is the calendar month which will terminate the year for printout purposes.
Thus, the annual summary can reflect the situation over the past water year or the
past calendar year, etc.

492
 RCHRES -- General Input

4.4(3).1.3 Table-type GEN-INFO -- Other general information for RCHRES

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GEN-INFO
<-range><-----rchid--------><nex> <unitsyst><-printu-><lak>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GEN-INFO

*******
Example
*******

GEN-INFO
RCHRES Name Nexits UnitSysts Printout ***
# - # t-series Engl Metr LKFG ***
in out ***
4 East River-mile 4 2 1 1 23 0
END GEN-INFO

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<rchid> RCHID(5) 5A4 none none none
<nex> NEXITS I5 1 1 5
<unit-syst> IUNITS 5X,I5 1 1 2
OUNITS I5 1 1 2
<printu> PUNIT(2) 2I5 0 0 99
<lak> LKFG I5 0 0 1
----------------------------------------------------------

493
 RCHRES -- General Input

Explanation

Any string of up to 20 characters may be supplied as the identifier for a RCHRES.

NEXITS is the number of exits from the RCHRES. A maximum of 5 exits can be handled.

The values supplied for IUNITS and OUNITS indicate the system of units for input
and output time series, respectively. 1 means English units, 2 means Metric units.

Note: All operations in the run must use the same units system for data in the UCI
file; therefore, this system of units is specified by EMFG in the GLOBAL block.

The values supplied for PUNIT(*) indicate the destinations (files) of printout in
English and metric units, respectively. A value of 0 means no printout is required
in that unit system. A non-zero value means printout is required in that system
and is the unit number of the file to which printout is to be written. The unit
number is associated with a filename in the FILES BLOCK.

LKFG indicates whether the RCHRES is a lake (1) or a stream/river (0). This flag
affects the method of calculating bed shear stress (in Section HYDR) and the
reaeration coefficient (Section OXRX).

494
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

4.4(3).2 RCHRES BLOCK -- Section HYDR input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type HYDR-PARM1]
Table-type HYDR-PARM2
[Table-type MON-CONVF] --- if VCONFG = 1 (in Table-type HYDR-PARM1)
[Table-type HYDR-INIT]
---
[Table-type HYDR-CATEGORY] |
[Table-type HYDR-CINIT] |
[Table-type HYDR-CPREC] | if "categories" are being simulated
[Table-type HYDR-CEVAP] |
[Table-type HYDR-CFVOL] |
[Table-type HYDR-CDEMAND] |
---
********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.

Tables enclosed in brackets [], above, are not always required.

495
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

4.4(3).2.1 Table-type HYDR-PARM1 -- Flags for HYDR section

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

HYDR-PARM1
<-range> <v><1><2><3> <---odfvfg----> <---odgtfg----> <----funct---->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END HYDR-PARM1

*******
Example
*******

HYDR-PARM1
RCHRES Flags for HYDR section***
# - # VC A1 A2 A3 ODFVFG for each *** ODGTFG for each FUNCT for each
FG FG FG FG possible exit *** possible exit possible exit
1 7 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3
END HYDR-PARM1

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<v> VCONFG I3 0 0 1
<1> AUX1FG I3 0 0 1
<2> AUX2FG I3 0 0 1
<3> AUX3FG I3 0 0 1
<odfvfg> ODFVFG(5) 5I3 0 -5 8
<odgtfg> ODGTFG(5) 5I3 0 0 5
<funct> FUNCT(5) 5I3 1 1 3
----------------------------------------------------------

496
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

Explanation

A value of 1 for VCONFG means that F(vol) (volume-dependent) outflow demand

components are multiplied by a factor which is allowed to vary through the year.
These monthly adjustment factors are input in Table-type MON-CONVF in this section.

A value of 1 for AUX1FG means a routine will be called to compute depth, stage,
surface area, average depth, and top width, and values for these parameters will
be reported in the printout. These are used in the calculation of precipitation
and evaporation fluxes, and simulation of most water quality sections. A value of
0 suppresses the calculation and printout of this information.

A value of 1 for AUX2FG means average velocity and average cross sectional area
will be calculated, and values for these parameters will be reported in the
printout. These are used in the simulation of oxygen. A value of 0 suppresses the
calculation/printout of this information. If AUX2FG is 1, AUX1FG must also be 1.

A value of 1 for AUX3FG means the shear velocity and bed shear stress will be
calculated. These are used in the calculation of deposition and scour of sediment
(inorganic and organic). AUX3FG may only be turned ON (=1) if AUX1FG and AUX2FG
are also 1.

The value specified for ODFVFG(I) determines the F(vol) component of the outflow
demand for exit I. A value of 0 means that the outflow demand does not have a
volume dependent component. A value greater than 0 indicates the column number in
the FTABLE which contains the F(vol) component. If the value specified for ODFVFG
is less than 0, the absolute value indicates the element of array COLIND() which
defines a pair of columns in the FTABLE which are used to evaluate the F(vol)
component. Further explanation of this latter option is provided in the functional
description of the HYDR section in Part E. A value of ODFVFG can be specified for
each exit from a RCHRES. (Note: COLIND is specified as a time series.)

The value specified for ODGTFG(I) determines the G(t) (time-dependent) component
of the outflow demand for exit I. A value of 0 means that the outflow demand does
not have such a component. A value greater than 0 indicates the element (index)
number of the array OUTDGT() (or array COTDGT() if Categories are being simulated)
which contains the G(t) component. A value of ODGTFG can be specified for each
exit from a RCHRES. (Note: OUTDGT and COTDGT are specified in the form of time
series.)

FUNCT determines the function used to combine the components of an outflow demand.
The possible values and their meanings are:

1 means use the smaller of F(vol) and G(t)

2 means use the larger of F(vol) and G(t)
3 means use the sum of F(vol) and G(t)

497
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

4.4(3).2.2 Table-type HYDR-PARM2 -- Parameters for HYDR section

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

HYDR-PARM2
<-range><--------------------hydr-parm2---------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END HYDR-PARM2
*******
Example
*******
HYDR-PARM2
RCHRES ***
# - # DSN FTBN LEN DELTH STCOR KS*** DB50
1 17 2.7 120. 3.2 .5 0.2
2 100 2 1.5 60. 1. .5 0.2
END HYDR-PARM2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<hydr-parm2> FTBDSN F5.0 0 0 999 none Both
FTABNO F5.0 none 1 999 none Both
LEN F10.0 none 0.01 none miles Engl
none 0.016 none km Metric
DELTH F10.0 0.0 0.0 none ft Engl
0.0 0.0 none m Metric
STCOR F10.0 0.0 none none ft Engl
0.0 none none m Metric
KS F10.0 0.0 0.0 .99 none Both
DB50 F10.0 .01 .0001 100. in Engl
.25 .0025 2500. mm Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

498
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

Explanation

FTBDSN is the WDM table data-set number containing the F-Table. If FTBDSN is
greater than zero, the system searches the WDM file for the F-Table.

If FTBDSN = 0, FTABNO is the ID number for the F-Table (located in the FTABLES
Block) which contains the geometric and hydraulic properties of the RCHRES. If
FTBDSN > 0, FTABNO is the WDM table indicator specifying which table (within the
WDM table data set given by FTBDSN) contains the F-Table.

LEN is the length of the RCHRES.

DELTH is the drop in water elevation from the upstream to the downstream
extremities of the RCHRES. (It is used if section OXRX is active and reaeration
is being computed using the Tsivoglou-Wallace equation; or if section SEDTRN is
active and sandload transport capacity is being computed using either the Toffaleti
or Colby method).

STCOR is the correction to the RCHRES depth to calculate stage.

(Depth + STCOR = Stage)

KS is the weighting factor for hydraulic routing. Choice of a realistic KS value

is discussed in the functional description of the HYDR section in Part E.

DB50 is the median diameter of the bed sediment (assumed constant throughout the
run). This value is used to:
1. Calculate the bed shear stress if the RCHRES is a lake.
2. Calculate the rate of sand transport if the Colby or Toffaleti methods are
used.

Note: The value input for DB50 is also used in section SEDTRN as the sand particle
diameter required for sandload computations.

499
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

4.4(3).2.3 Table-type MON-CONVF -- Monthly F(vol) adjustment factors

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-CONVF
<-range><----------------mon-convf--------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-CONVF

*******
Example
*******

MON-CONVF
RCHRES Monthly F(vol) adjustment factors***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .97 .89 .89 .91 .93 .93 .94 .95 .95 .98 .98 .97
END MON-CONVF
********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<mon-convf> CONVFM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none
----------------------------------------------------------

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

500
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

4.4(3).2.4 Table-type HYDR-INIT -- Initial conditions for HYDR section

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

HYDR-INIT
<-range><--vol---> ct<-------colind----------> <-------outdgt---------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END HYDR-INIT

*******
Example
*******

HYDR-INIT
Initial conditions for HYDR section ***
RCHRES VOL Cat Initial value of COLIND *** Initial value of OUTDGT
# - # ac-ft for each possible exit *** for each possible exit
<--------> <><---><---><---><---><---> *** <---><---><---><---><--->
1 12.050 UN 4.0 1.2 1.8
END HYDR-INIT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<vol> VOL F10.0 0.0 0.0 none acre-ft Engl
0.0 0.0 none Mm3 Metric
ct CAT A2 blank none none none Both
<colind> COLIND(5) 5F5.0 4.0 4.0 8.0 none Both
<outdgt> OUTDGT(5) 5F5.0 0.0 0.0 none ft3/s Engl
0.0 0.0 none m3/s Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

501
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

Explanation

VOL is the initial volume of water in the RCHRES.

CAT may be either an integer or a category identifier (ID tag - defined in the
CATEGORY block). If it is a tag, all initial volume belongs to that category. If
CAT is an integer, the initial volume is divided according to Table-type HYDR-
CINIT, where CAT entries are expected. If CAT is zero or blank, the initial volume
is divided equally among all active categories. CAT is ignored if no CATEGORY
block is present in the UCI file.

The value of COLIND(I) for exit I indicates the pair of columns in the FTABLE that
are used to evaluate the initial value of the F(vol) (volume-dependent) component
of outflow demand for the exit.

The array OUTDGT(I) specifies the initial value of the outflow demand for exit I,
i.e., the G(t) (time-dependent) component. It is ignored if a Category block is
present in the UCI file. Initial values for COTDGT are found in Table-type HYDR-
CDEMAND.

A non-zero value of COLIND(I) is only meaningful if the outflow from exit I has an
F(vol) component. Similarly, a non-zero value for OUTDGT(I) is only meaningful if
the outflow from exit I has a G(t) component.

502
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

4.4(3).2.5 Table-type HYDR-CATEGORY -- Categories associated with outflows and

other fluxes

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

HYDR-CATEGORY
cpr cev cf1 cf2 cf3 cf4 cf5 ncgt
<range> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END HYDR-CATEGORY

*******
Example
*******

HYDR-CATEGORY
Categories specified for Outflows, Precipitation and Evaporation ***
RCHRES Prec Evap<----------FVOL--------->NCOGT ***
# - # 1 2 3 4 5 ***
<---><---><---><---><---><---><---><---> ***
1 UN 4 TX 2 3
END HYDR-CATEGORY

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
cpr CPREC A2 none none none none Both
cev CEVAP A2 none none none none Both
cf1-cf5 CFVOL(*) A2 none none none none Both
ncgt NOCGT I5 0 0 20 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

503
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

Explanation

CPREC, CEVAP, CFVOL(*)

This table may be used to specify the categories that are impacted by outflows and
other fluxes. For the physical quantities precipitation, evaporation, and exit-
specific F(vol) outflow, categories may be specified in one of two ways: 1) A
single category is specified by its two-character tag, right-justified in the
field. 2) If more than one category must be specified, then the number of
categories is placed in the field. Then the multiple categories are fully
specified in Table-types HYDR-CPREC, HYDR-CEVAP, and HYDR-CFVOL. If the field is
blank or zero, or the table is omitted, then water is added to or subtracted from
all categories in proportion to their current storage fraction.

NCOGT is the number of COTDGT time series specifying category-associated demands

from the reach. These time series are assigned priorities and initial values in
Table-type HYDR-CDEMAND. The time series are input in the time series blocks
(e.g., EXT SOURCES). (See the Time Series Catalog for RCHRES).

504
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

4.4(3).2.6 Table-type HYDR-CINIT -- Allocation of initial volumes to categories

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
HYDR-CINIT
ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac
<-range> <><----> <><----> <><----> <><----> <><----> <><----> <><---->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END HYDR-CINIT

*******
Example
*******
HYDR-CINIT
*** Initial Category Storage Fractions
*** RCHRES c cfrac c cfrac c cfrac c cfrac c cfrac c cfrac c cfrac
*** # - # <><----> <><----> <><----> <><----> <><----> <><----> <><---->
1 UN 0.2 TX 0.1 CU 0.1 FG 0.1 Z1 0.1 MI 0.05 A0 0.1
1 BB 0.1 AA 0.05 BB 0.1
END HYDR-CINIT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ct CINIT(*) A2 none none none none Both
cfrac CFRAC(*) F6.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is required when CAT in Table-type HYDR-INIT is a positive integer. CAT
defines the number of pairs to be specified in this table; up to seven pairs can
be specified on a line.

CINIT is a two-character category tag.

CFRAC is the fraction of the initial volume belonging to the corresponding

category. The sum of all fractions must be 1.0; alternatively, if all CFRACS are
blank or zero, the initial volume will be equally divided among all categories.

505
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

4.4(3).2.7 Table-type HYDR-CPREC -- Allocation of precipitation to categories

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

HYDR-CPREC
ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac
<-range> <><----> <><----> <><----> <><----> <><----> <><----> <><---->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END HYDR-CPREC

*******
Example
*******

HYDR-CPREC
*** Category Fractions for precipitation
*** RCHRES ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac ct cfrac
*** # - # <><----> <><----> <><----> <><----> <><----> <><----> <><---->
1 UN 0.2 TX 0.1 CU 0.1 FG 0.1 Z1 0.1 MI 0.05 A0 0.1
1 BB 0.1 AA 0.05 BB 0.1
END HYDR-CPREC

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ct CPRECC(*) A2 none none none none Both
cfrac CPRECF(*) F6.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

506
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

Explanation

This table is required when CPREC in Table-type HYDR-CATEGORY is a positive

integer. CPREC defines the number of pairs to be specified in this table; up to
seven pairs can be specified on a line.

CPRECC is a two-character category tag.

CPRECF is the fraction of the precipitation which will be assigned to the

corresponding category. The sum of all fractions must be 1.0; alternatively if all
fractions are blank or zero, the precipitation will be equally divided among all
the categories listed.

507
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

4.4(3).2.8 Table-type HYDR-CEVAP -- Allocation of evaporation to categories

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

HYDR-CEVAP
ct pr frac ct pr frac ct pr frac ct pr frac ct pr frac
<-range> <><-><----> <><-><----> <><-><----> <><-><----> <><-><---->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END HYDR-CEVAP

*******
Example
*******

HYDR-CEVAP
Category Fractions and Priorities for Evaporation ***
RCHRES ct pr frac ct pr frac ct pr frac ct pr frac ct pr frac ***
# - # <><-><----> <><-><----> <><-><----> <><-><----> <><-><----> ***
1 UN 1 CU 2 0.5 MI 2 0.5 TX 3 1.0 BB 4
1 AA 4
END HYDR-CEVAP

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ct CEVAPC(*) A2 none none none none Both
pr CEVAPP(*) I3 0 0 none none Both
cfrac CEVAPF(*) F6.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

508
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

Explanation

This table is required when CEVAP in Table-type HYDR-CATEGORY is a positive

integer. CEVAP defines the number of categories to be specified in this table; up
to five categories can be specified on a line.

CEVAPC is a two-character category tag.

CEVAPP is an integer signifying the priority of the corresponding category when

subtracting evaporation. Water is taken from the lowest priority categories first,
then from the next-lowest priority categories, and so on. Categories with zero or
undefined priority are taken last.

CEVAPF is the fraction of the evaporation which will be assigned to the

corresponding category at a given priority level. The sum of all fractions at a
priority level must be 1.0; alternatively, if they are all blank or zero, the
evaporative loss will be equally divided among all the categories listed.

509
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

4.4(3).2.9 Table-type HYDR-CFVOL -- Allocation of volume-dependent outflow to

categories

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

HYDR-CFVOL
ct x pr frac ct x pr frac ct x pr frac ct x pr frac
<-range> <><><-><----> <><><-><----> <><><-><----> <><><-><---->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END HYDR-CFVOL

*******
Example
*******

HYDR-CFVOL
Category Fractions and Priorities for F(VOL) Outflow ***
RCHRES ct x pr frac ct x pr frac ct x pr frac ct x pr frac ***
# - # <><><-><----> <><><-><----> <><><-><----> <><><-><----> ***
1 UN 1 1 CU 1 2 0.5 MI 1 2 0.5 UN 2 1 0.5
1 BB 2 1 0.5 AA 2 2
END HYDR-CFVOL

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ct CFVOLC(*) A2 none none none none Both
x CFVOLE(*) I2 0 0 5 none Both
pr CFVOLP(*) I3 0 0 none none Both
cfrac CFVOLF(*) F6.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

510
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

Explanation

This table is required when any member of CFVOL in Table-type HYDR-CATEGORY is a

positive integer. The number of categories given in this table is the sum of the
integer CFVOLs in HYDR-CATEGORY; up to four can be specified on a line.

CFVOLC is a two-character category tag.

CFVOLE is the number of the exit for which the category is being specified.

CFVOLP is an integer signifying the priority of the corresponding category when

subtracting F(vol) (volume-dependent) outflow. Water is taken from the lowest
priority categories first, then from the next-lowest priority categories, and so
on. Categories with zero or undefined priority are taken last.

CFVOLF is the fraction of the F(vol) outflow which will be assigned to the
corresponding category at a given priority level. The sum of all fractions at a
priority level must sum to 1.0; alternatively, if all fractions for a priority
level are blank or zero, the outflow demand will be equally divided among all of
those categories.

511
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

4.4(3).2.10 Table-type HYDR-CDEMAND -- Allocation of time-dependent outflow to

categories

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

HYDR-CDEMAND
ct x py pm pd cotdgt ct x py pm pd cotdgt
<-range> <><> <--> <> <> <----> <><> <--> <> <> <---->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END HYDR-CDEMAND

*******
Example
*******

HYDR-CDEMAND
Category Priorities and Initial Values for G(T) Demands ***
ct x Priority COTDGT ct x Priority COTDGT ***
RCHRES (yyyy/mm/dd) (cfs) (yyyy/mm/dd) (cfs) ***
# - # <><> <--> <> <> <----> <><> <--> <> <> <---->
1 UN 1 1865 50.0 MI 1 1900/01 30.0
1 CU 2 1900/05/01 25.0
END HYDR-CDEMAND

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ct COGTC(*) A2 none none none none Both
x COGTE(*) I2 0 0 5 none Both
py COGTPY(*) I4 0 0 none none Both
pm COGTPM(*) I2 1 1 12 none Both
pd COGTPD(*) I2 1 1 31 none Both
cotdgt COTDGT(*) F6.0 0.0 0.0 none none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

512
 RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input

Explanation

This table is used in conjunction with the time-series COTDGT to specify outflow
demands which are a function of time, and to allocate these outflow demands among
categories. The table may be omitted when NCOGT in Table-type HYDR-CATEGORY is
zero.

COGTC is a two-character category tag.

COGTE is the exit number for the demand being specified.

COGTPY (year), COGTPM (month), and COGTPD (day) signify the priority date of the
corresponding demand timeseries. Multiple demands on the same category are
satisfied from earliest to latest priority date. Unspecified (blank) priorities
are satisfied last.

4.4(3).3 RCHRES BLOCK -- Section ADCALC input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type ADCALC-DATA]

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of this input is detailed below. Table ADCALC-DATA is not always
required because its contents can be defaulted.

513
 RCHRES -- Section ADCALC Input

4.4(3).3.1 Table-type ADCALC-DATA -- Data for section ADCALC

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

ADCALC-DATA
<-range><---adcalc-data---->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END ADCALC-DATA

*******
Example
*******

ADCALC-DATA
RCHRES Data for section ADCALC ***
# - # CRRAT VOL ***
5 1.7 324.
END ADCALC-DATA

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<adcalc-data> CRRAT 2F10.0 1.5 1.0 none none Both
VOL 0.0 0.0 none acre-ft Engl
0.0 0.0 none Mm3 Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

Section ADCALC must be active if any of the following sections are active.

CRRAT is the ratio of maximum velocity to mean velocity in the RCHRES cross-section
under typical flow conditions.

VOL is the volume of water in the RCHRES at the start of the simulation. Input of
this value is not necessary if section HYDR is active. (Note: Metric units are
10**6 m3).

514
 RCHRES -- Section CONS Input

4.4(3).4 RCHRES BLOCK -- Section CONS input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type NCONS]
[Table-type CONS-AD-FLAGS]
---
Table-type CONS-DATA | repeat for each conservative constituent
---

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact formats of these tables are detailed below. Table-type NCONS is not
required if only one conservative constituent is being simulated (default value).

515
 RCHRES -- Section CONS Input

4.4(3).4.1 Table-type NCONS -- Number of conservative constituents simulated

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NCONS
<-range><ncn>
. . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . .
END NCONS

*******
Example
*******

NCONS
RCHRES ***
# - #NCONS ***
1 7 4
END NCONS

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<ncn> NCONS I5 1 1 10
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

NCONS is the number of conservative constituents being simulated.

516
 RCHRES -- Section CONS Input

4.4(3).4.2 Table-type CONS-AD-FLAGS -- Atmospheric deposition flags for CONS

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

CONS-AD-FLAGS
<-range> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END CONS-AD-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******

CONS-AD-FLAGS
RCHRES Atmospheric deposition flags ***
*** CONS1 CONS2 CONS3 CONS4 CONS5 CONS6 CONS7 CONS8 CONS9 QAL10
#*** # <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C> <F><C>
1 7 -1 10 -1 -1 11 12 13 -1 10 0 0 11 0 -1 0 0 -1 0
END CONS-AD-FLAGS

********************************************************************************

Details
------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
------------------------------------------------------------
<f><c> COADFG(*) (1X,2I3) 0 -1 none
------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

COADFG is an array of flags indicating the source of atmospheric deposition data

for the CONS section. Each CONS has two flags. The first is for dry or total
deposition flux, and the second is for wet deposition concentration. The flag
values indicate:
0 No deposition of this type is simulated
-1 Deposition of this type is input as time series COADFX or
COADCN
>0 Deposition of this type is input in the MONTH-DATA table
with the corresponding table ID number.

517
 RCHRES -- Section CONS Input

4.4(3).4.3 Table-type CONS-DATA -- Information about one conservative substance

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
CONS-DATA
<-range><----conid---------><---con--> <concid><--conv--> <qtyid->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END CONS-DATA

*******
Example
*******

CONS-DATA
RCHRES Data for conservative constituent No. 3 ***
# - # Substance-id Conc ID CONV QTYID ***
1 7 Total Diss Solids 251.3 mg/l 1000. kg
END CONS-DATA

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<conid> CONID(5) 5A4 blank none none none Both
<con> CON F10.0 0.0 0.0 none concid Both
<concid> CONCID 2A4 blank none none none Both
<conv> CONV F10.0 none 1.0E-30 none see below
<qtyid> QTYID 2A4 blank none none none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

518
 RCHRES -- Section CONS Input

Explanation

Any string of up to 20 characters may be supplied as the name of the conservative

constituent (CONID).

CON is the initial concentration of the conservative constituent.

CONCID is a string of up to 8 characters which specifies the concentration units

for the conservative constituent. If the constituent provides the alkalinity time
series for section PHCARB, CONCID must be mg/l as CaCO3.

QTYID is a string of up to 8 characters which specifies the units in which the

total flow of constituent into, or out of, the RCHRES will be expressed, e.g.,
"kg".

CONV is the conversion factor from QTYID/VOL to the desired concentration units
(CONCID): CONC = CONV*(QTYID/VOL). If English units are being used (EMFG = 1 in
the GLOBAL Block), VOL is in ft3; if Metric units are in effect (EMFG = 2), VOL is
in m3. For example, if:
CONCID is mg/l
QTYID is kg
VOL is in m3,

then CONV=1000.

519
 RCHRES -- Section HTRCH Input

4.4(3).5 RCHRES BLOCK -- Section HTRCH input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
[Table-type HT-BED-FLAGS]
[Table-type HEAT-PARM]
---
[Table-type HT-BED-PARM] | if BEDFLG = 1 or 2
[Table-type MON-HT-TGRND] if TGFLG = 3 |
---
---
[Table-type HT-BED-DELH] | if BEDFLG = 3
[Table-type HT-BED-DELTT] |
---
[Table-type HEAT-INIT]

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables above is detailed in the documentation which
follows. Tables in brackets [] need not always be supplied; for example, because
all of the inputs have default values.

520
 RCHRES -- Section HTRCH Input

4.4(3).5.1 Table-type HT-BED-FLAGS -- Flags for bed conduction in section HTRCH

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

HT-BED-FLAGS
<-range><bfg><gfg><tst>
. . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . .
END HT-BED-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******
HT-BED-FLAGS
RCHRES ***
# - # BDFG TGFG TSTP ***
1 3 55
2 2 2
END HT-BED-FLAGS

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<bfg> BEDFLG I5 0 0 3
<gfg> TGFLG I5 2 1 3
<tst> TSTOP I5 55 1 100
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

BEDFLG is the bed conduction flag, with the following meanings:

0 - bed conduction is not simulated
1 - single interface (water-mud) heat transfer method
2 - two-interface (water-mud and mud-ground) heat transfer method
3 - Jobson method

TGFLG specifies the source of the ground temperature for the bed conduction; used
when BEDFLG is 1 or 2 (TGFLG: 1=time series; 2=single value; 3=monthly values).

TSTOP is the number of time steps (prior to the current time step) that impact the
heat flux at the current time step; used only when the Jobson method is in effect.

521
 RCHRES -- Section HTRCH Input

4.4(3).5.2 Table-type HEAT-PARM -- Parameters for section HTRCH

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

HEAT-PARM
<-range><--elev--><--eldat-><--cfsx--><--ktrd--><--kcnd--><--kevp-->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END HEAT-PARM

*******
Example
*******
HEAT-PARM
RCHRES ELEV ELDAT CFSAEX KATRAD KCOND KEVAP ***
# - # ft ft ***
1 7 2000. 1500. .5 6.5 11. 4.
END HEAT-PARM
********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<elev> ELEV F10.0 0.0 0.0 30000. ft Engl
0.0 0.0 10000. m Metric
<eldat> ELDAT F10.0 0.0 none none ft Engl
0.0 none none m Metric
<cfsx> CFSAEX F10.0 1.0 0.001 2.0 none Both
<ktrd> KATRAD F10.0 9.37 1.00 20. none Both
<kcnd> KCOND F10.0 6.12 1.00 20. none Both
<kevp> KEVAP F10.0 2.24 1.00 10. none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

ELEV is the mean RCHRES elevation.

ELDAT is the difference in elevation between the RCHRES and the air temperature
gage (positive if RCHRES is higher than the gage).
CFSAEX is the correction factor for solar radiation; it is the fraction of the
RCHRES surface exposed to radiation.
KATRAD is the longwave radiation coefficient.
KCOND is the conduction-convection heat transport coefficient.
KEVAP is the evaporation coefficient.

522
 RCHRES -- Section HTRCH Input

4.4(3).5.3 Table-type HT-BED-PARM -- Bed conduction parameters for section HTRCH

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
HT-BED-PARM
<-range><-muddep-><--tgrnd-><--kmud--><-kgrnd-->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END HT-BED-PARM

*******
Example
*******
HT-BED-PARM
RCHRES MUDDEP TGRND KMUD KGRND ***
# - # m deg C (kcal/m2/C/hr) ***
1 7 0.1 20. 50.4 1.42
END HT-BED-PARM
********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<-muddep-> MUDDEP F10.0 0.33 0.01 none ft Engl
0.1 0.01 none m Metric
<--tgrnd-> TGRND F10.0 59. 14. 113. deg F Engl
15. -10. 45. deg C Metric
<--kmud--> KMUD F10.0 50. 0.0 none kcal/m2/C/hr Both
<--kgrnd-> KGRND F10.0 1.4 0.0 none kcal/m2/C/hr Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

MUDDEP is the depth of the mud layer in the two-interface model (BEDFLG = 2).

TGRND is the constant (TGFLG = 2) ground temperature; it is used in the one and
two-interface models (BEDFLG = 1 or 2). Optionally, the ground temperature can be
input in the form of twelve monthly values or a time series.

KMUD is the heat conduction coefficient between water and the mud/ground; it is
used if BEDFLG = 1 or 2. Typical values range from 3 to 100 kcal/m2/C/hr.

KGRND is the heat conduction coefficient between ground and mud in the two-
interface model (BEDFLG = 2).

523
 RCHRES -- Section HTRCH Input

4.4(3).5.4 Table-type MON-HT-TGRND -- Monthly ground temperatures for bed heat

conduction algorithms

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-HT-TGRND
<-range><-----------------------12-values-------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-HT-TGRND

*******
Example
*******

MON-HT-TGRND
RCHRES TG1 TG2 TG3 TG4 TG5 TG6 TG7 TG8 TG9 TG10 TG11 TG12***
# - # ***
1 7 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 20. 20. 20. 18. 17. 16.
END MON-HT-TGRND

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<12-values> TGRNDM(1-12) F5.0 none 14. 113. deg F English
none -10. 45 deg C Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

TGRNDM(1) through TGRNDM(12) are monthly ground temperatures for use in the bed
heat conduction models. This table must be included in the UCI only if TGFLG is
assigned a value of 3 and BEDFLG = 1 or 2 in Table-type HT-BED-FLAGS.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

524
 RCHRES -- Section HTRCH Input

4.4(3).5.5 Table-type HT-BED-DELH -- Heat fluxes for Jobson bed heat conduction
method

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

HT-BED-DELH
<-range><--delh1-><--delh2-><--delh3-><--delh4-><--delh5-><--delh6-><--delh7->
.
.
<-range><-delh99-><-delh100>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END HT-BED-DELH

*******
Example
*******
HT-BED-DELH
RCHRES *** DELH DELH DELH DELH DELH DELH DELH
# - # *** 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 -14.2 -9.44 -7.80 -6.66 -5.77 -5.34 -4.99
1 -4.71 -4.47 -4.27 -3.81 -3.93 -3.53 -3.66
etc
END HT-BED-DELH

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<--delhi-> DELH(100) F10.0 0.0 none none btu/ft2/F/ivl English
0.0 none none kcal/m2/C/ivl Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explanation

DELH are bed sediment-to-water heat fluxes (per one degree increase in water
temperature) for the past TSTOP time intervals; used in the Jobson bed-conduction
method. A maximum of 100 values of DELH are possible.

Caution: DELH values are dependent on the time step (INDELT in GLOBAL Block).

525
 RCHRES -- Section HTRCH Input

4.4(3).5.6 Table-type HT-BED-DELTT -- Initial temperature changes for Jobson

bed conduction method

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

HT-BED-DELTT
<-range><-deltt1-><-deltt2-><-deltt3-><-deltt4-><-deltt5-><-deltt6-><-deltt7->
.
.
<-range><deltt99-><deltt100>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END HT-BED-DELTT

*******
Example
*******
HT-BED-DELTT
RCHRES *** DELTT DELTT DELTT DELTT DELTT DELTT DELTT
# - # *** 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
*** 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 14.2 9.44 7.80 6.66 5.77 5.34 4.99
1 4.71 4.47 4.27 3.81 3.93 3.53 3.66
etc
END HT-BED-DELTT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<-deltti-> DELTT(100) F10.0 0.0 none none deg F English
0.0 none none deg C Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explanation

DELTT are initial water temperature changes for the TSTOP time intervals
immediately preceding the starting time of the simulation; used in the Jobson bed-
conduction method. A maximum of 100 values of DELTT are possible. DELTT values
are positive if the water temperature increases.

526
 RCHRES -- Section HTRCH Input

4.4(3).5.7 Table-type HEAT-INIT -- Initial conditions for HTRCH

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

HEAT-INIT
<-range><----init-temp----->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END HEAT-INIT

*******
Example
*******
HEAT-INIT
RCHRES TW AIRTMP ***
# - # degF degF ***
1 7 62. 70.
END HEAT-INIT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<init-temp> TW F10.0 60. 32. 200. degF Engl
15.5 0.0 95. degC Metric
AIRTMP F10.0 60. -90. 150. degF Engl
15.5 -70.0 65. degC Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

TW is the initial water temperature and AIRTMP indicates the initial air
temperature at the RCHRES.

527
 RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input

4.4(3).6 RCHRES-BLOCK -- Section SEDTRN input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type SANDFG]
Table-type SED-GENPARM
Table-type SED-HYDPARM -- only if Section HYDR is inactive
Table-type SAND-PM
Table-type SILT-CLAY-PM -- include twice, 1st for silt, 2nd for clay
[Table-type SSED-INIT]
[Table-type BED-INIT]

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables above is detailed in the documentation which
follows. Tables in brackets [] need not always be supplied; for example, because
all of the inputs have default values.

528
 RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input

4.4(3).6.1 Table-type SANDFG -- Sandload method flag

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SANDFG
<-range><sfg>
. . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . .
END SANDFG

*******
Example
*******

SANDFG
RCHRES ***
# - # SDFG ***
2 2
END SANDFG

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<sfg> SANDFG I5 3 1 3
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

SANDFG indicates the method that will be used for sandload simulation:
1 = Toffaleti method
2 = Colby method
3 = user-specified power function method.

529
 RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input

4.4(3).6.2 Table-type SED-GENPARM -- General sediment related parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SED-GENPARM
<-range><----------gen-parm---------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SED-GENPARM

*******
Example
*******

SED-GENPARM
RCHRES BEDWID BEDWRN POR***
# - # (m) (m) ***
3 10 30. 2. 0.4
END SED-GENPARM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<gen-parm> BEDWID F10.0 none 1.0 none ft Engl
none 0.3 none m Metric
BEDWRN F10.0 100. .001 none ft Engl
30.5 .0003 none m Metric
POR F10.0 0.5 0.1 0.9 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explanation

BEDWID is the width of the cross-section over which HSPF will assume bed
sediment is deposited (regardless of stage, top-width, etc); BEDWID is constant.
It is used to estimate the depth of bed sediment.

BEDWRN is the bed depth which, if exceeded (e.g., through deposition) will cause
a warning message to be printed in the echo file (MESSU).

POR is the porosity of the bed (volume voids/total volume). It is used to estimate
bed depth.

530
 RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input

4.4(3).6.3 Table-type SED-HYDPARM -- Parameters normally read in Section HYDR

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SED-HYDPARM
<-range><--------sed-hydparm--------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SED-HYDPARM

*******
Example
*******

SED-HYDPARM
RCHRES LEN DELTH DB50***
# - # (km) (m) (mm)***
2 5.0 4.0 0.5
5 20.0 5.0 0.3
END SED-HYDPARM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<sed-hydparm> LEN F10.0 none 0.01 none miles Engl
none 0.016 none km Metric
DELTH F10.0 0.0 0.0 none ft Engl
0.0 0.0 none m Metric
DB50 F10.0 .01 .0001 100. in Engl
.25 .0025 2500. mm Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only required and read if Section HYDR is not active. Normally these
parameters are supplied in Table-type HYDR-PARM2; see section HYDR for definitions.

531
 RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input

4.4(3).6.4 Table-type SAND-PM -- Parameters related to sand transport

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
SAND-PM
<-range><------------------sand-parms-------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SAND-PM
*******
Example
*******
SAND-PM
RCHRES D W ***
# - # (in) (in/sec) ***
3 .01 1.2
END SAND-PM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<sand-parms> D F10.0 none .001 100. in Engl
none .025 2500. mm Metric
W F10.0 none .02 500. in/sec Engl
none .5 12500. mm/sec Metric
RHO F10.0 2.65 1.0 4.0 gm/cm3 Both
KSAND F10.0 0.0 0.0 none complex Both
EXPSND F10.0 0.0 0.0 none complex Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

D is the effective diameter of the transported sand particles, and W is the

corresponding fall velocity in still water. Note: the sand transport algorithms
do not actually use D; they use DB50, supplied in Table-type HYDR-PARM2. D is
included here for consistency with the input data supplied for cohesive sediment.

RHO is the density of the sand particles.

KSAND and EXPSND are the coefficient and exponent in the sandload power function
formula. These values should be input if SANDFG=3.

532
 RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input

4.4(3).6.5 Table-type SILT-CLAY-PM -- Parameters for silt or clay

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SILT-CLAY-PM
<-range><----------------------silt-clay-pm------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SILT-CLAY-PM

*******
Example
*******

SILT-CLAY-PM
RCHRES D W RHO TAUCD TAUCS M ***
# - # (mm) (mm/sec) (gm/cm3) (kg/m2) (kg/m2) (kg/m2.d) ***
6 .03 .80 2.7 2.0 2.5 0.1
9 .04 1.5 2.6 2.0 3.0 .08
END SILT-CLAY-PM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<silt-clay-pm> D F10.0 0.0 0.0 .003 in Engl
0.0 0.0 .07 mm Metric
W F10.0 0.0 0.0 .2 in/sec Engl
0.0 0.0 5.0 mm/sec Metric
RHO F10.0 2.65 2.0 4.0 gm/cm3 Both
TAUCD F10.0 1.0E10 1.0E-10 none lb/ft2 Engl
1.0E10 1.0E-10 none kg/m2 Metric
TAUCS F10.0 1.0E10 1.0E-10 none lb/ft2 Engl
1.0E10 1.0E-10 none kg/m2 Metric
M F10.0 0.0 0.0 none lb/ft2.d Engl
0.0 0.0 none kg/m2.d Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

533
 RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input

Explanation

This table must be supplied twice; first for silt, then for clay.

D is the effective diameter of the particles and W is the corresponding fall

velocity in still water.

RHO is the density of the particles.

TAUCD is the critical bed shear stress for deposition. Above this stress, there
will be no deposition; as the stress drops below this value to zero, deposition
will gradually increase to the value implied by the fall velocity in still water.

TAUCS is the critical bed shear stress for scour. Below this value, there will be
no scour; above it, scour will steadily increase.

In general TAUCD should be less than or equal to TAUCS.

M is the erodibility coefficient of the sediment.

Note that the default values for W, TAUCD, TAUCS, and M have been set so that silt
and clay will behave as "washload"; that is, material will settle at the rate
implied by W (defaulted to zero) and there will be no scour; the material will
behave like a conservative substance.

534
 RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input

4.4(3).6.6 Table-type SSED-INIT -- Initial concentrations of suspended

sediment

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SSED-INIT
<-range><---------ssed-init---------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SSED-INIT

*******
Example
*******

SSED-INIT
RCHRES Suspended sed concs (mg/l) ***
# - # Sand Silt Clay ***
1 5 100. 50. 20.
END SSED-INIT

************************************************* *******************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ssed-init> SSED(3) 3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

The three values supplied are the initial concentrations of suspended sand, silt,
and clay, respectively.

535
 RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input

4.4(3).6.7 Table-type BED-INIT -- Initial content of bed sediment

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

BED-INIT
<-range><-bed-dep><fracsand><fracsilt><fracclay>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END BED-INIT

*******
Example
*******

BED-INIT
RCHRES BEDDEP Initial bed composition ***
# - # (m) Sand Silt Clay ***
3 1.5 0.6 0.2 0.2
END BED-INIT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<bed-dep> BEDDEP F10.0 0.0 0.0 none ft Engl
0.0 0.0 none m Metric
<fracsand> temporary F10.0 1.0 .0001 1.0 none Both
<fracsilt> array F10.0 0.0 0.0 .9999 none Both
<fracclay> F10.0 0.0 0.0 .9999 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

BEDDEP is the initial total depth (thickness) of the bed.

The three values supplied under <fracsand>, <fracsilt>, and <fracclay> are the
initial fractions (by weight) of sand, silt, and clay in the bed material. The
default values are arranged to simulate an all-sand bed. The sum of the fractions
must be 1.00.

536
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7 RCHRES-BLOCK -- Section GQUAL input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type GQ-GENDATA]
[Table-type GQ-AD-FLAGS]

next 15 tables -- repeat for each qual

Table-type GQ-QALDATA
[Table-type GQ-QALFG]
[Table-type GQ-FLG2]
Table-type GQ-HYDPM -- only if qual undergoes hydrolysis (QALFG(1,I)=1)
Table-type GQ-ROXPM -- only if qual undergoes oxidation (QALFG(2,I)=1)
[Table-type GQ-PHOTPM] -- only if qual undergoes photolysis (QALFG(3,I)=1)
Table-type GQ-CFGAS -- only if qual undergoes volatilization (QALFG(4,I)=1)

next 2 tables -- only if qual undergoes biodegradation (QALFG(5,I)=1)

Table-type GQ-BIOPM
Table-type MON-BIO -- only if biomass is input monthly (GQPM2(7,I)=3)
Table-type GQ-GENDECAY -- only if qual has "general" decay (QALFG(6,I)=1)

next 5 tables -- only if qual is sediment associated (QALFG(7,I)=1)

[Table-type GQ-SEDDECAY]
Table-type GQ-KD
Table-type GQ-ADRATE
[Table-type GQ-ADTHETA]
[Table-type GQ-SEDCONC]

[Table-type GQ-VALUES]

next 3 tables -- only if the data are to be read as monthly values

(Source flag in Table-type GQ-GENDATA is ON)
[Table-type MON-WATEMP]
[Table-type MON-PHVAL] -- only if there is hydrolysis (any QALFG(1)=1)
[Table-type MON-ROXYGEN] -- only if there is oxidation (any QALFG(2)=1)

next 8 tables -- only if there is photolysis (any QALFG(3) = 1)

Table-type GQ-ALPHA
[Table-type GQ-GAMMA]
[Table-type GQ-DELTA]
[Table-type GQ-CLDFACT]

537
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

next 3 tables -- only if the data are to be read as monthly values

(Source flag in Table-type GQ-GENDATA is ON)
[Table-type MON-CLOUD]
[Table-type MON-SEDCONC]
[Table-type MON-PHYTO]
[Table-type SURF-EXPOSED] -- only if Section HTRCH is inactive
(see Section PLANK for documentation)

next 7 tables -- only if there is volatilization (any QALFG(4) = 1)

[Table-type OX-FLAGS]
[Table-type ELEV]
[Table-type OX-CFOREA]
[Table-type OX-TSIVOGLOU]
Table-type OX-LEN-DELTH
[Table-type OX-TCGINV]
Table-type OX-REAPARM
[Table-type GQ-DAUGHTER] -- repeat for each decay process that produces
daughter quals from parents

********************************************************************************

Explanation

A "qual" is a generalized quality constituent simulated using this module section.

The exact format of each of the tables above, except those "borrowed" from Sections
OXRX and PLANK, is detailed in the documentation which follows. Tables in brackets
[] need not always be supplied; for example, because all of the inputs have default
values.

538
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.1 Table-type GQ-GENDATA -- General input for Section GQUAL

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-GENDATA
<-range><ngq><--------source-fgs----------><lat>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-GENDATA

*******
Example
*******

GQ-GENDATA
RCHRES NGQL TPFG PHFG ROFG CDFG SDFG PYFG LAT***
# - # ***
1 7 3 2 2 1 2 2 3 48
END GQ-GENDATA

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ngq> NGQUAL I5 1 1 3 none Both
<source-fgs> TEMPFG I5 2 1 3 none Both
PHFLAG I5 2 1 3 none Both
ROXFG I5 2 1 3 none Both
CLDFG I5 2 1 3 none Both
SDFG I5 2 1 3 none Both
PHYTFG I5 2 1 3 none Both
<lat> LAT I5 0 -54 54 degrees Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

539
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

Explanation

NGQUAL - number of generalized constituents (quals) being simulated.

TEMPFG - source of water temperature data. 1 means a time series - either input
or computed; 2 means a single user-supplied value; 3 means 12 user-
supplied values (one for each month).
PHFLAG - source of pH data. Input only if any QALFG(1)=1. Source designation
scheme is the same as for TEMPFG.
ROXFG - source of free radical oxygen data. Input only if any QALFG(2)=1.
Source designation scheme is the same as for TEMPFG.
CLDFG - source of cloud cover data. Input only if any QALFG(3)=1. Source
designation scheme is the same as for TEMPFG.
SDFG - source of total sediment concentration data. Input only if any
QALFG(3)=1. Source designation scheme is the same as for TEMPFG.
PHYTFG - source of phytoplankton data. Input only if any QALFG(3)=1. Source
designation scheme is the same as for TEMPFG.
LAT - latitude of the RCHRES. Input only if any QALFG(3)=1. Positive for
northern hemisphere.

540
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.2 Table-type GQ-AD-FLAGS -- Atmospheric deposition flags for GQUAL

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-AD-FLAGS
<-range> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-AD-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******

GQ-AD-FLAGS
RCHRES Atmospheric deposition flags ***
*** GQUAL1 GQUAL2 GQUAL3
#*** # <F><C> <F><C> <F><C>
1 7 -1 10 -1 -1 11 12
END GQ-AD-FLAGS

********************************************************************************

Details
------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
------------------------------------------------------------
<f><c> GQADFG(*) (1X,2I3) 0 -1 none
------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

GQADFG is an array of flags indicating the source of atmospheric deposition data.

Each GQUAL has two flags. The first is for dry or total deposition flux, and the
second is for wet deposition concentration. The flag values indicate:

0 No deposition of this type is simulated

-1 Deposition of this type is input as time series GQADFX or
GQADCN
>0 Deposition of this type is input in the MONTH-DATA table
with the corresponding table ID number.

541
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.3 Table-type GQ-QALDATA -- Data for a generalized quality constituent

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-QALDATA
<-range><-------gqid-------><--dqal--> <cu><--conv--> <qtyid->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-QALDATA

*******
Example
*******

GQ-QALDATA
RCHRES *** GQID DQAL CONCID CONV QTYID
# - # ***
1 7 Coliforms 2.0 # .001 #
END GQ-QALDATA

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<gqid> GQID 5A4 none none none none Both
<dqal> DQAL F10.0 0.0 0.0 none concid Both
<cu> CONCID A4 none none none none Both
<conv> CONV F10.0 none 1.0E-30 none see below
<qtyid> QTYID 2A4 none none none none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

GQID - Name of constituent (qual).

DQAL - Initial dissolved concentration of qual.
CONCID - Concentration units (implied that it is "per liter") eg."mg"(/l).
QTYID - Name of mass quantity unit for qual.
CONV - Factor to convert from QTYID/VOL to concentration (CONCID) units:
Conc= CONV* QTYID/VOL (in the English system, VOL is in ft3)
(in the Metric system, VOL is in m3).

542
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.4 Table-type GQ-QALFG -- First set of flags for a qual

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-QALFG
<-range><---------degrad-fgs---------><sfg>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-QALFG

*******
Example
*******

GQ-QALFG
RCHRES HDRL OXID PHOT VOLT BIOD GEN SDAS***
# - # ***
1 7 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
END GQ-QALFG
********************************************************************************
Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<degrad-fgs> QALFG(1) I5 0 0 1 none Both
QALFG(2) I5 0 0 1 none Both
QALFG(3) I5 0 0 1 none Both
QALFG(4) I5 0 0 1 none Both
QALFG(5) I5 0 0 1 none Both
QALFG(6) I5 0 0 1 none Both
<sfg> QALFG(7) I5 0 0 1 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explanation

QALFG(1) - indicates whether hydrolysis is considered for dissolved qual.

QALFG(2) - indicates whether oxidation by free radical oxygen is considered for
dissolved qual.
QALFG(3) - indicates whether photolysis is considered for dissolved qual.
QALFG(4) - indicates whether volatilization is considered for dissolved qual.
QALFG(5) - indicates whether biodegradation is considered for dissolved qual.
QALFG(6) - indicates whether general first order decay is considered for
dissolved qual.
QALFG(7) - indicates whether or not qual is associated with sediment. If so,
adsorption/desorption of qual is simulated.

543
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.5 Table-type GQ-FLG2 -- Second set of flags for a qual

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-FLG2
<-range><-------daughter proc--------><sbm>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-FLG2

*******
Example
*******

GQ-FLG2
RCHRES HDRL OXID PHOT VOLT BIOD GEN SBMS***
# - # ***
1 7 0 0 1 0 1 0 2
END GQ-FLG2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<daughter proc>GQPM2(1) I5 0 0 1 none Both
GQPM2(2) I5 0 0 1 none Both
GQPM2(3) I5 0 0 1 none Both
GQPM2(4) I5 0 0 1 none Both
GQPM2(5) I5 0 0 1 none Both
GQPM2(6) I5 0 0 1 none Both
<sbm> GQPM2(7) I5 2 1 3 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

GQPM2(1) through GQPM2(6) indicate whether or not this qual is a daughter

product through each of the six decay processes (1-hydrolysis, 2-oxidation,
3-photolysis, 4-reserved for future use, 5-biodegradation, 6-general first order
decay). GQPM2(7) indicates the source of biomass data for qual. Input only if
QALFG(5)=1. (1=time series, 2=single value, 3=twelve monthly values)

544
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.6 Table-type GQ-HYDPM -- Hydrolysis parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-HYDPM
<-range><-----------hydrol-parms--------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-HYDPM

*******
Example
*******

GQ-HYDPM
RCHRES KA KB KN THHYD***
# - # ***
1 7 5000. 50. .00004 1.03
END GQ-HYDPM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<hydrol-parms> KA F10.0 none 1.0E-30 none /M-sec Both
KB F10.0 none 1.0E-30 none /M-sec Both
KN F10.0 none 1.0E-30 none /sec Both
THHYD F10.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

KA - second-order acid rate constant for hydrolysis

KB - second-order base rate constant for hydrolysis
KN - first-order rate constant of neutral reaction with water
THHYD - temperature correction coefficient for hydrolysis

545
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.7 Table-type GQ-ROXPM -- Parameters for free radical oxidation of qual

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-ROXPM
<-range><------rox-pm------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-ROXPM

*******
Example
*******

GQ-ROXPM
RCHRES KOX THOX***
# - # ***
1 7 .000014 1.01
END GQ-ROXPM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<rox-pm> KOX F10.0 none 1.0E-30 none /M.sec Both
THOX F10.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

KOX - second-order rate constant for oxidation by free radical oxygen

THOX - temperature correction coefficient for oxidation by free radical oxygen

546
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.8 Table-type GQ-PHOTPM -- Parameters for photolysis

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-PHOTPM
<-range><--------------------------first-7----------------------------------->
<-range><--------------------------second-7---------------------------------->
<-range><---------------last-4-----------------><--phi---><-theta-->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-PHOTPM

*******
Example
*******

GQ-PHOTPM
# - #*** K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7
# - #*** K8 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14
# - #*** K15 K16 K17 K18 PHI THETA
1 7 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5
1 7 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5
1 7 .5 .5 .5 .5 .47 1.02
END GQ-PHOTPM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<first-7> PHOTPM(1-7) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none l/M.cm Both
<second-7> PHOTPM(8-14) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none l/M.cm Both
<last-4> PHOTPM(15-18) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none l/M.cm Both
<phi> PHOTPM(19) F10.0 1.0 .0001 10.0 M/E Both
<theta> PHOTPM(20) F10.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

547
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

Explanation

PHOTPM(1) through PHOTPM(18) are molar absorption coefficients for qual for 18
wavelength ranges of light (see functional description for subroutine DDECAY in
Part E).

PHOTPM(19) is the quantum yield for the qual in air-saturated pure water.

PHOTPM(20) is the temperature correction coefficient for photolysis.

When an entry has to be continued onto more than 1 line:

1. No blank or comment lines may be put between any of the lines for a continued
entry. Put all comments ahead of the entry. (See above example).
2. The <range> specification must be repeated for each line onto which the entry
is continued.

548
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.9 Table-type GQ-CFGAS -- Ratio of volatilization rate to oxygen

reaeration rate

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-CFGAS
<-range><--cfgas->
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END GQ-CFGAS

*******
Example
*******

GQ-CFGAS
RCHRES CFGAS***
# - # ***
1 7 .70
END GQ-CFGAS

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<cfgas> CFGAS F10.0 none 1.0E-30 none none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

CFGAS is the ratio of the volatilization rate to the oxygen reaeration rate.

549
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.10 Table-type GQ-BIOPM -- Biodegradation parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-BIOPM
<-range><----------bioparm----------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-BIOPM

*******
Example
*******

GQ-BIOPM
RCHRES BIOCON THBIO BIO***
# - # ***
1 7 .31 1.07 .04
END GQ-BIOPM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<bioparm> BIOCON F10.0 none 1.0E-30 none l/mg/day Both
THBIO F10.0 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
BIO F10.0 none 0.00001 none mg/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

BIOCON - second order rate constant for biodegradation of qual by biomass

THBIO - temperature correction coefficient for biodegradation of qual
BIO - concentration of the biomass which causes biodegradation of qual

550
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.11 Table-type MON-BIO -- Monthly values of biomass

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-BIO
<-range><-----------------------12-values-------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-BIO

*******
Example
*******

MON-BIO
RCHRES BM1 BM2 BM3 BM4 BM5 BM6 BM7 BM8 BM9 BM10 BM11 BM12***
# - # ***
1 7 .03 .035 .03 .02 .02 .03 .03 .035 .040 .060 .050 .035
END MON-BIO

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<12-values> BIOM(1-12) F5.0 none 0.00001 none mg/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

BIOM(1) through BIOM(12) are monthly concentrations of biomass that cause

biodegradation of qual. This table must be included in the UCI only if GQPM2(7)
is assigned a value of 3 in Table-type GQ-FLG2.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

551
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.12 Table-type GQ-GENDECAY -- Parameters for "general" decay of qual

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-GENDECAY
<-range><----decay-pms----->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-GENDECAY

*******
Example
*******

GQ-GENDECAY
RCHRES FSTDEC THFST***
# - # ***
1 7 0.2 1.05
END GQ-GENDECAY

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<decay-pms> FSTDEC F10.0 none .00001 none /day Both
THFST F10.0 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

FSTDEC - first-order decay rate for qual

THFST - temperature correction coefficient for first-order decay of qual

552
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.13 Table-type GQ-SEDDECAY -- Parameters for decay of contaminant

adsorbed to sediment

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-SEDDECAY
<-range><--------------ads-decay--------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-SEDDECAY

*******
Example
*******

GQ-SEDDECAY
RCHRES KSUSP THSUSP KBED THBED***
# - # ***
1 7 .01 1.06 .005 1.03
END GQ-SEDDECAY

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ads-decay> ADDCPM(1) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
ADDCPM(2) F10.0 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
ADDCPM(3) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
ADDCPM(4) F10.0 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

ADDCPM(1) - decay rate for qual adsorbed to suspended sediment

ADDCPM(2) - temperature correction coefficient for decay of qual on
suspended sediment
ADDCPM(3) - decay rate for qual adsorbed to bed sediment
ADDCPM(4) - temperature correction coefficient for decay of qual on
bed sediment

553
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.14 Table-type GQ-KD -- Adsorption coefficients of qual

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-KD
<-range><------------------------k-part---------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-KD

*******
Example
*******

GQ-KD
RCHRES ADPM1 ADPM2 ADPM3 ADPM4 ADPM5 ADPM6***
# - # ***
1 7 1.0 5000 15000 .3 1000 4000
END GQ-KD

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<k-part> ADPM(1,1) F10.0 none 1.0E-10 none l/mg Both
ADPM(2,1) F10.0 none 1.0E-10 none l/mg Both
ADPM(3,1) F10.0 none 1.0E-10 none l/mg Both
ADPM(4,1) F10.0 none 1.0E-10 none l/mg Both
ADPM(5,1) F10.0 none 1.0E-10 none l/mg Both
ADPM(6,1) F10.0 none 1.0E-10 none l/mg Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

ADPM(1,1) through ADPM(6,1) are distribution coefficients for qual with:

1-suspended sand, 2-suspended silt, 3-suspended clay, 4-bed sand, 5-bed silt, and
6-bed clay.

554
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.15 Table-type GQ-ADRATE -- Adsorption/desorption rate parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-ADRATE
<-range><-------------------------k-adsdes------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-ADRATE

*******
Example
*******

GQ-ADRATE
RCHRES ADPM1 ADPM2 ADPM3 ADPM4 ADPM5 ADPM6***
# - # ***
1 7 400. 400. 400. .0028 .0028 .0028
END GQ-ADRATE

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<k-adsdes> ADPM(1,2) F10.0 none .00001 none /day Both
ADPM(2,2) F10.0 none .00001 none /day Both
ADPM(3,2) F10.0 none .00001 none /day Both
ADPM(4,2) F10.0 none .00001 none /day Both
ADPM(5,2) F10.0 none .00001 none /day Both
ADPM(6,2) F10.0 none .00001 none /day Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

ADPM(1,2) through ADPM(6,2) are transfer rates between adsorbed and desorbed states
of qual with: 1-suspended sand, 2-suspended silt, 3-suspended clay, 4-bed sand,
5-bed silt, and 6-bed clay.

555
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.16 Table-type GQ-ADTHETA-- Adsorption/desorption temperature

correction parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-ADTHETA
<-range><----------------------thet-adsdes------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-ADTHETA

*******
Example
*******

GQ-ADTHETA
RCHRES ADPM1 ADPM2 ADPM3 ADPM4 ADPM5 ADPM6***
# - # ***
1 7 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.04 1.04 1.04
END GQ-ADTHETA

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<thet-adsdes> ADPM(1,3) F10.0 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
ADPM(2,3) F10.0 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
ADPM(3,3) F10.0 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
ADPM(4,3) F10.0 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
ADPM(5,3) F10.0 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
ADPM(6,3) F10.0 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

ADPM(1,3) through ADPM(6,3) are temperature correction coefficients for

adsorption/desorption on: 1-suspended sand, 2-suspended silt, 3-suspended clay,
4-bed sand, 5-bed silt, 6-bed clay.

556
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.17 Table-type GQ-SEDCONC -- Initial concentrations on sediment

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-SEDCONC
<-range><------------------------sedconc--------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-SEDCONC

*******
Example
*******

GQ-SEDCONC
RCHRES SQAL1 SQAL2 SQAL3 SQAL4 SQAL5 SQAL6***
# - # ***
1 7 1.3 8.4 8.9 1.9 8.4 9.2
END GQ-SEDCONC

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<sedconc> SQAL(1-6) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none concu/mg Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

SQAL(1) through SQAL(6) are initial concentrations of qual on: 1-suspended sand,
2-suspended silt, 3-suspended clay, 4-bed sand, 5-bed silt, 6-bed clay.

557
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.18 Table-type GQ-VALUES -- Initial values for inputs which are

constant

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-VALUES
<-range><--twat--><-phval--><---roc--><---cld--><--sdcnc-><--phy--->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-VALUES

*******
Example
*******

GQ-VALUES
RCHRES TWAT PHVAL ROC CLD SDCNC PHY***
# - # ***
1 7 22. 7. .07 1. 11. .007
END GQ-VALUES

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<twat> TWAT F10.0 60. 32. 212. deg F Engl
15.5 0.1 100. deg C Metric
<phval> PHVAL F10.0 7.0 1.0 14. none Both
<roc> ROC F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mole/l Both
<cld> CLD F10.0 0.0 0.0 10. tenths Both
<sdcnc> SDCNC F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
<phy> PHY F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

558
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

Explanation

In Table-type GQ-GENDATA, values for data source flags are specified. If any of
the flags are assigned a value of 2, a single constant value for that data type
must be provided in this table. For example, if ROXFG=2 a value for free radical
oxygen concentration (ROC) must be supplied in columns 31-40 of this table.

TWAT - water temperature

PHVAL - pH
ROC - free radical oxygen concentration
CLD - cloud cover
SDCNC - total suspended sediment concentration
PHY - phytoplankton concentration (as biomass)

559
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.19 Table-type MON-WATEMP -- Monthly values of water temperature

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-WATEMP
<-range><-----------------------12-values-------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-WATEMP

*******
Example
*******

MON-WATEMP
RCHRES T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12***
# - # ***
1 7 34 37 39 42 55 59 64 62 58 54 46 38
END MON-WATEMP

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<12-values> TEMPM(1-12) F5.0 60. 32. 212. degF Engl
15.5 0.1 100. degC Metric
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

In Table-type GQ-GENDATA, values for data source flags are specified. If TEMPFG
is assigned a value of 3, 12 monthly values for water temperature must be supplied
in this table.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

560
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.20 Table-type MON-PHVAL -- Monthly values of pH

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-PHVAL
<-range><-----------------------12-values-------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-PHVAL

*******
Example
*******

MON-PHVAL
RCHRES PH1 PH2 PH3 PH4 PH5 PH6 PH7 PH8 PH9 PH10 PH11 PH12***
# - # ***
1 7 6.8 6.8 6.4 6.1 5.9 5.6 5.6 5.9 6.1 6.4 6.8 6.8
END MON-PHVAL

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<12-values> PHVALM(1-12) F5.0 7.0 1.0 14.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

In Table-type GQ-GENDATA, values for data source flags are specified. If PHFLAG
is assigned a value of 3, 12 monthly values for pH must be supplied in this table.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

561
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.21 Table-type MON-ROXYGEN -- Monthly values of free radical oxygen

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-ROXYGEN
<-range><-----------------------12-values-------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-ROXYGEN

*******
Example
*******

MON-ROXYGEN
RCHRES OX1 OX2 OX3 OX4 OX5 OX6 OX7 OX8 OX9 OX10 OX11 OX12***
# - # ***
1 7 .09 .09 .10 .11 .12 .12 .12 .12 .12 .10 .09 .09
END MON-ROXYGEN

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<12-values> ROCM(1-12) F5.0 0.0 0.0 none mole/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

In Table-type GQ-GENDATA, values for data source flags are specified. If ROXFG is
assigned a value of 3, 12 monthly values for free radical oxygen concentration must
be supplied in this table.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

562
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.22 Table-type GQ-ALPHA -- Values of base absorbance coefficient

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-ALPHA
<-range><--------------------------first-7----------------------------------->
<-range><--------------------------second-7---------------------------------->
<-range><--------------last-4------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-ALPHA

*******
Example
*******

GQ-ALPHA
RCHRES***
# - #*** K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7
# - #*** K8 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14
# - #*** K15 K16 K17 K18
1 7 .008 .009 .010 .011 .011 .011 .012
1 7 .013 .015 .016 .017 .018 .019 .020
1 7 .021 .022 .024 .024
END GQ-ALPHA

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<first-7> ALPH(1-7) F10.0 none .00001 none /cm Both
<second-7> ALPH(8-14) F10.0 none .00001 none /cm Both
<last-4> ALPH(15-18) F10.0 none .00001 none /cm Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

563
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

Explanation

ALPH(1) through ALPH(18) are base absorption coefficients for 18 wavelengths of

light passing through clear water.

This table is necessary only when a qual undergoes photolysis; i.e., when any
QALFG(3)=1 in Table-type GQ-QALFG.

When an entry has to be continued onto more than 1 line:

1. No blank or comment lines may be put between any of the lines for a continued
entry. Put all comments ahead of the entry. (See above example).
2. The <range> specification must be repeated for each line onto which the entry
is continued.

564
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.23 Table-type GQ-GAMMA -- Values of sediment absorbance coefficient

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-GAMMA
<-range><--------------------------first-7----------------------------------->
<-range><--------------------------second-7---------------------------------->
<-range><--------------last-4------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-GAMMA

*******
Example
*******

GQ-GAMMA
RCHRES***
# - #*** K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7
# - #*** K8 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14
# - #*** K15 K16 K17 K18
1 4 .001 .001 .001 .001 .001 .001 .001
1 4 .001 .002 .002 .002 .002 .002 .002
1 4 .002 .002 .002 .002
END GQ-GAMMA
********************************************************************************
Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<first-7> GAMM(1-7) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none l/mg.cm Both
<second-7> GAMM(8-14) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none l/mg.cm Both
<last-4> GAMM(15-18) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none l/mg.cm Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explanation

GAMM(1) through GAMM(18) are increments to the base absorbance coefficient

(Table-type GQ-ALPHA) for light passing through sediment-laden water.

This is table necessary only when a qual undergoes photolysis; i.e., when any
QALFG(3)=1 in Table-type GQ-QALFG.

See rules for continuing an entry onto more than 1 line in Explanation for
Table-type GQ-ALPHA.

565
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.24 Table-type GQ-DELTA -- Values of phytoplankton absorbance

coefficient

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-DELTA
<-range><--------------------------first-7----------------------------------->
<-range><--------------------------second-7---------------------------------->
<-range><--------------last-4------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-DELTA
*******
Example
*******
GQ-DELTA
RCHRES***
# - #*** K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7
# - #*** K8 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14
# - #*** K15 K16 K17 K18
1 4 .0007 .0007 .0007 .0007 .0007 .0007 .0007
1 4 .0007 .0007 .0007 .0007 .0007 .0007 .0007
1 4 .0007 .0007 .0007 .0007
END GQ-DELTA

********************************************************************************
Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<first-7> DEL(1-7) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none l/mg.cm Both
<second-7> DEL(8-14) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none l/mg.cm Both
<last-4> DEL(15-18) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none l/mg.cm Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explanation

DEL(1) through DEL(18) are increments to the base absorption coefficient (Table-
type GQ-ALPHA) for light passing through plankton-laden water.

This table is necessary only when a qual undergoes photolysis; i.e., when any
QALFG(3)=1 in Table-type GQ-QALFG.

See rules for continuing an entry onto more than 1 line in Explanation for
Table-type GQ-ALPHA.

566
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.25 Table-type GQ-CLDFACT -- Light extinction efficiency of cloud cover

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GQ-CLDFACT
<-range><--------------------------first-7----------------------------------->
<-range><--------------------------second-7---------------------------------->
<-range><--------------last-4------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-CLDFACT

*******
Example
*******

GQ-CLDFACT
RCHRES***
# - #*** F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
# - #*** F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14
# - #*** F15 F16 F17 F18
1 4 .10 .10 .10 .15 .15 .15 .15
1 4 .17 .17 .17 .17 .18 .19 .20
1 4 .21 .21 .21 .21
END GQ-CLDFACT
********************************************************************************
Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<first-7> KCLD(1-7) F10.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
<second-7> KCLD(8-14) F10.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
<last-4> KCLD(15-18) F10.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explanation

KCLD(1) through KCLD(18) are values of light extinction efficiency of cloud cover
for each of 18 wavelengths.

This table is necessary only when a qual undergoes photolysis; i.e., when any
QALFG(3)=1 in Table-type GQ-QALFG.

See rules for continuing an entry onto more than 1 line in Explanation for
Table-type GQ-ALPHA.

567
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.26 Table-type MON-CLOUD -- Monthly values of cloud cover

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-CLOUD
<-range><----------------------12-values--------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-CLOUD

*******
Example
*******

MON-CLOUD
RCHRES C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12***
# - # ***
1 7 3 3 4 3 2 1 1 1 0 1 1 2
END MON-CLOUD

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<12-values> CLDM(1-12) F5.0 0.0 0.0 10.0 tenths Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

CLDM(1) through CLDM(12) are monthly values of average cloud cover. This table
must be included in the UCI only if CLDFG=3 in Table-type GQ-GENDATA.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

568
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.27 Table-type MON-SEDCONC -- Monthly values of sediment concentration

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-SEDCONC
<-range><----------------------12-values--------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-SEDCONC

*******
Example
*******

MON-SEDCONC
RCHRES SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4 SC5 SC6 SC7 SC8 SC9 SC10 SC11 SC12***
# - # ***
1 7 2. 4. 10. 120. 75. 10. 8. 8. 6. 6. 4. 4.
END MON-SEDCONC

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<12-values> SDCNCM(1-12) F5.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

SDCNCM(1) through SDCNCM(12) are monthly average suspended sediment concentration

values. This table must be included in the UCI only if SDFG=3 in Table-type
GQ-GENDATA.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

569
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.28 Table-type MON-PHYTO -- Monthly values of phytoplankton

concentration

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MON-PHYTO
<-range><----------------------12-values--------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MON-PHYTO

*******
Example
*******

MON-PHYTO
RCHRES P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12***
# - # ***
1 7 .01 .03 .03 .03 .04 .11 .33 .47 .31 .17 .15 .06
END MON-PHYTO

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<12-values> PHYM(1-12) F5.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

PHYM(1) through PHYM(12) are monthly values of phytoplankton concentration. This

table must be included in the UCI only if PHYTFG=3 in Table-type GQ-GENDATA.

Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between successive monthly values.

570
 RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input

4.4(3).7.29 Table-type GQ-DAUGHTER -- Relationship between parent and

daughter quals

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
GQ-DAUGHTER
<-range><--zero--><2-from-1><3-from-1>
<-range><--zero--><--zero--><3-from-2>
<-range><--zero--><--zero--><--zero-->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GQ-DAUGHTER
*******
Example
*******
GQ-DAUGHTER
RCHRES ***
# - # ZERO 2F1 3F1***
# - # ZERO ZERO 3F2***
# - # ZERO ZERO ZERO***
1 7 0.0 .36 .02
1 7 0.0 0.0 1.24
1 7 0.0 0.0 0.0
END GQ-DAUGHTER
********************************************************************************
Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<zero> 0.0
<2-from-1> C(2,1) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none none Both
<3-from-1> C(3,1) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none none Both
<3-from-2> C(3,2) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explanation

This table-type specifies the relationship between parent and daughter compounds.
For example, variable C(2,1) indicates the amount of qual #2 which is produced by
decay of qual #1 through one of the decay processes. The table must be repeated
in sequence for each decay process that produces daughter quals from decay of
parent quals. The proper sequence is: 1-hydrolysis, 2-oxidation by free radical
oxygen, 3-photolysis, 4-(reserved for future use), 5-biodegradation, 6-general
first order decay. For example, if biodegradation is the only process of interest,
five of these tables must be included in the UCI file, and the fifth one should
contain nonzero values.

571
 RCHRES -- Section RQUAL Input

4.4(3).8 RCHRES-BLOCK -- Input for RQUAL sections

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type BENTH-FLAG]
[Table-type SCOUR-PARMS]
Section OXRX input
[Section NUTRX input] if NUTRX is active
[Section PLANK input] if PLANK is active
[Section PHCARB input] if PHCARB is active

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables above is detailed in the documentation which
follows. Tables in brackets [] need not always be supplied; for example, because
all of the inputs have default values.

572
 RCHRES -- Section RQUAL Input

4.4(3).8.01 Table-type BENTH-FLAG -- Benthic release flag

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

BENTH-FLAG
<-range><ben>
. . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . .
END BENTH-FLAG

*******
Example
*******
BENTH-FLAG
RCHRES BENF***
# - # ***
1 7
END BENTH-FLAG

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ben> BENRFG I5 0 0 1 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

If BENRFG is 1, benthal influences are considered in the following sections.

573
 RCHRES -- Section RQUAL Input

4.4(3).8.02 Table-type SCOUR-PARMS -- Benthal scour parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SCOUR-PARMS
<-range><----scour-parms--->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SCOUR-PARMS

*******
Example
*******

SCOUR-PARMS
RCHRES SCRVEL SCRMUL***
# - # ft/sec ***
1 7 15. 3.
END SCOUR-PARMS

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<scour-parms> SCRVEL F10.0 10. .01 none ft/sec Engl
3.05 .01 none m/sec Metric
SCRMUL F10.0 2.0 1.0 none none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

SCRVEL is the threshold velocity above which the effect of scouring on benthal
release rates is considered.

SCRMUL is the multiplier by which benthal releases are increased during scouring.

574
 RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input

4.4(3).8.1 RCHRES-BLOCK -- Section OXRX input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

+[Table-type OX-FLAGS]
Table-type OX-GENPARM
+[Table-type ELEV] if section HTRCH is not active
[Table-type OX-BENPARM] if BENRFG=1 (Table-type BENTH-FLAG)
+[Table-type OX-CFOREA] if LKFG=1 (Table-type GEN-INFO)
----
--- if |
+[Table-type OX-TSIVOGLOU] | REAMFG=1 |
+ Table-type OX-LEN-DELTH if section HYDR inactive | (Tsivoglou) | if
--- | LKFG=0
+[Table-type OX-TCGINV] if REAMFG=2 (Owen/Churchill,etc.) |
+ Table-type OX-REAPARM if REAMFG=3 |
----
[Table-type OX-INIT]

********************************************************************************

Note: If any of the tables marked "+" above were supplied in your input for
Section GQUAL, they must not be repeated here (these are the tables used
to calculate the oxygen reaeration coefficient, which, under certain
conditions, is also needed in Section GQUAL).

Explanation

The conditions under which data from the various tables are needed are indicated
above. REAMFG is the reaeration method flag, defined in Table-type OX-FLAGS below.

The exact format of each of the tables above is detailed in the documentation which
follows. Tables in brackets [] need not always be supplied; for example, because
all of the inputs have default values.

575
 RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input

4.4(3).8.1.1 Table-type OX-FLAGS -- Oxygen flags

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

OX-FLAGS
<-range><oxf>
. . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . .
END OX-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******

OX-FLAGS
RCHRES REAM ***
# - # ***
1 7 2
END OX-FLAGS

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<oxf> REAMFG I5 2 1 3 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

REAMFG indicates the method used to calculate the reaeration coefficient for free-
flowing streams.

1 Tsivoglou method is used.

2 Owens, Churchill, or O'Connor-Dobbins method is used depending on velocity
and depth of water.
3 Coefficient is calculated as a power function of velocity and/or depth; user
inputs exponents for velocity and depth and an empirical constant (REAK).

576
 RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input

4.4(3).8.1.2 Table-type OX-GENPARM -- General oxygen parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

OX-GENPARM
<-range><-------------ox-genparm--------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END OX-GENPARM

*******
Example
*******

OX-GENPARM
RCHRES KBOD20 TCBOD KODSET SUPSAT***
# - # /hr ft/hr ***
1 7 0.1 1.06 8.0 1.2
END OX-GENPARM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ox-genparm> KBOD20 F10.0 none 1.0E-30 none /hr Both
TCBOD F10.0 1.075 1.0 2.0 none Both
KODSET F10.0 0.0 0.0 none ft/hr Engl
0.0 0.0 none m/hr Metric
SUPSAT F10.0 1.15 1.0 2.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

KBOD20 is the unit BOD decay rate @ 20 degrees C.

TCBOD is the temperature correction coefficient for BOD decay.
KODSET is the rate of BOD settling.
SUPSAT is the maximum allowable dissolved oxygen supersaturation (expressed as a
multiple of the dissolved oxygen saturation concentration).

577
 RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input

4.4(3).8.1.3 Table-type ELEV -- RCHRES elevation above sea level

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

ELEV
<-range><--elev-->
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END ELEV

*******
Example
*******

ELEV
RCHRES ELEV***
# - # ft***
1 7 2100.
END ELEV

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<elev> ELEV F10.0 0.0 0.0 30000 ft Engl
0.0 0.0 10000 m Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

ELEV is the mean RCHRES elevation above sea level.

578
 RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input

4.4(3).8.1.4 Table-type OX-BENPARM -- Oxygen benthic parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

OX-BENPARM
<-range><--------ox-benparm---------------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END OX-BENPARM

Example
*******
OX-BENPARM
RCHRES BENOD TCBEN EXPOD BRBOD(1) BRBOD(2) EXPREL ***
# - # mg/m2.hr mg/m2.hr mg/m2.hr ***
1 7 1.0
END OX-BENPARM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ox-benparm> BENOD F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/m2.hr Both
TCBEN F10.0 1.074 1.0 2.0 none Both
EXPOD F10.0 1.22 0.1 none none Both
BRBOD(1) F10.0 72. .0001 none mg/m2.hr Both
BRBOD(2) F10.0 100. .0001 none mg/m2.hr Both
EXPREL F10.0 2.82 0.1 none none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is used if BENRFG = 1 in Table-type BENTH-FLAG (see RQUAL section).

BENOD is the benthal oxygen demand at 20 degrees C (with unlimited DO

concentration) (demand is, thus, proportional to the water temperature).?
TCBEN is the temperature correction coefficient for benthal oxygen demand.
EXPOD is the exponential factor in the dissolved oxygen term of the benthal oxygen
demand equation.
BRBOD(1) is the benthal release rate of BOD under aerobic conditions, and BRBOD(2)
is the increment to benthal release of BOD under anaerobic conditions.
EXPREL is the exponent in the DO term of the benthal BOD release equation.

579
 RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input

4.4(3).8.1.5 Table-type OX-CFOREA -- Lake reaeration correction coefficient

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

OX-CFOREA
<-range><-cforea->
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END OX-CFOREA

*******
Example
*******

OX-CFOREA
RCHRES CFOREA***
# - # ***
1 7 0.8
END OX-CFOREA

********************************************************************************

Details
-----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
-----------------------------------------------------------
<cforea> CFOREA F10.0 1.0 .001 10.
------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

CFOREA is a correction factor in the lake reaeration equation; it accounts for good
or poor circulation characteristics.

580
 RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input

4.4(3).8.1.6 Table-type OX-TSIVOGLOU -- Parameters for the Tsivoglou

calculation of reaeration rate

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

OX-TSIVOGLOU
<-range><---ox-tsivoglou--->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END OX-TSIVOGLOU

*******
Example
*******

OX-TSIVOGLOU
RCHRES REAKT TCGINV***
# - # /ft ***
1 7 .07 1.1
END OX-TSIVOGLOU

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ox-tsivoglou> REAKT F10.0 0.08 0.001 1.0 /ft Both
TCGINV F10.0 1.047 1.0 2.0 none Both
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is required if REAMFG is 1.

REAKT is the empirical constant in Tsivoglou's equation for reaeration (escape

coefficient).

TCGINV is the temperature correction coefficient for surface gas invasion.

581
 RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input

4.4(3).8.1.7 Table-type OX-LEN-DELTH -- Length and water elevation drop of reach

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

OX-LEN-DELTH
<-range><---ox-len-delth--->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END OX-LEN-DELTH

*******
Example
*******

OX-LEN-DELTH
RCHRES LEN DELTH***
# - # miles ft***
1 7 10. 200.
END OX-LEN-DELTH

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ox-len-delth> LEN F10.0 none .01 none miles Engl
none .01 none km Metric
DELTH F10.0 none 0.00001 none ft Engl
none 0.00001 none m Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only relevant if HYDR is inactive and REAMFG = 1.

LEN is the length of the RCHRES.

DELTH is the (energy) drop of the RCHRES over its length.

582
 RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input

4.4(3).8.1.8 Table-type OX-TCGINV -- Owen/Churchill/O'Connor-Dobbins data

(temperature correction coefficient)

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

OX-TCGINV
<-range><-tcginv->
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END OX-TCGINV

*******
Example
*******

OX-TCGINV
RCHRES TCGINV***
# - # ***
1 7 1.07
END OX-TCGINV

********************************************************************************

Details
------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
------------------------------------------------------------
<tcginv> TCGINV F10.0 1.047 1.0 2.0
------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is used when REAMFG = 2.

TCGINV is the temperature correction coefficient for surface gas invasion.

583
 RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input

4.4(3).8.1.9 Table-type OX-REAPARM -- Parameters for user-supplied reaeration

formula

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

OX-REAPARM
<-range><-------------ox-reaparm--------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END OX-REAPARM

*******
Example
*******

OX-REAPARM
RCHRES TCGINV REAK EXPRED EXPREV***
# - # /hr ***
1 7 1.08 1.0 -2.0 0.7
END OX-REAPARM

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ox-reaparm> TCGINV F10.0 1.047 1.0 2.0 none Both
REAK F10.0 none 1.0E-30 none /hr Both
EXPRED F10.0 0.0 none 0.0 none Both
EXPREV F10.0 0.0 0.0 none none Both
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is used when REAMFG = 3.

TCGINV - See explanation for Table-type OX-TSIVOGLOU.

REAK is the empirical constant in the equation used to calculate the reaeration
coefficient.
EXPRED is the exponent to depth and EXPREV is the exponent to velocity in the
reaeration coefficient equation.

584
 RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input

4.4(3).8.1.10 Table-type OX-INIT -- Initial concentrations for the OXRX section

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

OX-INIT
<-range><---------ox-init------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END OX-INIT

*******
Example
*******

OX-INIT
RCHRES DOX BOD SATDO***
# - # mg/l mg/l mg/l***
1 7 26. 17.2 43.
END OX-INIT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ox-init> DOX F10.0 0.0 0.0 20.0 mg/l Both
BOD F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
SATDO F10.0 10.0 0.1 20.0 mg/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

DOX is the initial dissolved oxygen.

BOD is the initial biochemical oxygen demand.
SATDO is the initial dissolved oxygen saturation concentration.

585
 RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input

4.4(3).8.2 RCHRES-BLOCK -- Section NUTRX input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type NUT-FLAGS]
[Table-type NUT-AD-FLAGS]
[Table-type CONV-VAL1]
[Table-type NUT-BENPARM] if BENRFG=1 in Table-type BENTH-FLAG
Table-type NUT-NITDENIT
[Table-type NUT-NH3VOLAT] if NH3 volatilization is simulated
(TAMFG=1 and AMVFG=1 in Table-type NUT-FLAGS)
[Table-type MON-PHVAL] if NH3 is simulated and monthly values of pH are being
input (TAMFG=1 and PHFLAG=3 in Table-type NUT-FLAGS)
see section GQUAL for documentation
---
[Table-type NUT-BEDCONC] | if NH3 or PO4 adsorption is simulated
[Table-type NUT-ADSPARM] |--- ((TAMFG=1 and ADNHFG=1) or
[Table-type NUT-ADSINIT] | (PO4FG=1 and ADPOFG=1) in Table-type NUT-FLAGS)
---
[Table-type NUT-DINIT]
********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables above is detailed in the documentation which
follows. Tables in brackets [] need not always be supplied; for example, because
all of the inputs have default values.

BENRFG indicates whether or not benthal influences are considered. TAMFG indicates
whether or not ammonia is simulated, and ADNHFG indicates whether ammonia
adsorption is considered. PO4FG indicates whether or not ortho-phosphorus is
simulated, and ADPOFG indicates whether PO4 adsorption is considered.

586
 RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input

4.4(3).8.2.1 Table-type NUT-FLAGS -- Nutrient flags

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NUT-FLAGS
<-range><---------nut-flags-------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NUT-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******

NUT-FLAGS
RCHRES TAM NO2 PO4 AMV DEN ADNH ADPO PHFL ***
# - # ***
1 7 1 1
END NUT-FLAGS

********************************************************************************

Details
-----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
-----------------------------------------------------------
<nut-flags> TAMFG,NO2FG, 7I5 0 0 1
PO4FG,AMVFG,
DENFG,ADNHFG,
ADPOFG
PHFLG I5 2 1 3
-----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

TAMFG - If on, total ammonia is simulated.

NO2FG - If on, nitrite is simulated.
PO4FG - If on, ortho-phosphorus is simulated.
AMVFG - If on, ammonia volatilization is enabled.
DENFG - If on, denitrification is enabled.
ADNHFG - If on, NH4 adsorption is simulated.
ADPOFG - If on, PO4 adsorption is simulated.
PHFLAG - Source of pH data (1=time series, 2=constant, 3=monthly values).

587
 RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input

4.4(3).8.2.2 Table-type NUT-AD-FLAGS -- Atmospheric deposition flags for

nutrients

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NUT-AD-FLAGS
<-range> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NUT-AD-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******

NUT-AD-FLAGS
RCHRES Atmospheric deposition flags ***
*** NO3 NH3 PO4
#*** # <F><C> <F><C> <F><C>
1 7 -1 10 -1 -1 11 12
END NUT-AD-FLAGS

********************************************************************************

Details
------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
------------------------------------------------------------
<f><c> NUADFG(*) (1X,2I3) 0 -1 none
------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

NUADFG is an array of flags indicating the source of atmospheric deposition data.

Each nutrient has two flags. The first is for dry or total deposition flux, and
the second is for wet deposition concentration. The flag values indicate:
0 No deposition of this type is simulated
-1 Deposition of this type is input as time series NUADFX or
NUADCN
>0 Deposition of this type is input in the MONTH-DATA table
with the corresponding table ID number.

588
 RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input

4.4(3).8.2.3 Table-type CONV-VAL1 -- Conversion factors for nutrients

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

CONV-VAL1
<-range><------------conv-val1----------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END CONV-VAL1

*******
Example
*******

CONV-VAL1
RCHRES CVBO CVBPC CVBPN BPCNTC***
# - # mg/mg mols/mol mols/mol ***
1 7 4.0 67. 33. 77.
END CONV-VAL1

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<conv-val1> CVBO F10.0 1.98 1.0 5.0 mg/mg Both
CVBPC F10.0 106. 50. 200. mols/mol Both
CVBPN F10.0 16. 10. 50. mols/mol Both
BPCNTC F10.0 49. 10. 100. none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

CVBO - Conversion from milligrams biomass to milligrams oxygen.

CVBPC - Conversion from biomass expressed as phosphorus to carbon.
CVBPN - Conversion from biomass expressed as phosphorus to nitrogen.
BPCNTC - Percentage of biomass which is carbon (by weight).

589
 RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input

4.4(3).8.2.4 Table-type NUT-BENPARM -- Nutrient benthic parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NUT-BENPARM
<-range><---------------nut-benparm---------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NUT-BENPARM

*******
Example
*******
NUT-BENPARM
RCHRES BRTAM(1) BRTAM(2) BRPO4(1) BRPO4(2) ANAER***
# - # mg/m2.hr mg/m2.hr mg/m2.hr mg/m2.hr mg/l***
1 7 10. 20. 1.0 4.0 .001
END NUT-BENPARM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<nut-benparm> BRTAM(1) 5F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/m2.hr Both
BRTAM(2) 0.0 0.0 none mg/m2.hr Both
BRPO4(1) 0.0 0.0 none mg/m2.hr Both
BRPO4(2) 0.0 0.0 none mg/m2.hr Both
ANAER .005 .0001 1.0 mg/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is used if BENRFG = 1 in Table-type BENTH-FLAG (see RQUAL section).

BRTAM(1) and BRTAM(2) are the benthal release rates of ammonia under aerobic and
anaerobic conditions, respectively.

BRPO4(1) and BRPO4(2) are the benthal release rates of ortho-phosphorus. The
subscripts are the same as BRTAM.

ANAER is the concentration of dissolved oxygen below which anaerobic conditions are
assumed to exist.

590
 RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input

4.4(3).8.2.5 Table-type NUT-NITDENIT -- Nitrification and denitrification

parameters.

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NUT-NITDENIT
<-range><--------nut-nitdenit-------------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NUT-NITDENIT

Example
*******

NUT-NITDENIT
RCHRES KTAM20 KNO220 TCNIT KNO320 TCDEN DENOXT ***
# - # /hr /hr /hr mg/l ***
1 7 .05 .05 1.1 .05 1.08 4.0
END NUT-NITDENIT

********************************************************************************

Details
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units
name(s)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
<nut-nitdenit> KTAM20 6F10.0 none 0.001 none /hr
KNO220 none 0.001 none /hr
TCNIT 1.07 1.0 2.0
KNO320 none 0.001 none /hr
TCDEN 1.07 1.0 2.0
DENOXT 2.00 0.0 none mg/l
---------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

KTAM20 and KNO220 are the nitrification rates of ammonia and nitrite,
respectively, at 20 degrees C.

KNO320 is the nitrate denitrification rate at 20 degrees C.

TCNIT and TCDEN are the temperature correction coefficients for nitrification
and denitrification, respectively.

DENOXT is the dissolved oxygen concentration threshold for denitrification.

591
 RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input

4.4(3).8.2.6 Table-type NUT-NH3VOLAT -- Ammonia volatilization parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NUT-NH3VOLAT
<-range><---nut-nh3volat--->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NUT-NH3VOLAT

*******
Example
*******

NUT-NH3VOLAT
RCHRES EXPNVG EXPNVL ***
# - # ***
5 6 0.6 0.8
END NUT-NH3VOLAT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<nut-nh3volat> EXPNVG F10.0 0.5 0.1 2.0 none Both
EXPNVL F10.0 .6667 0.1 2.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

EXPNVG is the exponent in the gas layer mass transfer coefficient equation for
NH3 volatilization.

EXPNVL is the exponent in the liquid layer mass transfer coefficient equation
for NH3 volatilization.

592
 RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input

4.4(3).8.2.7 Table-type NUT-BEDCONC -- Bed concentrations of adsorbed NH3 and

PO4

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NUT-BEDCONC
<-range><--------nut-bedconc--------------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NUT-BEDCONC

*******
Example
*******

NUT-BEDCONC
RCHRES Bed concentrations of NH4 & PO4 (mg/kg) ***
# - # NH4-sand NH4-silt NH4-clay PO4-sand PO4-silt PO4-clay ***
2 3 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.10 0.20 0.30
END NUT-BEDCONC

********************************************************************************

Details
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units
name(s)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
<nut-bedconc> BNH4(3) 3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/kg
BPO4(3) 3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/kg
---------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

BNH4(1-3) are the constant bed concentrations of ammonia-N adsorbed to sand, silt,
and clay.

BPO4(1-3) are the constant bed concentrations of ortho-phosphorus-P adsorbed to

sand, silt, and clay.

593
 RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input

4.4(3).8.2.8 Table-type NUT-ADSPARM -- Adsorption coefficients for ammonia and

ortho-phosphorus

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NUT-ADSPARM
<-range><--------nut-adsparm--------------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NUT-ADSPARM

*******
Example
*******

NUT-ADSPARM
RCHRES Partition coefficients for NH4 AND PO4 (cm3/g) ***
# - # NH4-sand NH4-silt NH4-clay PO4-sand PO4-silt PO4-clay ***
2 3 0.10 0.30 0.50 0.10 0.50 0.80
END NUT-ADSPARM

********************************************************************************

Details
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units
name(s)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
<nut-adsparm> ADNHPM(3) 3F10.0 1.E-10 1.E-10 none cm3/g
ADPOPM(3) 3F10.0 1.E-10 1.E-10 none cm3/g
---------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

ADNHPM(1-3) are the adsorption coefficients (Kd) for ammonia-N adsorbed to sand,
silt, and clay.

ADPOPM(1-3) are the adsorption coefficients for ortho-phosphorus-P adsorbed to

sand, silt, and clay.

594
 RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input

4.4(3).8.2.9 Table-type NUT-DINIT -- Initial concentrations of dissolved

nutrients

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NUT-DINIT
<-range><--------nut-dinit------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NUT-DINIT

*******
Example
*******

NUT-DINIT
RCHRES NO3 TAM NO2 PO4 PHVAL ***
# - # mg/l mg/l mg/l mg/l ph units ***
1 3 1.0 0.3 0.01 0.02 7.
END NUT-DINIT

********************************************************************************

Details
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units
name(s)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
<nut-dinit> NO3 5F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l
TAM 0.0 0.0 none mg/l
NO2 0.0 0.0 none mg/l
PO4 0.0 0.0 none mg/l
PHVAL 7.0 0.0 14.0 pH units
---------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

NO3, TAM, and NO2 are the initial concentrations of nitrate, total ammonia, and
nitrite (as N).

PO4 is the initial concentration of ortho-phosphorus (as P).

PHVAL is the constant pH value if PHFLG=2, and the initial value of pH if PHFLG=1
or 3.

595
 RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input

4.4(3).8.2.10 Table-type NUT-ADSINIT -- Initial concentrations of NH3 and PO4

adsorbed to suspended sediment

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NUT-ADSINIT
<-range><--------nut-adsinit--------------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END NUT-ADSINIT

*******
Example
*******

NUT-ADSINIT
RCHRES Initial suspended NH4 and PO4 concentrations (mg/kg) ***
# - # NH4-sand NH4-silt NH4-clay PO4-sand PO4-silt PO4-clay ***
2 3 0.10 0.30 0.50 0.10 0.50 0.80
END NUT-ADSINIT

********************************************************************************

Details
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units
name(s)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
<nut-adsinit> SNH4(3) 3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/kg
SPO4(3) 3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/kg
---------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

SNH4(1-3) are the initial concentrations of ammonia-N adsorbed to sand, silt, and
clay.

SPO4(1-3) are the initial concentrations of ortho-phosphorus-P adsorbed to sand,

silt, and clay.

596
 RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input

4.4(3).8.3 RCHRES-BLOCK -- Section PLANK input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

Table-type PLNK-FLAGS
[Table-type PLK-AD-FLAGS]
Table-type SURF-EXPOSED if section HTRCH is inactive
Table-type PLNK-PARM1
[Table-type PLNK-PARM2]
[Table-type PLNK-PARM3]
-----
Table-type PHYTO-PARM |
--- |
Table-type ZOO-PARM1 | if | if
[Table-type ZOO-PARM2] | ZOOFG=1 | PHYFG=1
--- |
-----
[Table-type BENAL-PARM] if BALFG=1
[Table-type PLNK-INIT]

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables above is detailed in the documentation which
follows. Tables in brackets [] need not always be supplied; for example, because
all of the inputs have default values.

PHYFG, ZOOFG and BALFG are flags which indicate whether or not phytoplankton,
zooplankton, and benthic algae are being simulated. They are documented under
Table-type PLNK-FLAGS below.

597
 RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input

4.4(3).8.3.1 Table-type PLNK-FLAGS -- Plankton flags

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
PLNK-FLAGS
<-range><-------------plnk-flags--------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PLNK-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******
PLNK-FLAGS
RCHRES PHYF ZOOF BALF SDLT AMRF DECF NSFG ZFOO ***
# - # ***
1 7 1 1 3
END PLNK-FLAGS

********************************************************************************

Details
------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
------------------------------------------------------------
<plnk-flags> PHYFG,ZOOFG, 7I5 0 0 1
BALFG,SDLTFG,
AMRFG,DECFG,
NSFG
ZFOOD I5 2 1 3
------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

The following, except for ZFOOD, are the conditions when the flag is on:

PHYFG - Phytoplankton are simulated.

ZOOFG - Zooplankton are simulated.
BALFG - Benthic algae are simulated.
SDLTFG - Influence of sediment washload on light extinction is simulated.
AMRFG - Ammonia retardation of nitrogen-limited growth is enabled.
DECFG - Linkage between carbon dioxide and phytoplankton growth is decoupled.
NSFG - Ammonia is included as part of available nitrogen supply in nitrogen
limited growth calculations.
ZFOOD - Indicates the quality of zooplankton food.

598
 RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input

4.4(3).8.3.2 Table-type PLNK-AD-FLAGS -- Atmospheric deposition flags for

refractory organics

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PLK-AD-FLAGS
<-range> <f><c> <f><c> <f><c>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PLK-AD-FLAGS

*******
Example
*******

PLK-AD-FLAGS
RCHRES Atmospheric deposition flags ***
*** ORN ORP ORC
#*** # <F><C> <F><C> <F><C>
1 7 -1 10 -1 -1 11 12
END PLK-AD-FLAGS

********************************************************************************

Details
------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
------------------------------------------------------------
<f><c> PLADFG(*) (1X,2I3) 0 -1 none
------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

PLADFG is an array of flags indicating the source of atmospheric deposition data.

Each organic constituent has two flags. The first is for dry or total deposition
flux, and the second is for wet deposition concentration. The flag values
indicate:
0 No deposition of this type is simulated
-1 Deposition of this type is input as time series PLADFX or
PLADCN
>0 Deposition of this type is input in the MONTH-DATA table
with the corresponding table ID number.

599
 RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input

4.4(3).8.3.3 Table-type SURF-EXPOSED -- Correction factor for solar radiation

data

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SURF-EXPOSED
<-range><surf-exp>
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END SURF-EXPOSED

*******
Example
*******

SURF-EXPOSED
RCHRES CFSAEX ***
# - # ***
1 7 .5
END SURF-EXPOSED

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
<surf-exp> CFSAEX F10.0 1.0 0.001 1.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This factor is used to adjust the input solar radiation to make it applicable to
the RCHRES; for example, to account for shading of the surface by trees or
buildings.

600
 RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input

4.4(3).8.3.4 Table-type PLNK-PARM1 -- First group of general plankton parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
PLNK-PARM1
<-range><---------------------plnk-parm1--------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PLNK-PARM1

Example
*******
PLNK-PARM1
RCHRES RATCLP NONREF LITSED ALNPR EXTB MALGR***
# - # /ft /hr***
1 7 .5 .3 .4 0.1
END PLNK-PARM1

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<plnk-parm1> RATCLP F10.0 .6 .01 none none Both
NONREF F10.0 .5 .01 1.0 none Both
LITSED F10.0 0.0 0.0 none l/mg.ft Both
ALNPR F10.0 1.0 .01 1.0 none Both
EXTB F10.0 none .001 none /ft Engl
none .001 none /m Metric
MALGR F10.0 .3 .001 none /hr Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

RATCLP is the ratio of chlorophyll A content of biomass to phosphorus content.

NONREF is the non-refractory fraction of algae and zooplankton biomass.
LITSED is the multiplication factor to total sediment concentration to determine
sediment contribution to light extinction.
ALNPR is the fraction of nitrogen requirements for phytoplankton growth that is
satisfied by nitrate.
EXTB is the base extinction coefficient for light.
MALGR is the maximum unit algal growth rate.

601
 RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input

4.4(3).8.3.5 Table-type PLNK-PARM2 -- second group of general plankton parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
PLNK-PARM2
<-range><--------------------------plnk-parm2-------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PLNK-PARM2

Example
*******
PLNK-PARM2
RCHRES *** CMMLT CMMN CMMNP CMMP TALGRH TALGRL TALGRM
# - # ***ly/min mg/l mg/l mg/l degF degF degF
1 7 .01 .05 .04 85.0 44.0 71.0
END PLNK-PARM2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<plnk-parm2> CMMLT F10.0 .033 1.0E-6 none ly/min Both
CMMN F10.0 .045 1.0E-6 none mg/l Both
CMMNP F10.0 .0284 1.0E-6 none mg/l Both
CMMP F10.0 .015 1.0E-6 none mg/l Both
TALGRH F10.0 95. 50. 212. degF Engl
35. 10. 100. degC Metric
TALGRL F10.0 43. -120. 212. degF Engl
6.1 -84. 100. degC Metric
TALGRM F10.0 77. 32. 212. degF Engl
25. 0.0 100. degC Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

CMMLT is the Michaelis-Menten constant for light limited growth.

CMMN is the nitrate Michaelis-Menten constant for nitrogen limited growth.
CMMNP is the nitrate Michaelis-Menten constant for phosphorus limited growth.
CMMP is the phosphate Michaelis-Menten constant for phosphorus limited growth.
TALGRH is the temperature above which algal growth ceases.
TALGRL is the temperature below which algal growth ceases.
TALGRM is the temperature below which algal growth is retarded.

602
 RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input

4.4(3).8.3.6 Table-type PLNK-PARM3 -- Third group of general plankton parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PLNK-PARM3
<-range><---------------------plnk-parm3--------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PLNK-PARM3

*******
Example
*******
PLNK-PARM3
RCHRES ALR20 ALDH ALDL OXALD NALDH PALDH***
# - # /hr /hr /hr /hr mg/l mg/l***
1 7 .02 .04
END PLNK-PARM3

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<plnk-parm3> ALR20 F10.0 .004 1.0E-6 none /hr Both
ALDH F10.0 .01 1.0E-6 none /hr Both
ALDL F10.0 .001 1.0E-6 none /hr Both
OXALD F10.0 .03 1.0E-6 none /hr Both
NALDH F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
PALDH F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

ALR20 is the algal unit respiration rate at 20 degrees C.

ALDH is the high algal unit death rate.
ALDL is the low algal unit death rate.
OXALD is the increment to phytoplankton unit death rate due to anaerobic
conditions.
NALDH is the inorganic nitrogen concentration below which high algal death rate
occurs (as nitrogen).
PALDH is the inorganic phosphorus concentration below which high algal death rate
occurs (as phosphorus).

603
 RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input

4.4(3).8.3.7 Table-type PHYTO-PARM -- Phytoplankton parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PHYTO-PARM
<-range><----------------------phyto-parm-------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PHYTO-PARM

Example
*******
PHYTO-PARM
RCHRES SEED MXSTAY OREF CLALDH PHYSET REFSET***
# - # mg/l mg/l ft3/s ug/l ft/hr ft/hr***
1 7 2.0 15. 8.0
END PHYTO-PARM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<phyto-parm> SEED F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
MXSTAY F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
OREF F10.0 0.0001 0.0001 none ft3/s Engl
0.0001 0.0001 none m3/s Metric
CLALDH F10.0 50.0 .01 none ug/l Both
PHYSET F10.0 0.0 0.0 none ft/hr Engl
0.0 0.0 none m/hr Metric
REFSET F10.0 0.0 0.0 none ft/hr Engl
0.0 0.0 none m/hr Metric
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explanation

SEED is the minimum concentration of plankton not subject to advection (i.e., at

high flow).
MXSTAY is the concentration of plankton not subject to advection at very low flow.
OREF is the outflow at which the concentration of plankton not subject to advection
is midway between SEED and MXSTAY.
CLALDH is the chlorophyll A concentration above which high algal death rate occurs.
PHYSET is the rate of phytoplankton settling.
REFSET is the rate of settling for dead refractory organics.

604
 RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input

4.4(3).8.3.8 Table-type ZOO-PARM1 -- First group of zooplankton parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

ZOO-PARM1
<-range><------------------zoo-parm1--------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END ZOO-PARM1

*******
Example
*******

ZOO-PARM1
RCHRES MZOEAT ZFIL20 ZRES20 ZD OXZD***
# - # mg/l.hr l/mgzoo.hr /hr /hr /hr***
1 7 .098 0.2
END ZOO-PARM1

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<zoo-parm1> MZOEAT F10.0 .055 .001 none mg phyto/ Both
mg zoo/hr
ZFIL20 F10.0 none 0.001 none l/mg zoo/hr Both
ZRES20 F10.0 .0015 1.0E-6 none /hr Both
ZD F10.0 .0001 1.0E-6 none /hr Both
OXZD F10.0 .03 1.0E-6 none /hr Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

MZOEAT is the maximum zooplankton unit ingestion rate.

ZFIL20 is the zooplankton filtering rate at 20 degrees C.
ZRES20 is the zooplankton unit respiration rate at 20 degrees C.
ZD is the natural zooplankton unit death rate.
OXZD is the increment to unit zooplankton death rate due to anaerobic conditions.

605
 RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input

4.4(3).8.3.9 Table-type ZOO-PARM2 -- Second group of zooplankton parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

ZOO-PARM2
<-range><--------------zoo-parm2--------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END ZOO-PARM2

*******
Example
*******

ZOO-PARM2
RCHRES TCZFIL TCZRES ZEXDEL ZOMASS***
# - # mg/org***
1 7 1.2 1.1 0.8
END ZOO-PARM2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<zoo-parm2> TCZFIL F10.0 1.17 1.0 2.0 none Both
TCZRES F10.0 1.07 1.0 2.0 none Both
ZEXDEL F10.0 0.7 .001 1.0 none Both
ZOMASS F10.0 .0003 1.0E-6 1.0 mg/org Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

TCZFIL and TCZRES are the temperature correction coefficients for filtering and
respiration, respectively.

ZEXDEL is the fraction of non-refractory zooplankton excretion which is immediately

decomposed when the ingestion rate is greater than MZOEAT.

ZOMASS is the average weight of a zooplankton organism.

606
 RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input

4.4(3).8.3.10 Table-type BENAL-PARM -- Benthic algae parameters

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

BENAL-PARM
<-range><---------benal-parm--------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END BENAL-PARM

*******
Example
*******

BENAL-PARM
RCHRES MBAL CFBALR CFBALG***
# - # mg/m2 ***
1 7 520. .56 .80
END BENAL-PARM

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<benal-parm> MBAL F10.0 600. .01 none mg/m2 Both
CFBALR F10.0 1.0 .01 1.0 none Both
CFBALG F10.0 1.0 .01 1.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

MBAL is the maximum benthic algae density (as biomass).

CFBALR and CFBALG are the ratios of benthic algal to phytoplankton respiration and
growth rates, respectively.

607
 RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input

4.4(3).8.3.11 Table-type PLNK-INIT -- Initial plankton conditions

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PLNK-INIT
<-range><----------------------plank-init-------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PLNK-INIT

*******
Example
*******

PLNK-INIT
RCHRES PHYTO ZOO BENAL ORN ORP ORC***
# - # mg/l org/l mg/m2 mg/l mg/l mg/l***
1 7 .0001 .05 .002 .01 .02 .01
END PLNK-INIT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<plank-init> PHYTO F10.0 .96E-6 1.0E-10 none mg/l Both
ZOO F10.0 .03 1.0E-6 none org/l Both
BENAL F10.0 1.0E-8 1.0E-10 none mg/m2 Both
ORN F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
ORP F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
ORC F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

PHYTO is the initial phytoplankton concentration, as biomass.

ZOO is the initial zooplankton concentration.
BENAL is the initial benthic algae density, as biomass.
ORN is the initial dead refractory organic nitrogen concentration.
ORP is the initial dead refractory organic phosphorus concentration.
ORC is the initial dead refractory organic carbon concentration.

608
 RCHRES -- Section PHCARB Input

4.4(3).8.4 RCHRES-BLOCK -- Section PHCARB input

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

[Table-type PH-PARM1]
[Table-type PH-PARM2]
[Table-type PH-INIT ]

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The exact format of each of the tables above is detailed in the documentation which
follows. Tables in brackets [] need not always be supplied; for example, because
all of the inputs have default values.

609
 RCHRES -- Section PHCARB Input

4.4(3).8.4.1 Table-type PH-PARM1 -- Flags for pH simulation

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PH-PARM1
<-range><ph-parm1>
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END PH-PARM1

*******
Example
*******

PH-PARM1
RCHRES PHCN ALKC***
# - # ***
1 7 30 9
END PH-PARM1

********************************************************************************

Details
------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
------------------------------------------------------------
<ph-parm1> PHCNT I5 25 1 100
ALKCON I5 1 1 10
------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

PHCNT is the maximum number of iterations used to solve for the pH.

ALKCON is the number of the conservative substance (in section CONS) which is used
to simulate alkalinity. Alkalinity must be simulated in order to obtain valid
results.

610
 RCHRES -- Section PHCARB Input

4.4(3).8.4.2 Table-type PH-PARM2 -- Parameters for pH simulation

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PH-PARM2
<-range><----------ph-parm2---------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PH-PARM2

*******
Example
*******

PH-PARM2
RCHRES CFCINV BRCO2(1) BRCO2(2)***
# - # mg/m2.hr mg/m2.hr***
1 7 .901 72.0 65.1
END PH-PARM2

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ph-parm2> CFCINV F10.0 .913 .001 1.0 none Both
BRCO2(1) F10.0 62. .01 none mg/m2.hr Both
BRCO2(2) F10.0 62. .01 none mg/m2.hr Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

CFCINV is the ratio of the carbon dioxide invasion rate to the oxygen reaeration
rate (which is computed in section OXRX).

BRCO2 is the benthal release rate of CO2 (as carbon) for: (1) aerobic and (2)
anaerobic conditions.

611
 RCHRES -- Section PHCARB Input

4.4(3).8.4.3 Table-type PH-INIT -- Initial conditions for pH simulation

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PH-INIT
<-range><----------ph-init----------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PH-INIT

*******
Example
*******

PH-INIT
RCHRES TIC CO2 PH***
# - # mg/l mg/l ***
1 7 2.0 .03 8.0
END PH-INIT

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ph-init> TIC F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
CO2 F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/l Both
PH F10.0 7.0 1.0 15.0 none Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

TIC is the initial total inorganic carbon.

CO2 is the initial carbon dioxide (as carbon).
PH is the initial pH.

612
 COPY Block

4.4(11) COPY Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

COPY
Table-type TIMESERIES
END COPY

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The COPY module is used to copy one or more time series from one location (source)
to another (target). See Section 4.2(11) in Part E for a detailed description of
its function.

613
 COPY Block

4.4(11).1 Table-type TIMESERIES -- Number of time series to be copied

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

TIMESERIES
<-range><npt><nmn>
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END TIMESERIES

*******
Example
*******

TIMESERIES
Copy-opn ***
# - # NPT NMN***
1 7 4
END TIMESERIES

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<npt> NPT I5 0 0 20
<nmn> NMN I5 0 0 20
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

NPT is the number of point-valued time series to be copied.

NMN is the number of mean-valued time series to be copied.

614
 PLTGEN Block

4.4(12) PLTGEN Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
PLTGEN
Table-type PLOTINFO
Table-type GEN-LABELS
Table-type SCALING
Table-type CURV-DATA (repeats for each time series to be written to PLTGEN file)
END PLTGEN
********************************************************************************

Explanation

The PLTGEN module prepares one or more time series for display on a plotter. It
writes the time series, and associated title and scaling information, to a "pltgen"
file which must be input to a stand-alone program that translates the data into
commands that drive the plotter. See Section 4.2(12) of Part E for further details.

4.4(12).1 Table-type PLOTINFO -- General plot information

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
PLOTINFO
<-range><fil><npt><nmn><lab><pyr><piv>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END PLOTINFO
*******
Example
*******

PLOTINFO
Plot-opn ***
# - # FILE NPT NMN LABL PYR PIVL ***
1 3 2
END PLOTINFO

********************************************************************************

615
 PLTGEN Block

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<fil> PLOTFL I5 30 30 99
<npt> NPT I5 0 0 10
<nmn> NMN I5 0 0 10
<lab> LABLFG I5 0 -1 1
<pyr> PYREND I5 9 1 12
<piv> PIVL I5 1 -2 1440
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

PLOTFL is the file unit number of the PLTGEN file (output of this operation).

NPT is the number of point-valued time series to be written to the file.

NMN is the number of mean-valued time series to be written to the file.

LABLFG indicates how the plot will be labeled:

-1 means no labels

0 means standard labeling; that is, one set of X and Y axes and associated
labels will be drawn for entire plot.

1 means separate X and Y axes and labels will be drawn for each "frame" of
the plot (e.g., each water year).

PYREND is the calendar month which terminates a plot frame (eg. a water year).

PIVL is the number of basic time intervals (DELT minutes each) to be aggregated to
get to the interval of the data written to the PLTGEN file. A PIVL of -1 causes
a monthly PLTGEN file to be written. A PIVL of -2 causes an annual PLTGEN file to
be written.

616
 PLTGEN Block

4.4(12).2 Table-type GEN-LABELS -- General plot labels

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GEN-LABELS
<-range><--------------- title ----------------> <------ylabl------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GEN-LABELS

*******
Example
*******

GEN-LABELS
Plot-opn ***
# - # General title Y-axis label ***
1 3 Reservoir inflow and outflow rates Flow (ft3/sec)
END GEN-LABELS

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------

<title> TITLE 10A4 none none none

<ylabl> YLABL 5A4 none none none

----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

TITLE is the general plot title.

YLABL is the label to be placed on the Y-axis.

617
 PLTGEN Block

4.4(12).3 Table-type SCALING -- Scaling information

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SCALING
<-range><--ymin--><--ymax--><--ivlin-><-thresh->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SCALING

*******
Example
*******

SCALING
Plot-opn ***
# - # YMIN YMAX IVLIN THRESH ***
1 3 500. 48.
END SCALING

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ymin> YMIN F10.0 0.0 none none See Note Both
<ymax> YMAX F10.0 none none none See Note Both
<ivlin> IVLIN F10.0 none 0.0 none ivl/in Both
<thresh> THRESH F10.0 -1.0E30 none none See Note Both
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Note: Units are defined by the user, in field YLABL of Table-type GEN-LABELS

Explanation

YMIN and YMAX are the minimum and maximum ordinate (Y axis) values.

IVLIN is the horizontal (time) scale; that is, number of intervals (in pltgen file)
per inch on graph.

THRESH is the write threshold value. If the value for any time series is greater
than the threshold, a full record is written to the PLTGEN file for the current
PLTGEN file time interval.

618
 PLTGEN Block

4.4(12).4 Table-type CURV-DATA -- Data for each time series on pltgen file
(Table must be repeated for each time series on the pltgen file)

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

CURV-DATA
<-range> <-----label----><lin><int><col> <tr>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END CURV-DATA

*******
Example
*******

CURV-DATA
Plot-opn Curve label Line Intg Col Tran ***
# - # type eqv code code ***
1 3 Inflow 10 1 1 AVER
END CURV-DATA

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<label> LABEL 4A4 none none none
<lin> LINTYP I5 0 none none
<int> INTEQ I5 0 0 13
<col> COLCOD I5 0 0 10
<tr> TRAN A4 SUM none none
----------------------------------------------------------

619
 PLTGEN Block

Explanation

LABEL is a descriptive label for this particular curve (time series).

LINTYP describes the type of line to be drawn for this curve. It also determines
the frequency of plotted symbols:

A zero value means points are connected by straight lines; no symbols are
drawn at individual data points.

A positive value means points are connected by straight lines; the magnitude
determines the frequency of plotted symbols (e.g., 4 means plot a symbol at
every 4th point obtained from the pltgen file).

A negative value means no connecting lines are drawn. Only symbols are
plotted; the absolute value determines the frequency (as above).

INTEQ is the integer equivalent of the symbols to be plotted for this curve (i.e.,
indicates which symbol to use). It is only meaningful if LINTYP is not zero.
Value of 2 might mean a triangle, etc.

COLCOD is the color code for this curve. The meaning depends on how the stand-
alone plot program is set up; e.g., 1 might mean red pen, 2 blue pen, etc.

TRAN is the transformation code used to aggregate data from the basic interval
(internal time step) to the PLTGEN file interval. Valid values are: SUM, AVER,
MAX, MIN, and LAST.

Note: The stand-alone program, which reads the pltgen file and drives the plotter,
must translate these data into plotter commands.

620
 DISPLY Block

4.4(13) DISPLY Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

DISPLY
Table-type DISPLY-INFO1
[Table-type DISPLY-INFO2]
END DISPLY

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The DISPLY module summarizes a time series and presents the results in neatly
formatted tables. Data can be displayed at any HSPF-supported interval. See
Section 4.2(13) of Part E for further information.

621
 DISPLY Block

4.4(13).1 Table-type DISPLY-INFO1 -- Contains most of the information necessary

to generate data displays.

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

DISPLY-INFO1
<-range><----------title-----------> <tr><piv> d<fil><pyr> d<fil><ynd>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END DISPLY-INFO1

*******
Example
*******

DISPLY-INFO1
#through#***<----------Title--------> <-short-span->
*** <---disply---> <annual summary ->
*** TRAN PIVL DIG1 FIL1 PYR DIG2 FIL2 YRND
1 Daily precip in TSS #20 (in) 1 2 20 6
2 Simulated soil temp (Deg C) AVER 4 1 21 1 1 22 6
END DISPLY-INFO1

********************************************************************************
Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<title> TITLE(*) 7A4 none none none
<tr> TRAN A4 SUM none none
<piv> PIVL I5 0 0 1440
d DIGIT1 A1 0 0 7
<fil> FILE1 I5 6 6 99
<pyr> PYRFG I5 0 0 1
d DIGIT2 A1 0 0 7
<fil> FILE2 I5 6 6 99
<ynd> PYREND I5 9 1 12
----------------------------------------------------------

622
 DISPLY Block

Explanation

TITLE is the title that will be printed at the top of each page of the display.

TRAN is the transformation code, used to aggregate data from the basic interval
(internal time step) to the various display intervals (for both short- and
long-span displays). Valid values are: SUM, AVER, MAX, MIN, LAST.

PIVL is the number of basic time intervals (DELT mins each) to be aggregated to get
to the interval of the data printed in a short-span display (e.g., In the above
example, if DELT were 15 mins for DISPLY operation #2, then the data in the
short-span summary tables would be displayed at an interval of 1 hour (PIVL=4). If
PIVL=0, a short-span display is not produced.

DIGIT1 and DIGIT2 are the number of decimal digits to be used to print data in the
short-span and long-span displays, respectively. Note that it is up to the user
to ensure that this value falls in the valid range 0-7. HSPF does not check this.

FILE1 and FILE2 are the file unit numbers of the files to which short-and long-
span displays will be routed.

PYRFG indicates whether or not a long-span display (annual summary of daily values)
is required. Value of 1 means it is, 0 means it is not.

PYREND is the calendar month which will appear at the right-hand extremity of an
annual summary. This enables the user to decide whether the data should be
displayed on a calendar year or some other (e.g., water year) basis.

623
 DISPLY Block

4.4(13).2 Table-type DISPLY-INFO2 -- Additional optional information for

module DISPLY.

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
DISPLY-INFO2
<-range><--mult--><---add--><-thresh1><-thresh2>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END DISPLY-INFO2

*******
Example
*******

DISPLY-INFO2
#through# Convert DegC to F Display negative data ***
Mult Add THRSH1 ***
2 5 1.8 32.0 -999.
END DISPLY-INFO2

********************************************************************************

Details
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<mult> A F10.0 1.0 none none none Both
<add> B F10.0 0.0 none none none Both
<thresh1> THRESH1 F10.0 0.0 none none none Both
<thresh2> THRESH2 F10.0 0.0 none none none Both
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

624
 DISPLY Block

Explanation

This table is usually not supplied.

A and B are parameters used to convert the data from internal units to display
units:
Display value= A*(internal value)+B

The conversion is done before any aggregation of data to larger time steps (i.e.,
larger than the simulation time interval) is performed. Note that the default
values of A and B result in no change.

THRSH1 and THRSH2 are threshold values for the short-span and long-span displays,
respectively (THRSH2 is not presently used). THRSH1 can be used to reduce the
quantity of printout produced in a short-span display; it functions as follows:
When the individual values in a row of the display have been aggregated to get the
"row value" (hour- or day-value, depending on the display interval), if the
row-value is greater than THRSH1 the row is printed, else it is omitted. Thus, for
example, the default of 0.0 will ensure that rows of data containing all zeros are
omitted.

625
 DURANL Block

4.4(14) DURANL Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

DURANL
Table-type GEN-DURDATA
[Table-type SEASON]
[Table-type DURATIONS]
[Table-type LEVELS]
[Table-type LCONC]
END DURANL

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The DURANL module performs duration and excursion analysis on a time series. For
example, it analyzes the frequency with which N consecutive values in the time
series exceed a specified set of values, called "levels". N is the "duration" of
the excursion; up to 10 durations may be used in one duration analysis operation.
The user may specify that only those data falling within a specified time in each
year (analysis season) be processed. For further details see Section 4.2(14) of
Part E.

626
 DURANL Block

4.4(14).1 Table-type GEN-DURDATA -- General information for duration analysis

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GEN-DURDATA
<-range><----------------title-----------------><-nd><-nl><-pr><-pu>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END GEN-DURDATA

*******
Example
*******

GEN-DURDATA
#through#<***--------------title----------------> NDUR NLEV PRFG P- LCNU LCOU
*** UNIT
1 Simulated DO in Reach 40 5 2 2 0
END GEN-DURDATA

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<title> TITLE(*) 10A4 none none none
<nd> NDUR I5 1 1 10
<nl> NLEV I5 1 1 20
<pr> PRFG I5 1 1 7
<pu> PUNIT I5 6 1 99
<lcn> LCNUM I5 0 0 5
<lco> LCOUT I5 0 0 1
----------------------------------------------------------

627
 DURANL Block

Explanation

TITLE is the title which the user gives to the duration analysis operation;
usually, something which identifies the time series being analyzed.

NDUR is the number of durations for which the time series will be analyzed.

NLEV is the number of user-specified levels which will be used in analyzing the
time series.

PRFG is a flag which governs the quantity of information printed out. A value of
1 results in minimal (basic) output. Increasing the value (up to the maximum of
7) results in increased detail of output.

PUNIT is the file unit number to which the output of the duration analysis
operation will be written. Each duration analysis operation must have a unique
file unit number.

LCNUM indicates the number of lethal concentration curves to be used in the

analysis. A zero means no lethality analysis is to be performed.

LCOUT is a flag which governs the printout of intermediate lethal event information
(1=on).

4.4(14).2 Table-type SEASON -- The analysis season for the durational analysis

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
SEASON
<-range> <---start--> <----end--->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SEASON
*******
Example
*******

SEASON
*** Start End
#through#*** mo da hr mn mo da hr mn
1 10 02 02
END SEASON

********************************************************************************

628
 DURANL Block

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<start> SESONS(2-5) 4(1X,I2) see below
<end> SESONE(2-5) 4(1X,I2) see below
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is used if one wishes to specify an analysis season; that is, only data
falling between the specified starting and ending month/day/hour/minute (in each
year) should be considered.

Note:

1. The defaults, minima, maxima and other values for specifying the starting and
ending date/times are the same as those given in the discussion of the GLOBAL
Block (Section 4.2). If any fields in the starting date/time are blank they
default to the earliest meaningful value; for the ending date/time they default
to the latest possible values. Thus, the analysis season in the example above
includes the entire month of February.

2. Although it is not meaningful to provide for a "year" in the fields

documented above (since the analysis season applies to every year in the
run), the four spaces preceding both the <start> and <end> fields should be
left blank because the system does, in fact, read the year and expects it to
be blank or zero.

3. The defaults imply that, if this table is omitted, the analysis season
extends from January 1 through December 31.

629
 DURANL Block

4.4(14).3 Table-type DURATIONS -- Durations to be used in the analysis

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

DURATIONS
<-range><-d1><----------------others--------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END DURATIONS

*******
Example
*******

DURATIONS
#through#***<---Durations--------------------------------->
*** 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 1 10 15 20 40
3 1 20 21 22
END DURATIONS

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<d1> DURAT(1) I5 1 1 1
<others> DURAT(2-10) 9I5 2 2 none
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

DURAT(*) is an array which contains the NDUR different durations for which the time
series will be analyzed (NDUR was specified in Table-type GEN-DURDATA). The
durations are expressed in multiples of the internal time step specified in the OPN
SEQUENCE Block (Section 4.3). Thus, if DELT= 5 min and the duration is 3, the time
series will be analyzed with a window of 15 minutes. The analysis algorithm
requires that the first duration be 1 time step, but the others can have any
integer value.

630
 DURANL Block

4.4(14).4 Table-type LEVELS -- Levels to be used in the analysis

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

LEVELS
<-range><-------------------------- first 14 -------------------------------->
<-range><-------------------------- last 6 ------------------------>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END LEVELS

*******
Example
*******

LEVELS
#through#*** 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15
#through#***16 17 18 19 20 21
1 -30. -10. 0. 10. 20. 40. 80. 100. 200.1000. 2.E3 3.E3 5.E3 1.E4
1 2.E4 3.E4
#through#*** 2 3 4 5
2 -20. 0. 20. 50.
END LEVELS

********************************************************************************

Details
-----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
-----------------------------------------------------------
<first14> LEVEL(2-15) 14F5.0 0.0 none none
<last6> LEVEL(16-21) 6F5.0 0.0 none none
-----------------------------------------------------------

631
 DURANL Block

Explanation

LEVEL(2 through 21) contains the 20 possible user-specified levels for which the
input time series will be analyzed. (LEVEL(1) and LEVEL(22) are reserved for
system use, and this does not affect the user since only LEVEL(2) through (21) can
be specified). The actual number of levels (NLEV) was specified in Table-type
GEN-DURDATA. If NLEV is greater than 14, the entry for a given operation must be
continued to the next line; up to 2 lines may be required to cover all the levels.
In the example above, operation 1 has 16 user-specified levels and thus requires
2 lines, but operation 2 only requires 1 line because it has only 4 user-specified
levels.

When an entry has to be continued onto more than 1 line:

1. No blank or comment lines may be put between any of the lines for a continued
entry. Put all comments ahead of the entry. (See operation 1 in above example).

2. The <range> specification must be repeated for each line onto which the entry
is continued.

Note that the levels must be specified in ascending order. The system checks that
this requirement is not violated.

632
 DURANL Block

4.4(14).5 Table-type LCONC -- Lethal concentrations to be used in the analysis

Table repeats for each lethal concentration curve-LCNUM times

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

LCONC
<-range><------------------------------first-7------------------------------->
<-range><-----------last-3----------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END LCONC

*******
Example
*******

LCONC
# - #*** LC1 LC2 LC3 LC4 LC5 LC6 LC7
# - #*** LC8 LC9 LC10
1 2 1. 3. 6. 8. 15. 5. 8.
1 2 20. 30. 60.
END LCONC

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<first-7> LCONC(1-7,I) 7F10.0 0.0 none none
<last-3> LCONC(8-10,I) 3F10.0 0.0 none none
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

LCONC(*) is an array which contains the NDUR different lethal levels which are used
in a lethal concentration analysis. If no lethality analysis is being done, this
table may be omitted.

633
 GENER Block

4.4(15) GENER Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

GENER
Table-type OPCODE
[Table-type NTERMS] only required if OPCODE = 8
[Table-type COEFFS] only required if OPCODE = 8,
[Table-type PARM] only required if OPCODE = 9, 10, 11, 24, 25, or 26

END GENER

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The GENER module generates a time series from one or two input time series.
Usually, only Table-type OPCODE is required. However, if OPCODE = 8 (power series),
you need to supply the number of terms in the power series and the values of the
coefficients. If OPCODE = 9, 10, 11, 24, 25, or 26, then Table-type PARM is
required to input the constant required in the operation.

634
 GENER Block

4.4(15).1 Table-type OPCODE -- Operation code for time series generation

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

OPCODE
<-range><opn>
. . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . .
END OPCODE

*******
Example
*******

OPCODE
#through# OP- ***
CODE ***
1 3 8
5 20
END OPCODE

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<opn> OPCODE I5 none 1 26
----------------------------------------------------------

635
 GENER Block

Explanation

OPCODE is the operation code. If A and B are the input time series and C is the
generated time series, the functions performed for the allowable range of values
of OPCODE are:

OPCODE Definition

1 C= Abs(A)
2 C= Sqrt(A)
3 C= Trunc(A)
4 C= Ceil(A)
5 C= Floor(A)
6 C= loge(A)
7 C= log10(A)
8 C= K(1)+K(2)*A+K(3)*A**2+(up to 7 terms)
9 C= K**A
10 C= A**K
11 C= A+K
12 C= Sin(A)
13 C= Cos(A)
14 C= Tan(A)
15 C= Sum(A)
16 C= A+B
17 C= A-B
18 C= A*B
19 C= A/B
20 C= Max (A,B)
21 C= Min (A,B)
22 C= A**B
23 C= cumulative departure of A below B
24 C= K
25 C= Max (A,K)
26 C= Min (A,K)

If OPCODE is less than 15, or OPCODE equals 25 or 26, only one input time series
is required; if OPCODE is 24, no input time series are required; otherwise two
input time series are required. Note that the operation is performed on the data
when they are in internal form (timestep=DELT, units=internal units). For further
details, see Section 4.2(15) of Part E.

636
 GENER Block

4.4(15).2 Table-type NTERMS -- Number of terms in power series

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
NTERMS
<-range><-nt>
. . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . .
END NTERMS

*******
Example
*******

NTERMS
#through#NTERMS ***
1 2 4
END NTERMS

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<nt> NTERMS I5 2 1 7
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only relevant if OPCODE=8. NTERMS is the total number of terms in the
power series:

C= K(1)+K(2)*A+K(3)*A**2 etc.

The default value of 2 was chosen because this option will probably be used most
often (to perform a linear transformation).

637
 GENER Block

4.4(15).3 Table-type COEFFS -- Coefficients in generating power function

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

COEFFS
<-range><----------------------------coeffs---------------------------------->
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END COEFFS

*******
Example
*******

COEFFS
#through# *** K1 K2 K3
1 7 -2.0 1.5 0.2
END COEFFS

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<coeffs> K(*) 7F10.0 0.0 none none
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only relevant if OPCODE=8. K(1 through NTERMS) are the coefficients
in the power function:

C= K(1)+K(2)*A+K(3)*A**2+ etc.

638
 GENER Block

4.4(15).4 Table-type PARM -- Constant for GENER operation

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PARM
<-range><--con--->
. . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . .
END PARM

*******
Example
*******

PARM
# - # *** K
1 7 2.5
END PARM

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<con> K F10.0 1.0 none none
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This table is only relevant if OPCODE is 9, 10, 11, 24, 25, or 26.

K is the constant required in the operation.

639
 MUTSIN Block

4.4(16) MUTSIN Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MUTSIN
Table-type MUTSINFO

END MUTSIN

********************************************************************************

Explanation

The MUTSIN module is used to copy one or more time series from a PLTGEN file or its
equivalent to one or more targets. The targets may be data sets in the TSS or WDM
(specified in the EXT-TARGETS Block) or input time series in other operations
(specified in the NETWORK Block). See Section 4.2(16) in Part E for a detailed
description of MUTSIN's function.

640
 MUTSIN Block

4.4(16).1 Table-type MUTSINFO -- Information about time series to be copied

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MUTSINFO
<-range><mfl><npt><nmn><nli><mis>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END MUTSINFO

*******
Example
*******

MUTSINFO
# - # MFL NPT NMN NLI MSFG ***
1 30 1 1 25 0
END MUTSINFO

********************************************************************************

Details
----------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
----------------------------------------------------------
<mfl> MUTFL I5 30 30 99
<npt> NPT I5 0 0 10
<nmn> NMN I5 0 0 10
<nli> NLINES I5 25 1 none
<mis> MISSFG I5 0 0 3
----------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

MUTFL is the file unit number of the PLTGEN-format file being input.
NPT is the number of point-valued time series to be input.
NMN is the number of mean-valued time series to be input.
NLINES is the number of lines to skip at the beginning of the file.
MISSFG is the missing data action flag.
0 - stop on missing data
1 - fill missing data with 0.0
2 - fill missing data with -1.0E30
3 - fill missing data with next value

641
 FTABLES Block

4.5 FTABLES Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

FTABLES

FTABLE <t>
<----ftab-parms---->
<-------------- row-of-values ------------------------------------------------->
...........................................................................
line above repeats until function has been described through desired range
...........................................................................
END FTABLE<t>

Any number of FTABLES may appear in the block

END FTABLES

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol FORTRAN Format Comment
Name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<t> NUMBR I3 User's ID number for this FTABLE.

<ftab-parms> Fparms(4) 4I5 Up to 4 control parameters may be

supplied for an Ftable, e.g. number of
rows, number of columns, etc. Exact
details depend on the FTABLE concerned.

<row-of-values> VAL(*) variable Each column is dedicated to one of the

variables in the function. Each row
contains a full set of corresponding
values of these variables, e.g., depth,
surface area, volume, and outflow for
a RCHRES.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

642
 FTABLES Block

Explanation

An FTABLE is used to specify, in discrete form, a functional relationship between

two or more variables. For example, in the RCHRES module, it is assumed that there
is a fixed relationship between depth, surface area, volume, and volume-dependent
(F(vol)) discharge component. An FTABLE is used to document this non-analytic
function in numerical form. Each column of the FTABLE is dedicated to one of the
above variables, and each row contains corresponding values of the set. That is,
each row contains the surface area, volume, and discharge for a given depth. The
number of rows in the FTABLE will depend on the range of depth to be covered and
the desired resolution of the function.

4.5(3) FTABLES for the RCHRES Application Module

4.5(3).1 FTABLE for HYDR section

The geometric and hydraulic properties of a RCHRES are summarized in a function

table (FTABLE). Every RCHRES must be associated with one FTABLE; the association
is done in Table-type HYDR-PARM2 (Section 4.4(3).2.2 above). Usually, every RCHRES
will have its own FTABLE; however, if RCHRES's are identical they can share the
same FTABLE. FTABLE's may be included in the user's input (FTABLES Block) or they
may be stored in a WDM File.

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

FTABLE <t>
<-nr><-nc>
<-depth--><--area--><-volume-><-------------- f(VOL)-values ------------------->
........................................................................
The above row repeats until values have been supplied to cover the entire
cross-section at the desired resolution
........................................................................
END FTABLE<t>

Example
*******

FTABLE 103
rows cols ***
3 5
depth area volume outflow1 outflow2 ***
(ft) (acres) (acre-ft) ( ft3/s) ( ft3/s) ***
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
5.0 10.0 25.0 20.5 10.2
20.0 120.0 1000.0 995.0 200.1
END FTABLE103
********************************************************************************

643
 FTABLES Block

Details

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Name(s) Format Comment
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<t> see Sect. 4.5 I3 ID No. of FTABLE

<nr> NROWS I5 Number of rows in FTABLE

<nc> NCOLS I5 Number of columns in FTABLE

<depth> Depth F10.0 Depth of RCHRES;

Units: English = ft; Metric = m

<area> Surface area F10.0 Surface area of RCHRES;

Units: English = acres; Metric = ha

<volume> Volume F10.0 Volume of RCHRES; The volume in the

first row must be 0.0; Units:
English= acre.ft; Metric= Mm3 (10**6 m3)

<f(vol)- F(V) (NCOLS-3)* Units: English = ft3/s; Metric = m3/s

values> F10.0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This FTABLE lists depth, surface area and, optionally, one or more other values
(typically discharge rates) as functions of volume. HSPF interpolates between the
specified values to obtain the geometric and hydraulic characteristics for
intermediate values of volume.

The FTABLE must satisfy the following conditions:

1. (NCOLS*NROWS) must not exceed 100

2. NCOLS must be between 3 and 8
3. There must be at least one row in the FTABLE
4. The first row must have volume = 0.0
5. No negative values are permitted
6. The depth and volume fields may not decrease as the row number increases

In the example given above, we have a reach with two outflows, both of which are
functions of volume. Thus, there are 5 columns in the FTABLE.

The values for this type of FTABLE can either be supplied directly by the user or
generated by a subsidiary program from more basic information (e.g., by backwater
analysis or Manning's equation for assumed uniform flow).

WDM FTABLES are stored in WDM "table" data sets, and accessed directly by HSPF.
These data sets may be created and modified through the use of the ANNIE program.
WDM FTABLES follow the same structure, and must satisfy the same conditions as
FTABLES contained in the UCI.

644
 Time Series Linkages

4.6 TIME SERIES LINKAGES

4.6.1 General Discussion

In the EXTERNAL SOURCES, NETWORK, EXTERNAL TARGETS, and SCHEMATIC/MASS-LINK blocks,

the user specifies those time series which are to be passed between pairs of
operations in the same INGRP or between individual operations and external sources/
targets (WDM Data sets, DSS Data records, or sequential files). The blocks are
arranged in the form of tables, each containing one or more entries (rows). Each
entry contains source information, a multiplication factor, a transformation
function, and target information.

The entries in these blocks may be in any order.

When a time series associated with a data set in a WDM file is referred to, the
user supplies the data-set number and the data-set name. This information must
agree with data supplied when the data set was created. WDM data sets and
associated attributes are created using the interactive program ANNIE. The user
should refer to the ANNIE User's manual for additional information.

Time series may also be associated with DSS data records in up to five different
DSS files. Each record, or group of records, is identified by a pathname, which
is specified in the PATHNAMES block, where it is associated with a data-set number
in the context of the current UCI file. No data-set name is specified.

If a DSS record is accessed as an external target, it is not necessary that the

record, or even the file, exist before the run. DSS records used as external
sources, however, must be already present in the specified DSS file.

The user specifies time series which are input to, or output from, an operating
module by supplying a group name (<sgrp>, <tgrp>) and a member name plus one or two
subscripts (<smem><m#>, <tmem><m#>). The member information must be compatible
with data given in the Time Series Catalog for the applicable operating module and
group (Section 4.7).

The user may route the same source to several targets by making several separate
entries in a block, each referring to the same source, or by making use of the
"range" feature provided in the <tvol>< range> field. This latter feature does not
apply to entries in the EXT TARGETS Block. In either case the implication is that
data from the source will be used repetitively, and each time will be multiplied
by the specified factor and added to whatever else has already been routed to the
specified target. Conversely, several sources may be routed to a single target,
except in the EXT TARGETS Block. This happens when several entries specify
different sources but the same target. Here, the implication is that the data
obtained from the several sources must be accumulated (added) before being used by
the target.

645
 Time Series Linkages

4.6.1.1 WDM File Concepts

The WDM file is a binary, direct-access file that is organized into discrete data
sets. Each data set consists of data as well as "attributes" that describe the
data. Disk space for a WDM file is allocated as needed in 40,960-byte increments.
Space from deleted data sets within a WDM file is reused as new data are added to
the file. Thus the WDM file needs no special maintenance processing.

HSPF accesses WDM files for both input and output time series data. HSPF requires
that a data set be created in an existing WDM file prior to any run that writes to
the data set. Maintenance of WDM files and creation of new data sets is
accomplished using the USGS's ANNIE program (Flynn, K.M., P.R. Hummel, A.M. Lumb,
and J.L. Kittle, Jr. 1995. User *s Manual for ANNIE, Version 2, a Computer Program
for Interactive Hydrologic Data Management. WRI Report 95-4085. U.S. Geological
Survey, Reston, VA).

Within the HSPF UCI file, a WDM data set is referred to by its data-set number and
its name (i.e., its TSTYPE attribute), which is a four-character alpha-numeric
identifier. As stated above, WDM data-set attributes are created when the data set
is first created using the ANNIE program. The attributes that are associated with
time series data sets can be divided into two types: 1) those that describe how the
data are stored in the data set, and 2) those that are purely descriptive or
provide information about the data. Examples of the second type are station name
(STANAM), station ID (STAID), latitude and longitude (LATDEG, LNGDEG), and data-set
description (DESCRP). Attributes of the first type are more critical, and are
considered "required" attributes for time series data sets. These attributes are
defined below:

TCODE Time units code for defining the time interval of the data set (1-seconds,
2-minutes, 3-hours, 4-days, 5-months, 6-years); valid values in HSPF are
2, 3, 4, and 5.

TSSTEP Time interval of data set in TCODE units (used in combination with TCODE)

TSFORM Form of data; valid values in HSPF context are: (1-mean over time step, 2-
total over time step, 3-instantaneous); 1 and 2 correspond to "mean" time
series, and 3 corresponds to "point" time series.

TSBYR Starting year of data set; defaults to 1900; generally should be set to a
year just prior to start of data.

TGROUP Unit for group pointers (3-hours, 4-days, 5-months, 6-years, 7-centuries);
it may affect speed of data retrievals and total amount of data storage
available in data set; see table in ANNIE manual for recommended values.

TSFILL Filler value for missing data; default = 0.0.

COMPFG Compression flag (1-data are compressed, 2-data are not compressed)

TOLR Compression tolerance; data values within TOLR are compressed.

VBTIME Variable time step flag; must be 1 (all data at same time step) for HSPF.

646
 Time Series Linkages

4.6.1.2 DSS File Concepts

DSS Pathnames

DSS files access time series data in a somewhat different manner than WDM files.
The latter refers to a time series by a single data-set number. DSS files refer
to time series by "pathnames", which follow different conventions for different
kinds of data. HSPF uses only one of the allowed kinds, i.e., "Regular" Time
Series. The PATHNAMES block is used to temporarily assign or associate a data-set
number with each time series needed in the run. (See Section 4.6.6.)

An entire DSS time series is not necessarily stored in one logical piece in the DSS
file. Data are broken up into separate records with definite sizes and starting
dates, which depend on the time step of the data. For instance, hourly data is
stored in records each containing one month of values and starting with the first
hour of the month. Daily data, on the other hand, is stored yearly, in records
starting on January 1st.

The pathname can consist of up to 80 characters; because of limitations on UCI line

length, HSPF only allows 64 characters in DSS pathnames. Pathnames are separated
into six parts (delimited by slashes "/"), which are referenced by the characters
"A" through "F". For a "regular" time series, the conventions for the contents of
the six parts are:

A River basin or project name

B Location or gage identifier
C Data variable, e.g. FLOW, PRECIP
D Starting date for block of data in the format 01JAN1980.
This part is not used by HSPF, and should be left empty.
E Time interval - valid values are:
5MIN, 10MIN, 15MIN, 30MIN, 1HOUR, 2HOUR, 3HOUR, 4HOUR, 6HOUR,
12HOUR, 1DAY, 1WEEK, 1MON, 1YEAR
F Additional user-defined descriptive information, e.g. OBSERVED, PLAN A

Any single part may contain up to 32 characters, but the total including slashes
must remain less than 80 for general DSS use, and less than 64 characters for HSPF
(leaving the D part empty). A typical HSPF pathname might be:

/PATUXENT/BRIGHTON DAM/DIVERSION//1DAY/OBSERVED-CFS/

Note the double slash indicating the empty D part. A D part may be provided by the
user, but HSPF ignores it; this allows the DSS system to generate it, as needed,
based on the starting and ending dates of the run. For additional information,
users should refer to the HECDSS Users Guide (US Army Corps of Engineers Hydrologic
Engineering Center, April 1990).

647
 Time Series Linkages

DSS Data Types

Each DSS data record also may have a data type string and/or a units string stored
with it. Units strings are ignored by HSPF. Data type strings are used to
determine whether the time series is point-valued or mean-valued in the context of
HSPF. Valid values of the data type string are:

INST-VAL - point-valued: instantaneous at end of interval

PER-AVER - mean-valued: average over interval
PER-CUM - mean-valued: total over interval

A fourth type, INST-CUM, which is used for mass curves, is not valid for HSPF. The
data type string for each time series (input or output) must be specified in the
PATHNAMES block.

The data type should not change over time (i.e. between subsequent records) for a
given time series. If a data record already exists before the run, any value
specified in the PATHNAMES block must match the stored value, if it exists. If a
data record is created by the run, it is stored with the value given in the
PATHNAMES block, if any. If neither the record itself nor the PATHNAMES block
specifies a data type, the data is treated by the program as a mean-valued time
series.

648
 Time Series Linkages

4.6.2 EXT SOURCES Block (External sources)

In this block the user specifies those time series which are to be supplied to
operations in a RUN from sources external to it; external sources are WDM data
sets, DSS data sets, and sequential (SEQ) files.

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

EXT SOURCES
<svol><s#> <exsm>qf <ss><sg><-mfact--><tr> <tvol>< range> <tgrp> <tmem><m#>
or
<sfmt>f#
.............................................................................
Above line repeats until all external sources have been specified
.............................................................................
END EXT SOURCES

*******
Example
*******

EXT SOURCES
<-Volume-> <Member> SsysSgap<--Mult-->Tran <-Target vols> <-Grp> <-Member-> ***
<Name> # <Name> # tem strg<-factor->strg <Name> # # <Name> # # ***
SEQ 3 HYDDAY ENGL 1.0 RCHRES 1 EXTNL ICON
WDM1 22 PREC METRZERO SUM IMPLND 2 EXTNL PREC
DSS 132 ENGL SAME PLTGEN 10 INPUT POINT 1
END EXT SOURCES

********************************************************************************

649
 Time Series Linkages

Details

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol FORTRAN Start Format Comment
Name(s) Column
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

<svol> SVOL 1 A6 External source volume. Valid values are

WDMn (Watershed Data Management System File,
where n is 1-4 or blank), DSS (Data
Storage System), and SEQ (sequential file).

<s#> SVOLNO 7 I4 Data-set number if SVOL = WDMn, or DSS;

file unit number if SVOL = SEQ

<exsm> SMEMN 12 A6 Data-set TSTYP attribute if SVOL = WDMn;

12 A4 blank for SVOL = DSS

<sfmt> SFCLAS 12 A6 SFCLAS is a string indicating the class of format

used in the sequential file.

qf QLFG 18 I2 Quality-of-data flag if SVOL = WDMn; specifies

the minimum quality of WDM data which will be
accepted by HSPF; valid values = 0-31; default =
31

f# SFNO 18 I2 SFNO identifies an object-time format supplied in

the FORMATS Block. Default: standard format.

<ss> SSYST 21 A4 Unit system of data in the source if SVOL = SEQ,

WDMn, or DSS; valid values: ENGL and METR;
default = ENGL

<sg> SGAPST 25 A4 String indicating how missing lines in the

sequential file, missing data in a DSS file, or
WDM data of insufficient quality will be
regarded; used if SVOL = SEQ, WDMn, or DSS.
Valid values are ZERO (assign value 0) and UNDF
(assign undefined value). Defaults to UNDF. See
below for explanation.

<mfact> MFACTR 29 F10.0 The factor by which data from the source will be
multiplied before being added to the target.
Default = 1.0

<tr> TRAN 39 A4 String indicating which transformation function to

use in transferring time series from source to
target. See Section 4.6.7 for valid values and
defaults.

<tvol> TVOL 44 A6 TVOL is the Operation-type of the target.

650
 Time Series Linkages

< range> TOPFST 51 I3 TOPFST & TOPLST specify the range of operations
TOPLST 55 I3 which are targets (e.g., PERLND 1 5). If TOPLST
field is blank, the target is a single operation.

<tgrp> TGRPN 59 A6 Group to which the target time series belong(s).

<tmem> TMEMN 66 A6 Target time series member name.

<m#> TMEMSB(2) 72 2A2Target time series member name subscripts;

may be 2-character CATEGORY tag if applicable;
must be integer otherwise. See Time Series Catalog.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

If an entry specifies the source volume as SEQ, it is referring to a time series

coming from a sequential file. The entry must therefore supply the file unit
number and format information for the file.

If an entry specifies the source volume as WDMn or DSS, the user is referring to
a time series contained in the corresponding direct access data file: a Watershed
Data Management System file, or an HEC Data Storage System file. If the "n"
portion of a WDM file reference is left blank, the program (by default) looks in
the first WDM file only.?

Note: TSS functionality is not included in the documentation.

When data are read from a WDM data set, the user may optionally supply a data
quality flag (QLFG), which will be compared with the data quality "tag" associated
with all WDM time series data. Any data having lower quality than specified (value
greater than QLFG) will be rejected and assigned the value specified by the WDM
attribute TSFILL (if defined for the data set), or alternatively, if TSFILL is not
available, by SGAPST.

When data are read from a sequential file the user supplies:

1. A "format class code". It fixes the nature and sequence of data in a typical
record (e.g. day and hour, followed by 12 hourly values).

2. The number of an object-time format, situated in the FORMATS Block. It fixes

the exact format of the data in a record. A default format can be selected by
supplying the number 0, or leaving the field blank.

The format classes and associated default formats presently supported in the HSPF
system are documented in Section 4.9.

Note: All character strings must be left-justified in their fields except WDM data
set names (<exsm>) which must be justified in the same way that they were when the
data-set label or WDM attribute TSTYP was created.

651
 Time Series Linkages

4.6.3 NETWORK Block

In this block the user specifies those time series which will be passed between
operations via the internal scratch pad (INPAD). If there are no such linkages the
block can be omitted. For many applications, particularly large or complex
watersheds that have many entries in the NETWORK block, the alternative use of the
SCHEMATIC/MASS-LINK blocks may provide a simpler and more conceptual format for
specifying the linkages in the NETWORK block.

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

NETWORK
<svol><o#> <sgrp> <smem><m#><-mfact--><tr> <tvol>< range> <tgrp> <tmem><m#>
.............................................................................
Above line repeats until all network entries have been made
.............................................................................
END NETWORK

*******
Example
*******

NETWORK
<-Volume-> <-Grp> <-Member-><--Mult-->Tran <-Target vols> <-Grp> <-Member-> ***
<Name> # <Name> # #<-factor->strg <Name> # # <Name> # # ***
RCHRES 1 HYDR ROVOL 0.5 RCHRES 2 EXTNL IVOL
RCHRES 2 HYDR ROVOL RCHRES 5 EXTNL IVOL
RCHRES 4 HYDR ROVOL RCHRES 5 EXTNL IVOL
END NETWORK

********************************************************************************

652
 Time Series Linkages

Details

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol FORTRAN Start Format Comment
Name(s) Column
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<svol> SVOL 1 A6 SVOL is the Operation-type of the source operation

<o#> SVOLNO 7 I4 Source Operation-type number (e.g., PERLND 5)

<sgrp> SGRPN 12 A6 Group to which the source time series belong(s).

<smem> SMEMN 19 A6 Source time series member name;

see Time Series Catalog.

<m#> SMEMSB(2) 25 2A2 Source member name subscripts;

may be 2-character CATEGORY tag if applicable;
must be integer otherwise. See Time Series Catalog.

<mfact> MFACTR 29 F10.0 The factor by which data from the source will be
multiplied before being added to the target.
Default (blank field)= 1.0

<tr> TRAN 39 A4 String indicating which transformation function to

use in transferring time series from source to
target. See Section 4.6.7 for defaults, etc.

<tvol> TVOL 44 A6 Operation-type of the target.

< range> TOPFST, 51 I3 TOPFST & TOPLST specify the range of operations
TOPLST 55 I3 which are targets (e.g. PERLND 1 5). If TOPLST
field is blank, the target is a single operation.

<tgrp> TGRPN 59 A6 Group to which the target time series belong(s).

<tmem> TMEMN 66 A6 Target member name; see Time Series Catalog.

<m#> TMEMSB(2) 72 2A2 Target member name subscripts;

may be 2-character CATEGORY tag if applicable;
must be integer otherwise. See Time Series Catalog.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

The example above shows how this block is used to specify the connectivity of a set
of reaches of stream channel (RCHRES 1 flows to RCHRES 2, RCHRES 2 and 4 flow to
RCHRES 5). It can also be used to specify the flow of time series data from
utility operations to simulation operations and vice versa. The network can be
extremely complex, or non-existent (e.g., if the RUN involves only one operation).

Because the time series are transferred via the INPAD, each source and target pair
must be in the same INGRP.

653
 Time Series Linkages

4.6.4 SCHEMATIC and MASS-LINK Blocks

The SCHEMATIC and MASS-LINK blocks work in tandem to allow the user to specify the
watershed structure and linkages in a more efficient and conceptual manner than is
possible using the NETWORK block.

The SCHEMATIC block contains global specifications of the watershed structure,

i.e., connections of land segments to stream reaches and reach-reach connections.
This block permits the user to input the area of a land segment that is tributary
to a stream reach in a single entry, instead of including the area in multiple
entries in the NETWORK block. Each entry in the SCHEMATIC block refers to a table
in the MASS-LINK block where the detailed time series connections for that entry
are specified.

The MASS-LINK block contains the specific time series to be transferred from one
operation to another. This block also contains any required units conversion
factors or other multiplication factors that may be needed in addition to the area.
For example, when runoff from a land segment is transferred to a stream reach, a
conversion factor of 1/12 (0.08333) is needed to convert the runoff from inches to
acre-feet if the area units are acres. (The corresponding factor for metric units
is 10-5 if the area units are hectares.) Each MASS-LINK table contains the set of
time series transfers that are to be associated with one or more of the linkages
in the SCHEMATIC block. The HSPF program combines the schematic linkages with the
mass time series transfers and automatically generates all of the necessary time
series connections; these time series connections are automatically included in the
NETWORK block by the program.

The example shown below illustrates the use of these blocks. In this example, the
watershed consists of three pervious land segments and two stream reaches. One of
the land segments contributes loadings to both reaches. Loadings of flow,
sediment, heat and one dissolved pesticide are being transferred from the land to
the stream, and the sediment loading from the land surface is assumed to consist
of 10% sand, 35% silt and 55% clay. The SCHEMATIC and MASS-LINK blocks to
accomplish the required connections are shown below:

654
 Time Series Linkages

**********************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
**********************************************************************

SCHEMATIC
<-Source-> <--Area--> <-Target-> MSLK ***
<Name> # <-factor-> <Name> # Tbl# ***
PERLND 1 200. RCHRES 1 1
PERLND 2 120. RCHRES 1 1
PERLND 2 235. RCHRES 2 1
PERLND 3 360. RCHRES 2 1
RCHRES 1 RCHRES 2 2
END SCHEMATIC

MASS-LINK
<Volume> <-Grp> <-Member-><--Mult--> <-Target> <-Grp> <-Member->***
<Name> <Name> # #<-factor-> <Name> <Name> # #***
MASS-LINK 1
PERLND PWATER PERO 0.0833333 RCHRES INFLOW IVOL
PERLND SEDMNT SOSED 1 0.10 RCHRES INFLOW ISED 1
PERLND SEDMNT SOSED 1 0.35 RCHRES INFLOW ISED 2
PERLND SEDMNT SOSED 1 0.55 RCHRES INFLOW ISED 3
PERLND PWTGAS POHT RCHRES INFLOW IHEAT
PERLND PEST TOPST RCHRES INFLOW IDQUAL 1
END MASS-LINK 1

MASS-LINK 2
RCHRES ROFLOW RCHRES INFLOW
END MASS-LINK 2

END MASS-LINK

**********************************************************************

The SCHEMATIC block contains the global watershed linkages, i.e., PLS 1 provides
loadings to Reach 1, PLS 2 provides loadings to Reaches 1 and 2, PLS 3 provides
loadings to Reach 2, and Reach 1 is upstream of Reach 2. The areas of PLS's 1 and
3 are 200 acres and 360 acres, respectively, and the area of PLS 2 is 355 acres,
of which 120 acres are tributary to Reach 1 and 235 acres are tributary to Reach
2.

The MASS-LINK block contains details of the individual time series connections that
need to be specified for each of the watershed linkages. Each of the four PLS-to-
Reach entries in the SCHEMATIC block refers to MASS-LINK Table 1, which contains
six time series connections from the PLS to the Reach. The Reach 1-to-Reach 2
entry refers to MASS-LINK Table 2; this table contains the ROFLOW-INFLOW
connection, which is automatically expanded by the program to generate all
necessary time series connections from one reach to another.

The time series connections in the MASS-LINK block are combined with the SCHEMATIC
linkages to generate the full set of connections needed in the simulation. In this

655
 Time Series Linkages

process, the program sets up a set of connections for each [SCHEMATIC entry]/[MASS-
LINK table] pair. The multiplication factor for each connection is obtained by
combining the 'area' factor from the SCHEMATIC block and the 'units/other
conversion' factor from the MASS-LINK block. The explicit time series connections
generated by HSPF and included in the NETWORK Block for this example are shown
below:

NETWORK

**** PLS 1 to RCH 1

PERLND 1 PWATER PERO 16.66 SAME RCHRES 1 INFLOW IVOL
PERLND 1 SEDMNT SOSED 1 20. SAME RCHRES 1 INFLOW ISED 1
PERLND 1 SEDMNT SOSED 1 70. SAME RCHRES 1 INFLOW ISED 2
PERLND 1 SEDMNT SOSED 1 110. SAME RCHRES 1 INFLOW ISED 3
PERLND 1 PWTGAS POHT 200. SAME RCHRES 1 INFLOW IHEAT
PERLND 1 PEST TOPST 200. SAME RCHRES 1 INFLOW IDQUAL 1

**** PLS 2 to RCH 1

PERLND 2 PWATER PERO 10. SAME RCHRES 1 INFLOW IVOL
PERLND 2 SEDMNT SOSED 1 12. SAME RCHRES 1 INFLOW ISED 1
PERLND 2 SEDMNT SOSED 1 42. SAME RCHRES 1 INFLOW ISED 2
PERLND 2 SEDMNT SOSED 1 66. SAME RCHRES 1 INFLOW ISED 3
PERLND 2 PWTGAS POHT 120. SAME RCHRES 1 INFLOW IHEAT
PERLND 2 PEST TOPST 120. SAME RCHRES 1 INFLOW IDQUAL 1

**** PLS 2 to RCH 2

PERLND 2 PWATER PERO 19.58 SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW IVOL
PERLND 2 SEDMNT SOSED 1 23.50 SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW ISED 1
PERLND 2 SEDMNT SOSED 1 82.25 SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW ISED 2
PERLND 2 SEDMNT SOSED 1 129.25 SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW ISED 3
PERLND 2 PWTGAS POHT 235. SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW IHEAT
PERLND 2 PEST TOPST 235. SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW IDQUAL 1

**** PLS 3 to RCH 2

PERLND 3 PWATER PERO 30. SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW IVOL
PERLND 3 SEDMNT SOSED 1 36. SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW ISED 1
PERLND 3 SEDMNT SOSED 1 126. SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW ISED 2
PERLND 3 SEDMNT SOSED 1 198. SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW ISED 3
PERLND 3 PWTGAS POHT 360. SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW IHEAT
PERLND 3 PEST TOPST 360. SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW IDQUAL 1

**** RCH 1 to RCH 2 (HYDR, HTRCH, SEDTRN, and GQUAL sections are active)
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROVOL 1.0 SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW IVOL
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROHEAT 1.0 SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW IHEAT
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROSED 1 1.0 SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW ISED 1
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROSED 2 1.0 SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW ISED 2
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROSED 3 1.0 SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW ISED 3
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW RODQAL 1.0 SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW IDQAL 1
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROSQAL 1 1 1.0 SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW ISQAL 1 1
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROSQAL 2 1 1.0 SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW ISQAL 2 1
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROSQAL 3 1 1.0 SAME RCHRES 2 INFLOW ISQAL 3 1
END NETWORK

656
 Time Series Linkages

4.6.4.1 SCHEMATIC Block

In this block the user specifies the global linkages of land segments with stream
reaches and between stream reaches. Each of these linkages is combined with the
detailed time series connections specified in one of the MASS-LINK tables to
generate a complete set of time series connections for the linkage.

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SCHEMATIC
<svol>< #> <-afact--> <tvol>< #> <ML#>
.............................................................................
Above line repeats until all network entries have been made
.............................................................................
END SCHEMATIC

*******
Example
*******

SCHEMATIC
<-Source-> <--Mult--> <-Target > MSLK ***
<Name> # <-factor-> <Name> # Tbl# ***
PERLND 1 200. RCHRES 2 1
PERLND 2 300. RCHRES 5 1
RCHRES 4 1. RCHRES 5 2
END SCHEMATIC

********************************************************************************

657
 Time Series Linkages

Details

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol FORTRAN Start Format Comment
Name(s) Column
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

<svol> SVOL 1 A6 SVOL is the Operation-type of the source operation.

< #> SVOLNO 7 I4 SVOLNO is the source Operation-type number

(e.g., PERLND 5)

<afact> AFACTR 29 F10.0 The area factor by which data from the source
will be multiplied before being added to the
target. This factor will be combined with the
factor in the MASS-LINK Block.
Default (blank field)= 1.0

<tvol> TVOL 44 A6 TVOL is the Operation-type of the target.

< #> TVOLNO 50 I4 TVOLNO is the target Operation-type number

(e.g., RCHRES 5)

<ml#> MSLKNO 57 I4 MASS-LINK table number that will be used to

generate the NETWORK entries for this linkage.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

658
 Time Series Linkages

4.6.4.2 MASS-LINK Block

In this block the user specifies those time series connections which will be
combined with the linkages in the SCHEMATIC Block to generate a set of time series
connections in the NETWORK Block.

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MASS-LINK

MASS-LINK #
<svol> <sgrp> <smem><m#><-mfact--> <tvol> <tgrp> <tmem><m#>
.............................................................................
Above line repeats until all mass-link entries have been made
.............................................................................
END MASS-LINK #

END MASS-LINK

*******
Example
*******

MASS-LINK
MASS-LINK 1
<-Volume-> <-Grp> <-Member-><--Mult--> <-Target vols> <-Grp> <-Member-> ***
<Name> <Name> # #<-factor-> <Name> # # <Name> # # ***
PERLND PWATER PERO 0.08333 RCHRES INFLOW IVOL
PERLND SEDMNT SOSED RCHRES INFLOW ISED 1
PERLND PQUAL POQUAL 1 RCHRES INFLOW OXIF 2
END MASS-LINK 1
END MASS-LINK

********************************************************************************

659
 Time Series Linkages

Details

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol FORTRAN Start Format Comment
Name(s) Column
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

<svol> SVOL 1 A6 SVOL is the Operation-type of the source operation.

<sgrp> SGRPN 12 A6 Group to which the source time series belong(s).

<smem> SMEMN 19 A6 Source member name.

<m#> SMEMSB(2) 25 2A2 Source member name subscripts;

may be 2-character CATEGORY tag if applicable;
must be integer otherwise. See Time Series Catalog.

<mfact> MFACTR 29 F10.0 The factor by which data from the source will be
multiplied before being added to the target.
Default (blank field)= 1.0

<tvol> TVOL 44 A6 TVOL is the Operation-type of the target.

<tgrp> TGRPN 59 A6 Group to which the target time series belong(s).

<tmem> TMEMN 66 A6 Target member name.

<m#> TMEMSB(2) 72 2A2 Target member name subscripts;

may be 2-character CATEGORY tag if applicable;
must be integer otherwise. See Time Series Catalog.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

660
 Time Series Linkages

4.6.5 EXT TARGETS Block (External targets)

In this block the user specifies those time series which will be output from the
operations in a RUN, to data sets in the WDM or DSS Files. If there are no such
transfers the block may be omitted.

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

EXT TARGETS
<svol><o#> <sgrp> <smem><m#><-mfact--><tr> <tvol><t#> <extm>qf <ts> <ag> <am>
.............................................................................
Above line repeats until all external targets have been specified
.............................................................................
END EXT TARGETS

*******
Example
*******

EXT TARGETS
<-Volume-> <-Grp> <-Member-><--Mult-->Tran <-Volume-> <Member> Tsys Aggr Amd ***
<Name> # <Name> # #<-factor->strg <Name> # <Name>qf tem strg strg***
RCHRES 6 GQUAL DQAL 3 1. AVER WDM4 25 CONC ENGL AGGR REPL
PERLND 301 NITR PONITR SUM DSS 122 ENGL REPL
END EXT TARGETS

********************************************************************************

661
 Time Series Linkages

Details

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol FORTRAN Start Format Comment
Name(s) Column
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<svol> SVOL 1 A6 SVOL is the Operation-type of the source operation.

<o#> SVOLNO 7 I4 SVOLNO is the source Operation-type number

(e.g., PERLND 5)

<sgrp> SGRPN 12 A6 Group to which the source time series belong(s).

<smem> SMEMN 19 A6 Source member name.

<m#> SMEMSB(2) 25 2A2 Source member name subscripts;

may be 2-character CATEGORY tag if applicable;
must be integer otherwise. See Time Series Catalog.

<mfact> MFACTR 29 F10.0 The factor by which data from the source will be
multiplied before being added to the target.
Default (blank field)= 1.0

<tr> TRAN 39 A4 String indicating which transformation function to

use in transferring time series from source to
target. See Section 4.6.7 for defaults.

<tvol> TVOL 44 A6 External target volume. Valid values are WDMn

(Watershed Data Management System file, where n
is 1-4 or blank) and DSS (Data Storage System).

<t#> TVOLNO 50 I4 Data-set Number (if TVOL = WDMn, or DSS).

<extm> TMEMN 55 A6 Data-set TSTYP attribute (if TVOL = WDMn).

A4 (Blank if TVOL = DSS.)

qf QLFG 61 I2 Quality-of-data (if TVOL = WDM); specifies the

quality tag to be attached to data placed in a
WDM data set; valid values = 0 - 31; default = 0.

<ts> TSYST 64 A4 Unit system of data to be written to WDM or DSS

data set; valid values = ENGL and METR; default =
ENGL.
<ag> AGGST 69 A4 String indicating whether the data should be
aggregated when placed in a WDM data set having
a time step greater than the source time step;
valid value is AGGR; default is no aggregation.
<am> AMDST 74 A4 String indicating how the target data set is to be
accessed. Valid values are: ADD or REPL for a
WDM or DSS file. See below for explanation.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

662
 Time Series Linkages

Explanation

This block is similar to the EXT SOURCES Block, but serves the opposite purpose.
Thus, the entries have similar formats (but are reversed). In addition, each entry
in the EXT TARGETS Block has the <am> field, which indicates how the target data
set will be accessed. The user should be aware of the differences between these
options when the target data set is in a WDM or DSS file. The valid values and the
meaning of each are:

ADD For a WDM data set, this option is designed to add data when no pre-
existing data are present for any period after the starting time of the
run, including times after the time span of the run.

For a DSS data record, this option preserves pre-existing data before and
after the beginning of the run, and requires that no data pre-exist during
the time span of the run.

REPL For a WDM data set, this option will result in the overwriting of any
existing data which follows the starting time of the run, including data
after the time span of the run.

For a DSS data record, pre-existing data during the time span of the run
is overwritten, but pre-existing data before and after the run are
preserved.

In summary, for a WDM data set, the ADD option is used to add data when no
pre-existing data are present after the starting time of the run, while the REPL
option results in overwriting existing data, both during and after the time span
of the run.

Data placed in a WDM data set will normally have a time step equal to the time step
of the run, even if the data set has a different time step than the run . However,
the user may optionally specify that aggregation occur if the target data-set time
step is an integer multiple (2 or greater) of the run time step. The time step of
a WDM data set is specified by the TCODE and TSSTEP attributes of the data set.
Disaggregation is not permitted when placing data in WDM data sets.

For a DSS data record, only data during the actual time span of the run are
affected. The ADD option specifies that such data cannot pre-exist, while the REPL
option allows any pre-existing data to be overwritten.

663
 Time Series Linkages

4.6.6 PATHNAMES Block

In this block the user associates data-set numbers with the time series to be
accessed from the DSS (HEC Data Storage System) files, and specifies the data types
of the time series.

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

PATHNAMES
<ds>f# <ctype-> <---------------------------pathname--------------------------->
.............................................................................
Above line repeats until all external targets have been specified
.............................................................................
END PATHNAMES

*******
Example
*******

PATHNAMES
<ds>f# <ctype-> <***************************pathname***************************>
41 1 PER-CUM /TEST/FARM COOP WS/EVAP//1DAY/OBSERVED-INCHES|DAY/
END PATHNAMES

********************************************************************************

Details

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol FORTRAN Start Format Comment
Name(s) Column
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ds> DSSDSN 1 I4 DSSDSN is the temporary data-set number assigned to
the DSS record(s) which make up the time series.
f# DSSFL 5 I2 DSSFL is the index number for the DSS file
containing these data record(s); it is assigned
to each DSS file in the FILES block
<ctype-> CTYPE 8 A8 Data type string for the data record(s). Valid
values are: INST-VAL, PER-AVER, PER-CUM.
pathname CPATH 17 A64 Pathname for DSS record(s). It is recommended
that the D part be left empty, as it is generated
by HSPF as needed.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

664
 Time Series Linkages

Explanation

This section is required if any time series data are to be accessed from DSS files.
In this section, unique ID numbers are assigned to "data sets" in the DSS file(s);
these ID numbers are used in the EXT-SOURCES and EXT-TARGETS blocks to specify
(i.e., identify) the data sets.

See Section 4.6.1.1 for further discussion of DSS concepts.

4.6.7 Time Series Transform Functions

Whenever time series are transferred from a source to a target, a "transformation"

takes place. The user can specify the transformation function in field <tr>; if
it is blank the default function is supplied. The range of permissible functions
is:

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Interval Source Target <------- Functions --------->
relation Type Type Defaults Others
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SDELT = TDELT Point to Point SAME none

Mean to Mean SAME none
Point to Mean AVER none

SDELT > TDELT Point to Point INTP/AVER (a) none

(b) Mean to Mean DIV SAME
Point to Mean AVER none

SDELT < TDELT Point to Point LAST/AVER (a) none

Mean to Mean SUM AVER,MAX,MIN
Point to Mean AVER SUM,MAX,MIN

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Key: SDELT Time interval of source time series

TDELT Time interval of target time series
(a) Second default keyword applies to WDM source time series and all DSS
external time series.
(b) This interval relation is invalid for WDM target; i.e., output
disaggregation is not permitted to WDM data sets
Notes:

1. See below (Note 2 and next page) for explanations of the transform keywords.

2. For WDM data sets, TDELT and SDELT refer to the time step defined by the WDM
attributes TCODE and TSSTEP; however, data may be stored in the data set at
other time steps.

665
 Time Series Linkages

3. For WDM or DSS data sets, the functions AVER and SAME imply either AVER or
SAME; and the functions SUM and DIV imply either SUM or DIV, whichever is
appropriate for the actual time step of the data.

4. The type of WDM data sets is determined by the attribute TSFORM. If TSFORM =
1 or 2, the type is MEAN; if TSFORM = 3, the type is POINT.

5. The type of sequential (SEQ) time series is not defined; consequently, these
time series are assumed to have the same type as the target time series.

6. The type of DSS data records is determined from the data type string. (See
Section 4.6.1.1 above for discussion.) If none is specified, the time series
is assumed to be mean-valued.

7. Keywords less than 4 characters long must be left-justified in the field.

8. For further information, see Appendix V and Time Series Catalog (Section 4.7
of this part).

The time series transform functions given above are completed before the
multiplication factor given in the EXTERNAL SOURCES, EXTERNAL TARGETS and NETWORK
blocks are applied. These transform functions are defined as follows:

AVER Compute the integral of the source time series over each target time step,
divide by the target time step and assign the value to the time step in the
target time series. See Appendix V for definition of the integral of a time
series.

DIV Divide each mean value of the source time series by the ratio of the source
time step to the target time step and assign the results to each of the
target time steps contained in the source time step.

INTP Interpolate linearly between adjacent point values in the source time
series and assign the interpolated values to each time point in the target
time series.

LAST Take the value at the last time point of the source time series which
belongs to the time step of the target time series and assign the value to
the time step of the target time series. See Appendix V for a definition
of the meaning of "belonging".

MAX Find the maximum value of the source time series for all points belonging
to the target time step (point-value time series) or find the maximum value
of the source time series for all time steps contained within the target
time step (mean-value time series). Assign the maximum value to the time
step of the target time series. The definition of "belonging" (given in
Appendix V) was motivated by the desire to make MAX and MIN unique for
point-value time series.

666
 Time Series Linkages

MIN Find the minimum value of the source time series for all points belonging
to the target time step (point-value time series) or find the minimum value
of the source time series for all time steps contained within the target
time series (mean-value time series). Assign the minimum value to the time
step of the target time series.

SAME Take the value at each time step or time point of the source time series
and assign the value to the corresponding time point (point-value time
series), the corresponding time step (mean-value time series), or all the
contained time steps (mean-value time series with time step less than the
source time step) of the target time series.

SUM For point-value source time series: Compute the sum of the values for all
points in the source time series belonging to the target series time step
plus the value of the source time series at the initial point of the target
time step and assign the sum to the target time step. For mean- value
source time series: Compute the sum of the values for all time steps in the
source time series contained within the target series time step and assign
the sum to the target time step.

4.6.8 Warning

1. In this block it is not permissible to route several sources to the same

external target. If you want to combine several time series and write the
result to an external target, first use a utility operation (COPY) to combine
the data, and then use this block to route the result to the external target.

667
 Time Series Catalog

4.7 Time Series Catalog

This section documents all the time series which are required by, and which can be
output by, all the operating modules in the HSPF system.

The time series are arranged in groups. Thus, to specify an operation associated
time series in the EXT SOURCES, NETWORK or EXT TARGETS Blocks, the user supplies
a group name followed, optionally, by a member name and subscripts.

The time series documented in this section can be separated into three categories:

1. Input only. Some time series can only be input to their operating module (e.g.
member PREC of group EXTNL in module PERLND).

2. Input or output. Some time series can either be input to their operating
module or output from it, depending on the options in effect. For example, if
snow accumulation and melt on a Pervious Land-segment (PLS) is being simulated
in a given RUN, time series WYIELD in group SNOW can be output to the WDM file.
Then, if section SNOW is inactive but section PWATER is active in a subsequent
RUN, the same time series WYIELD may be specified as an input to the PERLND
module. This feature makes it possible to calibrate an application module in
an incremental manner. First, the outputs from section 1 are calibrated to the
field data; then the outputs from section 2 are calibrated using outputs from
section 1 as inputs, etc. Sections calibrated in earlier runs need not be
re-run if the needed outputs from them have been stored.

3. Output only. Some time series can be computed by and output from their
operating module, but never serve as inputs to it (e.g. member ALBEDO of group
SNOW in module PERLND).

To run an operating module, the user must ensure that all the input time series
which it requires are made available to it. This is done by making appropriate
entries in the EXT SOURCES or NETWORK blocks. To ascertain which time series are
required, one should consult the Time Series Catalog for the appropriate module.
For example, assume that sediment production and washoff/scour from a PLS are being
simulated using the snow and water budget results from a previous RUN. In this
scenario, section SEDMNT would be active, but sections ATEMP, SNOW and PWATER would
not be active. Then, Table 4.7(1).5 shows the following:

1. member (time series) PREC of group EXTNL is a required input time series
(member SLSED is optional)

2. members RAINF and SNOCOV of group SNOW are required inputs, because section
SNOW is inactive

3. members SURO and SURS of group PWATER are required inputs, because section
PWATER is inactive

668
 Time Series Catalog

The user can obtain further details on the above time series by consulting the
table for the appropriate group (e.g. Table 4.7(1).1 for group EXTNL).
Table 4.7(1).5 shows which time series are computed in the SEDMNT section of the
PERLND module and may therefore be output (members DETS through SOSDB).

Thus, in the EXT SOURCES and/or NETWORK blocks, entries must appear which specify
members PREC, RAINF, etc (groups EXTNL, SNOW, PWATER) as targets to which source
time series are routed. Also, in the NETWORK and/or EXT TARGETS blocks, entries
may appear which specify one or more of members DETS through SOSDB (of group
SEDMNT) as source time series, which are routed to other operations or to the WDM.

The tables which follow are otherwise self explanatory, except for the abbreviation
"ivld" which appears frequently in the "Units" fields. It means "interval of the
data" (to distinguish it from the internal, or simulation interval). Thus, if a
WDM or DSS data set containing 1-hour precipitation data is input to an operation
with a DELT of two hours, ivld is 1 hour.

4.7.1 Connection of Surface and Instream Application Modules

In HSPF, the operational connection between the land surface and instream
simulation modules is accomplished through the NETWORK Block and/or the
SCHEMATIC/MASS-LINK Blocks. Time series of runoff, sediment, and pollutant
loadings generated on the land surface are passed to the receiving stream for
subsequent transport and transformation instream. This connection of the IMPLND
and/or PERLND modules with the RCHRES module requires explicit definition of
corresponding time series in the linked modules. A one-to-one correspondence
exists between several land segment outflow time series and corresponding stream
reach inflow time series (e.g. runoff, sediment, dissolved oxygen, etc.); however
in order to maintain flexibility, some of the time series are more general, and no
unique correspondence exists. Also, in some cases, a process or material simulated
in the stream will have no corresponding land surface quantity. For example, the
inflow of plankton to a stream occurs only from upstream reaches and not from a
land segment.

4.7.2 Atmospheric Deposition of Water Quality Constituents

Input time series are available in HSPF to aid in the simulation of atmospheric
deposition of quality constituents. Atmospheric deposition inputs can be specified
in two possible ways depending on the form of the available data. If the
deposition is in the form of a flux (mass per area per time), then it is considered
"dry deposition". If the deposition is in the form of a concentration in rainfall,
then it is considered "wet deposition", and the program automatically combines it
with the input rainfall time series to compute the resulting flux. Either type of
deposition data can be input as a time series, which covers the entire simulation
period, or alternatively, as a set of monthly values that is used for each year of
the simulation. The specific atmospheric deposition time series for each
operational module (PERLND, IMPLND, RCHRES) are documented in the EXTNL table of
the Time Series Catalog for that module.

669
 Time Series Catalog

An additional use of these atmospheric deposition time series is the specification

of agricultural chemical and fertilizer inputs to the soil. These input time
series thus provide an alternative to the SPEC-ACTIONS block as a means for
changing soil storages of chemicals in the AGCHEM sections of the program. For
this purpose, "deposition" to the upper soil layer in addition to the surface soil
layer is available in PERLND sections NITR, PHOS, and TRACER. (Section PEST has
time series only for the surface layer, since pesticides are not normally
incorporated into the soil as are fertilizers.) Depending on the complexity of the
agricultural practices being modeled, the user should decide whether the SPEC-
ACTIONS or the time series inputs are simpler to construct.

670
 Catalog for PERLND Module

4.7(1) Catalog for PERLND module

The time series groups associated with this module are shown in Figure 4.7(1)-1.

The members contained within each group are documented in the following tables.

4.7(1).1 Group EXTNL

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series always external (input only) to module PERLND:

GATMP 1 1 - Deg F Deg C Measured air temperature

PREC 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Measured precipitation
DTMPG 1 1 - Deg F Deg C Measured dewpoint temperature
WINMOV 1 1 - mi/ivld km/ivld Measured wind movement
SOLRAD 1 1 - Ly/ivld Ly/ivld Measured solar radiation
CLOUD 1 1 - tenths tenths Cloud cover (range: 0 - 10)
PETINP 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Input potential E-T
SURLI 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Surface lateral inflow
IFWLI 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Interflow lateral inflow
AGWLI 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Active groundwater lateral inflow
SLSED 1 1 - tons/ tonnes/ Lateral input of sediment
ac.ivld ha.ivld
PQADFX NQ 1 - qty/ qty/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition
ac.ivld ha.ivld of QUALOF
PQADCN NQ 1 - qty/ft3 qty/l Concentration of QUALOF in rain
for wet atmospheric deposition
PEADFX NPST 3 - lb/ kg/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition
ac.ivld ha.ivld of pesticide. The first subscript
indicates the pesticide; the second
indicates the species: crystalline,
adsorbed, or solution
PEADCN NPST 3 - mg/l mg/l Concentration of pesticide in rain
for wet atmospheric deposition.
Subscripts same as above.
NIADFX 3 2 - lb/ kg/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition
ac.ivld ha.ivld of nitrogen. First subscript indi-
cates species: NO3, NH3, organic N;
the second subscript indicates the
affected soil layer: surface or
upper.
NIADCN 3 2 - mg/l mg/l Concentration of nitrogen in rain
for wet atmospheric deposition.
Subscripts as above.

671
 Catalog for PERLND Module

PHADFX 2 2 - lb/ kg/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition

ac.ivld ha.ivld of phosphorus. The first subscript
indicates species: PO4, organic P;
the second subscript indicates the
affected soil layer (see above)
PHADCN 2 2 - mg/l mg/l Concentration of phosphorus in
rain for wet atmospheric deposition.
Subscripts as above.
TRADFX 2 1 - lb/ kg/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition
ac.ivld ha.ivld of tracer substance. Subscript in-
dicates affected soil layer (see
above)
TRADCN 2 1 - mg/l mg/l Concentration of tracer in rain.
Subscript as above.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.7(1).2 Group ATEMP

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section ATEMP:

AIRTMP 1 1 - Deg F Deg C Estimated surface air temperature

over the Land-segment

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group EXTNL always required

GATMP gage air temperature
PREC precipitation
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

672
 Catalog for PERLND Module

Figure 4.7(1)-1 Groups of time series associated with the PERLND Module

673
 Catalog for PERLND Module

4.7(1).3 Group SNOW

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section SNOW:

PACK 1 1 * in mm Total contents of pack (water equiv)

PACKF 1 1 * in mm Frozen contents of pack, ie. snow +
ice (water equivalent)
PACKW 1 1 * in mm Liquid water in pack
PACKI 1 1 * in mm Ice in pack (water equivalent)
PDEPTH 1 1 * in mm Pack depth
RDENPF 1 1 * none none Relative density of frozen contents
of pack (PACKF/PDEPTH)
SNOCOV 1 1 * none none Fraction of Land-segment covered by
pack
ALBEDO 1 1 * none none Albedo of the pack
PAKTMP 1 1 * Deg F Deg C Mean temperature of the pack
SNOWF 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Snowfall, water equivalent
SNOWE 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Evaporation from PACKF
(sublimation), water equivalent
WYIELD 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Water yielded by the pack (released
to the land-surface)
MELT 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Quantity of melt from PACKF (water
equivalent)
RAINF 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Rainfall

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group EXTNL always required

PREC precipitation
DTMPG dewpoint temperature
WINMOV wind movement
SOLRAD solar radiation

Group ATEMP required if section ATEMP inactive

AIRTMP air temperature

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

674
 Catalog for PERLND Module

4.7(1).4 Group PWATER

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section PWATER:

Land-segment-wide values:
PERS 1 1 * in mm Total water stored in the PLS
CEPS 1 1 * in mm Interception storage
SURS 1 1 * in mm Surface (overland flow) storage
UZS 1 1 * in mm Upper zone storage
IFWS 1 1 * in mm Interflow storage
LZS 1 1 * in mm Lower zone storage
AGWS 1 1 * in mm Active groundwater storage
RPARM 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Current value of maximum lower zone
E-T opportunity
SURO 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Surface outflow
IFWO 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Interflow outflow
AGWO 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Active groundwater outflow
PERO 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Total outflow from PLS
IGWI 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Inflow to inactive (deep) ground-
water
PET 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Potential E-T, adjusted for snow
cover and air temperature
CEPE 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Evap. from interception storage
UZET 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld E-T from upper zone
LZET 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld E-T from lower zone
AGWET 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld E-T from active groundwater storage
BASET 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld E-T taken from active groundwater
outflow (baseflow)
TAET 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Total simulated E-T
IFWI 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Interflow inflow (excluding any
lateral inflow)
UZI 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Upper zone inflow
INFIL 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Infiltration to the soil
PERC 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Percolation from upper to lower
zone
LZI 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Lower zone inflow
AGWI 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Active groundwater inflow
(excluding any lateral inflow)
SURI 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Surface inflow (including any
lateral inflow)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

675
 Catalog for PERLND Module

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group EXTNL
SURLI optional
IFWLI optional
AGWLI optional
PETINP
PREC required if snow not considered
(CSNOFG= 0)

Group ATEMP
AIRTMP only required if section ATEMP
is inactive and CSNOFG= 1

Group SNOW only required if section SNOW is

RAINF inactive and snow is considered
SNOCOV (CSNOFG= 1)
WYIELD
PACKI only required if ICEFG= 1

Group PSTEMP only required if section PSTEMP

LGTMP is inactive and IFFCFG= 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

676
 Catalog for PERLND Module

4.7(1).5 Group SEDMNT

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time series computed by module section SEDMNT:

Land-segment-wide values:
DETS 1 1 * tons/ac tonnes/ha Storage of detached sediment
STCAP 1 1 * tons/ tonnes/ Sediment transport capacity
ac.ivld ha.ivld by surface runoff
WSSD 1 1 - tons/ tonnes/ Washoff of detached sediment
ac.ivld ha.ivld
SCRSD 1 1 - tons/ tonnes/ Scour of matrix (attached) soil
ac.ivld ha.ivld
SOSED 1 1 - tons/ tonnes/ Total removal of soil and sediment
ac.ivld ha.ivld
DET 1 1 - tons/ tonnes/ Quantity of sediment detached from
ac.ivld ha.ivld soil matrix by rainfall impact

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group EXTNL always required

PREC
SLSED optional

Group SNOW only required if section SNOW

RAINF is inactive and snow is considered
SNOCOV (CSNOFG= 1)

Group PWATER only required if section PWATER

SURO is inactive
SURS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

677
 Catalog for PERLND Module

4.7(1).6 Group PSTEMP

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section PSTEMP:

AIRTC 1 1 - Deg F Deg C Air temperature on the PLS

SLTMP 1 1 - Deg F Deg C Surface layer soil temperature
ULTMP 1 1 - Deg F Deg C Upper layer soil temperature
LGTMP 1 1 - Deg F Deg C Lower and groundwater layer
soil temperature

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group ATEMP only required if section ATEMP is

AIRTMP inactive
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.7(1).7 Group PWTGAS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section PWTGAS:

SOTMP 1 1 * Deg F Deg C Temperature of surface outflow

IOTMP 1 1 * Deg F Deg C Temperature of interflow outflow
AOTMP 1 1 * Deg F Deg C Temperature of active groundwater
outflow
SODOX 1 1 * mg/l mg/l DO concentration in surface outflow
SOCO2 1 1 * mg/l mg/l CO2 concentration in surface
outflow
IODOX 1 1 * mg/l mg/l DO concentration in interflow
outflow
IOCO2 1 1 * mg/l mg/l CO2 concentration in interflow
outflow
AODOX 1 1 * mg/l mg/l DO concentration in active
groundwater outflow
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

678
 Catalog for PERLND Module

(continued)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AOCO2 1 1 * mg/l mg/l CO2 concentration in active
groundwater outflow
SOHT 1 1 - BTU/ kcal/ Heat energy in surface outflow
ac.ivld ha.ivld (relative to freezing point)
IOHT 1 1 - BTU/ kcal/ Heat energy in interflow outflow
ac.ivld ha.ivld
AOHT 1 1 - BTU/ kcal/ Heat energy in active groundwater
ac.ivld ha.ivld outflow
POHT 1 1 - BTU/ kcal/ Heat energy in total outflow from
ac.ivld ha.ivld PLS
SODOXM 1 1 - lb/ kg/ Flux of DO in surface outflow
ac.ivld ha.ivld
SOCO2M 1 1 - lb/ kg/ Flux of CO2 in surface outflow
ac.ivld ha.ivld
IODOXM 1 1 - lb/ kg/ Flux of DO in interflow outflow
ac.ivld ha.ivld
IOCO2M 1 1 - lb/ kg/ Flux of CO2 in interflow outflow
ac.ivld ha.ivld
AODOXM 1 1 - lb/ kg/ Flux of DO in active groundwater
ac.ivld ha.ivld outflow
AOCO2M 1 1 - lb/ kg/ Flux of CO2 in active groundwater
ac.ivld ha.ivld outflow
PODOXM 1 1 - lb/ kg/ DO in total outflow from PLS
ac.ivld ha.ivld
POCO2M 1 1 - lb/ kg/ CO2 in total outflow from PLS
ac.ivld ha.ivld
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group SNOW only required if section SNOW is

WYIELD inactive and snow is considered
(CSNOFG= 1)

Group PWATER only required if section PWATER is

SURO inactive
IFWO
AGWO

Group PSTEMP only required if section PSTEMP

SLTMP is inactive
ULTMP
LGTMP
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

679
 Catalog for PERLND Module

4.7(1).8 Group PQUAL

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section PQUAL:

SQO NQOF 1 * qty/ac qty/ha Storage of QUALOF on the surface

PQADDR NQ 1 - qty/ qty/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition
ac.ivld ha.ivld of QUAL
PQADWT NQ 1 - qty/ qty/ Wet deposition of QUAL
ac.ivld ha.ivld
WASHQS NQSD 1 - qty/ qty/ Removal of QUALSD by association
ac.ivld ha.ivld with detached sediment washoff
SCRQS NQSD 1 - qty/ qty/ Removal of QUALSD by association
ac.ivld ha.ivld with scour of matrix soil
SOQS NQSD 1 - qty/ qty/ Total flux of QUALSD from surface
ac.ivld ha.ivld
SOQO NQOF 1 - qty/ qty/ Washoff of QUALOF from surface
ac.ivld ha.ivld
SOQUAL NQ 1 - qty/ qty/ Total outflow of QUAL from the
ac.ivld ha.ivld surface
IOQUAL NQIF 1 - qty/ qty/ Outflow of QUAL in interflow
ac.ivld ha.ivld (QUALIF)
AOQUAL NQGW 1 - qty/ qty/ Outflow of QUAL in active ground-
ac.ivld ha.ivld water outflow (QUALGW)
POQUAL NQ 1 - qty/ qty/ Total flux of QUAL from the PLS
ac.ivld ha.ivld
SOQOC NQOF 1 - qty/ft3 qty/l Concentration of QUALOF in surface
outflow
SOQC NQ 1 - qty/ft3 qty/l Concentration of QUAL (QUALSD+
QUALOF) in surface outflow
POQC NQ 1 - qty/ft3 qty/l Concentration of QUAL (total) in
total outflow from PLS

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group EXTNL
PQADFX only required if dry or total
atmospheric deposition is being
simulated
PQADCN only required if wet atmospheric
PREC deposition is being simulated

680
 Catalog for PERLND Module

Group PWATER only required if PWATER is inactive

SURO only required if one or more QUALs
are QUALOFs, or if SOQC is required
for one or more QUALs
IFWO only required if one or more QUALs
are QUALIFs
AGWO only required if one or more QUALs
are QUALGWs
PERO only required if POQC is required
for one or more QUALs

Group SEDMNT only required if section SEDMNT

WSSD is inactive and one or more QUALs
SCRSD are QUALSD's
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

681
 Catalog for PERLND Module

4.7(1).9 Group MSTLAY

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section MSTLAY:

MST 5 1 * lb/ac kg/ha Water in surface, upper principal,

upper auxiliary, lower, and
groundwater storages
FRAC 8 1 * /ivl /ivl Fractional fluxes through soil:
FSO,FSP,FII,FUP,FIO,FLP,FLDP,FAO

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group PWATER: only required if section PWATER

SURI,LZS,IGWI,AGWI,AGWS,AGWO, is inactive
SURS,SURO,INFIL,IFWI,UZI,UZS,
PERC,IFWS,IFWO

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

682
 Catalog for PERLND Module

4.7(1).10 Group PEST

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section PEST:

SPS 3 NPST * lb/ac kg/ha Amount of pesticide in

surface storage
UPS 3 NPST * lb/ac kg/ha Amount of pesticide in upper
principal storage
IPS NPST 1 * lb/ac kg/ha Amount of pesticide in upper
auxiliary (interflow) storage
LPS 3 NPST * lb/ac kg/ha Amount of pesticide in lower
layer storage
APS 3 NPST * lb/ac kg/ha Amount of pesticide in active
groundwater layer storage
TPS 3 NPST * lb/ac kg/ha Total amount of pesticide in the
soil
Note: SPS,UPS,LPS,APS and TPS give the storage of each pesticide by species. The
first subscript indicates the species: crystalline, adsorbed, or solution, The
second indicates the pesticide. For example, UPS(2,3) is the quantity of adsorbed
pesticide in the upper layer principal storage, for the 3rd pesticide. The second
subscript for IPS has a maximum value of one because only solution pesticide is
modeled in the upper layer auxiliary (interflow) layer.

TOTPST NPST 1 * lb/ac kg/ha Total amount of pesticide in the

soil (sum of all species).
PEADDR NPST 3 - lb/ kg/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition
ac.ivld ha.ivld of pesticide. The second subscript
indicates the species: crystalline,
adsorbed, or solution.
PEADWT NPST 3 - lb/ kg/ Wet deposition of pesticide form.
ac.ivld ha.ivld Subscripts as above.
SDPS 2 NPST - lb/ kg/ Outflow of sediment-associated
ac.ivld ha.ivld pesticide (SDPSY and SDPSA for each
pesticide)
TSPSS 5 NPST - lb/ kg/ Fluxes of solution pesticide for
ac.ivld ha.ivld the topsoil layers: SOPSS,SPPSS,
UPPSS,IIPSS,IOPSS
SSPSS 3 NPST - lb/ kg/ Fluxes of solution pesticide for
ac.ivld ha.ivld the subsoil layers: LPPSS,LDPPSS,
AOPSS

683
 Catalog for PERLND Module

SDEGPS NPST 1 - lb/ kg/ Amt. of degradation in surface layer

ac.ivld ha.ivld
UDEGPS NPST 1 - " " Amount of degradation in upper layer
LDEGPS NPST 1 - " " Amount of degradation in lower layer
ADEGPS NPST 1 - " " Amount of degradation in groundwater
TDEGPS NPST 1 - " " Total amount of degradation in soil
SOSDPS NPST 1 - " " Total outflow of sediment-associated
pesticide (SDPSY + SDPSA)
POPST NPST 1 - " " Total outflow of solution pesticide
from the PLS
TOPST NPST 1 - " " Total outflow of pesticide from
the PLS

Note: The subscript with maximum value NPST selects the particular pesticide.
For example, POPST(2,1) is the outflow from the PLS of the second
pesticide (in solution).

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group EXTNL
PEADFX only required if dry or total
atmospheric deposition is being
simulated
PEADCN only required if wet atmospheric
PREC deposition is being simulated

Group SEDMNT only required if section SEDMNT

SOSED is inactive

Group PSTEMP only required if section PSTEMP

SLTMP is inactive and ADOPFG = 1
ULTMP
LGTMP

Group MSTLAY only required if section MSTLAY

MST is inactive
FRAC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

684
 Catalog for PERLND Module

4.7(1).11 Group NITR

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time series computed by module section NITR:

AGPLTN 1 1 * lb/ac kg/ha N in above-ground plant storage

LITTRN 1 1 * " " N in litter storage

The above time series are available only if ALPNFG= 1

SN 8 1 * lb/ac kg/ha N in surface layer storage

UN 8 1 * " " N in upper layer principal storage
LN 8 1 * " " N in lower layer storage
AN 8 1 * " " N in groundwater layer storage
TN 8 1 * " " Total N in soil, by species

In the above, the first subscript selects the species of N: 1 means particulate
labile organic N, 2 means adsorbed ammonium, 3 means solution ammonium, 4 means
nitrate, 5 means plant N, 6 means solution labile organic N, 7 means particulate
refractory organic N, 8 means solution refractory organic N

IN 4 1 * lb/ac kg/ha N in upper layer auxiliary

(interflow) storage
In the above, the first subscript selects the species of N: 1 means solution
ammonium, 2 means nitrate, 3 means solution labile organic N, 4 means solution
refractory organic N (only soluble species are modelled in this storage)

TOTNIT 1 1 * lb/ac kg/ha Total N stored in the PLS (all

species)

NDFCT 5 1 * lb/ac kg/ac Deficit in yield-based plant uptake

of N from the each soil layer:
1-surface, 2-upper, 3-lower,
4-active groundwater, 5-total

NUPTG 4 1 - lb/ kg/ Yield-based plant uptake target for

ac.ivld ha.ivld N from each soil layer: 1-surface,
2-upper, 3-lower, 4-active groundwater

685
 Catalog for PERLND Module

NIADDR 3 2 - lb/ kg/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition

ac.ivld ha.ivld of nitrogen. The first subscript
indicates the species: NO3, NH3,
organic N; the second subscript
indicates the affected soil layer:
surface or upper.
NIADWT 3 2 - " " Wet atmospheric deposition of
nitrogen. Subscripts as above.

SEDN 3 1 - " " Outflows of sediment-associated N

In the above, the first subscript selects the flux: 1 means labile organic N
removal, 2 means adsorbed ammonium removal, 3 means refractory organic N removal.

SOSEDN 1 1 - lb/ kg/ Total outflow of sediment-associated

ac.ivld ha.ivld N (organic N + adsorbed ammonium)

TSAMS 5 1 - " " Fluxes of solution ammonium in

the topsoil
TSNO3 5 1 - " " Fluxes of nitrate in the topsoil
TSSLN 5 1 - " " Fluxes of solution labile organic N
in the topsoil
TSSRN 5 1 - " " Fluxes of solution refractory
organic N in the topsoil

In the above, the first subscript selects the flux:

1 means outflow with surface water outflow
2 means percolation from surface to upper layer principal storage
3 means percolation from upper layer principal storage to lower layer storage
4 means flow from upper layer principal to upper layer auxiliary (interflow)
storage
5 means outflow from PLS with water from upper layer auxiliary (interflow)
storage

SSAMS 3 1 - lb/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Fluxes of solution ammonium in

the subsoil
SSNO3 3 1 - " " Fluxes of nitrate in the subsoil
SSSLN 3 1 - " " Fluxes of solution labile organic
N in the subsoil
SSSRN 3 1 - " " Fluxes of solution refractory
organic N in the subsoil

In the above, the first subscript selects the flux:

1 means percolation from the lower layer to the active groundwater storage
2 means deep percolation, from the lower layer to inactive groundwater
3 means outflow from the PLS with water from the active groundwater storage

686
 Catalog for PERLND Module

PONO3 1 1 - lb/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Total outflow of NO3 from the PLS

PONH4 1 1 - " " Total outflow of NH4 from the PLS
POORN 1 1 - " " Total outflow of ORGN from the PLS
PONITR 1 1 - " " Total outflow of N (NO3+NH4+ORGN)
from the PLS.

TDENIF 1 1 - " " Total denitrification in the PLS

NFIXFX 5 1 - " " N fixation flux to the PLS

AMVOL 5 1 - " " Ammonia volatilization from the PLS
In the above, the first subscript selects soil layer: 1-surface, 2-upper, 3-lower,
4-active groundwater, 5-total

Input time series required to compute the above:

Same as for section PEST, except NIADFX and NIADCN are required for atmospheric
deposition. An input time series need only be supplied if section PEST and the
section which computes it (SEDMNT, PSTEMP or MSTLAY) are inactive.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

687
 Catalog for PERLND Module

4.7(1).12 Group PHOS

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Pame values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section PH0S:

SP 4 1 * lb/ac kg/ha P in surface layer storage

UP 4 1 * " " P in upper layer principal storage
LP 4 1 * " " P in lower layer storage
AP 4 1 * " " P in groundwater layer storage
TP 4 1 * " " Total P in soil, by species

In the above, the first subscript selects the species of P:

1 means organic P, 2 means adsorbed phosphate, 3 means solution phosphate, 4 means
plant P derived from this layer

IP 1 1 * lb/ac kg/ha P in upper layer auxiliary storage

(interflow) (solution PO4)
(only soluble species are modeled in this storage)

TOTPHO 1 1 * lb/ac kg/ha Total P stored in the PLS (all

species)

SPDFC 1 1 * lb/ac kg/ac Deficit in yield-based plant uptake

of P from the surface soil layer

PDFCT 5 1 * lb/ac kg/ac Deficit in yield-based plant uptake

of P from the each soil layer:
1-surface, 2-upper, 3-lower,
4-active groundwater, 5-total

PUPTG 4 1 - lb/ kg/ Yield-based plant uptake target for

ac.ivld ha.ivld P from each soil layer: 1-surface,
2-upper, 3-lower, 4-active groundwater

PHADDR 2 2 - lb/ kg/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition

ac.ivld ha.ivld of phosphorus. The first subscript
indicates the species: PO4 or
organic P; the second subscript
indicates the affected soil layer:
surface or upper.
PHADWT 2 2 - lb/ kg/ Wet atmospheric deposition of
ac.ivld ha.ivld phosphorus. Subscripts as above.

688
 Catalog for PERLND Module

SEDP 2 1 - lb/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Outflows of sediment-associated P

In the above, the first subscript selects the flux: 1 means organic P removal,
2 means adsorbed phosphate removal

SOSEDP 1 1 - lb/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Total outflow of sediment-associated

P (organic P + adsorbed phosphate)

TSP4S 5 1 - lb/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Fluxes of solution phosphate in the

in the topsoil.

In the above, the first subscript selects the flux:

1 means outflow with surface water outflow
2 means percolation from surface to upper layer principal storage
3 means percolation from upper layer principal storage to lower layer storage
4 means flow from upper layer principal to upper layer auxiliary (interflow)
storage
5 means outflow from PLS with water from upper layer auxiliary (interflow) storage

SSP4S 3 1 - lb/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Fluxes of solution phosphate

in the subsoil.

In the above, the first subscript selects the flux:

1 means percolation from the lower layer to the active groundwater storage
2 means deep percolation, from the lower layer to inactive groundwater
3 means outflow from the PLS with water from the active groundwater storage

POPHOS 1 1 - lb/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Total outflow of P from the PLS.

Input time series required to compute the above:

Same as for section PEST, except PHADFX and PHADCN are required for atmospheric
deposition. An input time series need only be supplied if sections PEST and NITR
and the module section which computes it (SEDMNT, PSTEMP or MSTLAY) are inactive.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

689
 Catalog for PERLND Module

4.7(1).13 Group TRACER

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section TRACER:

STRSU 1 1 * lb/ac kg/ha Tracer in surface layer storage

UTRSU 1 1 * " " Tracer in upper principal storage
ITRSU 1 1 * " " Tracer in upper auxiliary storage
LTRSU 1 1 * " " Tracer in lower layer storage
ATRSU 1 1 * " " Tracer in groundwater layer storage
TRSU 1 1 * " " Total tracer stored in the PLS
TRADDR 2 1 - lb/ kg/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition
ac.ivld ha.ivld of tracer. The subscript indicates
the soil layer: surface or upper.
TRADWT 2 1 - " " Wet atmospheric deposition of
tracer. Subscripts as above.
TSTRS 5 1 - lb/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Fluxes of tracer in topsoil

In the above, the first subscript indicates the flux:

1 means outflow with surface water outflow
2 means percolation from surface to upper layer principal storage
3 means percolation from upper layer principal to lower layer storage
4 means flow from upper principal to upper auxiliary (interflow) storage
5 means outflow from the PLS from upper layer transitory (interflow) storage

SSTRS 3 1 - lb/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Fluxes of tracer in subsoil

In the above, the first subscript indicates the flux:

1 means percolation from lower layer to active groundwater storage
2 means deep percolation, from lower layer to inactive groundwater
3 means outflow from the PLS from the active groundwater storage

POTRS 1 1 - lb/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Total outflow of tracer from the PLS

690
 Catalog for PERLND Module

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group EXTNL
TRADFX only required if dry or total
atmospheric deposition is being
simulated
TRADCN only required if wet atmospheric
PREC deposition is being simulated

Group MSTLAY only required if MSTLAY, PEST, NITR

MST and PHOS are all inactive; else
FRAC these time series will already
have been supplied
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

691
 Catalog for IMPLND Module

4.7(2) Catalog for IMPLND module

The time series groups associated with this application module are shown in Figure
4.7(2)-1. The members contained within each group are documented in the tables
which follow.

4.7(2).1 Group EXTNL

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series always external (input only) to module IMPLND:

GATMP 1 1 - Deg F Deg C Measured air temperature

PREC 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Measured precipitation
DTMPG 1 1 - Deg F Deg C Measured dewpoint temperature
WINMOV 1 1 - mi/ivld km/ivld Measured wind movement
SOLRAD 1 1 - Ly/ivld Ly/ivld Measured solar radiation
CLOUD 1 1 - tenths tenths Cloud cover (range: 0 - 10)
PETINP 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Input potential E-T
SURLI 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Surface lateral inflow
SLSLD 1 1 - tons/ tonnes/ Lateral input of solids
ac.ivld ha.ivld
IQADFX 10 1 - qty/ qty/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition
ac.ivld ha.ivld of QUALOF
IQADCN 10 1 - qty/ft3 qty/l Concentration of QUALOF in precip
for wet atmospheric deposition
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.7(2).2 Group ATEMP

Identical to group ATEMP in module PERLND. See Section 4.7(1).2 for documentation.

4.7(2).3 Group SNOW

Identical to group SNOW in module PERLND. See Section 4.7(1).3 for documentation.

692
 Catalog for IMPLND Module

Figure 4.7(2)-1 Groups of time series associated with the IMPLND Module

693
 Catalog for IMPLND Module

4.7(2).4 Group IWATER

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section IWATER:

IMPS 1 1 * in mm Total water stored in the ILS

RETS 1 1 * in mm Retention storage
SURS 1 1 * in mm Surface (overland flow) storage
SURO 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Surface outflow
PET 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Potential E-T, adjusted for snow
cover and air temperature
IMPEV 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Total simulated E-T
SURI 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Surface inflow (including any
lateral inflow if RTLIFG=1)

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group EXTNL
PETINP
PREC required if snow not considered
(CSNOFG= 0)
SURLI optional

Group ATEMP
AIRTMP only required if section ATEMP
is inactive and CSNOFG= 1

Group SNOW only required if section SNOW is

RAINF inactive and snow is considered
SNOCOV (CSNOFG= 1)
WYIELD

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

694
 Catalog for IMPLND Module

4.7(2).5 Group SOLIDS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section SOLIDS:

SLDS 1 1 * tons/ac tonnes/ha Storage of solids on surface

SOSLD 1 1 - tons/ tonnes/ Washoff of solids from surface
ac.ivld ha.ivld

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group EXTNL always required

PREC
SLSLD optional

Group IWATER only required if section IWATER

SURO is inactive
SURS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

695
 Catalog for IMPLND Module

4.7(2).6 Group IWTGAS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section IWTGAS:

SOTMP 1 1 * Deg F Deg C Temperature of surface outflow

SODOX 1 1 * mg/l mg/l DO concentration in surface outflow
SOCO2 1 1 * mg/l mg/l CO2 concentration in surface
outflow
SOHT 1 1 - BTU/ kcal/ Heat energy in surface outflow
ac.ivld ha.ivld (relative to freezing point)
SODOXM 1 1 - lb/ kg/ Flux of DO in surface outflow
ac.ivld ha.ivld
SOCO2M 1 1 - lb/ kg/ Flux of CO2 in surface outflow
ac.ivld ha.ivld

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group ATEMP only required if section ATEMP

AIRTMP is inactive

Group SNOW only required if section SNOW

WYIELD is inactive and snow is considered
(CSNOFG= 1)

Group IWATER only required if section IWATER

SURO is inactive

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

696
 Catalog for IMPLND Module

4.7(2).7 Group IQUAL

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section IQUAL:

SQO NQOF 1 * qty/ac qty/ha Storage of QUALOF on the surface

IQADDR NQ 1 - qty/ qty/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition
ac.ivld ha.ivld of QUAL
IQADWT NQ 1 - qty/ qty/ Wet deposition of QUAL
ac.ivld ha.ivld
SOQS NQSD 1 - qty/ qty/ Total flux of QUALSD from surface
ac.ivld ha.ivld
SOQO NQOF 1 - qty/ qty/ Washoff of QUALOF from surface
ac.ivld ha.ivld
SOQUAL NQ 1 - qty/ qty/ Total outflow of QUAL from the
ac.ivld ha.ivld surface
SOQOC NQOF 1 - qty/ft3 qty/l Concentration of QUALOF in surface
outflow
SOQC NQ 1 - qty/ft3 qty/l Concentration of QUAL in surface
outflow (QUALSD+QUALOF)

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group EXTNL
IQADFX only required if dry or total
atmospheric deposition is being
simulated
IQADCN only required if wet atmospheric
PREC deposition is being simulated

Group IWATER only required if section IWATER

is inactive
SURO only required if one or more QUALs
are QUALOFs, or if SOQC is required
for one or more QUALs

Group SOLIDS only required if section SOLIDS

SOSLD is inactive and one or more QUALs
are QUALSDs
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

697
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3) Catalog for RCHRES module

The time series groups associated with this application module are shown in Figure
4.7(3)-1.

The members contained within each group are documented in the following tables.

Note: exit-specific, output time series are computed (available) only when NEXITS
is greater than 1.

4.7(3).1 Group EXTNL

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series external to module RCHRES (input only):

PREC 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Precip on surface of the RCHRES

(requires AUX1FG = 1)
POTEV 1 1 - in/ivld mm/ivld Potential evaporation from the
surface (requires AUX1FG = 1)
COLIND NEXITS 1 - none none Time series indicating which
(pair of) columns in RCHTAB are
used to evaluate f(VOL) component
of outflow demand
OUTDGT NEXITS 1 - ft3/s m3/s g(t) component of outflow demand if
no CATEGORY block is present.
COTDGT NEXITS CAT - ft3/s m3/s g(t) component of outflow demand by
category if CATEGORY block is present
IVOL 1 1 - ac.ft/ Mm3/ Inflow to the RCHRES if no CATEGORY
ivld ivld block is present (Mm3 = 10**6 m3)
CIVOL CAT 1 - ac.ft/ Mm3/ Inflow of water belonging to each
ivld ivld category if CATEGORY block is present
ICON NCONS 1 - qty/ivld qty/ivld Inflow of conservative constituents
SOLRAD 1 1 - Ly/ivld Ly/ivld Solar radiation
CLOUD 1 1 - tenths tenths Cloud cover (range 0 - 10)
DEWTMP 1 1 - DegF DegC Dewpoint
GATMP 1 1 - DegF DegC Air temperature at met. station
WIND 1 1 - miles/ km/ Wind movement
ivld ivld

698
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

TGRND 1 1 - DegF DegC Temperature of ground beneath

stream bed
PHVAL 1 1 - pH (used in Section GQUAL)
ROC 1 1 - moles/l moles/l Free radical oxygen concentration
(used in Section GQUAL)
BIO NGQUAL 1 - mg(bio)/l mg(bio)/l Biomass active in biodegradation
(used in Section GQUAL)
COADFX NCONS 1 - qty/ qty/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition
ac/ivld ha/ivld of conservative
COADCN NCONS 1 - conc conc Concentration of conservative in
rain for wet atmospheric
deposition
GQADFX NGQUAL 1 - qty/ qty/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition
ac/ivld ha/ivld of qual
GQADCN NGQUAL 1 - concu/l concu/l Concentration of qual in rain for
for wet atmospheric deposition
NUADFX 3 1 - lb/ kg/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition
ac.ivld ha.ivld of inorganic nutrient. Subscript
indicates: NO3, NH3, PO4.
NUADCN 3 1 - mg/l mg/l Concentration of nutrient in rain
for wet atmospheric deposition
PLADFX 3 1 - lb/ kg/ Dry or total atmospheric deposition
ac/ivld ha/ivld of organics. Subscript indicates:
nitrogen, phosphorus, carbon
PLADCN 3 1 - mg/l mg/l Concentration of organic in rain
for wet atmospheric deposition.
Subscript same as above.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Note: CAT = one of the two-character ID tags from the CATEGORY block

699
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

Figure 4.7(3)-1 Groups of time series associated with the RCHRES Module

700
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3).2 Group HYDR

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time series computed by module section HYDR:

VOL 1 1 * ac.ft Mm3 Volume of water in the RCHRES

AUX1FG must be 1 for next 5 members to be computed:
DEP 1 1 * ft m Depth at specified location
STAGE 1 1 * ft m Stage (DEP+STCOR)
AVDEP 1 1 * ft m Average depth (volume/surface area)
TWID 1 1 * ft m Mean topwidth (surface area/length)
HRAD 1 1 * ft m Hydraulic radius
SAREA 1 1 * ac ha Surface area
AUX2FG must be 1 for next 2 members to be computed:
AVVEL 1 1 * ft/s m/s Average velocity (RO/VOL)
AVSECT 1 1 * ft2 m2 Average cross-sectional area of
RCHRES (VOL/length)
AUX3FG must be 1 for next 2 members to be computed:
USTAR 1 1 * ft/s m/s Shear velocity
TAU 1 1 * lb/ft2 kg/m2 Bed shear stress
RO 1 1 * ft3/s m3/s Total rate of outflow from RCHRES
CRO CAT 1 * ft3/s m3/s Rates of outflow of each category
O NEXITS 1 * ft3/s m3/s Rates of outflow through individual
exits (available only if NEXITS > 1)
CO NEXITS CAT * ft3/s m3/s Rates of outflow through individual
exits of each category
CDFVOL NEXITS CAT * ac.ft Mm3 Current cumulative deficit of each
category demand by exit
PRSUPY 1 1 - ac.ft/ Mm3/ Volume of water contributed by
ivld ivld precipitation on surface
VOLEV 1 1 - ac.ft/ Mm3/ Volume of water lost by evaporation
ivld ivld
ROVOL 1 1 - ac.ft/ Mm3/ Total volume of outflow from RCHRES
ivld ivld
CROVOL CAT 1 - ac.ft/ Mm3/ Total volume of outflow from RCHRES
ivld ivld of each category
OVOL NEXITS 1 - ac.ft/ Mm3/ Volume of outflow through individual
ivld ivld exits (available only if NEXITS > 1)
COVOL NEXITS CAT - ac.ft/ Mm3/ Volume of outflow through individual
ivld ivld exits of each category
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes: 1. Mm3 = 10**6 m3
2. Exit-specific time series are computed only if NEXITS > 1
3. CAT = must be one of the two-character tags from the CATEGORY block
rather than an integer

701
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group EXTNL
IVOL (also in group INFLOW) optional - not used if CATEGORY
block is present
CIVOL (also in group INFLOW) optional - used only if CATEGORY
block is present
PREC optional
POTEV optional
COLIND required only if ODFVFG is negative
for one or more outflow demands
OUTDGT required only if ODGTFG is >0 for
one or more outflow demands
COTDGT required only if ODGTFG is >0 for
one or more outflow demands
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

If there are any active categories, then the total inflow to a reach is the sum of
all category inflows. These inflows are input as time series CIVOL, and IVOL is
calculated (by the program) as their sum instead of being input.

702
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3).3 Group ADCALC

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time series computed by module section ADCALC:

None of the computed time series are outputtable; they are passed internally to any
active "quality" sections of the RCHRES module

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group HYDR only required if section HYDR

VOL is inactive
O
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

703
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3).4 Group CONS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section CONS:

CON NCONS 1 * concid concid Concentration of conservative

constituents
COADDR NCONS 1 - qty/ivld qty/ivld Dry or total atmospheric deposition
of conservative
COADWT NCONS 1 - qty/ivld qty/ivld Wet atmospheric deposition of
conservative
ROCON NCONS 1 - qty/ivld qty/ivld Total outflow of conservatives
OCON NEXITS NCONS - qty/ivld qty/ivld Outflow of conservatives through
individual exits; available if
NEXITS > 1

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group EXTNL
COADFX only required if dry or total
atmospheric deposition is being
simulated
COADCN only required if wet atmospheric
PREC deposition is being simulated
ICON (also in group INFLOW) optional

Group HYDR
SAREA only required if atmospheric
deposition is being simulated
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

704
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3).5 Group HTRCH

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section HTRCH:

TW 1 1 * DegF DegC Simulated water temperature

AIRTMP 1 1 * DegF DegC Air temperature, adjusted for elev.
difference between gage and RCHRES
HTEXCH 1 1 - BTU/ivld kcal/ivld Net heat exchanged with atmosphere
and stream bed
ROHEAT 1 1 - " " Total outflow of thermal energy
through active exits
OHEAT NEXITS 1 - " " Outflow of thermal energy through
individual exits
HTCF4 7 1 - BTU/ft2/ kcal/m2/ Components of heat exchange per
ivld ivld unit area of surface: 1) total,
2) solar radiation, 3) longwave
radiation, 4) evaporation, 5)
conduction, 6) percipitation,
7) bed exchange
(positive = gain of heat).

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group INFLOW optional

IHEAT optional

Group EXTNL always required

SOLRAD
PREC optional
CLOUD
DEWTMP
GATMP
WIND

Group HYDR only required if section HYDR

AVDEP is inactive

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

705
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3).6 Group SEDTRN

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section SEDTRN

SSED 4 1 * mg/l mg/l Suspended sediment concentrations

RSED 10 1 * ton tonne Sediment storages
BEDDEP 1 1 * ft m Bed depth (thickness)
DEPSCR 4 1 - ton/ivld tonne/ivld Deposition (positive) or
scour (negative)
ROSED 4 1 - " " Total outflows of sediment
from the RCHRES
OSED NEXITS 4 - " " Outflows of sediment through
individual exits

Note: In the above, the subscript with maximum value =4 selects the sediment
fraction - 1 for sand, 2 for silt, 3 for clay, and 4 for the sum of sand silt and
clay. The subscript with maximum value =10 selects the following: 1 suspended
sand, 2 suspended silt, 3 suspended clay, 4 bed sand, 5 bed silt 6 bed clay, 7
total sand, 8 total silt, 9 total clay, and 10 total of 7,8,9.

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group INFLOW
ISED(*) inflows of sand, silt, and clay
to the RCHRES; optional

Group HYDR only required if Section HYDR is

TAU inactive
AVDEP
AVVEL
RO ---
HRAD | only required if SANDFG = 1 or 2
TWID ---

Group HTRCH only required if Section HTRCH is

TW inactive and SANDFG = 1 or 2

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

706
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3).7 Group GQUAL

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section GQUAL:

DQAL NGQUAL 1 * concu/l concu/l Dissolved concentration of qual.

SQAL 6 NGQUAL * concu/mg concu/mg Concentration of qual on sediment.
First subscript selects:
1 susp sand 2 susp silt 3 susp clay
4 bed sand 5 bed silt 6 bed clay
RDQAL NGQUAL 1 * qty qty Total storage of qual in dissolved
form
RSQAL 12 NGQUAL * qty qty Storage of sediment-associated qual.
First subscript selects:
1 susp sand 2 susp silt 3 susp clay
4 susp total 5 bed sand 6 bed silt
7 bed clay 8 bed total
9 total on sand 10 total on silt
11 total on clay 12 grand total
RRQAL NGQUAL 1 * qty qty Total storage of qual in the RCHRES
PDQAL NGQUAL 1 - qty/ivld qty/ivld Input to this qual in this RCHRES,
from decay of parent quals
GQADDR NGQUAL 1 - qty/ivld qty/ivld Dry or total atmospheric deposition
of qual
GQADWT NGQUAL 1 - qty/ivld qty/ivld Wet atmospheric deposition of qual
DDQAL 7 NGQUAL - qty/ivld qty/ivld Decay of dissolved qual. First
subscript selects decay path:
1 hydrolysis 2 oxidation
3 photolysis 4 volatilization
5 biodegradation 6 general (other)
7 total of 1-6 .
RODQAL NGQUAL 1 - qty/ivld qty/ivld Total outflow of dissolved qual
from the RCHRES
DSQAL 4 NGQUAL - qty/ivld qty/ivld Deposition/scour of qual. First
subscript selects carrier:
1 sand 2 silt 3 clay 4 total
ROSQAL 4 NGQUAL - qty/ivld qty/ivld Total outflow of sediment-associated
qual from RCHRES.
First subscript selects carrier:
1 sand 2 silt 3 clay 4 total
SQDEC 7 NGQUAL qty/ivld qty/ivld Decay of sediment-associated qual
on: 1 susp sand 2 susp silt
3 susp clay 4 bed sand
5 bed silt 6 bed clay 7 total

707
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

ADQAL 7 NGQUAL - qty/ivld qty/ivld

Adsorption/desorption between
dissolved state and: 1 susp sand
2 susp silt 3 susp clay 4 bed sand
5 bed silt 6 bed clay 7 total
ODQAL NEXITS NGQUAL- qty/ivld qty/ivld Outflow of dissolved qual
through individual exits.
OSQAL NEXITS NGQ3 - qty/ivld qty/ivld Outflows of sediment-associated
qual through individual exits.
Second subscript selects:
1 sand, first qual
2 silt, first qual
3 clay, first qual (NGQ3=
4 sand, second qual NGQUAL*3)
etc.
Input time series required to compute the above:

Group INFLOW
IDQAL optional
ISQAL(*) optional

Group EXTNL
GQADFX only required if dry or total
atmospheric deposition is being
simulated
GQADCN only required if wet atmospheric
PREC deposition is being simulated

PHVAL if there is hydrolysis, PHFLAG=1,

and Section PHCARB is inactive
ROC if there is free radical oxidation,
and ROXFG=1
BIO(I) if qual number I undergoes
biodegradation and GQPM2(7,I)=1
CLOUD if there is photolysis, and CLDFG=1
WIND if there is volatilization and water
body is a lake (LKFG=1)

Group HYDR only required if Section HYDR

is inactive
AVDEP See below
AVVEL if volatilization is on and water
body is a flowing stream (LKFG=0)
SAREA only required if atmospheric
deposition is being simulated

Group HTRCH only required if Section HTRCH

TW inactive and TEMPFG=1

Group PLANK only required if Section PLANK is

inactive or PHYFG=0

708
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

PHYTO if there is photolysis and

PHYTFG=1

Group SEDTRN only required if Section SEDTRN is

inactive
SSED(4) if there is photolysis and SDFG=1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Note: AVDEP is required if Section HYDR is inactive and:

1. There is photolysis
or 2. There is volatilization and
a. The water body is a lake
or b. The water body is a free-flowing stream and REAMFG>1

709
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3).8.1 Group OXRX

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section OXRX:

DOX 1 1 * mg/l mg/l DO concentration

BOD 1 1 * mg/l mg/l BOD concentration
SATDO 1 1 * mg/l mg/l Saturation DO concentration

OXCF1 2 1 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Total outflows of DO (OXCF1(1,1))

and BOD (OXCF1(2,1)) from the RCHRES

OXCF2 NEXITS 2 - lb/ivld kg/ivldOutflows of DO and BOD through

individual exits
In the above, the first subscript selects the exit. The second selects the
constituent: 1 means DO, 2 means BOD.

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group INFLOW
IDOX optional
IBOD optional

Group EXTNL
WIND only needed if LKFG=1 (lake)

Group HYDR only required if section HYDR

AVDEP is inactive
AVDEP

Group HTRCH only required if section HTRCH

TW is inactive

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

710
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3).8.2 Group NUTRX

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section NUTRX:

DNUST 6 1 * mg/l mg/l Dissolved nutrient concentrations;

Subscript 1: 1=NO3, 2=TAM, 3=NO2,
4=PO4, 5=NH4+, 6=NH3.
SNH4 3 1 * mg/kg mg/kg Particulate NH4-N concentrations;
Subscript 1: 1=sand, 2=silt, 3=clay
SPO4 3 1 * mg/kg mg/kg Particulate PO4-P concentrations;
Subscript 1: 1=sand, 2=silt, 3=clay
DNUST2 6 1 * lbs kg Dissolved nutrient storages; same
subscript values as DNUST
RSNH4 12 1 * lbs kg Particulate NH4-N storages; 1-3=
suspended sand, silt, clay, 4=total
suspended, 5-7=bed sand, silt, clay,
8=total bed, 9-11=total sand, total
silt, total clay, 12=grand total
RSPO4 12 1 * lbs kg Particulate PO4-P storages; same
subscript values as RSNH4
NUST 4 1 * lbs kg Total nutrient storages in RCHRES,
(dissolved + particulate);
Subscript 1: 1=NO3,2=TAM,3=NO2,4=PO4
NUADDR 3 1 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Dry or total atmospheric deposition
of nutrient; Subscript 1: 1=NO3,
2=TAM, 3=PO4
NUADWT 3 1 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Wet atmospheric deposition of
nutrient; Subscript same as NUADDR
NUCF1 4 1 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Total outflow of dissolved nutrient;
Same subscript values as NUST
NUCF2 4 2 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Total outflow of particulate NH4 and
PO4; Subscript 1: 1=(on) sand,
2=silt, 3=clay, 4=total;
Subscript 2: 1 = NH4, 2 = PO4
NUCF3 4 2 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Scour/deposition fluxes of
particulate NH4 and PO4;
+ = scour, - = deposition;
same subscript values as NUCF2

711
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

NUCF4 6 1 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Process fluxes for NO3;

Subscript 1: 1=nitrification,
2=denitrification, 3=BOD decay,
4=phytoplankton growth/respir.,
5=zooplankton death/respir.,
6=benthic algae growth/respir.
NUCF5 7 1 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Process fluxes for TAM;
Subscript 1: 1=nitrification,
2=volatilization, 3=benthal release,
4=BOD decay,
5=phytoplankton growth/respir.,
6=zooplankton death/respir.,
7=benthic algae growth/respir.
NUCF6 1 1 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Nitrification flux for NO2;
(net gain (+) or loss (-) of NO2)
NUCF7 5 1 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Process fluxes for PO4; Subscript 1:
1=benthal release, 2=BOD decay,
3=phytoplankton growth/respir.,
4=zooplankton death/respir.,
5=benthic algae growth/respir.
NUCF8 4 2 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Adsorption (+) or desorption (-) of
NH4 and PO4; Subscript 1: 1=sand,
2=silt, 3=clay;
Subscript 2: 1=NH4, 2=PO4
NUCF9 5 4 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Outflow of dissolved nutrients
through individual exits;
Subscript 1 selects exit,
Subscript 2: same as NUCF1
OSNH4 5 3 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Outflows of particulate NH4;
Subscript 1 selects exit,
Subscript 2: 1=sand, 2=silt, 3=clay
OSPO4 5 3 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Outflows of particulate PO4-P;
Subscript values same as OSNH4

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group INFLOW
INO3, ITAM, INO2, all optional
IPO4, ISNH4,ISPO4

Group EXTNL
NUADFX only required if dry or total
atmospheric deposition is being
simulated
NUADCN only required if wet atmospheric
PREC deposition is being simulated

Group HYDR
SAREA only required if atmospheric
deposition is being simulated

712
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

Group HTRCH only required if section HTRCH

TW is inactive

Group SEDTRN only required if Section SEDTRN is

RSED, SSED, OSED, inactive and if particulate NH4 or
ROSED, DEPSCR PO4 is simulated

NOTE: Ammonia, nitrite and ortho-phosphate may, or may not, be simulated, depending
on the values the user assigns to TAMFG, NO2FG and PO4FG. If a constituent is not
simulated, those time series associated with it in this list should be ignored.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

713
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3).8.3 Group PLANK

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section PLANK:

PKST3 7 1 * mg/l mg/l A group of state variables

In the above, the first subscript selects the state variable:
1 for dead refractory organic N (ORN)
2 for dead refractory organic P (ORP)
3 for dead refractory organic C (ORC)
4 for total organic N (TORN)
5 for total organic P (TORP)
6 for total organic C (TORC)
7 for potential BOD (POTBOD)

PHYTO 1 1 * mg/l mg/l Phytoplankton concentration

ZOO 1 1 * organism/l organism/l Zooplankton population
BENAL 1 1 * mg/m2 mg/m2 Benthic algae
PHYCLA 1 1 * ug/l ug/l Phytoplankton as chlorophyll a
BALCLA 1 1 * ug/m2 ug/m2 Benthic algae as chlorophyll a

PLADDR 3 1 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Dry or total atmospheric deposition

of organics
PLADWT 3 1 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Wet atmospheric deposition of
organics
In the above, the first subscript selects the constituent:
1 for ORN, 2 for ORP, 3 for ORC

PKCF1 5 1 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Total outflows from the RCHRES

In the above, the first subscript selects the constituent:
1 for phytoplankton, 2 for zooplankton, 3 for ORN, 4 for ORP, 5 for ORC

PKCF2 NEXITS 5 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Outflows through individual exits

In the above, the first subscript selects the exit, the second selects the
constituent -- same code as for PKCF1.

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group INFLOW
IPHYTO, IZOO, IORN, all are optional
IORP, IORC

714
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

Group EXTNL
SOLRAD required
PLADFX only required if dry or total
atmospheric deposition is being
simulated
PLADCN only required if wet atmospheric
PREC deposition is being simulated

Group HYDR
SAREA only required if atmospheric
deposition is being simulated

Group HTRCH only required if section HTRCH

TW is inactive

Group SEDTRN only required if section SEDTRN

SSED(2) is inactive
SSED(3)

NOTE: Phytoplankton, zooplankton and benthic algae may, or may not, be simulated,
depending on the values the user assigns to PHYFG, ZOOFG and BALFG. If a
constituent is not simulated, those time series associated with it in this list
should be ignored.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

715
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3).8.4 Group PHCARB

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series computed by module section PHCARB:

PHST 3 1 * see below State variables

In the above, the first subscript selects the state variable:
1 for total inorganic carbon (TIC) -- units mg/l
2 for carbon dioxide (CO2) -- units mg/l
3 for pH

PHCF1 2 1 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Total outflows of TIC and CO2

In the above, the first subscript selects the constituent:
1 for TIC, 2 for CO2

PHCF2 NEXITS 2 - lb/ivld kg/ivld Outflows of TIC and CO2 through

individual exits
In the above, the first subscript selects the exit and the second the
constituent -- same code as for PHCF1

Input time series required to compute the above:

Group INFLOW
ITIC optional
ICO2 optional

Group CONS only required if section CONS is

inactive
CON(ALKCON) concentration units must be mg/l as
CaCO3

Group HTRCH only required if section HTRCH

TW is inactive

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

716
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3).10 Groups INFLOW, ROFLOW and OFLOW

The members in these groups represent the total inflow, total outflow and outflow
through individual RCHRES exits of every simulated constituent. These groups were
included in the catalog to make it easier for users to specify the linkages
representing time series passed from one RCHRES to another. For example, assume
the RCHRES's in a run have sections HYDR, HTRCH and OXRX active, and the NETWORK
Block contains:

********************************************************************************
NETWORK
<-Volume-> <-Grp> <-Member-><--Mult-->Tran <-Target vols> <-Grp> <-Member-> ***
<Name> # <Name> # #<-factor->strg <Name> # # <Name> # # ***

RCHRES 1 ROFLOW RCHRES 2 INFLOW

RCHRES 2 OFLOW 2 RCHRES 3 INFLOW
********************************************************************************

These entries mean that the entire outflow from RCHRES 1 goes to RCHRES 2, and that
the outflow through exit 2 of RCHRES 2 goes to RCHRES 3. Because the "member name"
fields have been left blank, HSPF will automatically expand the above entries,
generating an entry for each member which is active in this run. In this case,
there will be 4 generated entries because 4 constituents are being simulated
(water, heat, DO and BOD). The second set of generated entries would be:

********************************************************************************
NETWORK
<-Volume-> <-Grp> <-Member-><--Mult-->Tran <-Target vols> <-Grp> <-Member-> ***
<Name> # <Name> # #<-factor->strg <Name> # # <Name> # # ***

RCHRES 2 OFLOW OVOL 2 1 1.0 RCHRES 3 INFLOW IVOL 1 1

RCHRES 2 OFLOW OHEAT 2 1 1.0 RCHRES 3 INFLOW IHEAT 1 1
RCHRES 2 OFLOW OXCF2 2 1 1.0 RCHRES 3 INFLOW OXIF 1 1
RCHRES 2 OFLOW OXCF2 2 2 1.0 RCHRES 3 INFLOW OXIF 2 1
********************************************************************************

Thus, the user can specify the linkage between two RCHRES's with a single entry,
instead of having to supply an entry for every constituent passed between them.

717
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3).10.1 GROUP INFLOW

The members in this group represent the inflows to a RCHRES. Note that each member
listed below is "available" for use only if the module section to which it belongs
is active.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Module Constituent
Name values n section
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IVOL 1 1 - ac.ft/ Mm3/ HYDR Water
ivld ivld (Note: Mm3=10**6 m3)

CIVOL CAT 1 - ac.ft/ Mm3/ HYDR Water, by Category

ivld ivld (Note: CAT=Category tag)

ICON NCONS 1 - qty/ qty/ CONS Conservatives

ivld ivld

IHEAT 1 1 - BTU/ kcal/ HTRCH Heat (relative to

ivld ivld freezing)

ISED 3 1 - ton/ tonne/ SEDTRN Sand, silt, and clay

ivld ivld

IDQAL NGQUAL 1 - qty/ qty/ GQUAL Dissolved general

ivld ivld quality constituents

ISQAL 3 NGQUAL - qty/ qty/ GQUAL General quality const-

ivld ivld ituent associated with:
1 Sand, 2 Silt, 3 Clay

OXIF 2 1 - lb/ivld kg/ivld OXRX 1=DO, 2=BOD

NUIF1 4 1 - lb/ kg/ NUTRX 1=NO3, 2=TAM, 3=NO2,

ivld ivld 4=PO4

NUIF2 3 2 - lb/ kg/ NUTRX 1=particulate NH4,

ivld ivld 2=particulate PO4 on
1=sand, 2=silt, 3=clay

PKIF 5 1 - lb/ kg/ PLANK 1=Phyto, 2=Zoo, 3=ORN,

ivld ivld 4=ORP, 5=ORC

PHIF 2 1 - lb/ivld kg/ivld PHCARB 1=TIC, 2=CO2

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

718
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3).10.2 Group ROFLOW

The members in this group represent the total outflow from a RCHRES. Note that a
member is "available" for use only if the module section to which it belongs is
active.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Module Constituent
values n section
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ROVOL 1 1 Water

CROVOL CAT 1 Water, by category

(CAT=Category ID tag)

ROCON NCONS 1 Conservatives

ROHEAT 1 1 Heat

ROSED 3 1 Sand, silt, and clay

See data for
RODQAL NGQUAL 1 corresponding Dissolved general qual.
member in group
ROSQAL 3 NGQUAL INFLOW Sediment-associated qual.

OXCF1 2 1 DO, BOD

NUCF1 4 1 NO3, TAM, NO2, PO4

NUCF2 3 2 Particulate NH4 and PO4

(sand, silt, clay)

PKCF1 5 1 Phyto, Zoo, ORN, ORP, ORC

PHCF1 2 1 TIC, CO2

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

719
 Catalog for RCHRES Module

4.7(3).10.3 Group OFLOW

The members in this group represent the outflows through the individual exits of
a RCHRES. Note that a member is available for use only if the module section to
which it belongs is active. Also, these time series are available for use only if
the number of exit gates (NEXITS) is greater than 1.

For each member, the RCHRES exit is selected by the value given to the first
subscript.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Module Constituent
Name values n section
1 2 d Engl Metr
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVOL NEXITS 1 Water

CROVOL NEXITS CAT Water, by category

(CAT=Category ID tag)

OCON NEXITS NCONS Conservatives

OHEAT NEXITS 1 Heat

OSED NEXITS 3 Sand, silt, and clay

ODQAL NEXITS NGQUAL See data for Dissolved general qual.

corresponding
OSQAL NEXITS NGQ3 member in group Sediment-associated qual.
INFLOW
OXCF2 NEXITS 2 DO, BOD

NUCF9 NEXITS 4 NO3, NH3, NO2, PO4

OSNH4 NEXITS 3 Particulate NH4

(sand, silt, clay)

OSPO4 NEXITS 3 Particulate PO4

(sand, silt, clay)

PKCF2 NEXITS 5 Phyto, Zoo, ORN, ORP, ORC

PHCF2 NEXITS 2 TIC, CO2

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

720
 Catalog for COPY Module

4.7(11) Catalog for COPY module

The members contained within each group are documented in the tables which follow.

4.7(11).1 Group INPUT

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time series input to module COPY:

POINT NPT 1 * anything Point-valued input time series

MEAN NMN 1 - anything Mean-valued input time series
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.7(11).2 Group OUTPUT

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series output by module COPY:

POINT NPT 1 * anything Point-valued output time series

MEAN NMN 1 - anything Mean-valued output time series

Input time series required to produce the above:

Group INPUT

POINT required if NPT> 0

MEAN required if NMN> 0

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

721
 Catalog for PLTGEN Module

4.7(12) Catalog for PLTGEN module

There is only one time series group associated with this module; group INPUT, which
contains all point-valued and/or mean-valued members that are to be plotted. This
module does not have an output group because all its output goes to the "plot
file", which is documented in Section 4.4(12) of Part E.

4.7(12).1 Group INPUT

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series input to module PLTGEN:

POINT NPT 1 * anything Point-valued input time series

MEAN NMN 1 - anything Mean-valued input time series

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

722
 Catalog for DISPLY Module

4.7(13) Catalog for DISPLY module

There is only one time series group (INPUT) with one member (TIMSER) associated
with this module since the module displays only one time series at a time. This
module does not have an output group because all its output goes to the "display
file" (printed).

4.7(13).1 Group INPUT

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series input to module DISPLY:

TIMSER 1 1 - anything A mean-valued input time series

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

723
 Catalog for DURANL Module

4.7(14) Catalog for DURANL module

There is only one time series group (INPUT) with one member (TIMSER) associated
with this module since the module analyzes only one time series at a time. This
module does not have an output group because all its output is printed. The format
is documented in Section 4.2(14) of Part E.

4.7(14).1 Group INPUT

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series input to module DURANL:

TIMSER 1 1 - anything A mean-valued input time series

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

724
 Catalog for GENER Module

4.7(15) Catalog for GENER module

This module has both input and output groups, like module COPY.

The members contained within each group are documented in the tables which follow.

4.7(15).1 Group INPUT

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time series input to module GENER:

ONE 1 1 - anything First input time series

TWO 1 1 - anything Second input time series
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.7(15).2 Group OUTPUT

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time series output by module GENER:

TIMSER 1 1 - anything Output time series (mean-valued)

Input time series required to produce the above:

Group INPUT
ONE Always required, unless OPCODE=24.
TWO Only required if generation option
needs two inputs.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

725
 Catalog for MUTSIN Module

4.7(16) Catalog for MUTSIN module

The members contained within each group are documented in the tables which follow.

4.7(16).1 Group OUTPUT

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<---- Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Time series output by module MUTSIN

POINT NPT 1 * anything Point-valued output time series

MEAN NMN 1 - anything Mean-valued output time series

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

726
 FORMATS Block

4.8 FORMATS Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

FORMATS
***
<ft><------------------------- obj-fmt ---------------------------------------->
.
*** line immed above repeats until all formats have been covered
.
.
END FORMATS

***************************** ***************************************************

Details

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol FORTRAN Format Comment
Name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

<ft> FMTCOD I4 Identifying number which corresponds to

format number in EXT SOURCES or TARGETS
Blocks.

<obj-fmt> FORM(19) 19A4 Standard FORTRAN object-time format.

----------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------

Explanation

This block is only required if a user wishes to override the default format for
reading data on a sequential file (see Section 4.9).

727
 Sequential File Formats

4.9 Sequential and PLTGEN/MUTSIN File Formats

Two types of ASCII file formats are available for transfer of data into/out of
HSPF. "Sequential" files allow transfer into HSPF, and PLTGEN/MUTSIN files allow
transfer into and out of HSPF. These file formats are documented below:

4.9.1 Format class HYDFIV - Sequential

It is used for the input of 5-minute data. The sequence of information is:

1. Alpha-numeric station number or identifier (this field is not read)

2. Last two digits of calendar year
3. Month
4. Day
5. Card number 1 is for midnight to 3 am.
2 is for 3 am to 6 am.
3 is for 6 am to 9 am.
4 is for 9 am to noon.
5 is for noon to 3 pm.
6 is for 3 pm to 6 pm.
7 is for 6 pm to 9 pm.
8 is for 9 pm to midnight.
6. 36 fields for 5-minute data.

The default format is: (1X,3I2,I1,36F2.0)

4.9.2 Format class HYDFIF - Sequential

It is used for the input of 15-minute data. The sequence of information is:

1. Alpha-numeric station number or identifier (this field is not read).

2. Last two digits of the calendar year
3. Month
4. Day
5. Card number (same as for HYDFIV above)
6. 12 fields for 15-minute data

The default format is: (1X,3I2,I1,12F6.0)

728
 Sequential File Formats

4.9.3 Format class HYDHR - Sequential

It is used for input of hourly observations. The sequence of information is:

1. Alpha-numeric station number or identifier. (This field is not read)

2. Last two digits of calendar year
3. Month
4. Day
5. Card no: 1 is for a.m. hours
2 is for p.m. hours
6. Twelve fields for hourly data

The default format is: (10X,I2,1X,I2,1X,I2,1X,I1,12F5.0)

4.9.4 Format class HYDDAY - Sequential

It is used for input of daily observations. The sequence of information is:

1. Alpha-numeric station number or identifier. (This field is not read)

2. Last two digits of calendar year
3. Month
4. Card no: 1 is for days 1-10
2 is for days 11-20
3 is for days 21-
5. Ten fields, for the daily data (11 fields for card number 3)

The default format is: (7X,2I2,I1,11F6.0)

4.9.5 Format class HYDSMN - Sequential

It is used for input of semi-monthly observations.

The sequence of information is:

1. Alpha-numeric station number or identifier. (This field is not read)

2. Last two digits of calendar year
3. Card no: 1 for January through June
2 for July through December
4. Twelve semi-monthly fields

The default format is: (7X,I2,I1,12F5.0)

Semi-monthly values are distributed to daily values with a transformation function

of SAME.

729
 Sequential File Formats

4.9.6 Format class HYDMON - Sequential

It is used for input of monthly observations. The sequence of information is:

1. Alpha-numeric station number or identifier. (This field is not read)

2. Last two digits of calendar year
3. Twelve monthly fields

The default format is: (6X,I2,12F6.0)

Monthly values are distributed to daily values with a transformation function of

SAME.

Note that the user can override the above default formats with his own format,
supplied in the FORMATS BLOCK. However, the sequence of information within each
record cannot be altered.

4.9.7 PLTGEN/MUTSIN File Format

Time series data can be transferred to or from ASCII files having the PLTGEN/MUTSIN
format, i.e., the format of files created by the PLTGEN module and readable by the
MUTSIN module. This file contains a header, which is 25 lines for PLTGEN and at
least one line for MUTSIN. Each line of data contains a date-time and between one
and ten data values (curves). The sequence of information for each data line is
as follows:

1. Identifier (four characters)

2. Year
3. Month
4. Day
5. Hour
6. Minute
7. Value for curve 1, for this date/time
8. Value for curve 2, for this date/time
etc (repeats until data for all curves are supplied)

Format: A4,1X,I5,4I3,10(2X,G12.5)

730
 SPEC-ACTIONS Block

4.10 SPEC-ACTIONS Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

SPEC-ACTIONS
Action line:
<addrss>------- ----<uvqn>
dc ds d t or or tc ts num
<oper><f><-l><>< ><yr><m><d><h><m><><> <vari><1><2><3><a><-value--> <> < >< >

Distribute line:
ds ct tc ts
<kwrd>< > < > <> < > <dff> <frc><frc><frc><frc><frc><frc><frc><frc><frc><frc>

User-defined/multiple variable line:

cnt act act
<kwrd> <unam>< > <vari><1><2><3> <frc> < > <vari><1><2><3> <frc> < >
or
<addrss>-------

User-defined variable quantity line :

lc ls ac as agfn
<kwrd> <uqnm> <oper> <#> <vari><1><2><3><t><multfact> <>< > <>< > < >
or
<addrss>-------

Condition line (free format):

IF ( ( <quan> <comp> <quan> ) <logop> ( <quan> <comp> <quan> ) ) THEN

...
ELSE IF ( <quan> <comp> <quan> ) THEN
...
ELSE
...
END IF

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(repeats until all special actions have been specified)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SPEC-ACTIONS

731
 SPEC-ACTIONS Block

Example
*******

SPEC-ACTIONS
*** Distributions
*** kwd ds ct tc ts dff f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7 f8 f9 f10
<****>< > < > <> < > <---> <---><---><---><---><---><---><---><---><---><--->
DISTRB 1 3 DY 7 ACCUM 0.25 0.5 0.25

*** User-Defined Target Variable Names

*** addr addr
*** <------> <------>
*** kwd varnam ct vari s1 s2 s3 frac oper vari s1 s2 s3 frac oper
<****> <----><-> <----><-><-><-> <---> <--> <----><-><-><-> <---> <-->
UVNAME MANURE 3 SAMSU 0.7 QUAN SNO3 0.2 QUAN
SORGN 0.3 QUAN

*** User-Defined Variable Quantity Lines

*** addr
*** <------>
*** kwd varnam optyp opn vari s1 s2 s3 tp multiply lc ls ac as agfn ***
<****> <----> <----> <-> <----><-><-><-><-><--------> <><-> <><-> <--> ***
UVQUAN puncom RCHRES 2 CVOL tx 4

*** Action Lines

*** addr uvquan
*** <------> <---->
***optyp range dc ds yr mo da hr mn d t vari s1 s2 s3 ac value tc ts num
<****><-><--><>< ><--><-><-><-><-><><> <----><-><-><-><-><--------> <> < >< >
PERLND 1 DY 11991/03/15 16:00 1 3 MANURE += 10.0 YR 1 5
IF (puncom > 10000) THEN
RCHRES 2 4 CVOL pw += puncom
END IF
END SPEC-ACTIONS
********************************************************************************

Explanation

In the SPEC-ACTIONS block, the user can change the values of program variables at
specified dates and times. This permits one to model such things as: 1) human
intervention, i.e., plowing or application of fertilizer and pesticide; 2) changes
to parameters in ways not possible with the standard inputs; and 3) conditional
actions, i.e., those that are dependent on the value of another program variable.

Special Actions can be performed on variables in the PERLND, IMPLND, RCHRES, COPY,
PLTGEN, and GENER modules. The user's input is contained in the SPEC-ACTIONS block
of the UCI file. It is specified in the five different types of lines shown above
and described fully in the following sections. Output is printed in the Run Inter-
preter Output (echo) file, and consists of two types: 1) a listing of all Special
Actions as interpreted by the program, and 2) a summary of each Special Action
(value of affected variable before and after the action) as it is implemented
during the run.

732
 SPEC-ACTIONS Block

Details of Action line (including REPEAT function)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Comment
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<oper> OPTYP A6 operation type - valid values are
PERLND, IMPLND, RCHRES, or PLTGEN
<f> TOPFST I3 first operation to act upon
<-l> TOPLST I4 last operation to act upon, 0 or blank
means use first operation only
dc CTCODE(1) A2 code specifying time units of deferral of
action when an applicable logic condition
fails - (MI,HR,DY,MO,YR)
ds TSTEP(1) I3 number of CTCODE(1) intervals to defer
the action
<yr> DATIM(1) I4 year (see starting date field in GLOBAL
block for more information) if the date
is left blank, then the action is performed
every interval of the run
<m> DATIM(2) 1X,I2 month
<d> DATIM(3) 1X,I2 day
<h> DATIM(4) 1X,I2 hour
<m> DATIM(5) 1X,I2 minute
d DSIND I2 ID number of "DISTRB" line, blank if none
t TYPCOD I2 2-INTEGER, 3-REAL, 4-DOUBLE PRECISION
<vari> VNAME A6 variable to act upon, left-justified
<1><2><3> CSUB(1-3) 3A3 subscripts for VNAME, blank if none
may be 2-character CATEGORY tag if applicable
must be integer otherwise
<addrss> ADDR I8 memory location (in the OSV) of variable
(optional method to specify variable)
<a> ACTCOD A3 action code: id number (#) or character
(ch). T= target variable, A= action value:
# ch effect # ch effect
1 = T= A 2 += T= T+ A
3 -= T= T- A 4 *= T= T*A
5 /= T= T/A 6 MIN T= Min(T,A)
7 MAX T= Max(T,A) 8 ABS T= Abs(A)
9 INT T= Int(A) 10 ^= T= T^A
11 LN T= Ln(A) 12 LOG T= Log10(A)
13 MOD T= Mod(T,A)
<value> RVAL or F10.0 "value" of the action to be taken -
IVAL I10 see notes below
<uvqn> UVQNAM A6 name of User-defined variable quantity
containing the "value" of the action
tc CTCODE(2) A2 code specifying time units of "repeat"
action - (MI,HR,DY,MO,YR)
ts TSTEP(2) I3 number of CTCODE(2) intervals to skip
before repeating the action
num NUMINC I3 number of times to repeat action
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

733
 SPEC-ACTIONS Block

Details of Distribution line

----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Comment
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<kwrd> - A6 keyword (DISTRB) - specifies current line
as a "Distribution" line
ds DSIND I3 index number - corresponds to the value
specified on the standard line
ct CNT I3 number of separate actions or applications
to divide the total application into
tc CTCODE A2 code specifying time units of the interval
between separate applications or actions -
(valid values: MI,HR,DY,MO,YR)
ts TSTEP I3 number of CTCODE intervals between separate
applications (see CTCODE below)
<dff> CDEFFG A5 deferral flag - indicates how to treat
deferral of the action(s) under a conditional
situation - (valid values: SKIP, SHIFT,
ACCUM; default = SKIP)
<frc> FRACT(CNT) 10F5 fractions for each of the separate
applications
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Details of User-defined Variable Name line

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Comment
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<kwrd> - A6 keyword (UVNAME) - specifies current line
as a "User-defined variable name" line
<unam> UNAME A6 user-defined variable name
cnt CNT I3 number of actual variables included in
aggregate group

Following inputs repeat CNT times (continuation lines if CNT>2)

<vari> VNAME A6 actual variable name
<1><2><3> CSUB(1-3) 3A3 subscripts for VNAME, blank if none
may be 2-character CATEGORY tag if applicable
must be integer otherwise
<addrss> ADDR I4 address of actual variable

<frc> FRAC F5.2 fraction of total application allocated

to each of the actual variables
act ACTCD A4 action code - QUAN, MOVT, MOV1, MOV2
(see notes on UVNAME action code options)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

734
 SPEC-ACTIONS Block

Details of User-defined Variable Quantity line

----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Comment
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<kwrd> - A6 keyword (UVQUAN) - specifies current line
as a "User-defined variable quantity" line

<uqnm> UVQNAM A6 user-defined variable quantity name

<oper> OPTYP A6 operation type of base variable

<#> OPTNO I3 operation type number of variable

<vari> VNAME A6 actual variable name of variable

<1><2><3> CSUB(1-3) 3A3 subscripts for VNAME, blank if none

may be 2-character CATEGORY tag if applicable
must be integer otherwise

<addrss> ADDR I4 address of actual variable

<t> TYPCOD I2 2-INTEGER, 3-REAL, 4-DOUBLE PRECISION

<multfact> UVQMUL F10.0 multiplier to apply to base variable

lc CTCODE(1) A2 code specifying time units of the period

to lag base variable
(valid values: MI,HR,DY,MO,YR)
ls TSTEP(1) I3 number of CTCODE intervals to lag
base variable
ac CTCODE(2) A2 code specifying time units of the period
to aggregate base variable
(valid values: MI,HR,DY,MO,YR)
as TSTEP(1) I3 number of CTCODE intervals to aggregate
base variable
agfn CTRAN A4 transformation function to use for
aggregation of base variable
(valid values: SUM, AVER, MAX, MIN.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

735
 SPEC-ACTIONS Block

Details of Free-Format Conditional lines

----------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
Symbol Fortran Format Comment
name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IF - - Keyword specifying the beginning of a
logical condition
<quan> CITEM free(10) May be either a UVQUAN name (format A6)
or a numeric value (format up to F10.0)
<comp> CCODE free(2) Numerical comparison operator. Valid
values are:
= equal
/= not equal
> greater than
>= greater than or equal
> less than
>= less than or equal
<logop> CLOGOP free(3) Logical operator: AND or OR
THEN - - Keyword specifying the end of a logical
condition
ELSE - - Keyword specifying that following special
actions are an alternative to previous IFs
and ELSE IFs
ELSE IF - - Keyword specifying that following special
actions are an alternative to previous IFs
and ELSE IFs, provided that the additional
condition is also satisfied. Exactly one
space must occur between the two words.
END IF - - Keyword specifying the end of a logical
block. Exactly one space must occur between
the two words.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

*** free(N) denotes that the field may be any length up to N characters, and may
appear in any column, subject to a maximum line length of 80 characters.

736
 SPEC-ACTIONS Block

Notes:

The <value> field contains quantitative data for the action to be taken. If the
variable or array element to be acted on is an integer (TYPCOD=2) <value> is read
as an integer (IVAL); If it is REAL or DOUBLE PRECISION (TYPCOD=3 or 4), <value>
is read as a real number (RVAL). Note that the value must be given in the units
used internally for the quantity concerned, because no conversion is performed when
it is read in. You can find the internal units by looking up the quantity in the
Operations Status Vector (for the module concerned), contained in the Programmer's
Supplement. For example:

1. Pesticide storage (module PERLND) has units of lb/ac (English) and kg/ha
(Metric); the same units are used internally and externally.

2. Sediment storage (module PERLND) has internal units of tons/acre (in both
English and Metric systems) but the external units (English and Metric) are
tons/acre and tonnes/ha respectively.

Repeat definition
This feature allows a single Special Action to be repeated at regular intervals.
The input that defines the repetition is contained entirely on the standard action
line. The date-time specified on the line is the starting date-time. The
repetition is specified by: 1) CTCODE(2), which defines the time units of the
interval between repetitions, 2) TSTEP(2), which defines the number of CTCODE(2)
time steps between repetitions, and 3) NUMINC, which is the number of times to
perform the action (for example: if NUMINC is 3, the action will be performed three
times, i.e., on the specified date-time and two repetitions).

Distribute definition
This option allows a single Special Action to be split into multiple actions. The
primary purpose is to distribute a chemical application over time so that it is not
all applied to the land segment at once. The additional information needed to
define the distribution is specified on an "associated" line in the Special Actions
block. An ID number (DSIND) is included on the standard Special Actions line which
points to the associated line. This line contains: 1) the keyword "DISTRB", which
identifies the line as a "distribution" definition line, 2) DSIND, the ID number
corresponding to the value on the standard line, 3) CNT, the number of separate
applications to divide the total application into, 4) CTCODE and TSTEP, which
define the time interval between applications (see discussion of REPEAT definition
above), and 5) FRACT(CNT), the fraction of the total application represented by
each of the separate applications. Note, the total application is given by <value>
(or RVAL), which is specified on the standard Special Action line.

User-defined variable (UVNAME)

This option allows the user to define a single name (UVNAME) for one or more
standard variables to be used as the target of a Special Action. If a UVNAME is
applied to multiple standard variables, then any action line referring to that
UVNAME as a target will cause multiple Special Actions to occur. This line
contains: 1) a user defined name (UNAME), limited to six characters; 2) the number
(count) of standard variables that are included in the set; 3) the variable names;
4) the fractions of the total Special Action quantity that will be applied to each
variable; and 5) and an optional action code. (See below.)

737
 SPEC-ACTIONS Block

UVNAME action code options

QUAN Specify multiple Special Action variables in one line. Each quantity
specified in the UVNAME line is multiplied by the quantity in the
corresponding standard line to generate the final quantity applied to each
of the variables specified in the UVNAME line. This option is designed
primarily to allow a total chemical amount to be applied to multiple soil
layers with a single line. This is the default.

MOVT Redistribute current total quantity contained in multiple variables using

predetermined factors. Each quantity specified in the UVNAME line is
multiplied by the total quantity obtained by summing the current values of
the individual variables specified in the UVNAME line. This option is
designed to simulate a plowing operation that completely mixes all material
in two or more zones. This would be accomplished by using quantities that
are the fractions of soil or depth in the individual layers. (This option
does not use the "quantity" or Action Code specified in standard line.)

MOV1, Redistribute two quantities in following manner: Variable No. 1 is computed

MOV2 by multiplying current value of variable No. 2 by quantity associated with
Variable 1 in the UVNAME line. Variable No. 2 is computed by multiplying
current value of Variable No. 2 by quantity associated with Variable No.
2 in the UVNAME line plus the current value of Variable No. 1. This option
is designed to simulate a plowing operation that transfers the material in
the surface zone to the upper zone, and results in the new surface zone
having the original concentration of the upper zone. This would be
accomplished by using the following two quantities: 1) ratio of amount of
soil (or depth) in surface layer to amount in upper layer, and 2) subtract
surface layer soil amount from upper layer soil amount and divide the
result by the upper layer soil amount. (This option does not use the
"quantity" or Action Code specified in standard line.)

738
 SPEC-ACTIONS Block

User-defined variable quantity (UVQUAN)

This option creates a variable quantity which can be used either as an action value
for a Special Action or as a value to be compared in a condition. A UVQUAN refers
to a single "base variable" in a single operation. By default, the UVQUAN contains
the last-calculated value of that base variable. Optionally, it may contain a
lagged value (e.g. 5 hours ago); an aggregated value (e.g. the average over the
previous day); or a combination (e.g. the sum over three days ending 24 hours ago).
The resulting value can also be multiplied by a constant factor. It is important
to note the difference between a UVQUAN and a UVNAME. A UVQUAN is a value, just
like a constant. A UVNAME is a target address for a special action.

Logical conditions
Special Actions may depend on whether a user-specified logical condition is true
or false, and can be either skipped or deferred if it is false. They can be
grouped into logical blocks by placing IF, ELSE IF, ELSE, and END IF lines
appropriately among the action lines. For example, actions placed between an IF
line and the next logical delimiter are executed only if the condition specified
on the IF line is true on the date and time of the each action.

A simple logical condition is defined as a comparison between two numerical values.

Either or both of these values may be UVQUANs. For example:

month <= 2
6226.0 <= tstage
tfish < faradj

are all simple logical conditions. Complex conditions are built by connecting
simple conditions together with the logical operators AND and OR:

[month = 10 OR (tstage >= 6226.0 AND {month >= 11 OR month <= 2} )]

Parentheses are used to specify the order of evaluation, just as in a programming

language. By default, the logical operators are evaluated from right to left, but
it is good practice to use them in all cases to ensure clarity. There are three
types: round (), square [], and curly {}. They are equivalent, but the program
requires that matching left-right pairs must be of the same type, in order to help
the user prevent unintended effects in complicated conditions.

IF lines consist of the keyword IF, a logical condition, and the keyword THEN. The
IF keyword may appear anywhere on the line, as long as it is the first non-blank.
The condition may be simple or complex, and may span multiple physical lines. When
an IF line is found, HSPF keeps reading lines until the THEN keyword is found.
ELSE IF lines are processed in the same manner. ELSE and END IF are expected to
appear alone on a line, and anything after the keyword is ignored. Note that the
"ELSE IF" and "END IF" keywords must contain exactly one space between the two
words.

739
 SPEC-ACTIONS Block

The following example illustrates how HSPF decides whether to perform a special
action. Each condition may be simple or complex. Note the effect of nesting IF-
END IF blocks. They may be nested up to ten levels deep.

*** Condition A
IF month >= 9 THEN
*** Action 1
RCHRES130 4 CVOL pw += TAVLQ
*** Action 2
RCHRES130 4 CVOL tx -= TAVLQ

*** Condition B
IF (tstage > 6226.0) THEN
*** Action 3
RCHRES100 4 CVOL tx += PUNCOM

*** Condition C
ELSE IF (tstage > 6225.0) THEN
*** Action 4
RCHRES100 4 CVOL pw += PUNCOM

ELSE
*** Action5
RCHRES130 4 CVOL na -= PUNCOM
*** Action6
RCHRES130 4 CVOL ac += PUNCOM
END IF

*** Action7
RCHRES130 4 CVOL sp += TAVLQ

*** Condition D
ELSE IF month >= 6 THEN
*** Action8
RCHRES130 4 CVOL tc += TAVLQ

*** Condition E
ELSE IF (tfish <= 0.0) THEN
*** Action9
RCHRES130 1991/04/29 12:00 4 CVOL pw += PUNCOM
*** Action10
RCHRES130 1991/05/01 12:00 4 CVOL tx -= PUNCOM

ELSE
*** Action11
RCHRES130 4 CVOL na -= TAVLQ
END IF

*** Action12
RCHRES130 4 CVOL ac += TAVLQ

740
 SPEC-ACTIONS Block

In this case:
Actions 1, 2, and 7 are performed only if Condition A is true.
Action 3 is performed only if Conditions A and B are both true.
Action 4 is performed only if Conditions A and C are true and Condition B is false.
Actions 5 and 6 are performed only if Condition A is true and Conditions B and C
are false.
Action 8 is performed only if Condition A is false and Condition D is true.
Actions 9 and 10 are performed only if Conditions A and D are false and Condition
E is true.
Action 11 is performed only if Conditions A, D, and E are false.
Action 12 is always performed.

Evaluation Order
Each IF or ELSE IF line is evaluated a maximum of once per interval, at the time
of execution of the first Special Action that depends on it in that interval. The
UVQUAN values used for the numerical comparisons are computed from the base
variables at the point of evaluation, taking into account Special Actions appearing
before the Condition line, but not those after it.

Assume that in the example above, month = 10, tstage = 6224.5, and tfish = 0. HSPF
will:
1) Fetch the value of month.
2) Evaluate Condition A as true.
3) Perform Action 1, since A is true.
4) Perform Action 2, since A is true.
5) Fetch the value of tstage.
6) Evaluate Condition B as false.
7) Skip Action 3, since B is false.
8) Re-fetch the value of tstage.
9) Evaluate Condition C as false.
10) Skip Action 4, since C is false.
11) Perform Actions 5 and 6, since A is true, while B and C are both false.
12) Perform Action 7, since A is true.
13) Skip Action 8, since A is true. Note that Condition D does not need to be
evaluated because the action is skipped regardless of D's value.
14) Ignore Actions 9 and 10, since they do not occur on this date.
15) Skip Action 11, since A is true. Conditions D and E can be ignored.
16) Perform Action 12, which is unconditional.

The use of dated special actions within logical blocks requires caution. For
instance, for Actions 9 and 10 above, it is possible that the value of tfish
changes between April 29 and May 1 such that one of the Actions is performed while
the other is not, even though they have the same logical conditions. The user must
make sure that this is the intended result.

Another situation requiring care is a Special Action that alters one of the
variables which define the logical conditions upon which that Action depends. For
instance, if Action 4 above changed the value of the UVQUAN tstage to 6224.0 by
altering its base variable, then Actions 5 and 6 will still not be executed that
interval, since Condition C is not re-evaluated until the following interval.

741
 Monthly Data Block

4.11 MONTH-DATA Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******

MONTH-DATA

MONTH-DATA <t>
<val-><val-><val-><val-><val-><val-><val-><val-><val-><val-><val-><val->
END MONTH-DATA <t>

Up to 50 MONTH-DATA tables may appear in the block

END MONTH-DATA

*******
Example
*******

MONTH-DATA

MONTH-DATA 3
*** atmospheric deposition fluxes (kg/ha/month) of NO3-N
1.3 1.5 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.2 3.0 2.3 2.0 2.0 1.7 1.4
END MONTH-DATA 3

END MONTH-DATA
********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol FORTRAN Format Comment
Name(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<t> NUMBR I3 Users identifying number for this
MONTH-DATA table

<val-> MTHVAL(12) 12F6.0 Monthly values

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

A MONTH-DATA table is used to specify monthly-varying values for parameters that

do not have specific input tables for that purpose. Currently, MONTH-DATA tables
are implemented for atmospheric deposition inputs. See descriptions for table
types PQL-AD-FLAGS, PEST-AD-FLAGS, etc. for further details.

742
 Monthly Data Block

4.12 CATEGORY Block

********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
CATEGORY
<cat> <----catnam---->
. . . . . . . . . . .
Above line repeats until all categories have been specified
. . . . . . . . . . .
END CATEGORY

Example
*******

CATEGORY
tag ***
<> <----catnam----> ***
UN UNCOMMITTED
WP WESTPAC CREDIT
CU CUI-UI CREDIT
CA CALIF CREDIT
TX TAHOE EXCHANGE
END CATEGORY

********************************************************************************

Details
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbol FORTRAN Start Format Comment
Name(s) Column
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<cat> CAT 4 A2 Category tag: a two-character identifier
used wherever a subscript is called for.
First character must be a letter. Tags are
case-sensitive, and must be unique.
<catnam> CATNAM 7 A16 Category name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explanation

In this block the user declares and names active water categories.

The CATEGORY block is used to facilitate the modeling of water rights in the HYDR
section of RCHRES. Each RCHRES in the run tracks the categories of all inflows,
storages, demands, and outflows. Up to 100 categories may be specified. (See the
discussion of Water Rights Categories in Part E, Section 4.2(3).1).

743
 Glossary

APPENDIX I
GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1.0 NATURE OF THE GLOSSARY

The glossary which follows is not exhaustive. Its function is to introduce terms
which may be new and to assign definite meanings to ambiguous terms. It is not a
dictionary. The goal is not to provide formally correct definitions but to supply
explanations adequate for practical purposes. Thus in some cases, the definition
of a term is followed by a further explanatory note.

2.0 GLOSSARY

The list that follows is arranged alphabetically. Any word enclosed in parentheses
( ) may optionally be omitted from a term in everyday use, provided that the
context ensures that its use is implied.

ACTUAL ARGUMENT
The name of an item (or set) of data which is being passed to (or retrieved from)
a subprogram via an argument list. It can be:
(1) a variable name
(2) an array or array element name
(3) any other expression
(4) the name of an external procedure
(5) a Hollerith constant

ANNIE
An interactive program designed for management of WDM files and their data. ANNIE
functions include file creation, data set management, and data analysis,
modification, and display.

APPLICATION MODULE
A module which simulates processes which occur in the real world
(e.g., PERLND, IMPLND, RCHRES).

BUFFER
A portion of machine memory space used for the temporary storage of input or
output-bound data.

COMPUTATIONAL ELEMENT
See "element."

CONCEPTUAL DATA STREAM

A stream of related data that are independent of any physical input-output device.

744
 Glossary

COPY
A utility module used to copy time series data. COPY is typically used to transfer
data from a sequential file to the WDM file or DSS file.

DATA SET (TIME SERIES)

A data set in the WDM or DSS file.

DIRECT ACCESS FILE

A disk file whose records are read from or written to a specific location within
the file. Any record in the file may be accessed at any time. Contrast with
sequential file.

DIRECTED GRAPH
A group of processing units arranged with unidirectional paths between them. No
bi-directional paths or cycles are allowed.

DISPLY
A utility module used to print time series data and summaries of the data.

DUMMY ARGUMENT
The local name (in a subprogram) for an actual argument which is passed to the
subprogram.

DURANL
A utility module used to examine the behavior of a time series, computing a
variety of statistics related to its' excursions above and below certain specified
levels.

ELEMENT
A collection of nodes and/or zones, e.g. segment no. 1, reach no. 20.

ELEMENT TYPE
A name which describes elements having a common set of attributes, for example,
Pervious Land-segment, Reach/Mixed Reservoir.

EXECUTABLE PROGRAM
A self contained computing procedure. It consists of a main program and its
required subprograms.

FEEDBACK ELEMENT
An element which is situated in a loop in a network or which is connected to
another element by one or more bi-directional flux linkages.

FEEDBACK REGION
A group of connected feedback elements. Information and constituent transfers
across the boundaries of a feedback region are uni-directional, but internal fluxes
can be bi-directional.

FLOWCHART
A schematic two-dimensional representation of the logic in a program or program
unit. The level of detail in a flowchart depends on its purpose.

745
 Glossary

FLUX
The rate of transfer of fluid, particles or energy across a given surface.

FUNCTION (as used in program design, not in Fortran language)

A transformation which receives input and returns output in a predictable manner.
Most functions within a program can be classified into one of three types: input,
process, or output. Usually, there is a hierarchy of functions--high level
functions contain subordinate functions.

GENER
A utility module used to perform any one of several transformations on one or more
input time series.

IMPLND
An application module which simulates the water quantity and quality processes
which occur on an impervious land segment.

INGRP
A group of HSPF operations which share the same internal scratch pad (INPAD).

INPAD
see INTERNAL SCRATCH PAD

INPAD AREA
The space available in memory for the storage of time series data in the INPAD.
It is the difference between the area of the common block SCRTCH and the longest
OSV in the INGRP.

INPAD WIDTH
The number of time intervals which are present in the INPAD during a run. This is
the INPAD area divided by the maximum number of rows of the time series data. HSPF
uses fewer disk input/output operations with longer INPAD widths.

INPUT TIME SERIES

Time series which are read in a given simulation run.

INSPAN
see INTERNAL SCRATCH PAD SPAN

INTER SECTION DATA TRANSFER (ISDT)

The movement of information from one section to another within a module.

INTERNAL SCRATCH PAD (INPAD)

The space in memory where time series data are accessed by modules. It functions
as a large buffer for this data.

INTERNAL SCRATCH PAD SPAN (INSPAN)

The real world time which corresponds to the INPAD width.

IVL
See SIMULATION INTERVAL

746
 Glossary

JOB
The work performed by HSPF in response to the instructions found in a complete set
of User's Control Input.

KIND
A descriptor which implies either point or mean with regard to a time series.

MEAN VALUED DATA

Data which represents the behavior of a time series over time intervals rather than
at specific points in time.

MIXED RESERVOIR
A water body which is assumed to be completely mixed.

MODEL
A set of algorithms, set in a logical structure, which represents a process. A
model is implemented using modules of code.

MODULE
A set of program units which performs a clearly defined function.

MODULE SECTION
A part of an Application Module which can be executed independently of the other
parts. eg. SEDMNT in module PERLND.

MUTSIN
A utility module used to read a sequential external file which has the same format
as the file produced by the PLTGEN module. MUTSIN makes the time series data on the
external file available for use by other modules.

NETWORK
A group of connected processing units. Information and/or constituents flow
between processing units through uni-directional linkages. That is, no processing
unit may pass output which indirectly influences itself (no feedback loops). These
constraints make it possible to operate on each processing unit separately,
considering them in an "upstream" to "downstream" order.

NODE
A point in space where the value of a spatially variable function can be
determined.

OPERATING MODULE (OM)

A set of HSPF program units which perform a series of process functions for a
specified time on a given set of input time series and produce a specified set of
output time series.

OPERATION
In HSPF: execution of code which transforms a set of input time series into a set
of output time series, for example, execution of a application module or a utility
module. See "simulation operation," "utility operation."

747
 Glossary

OPERATIONS STATUS VECTOR (OSV)

The data structure for an operating module. The OSV contains all the information
(parameters, state variables) needed to describe the status of an operation and to
restart it after an interruption.

OPERATIONS SUPERVISOR (OSUPER)

The HSPF program units which oversee the execution of operating modules and related
time series movement.

OSV
see OPERATION STATUS VECTOR

OUTPUT TIME SERIES

Time series which are generated during a simulation run. They do not have to be
stored in the WDM or DSS.

PARAMETER
A variable used in a function which determines the transformation of the input to
the function to the output of the function.

PARTITION (an operation)

The execution of different sections of an application module in separate runs.
Time series involved in inter section data transfers must be stored between runs.

PERLND
An application module which simulates the water quantity an quality processes which
occur on a pervious land segment.

PERVIOUS LAND SEGMENT (PLS)

A segment of land with a pervious surface.

PHYSICAL PROCESS
A process occurring in the real world.

PLS
see PERVIOUS LAND SEGMENT

PLTGEN
A utility module used to write a sequential external file containing up to 10 time
series and related commands for a stand alone plotting program.

POINT VALUED DATA

Data which represents the behavior of a time series at specific points in time
rather than over time intervals.

PROCESS
In the real world: A continuing activity, for example, percolation, chemical
reaction. See "physical process."

748
 Glossary

PROCESSING UNIT (PU)

An element or group of related elements which is simulated for a period of time.
Input comes from external sources or Processing Units which have completed
simulating for the given period of time. Output goes to other processing units of
external targets.

PROGRAM
A complete set of code, consisting of one or more program units, the first of which
is the "main" program unit.

PU
see PROCESSING UNIT

RCHRES
An application module which simulates the water quantity and quality processes
which occur in a reach of open or closed channel or a completely mixed lake.

REACH
A free-flowing portion of a stream, simulated in HSPF using storage routing.

RUN
A set of operations which are performed serially and cover the same period of time.

RUN INTERPRETER
The HSPF module which reads and interprets the User's Control Input. It sets up
internal information that instructs the system regarding the sequence of operations
to be performed, stores parameters and state variables for each operation in the
OSV, writes instructions related to the movement of time series data and performs
other minor functions.

SECTION
see MODULE SECTION

SEGMENT
A portion of the land assured to have areally uniform properties.

SEQUENTIAL FILE
A file whose records are organized on the basis of their successive physical
positions, such as on magnetic tape or cards. A record may be accessed only after
the previous record has been accessed.

SIMPLE ELEMENT
An element which is not a feedback element.

SIMULATION
Imitation of the behavior of a prototype, using a model. We implement the model
on a computer using an application module.

SIMULATION INTERVAL
The internal time step used in an operation.

749
 Glossary

SIMULATION MODULE
See APPLICATION MODULE

SIMULATION (OPERATION)
Simulation of a specified prototype for a specified period.

STATE VARIABLE
A variable containing the current value of a storage or other measurable quantity.
It may change through time.

STRUCTURE CHART
A diagram which documents the result of structured (program) design. It indicates
the program units, their relationships (including hierarchy) and, optionally, the
data passed between them.

SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
A comprehensive set of documents which enable a user to understand and use a
software product. It should include:
(1) a discussion of the underlying principles
(2) a discussion of the mathematical relations which the code implements
(3) documentation of the structure of the code
(4) a listing of the code
(5) documentation of data and file structures, including the input required
to run the program.

TIME SERIES
A series of chronologically ordered values giving a discrete representation of the
variation in time of a given quantity.

(TIME SERIES) DATA SET

A data set in the WDM or DSS file.

TIME SERIES MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (TSMS)

The modules of HSPF which are concerned with manipulation of time series or the
files used to store time series. It includes TSGET and TSPUT.

TIME SERIES STORE (TSS)

A direct access file used for medium/long term storage of time series. Active
maintenance of the TSS system has ceased, and it has been removed from the
documentation.

TIME SERIES STORE MANAGEMENT (TSSM)

The HSPF module which (in previous versions) maintained a User's Time Series Store
(TSS) and performed maintenance tasks associated with the data sets in it. TSSM has
been removed from the program and the documentation.

TSPUT
The HSPF module which moves time series data from the INPAD to a WDM file or DSS.

TSGET
The HSPF module which moves time series data from a WDM file, DSS, or sequential
file to the INPAD.

750
 Glossary

TSS
see TIME SERIES STORE

TSSM or TSSMGR
see TIME SERIES STORE MANAGEMENT

UCI
see USER's CONTROL INPUT

USER'S CONTROL INPUT

The file in which the user specifies the operations to be performed in a run, the
parameters and initial conditions for each one, and the time series to be passed
between them. HSPF reads this from an ASCII file.

UTILITY MODULE
A module which performs operations on time series which are peripheral to the
simulation of physical processes, for example, data input, plot generation,
statistical analysis.

UTILITY OPERATION
Execution of a utility module.

VOLUME
A source (WDM, DSS, sequential file or INPAD) or target (WDM or DSS) for the time
series data.

Watershed Data Management (WDM) File

A direct-access, binary file containing multiple time series data sets. This file
is the primary storage file for HSPF time series data. WDM files are created and
maintained by the ANNIE program and related-software.

WORLD VIEW
A representation of the real world which includes simplifying assumptions of
physical processes.

ZONE
A finite portion of the real world. It is usually associated with the integral of
a spatially variable quantity.

751
 Time Series Concepts

APPENDIX II
TIME SERIES CONCEPTS

1.0 Time Series Concepts

A time series is a sequence of values ordered in time. The interval of time

between successive values is called the time step or the time increment or the time
interval of the time series. The time step for a time series is often a constant
value but may also be variable. The implementation in HSPF restricts the
variability in a manner discussed below. The values in the time series may
represent the behavior of a process at a point in time or an average over the time
step of the time series. A time series whose values represent behavior at points
in time is called a point-valued time series and is represented symbolically by
"*". Linear interpolation is used to define intermediate values in a point-valued
time series. A time series whose values represent average or aggregated behavior
over the time step are called mean-valued time series and are represented
symbolically as "-". The meaning of "average" and "mean" is taken in a wide sense
and includes any value assumed to be representative of behavior of the time series
over the time step, rather than at a specific point in time.

The following figure shows the difference between the point and mean value time
series in graphic form. It is important to note that only one value is needed to
represent the behavior of a mean-valued time series for one time step. We visualize
the value as being assigned to a time step in this case. On the other hand, two
values are needed to represent the behavior of a point-valued time series over the
same interval. We visualize the values as being assigned to the time points in this
case. Each time point at which a value of the series is given in a point-valued
time series is viewed as "belonging" to the time step which it ends. Time points
belonging to all time steps contained within a larger time step are viewed as
belonging to the larger time step also. For example, all time points in a
point-valued time series except the first time point belong to the time interval
spanning the time series duration. The first time point of a point-valued time
series is viewed as belonging to the time step immediately preceding the first time
step of the time series. This precise definition of belongingness for a time point
is needed to avoid confusion in defining operations on the time series.

A number of operations on time series, discussed in Section 4.6 of Part F, preserve

the integral of the time series between any two time points which end time steps
in the time series. The integral may be visualized as the area under the broken
line graph formed by connecting adjacent values in the point-valued time series or
the area under the histogram representing the mean-valued time series. The
trapezoidal rule applied to the point-valued time series yields the exact value of
the integral whereas the simple rectangular rule yields the exact value for the
mean-valued time series.

752
 Time Series Concepts

Point-valued time series

|
|
|
|
|
|
X |
o
|
| o o
|
| o
| o o o
|
|
|
|------|------|------|------|------|------|------
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Time point numbers

Mean-valued time series

|
|
|
|
|
X | .------.
| | |
|------. .------' |
| | | |
| '------' |
| '-------------.
| |
| |
|------|------|------|------|------|------|-----
Time point # --> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Time step # --> 1 2 3 4 5 6
- - - - - -

Figure 1. Comparison between point- and mean-valued time series

753
 Time Series Concepts

Time is given as year/month/day/hour/minute to completely specify either a time

interval or a time point. The date/time given by the internal clock uses the
"contained within" principle for all levels of the date/time. That is, each
smaller interval is contained within the next larger interval. This is the
conventional usage for year/month/day but is not conventional for the hour/ minute.
For example, the date string 1977/01/02 labels the second day of the first month
of the 1977th year. On the other hand, in conventional usage the time string 10:15
refers to the end of the l5th minute after (not within) the 10th hour of the day.
This change in meaning is eliminated in the internal date/ time clock for HSPF.
In the internal system, time string 10/15 labels the 15th minute of (ie. within)
the 10th hour of the day. A comparable time to 10:15 in the conventional sense
would be 11/15; that is, the 15th minute of the 11th hour of the day.

In summary, the internal clock convention labels time intervals at all levels of
date/time whereas conventional usage labels time intervals for year/month/day but
labels time points for hour/minute. In HSPF, time points are then referenced
uniquely by the minute which ends at the time point in question.

The time steps in a time series are labelled with the minute which ends the time
step. Thus, the values in a mean-valued time series are treated logically as
having occurred at the end time point of the time step. Note that for purposes of
the internal clock and for description of internal concepts each time point has one
and only one label. This means that we refer to the instant in time forming the
boundary between two days using the label associated with the first day even though
our interest is centered on the second day. This convention is called the ending
time convention.

A starting time convention is used externally for some purposes because traditional
usage requires both conventions depending on the context of the statement about
time. Users are more comfortable using the traditional clock and both a starting
time and an ending time convention. The starting time convention is used when the
start of some time span is in mind and the ending time convention is used when the
end of some time span is in mind.

The time span associated with a time series must be defined. Logically, a time
series is of infinite length. Realistically, every time series has a finite length
and may be broken into short segments for convenience in recording the values on
some medium such as the printed page, a magnetic tape, a data card or a magnetic
disk. These shorter segments are made necessary by various software and hardware
constraints. Therefore, a time span is associated with each medium used to record
or store the time series.

754
 Time Series Concepts

A further practical complication is created by the variety of representations used

for time series. The user's most likely mental image is a line drawn in some
coordinate system on the printed page. This method of representing time series is
most convenient for the user but a series of discrete numbers is most convenient
for the digital computer. The time series of indefinite length must be subdivided
into shorter time spans to fit the card images or the records on the tape or disk.
In some cases data for the time series may be incomplete (some values not present)
or, in some cases, many of the values are zero so that not all values for the time
series are stored on the medium. In such cases a date/time indicator is given on
the record. As an example, think of the format used for data cards punched by the
National Weather Records Center. The date/time information on each record of the
medium permits the reconstruction of the complete time series (except for the
missing values) even though not all values are recorded on the medium. However,
conventions must be established so that missing records on a given recording medium
are properly interpreted. For example, are the missing data merely zeros or did
they occur because of instrument malfunction? If the data are missing, a "filler"
should be inserted when the data are placed on the WDM or DSS so that it can be
changed at a later time or so that such missing periods can be properly handled by
other parts of the HSPF system. The filler value is called the TSFILL attribute in
the WDM system.

The time step for a time series can vary in multiples of a basic time step
established for the time series. The basic time step for the time series must be
truly a constant value. For example, a time series at a monthly interval does not
have a constant time step. Therefore, the basic time step assigned to such a time
series is daily because a day is of constant length and is commensurable with all
months.

755
 BIBLIOGRAPHY FOR HSPF AND RELATED REFERENCES

prepared by

A.S. Donigian, Jr.

AQUA TERRA Consultants

Mountain View, CA 94086

May 31, 1994

Ball, J.E., M.J. White, G.de R. Innes, and L. Chen. 1993. Application of HSPF on the Upper
Nepean Catchment. Hydrology and Water Resources Symposium, Newcastle, New South
Wales, Australia. June 30-July 2, 1993. pp. 343-348.

Barnwell, T.O. 1980. An Overview of the Hydrologic Simulation Program - FORTRAN, a

Simulation Model for Chemical Transport and Aquatic Risk Assessment. In: Aquatic
Toxicology and Hazard Assessment: Proceedings of the Fifth Annual Symposium on Aquatic
Toxicology, ASTM Special Tech. Pub. 766, ASTM, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103.

Barnwell, T.O. and R. Johanson. 1981. HSPF: A Comprehensive Package for Simulation of
Watershed Hydrology and Water Quality. In: Nonpoint Pollution Control: Tools and
Techniques for the Future. Interstate Commission on the Potomac River Basin, 1055 First
Street, Rockville, MD 20850.

Barnwell, T.O. and J.L. Kittle. 1984. "Hydrologic Simulation Program - FORTRAN:
Development, Maintenance and Applications." In: Proceedings Third International Conference
on Urban Storm Drainage. Chalmers Institute of Technology, Goteborg, Sweden.

Beyerlein, D.C. 1993. May Creek Conditions Report (Hydrology and Flooding Chapters).
Prepared for King County Surface Water Management and the City of Renton Surface Water
Utility, Seattle, WA. Prepared by AQUA TERRA Consultants, Everette, WA.

Beyerlein, D.C. 1993. Crisp Creek Watershed Report. Prepared for Muckleshoot Indian Tribe
Fisheries Department, Auburn, WA. Prepared by AQUA TERRA Consultants, Everette, WA.

Beyerlein, D.C. and J.T. Brasher. 1994. Chambers Creek Calibration Report. Prepared for
Thurston County Storm and Surface Water Programs. Olympia, WA. Prepared by AQUA
TERRA Consultants, Everette, WA.

Beyerlein, D.C. and J.T. Brasher. 1994. May Creek Calibration Report. Prepared for King
County Surface Water Management and the City of Renton Surface Water Utility, Seattle, WA.
Prepared by AQUA TERRA Consultants, Everette, WA.

Bicknell, B.R., A.S. Donigian Jr. and T.O. Barnwell. 1984. Modeling Water Quality and the
Effects of Best Management Practices in the Iowa River Basin. J. Water. Sci. Tech., 17:1141-1153.

Bicknell, B.R., J.C. Imhoff, J.L. Kittle Jr., A.S. Donigian, Jr. and R.C. Johanson. 1993.

1
 Hydrological Simulation Program - FORTRAN. User's Manual for Release 10.
EPA/600/R-93-174. U.S. EPA Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA.

Bowie, G.L., W.B. Mills, D.B. Porcella, C.L. Campbell, J.R. Pagenkopf, G.L. Rupp, K.M.
Johnson, P.W.H. Chan, and S.A. Gherini. 1985. Rates, Constants, and Kinetics Formulations in
Surface Water Quality Modeling (Second Edition). Environmental Research Laboratory,
Athens, GA. EPA 600/3-85/040. 455 p.

Casman, E. 1989. Effects of Agricultural Practices on Water Quality as Related to Adjustments

of HSPF Parameters, A Literature Review. Report No. 89-6. Interstate Commission on the
Potomac River Basin, in cooperation with the Maryland Department of the Environment,
Baltimore, MD.

Chew, C.Y. L.W. Moore, and R.H. Smith. 1991. Hydrological Simulation of Tennessee's North
Reelfoot Creek Watershed. Res. J. WPCF 63(1):10-16.

Codner, G.P., 1991. Tale of Two Models, SWMM and HSPF. International Hydrology and
Water Resources Symposium, Part 2 (of 3), Perth, Australia. p 569-574.

Colglazier, E.W. 1989. Fiscal Year 1989 Program Report ( Tennessee Water Resources Research
Center). (Available from) National Technical Information Service, Springfield, VA. (HSPF
Application to North Reelfoot Creek Watershed in Tennessee).

Dames and Moore. 1988. Yiba, Tabalah, and Habawnah Basins Hydrological Modelling
Reports. Prepared for Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Ministry of Agriculture and Water, Riyadh,
Saudi Arabia.

Dean, J.D., D.W. Meier, B.R. Bicknell and A.S. Donigian, Jr. 1984. Simulation of DDT
Transport and Fate in the Arroyo Colorado Watershed, Texas, Draft Report, prepared for U.S.
EPA, Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA.

Dinicola, R.S. 1990. Characterization and Simulation of Rainfall-Runoff Relations for

Headwater Basins in Western King and Snohomish Counties, Washington. Water-Resources
Investigation Report 89-4052. U.S. Geological Survey, Tacoma, WA.

Donigian, A.S., Jr., and N.H. Crawford. 1976a. Modeling Pesticides and Nutrients on
Agricultural Lands. Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA. EPA 600/2-7-76-043.
317 p.

Donigian, A.S., Jr., and N.H. Crawford. 1976b. Modeling Nonpoint Pollution from the Land
Surface. Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA. EPA 600/3-76-083. 280 p.

Donigian, A.S. Jr., D.C. Beyerlein, H.H. Davis, Jr., and N.H. Crawford. 1977. Agricultural
Runoff Management (ARM) Model Version II: Refinement and Testing. Environmental
Research Laboratory, Athens, GA. EPA 600/3-77-098. 294 pp.

Donigian, A.S., Jr., J.C. Imhoff and B.R. Bicknell. 1983. Modeling Water Quality and the Effects
of Best Management Practices in Four Mile Creek, Iowa. EPA Contract No. 68-03-2895,

2
Environmental Research Laboratory, U.S. EPA, Athens, GA. 30613.

Donigian, A.S. Jr., Baker, D.A. Haith and M.F. Walter. 1983. HSPF Parameter Adjustments to
Evaluate the Effects of Agricultural Best Management Practices, EPA Contract No. 68-03-2895,
U.S. EPA Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA, (PB-83-247171).

Donigian, A.S. Jr., J.C. Imhoff and B.R. Bicknell. 1983. Predicting Water Quality Resulting
from Agricultural Nonpoint Source Pollution via Simulation - HSPF, In: Agricultural
Management and Water Quality, (ed.) F.W. Schaller and G.W. Baily, Iowa State University
Press, Ames, IA, pp. 209-249.

Donigian, A.S., Jr., J.C. Imhoff, B.R. Bicknell and J.L. Kittle, Jr. 1984. Application Guide for the
Hydrological Simulation Program - FORTRAN EPA 600/3-84-066, Environmental Research
Laboratory, U.S. EPA, Athens, GA. 30613.

Donigian, A.S., Jr., D.W. Meier and P.P. Jowise. 1986. Stream Transport and
Agricultural Runoff for Exposure Assessment: A Methodology. EPA/600/3-86-011,
Environmental Research Laboratory, U.S. EPA, Athens, GA. 30613.

Donigian, A.S. 1986. Integration of Runoff and Receiving Water Models for
Comprehensive Watershed Simulation and Analysis of Agricultural Management
Alternatives, In: Agricultural Nonpoint Source Pollution: Model Selection and
Application. Developments in Environmental Modeling, 10, Elsevier, New York.
p. 265-275.

Donigian, A.S. Jr., B.R. Bicknell and J.L. Kittle Jr. 1986a. Conversion of the Chesapeake
Bay Basin Model to HSPF Operation. Prepared by AQUA TERRA Consultants for the
Computer Sciences Corporation, Annapolis, MD and U.S. EPA Chesapeake Bay Program,
Annapolis, MD.

Donigian, A.S., Jr., B.R. Bicknell, L.C. Linker, J. Hannawald, C. Chang, and R. Reynolds. 1990.
Chesapeake Bay Program Watershed Model Application to Calculate Bay Nutrient Loadings:
Preliminary Phase I Findings and Recommendations. Prepared by AQUA TERRA Consultants
for U.S. EPA Chesapeake Bay Program, Annapolis, MD.

Donigian, A.S. Jr., B.R. Bicknell, A.S. Patwardhan, L.C. Linker, D.Y. Alegre, C.H.
Chang and R. Reynolds. 1991. Chesapeake Bay Program Watershed Model
Application to Calculate Bay Nutrient Loadings. Prepared by AQUA TERRA Consultants for
U.S. EPA Chesapeake Bay Program , Annapolis, MD.

Donigian, A.S., Jr. and W.C. Huber. 1991. Modeling of Nonpoint Source Water Quality in
Urban and Non-Urban Areas. EPA/600/3-91/039. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA. 72 p.

Donigian, A.S. Jr., and A.S. Patwardhan. 1992. Modeling Nutrient Loadings from Croplands in
the Chesapeake Bay Watershed. In: Proceedings of Water Resources sessions at Water Forum
'92. Baltimore, Maryland. August 2-6, 1992. p. 817-822.

3
Donigian, A.S. Jr., R.V. Chinnaswamy, and D.C. Beyerlein. 1993. Surface Water Exposure
Assessment for Walnut Creek, Iowa - Preliminary Application of the U.S. EPA HSPF to Assess
Agrichemical Contributions and Impacts. Prepared by AQUA TERRA Consultants, Mountain
View, CA. Prepared for U.S. EPA, Athens , GA under Contract No. 68-C0-0019.

Donigian, A.S. Jr., B.R. Bicknell, and J.C. Imhoff. 1994. Hydrological Simulation Program -
FORTRAN (HSPF). Chapter 12. In: Computer Models of Watershed Hydrology. V.P. Singh
(ed). Water Resources Publications. Littleton, CO. (In Press).

Fielland, C.E. and M.A. Ross. 1990. An Input Preprocessor Linked to a GIS for HSPF
Hydrologic Simulation. Department of Civil Engineering and Mechanics, University of South
Florida, Tampa, FL. Presented at National Conference on Microcomputers in Civil
Engineering, Orlando, FL

Fielland,C.E. and M.A. Ross. 1991. Improved HSPF Infiltration Calibration Procedure with a
Linked GIS. Tampa Port Authority, Tampa, FL.

Fisher, G.T. 1989. Geographic Information System/Watershed Model Interface, In:

Hydraulic Engineering '89 Proceedings, National Conference on Hydraulic
Engineering, HY Div, ASCE, New Orleans, LA, August 14-18, 1989. p. 851-856.

Fisher, I.H., M. Rahman, J.T. Jivajirajah, and I. Salbe. 1993. HSPF Water Quality Modelling on
South Creek. Hydrology and Water Resources Symposium, Newcastle, New South Wales,
Australia. June 30-July 2, 1993. pp. 355-360.

Franz, D.D. and S.M. Lieu. 1980. Evaluation of Remote Sensing Data for Input Into
Hydrological Simulation Program- FORTRAN (HSPF). Prepared by Hydrocomp, Inc. Palo
Alto, CA. Prepared for U.S. EPA, Athens, GA under Contract No. 68-01-5801.

Gilbert, D.P., D. Soboshinski, G Bartelt, and D. Razavian. 1982. Development of State Water
Quality Management Plan for the State of Nebraska, Nebraska Water Resources Center,
University of Nebraska, 310 Agricultural Hall, Lincoln, NB.

Hicks, C.N., W.C. Huber and J.P. Heaney. 1985. Simulation of Possible Effects of Deep
Pumping on Surface Hydrology Using HSPF. In: Proceedings of Stormwater and Water
Quality Model User Group Meeting. January 31 - February 1, 1985. T.O. Barnwell, Jr., ed.
EPA-600/9-85/016. Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA.

Imhoff, J.C., B.R. Bicknell, and A.S. Donigian, Jr. 1983. Preliminary Application of HSPF to the
Iowa River Basin to Model Water Quality and the Effects of Agricultural Best Management
Practices, Office of Research and Development, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Contract No. 68-03-2895, (PB-83-250399).

Johanson, R.C., J.C. Imhoff and H.H. Davis. 1980. User's Manual for the Hydrologic
Simulation Program - FORTRAN (HSPF). Version No. 5.0. EPA-600/9-80-105. U.S.
EPA Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA.

Johanson, R.C. and D.Kliewer. 1980. Maintenance and Testing of Hydrological Simulation
Program-FORTRAN (HSPF). Prepared by Hydrocomp, Inc. Palo Alto, CA. Prepared for U.S.

4
EPA, Athens, GA under Contract No. 68-01-5801.

Johanson, R.C., J.C. Imhoff and H.H. Davis, J.L. Kittle, and A.S. Donigian, Jr. 1981. User's
Manual for the Hydrologic Simulation Program - FORTRAN (HSPF): Version No. 7.0.
Prepared for U.S. EPA Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA. Prepared by
Anderson-Nichols & Co. Inc., Palo Alto, CA.

Johanson, R.C. 1983. A New Mathematical Modeling System. In: Fate of Chemicals In The
Environment Am.Chem. Soc. Symp. Series No. 225. Washington, D.C.

Johanson, R.C. and J.L. Kittle. 1983. "Design, Programming and Maintenance of HSPF",
Journal of Technical Topics in Civil Engineering, Vol. 109, No. 1

Johanson, R.C., J.C. Imhoff, J.L. Kittle, Jr. and A.S. Donigian. 1984. Hydrological Simulation
Program - FORTRAN (HSPF): Users Manual for Release 8.0, EPA-600/3-84-066,
Environmental Research Laboratory, U.S. EPA, Athens, GA. 30613.

Johanson, R.C., A.S. Donigian, Jr. and T.O. Barnwell. 1984. Modeling Transport and
Degradation of Pesticides in the Soil and Surface Environments, In: Prediction of Pesticide
Behavior in the Environment, Proceedings U.S. - U.S.S.R. Symposium, Yerevan, Armenia,
U.S.S.R., October 1981, EPA-600/9-84-026.

Johanson, R.C. 1989. Application of the HSPF Model to Water Management in Africa. In:
Proceedings of Stormwater and Water Quality Model Users Group Meeting. October 3-4, 1988.
Guo, et al., eds. EPA-600/9-89/001. Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA.

Johanson, R.C. 1989. Water Quantity/Quality Modelling in an Overseas Situation. Proc. of

Specialty Conference of ASCE, Water Resources Planning and Management Division,
Sacramento, CA.

King County Surface Water Management. 1990. East Lake Sammamish Basin Conditions
Report -- Preliminary Analysis. Seattle, WA.

King County Surface Water Management. 1993. Cedar River Basin Current and Future
Conditions Technical Report. Seattle, WA.

Kolomeychuk R. and B. Kalanda. 1983. Simulation of Fecal Coliform Bacteria Using HSPF
In: Colloque sur la Modelisation des Eaux Pluviales. Septembre 8-9, 1983. P. Beron, et
al., T. Barnwell, editeurs. GREMU - 83/03 Ecole Polytechnique de Montreal, Quebec,
Canada.

Kittle, J.L. 1983. Use of the Hydrological Simulation Program - FORTRAN on the
HP1000 Microcomputer, In: Emerging Computer Techniques in Stormwater and
Flood Management. W. James (ed). Lewis Publishers, Boca Raton, FL. p. 210-222

Linker, L.C., G.E. Stigall, C.H. Chang, and A.S. Donigian, Jr. 1993. The Chesapeake Bay

5
Watershed Model. Prepared by U.S. EPA, Chesapeake Bay Program Office, Annapolis, MD.

Lorber, M.N. and L.A. Mulkey. 1982. An Evaluation of Three Pesticide Runoff Loading
Models. J. Environ. Qual. 11:519-529.

Lukas, A.B. and C.M. Cary. 1993. City of Federal Way, Panther Lake Surface Water Study -
A Case Study of HSPF Modeling in Urban Detention Basins, In: Proceedings of the 20th
Anniversary Conference on Water Management in the 90's, Seattle, Washington. p. 185-
188.

Lumb, A.M., J.L. Kittle, and K. M. Flynn. 1990. Users Manual for ANNIE, A Computer
Program for Interactive Hydrologic Analyses and Data Management, Water-Resources
Investigations Report 89-4080, U.S. Geological Survey, Reston, VA.

Lumb, A.M., and J.L. Kittle, Jr.. 1993. "Expert System for Calibration and Application of
Watershed Models," In: Proceedings of the Federal Interagency Workshop on Hydrologic
Modeling Demands for the 90's. U.S. Geological Survey Water Resources Investigation Report
93-4018. J.S. Burton, ed.

Lumb, A.M. 1993. "Integrating New Technologies to Support Watershed Management

Decisions - A USGS Perspective," In: Developing Dynamic Watershed Loadings Modeling
Capabilities for Great Lakes Tributaries. The Proceedings of an EPA Workshop at Heidelberg
College in Tiffin, Ohio, August 4-6, 1993. Office of Research and Development, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Athens, GA. J.C. Imhoff, ed.

MacLaren Plansearch. 1984. Snow Hydrology Study. Phases I and II: Study Methodology and
Single Event Simulation. Report prepared for Ontario Ministry of Natural Resources, Ontario,
Canada. Prepared by MacLaren Plansearch, Toronto, Canada.

Manitoba River Forecast Development. Volume I: Phase I, Palnning and Design -- Volume
2: Phase II, Application and Evaluation. Manitoba Dept. of Natural Resources,
Winnipeg, Canada.

Moore, L.W., H. Matheny, T. Tyree, D. Sabatini, and S.J. Klaine. 1988. Agricultural Runoff
Modeling in a Small West Tennessee Watershed. J. Water Pollution Control Federation
60(2):242-249.

Moore, L.W. C.Y. Chew, R.H. Smith,and S.Sahoo. 1992. Modeling of Best Management
Practices on North Reelfoot Creek, Tennessee. Water Env. Res. 64(3):241-247.

Motta, D.J. and M.S. Cheng. 1987. "The Henson Creek Watershed Study" In: Proceedings of
Stormwater and Water Quality Users Group Meeting. October 15-16, 1987. H.C. Torno, ed.
Charles Howard and Assoc., Victoria, BC, Canada.

Mulkey, L.A. and A.S. Donigian, Jr. 1984. Modeling Alachlor Behavior in Three Agricultural
River Basins, U.S. EPA, Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA.

Mulkey, L.A., R.B. Ambrose, and T.O. Barnwell. 1986. "Aquatic Fate and Transport Modeling

6
Techniques for Predicting Environmental Exposure to Organic Pesticides and Other Toxicants -
A Comparative Study." In: Urban Runoff Pollution, Springer-Verlag, New York, NY.

Mulkey, L.A., R.F. Carsel, and C.N. Smith. 1986. Development, Testing, and Applications of
Nonpoint Source Models for Evaluation of Pesticides Risk to the Environment, In: Agricultural
Nonpoint Source Pollution: Model Selection and Application. Developments in Environmental
Modeling, 10, Elsevier, New York. p. 383-397.

Nath, A.K. 1986. Impact of Extensive Irrigation Pumpage on Streamflow by HSPF,

In: Proceedings of Stormwater and Water Quality Model Users Group Meeting, March,
1986. NTIS, Springfield, VA. p. 93-108

Ng, H.Y.F. and J. Marsalek. 1989. Simulation of the Effects of Urbanization on Basin
Streamflow. Water Resources Bulletin WARBAQ, Vol. 25, No. 1, p. 117-124.

Nichols, J.C. and M.P. Timpe. 1985. Use of HSPF to simulate Dynamics of Phosphorus in
Floodplain Wetlands over a Wide Range of Hydrologic Regimes. In: Proceedings of
Stormwater and Water Quality Model Users Group Meeting, January 31 - February 1, 1985.
T.O. Barnwell, Jr., ed. EPA-600/9-85/016, Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA.

Northern Virginia Planning District Commission. 1983. Chesapeake Bay Basin Model. Final
Report Prepared for U.S. EPA Chesapeake Bay Program, Annapolis, MD.

Perrens, S., B. Druery, B. le Plastrier, J. Nielsen, G.S. Greentree, and I. Fisher. 1991. Nepean-
Hawkesbury River Water Quality Modeling. International Hydrology and Water Resources
Symposium, Part 2 (of 3), Perth, Australia.

Schafer, D.E., D.A. Woodruff, R.J. Hughto and G.K. Young. 1982. "Calibration of
Hydrlogy and Sediment Transport on Small Agricultural Watersheds using HSPF", in
Proceedings of Stormwater and Water Quality Management Modeling Users Group
Meeting, 25-26 March 1982, EPA-600/9-82-015, U.S. EPA, Athens, GA 30613, pp54-
68.

Scheckenberger, R.B. and A.S. Kennedy. 1994. The Use of HSP-F in Subwatershed
Planning, In: Current Practices in Modelling the Management of Stormwater Impacts.
W. James (ed). Lewis Publishers, Boca Raton, FL. p. 175-187.

Schnoor, J.L., C. Sato, D. McKetchnie, and D. Sahoo. 1987. Processes, Coefficients, and Models
for Simulating Toxic Organics and Heavy Metals in Surface Waters. EPA/600/3-87/015. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Athens, GA. 30613.

Schueler, T.R. 1983. Seneca Creek Watershed Management Study, Final Report, Volumes I
and II. Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments, Washington, DC.

Schueler, T.R. and M.P. Sullivan. 1983. Management of Stormwater and Water Quality in an
Urbanizing Watershed. Presented at 1983 International Symposium on Urban Hydrology,
Hydraulics, and Sediment Control. University of Kentucky, Lexington, KY. July 25-28, 1983.
pp. 221-230.

7
Smith, R.H., S.N. Sahoo, and L.W. Moore. 1992. GIS Bases Synthetic Watershed Sediment
Routing Model. In: Proceedings of Water Resources sessions at Water Forum '92.
Baltimore, Maryland. August 2-6, 1992. p. 200-207.

Snohomish County Surface Water Management. 1993. North Creek Watershed Management
Plan, Public Hearing Draft. Everett, WA.

Snohomish County Surface Water Management. 1994. Swamp Creek Watershed Management
Plan, Public Hearing Draft. Everett, WA.

Song, J.A., G.F. Rawl, W.R. Howard. 1983. Lake Manatee Watershed Water Resources
Evaluation using Hydrologic Simulation Program - FORTRAN (HSPF) In: Colloque sur la
Modelisation des Eaux Pluviales. Septembre 8-9, 1983. P. Beron, et al., T. Barnwell, editeurs.
GREMU - 83/03 Ecole Polytechnique de Montreal, Quebec, Canada.

Sullivan, M.P. and T.R. Schueler. 1985. Simulation of the Stormwater and Water Quality
Attributes of Ponds with HSPF. In: Proceedings of Stormwater and Water Quality Model
Users Group Meeting, April 12 - 13, 1984. T.O. Barnwell, Jr., ed. EPA-600/9-85/003,
Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA. pp. 147-162.

Sullivan, M.P. and T.R. Schueler. 1982. The Piscataway Creek Watershed Model: A
Stormwater and Nonpoint Source Management Tool. In: Proceedings Stormwater and Water
Quality Management Modeling and SWMM Users Group Meeting, October 18-19, 1982. Paul
E. Wisner, ed. Univ. of Ottawa, Dept. Civil Engr., Ottawa, Ont., Canada.

Weatherbe, D.G. and Z. Novak. 1985. Development of Water Management Strategy for the
Humber River. In: Proceedings Conference on Stormwater and Water Quality Management
Modeling, September 6-7, 1984. E.M. and W. James, ed. Computational Hydraulics Group,
McMaster University, Hamilton, Ont., Canada.

Woodruff, D.A., D.R. Gaboury, R.J. Hughto and G.K. Young. 1981. Calibration of Pesticide
Behavior on a Georgia Agricultural Watershed Using HSP-F. In: Proceedings Stormwater and
Water Quality Model Users Group Meeting, September 28-29, 1981. W. James, ed.
Computational Hydraulics Group, McMaster University, Hamilton, Ont., Canada.

Udhiri, S., M-S Cheng and R.L. Powell. 1985. The Impact of Snow Addition on Watershed
Analysis Using HSPF. In: Proceedings of Stormwater and Water Quality Model Users Group
Meeting, January 31 - February 1, 1985. T.O. Barnwell, Jr., ed. EPA-600/9-85/016,
Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA.

Xie, J.D.M. and W. James. 1993. Modelling Solar Thermal Enrichment of Urban Stormwater. In:
Current Practices in Modelling the Management of Stormwater Impacts. W. James (ed). Lewis
Publishers, Boca Raton, FL. p. 205-217.

Yang, J.C., H.P. Lee, and J.H. Chang. 1992. Pollutant Transport Modelling for a Complex
River System, In: Computer Techniques and Applications. Hydraulic Engineering Software
IV. Computational Mechanics and Publications. Southampton, England, and Elsevier
Applied Science, London, England. p. 49-60.

8
9
HSPF Application Citations Provided by Northwest Hydraulic Consultants, Inc., Kent,
Washington.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Beaverdam Master Drainage Plan Hydrologic Analysis.
October 1992. Prepared for Hugh G. Goldsmith & Associates.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Beaverdam Master Drainage Plan HSPF Model
Calibration. June 1992. Prepared for Hugh G. Goldsmith & Associates.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Northridge Phase I Master Drainage Plan Hydrologic
Analysis. December 1991. Prepared for Hugh G. Goldsmith & Associates.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Northridge Phase I Master Drainage Plan HSPF Model
Calibration. December 1991. Prepared for Hugh G. Goldsmith & Associates.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Sea-Van Development Storm Water Detention Facilities
Design Procedures. April 1992. Prepared for R. W. Beck and Associates, 2101 4th Avenue,
Suite 600, Seattle, WA 98121.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Eastside Green River Watershed Hydrologic Analysis.
December 1991. Prepared for R. W. Beck & Associates and City of Renton Department of
Public Works.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., City of Lynnwood Comprehensive Drainage Plan

Hydrologic Modeling. May 1990. Prepared for R.W. Beck & Associates.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Mill Creek (Auburn) Hydrologic Modeling and
Analysis. November 1993. Prepared for King County Division of Surface Water Management,
City of Auburn, City of Kent.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants, Inc., Scriber Creek Watershed Management Plan.

December 1989. As subconsultants to R. W. Beck. Prepared for Snohomish County Public
Works Surface Water Management, City of Lynnwood Department of Public Works, and City
of Brier Department of Public Works.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Mill Creek (Auburn) Hydrologic Modeling and
Analysis. November 1993. Prepared for King County Division of Surface Water Management,
City of Auburn, City of Kent.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Mill Creek (Auburn) HSPF Model Calibration. July
1993. Prepared for King County Division of Surface Water Management, City of Auburn, City
of Kent.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Analysis of Lagoon Performance and Impact on Flows
in Lower Mill Creek. June 1992. Prepared for City of Kent.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Stormwater Modeling for Horseshoe Acres Pump

10
Station. May 1992. Prepared for City of Kent.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Hydrologic and Hydraulic Analyses for Stormwater
Detention for the Proposed South 5th Avenue Green River Outlet. June 1991. Prepared for
City of Kent, 220 4th Avenue South Kent, Washington, 98032.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Combined Stormwater Detention/Enhanced Wetland

Facility Recommended Plan Hydrology and Hydraulics, Part III - Kent Detention Analysis.
November 1990. Prepared for City of Kent, 224 4th Avenue, Kent, 98032.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Combined Stormwater Detention/Enhanced Wetland

Facility Recommended Plan Hydrology & Hydraulics, Part III. November 1990. Prepared for
City of Kent.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Combined Stormwater Detention/Enhanced Wetland

Pre-Design Alternative Evaluation Hydrology & Hydraulics, Kent Lagoon Design. February
1990. Prepared for City of Kent.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Combined Stormwater Detention/Enhanced Wetland

Pre-Design Definition of Alternatives, Hydrology & Hydraulics. December 1989. Prepared for
City of Kent.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Combined Stormwater Detention/Enhanced Wetland

Pre-Design Definition of Alternatives Hydrology & Hydraulics. December 1989. Prepared for
City of Kent.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Combined Stormwater Detention/Enhanced Wetland

Pre-Design Review of Background Materials Hydrology & Hydraulics. August 1989. Prepared
for City of Kent.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Analysis of Proposed Stormwater Control at the Kent
Sewage Treatment Lagoons, Phase III Detention Pond Performance. March 1989. Prepared for
City of Kent.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Analysis of Proposed Stormwater Control at the Kent
Sewage Treatment Lagoons, Phase II Hydrological Modeling. January 1989. Prepared for City
of Kent.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants, Inc., Scriber Creek Flood Plain Mapping Study. July 1990.
Prepared for City of Lynnwood, Department of Public Works.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Mount Vernon Study Main Stem Channel Assessment
for the Comprehensive Surface Water Management Plan. October 1991. Subconsultants to R.
W. Beck. Prepared for the City of Mount Vernon Engineering.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants, Inc., Scriber Creek Watershed Management Plan.

December 1989. As subconsultants to R. W. Beck. Prepared for Snohomish County
Public Works Surface Water Management, City of Lynnwood Department of Public

11
 Works, and City of Brier Department of Public Works.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Normandy Park HSPF Modeling for the Normandy
Park Area Flood Control Management Plan. February 1992. As subconsultants to R. W. Beck.
Prepared for the City of Normandy Park.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Eastside Green River Watershed Hydrologic Analysis.
December 1991. Prepared for R. W. Beck & Associates and City of Renton Department of
Public Works.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Mill Creek (Auburn) HSPF Model Calibration. July
1993. Prepared for King County Division of Surface Water Management, City of Auburn, City
of Kent.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Preliminary Draft Report on Hydrologic Modeling for
Cedar Hills Landfill. May 1993. Prepared for King County Office of Prosecuting Attorney,
King County Courthouse, Seattle, 98104.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., Miller Creek Regional Stormwater Detention Facilities
Design Hydrologic Modeling. November 1990. Prepared for King County Division of Surface
Water Management.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants, Inc., Issaquah Creek and Tibbetts Creek Basins HSPF Model
Calibration. October 1990. Prepared for King County Division of Surface Water Management,
7th Floor Dexter Horton Building, Seattle, 98104.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants, Inc., Scriber Creek Watershed Management Plan.

December 1989. As subconsultants to R. W. Beck. Prepared for Snohomish County Public
Works Surface Water Management, City of Lynnwood Department of Public Works, and City
of Brier Department of Public Works.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Ltd., Land use and Hydrology, Hydrologic Simulation
Modeling (HSPF) Salmon River Basin, Lower Fraser Valley, Phase I, Final Report. March 1994.
Prepared for Department of Fisheries and Oceans, Fraser River Action Plan, 555 W. Hastings
Street, Vancouver, B.C., V6B 5G2.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Ltd., Calibration of the HSPF Hydrologic Simulation Model
Using Carnation Creek Data. November 1993. Prepared for Forestry Canada, Pacific Forestry
Center, 506 W. Burnside Road, Victoria, B.C., V8Z1M5.

Northwest Hydraulic Consultants Inc., 356th Street Depression - HSPF Hydrologic Modeling.
January 17, 1992, Letter Report to Brown & Caldwell Consultants, Seattle, WA 98119.

file:hspfbib.wp5

12
 EPA/600/3-91/039
June 1991

Modeling of Nonpoint Source Water

Quality in Urban and Non-urban Areas
by

Anthony S. Donigian, Jr.

AQUA TERRA Consultants
Mountain View, California 94093-1004

and

Wayne C. Huber
University of Florida
Gainesville, Florida 32611-2013

Contract No. 68-03-3513

Project Technical Monitor

Thomas O. Barnwell, Jr.

Assessment Branch
Environmental Research Laboratory
Athens, Georgia 30613

ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH LABORATORY

OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
ATHENS, GA 30613
 Disclaimer

The work presented in this document has been

funded by the U. S. Environmental Protection Agency
under Contract No. 68-03-3513 to AQUA TERRA
Consultants. It has been subjected to the Agency's
peer and administrative review and has been
approved as an EPA document. Mention of trade
names or commercial products does not constitute
endorsement or recommendation for use.

ii
 Foreword

As environmental controls become more costly to Pollutants in runoff and seepage from urban,
implement and the penalties of judgment errors agricultural, and forested areas contribute
become more severe, environmental quality significantly to water pollution problems in many
management requires more efficient analytical tools areas of the United States. The development and
based on greater knowledge of the environmental application of computer-operated mathematical
phenomena to be managed. As part of this models to simulate the movement of pollutants and
Laboratory's research on the occurrence, movement, thus to anticipate environmental problems has been
transformation, impact, and control of environmental the subject of extensive research by government
contaminants, the Assessment Branch develops agencies, universities, and private companies for
management and engineering tools to help pollution many years. This review and model-selection
control officials address environmental problems. guidance document was developed under the
direction of EPA's Office of Water and Office of
Research and Development to assist water quality
planners in applying modeling techniques to the
development of cost-effective nonpoint source
controls.

Rosemarie C. Russo, Ph.D.

Director
Environmental Research
Laboratory
Athens, Georgia

iii
 Abstract

Nonpoint source assessment procedures and HSPF, STORM, CREAMS, SWRRB, and others. Brief
modeling techniques are reviewed and discussed for case studies of ongoing and recently completed
both urban and non-urban land areas. Detailed modeling efforts are described. Recommendations for
reviews of specific methodologies and models are nonpoint runoff quality modeling are presented to
presented, along with overview discussions focussing elucidate expected directions of future modeling
on urban methods and models, and on non-urban efforts. This work was performed as Work Assign-
(primarily agricultural) methods and models. Simple ment No. 29 under EPA Contract No. 68-03-3513 with
procedures, such as constant concentration, regres - AQUA TERRA Consultants. Work was complete as of
sion, statistical, and loading function approaches are March 1990.
described, along with complex models such as
SWMM,

iv
 Contents

Page
Disclaimer ......................................................................................................................................................................... ii

Foreword........................................................................................................................................................................... iii

Abstract ............................................................................................................................................................................ iv

Acknowledgments ..........................................................................................................................................................vii

Section 1.0 - Nonpoint Source Modeling Objectives and Considerations .................................................................. 1

Section 2.0 - Overview of Nonpoint Source Quality Modeling ................................................................................... 3

2.1 Modeling Fundamentals.......................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Operational Models.................................................................................................................................. 3
2.3 Surveys and Reviews of Nonpoint Source Models ............................................................................... 3
2.4 Summary of Data Needs.......................................................................................................................... 4

Section 3.0 - Overview of Available Urban Modeling Options ................................................................................... 5

3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 5
3.2 Constant Concentration or Unit Loads .................................................................................................. 5
3.3 Spreadsheets ............................................................................................................................................. 5
3.4 Statistical Method ..................................................................................................................................... 6
3.5 Regression? Rating Curve Approaches ................................................................................................... 7
3.6 Buildup and Washoff ............................................................................................................................... 7
3.7 Related Mechanisms ................................................................................................................................ 8

Section 4.0 - Overview of Available Non-urban Modeling Options .......................................................................... 10

4.1 Nonpoint Source Loading Functions ..................................................................................................... 10
4.2 Simulation Models .................................................................................................................................. 12

Section 5.0 - Nonpoint Source Runoff Quality Simulation Models and Methods .................................................... 18
5.1 Urban Runoff Quality Models................................................................................................................ 18
5.2 Non-urban Runoff Quality Models and Methods ................................................................................ 19
5.3 Discussion ................................................................................................................................................ 22

Section 6.0 - Brief Case Studies ..................................................................................................................................... 26

6.1 Urban Model Applications ..................................................................................................................... 26
6.2 Non-urban Model Applications ............................................................................................................. 27

Section 7.0 - Summary and Recommendations for Nonpoint Source Runoff Quality Modeling ............................ 29

Section 8.0 - References .................................................................................................................................................. 31

Section 9.0 - Appendix: Detailed Model Descriptions ................................................................................................ 37

Storage, Treatment, Overflow, Runoff Model (STORM) ................................................................................ 43
Distributed Routing Rainfall Runoff Model? Quality DR3M-QUAL............................................................. 46
EPA Screening Procedures ................................................................................................................................ 49
Agricultural NonPoint Source Pollution Model? (AGNPS) ............................................................................ 52
Areal Nonpoint Source Watershed Environment Response Simulation? (ANSWERS) ................................ 55
Chemicals, Runoff, and Erosion from Agricultural Management Systems? (CREAMS) ............................. 57
Groundwater Loading Effects of Agricultural Management Systems? (GLEAMS) ..................................... 57

v
Hydrological Simulation Program? Fortran (HSPF)........................................................................................ 60
Stream Transport and Agricultural Runoff of Pesticides for Exposure Assessment (STREAM) ................ 60
Pesticide Root Zone Model? PRZM .................................................................................................................. 64
Simulator for Water Resources in Rural Basins? (SWRRB) ............................................................................. 67
Pesticide Runoff Simulator? (PRS) .................................................................................................................... 67
Unified Transport Model for Toxic Materials ? UTM-TOX.............................................................................. 70

vi
 Acknowledgments

This nonpoint model review was sponsored by the Dr. Wayne Huber of the University of Florida
EPA Office of Water Regulations and Standards, performed the urban model review, and Mr. Anthony
through the Environmental Research Laboratory in Donigian of AQUA TERRA Consultants performed
Athens, Georgia. Mr. Thomas O. Barnwell was the the review of the non-urban models. Both authors
EPA Project Technical Monitor, with the Assessment reviewed the entire report. Mr. Avinash Patwardhan
Branch in Athens, and Dr. Hiranmay Biswas was the assisted Mr. Donigian with the information gathering
liaison with EPA Headquarters. Their support and and review of the non-urban models. Also, the draft
guidance for this effort is gratefully acknowledged. final report was peer reviewed by Dr. Vladimir
Novotny of Milwaukee, Wisconsin; and Dr. Matt C.
Smith of the University of Georgia, Athens, Georgia.
Their insightful comments and suggestions were
sincerely appreciated.

vii
 Section 1.0
Nonpoint Source Modeling Objectives and Considerations

Studies and projects involving stormwater runoff for objectives such as the following:
quality from all categories of land use? urban,
agricultural cropland, pasture, forest? can relate to 1. Characterize runoff quantity and quality as to
many environmental problems. In the broadest sense, temporal and spatial detail, concentration/load
water quality studies may be performed to protect the ranges, etc.
environment under various state and federal
legislation. For example, Section 304(l) of the Clean 2. Provide input to a receiving water quality analysis,
Water Act requires States to identify waterbodies e.g., drive a receiving water quality model.
impaired by both point and nonpoint source pollution
and develop appropriate control strategies; while 3. Determine effects, magnitudes, locations,
Section 405 will eventually require analysis of combinations, etc. of control options.
stormwater outfalls in all urban areas in the U.S. In a
narrower sense, a study may address a particular 4. Perform frequency analysis on quality parameters,
water quality issue in a particular receiving water, e.g., to determine return periods of
such as bacterial contamination of a beach, release of concentrations/loads.
oxygen demanding material into a stream or river,
unacceptable aesthetics of an open channel receiving 5. Provide input to cost-benefit analyses.
urban and non-urban runoff, eutrophication of a lake,
contamination of basements from surcharged sewers Objectives 1 and 2 characterize the magnitude of the
due to wet-weather flooding, etc. problem, and objectives 2 through 5 are related to the
analysis and solution of the problem. Computer
By no means should it be assumed that every water models allow some types of analysis, such as
quality problem requires a water quality modeling frequency analysis, to be performed that could rarely
effort. Some problems may be mostly hydraulic in be performed otherwise since periods of water quality
nature, e.g., the basement flooding problem. That is, measurements are seldom very long. It should always
the solution may often reside primarily in a be borne in mind, however, that use of measured data
hydrologic or hydraulic analysis in which the is usually preferable to use of simulated data,
concentration or load of pollutants is irrelevant. In particularly for objectives 1 and 2 in which accurate
some instances, local or state regulations may concentration values are needed. In general, models
prescribe a nominal ? solution? without recourse to are not good substitutes for good field sampling
any water quality analysis as such. For example, programs. On the other hand, models can sometimes
stormwater runoff in Florida is considered be used to extend and extrapolate measured data.
? controlled ? through retention or detention with
filtration of the runoff from the first inch of rainfall for Careful consideration should be given to objective
areas of 100 acres or less. Other problems may be number 2. The first urban runoff quality model
resolved through the use of measured data without (SWMM) inadvertently overemphasized the concept
the need to model. In other words, many problems do of simulation of detailed intra-storm quality
not require water quality modeling at all. variations, e.g., production of a ? pollutograph?
(concentration vs. time) at 5 or 10 minute intervals
If a problem does require modeling, specific modeling during a storm for input to a receiving water quality
objectives will need to be defined to guide the model. The early agricultural runoff quality models
modeling exercise and approach. Models may be used (e.g., ARM and ACTMO models) followed a similar
viii
detailed approach primarily to evaluate and extensive field monitoring. For some
demonstrate the models' abilities to represent conceptualizations of the urban quality cycle, e.g.,
observed data from small (less than 10 hectare) buildup and washoff, it may not be routinely possible
monitored fields. to physically measure fundamental input parameters,
and such parameters will only be obtained through
But the fact is that the quality response of most model calibration. Involvement in acquisition of
receiving waters is insensitive to such short-term quality data, be it through literature reviews or field
variations, as illustrated in Table 1. In most instances, surveys, profoundly escalates the level of effort
the total storm load will suffice to determine the required for the study. Details on data requirements
receiving water response, eliminating the necessity of for modeling will be deferred until modeling
becoming embroiled in calibration against detailed techniques are described.
pollutographs especially for conventional pollutants.
Instead, only the total storm loads need be matched, a
much easier task. Exceptions to this general
observation may be appropriate when considering
toxic pollutants, e.g., pesticides, when short-term
concentrations may be lethal to aquatic organisms.
Also, simulation of short time increment changes in
concentrations and loads is generally necessary for
analysis of control options, such as storage or
high-rate treatment, whose efficiency may depend on
the transient behavior of the quality constituents.

Any consideration of water quality modeling means

that some additional data will be required for model
input. As described later, such requirements may be
as simple as a constant concentration, or much more
complex such as soil nitrification or mineralization
rates. Data may be obtained from existing studies or
their acquisition may require

Table 1. Required temporal detail for receiving water analysis

(After Driscoll, 1979, and Hydroscience, 1979)

Type of Key Response

Receiving Water Constituents Time

Lakes, Bays Nutrients Weeks? Years

Estuaries Nutrients, OD* Days? Weeks

Bacteria

Large Rivers OD, Nitrogen Days

Streams OD, Nitrogen Hours? Days

Bacteria Hours

Ponds OD, Nutrients Hours? Weeks

Beaches Bacteria Hours

*OD = oxygen demand, e.g., BOD, that affects dissolved oxygen.

2
 Section 2.0
Overview of Nonpoint Source Quality Modeling

2.1 Modeling Fundamentals another independent set for verification. If no

such data exist for the application site, perhaps
they exist for a similar catchment nearby.
Modeling caveats and an introduction to modeling are
presented by several authors including James and 2.2 Operational Models
Burges (1982), Kibler (1982), Huber (1985, 1986) and
summarized in a recent manual of practice (WPCF,
1989). Space does not permit a full presentation here;
Implementation of an off-the-shelf model or method
a few items are highlighted below.
will be easiest if the model can be characterized as
1. Have a clear statement of project objectives. ? operational? in the sense of:
Verify the need for quality modeling. (Perhaps
the objectives can be satisfied without quality 1. Documentation. This should include a user's
modeling). manual, explanation of theory and numerical
procedures, data needs, data input format, etc.
2. Use the simplest model that will satisfy the Documentation most often separates the many
project objectives. Often a screening model, e.g., computerized procedures found in the literature
regression or statistical, can determine whether from a model that can be accessed and easily
more complex simulation models are needed. used by others.

3. To the extent possible, utilize a quality 2. Support. This is sometimes provided by the
prediction method consistent with available model developer but often by a federal agency
data. This would ordinarily rule against such as the HEC or EPA.
buildup-washoff formulations, although these
might still be useful for detailed simulation, 3. Experience. Every model must be used a ? first
especially if calibration data exist. time? but it is best to rely on a model with a
proven track record.
4. Only predict the quality parameters of interest
and only over a suitable time scale. That is, The models described in Sections 3.0 and 4.0 are all
storm event loads and EMCs will usually be the operational in this sense. New methods and models
most detailed prediction necessary, and seasonal are constantly under development and should not be
or annual loads will sometimes be all that is neglected simply because they lack one of these
required. Do not attempt to simulate intra-storm characteristics, but the user should be aware of
variations in quality unless it is necessary. potential difficulties if any characteristic is lacking.

5. Perform a sensitivity analysis on the selected 2.3 Surveys and Reviews of Nonpoint
model and familiarize yourself with the model
characteristics. Source Models
6. If possible, calibrate and verify the model
results. Use one set of data for calibration and

3
Several publications, often somewhat out of date,
will have a fundamental list of required input data.
provide reviews of available models. Some models Although it is difficult to generalize for the entire
(e.g., SWMM, STORM, HSPF, CREAMS) have universe of both simple and complex nonpoint source
persisted for many years and are included in both models, Novotny and Chesters (1981) have prepared a
older and newer reviews, while other models (e.g., summary table of required input data from which
USGS, Statistical, spreadsheet, AGNPS, SWRRB) are Table 2 was adapted.
more recent. Reviews that consider surface runoff
quality models include Huber and Heaney (1982), The second type of information is required for
Kibler (1982), Whipple et al. (1983), Barnwell (1984, calibration and verification of more complex models,
1987), Huber (1985, 1986), Donigian and Beyerlein namely, sets of measured runoff and quality samples
(1985), Bedient and Huber (1988), and Viessman et al. (coincident with the input precipitation and
(1989). HEC models are described in detail by meteorologic data) with which to test the model. Such
Feldman (1981). Descriptions of EPA nonpoint source data exist (e.g., Huber et al., 1982; Driver et al. (1985),
water quality models are provided by Ambrose et al. Noel et al., 1987) but seldom for the site of interest. If
(1988) and Ambrose and Barnwell (1989). Selected the project objectives absolutely require such data
pesticide runoff models have been reviewed by (e.g., if a model must be calibrated in order to drive a
Mulkey et al. (1986) and Lorber and Mulkey (1982). receiving water quality model), then expensive local
Agricultural nonpoint source models have been show- monitoring may be necessary.
cased in a number of conferences and symposia over
the past few years, including a 1983 Symposium on This summary relates primarily to quality prediction
Natural Resources Modeling (DeCoursey, 1985); a and may not represent a comprehensive statement of
1984 Conference on Agricultural Nonpoint source data needs for quantity prediction. However, since
Pollution: Model Selection and Application, in Venice, rainfall and runoff are required for virtually every
Italy (Giorgini and Zingales, 1986); and a June 1988 study, certain quantity-related parameters are also
International Symposium on Water Quality Modeling necessary for various methods.
of Agricultural Nonpoint Sources (DeCoursey, In
Press). Beasley and Thomas (1989) describe recent
model enhancements and applications for five
selected models to agricultural and forested
watersheds in the southeastern U.S. These reports and
proceedings provide a wealth of information on
current efforts and recent developments in modeling
nonpoint contributions and water quality impacts of
agricultural activities.

2.4 Summary of Data Needs

In application of most models, there are two

fundamental types of data requirements. First, there
are the data needed simply to make the model
function, that is, input parameters and timeseries data
for the model. These typically include precipitation
(rainfall) and other meteorologic informa -
tion, drainage area, imperviousness, runoff coefficient
and other quantity prediction parameters, plus
quality prediction parameters such as constant
concentration, constituent median and CV, regression
relationships, buildup and washoff parameters,
soil/chemical characteristics, partition co efficients,
reaction rates, etc. In other words, each mode

4
Table 2. Input data needs for nonpoint source models

(after Novotny and Chesters, 1981)

1. System Parameters
a. Watershed Size
b. Subdivision of the Watershed into Homogenous Subareas
c. Imperviousness of Each Subarea
d. Slopes
e. Fraction of Impervious Areas Directly Connected to a Channel
f. Maximum Surface Storage (depression plus interception storage)
g. Soil Characteristics Including Texture, Permeability, Erodibility, and Composition
h. Crop and Vegetation Cover
i. Curb Density or Street Gutter Length
k. Sewer System or Natural Drainage Characteristics

2. State Variables
a. Ambient Temperature
b. Reaction Rate Coefficients
c. Adsorption/Desorption Coefficients
d. Growth Stage of Crops
e. Daily Accumulation Rates of Litter
f. Traffic Density and Speed
g. Potency Factors for Pollutants (pollutant strength on sediment)
h. Solar Radiation (for some models)

3. Input Variables
a. Precipitation
b. Atmospheric Fallout
c. Evaporation Rates

5
 Section 3.0
Overview of Available Urban Modeling Options

3.1 Introduction system, prediction of overflows and diversions to

receiving waters, etc., yet it performs no quality sim-
ulation as such. In many instances, it may be most im-
Several quality modeling options exist for simulation portant to get the volume and timing of such
of quality in urban storm and combined sewer overflows and diversions correctly, and simply
systems. These have been reviewed by Huber (1985; estimate loads by multiplying by a concentration.
1986) and range from simple to involved, although
some ? simple? methods, e.g., the EPA statistical An obvious question is what (constant) concentration
methods, can incorporate quite sophisticated to use? The EPA NURP studies (EPA, 1983) have
concepts. The principal methods available to the produced a large and invaluable data base from
contemporary engineer are outlined below, in a rough which to select numbers, but the 30 city coverage of
order of complexity. Their data requirements are NURP will most often not include a site
summarized in Table 3. The methods are: representative of the area under study. Nonetheless, a
large data base does exist from which to review con -
1. Constant concentration centrations. Another option is to use measured values
from the study area. This might be done from a
2. Spreadsheet limited sampling program. However, the NURP study
conclusively demonstrated the variation that exists in
3. Statistical event mean concentrations (EMCs, total storm event
load divided by total storm event runoff volume) at a
4. Rating curve or regression site, within a city, and within a region or the country
as a whole. Thus, while use of a constant
5. Buildup/washoff concentration may produce load variations, EMC
variations will not be replicated. These variations may
3.2 Constant Concentration or Unit Loads be important in the study of control options and
receiving water responses.

Unit loads are perhaps an even simpler concept.

As its name implies, all runoff is assumed to have the These consist of values of mass per area per time,
typically lb/ac-yr or kg/ha-yr, for various pollutants,
same, constant concentration for a given pollutant. At
although other normalizations such as lb/curb-mile
its very simplest, an annual runoff volume can be
are sometimes encountered. Annual (or other time
multiplied by a concentration to produce an annual
unit) loads are thus produced upon multiplication by
runoff load. However, this option may be coupled
the contributing area. Such loadings are obviously
with a hydrologic model, wherein loads (product of
highly site-specific and depend upon both demo-
concentration and flow) will vary if the model
graphic and hydrologic factors. They must be based
produces variable flows. This option may be quite
on an average or ? typical? runoff volume and cannot
useful because it may be used with any hydrologic or
vary from year to year, but they can conveniently be
hydraulic model to produce loads, merely by
subject to reduction by best management practices
multiplying by the constant concentration. For
(BMPs), if the BMP effect is known. Although early
instance, the highly sophisticated SWMM Extran
EPA references provide some information for various
Block may be used for hydraulic analysis of sewer

6
land used (EPA, 1973; EPA, 1976a; McElroy et al., the dynamics of the removal device (e.g., a wet
1976), unit loading rates are exceedingly variable and detention pond), which is usually beyond the scope of
difficult to transpose from one area to another. the hydrologic component of the spreadsheet model.
Constant concentrations can sometimes be used for Nonetheless, if simple BMP removal fractions can be
this purpose, since mg/1 x 0.2265 = lb/ac per inch of believed, the spreadsheet can easily be used to
runoff. Thus, if a concentration estimate is available, estimate the effectiveness of control options. Loads
the annual loading rate, for example, may be with and without controls can be estimated and
calculated by multiplying by the inches per year of problem areas, by contributing basin and land use,
runoff. Finally, the Universal Soil Loss Equation can be determined. Since most engineers are familiar
(Wischmeier and Smith, 1978; Heaney et al., 1975) was with spreadsheets, such models can be developed
developed to estimate tons per acre per year of sedi - in-house in a logical manner.
ment loss from land surfaces. If a pollutant may be
considered as a fraction ( ? potency factor ? ) of The spreadsheet approach is best suited to estimation
suspended solids concentration or load, this offers of long-term loads, such as annual or seasonal,
another option for prediction of annual loads. Lager because very simple prediction methods generally
et al. (1977), Manning et al. (1977) and Zison (1980) perform better over a long averaging time and poorly
provide summaries of such values. at the level of a single storm event. Hence, although
the spreadsheet could be used at the microscale (at or
3.3 Spreadsheets within a storm event) it is most often applied for
much longer time periods. It is harder to obtain the
variation of predicted loads and concentrations using
the spreadsheet method because this can ordinarily
Microcomputer spreadsheet software, e.g., Lotus, only be done by varying the input concentrations or
Quattro, Excel, is now ubiquitous in engineering rainfall values. A Monte Carlo simulation may be
practice. Very extensive and highly sophisticated attempted (i.e., systematic variation of all input
engineering analysis is routinely implemented on parameters according to an assumed frequency
spreadsheets, and water quality simulation is no distribution) if the number of such parameters is not
exception. In essence, the spreadsheet may be used to too large. These results may then be used to estimate
automate and extend the concept of the constant the range and/or frequency distribution of predicted
concentration idea. In the usual manifestation of this loads and concentrations.
spreadsheet application, runoff volumes are
calculated very simplistically, usually using a runoff In a generic sense, the spreadsheet idea may be used
coefficient times a rainfall depth. The coefficient may in methods programmed in other languages, e.g.,
vary according to land use, or an SCS procedure may Fortran. For example, comprehensive assessments of
be used, but the hydrology is inherently simplistic in coastal zone pollution from urban areas are made by
the spreadsheet predictions. The runoff volume is NOAA (1987) by assembling land use data with
then multiplied by a constant concentration to predict different runoff coefficients, predicting daily and
runoff loads. The advantage of the spreadsheet is that seasonal runoff volumes from daily rainfall, and
a mixture of land uses (with varying concentrations) predicting seasonal pollutant loads using constant
may easily be simulated, and an overall load and concentrations. Although the demographic data base
flow-weighted concentration obtained from the study and use of magnetic tapes may dictate use of
area (Walker et al., 1989). The study area itself may mainframes, the computational concept is still that of
range from a single catchment to an entire urban area. a spreadsheet.
The relative contributions of different land uses may
be easily identified, and handy spreadsheet graphics Again, the question arises of what concentrations to
tools used for display of the results. use, this time potentially for multiple land uses and
subareas. And again, the NURP data base will usually
As an enhancement, control options may be simulated be the first one to turn to, with the possibility of local
by application of a constant removal fraction for an monitoring to augment it.
assumed BMP. Although spreadsheet computations
can be amazingly complex, BMP simulation is rarely
more complicated than a simple removal fraction
because anything further would require simulation of

7
3.4 Statistical Method
assessment of levels of exceedance of water quality
standards. The effect of BMPs can again be estimated
crudely through constant removal fractions that effect
The so-called ? EPA Statistical Method ? is somewhat on the coefficient of variation. Overall, the method
generic and until recently was not implemented in has been very successfully applied as a screening tool.
any off-the-shelf model or even very well in any single
report (Hydroscience, 1979; EPA, 1983). A new FHWA Input to the method as implemented for the FHWA
study (Driscoll et al., 1989) partially remedies this (Driscoll et al., 1989) includes statistical properties of
situation. The concept is straightforward, namely that rainfall (mean and coefficient of variation of storm
of a derived frequency distribution for EMCs. This event depth, duration, intensity and interevent time),
idea has been used extensively for urban runoff area, and runoff coefficient for the hydrologic
quantity (e.g., Howard, 1976; Loganathan and component, plus EMC median and coefficient of
Delleur, 1984; Zukovs et al., 1986) but not as much for variation for the pollutant. Generalized rainfall
quality predictions. statistics have already been calculated for many
locations in the U.S. Otherwise, the EPA SYNOP
The EPA Statistical Method utilizes the fact that EMCs model (EPA, 1976b; Hydroscience, 1979; EPA, 1983;
are not constant but tend to exhibit a lognormal Woodward-Clyde, 1989) must be run on long-term
frequency distribution. When coupled with an hourly rainfall records. If receiving water impact is to
assumed distribution of runoff volumes (also be evaluated the mean and CV of the streamflow are
lognormal), the distribution of runoff loads may be required plus the upstream concentration. A
derived. When coupled again to the distribution of Vollenweider-type lake impact analysis is also
streamflow, an approximate (lognormal) probability provided based on phosphorus loadings.
distribution of in-stream concentrations may be
derived (Di Toro, 1984) ? a very useful result, although As with the first two methods discussed, the choice of
assumptions and limitations of the method have been median concentration may be difficult, and the
pointed out by Novotny (1985) and Roesner and Statistical Method requires a coefficient of variation as
Dendrou (1985). Further analytical methods have been well. Fortunately, from NURP and highway studies,
developed to account for storage and treatment (Di CV values for most urban runoff pollutants are fairly
Toro and Small, 1979; Small and Di Toro, 1979). The consistent, and a value of 0.75 is typical. If local
method was used as the primary screening tool in the and/or NURP data are not available or inappropriate,
EPA NURP studies (EPA, 1983) and has also been local monitoring may be required, as in virtually
adapted to combined sewer overflows (Dris coll, 1981) every quality prediction method. The estimation of
and highway-related runoff (Driscoll et al., 1989). This the whole EMC frequency distribution for a pollutant
latter publication is one of the best for a is a definite advantage of the Statistical Method over
concise explanation of the procedure and assumptions some applications of constant concentration and
and includes spreadsheet software for easy simple spreadsheet approaches. Frequency analyses of
implementation of the method. water quantity and quality parameters may also be
performed on the output of continuous simulation
A primary assumption is that EMCs are distributed models such as HSPF, SWMM and STORM. The
lognormally at a site and across a selection of sites. derived distribution approach of the Statistical
The concentrations may thus be characterized by their Method avoids the considerable effort required for
median value and by their coefficient of variation (CV continuous simulation at the expense of simplifying
= standard deviation divided by the mean). There is assumptions that may or may not reflect the
little doubt that the lognormality assumption is good prototype situation adequately.
(Driscoll, 1986), but similar to the spreadsheet
approach, the method is then usually combined with 3.5 Regression? Rating Curve Approaches
weak hydrologic assumptions, e.g., prediction of
runoff using a runoff coefficient. (The accuracy of a
runoff coefficient increases as urbanization and imper-
With the completion of the NURP studies in 1983,
viousness increase.) However, since many streams of
concern in an urban area consist primarily of there are measurements of rainfall, runoff and water
stormwater runoff during wet weather, the ability to quality at well over 100 sites in over 30 cities. Some
predict the distribution of EMCs is very useful for regression analysis has been performed to try to relate

8
loads and EMCs to catchment, demographic and and total ammonia plus organic nitrogen (TKN)
hydrologic characteristics (e.g., McElroy et al., 1976; generally were the most accurate, whereas models for
Miller et al., 1978; Brown, 1984), the best of which are suspended solids were the least accurate. The most
recent results of the USGS (Tasker and Driver, 1988; accurate models were those for the more arid Western
Driver and Tasker, 1988), to be described briefly U.S., and the least accurate models were those for
below. Regression approaches have also been used to areas that had large mean annual rainfall.
estimate dry-weather pollutant deposition in com-
bined sewers (Pisano and Queiroz, 1977), a task at These USGS equations represent the best generalized
which no model is very successful. What are termed regression equations currently available for urban
? rating curves? herein are just a special form of runoff quality prediction. Note that such equations do
regression analysis, in which concentration and/or not require preliminary estimates of EMCs or local
loads are related to flow rates and/or volumes. This is quality monitoring data except for the very useful
an obvious exercise attempted at most monitoring exercise of verification of the regression predictions.
sites and has a historical basis in sediment discharge Regression equations only predict the mean and do
rating curves developed as a function of flow rate in not provide the frequency distribution of predicted
natural river channels. variable, a disadvantage compared to the statistical
approach. (The USGS documentation describes
A rating curve approach is most often performed procedures for calculation of statistical error bounds,
using total storm event load and runoff volume however). Finally, regression approaches, including
although intra-storm variations can sometimes be rating curves, are notoriously difficult to apply
simulated in this manner as well (e.g., Huber and beyond the original data set from which the
Dickinson, 1988). It is usually observed (Huber, 1980; relationships were derived. That is, they are subject to
EPA, 1983; Driscoll et al., 1989) that concentration very large potential errors when used to extrapolate
(EMC) is poorly or not correlated with runoff flow or to different conditions. Thus, the usual caveats about
volume, implying that a constant concentration use of regression relationships continue to hold when
assumption is adequate. Since the load is the product applied to prediction of urban runoff quality.
of concentration and flow, load is usually well
correlated with flow regardless of whether or not 3.6 Buildup and Washoff
concentration correlates well. Manifestation of
spurious correlation (Benson, 1962) is often ignored in
urban runoff studies. If load is proportional to flow to
the first power (i.e., linear), then the constant In the late 1960s, a Chicago study by the American
concentration assumption holds; if not, some Public Works Association (1969) demonstrated the
relationship of concentration with flow is implied. (assumed linear) buildup of ? dust and dirt ? and
Rating curve results can be used by themselves for associated pollutants on urban street surfaces. During
load and EMC estimates and can be incorporated into a similar time frame, Sartor and Boyd (1972) also
some models (e.g., SWMM, HSPF). demonstrated buildup mechanisms on the surface as
well as an exponential washoff of pollutants during
Rainfall, runoff and quality data were assembled for rainfall events. These concepts were incorporated into
98 urban stations in 30 cities (NURP and other) in the the original SWMM model (Metcalf and Eddy et al.,
U.S. for multiple regression analysis by the USGS 1971) as well as into the STORM, USGS and HSPF
(Driver and Tasker, 1988; Tasker and Driver 1988). models to a greater or lesser degree (Huber, 1985).
Thirty-four multiple regression models (mostly ? Buildup? is a term that represents all of the complex
log-linear) of storm runoff constituent loads and spectrum of dry-weather processes that occur
storm runoff volumes were developed, and 31 models between storms, including deposition, wind erosion,
of storm runoff EMCs were developed. Regional and street cleaning, etc. The idea is simply that all such
seasonal effects were also considered. The two most processes lead to an accumulation of solids and
significant explanatory variables were total storm perhaps other pollutants that are then ? washed off?
rainfall and total contributing drainage area. during storm events.
Impervious area, land use, and mean annual climatic
characteristics also were significant explanatory
variables in some of the models. Models for
estimating loads of dissolved solids, total nitrogen,

9
Although ostensibly physically based, models that also offer the most flexibility. This is sometimes
include buildup and washoff mechanisms really important for the design of storage facilities in which
employ conceptual algorithms because the true first-flush mechanisms may be influential.
physics is related to principles of sediment transport
and erosion that are poorly understood in this As mentioned above, generalized data for buildup
framework. Furthermore, the inherent heterogeneity and washoff are sparse (Manning et al., 1977) and
of urban surfaces leads to use of average buildup and such measurements almost never conducted as part of
washoff parameters that may vary significantly from a routine monitoring program. For buildup,
what may occur in an isolated street gutter, for normalized loadings, e.g., mass/day-area or
example. Thus, except in rare instances of mass/day per curb-length, or just mass/day, are
measurements of accumulations of surface solids, the required, along with an assumed functional form for
use of buildup and washoff formulations inevitably buildup vs. time, e.g., linear, exponential,
results in a calibration exercise against measured Michaelis-Menton, etc. For washoff, the relationship
end-of-pipe quality data. It then holds that in the of washoff (mass/time) vs. runoff rate must be
absence of such data, inaccurate predictions can be assumed, usually in the form of a power equation.
expected. When end-of-pipe concentration and load data are all
that are available, all buildup and washoff coefficients
Different models offer different options for conceptual end up being calibration parameters.
buildup and washoff mechanisms, with SWMM
having the greatest flexibility. In fact, with calibration, 3.7 Related Mechanisms
good agreement can be produced between predicted
and measured concentrations and loads with such
models, including intra-storm variations that cannot
be duplicated with most of the methods discussed In the discussion above, washoff is assumed
earlier. (When a rating curve is used in SWMM proportional to the runoff rate, as for sediment
instead of buildup and washoff, it is also possible to transport. Erosion from pervious areas may instead be
simulate intra-storm variations in concentration and proportional to the rainfall rate. HSPF does the best
load.) A survey of linear buildup rates for many job of including this mechanism in its algorithms for
pollutants by Manning et al. (1977) is probably the erosion of sediment from pervious areas. SWMM
best source of generalized buildup data, and some includes a weaker algorithm based on the Universal
information is available in the literature to aid in Soil Loss Equation.
selection of washoff coefficients (Huber 1985; Huber
and Dickinson, 1988). However, such first estimates Many pollutants, particularly metals and organics, are
may not even get the user in the ball park (i.e., adsorbed onto solid particles and are transported in
quality? not quantity? predictions may be off by more particulate form. The ability of a model to include
than an order of magnitude); the only way to be sure ? potency factors? (HSPF) or ? pollutant fractions?
is to use local monitoring data for calibration and (SWMM) enhance the ability to estimate the
verification. Thus, as for most of the other quality concentration or load of one constituent as a fraction
prediction options discussed herein, the of that of another constituent, e.g., solids (Zison,
buildup-washoff model may provide adequate com - 1980).
parisons of control measures, ranking of loads, etc.
but cannot be used for prediction of absolute values of The groundwater contribution to flow in urban areas
concentrations and loads, e.g., to drive a receiving can be important in areas with unlined and open
water quality model, without adequate calibration channel drainage. Of the urban models discussed,
and verification data. Since buildup and washoff are HSPF far and away has the most complex
somewhat appealing conceptually, it is somewhat mechanisms for simulation of subsurface water
easier to simulate potential control measures such as quality processes in both the saturated and
street cleaning and surface infiltration using these unsaturated zones. Although SWMM includes
mechanisms than with, say, a constant concentration subsurface flow routing, the quality of subsurface
or rating curve method. In the relatively unusual water can only be approximated using a constant
instance in which intra-storm variations in con- concentration.
centration and load must be simulated, as opposed to
total storm event EMC or load, buildup and washoff The precipitation load may be input in some models

10
(SWMM, HSPF), usually as a constant concentration.
Point source and dry-weather flow (baseflow) loads
and concentrations can also be input to SWMM,
STORM and HSPF to simulate background
conditions. Other quality sources of potential
importance include catchbasins (SWMM) and
snowmelt (SWMM, STORM, HSPF).

Scour and deposition within the sewer system can be

very important in combined sewer systems and some
separate storm sewer systems. The state of the art in
simulation of such processes is poor (Huber, 1985).
SWMM offers a crude but calibratable attempt at
simulation of such processes.

11
Table 3. Data needs for various quality prediction methods

Method Data Potential Source

Unit Load Mass per time per unit tributary area. Derive from constant concentration and
runoff. Literature values.

Constant Concentration Runoff prediction mechanism (simple to Existing model; runoff coefficient or
complex). simple method.

Constant concentration for each NURP; local monitoring.

constituent.

Spreadsheet Simple runoff prediction mechanism. e.g., runoff coefficient, perhaps as

function of land use.

Constant concentration or concentration NURP; local monitoring.

range.

Removal fractions for controls. NURP; Schueler (1987); local and state
publications.

Statistical Rainfall statistics. NURP; Driscoll et al. (1989); Woodward-

Clyde (1989); EPA SYNOP model.

Area, imperviousness. Pollutant median NURP; Driscoll (1986); Driscoll et al.

and CV. (1989); local monitoring.

Receiving water characteristics and Local or generalized data.

statistics.

Regression Storm rainfall, area, imperviousness, land Local data.

use.

Rating Curve Measured flow rates/volumes and quality NURP; local data.
EMCs/loads.

Buildup Loading rates and rate constants. Literature values*.

Street cleaning removals. Literature values.

Washoff Power relationship with runoff. Literature values.*.

Usually must be calibrated using end-of-pipe monitored quality data.

*

12
 Section 4.0
Overview of Available Non-urban Modeling Options

As with the options for modeling nonpoint source process simulation models. The individual detailed
pollutants from urban areas, a wide range of models will be discussed briefly in Section 5.2 with
techniques are available for modeling these additional details provided in the Appendix.
contributions from non-urban land uses, from simple
annual `loading functions' to detailed process 4.1 Nonpoint Source Loading Functions
simulation models. The key issue in estimating
nonpoint pollution loads from a watershed, or parcel
of land, is the type and extent of human activities
occurring (or not occurring) on the land. The same The term `loading function' has been used in the
hydrologic, physical, and chemical/biological nonpoint pollution literature to describe simple
processes that determine nonpoint pollutant loads calculational procedures usually for estimating the
occur on all land surfaces (and in the soil profile) average annual load, and sometimes the storm event
whether it is urban, forest, agricultural cropland, load, of a pollutant from an individual land use
pasture, mining, etc. The relative importance and category. A number of different loading functions
magnitude of these processes, in determining have been developed and proposed over the past two
nonpoint loads, will vary among land use categories decades, the most widely used of which are the EPA
and associated human activities. Even within an Screening Procedures, also referred to as the EPA
urban region, the parameters required for the various Water Quality Assessment Methodology. These
modeling options described in Section 4 will differ for procedures are described below, followed by a brief
commercial, industrial, transportation, and various discussion of a few other loading functions in the
densities of residential land. Many of these same literature.
urban modeling options have been used for non-
urban land areas with parameters (e.g., constant 4.1.1EPA Screening Procedures
concentrations) estimated for the specific non-urban
land use. The EPA Screening Procedures (Mills et al., 1985; Mills
et al., 1982) are a revision and expansion of water
The focus of the majority of non-urban nonpoint quality assessment procedures initially developed for
source estimation procedures and models has been on nondesignated 208 areas (Zison et al., 1977). The
agricultural cropland, although the procedures and Procedures have been expanded and revised to
models have often been adapted and applied to many include consideration of the accumulation, transport,
other land use categories. The agricultural research and fate of toxic chemicals, in addition to
community, comprised of the U.S. Department of conventional pollutants included in the ear-
Agriculture (including the Soil Conservation Service lier versions. The manual includes a separate chapter
and Agricultural Research Service) regional labora - describing calculation procedures for estimating
tories and state universities, have developed a nonpoint loads for urban and non-urban land areas in
significant body of knowledge of soil processes and addition to chapters on procedures for rivers and
procedures for estimating runoff and soil erosion that streams, impoundments, and estuaries. The most
have formed the `building blocks' for loading recent update includes consideration of toxics
functions and nonpoint source models. This section loadings and fate/transport in groundwater systems.
discusses some of the loading function procedures
available for agricultural and other non-urban areas The procedures for nonpoint load assessments
and general concepts underlying the more detailed described in the manual are essentially a compilation
13
and integration of techniques developed earlier by discussed above, the accuracy of the loads depends
Midwest Research Institute (MRI) (McElroy et al., on the accuracy of the user-assumed pollutant
1976), Amy et al. (1974), Heaney et al. (1976) and concentration; the impacts of management options is
Haith (1980). However, the presentation of the usually represented by a simple, constant `removal
procedures is well-integrated, supplemented with fraction'; snowmelt and associated loadings are not
additional parameter estimation guidance, and represented; and calculations can be tedious and time
includes sample calculations. The procedures for non- consuming for complex multi-land use basins. In spite
urban areas are derived from the MRI loading of these disadvantages and limitations, the EPA
functions for average annual estimates based on the Screening Procedures are appropriate for many types
Universal Soil Loss Equation (USLE) (Wischmeier and of nonpoint load assessments. They have enjoyed
Smith, 1978), while the storm event procedures use wide popularity, partly due to the availability of
the Modified USLE (Williams, 1975) and the SCS training workshops sponsored by EPA, and have been
Runoff Curve Number procedure (Mockus, 1972) for applied in a number of regions, including the
storm runoff volume. Pollutant concentrations in Sandusky River in northern Ohio and the Patuxent,
runoff and soil, and enrichment ratios are required for Ware, Chester, and Occoquan basins in the
estimating pollutant loads; precipitation contributions Chesapeake Bay region (Davis et al., 1981; Dean et al.,
of nutrients can be included. Specific information is 1981a; Dean et al., 1981b). Although the procedures
included for estimation of salinity loads in irrigation are quite amenable to a computerized or spreadsheet
return flows. Separate equations are provided for implementation, to our knowledge no effort has been
estimating loads for sorbed pollutants, dissolved made to implement such a format.
pollutants, and partitioned pollutants (i.e., both
sorbed and dissolved phases); this latter category is 4.1.2Other Loading Functions
primarily for pesticides for which the procedures
were developed by Haith (1980) for storm event As noted earlier, other loading functions have been
loads. Guidance is provided for estimating all developed and proposed by various groups and
required parameters. authors, though none have the support nor have they
demonstrated the longevity of the EPA Screening
The primary strengths and advantages of the EPA Procedures. The WRENS handbook (Water Resources
Screening Procedures are as follows: Evaluation of Nonpoint Silvicultural Sources, U.S.
Forest Service (1980)) is similar to the EPA procedures
a. Excellent user documentation and guidance, but its focus is directed to the effects of forestry
including occasional workshops sponsored by activities on water quality. The handbook provides
the EPA Center for Exposure Assessment quantitative techniques for estimating potential
Modeling, in Athens, GA. changes in streamflow, surface erosion, soil mass
movement, total potential sediment discharge, and
b. No computer requirements since the procedures water temperature for comparative analyses of
can be performed on hand calculators; alternative silvicultural management practices. Runoff
associated programs have been developed for and erosion estimation techniques are similar to those
river quality analyses (Mills et al., 1979). used in the EPA Screening Procedures with
parameters modified for forestry conditions.
c. Loading calculations and procedures can be
linked to water quality procedures in other Haith and Tubbs (1981) developed watershed loading
chapters to assess water quality impacts of functions as a screening tool to evaluate agricultural
nonpoint source loads. nonpoint source pollution in large watersheds. These
functions also use the SCS Curve Number procedure
d. Relatively simple procedures with minimal data for runofff estimation and the USLE for erosion; then,
requirements that can be satisfied from the user based on user-defined pollutant concentrations in
manual when site-specific data are lacking. runoff and attached to sediment, the procedures allow
calculation of loadings to receiving waters. These
These screening procedures are well suited for general functions have been added to the most recent update
screening-level assessments; however, they suffer of the EPA Screening Procedures manual (i.e., 1985).
from the same disadvantages as all such gross A validation of the loading functions for a 850 km2
estimation techniques. As with the urban options watershed is described by Haith and Shoemaker

14
(1987). applications, tillage practices, agronomic practices,
soils characteristics, etc.
More recently, Li et al. (1989) have proposed loading
functions for estimating the average annual pesticide In spite of these limitations, loading functions can be
loads in surface runoff. They developed regression useful for general screening assessments to identify
equations derived from 100-year simulations of daily relative nonpoint contributions under different
pesticide runoff using the Haith (1980) pesticide conditions as long as their assumptions and
model. The regression equation coefficients are based limitations are recognized. They are more popular
on pesticide half life and soil partition coefficients, than the detailed simulation models and have thus
and are tabulated in the article for a wide range of been applied more frequently, primarily because of
values. Two different regressions are described: one their ease of use. Also, the loading functions are a
based simply on mean annual soil erosion, and the very useful precursor to more detailed modeling
other based on mean annual soil erosion and surface studies for general problem assessment and
runoff volume during the month of pesticide identification and to determine if such detailed
application. studies are warranted.

4.1.3Discussion 4.2 Simulation Models

The loading functions discussed above, and other
similar techniques in the literature, differ from the
simulation models primarily in time scale definition The primary differences between nonpoint runoff
and their simplified, mostly empirical techniques for simulation models and the loading functions
estimating nonpoint loads. They are used primarily to described above relate to the temporal and spatial
estimate average annual or event loads, and potential detail of the analysis, along with (usually) a more
changes in these loads with land use and management refined representation of the processes that determine
practice. These procedures and associated calculations nonpoint pollutant loadings. Whereas the loading
can usually be performed with a hand calculator, and functions can be used with only a hand calculator (or
with proliferation of personal computers and spreadsheet), the added detail of most simulation
advances in computer technology we can expect to models requires a computer code, computer facilities,
see more and more of these techniques available on and significantly more input data, such as daily
PCs. However, users should not interpret the aura of rainfall and possibly other meteorologic timeseries.
implementation on a PC as an improvement in the These models are most often computerized
capabilities, accuracy, or valid ity of these techniques. procedures that perform hydrologic (runoff),
There are significant limitations in these procedures, sediment erosion, and pollutant (chemical/ biological)
because of their simplified nature, especially for calculations on short time intervals, usually ranging
evaluation of the impacts of management practices. from one hour to one day, for many years. The
As described above, they often require user-specified resulting values for each time interval, e.g., runoff,
concentrations of pollutants in runoff and/or attached sediment, pollutant load or concentration, can be
to sediment; some assume the total pollutant load can analyzed statistically and/or aggregated to daily,
be estimated as a function of sediment alone. monthly, or annual values for estimates of nonpoint
loadings under the conditions simulated.
Unfortunately, a comprehensive data base,
comparable to the NURP data base for urban areas, As with the urban models, a wide range of nonpoint
does not exist for estimating the needed input models appropriate for non-urban areas are available
concentrations for the wide range of non-urban land and have been used for many different types of land
use categories. Also, there appears to be much greater categories. The available models also cover a large
variability in runoff concentrations from non-urban range of complexity depending on the extent to which
land than from urban land areas; consequently, hydrologic, sediment erosion, and chemical/
extrapolation of concentrations from other sites may biological processes are modeled in a mechanistic
be less appropriate for non-urban land categories. manner or based on empirical procedures. Similar to
Agricultural cropland is especially difficult to urban modeling, many of the same simple procedures
represent by single-valued `representative' and assumptions used in the loading functions are
concentrations due to differences in crops, fertilizer also incorporated into a number of simulation

15
models, e.g., USLE, SCS Curve Number, constant first published in 1980. Since its initial release,
pollutant concentration. Section 5.2 provides brief CREAMS has undergone testing and application and
summaries of a number of the more widely used and a companion version, called GLEAMS (Leonard et al.,
`operational' non-urban models, along with a brief 1986) has been developed with special emphasis on
discussion of relative strengths and weaknesses; vadose zone processes to represent movement of
additional details for each of the models is provided chemicals to groundwater.
in the Appendix.
CREAMS and HSPF PERLND are the most detailed,
In the remainder of this section, we discuss the two operational models of agricultural runoff available at
major modeling efforts that have dominated the non- the current time. In many ways, they are more alike
urban (primarily agricultural) nonpoint modeling than they are different. Both models simulate runoff
arena over the past two decades as a basis for and erosion from field size areas, using different
describing the types of modeling techniques used for methods, and both simulate land surface and soil
non-urban land uses. In addition, we will briefly profile chemical/biological processes (using similar
discuss the key differences between urban and non- methods) that determine the fate and transport of pes-
urban models and identify a number of ongoing ticides and nutrients. Figure 1 shows the structure of
model development efforts. the various subroutines that comprise the HSPF
PERLND module; note that the Agrichemical
4.2.1HSPF and CREAMS Model Development Modules of PERLND perform the soil
chemical/biological process simulation. Figure 2
The 1970's and early 1980's was a period of increasing conceptually shows the structure and processes
pollution, and corresponding development of simulated for pesticides and nutrients in the ARM
mathematical models to both characterize the model which was the basis for the HSPF Agrichemical
pollutant loadings and water quality impacts, and Modules. Figure 3 includes analogous diagrams for
evaluate alternative means of control. During this CREAMS, showing the structure of the model and the
period the EPA, through the Athens-ERL, sponsored a processes involved in estimating nutrient losses in
number of model development and testing efforts runoff and through leaching. Although the hydrology
(i.e., PTR, ARM, NPS, WEST) culminating in the and sediment algorithms are different for the two
HSPF model? Hydrologic Simulation Program-Fortran models, the soil processes that determine the
(Johanson et al, 1980). Barnwell and Johanson (1981) availability of chemicals for runoff and leaching are
discuss the various model development and testing quite similar; both consider sorption/desorption,
efforts leading to the initial release of HSPF in 1980; plant uptake, soil transformations (e.g.,
HSPF is currently in Release No. 9 (Johanson et al., mineralization, nitrification), attenuation/decay, etc.
1984) as a result of numerous enhancements and code that control the fate and migration of chemicals in the
corrections. The focus of the model development was soil.
the ability to represent contributions of sediment,
pesticides, and nutrients from agricultural areas, and The two models differ primarily in their scope and
evaluate resulting water quality conditions at the level of detail, largely as a result of their historical
watershed scale considering both nonpoint origins. HSPF PERLND was derived from the
contributions and instream water quality processes. Stanford Watershed Model (SWM) which was
Only the nonpoint capabilities of HSPF (i.e., PERLND subsequently used as the basis for the HSP, ARM, and
and IMPLND modules) are discussed in this report. NPS models forming the predecessor components for
HSPF. This model development effort originated in
Coincident with the HSPF (and predecessor models) the hydrologic research community with emphasis on
development, the U.S. Department of Agriculture not only runoff modeling but also on watershed scale
through the Agricultural Research Service (ARS) modeling, including both runoff and hydraulic
assembled a group of ARS scientists to refine, routing needed for large watersheds and river basins.
improve, and integrate existing models into a package When EPA selected SWM as the basis for modeling
for representing runoff, sediment, nutrient, and nonpoint pollutant runoff, their ultimate goal was to
pesticide runoff from agricultural fields. The effort be able to evaluate the downstream water quality
was initiated in 1977 and the resulting CREAMS impacts of pesticide and nutrient runoff from agri-
model (Chemicals, Runoff, and Erosion from cultural lands. Consequently, HSPF considers all
Agricultural Management Systems) (Knisel, 1980) was streamflow components? surface runoff, interflow,

16
baseflow? and their pollutant contributions (as shown 4.2.2Other Non-Urban Nonpoint Models
in Figure 2), and then allows direct linkage of these
contributions to an instream water quality model. Many other non-urban nonpoint models exist in the
Also, since HSP and NPS included algorithms for modeling community and have been used to varying
urban runoff loadings, and since most large CREAMS, but each has been used by the developers,
watersheds would include a variety of land use types, a few, by outside users. A comprehensive review of all
HSPF includes many of the simplified options (de- available and relevant nonpoint models was well
scribed above in Section 4.1) for modeling runoff from beyond the scope of this review effort. Below we
any land category, including both pervious and discuss a few additional models, selected by the
impervious urban categories. authors, that have been applied more often than typi-
cal `research' models, but they may not fully satisfy
On the other hand, CREAMS is a product of the the definition of an `operational' model described in
agricultural research community with specific Section 2.2. The ANSWERS, AGNPS, PRZM,
emphasis on representing soil profile and field-scale SWRRB/PRS, and UTM-TOX models are discussed
processes at the level of detail appropriate for design briefly below; a paragraph description is included in
of field-based agricultural management systems. Section 5.2 and additional details are provided in the
Thus, CREAMS allows more detailed representation Appendix.
of field terraces, drainage systems, field topography,
etc. and associated sediment erosion processes. A The ANSWERS model (Areal Nonpoint Source
detailed hydrology option is available, requiring Watershed Environment Response Simulation)
breakpoint rainfall (i.e., short time interval rainfall, developed by Beasley and Huggins (1981) at Purdue
hourly or less), or the popular SCS Curve Number University differs from most other nonpoint models
procedure can be used with daily rainfall. Because of in that it is an `event', distributed-parameter model,
its field-scale focus, CREAMS is limited to as opposed to a continuous, lumped parameter
representing only surface runoff contributions; modeling approach. ANSWERS is designed primarily
subsurface and leaching losses of chemicals are to simulate single storm events, and requires that the
simply removed from the system. The original watershed be subdivided into grid elements with
CREAMS documentation published in 1980 indicated parameter information provided for each element;
that an effort to expand the model to a basin-scale most continuous nonpoint models only require
was underway. The SWAM model (DeCoursey, 1982; specification of average or mean parameter values for
Alonso and DeCoursey, 1985) uses CREAMS as a a watershed or subwatershed area. The ANSWERS
source area component and adds the capabilities to approach imposes greater computational burden and
consider watershed and basin scale analyses; spatial data requirements, thus limiting most analyses
however, the model development effort is still to single `design' storms. However, the additional
underway at this time and SWAM is not currently spatial detail allows greater evaluation of source areas
considered `operational' in terms of documentation within a specific watershed area if required by the
and use by non-developers (DeCoursey, personal problem assessment. ANSWERS is primarily a runoff
communication, 1990). CREAMS has been used as the and sediment model; the nutrient simulation is based
source area model by a number of investigators for on simple correlations between concentration and
specific studies (e.g. SWRRB (Williams et al., 1985), sediment yield/runoff volume; soil nutrient processes
ADAPT (Ward et al., 1988), ARDBSN (Devaurs et al., are not simulated.
1988)) but no fully integrated, operational package
with CREAMS for use at the basin/watershed scale is The AGNPS model (Agricultural Nonpoint Source
available comparable to HSPF. Pollution Model) developed by the USDA
Agricultural Research Service (Young et al., 1986) is
one of the most recent nonpoint models and thus has
limited demonstrated experience. It is designed to
simulate runoff, sediment, and nutrients from
watershed-scale areas for either single event or
continuous periods. It uses a distributed approach,
similar to ANSWERS, whereby the watershed area is
divided into cells, model computations are done at
the cell level, and runoff, sediment, and nutrients are

17
routed from cell to cell from the watershed capabilities are derived from CREAMS; these are the
boundaries to the outlet. AGNPS uses the SCS curve most recent additions to the model and they are still
number approach combined with a unit hydrograph undergoing testing and validation by the developers.
routing procedure, the Modified USLE, and simple
correlations of extraction coefficients of nutrients in The UTM-TOX model (Unified Transport Model for
runoff and sediment. AGNPS can accommodate point Toxic Materials) (Patterson et al., 1983), developed by
source inputs from feedlots, wastewater treatment the Oak Ridge National Laboratory for the U.S. EPA
plants, and user-defined stream bank and gully Office of Pesticides and Toxic Substances, is a
erosion. Because of its distributed approach, its spatial multimedia model that combines hydrologic,
data requirements are similar to ANSWERS. atmospheric, and sediment transport in one computer
code. It is similar to HSPF in many ways, in terms of
The PRZM model (Pesticide Root Zone Model) its comprehensive scope; its representation of soil,
(Carsel et al., 1984) was developed by the EPA Athens land surface, and channel processes; and its use of the
laboratory for modeling the fate of pesticides within Stanford Watershed Model as its hydrologic module.
the crop root zone, and subsequent leaching to UTM-TOX provides a more detailed simulation of
groundwater. However, it includes a runoff and soil-plant processes, includes atmospheric transport
erosion component based on the SCS curve number and deposition, and is designed primarily for organic
and Modified USLE, respectively. PRZM represents chemicals; no specific capabilities are included for
dissolved, adsorbed, and vapor phase chemical nutrients or agricultural conditions. UTM-TOX, to our
concentrations in the soil by modeling the processes knowledge, has had limited application, possibly
of surface runoff, erosion, evapotranspiration, plant because of its relatively complex nature and the lack
uptake, soil temperature, pesticide decay, of user support.
volatilization, foliar washoff, advection, dispersion,
and decay. The most recent version of PRZM is
included in an integrated root/vadose/groundwater
model called RUSTIC recently released by the EPA
Athens Laboratory (Dean et al., 1989). PRZM is cur-
rently limited to simulation of organic chemicals like
pesticides, but its runoff and erosion components are
similar to many other nonpoint models.

The SWRRB model (Simulator for Water Resources in

Rural Basins) was developed by USDA (Williams
et al., 1985; Arnold et al., 1989) for basin scale water
quality modeling. Its runoff (SCS curve number) and
erosion (Modified USLE) components are similar to
the other nonpoint models, but SWRRB also includes
channel processes and subsurface flow components to
allow representation of large basin areas. It performs
calculations on a daily timestep, and simulates
hydrology, crop growth, sediment erosion, sediment
transport, and nitrogen/phosphorus/pesticide
movement in runoff. Its nutrient and pesticide

18
Figure 1. Subroutine structure for HSPF PERLND.
19
20
 21
Figure 2. ARM Model pesticide and nutrient and nutrient simulation included in HSPF PERLND.
22
 23

Figure 3. Nutrient simulation in CREAMS.

24
 Section 5.0
Nonpoint Source Runoff Quality Simulation Models and Methods

5.1 Urban Runoff Quality Models (DR3M-QUAL) is available from that agency for
general use (Alley and Smith, 1982a, 1982b). Runoff
generation and subsequent routing use the kinematic
5.1.1 Introduction wave method, and parameter estimation assistance is
included in the model. Quality is simulated using
Four models (USGS, HSPF, STORM, SWMM) will be buildup and washoff functions, with settling of solids
described briefly at this point; extensive details about in storage units dependent on a particle size
the four models may be found in the Appendix. These distribution. The model has been used in some of the
four models essentially make up the best choice of NURP studies that were conducted by the USGS (see
full-scale simulation models for urban areas. Other the Appendix and Alley, 1986). No microcomputer
models have been adapted from SWMM (e.g., FHWA, version is available.
RUNQUAL) and STORM (e.g., SEMSTORM) and
given modified names, but the principles are fairly 5.1.3HSPF
similar. Still other models, such as the Illinois State
Water Survey ILLUDAS model (Terstriep and Stall, The Hydrological Simulation Program? Fortran
1974) have sometimes been adapted for water quality (HSPF) is the culmination of hydrologic routines that
simulation for a specific project (Noel and Terstriep, originated with the Stanford Watershed Model in 1966
1982), but such modifications and quality procedures and eventually incorporated many nonpoint source
remain undocumented, and the quality model can be modeling efforts of the EPA Athens laboratory
considered not operational. At least two European (Johanson et al., 1984). This model has been widely
models are available that simulate water quality. used for non-urban nonpoint source modeling and is
These are described briefly at the end of this section. described additionally in that section of this report as
Finally, there are many models well known in the well as in detail in the Appendix. The user's manual
hydrologic literature, such as those developed by the includes information on all hydrologic and water
HEC and SCS, that might be useful in the hydrologic quality routines, including the IMPLND (impervious
aspect of water quality studies but that do not land) segment for use in urban area. Additional
simulate water quality directly. This review is limited guidelines for application are provided by Donigian et
to models that directly simulate water quality. A al. (1984). The model has special provisions for
general comparison of model attributes is given in management of time series that result from
Table 4. This table includes the EPA Statistical Method continuous simulation. A microcomputer version is
since with the publication of the recent FHWA study, available.
it can be considered a formalized procedure (Driscoll
et al., 1989). The constant concentration, spreadsheet, 5.1.4STORM
and regression approaches described earlier are more
generic in nature and not included in Table 4, but their The first significant use of continuous simulation in
attributes were provided in the earlier text. urban hydrology came with the Storage, Treatment,
Overflow, Runoff Model (STORM), developed by the
5.1.2DR3M-QUAL Corps of Engineers Hydrologic Engineering Center
(HEC, 1977; Roesner et al., 1974) for application to the
A version of the USGS Distributed Routing Rainfall San Francisco master plan for CSO pollution
Runoff Model that includes quality simulation abatement. The HEC also provides application

25
guidelines (Abbott, 1977). The current version Extran, Storage/Treatment and Statistics blocks for
includes dry-weather flow input for combined sewer rainfall-runoff, routing, and statistical computations.
simulation. The support of the HEC led to the wide Water quality may be simulated in all blocks except
use of STORM for planning purposes, especially for Extran, and metric units are optional. Since the model
evaluation of the trade-off between treatment and is non-proprietary, portions have been adapted for
storage as control options for CSOs (e.g., Heaney et various specific purposes and locales by individual
al., 1977). Statistics of long-term runoff and quality consultants and other federal agencies, e.g., FHWA. A
time series permit optimization of control measures. microcomputer version is available.

STORM utilizes simple runoff coefficient, SCS and 5.1.6Two European Models
unit hydrograph methods for generation of hourly
runoff depths from hourly rainfall inputs. No flow The four U.S. models discussed above do not take
routing is performed, but runoff may be routed advantage of graphics and other ? user-friendly?
through a constant-rate treatment device, with excess capabilities of microcomputers. Two well-known and
flow diverted to a storage device. Flows exceeding the commercially-available European models, MOUSE
treatment rate cause CSOs when storage is filled. The and Wallingford, are excellent examples of application
build-up and wash-off formulations are used for of the full power of the microcomputer when used in
simulation of six pre-specified pollutants. However, conjunction with recent programming languages and
the model can be manipulated to provide loads for graphics hardware and software. Both models feature
arbitrary conservative pollutants (e.g., Najarian et al., menu-driven pre-processors for data input, graphical
1986). The model is hampered somewhat by lack of an display and interactive editing of catchment
operational microcomputer version. However, boundaries and sewer networks, and post-processing
various individual consultants have adapted the of predicted hydrographs and pollutographs,
nonproprietary code to their own project needs. including graphical displays and statistical analysis.
Although the quality algorithms are relatively simple,
5.1.5SWMM the hydrologic and hydraulic components of both
models are relatively sophisticated. The cost of each
The original version of the Storm Water Management model is approximately $15,000, including training
Model (SWMM) was developed for EPA as and documentation but not the source code.
single-event model specifically for the analysis of
CSOs (Metcalf and Eddy et al., 1971), but its scope has The Danish Hydraulic Institute, in cooperation with
vastly broadened since the original release. Version 4 various other laboratories and private software firms
(Huber and Dickinson, 1988; Roesner et al., 1988) of has produced the MOUSE (Modeling of Urban
the model performs both continuous and single-event Sewers) model. Included in the package are modules
simulation throughout the whole model, can simulate for generation of runoff from rainfall, sewer routing
backwater, surcharging, pressure flow and looped (the S11S model, comparable to the SWMM Extran
connections (by solving the complete dynamic wave Block), and a simple quality routine that uses the
equations) in its Extran Block, and has a variety of constant concentration approach (Jacobsen et al., 1984;
options for quality simulation, including traditional Johansen et al., 1984). Further information on MOUSE
build-up and wash-off formulations as well as rating is available from Danish Hydraulic Institute, Agern
curves and regression techniques. Subsurface flow Alle 5, DK-2970 Hørsholm, Denmark.
routing (constant quality) may be performed in the
Runoff Block in addition to surface quantity and The Wallingford model is maintained by Hydraulics
quality routing, and treatment devices may be Research Ltd. in the United Kingdom. It also consists
simulated in the Storage/Treatment Block using of a cluster of modules, including runoff generation
removal functions and sedimentation theory. A from rainfall (WASSP), simple and fully-dynamic
hydraulic design routine is included for sizing of sewer routing (WALLRUS and SPIDA, respectively),
pipes, and a variety of regulator devices may be and a quality routine (MOSQITO)featuring processes
simulated, including orifices (fixed and variable), similar to those in SWMM (Henderson and Moys,
weirs, pumps, and storage. A bibliography of SWMM 1987). Further information on the group of
usage is available (Huber et al., 1986) that contains Wallingford models is available from Hydraulics
many references to case studies. Research Ltd., Wallingford, Oxfordshire OX10 8BA,
United Kingdom.
SWMM is segmented into the Runoff, Transport,
26
5.2 Non-urban Runoff Quality Models and solid types. Resuspension and settling of silts and
clays (cohesive solids) are defined in terms of shear
Methods stress at the sediment-water interface. For sands, the
capacity of the system to transport sand at a par-
ticular flow is calculated and resuspension or settling
In this section we provide brief summaries of the is defined by the difference between the sand in
primary non-urban runoff quality models reviewed; suspension and the capacity. Calibration of the model
as noted earlier additional details on each model are requires data for each of the three solids types.
provided in the Appendix. Below summaries are Benthic exchange is modeled as sorption/desorption
presented for HSPF, CREAMS/GLEAMS, ANSWERS, and desorption/scour with surficial benthic
AGNPS, PRZM, SWRRB, and UTM-TOX, and Table 5 sediments. Underlying sediment and pore water are
shows a comparison of selected model attributes and not modeled.
capabilities.
5.2.2CREAMS/GLEAMS
5.2.1HSPF
Chemicals, Runoff, and Erosion from Agricultural
The Hydrological Simulation Program? FORTRAN Management Systems (CREAMS) was developed by
(HSPF) (Johanson et al., 1981; 1984) is a the U.S. Department of Agriculture? Agricultural
comprehensive package for simulation of watershed Research Service (Knisel, 1980; Leonard and Ferreira,
hydrology and water quality for both conventional 1984) for the analysis of agricultural best management
and toxic organic pollutants. HSPF incorporates the practices for pollution control. CREAMS is a field
watershed scale ARM and NPS models into a basin- scale model that uses separate hydrology, erosion, and
scale analysis framework that includes fate and chemistry submodels connected together by pass files.
transport in one-dimensional stream channels. It is the
only comprehensive model of watershed hydrology Runoff volume, peak flow, infiltration,
and water quality that allows the integrated evapotranspiration, soil water content, and
simulation of land and soil contaminant runoff percolation are computed on a daily basis. If detailed
processes with instream hydraulic, water precipitation data are available then infiltration is
temperature, sediment transport, nutrient, and calculated at histogram breakpoints. Daily erosion
sediment-chemical interactions. The runoff quality and sediment yield, including particle size distri-
capabilities include both simple relationships (i.e. bution, are estimated at the edge of the field. Plant
empirical buildup/washoff, constant concentrations) nutrients and pesticides are simulated and storm load
and detailed soil process options (i.e., leaching, and average concentrations of sediment-associated
sorption, soil attenuation and soil nutrient and dissolved chemicals are determined in the runoff,
transformations). sediment, and percolation through the root zone
(Leonard and Knisel, 1984).
The result of this simulation is a time history of the
runoff flow rate, sediment load, nutrient, pesticide, User defined management activities can be simulated
and/or user-specified pollutant concentrations, along by CREAMS. These activities include aerial spraying
with a time history of water quantity and quality at (foliar or soil directed) or soil incorporation of
any point in a watershed. HSPF simulates three pesticides, animal waste management, and
sediment types (sand, silt, and clay) in addition to a agricultural best management practices (minimum
single organic chemical and transformation products tillage, terracing, etc.).
of that chemical. The instream nutrient processes
include DO, BOD, nitrogen and phosphorus reactions, Calibration is not specifically required for CREAMS
pH, phytoplankton, zooplankton, and benthic algae. simulation, but is usually desirable. The model
provides accurate representation of the various soil
The organic chemical transfer and reaction processes processes. Most of the CREAMS parameter values are
included are hydrolysis, oxidation, photolysis, biode- physically measurable. The model has the capability
gradation, a volatilization, and sorption. Sorption is of simulating 20 pesticides at one time.
modeled as a first-order kinetic process in which the
user must specify a desorption rate and an Groundwater Loading Effects of Agricultural
equilibrium partition coefficient for each of the three Management Systems (GLEAMS) was developed by
the United States Department of
27
Agriculture? Agriculture Research Service (Leonard et
al., 1987) to utilize the management oriented 5.2.4AGNPS
physically based CREAMS model (Knisel, 1980) and
incorporate a component for vertical flux of Agricultural Nonpoint Source Pollution Model
pesticides. GLEAMS is the vadose zone component of (AGNPS) was developed by the U.S. Department of
the CREAMS model. Agriculture? Agriculture Research Service (Young et
al., 1986) to obtain uniform and accurate estimates of
GLEAMS consists of three major components namely runoff quality with primary emphasis on nutrients
hydrology, erosion/sediment yield, and pesticides. and sediments and to compare the effects of various
Precipitation is partitioned between surface runoff pollution control practices that could be incorporated
and infiltration and water balance computations are into the management of watersheds.
done on a daily basis. Surface runoff is estimated
using the Soil Conservation Service Curve Number The AGNPS model simulates sediments and nutrients
Method as modified by Williams and Nicks (1982). from agricultural watersheds for a single storm event
The soil is divided into various layers, with a or for continuous simulation. Watersheds examined
minimum of 3 and a maximum of 12 layers of variable by AGNPS must be divided into square working
thickness are used for water and pesticide routing areas called cells. Grouping of cells results in the
(Knisel et al., 1989) formation of subwatersheds, which can be
individually examined. The output from the model
5.2.3ANSWERS can be used to compare the watershed examined
against other watersheds to point sources of water
Areal Nonpoint Source Watershed Environment quality problems, and to investigate possible solutions
Response Simulation (ANSWERS) was developed at to these problems.
the Agricultural Engineering Department of Purdue
University (Beasley and Huggins, 1981). It is an event AGNPS is also capable of handling point source
based, distributed parameter model capable of inputs from feedlots, waste water treatment plant
predicting the hydrologic and erosion response of discharges, and stream bank and gully erosion (user
agricultural watersheds. Application of ANSWERS specified). In the model, pollutants are routed from
requires that the watershed to be subdivided into a the top of the watershed to the outlet in a series of
grid of square elements. Each element must be small steps so that flow and water quality at any point in
enough so that all important parameter values within the watershed may be examined. The Modified
its boundaries are uniform. For a practical application Universal Soil Loss Equation is used for predicting
element sizes range from one to four hectares. Within soil erosion, and a unit hydrograph approach used for
each element the model simulates the processes of the flow in the watershed. Erosion is predicted in five
interception, infiltration, surface storage, surface flow, different particle sizes namely sand, silt, clay, small
subsurface drainage, and sediment drainage, and aggregates, and large aggregates.
sediment detachment, transport, and deposition. The
output from one element then becomes a source of The pollutant transport portion is subdivided into one
input to an adjacent element. part handling soluble pollutants and another part
handling sediment attached pollutants. The methods
As the model is based on a modular program used to predict nitrogen and phosphorus yields from
structure it allows easier modification of existing the watershed and individual cells were developed by
program code and/or addition of user supplied Frere et al. (1980) and are also used in CREAMS
algorithms. Model parameter values are allowed to (Knisel, 1980). The nitrogen and phosphorus calcula-
vary between elements, thus, any degree of spatial tions are performed using relationships between
variability within the watershed is easily represented. chemical concentration, sediment yield and runoff
volume.
Nutrients (nitrogen and phosphorus) are simulated
using correlation relationships between chemical Data needed for the model can be classified into two
concentrations, sediment yield and runoff volume. A categories: watershed data and cell data. Watershed
research version (Amin-Sichani, 1982) of the model data includes information applying to the entire
uses ? clay enrichment? information and a very watershed which would include watershed size,
descriptive phosphorus fate model to predict total, number of cells in the watershed, and if running for a
particulate, and soluble phosphorus yields. single storm event then the storm intensity. The cell
28
data includes information on the parameters based on which solves Richard's equation for water flow in the
the land practices in the cell. unsaturated zone. VADOFT can also simulate the fate
and transport of two parent and two daughter
Additional model components that are under products. SAFTMOD is a two-dimensional finite
development are unsaturated/saturated zone element model which simulates flow and transport in
routines, economic analysis, and linkage to the saturated zone in either an X-Y or X-Z
Geographic Information System. configuration. The three codes PRZM, VADOFT, and
SAFTMOD are linked together through an execution
5.2.5PRZM supervisor which allows users to build models for site
specific situation. In order to perform exposure
Pesticide Root Zone Model (PRZM) was developed at assessments, the code is equipped with a Monte Carlo
the U.S. EPA Environmental Research Laboratory in pre and post processor (Dean et al., 1989).
Athens, Georgia by Carsel et al. (1984). It is a one-
dimensional, dynamic, compartmental model that can 5.2.6SWRRB
be used to simulate chemical movement in
unsaturated zone within and immediately below the Simulator for Water Resources in Rural Basins
plant root zone. The model is divided into two major (SWRRB) was developed by Williams et al. (1985),
components namely, the hydrology (and hydraulics) and Arnold et al. (1989) for evaluating basin scale
and chemical transport. The hydrology component water quality. SWRRB operates on a daily time step
which calculates runoff and erosion is based upon the and simulates weather, hydrology, crop growth,
Soil Conservation Service curve number procedure sedimentation, and nitrogen, phosphorous, and
and the Universal Soil Loss Equation respectively. pesticide movement. The model was developed by
Evapotranspiration is estimated directly from pan modifying the CREAMS (Knisel, 1980) daily rainfall
evaporation or by an empirical formula if pan hydrology model for application to large, complex,
evaporation data is not available. Soil-water capacity rural basins.
terms including field capacity, wilting point, and
saturation water content are used for simulating Surface runoff is calculated using the Soil
water movement within the unsaturated zone. Conservation Service Curve Number technique.
Irrigation application is also within model Sediment yield is computed for each basin by using
capabilities. the Modified Universal Soil Loss Equation (Williams
and Berndt, 1977). The channel and floodplain
Pesticide application on soil or on the plant foliage are sediment routing model is composed of two
considered in the chemical transport simulation. components operating simultaneously (deposition
Dissolved, adsorbed, and vapor-phase concentrations and degradation). Degradation is based on Bagnold's
in the soil are estimated by simultaneously stream power concept and deposition is based on the
considering the processes of pesticide uptake by fall velocity of the sediment particles (Arnold et al.,
plants, surface runoff, erosion, decay, volatilization, 1989).
foliar washoff, advection, dispersion, and retardation.
The user has two options to solve the transport Return flow is calculated as a function of soil water
equations using the original backward difference content and return flow travel time. The percolation
implicit scheme or the method of characteristics component uses a storage routing model combined
(Dean et al., 1989). As the model is dynamic it allows with a crack flow model to predict the flow through
considerations of pulse loads. the root zone. The crop growth model (Arnold et al.,
1989) computes total biomass each day during the
PRZM is an integral part of a unsaturated/saturated growing season as a function of solar radiation and
zone model RUSTIC (Dean et al., 1989). RUSTIC (Risk leaf area index.
of Unsaturated/Saturated Transport and
Transformation of Chemical Concentrations) links The pollutant transport portion is subdivided into one
three subordinate models in order to predict pesticide part handling soluble pollutants and another part
fate and transport through the crop root zone, and handling sediment attached pollutants. The methods
saturated zone to drinking water wells through used to predict nitrogen and phosphorus yields from
PRZM, VADOFT, SAFTMOD. the rural basins are adopted from CREAMS (Knisel,
1980). The nitrogen and phosphorus calculations are
VADOFT is a one-dimensional finite element model performed using relationships between chemical
29
concentration, sediment yield and runoff volume. The From these calculations mass balances can be
nutrient capabilities are still undergoing testing and established, chemical budgets made, and
validation at this time. concentrations in the environment estimated. The
atmospheric transport model (ATM) portion of UTM-
The pesticide component is directly taken from Holst TOX is a Gaussian plume model that calculates
and Kutney (1989) and is a modification of the dispersion of pollutants emitted from point (stack),
CREAMS (Smith and Williams, 1980) pesticide model. area, or line sources. ATM operates on a monthly time
The amount of pesticide reaching the ground or plants step, which is longer than the hydrologic portion of
is based on a pesticide application efficiency factor. the model and results in the use of an average
Empirical equations are used for calculating pesticide chemical deposition falling on the watershed.
washoff which are based on threshold rainfall
amount. Pesticide decay from the plants and the soil The Terrestrial Ecology and Hydrology Model
are predicted using exponential functions based on (TEHM) describes soil-plant water fluxes,
the decay constant for pesticide in the soil, and half interception, infiltration, and storm and groundwater
life of pesticide on foliar residue. flow. The hydrologic portion of the model is from the
Wisconsin Hydrologic Transport Model (WHTM),
The Pesticide Runoff Simulator (PRS) was developed which is a modified version of the Stanford
for the U.S. EPA Office of Pesticide and Toxic Watershed Model (SWM). WHTM includes all of the
Substances by Computer Sciences Corporation (1980) hydrologic processes of the SWM and also simulates
to simulate pesticide runoff and adsorption into the soluble chemical movement, litter and vegetation
soil on small agricultural watersheds. PRS is based on interception of the chemical, erosion of sorbed
SWRRB. Thus, the PRS hydrology and sediment chemical, chemical degradation in soil and litter, and
simulation is based on the USDA CREAMS model, sorption in top layers of the soil. Stream transport
and the SCS curve number technique is used to includes transfer between three sediment components
predict surface runoff. Sediment yield is simulated (suspended, bed, and resident bed).
using a modified version of the Universal Soil Loss
Equation and a sediment routing model. 5.3 Discussion
The pesticide component of PRS is a modified version
of the CREAMS pesticide model. Pesticide application
(foliar and soil applied) can be removed by The models discussed briefly here (and more
atmospheric loss, wash off by rainfall, and leaching extensively in the Appendix) do not represent all of
into the soil. Pesticide yield is divided into a soluble the modeling options available for runoff quality
fraction and an adsorbed phase based on an simulation, but they are certainly the most notable,
enrichment ratio. widely used and most operational. Selection from
among these models is often made on the basis of
The model includes a built in weather generator based personal preference and familiarity, in addition to
on temperature, solar radiation, and precipitation needed model capabilities. For example, for urban
statistics. Calibration is not specifically required, but modeling various in-house versions of STORM are
is usually desirable. still used by consultants even though the ? official ?
HEC version has not been updated since 1977,
5.2.7UTM-TOX because these versions have been adapted to the
needs of the firm and because STORM has proven to
Unified Transport Model for Toxic Materials (UTM- provide useful continuous simulation results.
TOX) was developed by Oak Ridge National The USGS DR3M-QUAL model has perhaps been
Laboratory for the U.S. EPA Office of Pesticides and used the least by persons outside that agency, but has
Toxic Substances, Washington, D.C. (Patterson et al., worked satisfactorily in several applications
1983). UTM-TOX is a multimedia model that documented in the Appendix. Support for both
combines hydrologic, atmospheric, and sediment STORM and DR3M-QUAL would be minimal.
transport in one computer code. The model calculates CREAMS has been used most extensively for field-
rates of flux of a chemical from release to the scale agricultural runoff modeling because of its
atmosphere, through deposition on a watershed, agricultural origins and ties to the agricultural
infiltration and runoff from the soil, to flow in a research community.
stream channel and associated sediment transport.
30
HSPF and SWMM are probably the most versatile and these efforts still focus primarily on agricultural areas,
most widely applicable of the models, with the nod to with limited abilities to be used in large, complex
SWMM if the urban hydrology and hydraulics must multi-land use basins.
be simulated in detail. On the other hand, the water
quality routines in HSPF for sediment erosion, Regression, spreadsheet, statistical methods, and
pollutant interaction and groundwater quality are loading functions are most useful as screening tools.
superior in HSPF, and the capability to efficiently Indeed if the Statistical Method or EPA's Screening
handle all types of land uses and pollutant sources, Procedures, indicate that there should be no water
(including urban and agriculture, point and non- quality problem (as defined by exceedance of a
point), is a definite advantage when needed for large specified concentration level with a specified
complex basins. Both models appear somewhat frequency), then more detailed water quality
overwhelming in terms of size to the novice user, but simulation may not be required at all. If sensitivity
only the components of interest of either model need analyses and `worst-case' evaluations further support
be used in a given study, and the catchment the conclusions, detailed water quality modeling will
schematization can often be coarse for purposes of probably not be needed.
simulation of water quality at the outlet. Thus,
although the installation of these models on a
microcomputer may occupy several megabytes of a
hard disk, they may be applied in simple ways (i.e.,
applied to a simplified schematization of the
catchment) with a significant reduction in data
requirements. Furthermore, the several quality model-
ing options within SWMM permit simple conceptual
water quality simulation using constant concentration
and rating curves as well as the more formidable
buildup-washoff methods. Similarly for HSPF, the
ability to use the simple SWMM-type formulations for
urban and non-agricultural areas, and detailed
soil/runoff process simulation for agricultural areas
provides the user with great flexibility in representing
the watershed system.

Continuing model development and testing within

the agricultural research community will likely lead to
further enhancements and development of many of
the agricultural models, like CREAMS, SWRRB, and
AGNPS. In fact, USDA has supported, and continues
to support, a wide range of model development work
in individual research facilities, many of which are (or
at least appear to be) very similar in terms of using
similar algorithms or model formulations (e.g. EPIC
(Williams et al., 1984), Opus (V. Ferreira, 1989,
personal communication), SWAM (DeCoursey, 1982).
The SWRRB development effort appears to be
focussing in on a middle ground (in terms of
complexity) between HSPF and the detailed field-
scale models which are limited to small areas; its use
of daily rainfall, as opposed to smaller time interval
measurements (usually hourly is needed for HSPF) is
seen as a definite advantage by many users. However,
most of

31
Table 4. Comparison of urban model attributes

Model:
Attribute DR3M-QUAL HSPF Statistical a STORM SWMM

Sponsoring agency USGS EPA EPA HEC EPA

Simulation typeb C,SE C,SE N/A C C,SE

No. pollutants 4 10 Any 6 10

Rainfall/runoff Y Y Nc Y Y
analysis

Sewer system flow Y Y N/A N Y

routing

Full, dynamic flow N N N/A N Yd

routing equations

Surcharge Ye N N/A N Yd

Regulators, overflow N N N/A Y Y

structures, e.g.,
weirs, orificies, etc.

Special solids routines Y Y N N Y

Storage analysis Y Y Yf Y Y

Treatment analysis Y Y Yf Y Y

Suitable for screening S,D S,D S S S,D

(S), design (D)
Available on micro- N Y Yg
N Y
computer

Data and personnel Medium High Medium Low High

requirementsh

Overall model Medium High Medium Medium High

complexityi

a
EPA procedure.
b
C = continuous simulation, SE = single event simulation.
c
Runoff coefficient used to obtain runoff volumes.
d
Full dynamic equations and surcharge calculations only in Extran Block of SWMM.
e
Surcharge simulated by storing excess inflow at upstream end of pipe. Pressure flow not simulated.
f
Storage and treatment analyzed analytically.
g
FHWA study, Driscoll et al. (1989)
h
General requirements for model installation, familiarization, data require ments, etc. To be interpretted only very generally.
i
Reflection of general size and overall model capabilities. Note that complex models may still be used to simulate very
simple systems with attendant minimal data requirements.

32
Table 5. Comparison of non-urban model attributes

Attribute AGNPS ANSWERS CREAMS HSPF PRZM SWRRB UTM-TOX

Sponsoring Agency USDA Purdue USDA EPA EPA USDA ORNL &
EPA

Simulation type C,SE SE C,SE C,SE C C C,SE

Rainfall/Runoff Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
analysis

Erosion Modeling Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Pesticides Y N Y Y Y Y N

Nutrients Y Y Y Y N Y N

User-Defined N N N Y N N Y
Constituents

Soil Processes
Pesticides N N Y Y Y Y N
Nutrients N N Y Y N Y N

Multiple Land Type Y Y N Y N Y Y

Capability

Instream Water N N N Y N N Y
Quality Simulation

Available on Y Y Y Y Y Y N
Micro-computer

Data and Personnel M M/H H H M M H

Requirements

Overall Model M M H H M M/H H

Complexity

Y = yes, N = no, M = Moderate, H = High

C = Continuous, SE = Storm Event

33
 Section 6.0
Brief Case Studies

How are quality processes being simulated in studies 6.1.3Hackensack River Basin
of urban and rural runoff quality problems? Below,
the authors draw upon their personal knowledge of a Pollution problems in the lower and estuarine portion
few ongoing and recently completed studies (listed of the Hackensack River in New Jersey are being
alphabetically). studied by Najarian and Associates (Eatontown, NJ)
using SWMM coupled with monitoring data from
6.1 Urban Model Applications four CSO and five storm sewered areas (Huang and
DiLorenzo, 1990; Najarian et al., 1990). The pollutants
of primary interest are BOD and ammonia for input to
a dynamic receiving water quality model of the river
6.1.1 Boston and estuary, with emphasis upon the relative
contributions of CSOs, separate storm sewered areas
CH2M-Hill (Gainesville, FL) used continuous SWMM and point sources. Although rating curve results were
modeling for the development of TSS and BOD loads very good predictors for the monitored catchments
from CSOs to Boston Harbor (Morrissey and from which they were derived, it was found that they
Harleman, 1989). After first estimates from Sartor and could not be extrapolated (transferred) to the ungaged
Boyd (1972) and Pitt (1979), buildup and washoff catchments. Hence, Michaelis-Menton buildup and
functions were calibrated to estimates of annual totals exponential washoff parameters were calibrated for
based on monitoring. A ? typical? five years of hourly the basins and transferable generalized coefficients
precipitation data selected from 40 years of available developed as a function of land use. Intra-storm
record were input to SWMM to develop CSO loads, variations were simulated in order to use SWMM to
and the effectiveness of street cleaning and catchbasin drive a short time increment dynamic model of the
cleaning BMPs was studied using the model (V. river and estuary.
Adderly, CH2M-Hill, Inc., Gainesville, FL, Personal
Communication, 1989). 6.1.4Jacksonville

6.1.2Delevan Lake, Wisconsin Camp, Dresser and McKee (Jacksonville) will use
SWMM for quantity predictions and both a
A joint project of the USGS (Madison) and the spreadsheet and SWMM or STORM with constant
University of Wisconsin investigated suspended concentrations for load estimates to the St. Johns
solids and phosphorus loads to 1800-ac Delevan Lake River (Camp, Dresser and McKee, Inc., 1989). The
in southeastern Wisconsin (Walker et al., 1989). A constant concentrations are based on NURP data and
spreadsheet approach was implemented using limited Florida data. If SWMM or STORM is used to
Multiplan, with unit load estimates for the drive a receiving water quality model for the river,
surrounding basin (agricultural, urban, industrial). local data will be used for better calibration. At the
The Universal Soil Loss Equation was used for moment, CDM feels that both quantity and quality
sediment loads from agricultural areas. Some control options can be compared on the basis of
calibration was possible using measurements on four present data, with a minimum of expensive local
tributaries. The cost-effectiveness of agricultural sampling.
control options was evaluated based on cost estimates
for various agricultural BMPs.

34
6.1.5Orlando (Havana, FL) is using SWMM to develop the
stormwater master plan for Tallahassee and Leon
To help alleviate nonpoint source pollution to lakes County (R. Ortega, Northwest Florida Water
downstream from the Boggy Creek Watershed south Management District, Havana, FL, Personal
of Orlando, Camp, Dresser and McKee (Orlando) Communication, 1989). Extensive use of the model
developed a spreadsheet model to assess nutrient has already been made for quantity predictions. The
loadings resulting from existing and future land uses present plan is to develop rating curve relationships
(Camp, Dresser and McKee, 1987). Runoff coefficients on the basis of considerable quality monitoring data
were calibrated to match measured creek runoff gathered during the study for input into SWMM.
volumes, and EMCs as a function of land use were BMPs will also be studied with the model, especially
estimated from sampling in Orlando and Tampa. An storage. Final control decisions will be made on the
overall calibration factor was used to obtain basis of 28-year SWMM simulations using 15-min
agreement between the total estimated TN and TP rainfall data.
loads produced by the product of flows and EMCs for
the various land uses and measured annual nutrient 6.2 Non-urban Model Applications
loads in Boggy Creek. Thus, relative contributions
from various land uses remained the same while the
overall loads were adjusted. BMP removal efficiencies
were applied in conjunction with changing land uses 6.2.1 Chesapeake Bay Program
to obtain control strategies for future watershed
development. The EPA Chesapeake Bay Program has been using the
HSPF model as the framework for modeling total
6.1.6Providence watershed contributions of flow, sediment, and
nutrients (and associated constituents such as water
SWMM is being used by Greeley and Hanson temperature, DO, BOD, etc.) to the tidal region of the
(Philadelphia) to simulate CSO loads from Providence Chesapeake Bay (Donigian et al., 1986; 1990). The
using three monitored storms for calibration and watershed modeling represents pollutant
verification (R. Janga, Greeley and Hansen, Inc., contributions from an area of more than 68,000 sq.
Philadelphia, PA, Personal Communication, 1989). mi., and provides input to drive a fully dynamic
Quality is being simulated using constant three-dimensional, hydrodynamic/water quality
concentration in the Runoff Block and the quality model of the Bay. The watershed drainage area is
routing routines in the Transport Block. SWMM may divided into land segments and stream channel
be used to drive a receiving water model before the segments; the land areas modeled include forest,
project is completed. Extran is also being used to agricultural cropland (conventional and conservation
simulate some of the overflow hydraulics. tillage systems), pasture, urban (pervious and
impervious areas), and uncontrolled animal waste
6.1.7San Francisco Bay contributions. The stream channel simulation includes
flow routing and oxygen and nutrient biochemical
Woodward-Clyde (Oakland) is using SWMM to modeling (through phytoplankton) in order to
simulate loads from the Santa Clara Valley into South account for instream processes affecting nutrient
San Francisco Bay (P. Mangarella, Woodward-Clyde delivery to the Bay.
Consultants, Oakland, CA, Personal Communication,
1989). Measured runoff and flow data are being used Currently, buildup/washoff type algorithms are being
to calibrate the Runoff Block quantity routines, and used for urban impervious areas, potency factors for
constant concentrations are being used (no buildup or all pervious areas, and constant (or seasonally
washoff) based on one year of monitoring of a variable) concentrations for all subsurface
selection of land use types. The model may not be contributions and animal waste components.
used to drive a receiving water model but it will be Enhancements are underway to utilize the detailed
used to compare alternatives to reduce loads of toxics process (i.e. Agri-chemical modules) simulation for
to the Bay. cropland areas to better represent the impacts of
agricultural BMPs. The watershed modeling is being
6.1.8Tallahassee used to evaluate nutrient management alternatives for
attaining a 40% reduction in nutrient loads delivered
The Northwest Florida Water Management District to the Bay, as defined in a joint agreement among the
35
governors of the member states.
6.2.5Use of AGNPS in Virginia
6.2.2 Alachlor Special Review
The Virginia Department of Soil and Water
The EPA Office of Pesticide Programs performed a Conservation is applying the AGNPS model to
`Special Review' of the herbicide alachlor, which is evaluate sediment erosion and nutrient loadings from
widely used on corn and soybeans, to determine land uses within the Owl Creek and Nomini Creek
estimated concentrations in surface waters resulting watersheds. Both watersheds have been instrumented
from agricultural applications. HSPF was applied to to monitor runoff quality from forest, agricultural
selected watersheds in three separate agricultural cropland, and animal feedlot areas. AGNPS is being
regions? Iowa River Basin, IA; Honey Creek, OH; and applied to the watersheds to analyze potential re-
Little River, GA ? under different usage assumptions to ductions in nutrient loadings for alternative
evaluate a likely range of both mean annual and management scenarios (M. Flagg, Virginia Dept. of
maximum daily alachlor concentrations (Mulkey and Soil and Water Conservation, Richmond, VA, Personal
Donigian, 1984). The modeling results provided input Communication, 1990). The results of these
to the human health risk assessment in which EPA applications, and planned use of the calibrated HSPF
decided to allow continued use of alachlor in the U.S. model resulting from the Chesapeake Bay Program
application noted above, will be used to evaluate the
6.2.3CREAMS Application in Pennsylvania means of achieving Virginia's 40% nutrient reductions
required by the Chesapeake Bay Agreement.
The CREAMS model was applied by the University of
Maryland Department of Agriculture and Engineering 6.2.6Use of HSPF in Metropolitan Washington
to selected subbasins of the Susquehanna and
Potomac river basins in Pennsylvania to evaluate the The Metropolitan Washington Council of
effects of agricultural BMPs on nutrient loadings to Governments has used HSPF in a number of
surface water and to groundwater (Shirmohammadi modeling studies to evaluate water quality impacts of
and Shoemaker, 1988). The study was sponsored by nonpoint sources, potential changes resulting from
the Interstate Commission on the Potomac River to proposed urban stormwater management practices,
evaluate the relative nutrient loading impacts of a and water quality changes resulting from alternative
wide range of potential BMPs, including no till, wastewater treatment levels (Sullivan and Schueler,
contouring, terracing, strip cropping, diversions, 1982; Schueler, 1983; Metropolitan Washington
grass waterways, nutrient management, and various Council of Governments, 1985). Studies on
joint combination scenarios. Although the model was Piscataway and Seneca Creeks demonstrated
applied without calibration or observed reasonable agreement with observed instream water
runoff/leaching data for comparison, the results quality variables, and then the calibrated model was
showed the relative effectiveness of the alternatives used to analyze water quality impacts of alternative
analyzed. The study was performed in support of scenarios including increased street sweeping,
efforts to evaluate alternative means of achieving the stormwater detention, and stormwater treatment.
40% reduction goal of the Chesapeake Bay Since the watershed areas are primarily urban, the
Agreement. buildup/washoff algorithms were used to calculate
loadings from all land areas. In a separate study, the
6.2.4Use of SWRRB in NOAA's National Coastal HSPF instream module was used with pre-defined
Pollutant Discharge Inventory nonpoint and point source loadings to evaluate the
impacts of proposed alternative wastewater treatment
The National Oceanic and Atmospheric levels on the segment of the Potomac River near
Administration (NOAA) is using the SWRRB model Washington, D.C.
to evaluate pollutant loadings to coastal estuaries and
embayments as part of its National Coastal Pollutant 6.2.7Patuxent River Nonpoint Source
Discharge Inventory (NOAA, 1987a; 1987b). SWRRB Management Study
is being used for loadings from all non-urban areas,
while a separate procedure is proposed for all urban The Maryland Department of the Environment is
areas. SWRRB has been run for all major estuaries on conducting a study of the Patuxent River to quantify
the East Coast, Gulf Coast, and West Coast for a wide nonpoint source contributions and evaluate
range of pollutants. alternative means of improving downstream water
36
quality in the Patuxent River Estuary (Summers, 6.2.8 European Case Studies in Application
1986). The study includes a 7-year monitoring of the CREAMS Model
program that involves observations of runoff quantity
and quality at both field size (single land use) Svetlosanov and Knisel (1982) provide a compendium
locations and instream, multi-land use sites. HSPF is of case studies describing applications of CREAMS in
being applied to calculate nonpoint loadings from the Europe. The work was sponsored by the International
forest, agricultural, and urban land areas of the Institute of Applied Systems Analysis in Laxenburg,
watershed and the instream water quality throughout Austria, with the dual objectives of demonstrating the
the river system. The Patuxent is a microcosm of the use of CREAMS for quantitative evaluation of the
larger Chesapeake Bay, a complex watershed with impacts of agricultural management in different
multiple land uses, point and nonpoint sources, and countries, and performing model testing and
reservoirs draining to a tidal estuary. Like the larger validation studies. The report describes applications
Chesapeake Bay study, both simple and complex in Finland, West Germany, Poland, Sweden, the
nonpoint runoff algorithms will be used to represent United Kingdom, and the Soviet Union; comparisons
all land uses and effects of potential management of model results with observations were made in a
practices. few of the studies, while in others CREAMS was used
without comparison to observed data to investigate
alternative practices. Analysis of the case studies
identified some of the potential benefits from the
model applications, and elucidated some of the
generic model weaknesses (e.g., smowmelt) and spe-
cific refinements needed for European conditions.

37
38
 Section 7.0
Summary and Recommendations for Nonpoint Source Runoff Quality Modeling

Simulation of runoff quality will increase in Physically-based urban models depend upon
importance as regulation and control of nonpoint conceptual buildup and washoff processes
sources increases in the next several years. The incorporated into the quality algorithms. Such models
implementation of Section 405 of the Clean Water Act have withstood the test of time and have been applied
is especially important if stormwater outfalls will be in major urban runoff quality studies. However, the
required to have NPDES permits. The EPA is relative lack of fundamental data on buildup and
currently establishing guidelines for data collection, washoff parameters has lead to simpler methods more
quality monitoring and forms of analysis such that often being applied, starting with the assumption of a
urban areas can meet their obligations under these constant concentration and becoming more complex.
regulations. Waste load allocations and appropriate For example, the derived distribution approach of the
control strategies required under Section 303 (d) and EPA Statistical Method provides very useful screening
319 will demand more detailed analyses of nonpoint information with minimal data? but more than are
contributions for comprehensive water quality required by just assuming a constant concentration.
management. With the mass of NURP and other data, regression
approaches are now more viable but still subject to the
Some form of modeling will almost assuredly become usual restrictions of regression analysis. Spreadsheets
part of routine analyses performed at some portion of are ubiquitous on microcomputers and serve as a
the thousands upon thousands of CSO and convenient mechanism to implement several of the
stormwater discharge locations around the country. simple approaches, especially those that rely upon
Several modeling options exist, but none of them are sets of coefficients and EMCs as a function of land use
truly ? deterministic? in the sense of fully or other demographic information. For example, the
characterizing the physical, chemical and biological EPA Screening Procedures could easily be
mechanisms that underlie conceptual buildup, implemented in a spreadsheet format, and would be
erosion, transport and degradation processes that an appropriate tool for nonpoint source wasteload
occur in an urban drainage system. Even if fully allocation assessments, at least for screening
deterministic models were available, it is doubtful purposes.
that they could be routinely applied without
calibration data. But this is essentially true of almost Minimal data requirements and ease of application
all methods. Because a method is simple, e.g., are the principal advantages of simpler simulation
constant concentration, does not make it more correct. methods (constant concentration, statistical,
Rather, the assumption is made that there will be regression, loading functions). However, in spite of
some error in prediction regardless of the method, their more complex data requirements, conceptual
and there may be no point in compiling many models (DR3M-QUAL, HSPF, STORM, SWMM,
hypothetical input parameters for a more complex CREAMS, SWRRB) have advantages in terms of simu-
model lacking a guarantee of a better prediction. For lation of routing effects and control options as well as
example, a study in Denver showed that regression superior statistical properties of continuous time
equations could predict about as well as series. For example, the EPA Statistical Method
DR3M-QUAL given the available quality information assumes that stream flow is not correlated with the
(Ellis and Lindner-Lunsford, 1986). But urban runoff flow. This may or may not be true in a
physically-based (conceptual) models do have certain given situation, but it is not necessary to require such
advantages, discussed later. an assumption when running a model such as HSPF
or SWMM. The urban and non-urban conceptual
39
models discussed in detail all have a means of sored, or are currently sponsoring, model
simulating storage and treatment effects, and/or development efforts need to recognize the critical
impacts of a significant number of management importance of these activities if their efforts are to
options. Other than a constant removal, this is dif- produce `operational' models with associated wide-
ficult to do with the simpler methods. The conceptual spread usage.
models generally have very much superior hydrologic
and hydraulic simulation capabilities (not true for Agricultural model development will continue largely
STORM except that it can also use real rainfall under the continuing sponsorship of the U.S.D.A.
hyetographs as input). This alone usually leads to Currently, CREAMS is the most used model for
better prediction of loads (product of flow times strictly agricultural land, but a number of model
concentration). It should also be borne in mind that development efforts are ongoing at various
even complex models such as SWMM can be run with agricultural research stations across the country. The
minimal quality (and quantity) data requirements, continuing development and testing of the SWRRB
such as using only a constant concentration. Finally, model will likely lead to its increased use in a number
some of the case studies imply that transferability of of non-urban studies; its use of a daily time step is
coefficients and parameters is easier with buildup and attractive to users because of the less intensive data
washoff than with rating curve and constant needs than for HSPF. However, for large complex
concentration methods. watersheds, involving both urban and non-urban
areas, HSPF will remain the model of choice for many
If a more complex conceptual model is to be applied, users. Ongoing agricultural research will likely lead to
which one should it be from among the ones improved understanding of processes, with improved
described herein? SWMM is certainly the most widely algorithms that should be incorporated into current
used and probably the most versatile for urban areas, models. For example, the U.S.D.A. effort to develop a
but all have their advocates. HSPF may be more more process-oriented replacement for the USLE (i.e.
appropriate in large multiple land use watersheds, in the WEPP? Watershed Erosion Prediction Project) will
areas with more open space where groundwater likely lead to improved soil erosion algorithms that
contributions increase in importance, where rainfall- may be appropriate for incorporation into current
induced erosion occurs, or where quality interactions models.
are important along the runoff pathway. The
simplicity of STORM remains attractive, and various What is a reasonable approach to simulation of runoff
consultants have utilized their own version as a quality? The main idea, for both urban and non-urban
planning tool. The USGS DR3M-QUAL model has areas, is to use the simplest approach that will address
been successfully applied in several USGS studies but the project objectives at the time. This usually means
has not seen much use outside the agency. It contains to start simple with a screening tool such as constant
useful techniques for quality calibration. concentration (usually implemented in a spreadsheet),
regression, statistical, or loading function approach. If
SWMM and HSPF retain limited support from the these methods indicate that more detailed study is
EPA Center for Exposure Assessment Modeling necessary or if they are unable to address all the
(CEAM) at Athens, Georgia, and a similar level of aspects of the problem, e.g., the effectiveness of
support is available for CREAMS from the USDA control options or management alternatives, then one
Southeast Watershed Research Laboratory in Tifton, of the more complex models must be run. No method
Georgia. Unfortunately, this support is limited mainly currently available (or likely to be available) can
to distribution and implementation on a computer predict absolute (accurate) values of concentrations
system. STORM and DR3M-QUAL will remain useful, and loads without local calibration data, including
but it is unlikely that either of these two models will complex buildup and washoff models for urban areas,
enjoy enhancements or support from their sponsoring and soil process models for agricultural croplands.
agencies in the near future. Extramural support for all Thus, if a study objective is to provide input loads to
major operational models is highly desirable for main- a receiving water quality model, local site-specific
tenance and improvements, especially in light of the data will probably be required. On the other hand,
general models in nonpoint source studies in the U.S. several methods and models might be able to
No model can exist for long without continuing compare the relative contributions from different
sustenance in the form of user support, source areas, or to determine the relative effectiveness
maintenance, and refinements in re sponse to of control and/or management options (if the controls
changing technology. All agencies who have spon- can be characterized by simple removal fractions).
40
When used for purposes such as these, the methods,
including buildup and washoff models, can usually be
applied on the basis of NURP data (for urban models)
and/or the best currently available source of quality
data, such as data from agricultural research stations
for the non-urban models.

When properly applied and their assumptions

respected, models can be tremendously useful tools in
analysis of urban and non-urban runoff quality
problems. Methods and models are evolving that
utilize the large and currently expanding data base of
quality information. As increasing attention is paid to
runoff problems in the future, the methods and
models can only be expected to improve.
Section 8.0
References

Abbott, J. 1977. Guidelines for Calibration and Assessment Modeling. CEAM, EPA, Athens, GA,
Application of STORM. Training Document No. 8. Environmental Software 4(2):76-93.
Hydrologic Engineering Center, Corps of
Engineers, Davis, CA. Ambrose, R.B., Jr., J.P. Connolly, E. Southerland, T.O.
Barnwell, Jr., and J.L. Schnoor. 1988. Waste
Alley, W.M. 1986. Summary of Experience with the Allocation Simulation Models. J. Water Pollution
Distributed Routing Rainfall-Runoff Model Control Federation, 60(9):1646-1655.
(DR3M). In: Urban Drainage Modeling, C.
Maksimovic and M. Radojkovic, (eds). Proc. of American Public Works Association. 1969. Water
International Symposium on Comparison of Urban Pollution Aspects of Urban Runoff. Report
Drainage Models with Real Catchment Data, 11030DNS01/69 (NTIS PB-215532), Federal Water
Dubrovnik, Yugoslavia. Pergamon Press, New Pollution Control Administration, Washington, DC.
York, NY. pp 403-415.
American Society of Agricultural Engineers. 1988.
Alley, W.M. and P.E. Smith. 1982a. Distributed Modeling Agricultural, Forest, and Rangeland Hydrol-
Routing Rainfall-Runoff Model? Version II. USGS ogy. Proceedings of the 1988 International
Open File Report 82-344, Gulf Coast Hydroscience Symposium. ASAE Publication No. 07-88, pp. 510.
Center, NSTL Station, MS. St Joseph, MI.

Alley, W.M. and P.E. Smith. 1982b. Multi-Event Urban Amy, G., R. Pitt, R. Singh, W.L. Bradford and M.B.
Runoff Quality Model. USGS Open File Report LaGraff. 1974. Water Quality Management
82-764, Reston, VA. Planning for Urban Runoff. EPA 440/9-75-004
(NTIS PB 241 689/AS), U.S. Environmental
Alonzo, C.V. and D.G. DeCoursey. 1985. Small Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
Watershed Model. In: Proceedings of the Natural
Resources Modeling Symposium. DeCoursey, D.G. Barnwell, T.O., Jr. 1984. EPA's Center for Water
(ed). Pingree Park, CO October 16-21, 1983. ARS- Quality Modeling. Proc. of the Third International
30. U.S. Department of Agricultural, Agricultural Conference on Urban Storm Drainage. Chalmers
Research Service. pp. 40-46. University, Goteborg, Sweden, Vol. 2, pp. 463-466.

Ambrose, R.B., Jr. and T.O. Barnwell, Jr. 1989. En - Barnwell, T.O., Jr. 1987. EPA Computer Models are
vironmental Software at the U.S. Environmental Available to All. Water Quality International,
Protection Agency's Center for Exposure IAWPRC, No. 2, pp. 19-21.
41
 University of Wisconsin, Madison, WI. June 27-30.
Beasley, D.B. and D.L. Thomas. 1989. Application of pp. 33.
Water Quality Models for Agricultural and
Forested Watersheds. Southern Cooperative Series DeCoursey, D.G. 1985. Proceedings of the Natural Re-
Bulletin No. 338. University of Georgia? Coastal sources Modeling Symposium. Pingree Park, CO
Plain Experiment Station, Tifton, GA pp. 116. October 16-21, 1983. ARS-30. U.S. Department of
Agricultural, Agricultural Research Service. pp.
Bedient, P.B. and W.C. Huber. 1989. Hydrology and 532.
Floodplain Analysis. Addison-Wesley Publishers,
Reading, MA. Devaurs, M.A., E.P. Springer, L.J. Lane and G.J. Lang-
horst. 1988. Prediction Methodology for
Bensen, M.A. 1962. Spurious Correlation in Contaminant Transport from Rangeland
Hydraulics and Hydrology. J. Hydraulics Div., Watersheds. In: Modeling Agricultural, Forest, and
Proc. ASCE, 91(HY4):57-71. Rangeland Hydrology. Proceedings of the 1988
International Symposium. American Society of
Brown, R.G. 1984. Relationship between Quantity and Agricultural Engineers. ASAE Publication No. 07-
Quality of Storm Runoff and Various Watershed 88, pp. 79-94. St. Joseph, MI.
Characteristics in Minnesota, USA. Proc. Third
International Conference on Urban Storm Di Toro, D.M. 1984. Probability Model of Stream
Drainage, Chalmers University, Goteborg, Sweden, Quality Due to Runoff. J. Environmental
Vol.3, pp. 791-800. Engineering Div., ASCE, 110(3):607-628.

Camp, Dresser and McKee. 1987. Boggy Creek Basin Di Toro, D.M. and M.J. Small. 1979. Stormwater Inter -
Nonpoint Source Water Quality Study. Report to ception and Storage. J. Environmental Engineering
the South Florida Water Management District from Div., ASCE, 105(EE1):43-54.
Camp, Dresser and McKee, Maitland, FL.
Donigian, A.S., Jr., J.C. Imhoff, B.R. Bicknell and J.L.
Camp, Dresser and McKee. 1989. Phase I Final Report, Kittle, Jr. 1984. Application Guide for Hydrological
Master Stormwater Management Plan, City of Jack- Simulation Program Fortran (HSPF).
sonville, FL. CDM, Jacksonville, FL. EPA-600/3-84-065, U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Athens, GA.
Davis, M.J., M.K. Snyder and J.W. Nebgen. 1981.
River Basin Validation of the Water Quality Donigian, A.S. Jr. and D.C. Beyerlein. 1985. Review
Assessment Methodology for Screening and Analysis of Available NPS and Integrated
Nondesignated 208 Areas? Volume I: Nonpoint Watershed Models. Prepared by Anderson-Nichols
Source Load Estimation. U.S. Environmental & Co., Palo Alto, CA, for Woodward-Clyde
Protection Agency, Athens, GA. Consultants, Walnut Creek, CA.

Dean, J.D., W.B. Mills and D.B. Porcella. 1981a. A Donigian, A.S. Jr., B.R. Bicknell and J.L. Kittle, Jr.
Screening Methodology for Basin Wide Water 1986. Conversion of the Chesapeake Bay Basin
Quality Management. Symposium on Unified River Model to HSPF Operation. Prepared by AQUA
Basin Management. R.M. North, L.B. Dworsky and TERRA Consultants for Computer Sciences
D.J. Allee (eds.) May 4-7, 1980, Gatlinburg, TN. Corporation, Annapolis, MD and U.S. EPA
Chesapeake Bay Program, Annapolis, MD.
Dean, J.D., B. Hudson and W.B. Mills. 1981b. River
Basin Validation of the MRI Nonpoint Calculator Donigian, A.S. Jr., B.R. Bicknell, L.C. Linker, J.
and Tetra Tech's Nondesignated 208 Screening Hannawald, C. Chang and R. Reynolds. 1990.
Methodologies, Volume II. Chesapeake-Sandusky Chesapeake Bay Program Watershed Model
Nondesignated 208 Screening Methodology Application to Calculate Bay Nutrient Loadings:
Demonstration. U.S. Environmental Protection Preliminary Phase I Findings and Recommenda-
Agency, Athens, GA. tions. Prepared by AQUA TERRA Consultants for
U.S. EPA Chesapeake Bay Program, Annapolis,
DeCoursey, D.G. 1982. ARS Small Watershed Model. MD.
Paper No. 82-2094. ASAE Summer Meeting,
42
Driscoll, E.D. 1979. In: Benefit Analysis for Combined Washington, DC.
Sewer Overflow Control. Seminar Publication,
EPA-625/4-79-013, U.S. Environmental Protection Environmental Protection Agency. 1976a. Land
Agency, Cincinnati, OH. Use? Water Quality Relationship. WPD-3-76-02,
Water Planning Division, U.S. Environmental
Driscoll, E.D. 1981. Combined Sewer Overflow Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
Analysis Handbook for Use in 201 Facility
Planning. Two Volumes, Final Report for Contract Environmental Protection Agency. 1976b et seq.
68-01-6148, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Areawide Assessment Procedures Manual. Three
Facility Requirements Division, Policy and Volumes, EPA-600/9-76-014 (NTIS PB-
Guidance Branch, Washington, DC. 271863/SET), U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Cincinnati, OH.
Driscoll, E.D. 1986. Lognormality of Point and
Nonpoint Source Pollutant Concentrations. Proc. Environmental Protection Agency. 1983b. Results of
Stormwater and Water Quality Model Users Group the Nationwide Urban Runoff Program, Volume I,
Meeting, Orlando, FL, EPA/600/9-86/023, pp. 157- Final Report. NTIS PB84-185552, U.S.
176, (NTIS PB87-117438/AS), U.S. Environmental Environmental Protection Agency, Washington,
Protection Agency, Athens, GA. DC.

Driscoll, E.D., P.E. Shelley, and E.W. Strecker. 1989. Feldman, A.D. 1981. HEC Models for Water
Pollutant Loadings and Impacts from Highway Resources System Simulation: Theory and
Stormwater Runoff. Vol. I Design Procedure Experience. Advances in Hydroscience, Vol. 12, pp.
(FHWA-RD-88-006) and Vol. III Analytical 297-423, Academic Press, New York, NY.
Investigation and Research Report
(FHWA-RD-88-008). Office of Engineering and Giorgini, A. and F. Zingales. 1986. Agricultural
Highway Operations R & D, Federal Highway Nonpoint Source Pollution: Model Selection and
Administration, McLean, VA. Application. Developments in Environmental
Modeling Series (No. 10) pp. 409. Elsevier Science
Driver, N.E., M.H. Mustard, R.B. Rhinesmith and R.F. Publishers, Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
Middelburg. 1985. U.S. Geological Survey Urban
Stormwater Data Base for 22 Metropolitan Areas Haith, D.A. 1980. A Mathematical Model for
Throughout the United States. U.S.G.S. Open File Estimating Pesticide Losses in Runoff. J. of Env.
Report 85-337, Lakewood, CO. Qual 9(3):428-433.

Driver, N.E. and G.D. Tasker. 1988. Techniques for Haith, D.A. and L.J. Tubbs. 1981. Watershed Loading
Estimation of Storm-Runoff Loads, Volumes, and Functions for Nonpoint Sources. ASCE. J. Env.
Selected Constituent Concentrations in Urban Engr. 107(EE1):121-137.
Watersheds in the United States. U.S.G.S. Open-File
Report 88-191, Denver, CO. Haith, D.A. and L.L. Shoemaker. 1987. Generalized
Loading Functions for Stream Flow Nutrients.
Ellis, S.R. and J.B. Lindner-Lunsford. 1986. AWRA. Wat. Res. Bull. 23(3):471-478.
Comparison of Conceptually Based and Regression
Rainfall-Runoff Models in the Denver Metropolitan Heaney, J.P., W.C. Huber, M.A. Medina, Jr., M.P.
Area, Colorado, USA. In: Urban Drainage Modelling, Murphy, S.J. Nix, and S.M. Hasan. 1977.
Proceedings of International Symposium on Nationwide Evaluation of Combined Sewer
Comparison of Urban Drainage Models with Real Overflows and Urban Stormwater Discharges, Vol.
Catchment Data, C. Maksimovic and M. II: Cost Assessment and Impacts. EPA-600/2-064b
Radojkovic, eds., Pergamon Press, New York, NY. (NTIS PB-266005), U.S. Environmental Protection
pp. 263-273. Agency, Cincinnati, OH.

Environmental Protection Agency. 1973. Methods for Heaney, J.P., W.C. Huber and S.J. Nix. 1976. Storm
Identifying and Evaluating the Nature and Extent Water Management Model, Level I, Preliminary
of Non-point Sources of Pollutants. EPA-430/9-73- Screening Procedures. EPA-600/2-76-275 (NTIS PB-
014, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 259916). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
43
 Cincinnati, OH. Torno, J. Marsalek and M. Desbordes, eds., NATO
ASI Series, Series G: Ecological Sciences, 10:167-
Heaney, J.P., W.C. Huber, H. Sheikh, M.A. Medina, 242, Springer-Verlag, New York, NY.
J.R. Doyle, W.A. Peltz and J.E. Darling. 1975. Urban
Stormwater Management Modeling and Decision- Huber, W.C. 1986. Modeling Urban Runoff Quality:
Making. EPA-670/2-75-022 (NTIS PB-242290), U.S. State of the Art. Proceedings of Conference on
Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, OH. Urban Runoff Quality, Impact and Quality
Enhancement Technology, B. Urbonas and L.A.
Henderson, R.J. and G.D. Moys. 1987. ? Development Roesner, eds., Engineering Foundation, ASCE, pp.
of a Sewer Flow Quality Model for the United 34-48, New York, NY.
Kingdom,? Topics in Urban Storm Water Quality,
Planning and Management, Proc. Fourth Int. Huber, W.C., J.P. Heaney and B.A. Cunningham. 1986.
Conference on Urban Storm Drainage, W. Gujer Storm Water Management Model (SWMM)
and V. Krejci, eds., Ecole Polytechnique Federale, Bibliography. EPA/600/3-85/077 (NTIS
Lausanne, Switzerland, pp. 201-207. PB86-136041/AS), U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Athens, GA.
Howard, C.D.D. 1976. Theory of Storage and
Treatment Plant Overflows. J. Environmental Huber, W.C. and R.E. Dickinson. 1988. Storm Water
Engineering Division, Proc. ASCE, Management Model User's Manual, Version 4.
102(EE4):709-722. EPA/600/3-88/001a (NTIS PB88-236641/AS), U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Athens, GA.
Huang, P. and J.L. DiLorenzo. 1990. ? Lower
Hackensack River Watershed Planning Using Hydrologic Engineering Center. 1977. Storage,
SWMM-4,? Proc. Stormwater and Water Quality Treatment, Overflow, Runoff Model, STORM,
Modeler Users Group Meeting, Eatontown, NJ, User's Manual. Generalized Computer Program
EPA Report in press, Environmental Protection 723-S8-L7520, Corps of Engineers, Davis, CA.
Agency, Athens, GA.
Hydroscience, Inc. 1979. A Statistical Method for
Huber, W.C. 1980. Urban Wasteload Generation by Assessment of Urban Storm Water
Multiple Regression Analysis of Nationwide Urban Loads? Impacts? Controls. EPA-440/3-79-023 (NTIS
Runoff Data. Proc. Workshop on Verification of PB-299185/9), U.S. Environmental Protection
Water Quality Models, R.V. Thomann and T.O. Agency, Washington, DC.
Barnwell, eds., EPA-600/9-80-016, pp. 167-175
(NTIS PB80-186539), U.S. Environmental Protection Jacobsen, P., P. Harremoes and C. Jakobsen. 1984.
Agency, Athens, GA. ? The Danish Stormwater Modelling Package: The
SVK-System,? Proc. Third Int. Conference on
Huber, W.C. and J.P. Heaney. 1982. Analyzing Urban Storm Drainage, P. Balmer, P-A. Malmqvist
Residuals Generation and Dis charge from Urban and A. Sjoberg, eds., Chalmers University,
and Non-urban Land Surfaces. In: Analyzing Goteborg, Sweden, 2:453-562.
Natural Systems, Analysis for Regional
Residuals? Environmental Quality Management, D.J. James, L.D. and S.J. Burges. 1982. Selection,
Basta and B.T. Bower, eds., Resources for the Calibration, and Testing of Hydrologic Models. In:
Future, Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, Hydrologic Modeling of Small Watersheds, C.T. Haan,
MD (also available from NTIS as PB83-223321), H.P. Johnson and D.L Brakensiek, eds., Monograph
Chapter 3, pp. 121-243. No. 5, Chapter 11, pp. 435-472, American Society of
Agricultural Engineers, St. Joseph, MI.
Huber, W.C., J.P. Heaney, D.A. Aggidis, R.E.
Dickinson, K.J. Smolenyak and R.W. Wallace. 1982. Johansen, N.B., J.J. Linde-Jensen and P. Harremoes.
Urban Rainfall-Runoff-Quality Data Base, 1984. ? Computing Combined System Overflow
EPA-600/2-81-238 (NTIS PB82-221094), U.S. Based on Historical Rain Series,? Proc. Third Int.
Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, OH. Conference on Urban Storm Drainage, P. Balmer, P-
A. Malmqvist and A. Sjoberg, eds., Chalmers
Huber, W.C. 1985. Deterministic Modeling of Urban University, Goteborg, Sweden, 3:909-918.
Runoff Quality. In: Urban Runoff Pollution, H.C.
44
Johanson, R.C., J.C. Imhoff, J.L. Kittle and A.S.
Donigian. 1984. Hydrological Simulation Metcalf and Eddy, Inc. 1971. University of Florida,
Program? Fortran (HSPF): User's Manual for and Water Resources Engineers, Inc., Storm Water
Release 8. EPA-600/3-84-066. U.S. Environmental Management Model, Volume I? Final Report. EPA
Protection Agency, Athens, GA. Report 11024DOC07/71 (NTIS PB-203289), U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Washington,
Kibler, D.F., ed. 1982. Urban Stormwater Hydrology. DC.
American Geophysical Union, Water Resources
Monograph 7, Washington, DC. Miller, R.A., H.C. Mattraw, Jr. and M.E. Jennings.
1978. Statistical Modeling of Urban Storm Water
Knisel, W. (ed). 1980. CREAMS: A Field-Scale Model Processes, Broward County, Florida. Proc.
for Chemicals, Runoff, and Erosion from International Symposium on Urban Storm Water
Agricultural Management Systems. U.S. Management, University of Kentucky, Lexington,
Department of Agriculture. Conservation Research KY. pp. 269-273.
Report No. 26, 640 pp.
Mills, W.B., V.H. Colber and J.D. Dean. 1979. Hand-
Lager, J.A., W.G. Smith, W.G. Lynard, R.M. Finn and Held Calculator Programs for Analysis of River
E.J. Finnemore. 1977. Urban Stormwater Water Quality Interactions. Tetra Tech, Inc.,
Management and Technology: Update and Users' Lafayette, CA.
Guide. EPA-600/8-77-014 (NTIS PB-275654), U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, OH. Mills, W.B., J.D. Dean, D.B. Porcella, S.A. Gherini,
R.J.M. Hudson, W.E. Frick, G.L. Rupp and G.L.
Li, W., D.E. Merrill and D.A. Haith. 1989. Loading Bowie. 1982. Water Quality Assessment: A
Functions for Pesticide Runoff. J. WPCF 62(1):16-26. Screening Procedure for Toxic and Conventional
Pollutants. EPA-600/6-82-004a and b. Volumes I
Loganathan, V.G. and J.W. Delleur. 1984. Effects of and II. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
Urbanization on Frequencies of Overflows and
Pollutant Loadings from Storm Sewer Overflows: Mockus, J. 1972. Estimation of Direct Runoff from
A Derived Distribution Approach. Water Resources Storm Rainfall. In: National Engineering
Research, 20(7):857-865. Handbook, Sec. 4, Hydrology. U.S. Soil
Conservation Service, Washington, DC.
Lorber, M.N. and L.A. Mulkey. 1982. An Evaluation of
Three Pesticide Runoff Loading Models. J. Environ. Morrissey, S.P. and D.R.F. Harleman. 1989.
Qual. 11(3):519-529. ? Technology and Policy Issues Involved in the
Boston Harbor Cleanup,? Parsons Laboratory
Manning, M.J., R.H. Sullivan and T.M. Kipp. 1977. Report No. 327, M.I.T., Cambridge, MA.
Nationwide Evaluation of Combined Sewer
Overflows and Urban Stormwater Discharges ? Vol. Mulkey, L.A. and A.S. Donigian, Jr. 1984. Modeling
III: Characteristics of Discharges. Alachlor Behavior in Three Agricultural River
EPA-600/2-77-064c (NTIS PB-272107), U.S. En- Basins. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
vironmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, OH. Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA.

Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments. Mulkey, L.A., R.F. Carsel and C.N. Smith. 1986. Devel-
1985. Documentation of the Calibration and opment, Testing, and Applications of Nonpoint
Verification of the Upper Potomac River Model. Source Models for Evaluation of Pesticides Risk to
Prepared for Maryland Office of Environmental the Environment. In: Agricultural Nonpoint Source
Programs, Baltimore, MD. Pollution: Model Selection and Application. Giorgini,
A. and F. Zingales (eds). Developments in Environ-
McElroy, A.D., S.Y. Chiu, J.W. Nebgen, A. Aleti and mental Modeling Series (No. 10). Elsevier Science
R.W. Bennett. 1976. Loading Functions for Publishers, Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
Assessment of Water Pollution from Non-Point
Sources. EPA-600/2-76-151 (NTIS PB-253325), U.S. Najarian, T.O., T.T. Griffin and V.K. Gunawardana.
Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, 1986. Development Impacts on Water Quality: A
DC. Case Study. J. Water Resources Planning and
45
 Management, ASCE, 112(1):20-35.
Roesner, L.A., J.A. Aldrich and R.E. Dickinson. 1988.
Najarian, T.O., V.K. Gunawardana, R.V. Ram and D. Storm Water Management Model User's Manual
Lai. 1990. ? Modeling the Impact of Point/Nonpoint Version 4: Addendum I, EXTRAN.
Discharges on Lower Hackensack River Water EPA/600/3-88/001b (NTIS PB88-236658/AS), U.S.
Quality,? Proc. Stormwater and Water Quality Environmental Protection Agency, Athens, GA.
Modeler Users Group Meeting, Eatontown, NJ,
EPA Report in press, Environmental Protection Roesner, L.A. and S.A. Dendrou. 1985. Discussion of
Agency, Athens, GA. ? Probability Model of Stream Quality Due to
Runoff,? by D.M. Di Toro. Journal of Environ -
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration. mental Engineering, ASCE, 111(5):738-740.
1987a. The National Coastal Pollutant Discharge
Inventory: Urban Runoff Methods Document. Roesner, L.A., H.M. Nichandros, R.P. Shubinski, A.D.
Office of Oceanography and Marine Assessment, Feldman, J.W. Abbott and A.O Friedland. 1974. A
NOAA, Rockville, MD. Model for Evaluating Runoff-Quality in
Metropolitan Master Planning. ASCE Urban Water
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration. Resources Research Program, Technical Memo. No.
1987b. The National Coastal Pollutant Discharge 23 (NTIS PB-234312), ASCE, New York, NY.
Inventory: Nonurban Runoff Methods Document.
Office of Oceanography and Marine Assessment, Sartor, J.D. and G.B. Boyd. 1982. Water Pollution
NOAA, Rockville, MD. Aspects of Street Surface Contaminants.
EPA-R2-72-081 (NTIS PB-214408), U.S. Environ -
Noel, D.D. and M.L. Terstriep. 1982. Q-ILLUDAS? A mental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
Continuous Urban Runoff/Washoff Model. Proc.
Int. Symp. on Urban Hydrology, Hydraulics, and Schueler, T.R. 1983. Seneca Creek Watershed
Sediment Control, UKY BU128, University of Management Study, Final Report, Volumes I and II.
Kentucky, Lexington, KY. pp. 1-10. Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments,
Washington, DC.
Noel, D.D., M.L. Terstriep and C.A. Chenoweth. 1987.
Nationwide Urban Runoff Program Data Reports. Schueler, T.R. 1987. Controlling Urban Runoff: A
Illinois State Water Survey, Dept. of Energy and Practical Manual for Planning and Designing
Natural Resources, Champaign, IL. Urban BMPs. Metropolitan Information Center,
Metropolitan Washington, Council of
Novotny, V. and G. Chesters. 1981. Handbook of Governments, Washington, DC.
Nonpoint Pollution: Sources and Management. Van
Nostrand Reinhold Company, New York, NY. 555 Shirmohammadi, A. and L.L. Shoemaker. 1988.
pp. Impact of Best Management Practices on Water
Quality in Pennsylvania. ICPRB Report No. 88-7.
Novotny, V. 1985. Discussion of ? Probability Model of Prepared for Interstate Commission on the
Stream Quality Due to Runoff,? by D.M. Di Toro. Potomac River Basin, Rockville, MD.
Journal of Environmental Engineering, ASCE,
111(5):736-737. Small, M.J. and D.M. Di Toro. 1979. Stormwater Treat -
ment Systems. Journal of the Environmental
Pisano, W.C. and C.S. Queiroz. 1977. Procedures for Engineering Division. Proc. ASCE,
Estimating Dry Weather Pollutant Deposition in 105(EE3):557-569.
Sewerage Systems. EPA-600/2-77-120 (NTIS
PB-270695), U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Sullivan, M.P. and T.R. Schueler. 1982. ? The
Cincinnati, OH. Piscataway Creek Watershed Model: A Stormwater
and Nonpoint Source Management Tool.? In:
Pitt, R. 1979. Demonstration of Non-Point Pollution Proceedings Stormwater and Water Quality
Abatement Through Improved Street Cleaning Management Modeling and SWMM Users Group
Practices. EPA-600/2-79-161 (NTIS PB80-108988), Meeting. October 18-19, 1982. Paul E. Wisner ed.,
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, Univ. of Ottawa, Dept. Civil Engr., Ottawa, Ont.,
OH. Canada.
46
 Factor. In: Present and Prospective Technology for
Svetlosanov, W. and W.G. Knisel (eds.). 1982. Predicting Sediment Yields and Sources. U.S. Dept.
European and United States Case Studies in of Agricultures. ARS-S-40.
Application of the CREAMS Model. CP-82-S11.
International Institute of Applied Systems Williams, J.R., C.A. Jones and P.T. Dyke. 1984. A
Analysis, Laxenburg, Austria. pp. 147. Modeling Approach to Determining the
Relationship Between Erosion and Soil
Summers, R.M. 1986. HSPF Modeling of the Patuxent Productivity. Trans. ASAE 27(1):129-144.
River Basin. Maryland Office of Environmental
Programs, Baltimore, MD. Presented at Chesapeake Williams, J.R., A.D. Nicks and J.G. Arnold. 1985.
Bay Research Conference, March 1986. Simulator for Water Resources in Rural Basins.
ASCE J. Hydraulic Engineering. 111(6):970-986.
Tasker, G.D. and N.E. Driver. 1988. Nationwide
Regression Models for Predicting Urban Runoff Wischmeier, W.H. and D.D. Smith. 1978. Predicting
Water Quality at Unmonitored Sites. Water Rainfall-Erosion Losses: A Guide to Conservation
Resources Bulletin, 24(5):1091-1101. Planning. Agricultural Handbook No. 537. U.S.
Dept. of Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service.
Terstriep, M.L. and J.B. Stall. 1974. The Illinois Urban
Drainage Area Simulator, ILLUDAS. Bulletin 58, Woodward-Clyde Consultants. 1989. Synoptic
Illinois State Water Survey, Urbana, IL. Analysis of Selected Rainfall Gages Throughout the
United States. Report to EPA, Woodward-Clyde
U.S. Forest Service. 1980. An Approach to Water Re - Consultants, Oakland, CA.
sources Evaluation of Non-Point Silvicultural
Sources (A Procedural Handbook). EPA-600/8-80- Zison, S.W. 1980. Sediment-Pollutant Relationships in
012. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Runoff from Selected Agricultural, Suburban and
Athens, GA. 861 pp. Urban Watersheds. EPA-600/3-80-022, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Athens, GA.
Viessman, W., Jr., G.L. Lewis and J.W. Knapp. 1989.
Introduction to Hydrology. Third Edition, Harper Zison, S.W., K. Haven and W.B. Mills. 1977. Water
and Row, New York, NY. Quality Assessment: A Screening Methodology for
Nondesignated 208 Areas. EPA-600/6-77-023. U.S.
Walker, J.F., S.A. Pickard and W.C. Sonzogni. 1989. Environmental Protection Agency, Athens, GA.
Spreadsheet Watershed Modeling for Nonpoint-
Source Pollution Management in a Wisconsin Area. Zukovs, G., J. Kollar and M. Shanahan. 1986.
Water Resources Bulletin, 25(1):139-147. Development of the HAZPRED Model. Proc.
Stormwater and Water Quality Model Users Group
Ward, A.D., C.A. Alexander, N.R. Fausey and J.D. Meeting, Orlando, FL. EPA/600/9-86/023, pp. 128-
Dorsey. 1988. In: Modeling Agricultural, Forest, and 146 (NTIS PB87-117438/AS), U.S. Environmental
Rangeland Hydrology. Proceedings of the 1988 Inter- Protection Agency, Athens, GA.
national Symposium. American Society of
Agricultural Engineers. ASAE Publication No. 07-
88, pp. 129-141, St. Joseph, MI.

Water Pollution Control Federation. 1989. Manual of

Practice on CSO Pollution Abatement, No. FD-17,
WPCF, Alexandria, VA.

Whipple, D.J., N.S. Grigg, T. Grizzard, C.W. Randall,

R.P. Shubinski and L.S. Tucker. 1983. Stormwater
Management in Urbanizing Areas. Prentice-Hall,
Englewood Cliffs, NJ.

Williams, J.R. 1975. Sediment-Yield Prediction with

Universal Soil Loss Equation Using Runoff Energy
47
 Section 9.0
Appendix
Detailed Model Descriptions

Urban
SWMM
STORM
DR3M-QUAL

Non-Urban
EPA Screening Procedures
AGNPS
ANSWERS
CREAMS/GLEAMS
HSPF
PRZM
SWRRB
UTM-TOX

48
 Nonpoint Source Model Review

1. Name of Method

Storm Water Management Model (SWMM)

2. Type of Method

Surface Water Model: Simple Approach

xx Surface Water Model: Refined Approach
xx Soil (Groundwater) Model: Simple Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Refined Approach

3. Purpose/Scope

Purpose: Predict rainfall/runoff/quality processes in urban and other areas. Predict hydrographs and polluto-
graphs (concentration vs. time) in

xx runoff waters
xx surface waters
xx ground waters

Source/Release Types:

xx Continuous xx Intermittent
xx Single xx Multiple xx Diffuse

Level of Application:

xx Screening xx Intermediate xx Detailed

Types of Chemicals:

xx Conventional xx Organic xx Metals

Unique Features:

xx Addresses degradation products

xx Integral database/database manager
xx Integral uncertainty analysis capabilities
Interactive input/execution manager

4. Level of Effort

System setup: xx mandays xx manweeks manmonths

Assessments: mandays xx manweeks xx manmonths
49
(Estimates reflect order-of-magnitude values and depend heavily on the experience and ability of the assessor.)

50
5. Description of the Method/Techniques dynamics. Residuals (e.g., sludge) are accounted for.
Any constituent may be simulated, but sediment
processes, e.g., scour and deposition, are generally
The Storm Water Management Model (SWMM) consists
weak with the exception of the Storage/Treatment
of several modules or ? blocks? designed to simulate
Block.
most quantity and quality processes in the urban
hydrologic cycle. Storm sewers, combined sewers,
The blocks can be run independently or in any
and natural drainage systems can be simulated. For
sequence. Additional blocks are available for
generation of hydrographs, the Runoff Block
statistical analysis of the output time series (Statistics
simulates the rainfall-runoff process using a nonlinear
Block), input and manipulation of precipitation,
reservoir approach, with an option for snowmelt
evaporation, and temperature time series (Rain and
simulation. Groundwater and unsaturated zone flow
Temp Blocks), line printer graphics (Graph Block),
and outflow are simulated using a simple lumped
and output time series manipulation (Combine Block).
storage scheme. A water balance is maintained
between storms, and the entire model may be used for
6. Data Needs/Availability
both continuous and single event simulation. Flow
routing is accomplished in order of increasing
complexity in the Runoff Block (nonlinear reservoir), SWMM can be run in a very simple configuration,
Transport Block (kinematic wave) and/or Extran e.g., a single subcatchment and no drainage network,
Block (complete dynamic equations). The Extran or in a very detailed configuration, e.g., many
Block is the most comprehensive simulation program subcatchments and channels and pipes. The volume
available in the public domain for a drainage system of data varies accordingly, but at a minimum will
domain and is capable of simulating backwater, require information on area, imperviousness, slope,
surcharging, looped sewer connections and a variety roughness, depression storage and infiltration
of hydraulic structures and appurtenances. The characteristics at the desired level of detail.
Storage/Treatment Block may be used for storage- Channel/pipe data include shapes, dimensions,
indication flow routing. Output from all blocks slopes or invert elevations, roughnesses, etc. Quantity
includes both flow and stage hydrographs. data are usually available from the urban municipality
in the form of contour maps and drainage plans.
Quality processes in the Runoff Block include
generation of surface runoff constituent loads through If quality is generated in the Runoff Block using a
a variety of options: 1) build-up of constituents during build-up/wash-off formulation, then build-up
dry weather and wash-off during wet weather, 2) coefficients are needed for alternative build -up
? rating curve? approach in which load is proportional formulations (i.e., linear, power, exponential or
to flow rate to a power, 3) constant concentration Michaelis-Menton) as well as for wash-off equations.
(including precipitation loads), and/or 4) Universal Due to lack of data availability for these conceptual
Soil Loss Equation. Removal of ? built-up? loads can mechanisms, users often resort to rating curves that
occur by street cleaning during dry weather, and may be more readily derived from measurements, or
special options are available for snow. One constituent to constant concentrations.
can be taken as a fraction (? potency factor ? ) of
another to simulate adsorption onto solids, for Precipitation input can be in the form of hyetographs
example. The concentration of groundwater outflow for individual storm events, or long-term hourly or
may only be treated as a constant. Routing and 15-minute precipitation (or arbitrary time interval)
first-order decay may be simulated in the Runoff and records from the National Climatic Data Center.
Transport Blocks. (Extran includes no quality Measured hydrographs and pollutographs (or storm
simulation.) The Transport Block may also be used to event loads or event mean concentrations) are
simulate scour and deposition within the sewer required for calibration and verification. Quantity
system based Shield's criterion for initiation of results are often reasonably good with little or no cali -
motion, and generation of dry-weather flow and bration, whereas quality results need local,
quality. The Storage/Treatment Block simulates site-specific measurements to ensure accurate
removal in storage/treatment devices by 1) first-order predictions. Since quality measurements are
decay coupled with complete mixing or plug flow, expensive and sparse, reliance is often placed on
2) removal functions (e.g., solids deposition as a generalized data from other sites, e.g., EPA
function of detention time), or 3) sedimentation Nationwide Urban Runoff Program (NURP) data,

51
from which reasonable comparative assessments may printer are required. Over 200 sample input files are
usually be made. However, if SWMM (or any urban also distributed, along with the Fortran source code.
nonpoint source model) is used to drive a receiving The program is also maintained for DEC/VAX
water quality model, local, site-specific quality systems; however, the user must perform his/her
measurements are normally required. own compilation from the Fortran source code. Input
files must be prepared using an editor capable of
7. Output of the Assessment producing an ASCII file as output. No automatic or
menu-driven input routine is available. The program
can be obtained in either floppy disk format for
SWMM produces a time history of flow, stage and
MS-DOS applications or on a 9-track magnetic tape
constituent concentration at any point in the
(from EPA only) with installation instructions for the
watershed. Seasonal and annual summaries are also
DEC/VAX VMS environment. SWMM has been
produced, along with continuity checks and other
installed on many computers world-wide with no or
summary output. The Statistics Block may be used for
minor modifications.
storm event separation and frequency analysis of any
of the time series. Somewhat crude (by today's
10. Experience
standards) line printer graphics are available for
hydrograph and pollutograph plots, including
comparison with measured data. The original version of SWMM was developed in
1969-71 by a consortium of Metcalf and Eddy, Inc.,
8. Limitations Water Resources Engineers, Inc. (now a part of Camp,
Dresser and McKee, Inc.), and the University of
Florida (Metcalf and Eddy et al., 1971). The program
The simulation methods used in various blocks are
was maintained intermittently for several years at the
extensively described in the SWMM documentation
University of Florida under the sponsorship first of
and need to conceptually represent the prototype
the EPA Storm and Combined Sewer Branch
watershed for a satisfactory simulation. Experience
(Cincinnati) and later by the EPA Center for Exposure
has shown SWMM quantity simulations to compare
Assessment Modeling (Athens, GA). Limited (un-
favorably with measurements and with other
sponsored) maintenance and development work
conventional hydrologic methods, e.g., unit
continues at the University of Florida. Continuing
hydrographs. Quality simulation is especially weak in
updates to the Extran Block have been placed in the
representation of the true physical, chemical and
public domain by Camp, Dresser and McKee, Inc. and
biological processes that occur in nature and is often a
incorporated into the model. The most current version
calibration or curve-fitting exercise. This accounts for
of the model is Version 4 (Huber and Dickinson, 1988;
the tendency for users to bypass build-up/wash-off
Roesner et al., 1988) following earlier Version 2
formulations in favor of constant concentrations or
(Heaney et al., 1975; Huber et al., 1975) and Version 3
rating curves that may be more easily calibrated.
(Huber et al., 1981; Roesner et al., 1981). A SWMM
Perhaps the weakest component of the model is
bibliography (Huber et al., 1985) contains over 200
simulation of solids transport, although it should be
SWMM-related references, including many references
borne in mind that this is difficult to do in any model.
to case studies. The model is often referenced in texts
The microcomputer version of the program is not
(e.g., Viessman et al., 1989) and has been used in
especially ? user friendly? and lacks good graphics
applications ranging from routine drainage design to
routines. However, on-screen messages are provided
highly complex hydraulic routing and analysis to
during program execution to inform the user of the
large nonpoint and point source pollution abatement
current program status.
studies, e.g., Boston, Detroit, Washington DC.
9. Hardware/Software Requirements
Maintaining SWMM as a non-proprietary model and
in the public domain has produced massive user
SWMM is written in ANSI standard Fortran 77. feedback to the model developers and led to many
Executable code prepared using the Ryan-McFarland improvements (Huber, 1989). This has been greatly
Fortran compiler is distributed for IBM facilitated by approximately semi-annual meetings of
XT/AT-compatibles. A hard disk is required and a the Storm and Water Quality Model Users Group and
math co-processor is usually required (see Contact publication of proceedings by EPA. The model has
section, below). No special peripherals other than a achieved the status of a ? standard of comparison ? for

52
modelers wishing to develop new and improved in urban runoff without local, site-specific data. Such
techniques. data would likely be required in order to drive a
receiving water quality model, for example. However,
SWMM has been applied to urban hydrologic relative values and comparison of alternatives can
quantity and quality problems in many locations usually still be studied from approximate quality
world-wide, including probably over 100 locations in predictions.
the U.S. and Canada. Applications in major U.S. cities
include Albuquerque, Atlanta, Boston, Chicago, 12. Contact
Cincinnati, Denver, Detroit, Hartford, Jacksonville,
New Haven, New Orleans, Newark, New York,
SWMM is available from the EPA Center for Exposure
Philadelphia, Providence, Rochester, San Jose, San
Assessment Modeling (CEAM) at no charge. It can be
Francisco, Seattle, Syracuse, Tallahassee, Tampa,
downloaded from the CEAM electronic bulletin
Washington DC.
board, from Internet node earth1.epa.gov via
anonymous ftp, or obtained on floppy disks (on two
Because SWMM is in the public domain, portions of
high-density disks). The CEAM also maintains the
the model have been adapted for related modeling
Fortran source code for a DEC/VAX VMS version.
purposes. A model similar to SWMM in many ways
The same program is also available for $50 from the
was developed for the Federal Highway
Department of Civil Engineering, Oregon State
Administration (Dever et al., 1981, 1983). It contains
University. The Oregon and CEAM versions for PCs
components of the Runoff and Extran Blocks along
require a math co-processor. For further information
with specialized hydraulic simulation capabilities for
at the CEAM, contact
highway drainage. Because SWMM contains much
more versatile water quality routines, the FHWA
Model Distribution Coordinator
model will not be discussed further here; however,
Athens Environmental Research Laboratory
some of its characteristics are compared to those of
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
other models by Huber (1985).
960 College Station Road
Athens, Georgia 30605
11. Validation/Review
(706) 546-3549

The program has been calibrated and verified on Documentation (Huber et al., 1988; Roesner et al.,
many independent data sets, and the model 1988) can be obtained from the NTIS or from Oregon
algorithms have been validated through extensive State University:
outside analysis and review during the 20 years of
model history. Several comparisons of SWMM and Dr. Wayne C. Huber
other models have been conducted (e.g., Heeps and Dept. of Civil Engineering
Mein, 1974; Brandstetter, 1977; Huber and Heaney, Oregon State University Apperson Hall 202
1982; Huber, 1985; Water Pollution Control Corvallis, OR 97331-2302
Federation, 1989). In 1982 the U.S. Office of (503) 737-4934
Technology Assessment said that its ? reliability and
widespread availability have made SWMM the most 13. References
widely used model of its type in the United States and
Canada, and have been important in increasing the
Brandstetter, A. 1976. Assessment of Mathematical
use of models by engineers and planners. The SWMM
Models for Storm and Combined Sewer
User's Group [now the Storm and Water Quality
Management, EPA-600/2-76-175a (NTIS
Model Users Group, sponsored by the EPA CEAM]
PB-259597), Environmental Protection Agency,
has been instrumental in achieving the widespread
Cincinnati, OH.
dissemination and acceptance enjoyed by this
important modeling tool.? (Office of Technology
Cunningham, B.A. and W.C. Huber. 1987. Economic
Assessment, 1982).
and Predictive Reliability Implications of
Stormwater Design Methodologies, Publication No.
A final caveat about water quality predictions is still
98, Florida Water Resources Research Center,
in order: neither SWMM or any other urban nonpoint
University of Florida, Gainesville, 146 pp.
model can predict accurate concentrations and loads

53
Dever, R.J., Jr., L.A. Roesner and J.A. Aldrich. 1983. PB83-223321).
Urban Highway Storm Drainage Model Vol. 4,
Surface Runoff Program User's Manual and Huber, W.C., J.P. Heaney and B.A. Cunningham. 1985.
Documentation, FHWA/RD-83/044, Federal Storm Water Management Model (SWMM) Bibliog-
Highway Administration, Washington, DC. raphy, EPA/600/3-85/077 (NTIS PB86-136041/AS),
Environmental Protection Agency, Athens, GA, 58
Dever, R.J., Jr., L.A. Roesner, and D-C., Woo. 1981. pp.
? Development and Application of a Dynamic
Urban Highway Drainage Model,? Urban Huber, W.C., J.P. Heaney, M.A Medina, W.A. Peltz, H.
Stormwater Hydraulics and Hydrology, Proc. Sheikh and G.F. Smith. 1975. Storm Water
Second International Conference on Urban Storm Management Model User's Manual, Version II,
Drainage, Urbana, IL, Water Resources EPA-670/2-75-017 (NTIS PB-257809), Environ-
Publications, Littleton, CO, pp. 229-235. mental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, OH, 351 pp.

Heaney, J.P., W.C. Huber, H. Sheikh, M.A. Medina, Huber, W.C., J.P. Heaney, S.J. Nix, R.E. Dickinson and
J.R. Doyle, W.A. Peltz and J.E. Darling. 1975. Urban D.J. Polmann. 1981. Storm Water Management
Stormwater Management Modeling and Model User's Manual, Version III,
Decision-Making, EPA-670/2-75-022 (NTIS EPA-600/2-84-109a (NTIS PB84-198423), Environ-
PB-242290), Environmental Protection Agency, mental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, OH, 531 pp.
Cincinnati, OH, 186 pp.
Metcalf and Eddy, University of Florida, and Water
Heeps, D.P. and R.G. Mein. 1974. ? Independent Com- Resources Engineers. 1971. Storm Water
parison of Three Urban Runoff Models,? J. Management Model, Vol. I, Final Report,
Hydraulics Division, Proc. ASCE, 11024DOC07/71 (NTIS PB-203289)EPA Water
100(HY7):995-1009. Pollution Control Research Series Washington,
D.C., 352 pp.
Huber, W.C. 1986. ? Deterministic Modeling of Urban
Runoff Quality.? In: Urban Runoff Pollution, Pro- Office of Technology Assessment. 1982. Use of Models
ceedings of the NATO Advanced Research for Water Resources Management, Planning, and
Workshop on Urban Runoff Pollution, Montpellier, Policy, U.S. Govt. Printing Office, Washington, DC.
France, August 1985, H.C. Torno, J. Marsalek, and
M. Desbordes, eds., Springer-Verlag, New York, Roesner, L.A., R.P. Shubinski and J.A. Aldrich. 1981.
Series G: Ecological Sciences 10:167-242. Storm Water Management Model User's Manual,
Version III: Addendum I, EXTRAN,
Huber, W.C. 1989. ? User Feedback on Public Domain EPA-600/2-84-109b (NTIS PB84-198431), Environ-
Software: SWMM Case Study? In: Proc. Sixth mental Protection Agency, Athens, GA.
Conference on Computing in Civil Engineering,
Atlanta, Georgia, ASCE, New York. Roesner, L.A., J.A. Aldrich and R.E. Dickinson. 1988.
Storm Water Management Model User's Manual,
Huber, W.C. and R.E. Dickinson. 1988. Storm Water Version 4, EXTRAN Addendum,
Management Model Version 4, User's Manual, EPA/600/3-88/001b (NTIS PB88-236658/AS),
EPA/600/3-88/001a (NTIS PB88-236641/AS), Environmental Protection Agency, Athens, GA.
Environmental Protection Agency, Athens, GA, 569
pp.

Huber, W.C. and J.P. Heaney. 1982. ? Analyzing

Residuals Discharge and Generation from Urban
and Non-Urban Land Surfaces, ? Chapter 3, pp.
121-243, In: Analyzing Natural Systems, Analysis for
Regional Residuals? Environmental Quality
Management, Basta, D.J., and B.T. Bower, eds.,
Resources for the Future, Washington, D.C., The
Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, MD,
(also available as EPA-600/3-83-046, NTIS
54
55
 Nonpoint Source Model Review

1. Name of Method

Storage, Treatment, Overflow, Runoff Model (STORM)

2. Type of Method

xx Surface Water Model: Simple Approach

Surface Water Model: Refined Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Simple Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Refined Approach

3. Purpose/Scope

Purpose: Predict rainfall/runoff/quality processes in urban areas. Predict hydrographs and pollutographs
(concentration vs. time) in

xx runoff waters
surface waters
ground waters

Source/Release Types:

xx Continuous Intermittent
Single Multiple xx Diffuse

Level of Application:

xx Screening Intermediate Detailed

Types of Chemicals:

xx Conventional Organic Metals

Unique Features:

Addresses degradation products

Integral database/database manager
xx Integral uncertainty analysis capabilities
Interactive input/execution manager

4. Level of Effort

System setup: xx mandays xx manweeks manmonths

Assessments: mandays xx manweeks xx manmonths
56
(Estimates reflect order-of-magnitude values and depend heavily on the experience and ability of the assessor.)

57
5. Description of Method/Techniques models such as SWMM, HSPF or DR3M-QUAL and
no more easy to estimate. Calibration is advisable but
somewhat awkward because the model is primarily
The Storage, Treatment, Overflow, Runoff Model
set up to run in only a continuous mode. However,
(STORM) contains simplified hydrologic and water
since STORM is usually run only in a screening or
quality routines for continuous simulation in urban
planning mode, comparative evaluations can usually
areas. Hourly runoff depths are computed by means
be made without calibration.
of an area-weighted runoff coefficient for the pervious
and impervious portions, with recovery of depression
7. Output of the Assessment
storage between events. Alternatively, the SCS
method can be used to generate hourly runoff
volumes. There is no flow routing as such. Runoff Output includes storm event summaries of runoff
passes through a treatment device up to its capacity volume, concentrations and loads plus summaries of
and is otherwise diverted to a storage unit. If storage and treatment utilization and total overflow
treatment is at capacity and the storage is full, an loads and concentrations. Hourly hydrographs and
? overflow ? occurs to the receiving water. This scheme pollutographs (concentration vs. time) may be
results from the origins of the model for simulation of computed but rarely are because there is no way to do
combined sewer overflows. At the end of the storm, this for only brief periods during a long, continuous
remaining storage is routed through treatment. The simulation. Useful statistical summaries on an annual
program is driven by hourly precipitation records and total simulation period basis that enable an esti-
obtained from the National Climatic Data Center, and mation of ? percent control, ? i.e., percentage of runoff
snowmelt can be simulated using the degree-day passing through storage and also the number of
method. Dry-weather flows can also be simulated; overflows, both as a function of the treatment rate and
these provide a baseflow and are mixed with storage capacity. The storage-treatment combination
stormwater runoff during a storm event. can then be optimized. The utilization of storage is
also summarized, which helps in defining the
Linear build-up and first-order exponential wash-off duration of critical events, e.g., time required between
is used to simulate concentrations of up to six events for complete drainage of the storage.
pre-specified pollutants (suspended solids, settleable
solids, BOD, total coliforms, ortho -phosphate, and 8. Limitations
nitrogen). Because build-up and wash-off parameters
are adjustable, other conservative pollutants could be
STORM's hydrologic routines (runoff coefficient, SCS,
simulated under the guise of the above names.
no routing) are the simplest of any simulation model
Erosion may be simulated using the Universal Soil
considered. Although they lead to minimal data
Loss Equation. Runoff is mixed with dry-weather
requirements, they also lead to less flexibility in
flow, if any, and transported without quality routing
matching observed hydrographs. Similarly, STORM
or decay to the treatment device. Flows passing
uses the quality routines embodied in the original
through treatment are not included as loads to
SWMM program (Metcalf and Eddy et al., 1971) with
receiving waters (i.e., treatment releases are handled
very few modifications. These have been shown to be
as if there is 100% removal). However, a summary is
relatively inflexible in matching observed polluto-
maintained of concentrations and loads that bypass
graphs and have been updated in SWMM and other
the storage/treatment option and overflow to the
models. Only hourly precipitation inputs are possible,
receiving water. No treatment occurs in the storage
making it difficult to work with more recent
device.
continuous records of 15-minute precipitation data or
arbitrary input hyetographs, e.g., measured rainfall
6. Data Needs/Availability
and runoff data. Lack of an agency-supported
microcomputer version currently hampers the
Data needs are somewhat less for STORM than for model's use.
comparable continuous simulation models because of
its simple hydrologic and water quality routines. 9. Hardware/Software Requirements
Runoff coefficients may be estimated from standard
handbooks and textbooks, and SCS parameters are
STORM is written in Fortran IV and must be
widely available if the soil types are known. Build-up
compiled by the user on a mainframe. It is available
and wash-off parameters are less flexible than in
58
only on a 9-track magnetic tape and has been installed 12. Contact
on IBM and CDC systems, among others. Although
individual users have prepared versions for IBM
In 1989, the distribution of the most popular of the
PC/AT-compatibles, the model developer does not
HEC programs, e.g., HEC-1 and HEC-2 and some
sell or support such a version.
others, was transferred to selected private vendors.
Direct HEC support for these programs is limited to
10. Experience
Corps of Engineers or other federal agencies.
However, STORM is still available direct ly only from
STORM represents the first significant use of the HEC for $200 on a 9-track magnetic tape. No
continuous simulation, especially quality applications, microcomputer version is available. Only the Fortran
in the urban setting. (The Stanford Watershed Model, IV source code is distributed; the user must perform
incorporated into HSPF, was the first continuous the compilation. Contact
model.) The model was developed by the Army
Corps of Engineers, Hydrologic Engineering Center The Hydrologic Engineering Center
(HEC) originally for application to the San Francisco Corps of Engineers
master drainage plan (Roesner et al., 1974; HEC, 1977) 609 Second Street
for abatement of combined sewer overflows (CSOs) Davis, California 95616
into San Francisco Bay (McPherson, 1974). Sixty-two
years of hourly rainfall data were analyzed with 13. References
STORM to provide optimal combinations of storage
and treatment for the master plan. The HEC also
Abbott, J. 1977. Guidelines for Calibration and
provides additional guidelines for model application
Application of STORM, Training Document No. 8,
(Abbott, 1977).
Hydrologic Engineering Center, Corps of
Engineers, Davis, CA.
The support of the HEC, renowned for the suite of
hydrologic models, led to extensive use of STORM in
Abbott, J. 1978. Testing of Several Runoff Models on
the late 70s and early 80s, but the lack of HEC updates
an Urban Watershed, ASCE Urban Water
in recent years has caused a decline in model use.
Resources Research Program, Technical
Nonetheless, many applications may be found,
Memorandum No. 34, ASCE, New York.
including Heaney et al. (1977) for a nationwide
assessment, Shubinski et al. (1977) for the Detroit area,
Heaney, J.P., W.C. Huber, M.A. Medina, M.P. Murphy,
and Najarian et al. (1986) in New Jersey. A simplified
S.J. Nix and S.M. Hasan. 1977. Nationwide
receiving water quality model was developed for
Evaluation of Combined Sewer Overflows and
streams for use with the STORM model (Medina,
Urban Stormwater Discharges, Vol. II: Cost
1979), although Medina's model could also be driven
Assessment and Impacts, EPA-600/2-77-064b
by other continuous simulation models.
(NTIS PB-242290), Environmental Protection
Agency, Cincinnati, OH.
A very similar model to STORM was developed by
Lager et al. (1976) for application in San Francisco and
Hydrologic Engineering Center. 1977. Storage,
Rochester, known as ? Simplified SWMM.? This model
Treatment, Overflow, Runoff Model, STORM,
is not currently available, and STORM is essentially a
User's Manual, Generalized Computer Program
substitute.
723-S8-L7520, Corps of Engineers, Davis, CA.
11. Validation/Review
McPherson, M.B. 1974. ? Innovation: A Case Study,?
ASCE Urban Water Resources Research Program,
STORM has been used in many applications although Technical Memorandum No. 21 (NTIS PB-232166),
seldom compared against measured rainfall-runoff ASCE, New York.
data; one such comparison is by Abbott (1978) in
which model predictions compared favorably with Medina, M.A. 1979. Level III: Receiving Water Quality
hourly runoff values. The model's many applications Modeling for Urban Stormwater Management,
by diverse users serve as a form of validation. EPA-600/2-79-100 (NTIS PB80-134406), Environ-
mental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, OH.

59
Metcalf and Eddy, Inc., University of Florida, Water
Resources Engineers, Inc. 1971. Storm Water
Management Model, Volume I: Final Report,
Report 11024DOC07/71 (NTIS PB-203289),
Environmental Protection Agency, Washington,
DC.

Najarian, T.O, T.T. Griffin and V.K. Gunawardana.

1986. ? Development Impacts on Water Quality: A
Case Study? Journal Water Resources Planning and
Management, ASCE, 112(1):20-35.

Roesner, L.A., H.M. Nichandros, R.P. Shubinski, A.D.

Feldman, J.W. Abbott and A.O. Friedland. 1974. A
Model for Evaluating Runoff-Quality in
Metropolitan Master Planning, ASCE Urban Water
Resources Research Program, Technical
Memorandum No. 23 (NTIS PB-234312), ASCE,
New York.

Shubinski, R.P., A.J. Knepp and C.R. Bristol. 1977.

Computer Program Documentation for the
Continuous Storm Runoff Model SEM-STORM,
Report to the Southeast Michigan Council of
Governments, Detroit, MI.

60
 Nonpoint Source Model Review

1. Name of Method

Distributed Routing Rainfall Runoff Model? Quality DR3M-QUAL

2. Type of Method

Surface Water Model: Simple Approach

xx Surface Water Model: Refined Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Simple Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Refined Approach

3. Purpose/Scope

Purpose: Predict rainfall/runoff/quality processes in urban and other areas. Predict hydrographs and
pollutographs (concentration vs. time) in

xx runoff waters
xx surface waters
ground waters

Source/Release Types:

xx Continuous xx Intermittent
Single Multiple xx Diffuse

Level of Application:

Screening xx Intermediate xx Detailed

Types of Chemicals:

xx Conventional xx Organic xx Metals

Unique Features:

xx Addresses degradation products

Integral database/database manager
Integral uncertainty analysis capabilities
Interactive input/execution manager

4. Level of Effort

System setup: xx mandays xx manweeks manmonths

Assessments: mandays xx manweeks xx manmonths
61
(Estimates reflect order-of-magnitude values and depend heavily on the experience and ability of the assessor.)

62
5. Description of the Method/Techniques other urban hydrologic models and may be derived
from contour maps and drainage plans available from
municipalities. Build-up and wash-off parameters are
The Distributed Routing Rainfall Runoff
very difficult to estimate a priori and require local,
Model? Quality (DR3M-QUAL) incorporates water
site-specific quality measurements for calibration if
quality routines into an updated version of an earlier
accurate quality predictions are needed, e.g., to drive
U.S. Geological Survey (USGS) urban hydrologic
a receiving water quality model.
model (Dawdy et al., 1972). Runoff is generated from
rainfall using the kinematic wave method over
7. Output of the Assessment
multiple subcatchments and routed through drainage
pathways by the same technique. Storage-indication
routing is available for storage basins. The model can DR3M-QUAL produces a time history of runoff
be run over any time period and is sometimes used to hydrographs and quality pollutographs
simulate a group of storms while bypassing (concentration or load vs. time) at any location in the
simulation of the intervening dry periods (although a drainage system. Summaries for storm events are
moisture balance is maintained). A built-in provided as well as line printer graphics for
optimization routine aids in estimation of quantity hydrographs and pollutographs.
parameters.
8. Limitations
Quality is simulated for arbitrary parameters using
exponential build-up functions plus wash-off
The kinematic wave is perhaps as good a conceptual
functions determined from experience with model
model as exists for overland flow but approximations
calibration. Considerable guidance is provided for
are always inherent in its application, as for any
parameter estimation. Removal of built-up solids can
conceptual model. The quantity model can be
occur during dry weather by street cleaning. Erosion
expected to perform reasonably well with minimal
is simulated using empirical equations relating
calibration. No interaction among quality parameters
sediment yield to runoff volume and peak. Some
exists (other than the ability to treat one pollutant as a
guidance is provided for the erosion parameters using
fraction of sediment concentration). Except for the
relationships based on the Universal Soil Loss
sedimentation algorithm within storage units,
Equation. Concentrations of other constituents can be
simulation of sediment transport processes is weak, as
taken as a fraction (? potency factors? ) of sediment
with virtually all other models of this type. Generally,
concentration. Precipitation can contribute a constant
quality predictions must be calibrated if accurate
concentration.
concentrations and loads are required, e.g., to drive a
receiving water quality model. On the other hand,
Quality routing through the drainage network is done
relative comparisons can be made using generalized
by a Lagrangian scheme to simulate plug flow and no
U.S. data for calibration purposes.
decay. Plug flow routing is also performed in storage
basins, with settling based on sedimentation theory
9. Hardware/Software Requirements
and dependent on a particle size distribution.

6. Data Needs/Availability The program is written in Fortran 77 for IBM or Prime

mainframes. Source code is provided on a 9-track
magnetic tape for compilation and installation on the
Data needs depend on the degree of schematization.
user's computer.
Quantity parameters for a subcatchment include area,
imperviousness, length, slope, roughness and
10. Experience
infiltration parameters. Channels are characterized by
trapezoidal or circular dimensions and kinematic
wave parameters. Storage basins require The basis for the hydrologic components of
stage-area-discharge relationships. Quality DR3M-QUAL is the earlier modeling work of Dawdy
parameters include build-up and wash-off et al. (1972) that was updated first for the quantity
coefficients. Rainfall input can be for single or portion of the model (Dawdy et al., 1978; Alley and
multiple storms. Smith, 1982a) and then for additional quality routines
(Alley and Smith, 1982b). Much of the emphasis on
Quantity data are similar in form to those required by the form and calibration of build-up and wash-off
63
parameters is based on research done by Alley et al. Quality Model,? Proc. of the International
(1980), Alley (1981), and Alley and Smith (1981). The Symposium on Urban Runoff, University of
program has received extensive internal review Kentucky, Lexington, pp. 171-182.
within the USGS and has been applied to their urban
modeling studies in South Florida (Doyle and Miller, Alley, W.M. and P.E. Smith. 1981. ? Estimation of
1980), Rochester (Kappel et al., 1985; Zarriello, 1988), Accumulation Parameters for Urban Runoff
Anchorage (Brabets, 1986), Denver (Lindner-Lunsford Quality Modeling,? Water Resources Research,
and Ellis, 1987), and Fresno (Guay and Smith, 1988). A 17(6):1657-1664.
summary of experience with the model is given by
Alley (1986). Alley, W.M. and P.E. Smith. 1982a. Distributed
Routing Rainfall-Runoff Model? Version II, USGS
11. Validation/Review Open File Report 82-344, Reston, VA.

Alley, W.M. and P.E. Smith. 1982b. Multi-Event Urban

The program has undergone the extensive internal
Runoff Quality Model, USGS Open File Report
peer review process of the USGS and has been tested
82-764, Reston, VA.
and compared with field data on at least 37
catchments by various individuals (Alley, 1986). It has
Brabets, T.P. 1987. Quantity and Quality of Urban
primarily been used by persons within the USGS
Runoff from the Chester Creek Basin Anchorage,
although it is freely available to anyone.
Alaska, USGS Water-Resources Investigations
Report 86-4312, Anchorage, AK.
12. Contact
Dawdy, D.R., R.W. Lichty and J.M. Bergmann. 1972. A
The Fortran 77 source code and documentation are Rainfall-Runoff Simulation Model for Estimation of
available on a 9-track magnetic tape (to be supplied Flood Peaks for Small Drainage Basins, USGS
by the user) from the USGS National Center: Professional Paper 506-B, Reston, VA.

Ms. Kate Flynn Dawdy, D.R., J.C. Schaake, Jr. and W.M. Alley. 1972.
U.S. Geological Survey User's Guide for Distributed Routing
410 National Center Rainfall-Runoff Model, USGS Water Resources
Reston, Virginia 22092 Investigations 78-90, Gulf Coast Hydroscience
(703) 648-5313 Center, NSTL Station, MS.

Minimal support is available from the program Doyle, W.H., Jr. and J.E. Miller. 1980. Calibration of a
authors (Alley and Smith). Distributed Routing Rainfall-Runoff Model at Four
Urban Sites Near Miami, Florida, USGS Water
13. References Resources Investigations 80-1, Gulf Coast
Hydroscience Center, NSTL Station, MS.
Alley, W.M. 1981. ? Estimation of Impervious-Area
Guay, J.R. and P.E. Smith. 1988. Simulation of
Washoff Parameters,? Water Resources Research,
Quantity and Quality of Storm Runoff for Urban
17(4):1161-1166.
Catchments in Fresno, California, USGS
Water-Resources Investigations Report 88-4125,
Alley, W.M. 1986. ? Summary of Experience with the
Sacramento, CA.
Distributed Routing Rainfall-Runoff Model
(DR3M).? In: Urban Drainage Modeling, C.
Kappel, W.M., R.M. Yager and P.J. Zarriello. 1986.
Maksimovic and M. Radojkovic, eds., Proc. of
Quantity and Quality of Urban Storm Runoff in the
International Symp. on Comparison of Urban
Irondequoit Creek Basin near Rochester, New York,
Drainage Models with Real Catchment Data,
Part 2. Quality of Storm Runoff and Atmospheric
Dubrovnik, Yugoslavia, Pergamon Press, New
Deposition, Rainfall-Runoff-Quality Modeling, and
York, pp. 403-415.
Potential of Wetlands for Sediment and Nutrient
Retention, USGS Water-Resources Investigations
Alley, W.M., F.W. Ellis and R.C. Sutherland. 1980.
? Toward A More Deterministic Urban Runoff Report 85-4113, Ithaca, New York.

64
Lindner-Lunsford, J.B. and S.R. Ellis. 1987.
Comparison of Conceptually Based and Regression
Rainfall-Runoff Models, Denver Metropolitan Area,
Colorado, and Potential Applications in Urban
Areas, USGS Water-Resources Investigations
Report 87-4104, Denver, CO.

Zarriello, P.J. 1988. ? Simulated Water-Quality Changes

in Detention Basins.? In Design of Urban Runoff
Quality Controls, L.A. Roesner, B. Urbonas and
M.B. Sonnen, eds., Proc. of Engineering Foundation
Conference, Potosi, MO, ASCE, New York, pp.
268-277.

65
 Nonpoint Source Model Review

1. Name of the Method

EPA Screening Procedures

2. Type of Method

xxx Surface Water Model: Simple Approach

Surface Water Model: Refined Approach
Air Model: Simple Approach
Air Model: Refined Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Simple Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Refined Approach
Multi-media Model: Simple Approach
Multi-media Model: Refined Approach

3. Purpose/Scope

Purpose: Predict concentrations of contaminants in

xxx runoff waters

xxx surface waters
ground waters

Source/Release Types:

Continuous Intermittent
Single xxx Multiple xxx Diffuse

Level of Application:

xxx Screening Intermediate Detailed

Type of Chemicals:

xxx Conventional xxx Organic xxx Metals

Unique Features:

Addresses degradation products

Integral Database/Database manager
Integral Uncertainty Analysis Capabilities
Interactive Input/Execution Manager

66
4. Level of Effort

System setup: xx mandays manweeks manmonths manyear

Assessments: xx mandays xx manweeks manmonths manyear

(Estimates reflect order-of-magnitude values and depend heavily on the experience and ability of the assessor.)

67
5. Description of the Method/Techniques 6. Data Needs/Availability

EPA Screening Procedures (Mills et al., 1982, 1985) are a The data requirement is minimal and is also available
revision and expansion of water quality assessment from the manual when site specific data is lacking.
procedures initially developed for nondesignated 208 Soil and land use data is required for estimating
areas (Zison et al., 1977). The procedures have been runoff and sediment yield. This data is readily
expanded and revised to include consideration of the available from USDA-SCS soil survey reports. Tables
accumulation, transport, and fate of toxic chemicals, for estimating water quality input parameters for
in addition to conventional pollutants included in the nitrogen, phosphorous, heavy metals, and pesticides
earliest version. The manual includes a separate are included in the manual.
chapter describing calculation procedures for
estimating NPS loads for urban and nonurban land 7. Output of the Assessment
areas in addition to chapters on procedures for rivers
and streams, impoundments, and estuaries. A useful
Output available from the model include predicted
overview chapter on the aquatic fate processes of
stream concentrations of BOD, DO, total N, total P,
toxic organisms is also included.
temperature, and conservative and organic pollutants
by reach; total lake concentrations, organic pollutants
The procedures for NPS load assessments described
eutrophic status, and hypolimnion DO deficit; and
in the manual are essentially a compilation and
estuary concentrations of BOD, DO, total N, total P,
integration of estimation techniques developed earlier
and conservative pollutants by reach. As calculations
by Midwest Research Institute (McElroy et al., 1976),
are done on a hand calculator they can be arranged
Amy et al. (1974), Heany et al. (1976) (i.e., SWMM-
according to user's convenience.
Level I), and Haith (1980). However, the presentation
of the procedures is well integrated, supplemented
8. Limitations
with additional parameter estimation information,
and includes sample calculations. The procedures for
nonurban areas are derived from MRI loading func- It is a very simplified procedure requiring the user to
tions for average annual estimates based on Universal estimate pollutant concentrations. It use is very
Soil Loss Equation (Wischmeier and Smith, 1978), limited while evaluating impacts of various
while the storm event procedures use the modified management practices. As calculations are done on a
USLE (Williams, 1975) and the SCS Runoff Curve hand calculator, they can be tedious and time
Number procedure (Mockus, 1972) for storm runoff. consuming for complex multi-media use basins.
Pollutant concentrations in soils and enrichment Snowmelt runoff and loadings are ignored.
ratios are required for estimating pollutant loads;
precipitation contributions of nutrients can be 9. Hardware/Software Requirements
included. Specific information is included for
estimation of salinity loads in irrigation return flows,
No computer requirement, calculations can be done
and storm event pesticide losses are estimated
by hand calculators.
separately based on procedures developed by Haith
(1980).
10. Experience
Annual and storm event loads from urban areas
follow the procedures included in the SWMM-Level I These procedures have enjoyed wide popularity,
(Heaney et al., 1976) and Amy et al. (1974) partly due to the availability of training workshops
respectively. The basic procedures are relatively sponsored by EPA, and have been applied in a
standard for urban areas, calculating pollutant loads number of regions, including the Sandusky River in
as a function of solids accumulation and washoff. northern Ohio and the Patuxent, Ware, Chester, and
Occuquan basins in the Chesapeake Bay region (Davis
The EPA Screening Procedures have excellent user et al., 1981; Dean et al., 1981a; and Dean et al., 1981b).
documentation and guidance, including occasional
workshops sponsored by the EPA Water Quality 11. Validation/Review
Modeling Center, Athens, Georgia.

68
12. Contact Dean, J.D., W.B. Mills and D.B. Porcella. 1981a. A
Screening Methodology for Basin Wide Water
Quality Management. Symposium on Unified River
For copies of the manual contact
Basin Management. R.M. North, L.B. Dwoesky, and
D.J. Allee (editors), May 4-7, 1980, Gatlinburg, TN.
Center for Exposure Assessment Modeling
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Dean, J.D., B. Hudson and W.B. Mills. 1981b. River
Environmental Research Laboratory
Basin Validation of the MRI Nonpoint Calculator
Athens, GA. 30605
and Tetra Tech's Nondesignated 208 Screening
(706) 546-3549
Methodologies, Volume II. Chesapeake-Sandusky
Nondesignated 208 Screening Methodology
13. References
Demonstration. U.S. EPA, Athens, GA.

Amy, G., R. Pitt, R. Singh, W.L. Bradford and M.B. Haith, D.A. 1980. ? A Mathematical Model for
LaGraff. 1974. Water Quality Management Estimating Pesticide Losses in Runoff? . J. of Env.
Planning for Urban Runoff. U.S. EPA, Washington, Qual. 9(3):428-433.
D.C., EPA 440/9-75-004. (NTIS PB 241 689/AS).
Heaney, J.P., W.C. Huber and S.J. Nix. 1976. Storm
Davis, M.J., M.K. Snyder and J.W. Nebgen. 1981. Water Management Model, Level I, Preliminary
River Basin Validation of the Water Quality Screening Procedures. EPA-600/2-76-275, U.S.
Assessment Methodology for Screening Environmental Protection Agency. Cincinnati, OH.
Nondesignated 208 Areas? Volume I: Nonpoint
Source Load Estimation. U.S. EPA, Athens, GA. McElroy, A.D., S.Y. Chiu, J.W. Nebgen, A. Aleti and
F.W. Bennett. 1976. Loading Functions for
Assessment of Water Pollution from Nonpoint
Sources. EPA-600/2-76-151. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency. Washington, D.C.

Mills, W.B., V.H. Colber and J.D. Dean. 1979. Hand-

Held Calculator Programs for Analysis of River
Water Quality Interactions. Tetra Tech Inc.,
Lafayette, CA.

Mills, W.B., J.D. Dean, D.B. Porcella, S.A. Gherini,

R.J.M. Hudson, W.E. Frick, G.L. Rupp and G.L.
Bowie. 1982. Water Quality Assessment: A
Screening Procedure for Toxic and Conventional
Pollutants. EPA-600/6-82-004a and b. Volumes I
and II. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.

Mills, W.B., D.B. Porcella, M.J. Ungs, S.A. Gherini,

K.V. Summers, L. Mok, G.L. Rupp, G.L. Bowie and
D.A. Haith. 1985. Water Quality Assessment: A
Screening Procedure for Toxic and Conventional
Pollutants in Surface and Ground Water.
EPA/600/6-85/002a. U.S. Environmental Pro-
tection Agency.

Mockus, J. 1972. ? Estimation of Direct Runoff from

Storm Rainfall.? In: National Engineering
Handbook, Sec. 4, Hydrology. U.S. Soil
Conservation Service, Washington, D.C.

Williams, J.R. 1975. ? Sediment-Yield Prediction with

69
 Universal Soil Loss Equation Using Runoff Energy
Factor.? In: Present and Prospective Technology for
Predicting Sediment Yields and Sources. U.S. Dept.
of Agriculture. ARS-S-40.

Wischmeier, W.H. and D.D. Smith. 1978. Predicting

Rainfall-Erosion Losses: A Guide to Conservation
Planning. U.S. Department of Agriculture,
Agriculture Research Service.

Zison, S.W., K. Haven and W.B. Mills. 1977. Water

Quality Assessment: A Screening Methodology for
Nondesignated 208 Areas. EPA-600/6-77-023, U.S.
EPA, Athens, GA.
Nonpoint Source Model Review

1. Name of the Method

Agricultural NonPoint Source Pollution Model? (AGNPS)

2. Type of Method

Surface Water Model: Simple Approach

xxx Surface Water Model: Refined Approach
Air Model: Simple Approach
Air Model: Refined Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Simple Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Refined Approach
Multi-media Model: Simple Approach
Multi-media Model: Refined Approach

3. Purpose/Scope

Purpose: Predict concentrations of contaminants in

xxx runoff waters

xxx surface waters
ground waters

Source/Release Types:

Continuous Intermittent
Single xxx Multiple xxx Diffuse

Level of Application:

xxx Screening xxx Intermediate xxx Detailed

Type of Chemicals:

xxx Conventional Organic Metals

70
Unique Features:

Addresses degradation products

Integral Database/Database manager
Integral Uncertainty Analysis Capabilities
xxx Interactive Input/Execution Manager

4. Level of Effort

System setup: xx mandays xx manweeks manmonths manyear

Assessments: mandays xx manweeks xx manmonths manyear

(Estimates reflect order-of-magnitude values and depend heavily on the experience and ability of the assessor.)

71
5. Description of the Method/Techniques data includes information on the parameters based on
the land practices in the cell.
Agricultural Nonpoint Source Pollution Model (AGNPS)
Additional model components that are under
was developed by the U.S. Department of development are unsaturated/saturated zone
Agriculture? Agriculture Research Service (Young et
routines, economic analysis, and linkage to
al., 1986) to obtain uniform and accurate estimates of
Geographic Information System.
runoff quality with primary emphasis on nutrients
and sediments and to compare the effects of various
pollution control practices that could be incorporated
into the management of watersheds.

The AGNPS model simulates sediments and nutrients

from agricultural watersheds for a single storm event
or for continuous simulation. Watersheds examined
by AGNPS must be divided into square working
areas called cells. Grouping of cells results in the
formation of subwatersheds, which can be
individually examined. The output from the model
can be used to compare the watershed examined
against other watersheds to point sources of water
quality problems, and to investigate possible solutions
to these problems.

AGNPS is also capable of handling point source

inputs from feedlots, waste water treatment plant
discharges, and stream bank and gully erosion (user
specified). In the model, pollutants are routed from
the top of the watershed to the outlet in a series of
steps so that flow and water quality at any point in
the watershed may be examined. The Modified Uni-
versal Soil Loss Equation is used for predicting soil
erosion, and a unit hydrograph approach used for the
flow in the watershed. Erosion is predicted in five
different particle sizes namely sand, silt, clay, small
aggregates, and large aggregates.

The pollutant transport portion is subdivided into one

part handling soluble pollutants and another part
handling sediment attached pollutants. The methods
used to predict nitrogen and phosphorus yields from
the watershed and individual cells were developed by
Frere et al. (1980) and are also used in CREAMS
(Knisel, 1980). The nitrogen and phosphorus
calculations are performed using relationships be-
tween chemical concentration, sediment yield and
runoff volume.

Data needed for the model can be classified into two

categories: watershed data and cell data. Watershed
data includes information applying to the entire
watershed which would include watershed size,
number of cells in the watershed, and if running for a
single storm event then the storm intensity. The cell

72
6. Data Needs/Availability has also been used by Koelliker and Humbert (1989)
for water quality planning. APNPS was used by
Frevert and Crowder (1987) to analyze agricultural
The input data needed are extensive however, can be
nonpoint pollution control options in the St. Albans
obtained through visual field observations, maps
Bay watershed.
(topographic and soils) and from various
publications, table and graphs (Young et al. 1986).
11. Validation/Review
Meteorologic data consisting of daily rainfall is
needed for hydrology simulation. The model also has
an option to evaluate watershed response to a single The model has been validated using field data from
storm event. Data on soil and land use can be agricultural watersheds in Minnesota, Iowa, and
obtained from local USDA-SCS field offices. Nebraska (Young et al., 1986). Lee (1987) validated the
model in an Illinois watershed using the single storm
7. Output of the Assessment option of the model. The author found that the
simulated and observed data for runoff volume and
sediment yield were well represented when compared
The model provides estimates of: (1) hydrology, with
with observed data.
estimates of both runoff volume and peak runoff rate;
(2) sediment, with estimates of upland erosion,
12. Contact
channel erosion, and sediment yield; and nutrients
(both sediment attached and dissolved), with
estimates of pollution loadings to receiving cells. A The copies of the AGNPS program and the manual
graphics option in the program allows the user to plot are available from
different variables within the watershed.
Dr. Robert Young
8. Limitations USDA-ARS
North Central Research Laboratory
Morris, MN 56267
The model does not handle pesticides. The pollutant
Phone: (612) 589-3411
transport component needs further field testing.
Nutrient transformation and instream processes are
13. References
not within model capabilities.

9. Hardware/Software Requirements Frere, M.H., J.D. Ross and L.J. Lane. 1980. ? The
Nutrient Submodel.? In: Knisel, W.G. (ed.). 1980.
CREAMS: A Field Scale Model for Chemicals,
The program is written in standard FORTRAN 77 and
Runoff, and Erosion from Agricultural
has been installed on IBM PC/AT and compatibles. A
Management Systems. U.S. Department of Agri-
hard disk is required for operation of the program
culture. Conservation Research Report No. 26. pp.
and a math co-processor is highly recommended.
65-86.
Executable code prepared with Ryan-McFarland
compiler and is available only for MS/DOS
Frevert, K. and B.M. Crowder. 1987. ? Analysis of
environment. Source code is only available for
agricultural nonpoint pollution control options in
MS/DOS environment.
the St. Albans Bay watershed.? Economic Division,
ERS, USDA. Staff Report No. AGES870423.
10. Experience
Knisel, W.G. (ed.). 1980. CREAMS: A Field Scale
The model is being used extensively within United Model for Chemicals, Runoff, and Erosion from
States to evaluate nonpoint source pollution by Agricultural Management Systems. U.S.
various government agencies and consultants. The Department of Agriculture. Conservation Research
model has been used by Shi (1987) to perform Report No. 26. 640 pp.
economic assessment of soil erosion and water quality
in Idaho. Setia and Magleby (1987) and Setia et al. Lee, M.T. 1987. ? Verification and Applications of a
(1988) used AGNPS for evaluating the economic effect Nonpoint Source Pollution Model.? In: Proceedings
of nonpoint pollution control alternatives. The model of the National Engineering Hydrology

73
 Symposium. ASCE, New York, NY.

Setia, P.P. and R.S. Magleby. 1987. ? An Economic

Analysis of Agricultural Nonpoint Pollution
Control Alternatives. ? Jour. of Soil and Water
Conservation. 42:427-431.

Setia, P.P., R.S. Magleby and D.G Carvey. 1988.

? Illinois Rural Clean Water Project? An Economic
Analysis.? Resources and Technology Division,
ERS, USDA. Staff Report No. AGES830617.

Shi, H.Q. 1987. ? Integrated Economic Assessment of

Soil Erosion and Water Quality in Idaho's Tom
Beall Watershed.? M.Sc. Thesis. University of
Idaho.

Young, R.A., C.A. Onstad, D.D. Bosch and W.P.

Anderson. 1986. Agricultural Nonpoint Source
Pollution Model: A Watershed Analysis Tool.
Agriculture Research Service, U.S. Department of
Agriculture, Morris, MN.

74
 Nonpoint Source Model Review

1. Name of the Method

Areal Nonpoint Source Watershed Environment Response Simulation? (ANSWERS)

2. Type of Method

Surface Water Model: Simple Approach

xxx Surface Water Model: Refined Approach
Air Model: Simple Approach
Air Model: Refined Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Simple Approach
xxx Soil (Groundwater) Model: Refined Approach
Multi-media Model: Simple Approach
Multi-media Model: Refined Approach

3. Purpose/Scope

Purpose: Predict concentrations of contaminants in

xxx runoff waters

surface waters
ground waters

Source/Release Types:

Continuous Intermittent
Single Multiple xxx Diffuse

Level of Application:

xxx Screening xxx Intermediate Detailed

Type of Chemicals:

xxx Conventional Organic Metals

Unique Features:

Addresses degradation products

xxx Integral Database/Database manager
Integral Uncertainty Analysis Capabilities
Interactive Input/Execution Manager

75
4. Level of Effort

System setup: xx mandays xx manweeks manmonths manyear

Assessments: mandays xx manweeks xx manmonths manyear

(Estimates reflect order-of-magnitude values and depend heavily on the experience and ability of the assessor.)

76
5. Description of the Method/Techniques watershed in terms of flow and sediment. The
ANSWERS program comes with a plotting program.
Areal Nonpoint Source Watershed Environment Response
8. Limitations
Simulation (ANSWERS) was developed at the
Agricultural Engineering Department of Purdue
University (Beasley and Huggins, 1981). It is an event For a simulation run of ANSWERS on a large
based, distributed parameter model capable of watershed a mainframe computer is required.
predicting the hydrologic and erosion response of However, for smaller watersheds a IBM-PC
agricultural watersheds. compatible version of ANSWERS is available. The
model is a storm event model and the input data file
Application of ANSWERS requires that the watershed is quite complex to prepare. Snowmelt processes or
to be subdivided into a grid of square elements. Each pesticides cannot be simulated by the model. The
element must be small enough so that all important water quality constituents modeled are limited to
parameter values within its boundaries are uniform. nitrogen and phosphorous. These constituents are
For a practical application element sizes range from represented by relationships between chemical
one to four hectares. Within each element the model concentrations with sediment yield and runoff
simulates the processes of interception, infiltration, volume. No transformation of nitrogen and
surface storage, surface flow, subsurface drainage, phosphorus is accounted for in the model.
and sediment drainage, and sediment detachment,
transport, and deposition. The output from one 9. Hardware/Software Requirements
element then becomes a source of input to an adjacent
element.
The program is written in standard FORTRAN 77 and
has been installed on IBM PC/AT and compatibles. A
As the model is based on a modular program
hard disk is required for operation of the program
structure it allows easier modification of existing
and a math co-processor is highly recommended.
program code and/or addition of user supplied
Executable code prepared with Ryan-McFarland
algorithms. Model parameter values are allowed to
compiler.
vary between elements, thus, any degree of spatial
variability within the watershed is easily represented.
10. Experience
Nutrients (nitrogen and phosphorus) are simulated
using correlation relationships between chemical The model has been successfully applied in Indiana
concentrations, sediment yield and runoff volume. A on an agricultural watershed and a construction site
research version (Amin-Sichani, 1982) of the model to evaluate best management practices by Beasley
uses ? clay enrichment? information and a very (1986).
descriptive phosphorus fate model to predict total,
particulate, and soluble phosphorus yields. 11. Validation/Review

6. Data Needs/Availability
Individual components of the model have been
validated by the developers.
Data need comprise of detailed description of the
watershed topography, drainage network, soils, and 12. Contact
land use. Most of the data can be obtained from
USDA-SCS soil surveys, land use and cropping
To obtain copies of the model please write or call Dr.
surveys.
David Beasley at the following address:
7. Output of the Assessment

The model can evaluate alternative erosion control

management practices for both agricultural land and
construction sites (Dillaha et al., 1982). Output can be
obtained on an element basis or for the entire

77
 Dr. David Beasley, Professor and Head
Dept. of Agricultural Engineering
University of Georgia
Coastal Plain Experiment Station
P.O. Box 748
Tifton, GA 31793
(912) 386-3377

13. References

Amin-Sichani, S. 1982. ? Modeling of Phosphorus

Transport in Surface Runoff from Agricultural
Watersheds.? Ph.D. Thesis, Purdue University, W.
Lafayette, Indiana, 157 pp.

Beasley, D.B. and L.F. Huggins. 1981. ANSWERS

Users Manual. EPA-905/9-82-001, U.S. EPA, Region
V. Chicago, IL.

Beasley, D.B. 1986. ? Distributed Parameter

Hydrologic and Water Quality Modeling.? In:
Agricultural Nonpoint Source Pollution: Model
Selection and Application. A. Giorgini and F. Zingales
(editors). pp. 345-362.

Beasley, D.B. and D.L. Thomas. 1989. Application of

Water Quality Models for Agricultural and
Forested Watersheds. Southern Cooperative Series
Bulletin No. 338. Agricultural Experiment Station,
University of Georgia, Athens, GA.

Dillaha, T.A. III, D.B. Beasley and L.F. Huggins. 1982.

? Using the ANSWERS Model to Estimate Sediment
Yields on Construction Sites.? J. of Soil and Water
Cons., 37(2):117-120.

78
 Nonpoint Source Model Review

1. Name of the Method

Chemicals, Runoff, and Erosion from Agricultural Management Systems? (CREAMS)

Groundwater Loading Effects of Agricultural Management Systems? (GLEAMS)

2. Type of Method

Surface Water Model: Simple Approach

xxx Surface Water Model: Refined Approach
Air Model: Simple Approach
Air Model: Refined Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Simple Approach
xxx Soil (Groundwater) Model: Refined Approach
Multi-media Model: Simple Approach
Multi-media Model: Refined Approach

3. Purpose/Scope

Purpose: Predict concentrations of contaminants in

xxx runoff waters

surface waters
xxx ground waters (vadose and root zone)

Source/Release Types:

Continuous Intermittent
Single xxx Multiple xxx Diffuse

Level of Application:

xxx Screening xxx Intermediate xxx Detailed

Type of Chemicals:

xxx Conventional xxx Organic Metals

Unique Features:

xxx Addresses degradation products

Integral Database/Database manager
Integral Uncertainty Analysis Capabilities
Interactive Input/Execution Manager

79
4. Level of Effort

System setup: xx mandays xx manweeks manmonths manyear

Assessments: mandays xx manweeks xx manmonths manyear

(Estimates reflect order-of-magnitude values and depend heavily on the experience and ability of the assessor.)

80
5. Description of the Method/Techniques Method as modified by Williams and Nicks (1982).
The soil is divided into various layers, with a
minimum of 3 and a maximum of 12 layers of variable
Chemicals, Runoff, and Erosion from Agricultural
thickness are used for water and pesticide routing
Management Systems (CREAMS) was developed by the
(Knisel et al., 1989).
U.S. Department of Agriculture? Agricultural
Research Service (Knisel, 1980; Leonard and Ferreira,
6. Data Needs/Availability
1984) for the analysis of agricultural best management
practices for pollution control. CREAMS is a field
scale model that uses separate hydrology, erosion, and The data needed for CREAMS are quite detailed. As
chemistry submodels connected together by pass files. CREAMS is a continuous simulation model the data
needs are extensive. Meteorologic data consisting of
Runoff volume, peak flow, infiltration, daily or breakpoint precipitation is required for
evapotranspiration, soil water content, and hydrology simulation. Monthly solar radiation and air
percolation are computed on a daily basis. If detailed temperature data is also needed for estimating
precipitation data are available then infiltration is components of the hydrological cycle. Data regarding
calculated at histogram breakpoints. Daily erosion soil type and properties along with information on
and sediment yield, including particle size distri- crops to be grown is needed. A broad range of values
bution, are estimated at the edge of the field. Plant for various model parameters can be obtained from
nutrients and pesticides are simulated and storm load the user's manual.
and average concentrations of sediment-associated
and dissolved chemicals are determined in the runoff, 7. Output of the Assessment
sediment, and percolation through the root zone
(Leonard and Knisel, 1984).
Various output options are available for hydrology
and nutrient simulations, including storm, monthly,
User defined management activities can be simulated
or annual summary. Output for each segment of the
by CREAMS. These activities include aerial spraying
overland flow and channel elements is available from
(foliar or soil directed) or soil incorporation of
areas in the watershed where intense erosion or
pesticides, animal waste management, and
deposition can be identified.
agricultural best management practices (minimum
tillage, terracing, etc.).
8. Limitations
Calibration is not specifically required for CREAMS
simulation, but is usually desirable. The model The maximum size of the simulated area is limited to
provides accurate representation of the various soil a field plots. A watershed scale version (Opus) of
processes. Most of the CREAMS parameter values are CREAMS/GLEAMS is currently under development
physically measurable. The model has the capability (Ferreira, personal communication). The model is
of simulating 20 pesticides at one time. limited in data management and handling. The model
cannot simulate instream processes. Although
Groundwater Loading Effects of Agricultural Management CREAMS has been applied in a wide range of climatic
Systems (GLEAMS) was developed by the United regimes, there is concern regarding its simulation
States Department of Agriculture? Agriculture capability for snow accumulation, melt, and resulting
Research Service (Leonard et al., 1987) to utilize the runoff, and hydrologic impacts of frozen ground
management oriented physically based CREAMS conditions (see Jamieson and Clausen, 1988; Kauppi,
model (Knisel, 1980) and incorporate a component for 1982; Knisel et al., 1983).
vertical flux of pesticides in the root zone. A nitrogen
component for the root zone is in development. 9. Hardware/Software Requirements

GLEAMS consists of three major components namely

The program is written in standard FORTRAN 77 and
hydrology, erosion/sediment yield, and pesticides.
has been installed on IBM PC/AT-compatibles. A
Precipitation is partitioned between surface runoff
hard disk is required for operation of the program
and infiltration and water balance computations are
and a math co-processor is highly recommended. The
done on a daily basis. Surface runoff is estimated
program can be obtained on floppy disk for MS/DOS
using the Soil Conservation Service Curve Number
operating systems.
81
 Uniform Grade Terrace Channels.? In: Crop
10. Experience Production with Conservation in the 80's. American
Society of Agricultural Engineers, St. Joseph,
Michigan. pp. 185-197.
CREAMS has been extensively applied in a wide
variety of hydrologic settings with good success.
Jamieson, C.A. and J.C. Clausen. 1988. Tests of the
CREAMS has been used for in a wide variety of
CREAMS Model on Agricultural Fields in Vermont.
hydrologic and water quality studies (Smith and
Water Resources Bulletin, 24(6):1219-1226.
Williams, 1980; Morgan and Morgan, 1982; Lane and
Ferreira, 1980; Kauppi, 1982; Knisel et al., 1983; and
Kauppi, L. 1982. ? Testing the Application of CREAMS
Jamieson and Clausen, 1988). Crowder et al. (1985)
to Finnish Conditions.? In: European and United
have used CREAMS in conjunction with an economic
States Case Studies in Application of the CREAMS
model to evaluate effects of conservation practices.
Model. V. Svetlosanov and W.G. Knisel (editors).
International Institute for Applied Systems
11. Validation/Review
Analysis. Laxenberg, Austria. pp. 43-47.

The model has been validated by the developers Knisel, W. (ed). 1980. CREAMS: A Field Scale Model
along with independent experts. for Chemicals, Runoff, and Erosion from
Erosion/sedimentation component of the CREAMS Agricultural Management Systems. U.S.
model has been verified by Foster and Ferreira (1981). Department of Agriculture. Conservation Research
Smith and Williams (1980) have validated the Report No. 26. 640 pp.
hydrology submodel at 46 sites in the southern and
midwestern portions of United States. GLEAMS Knisel, W.G., G.R. Foster and R.A. Leonard. 1983.
model has been validated with field data for ? CREAMS: A System for Evaluating Management
Fenamiphos and its metabolites by Leonard et al., Practices.? In: Agricultural Management and Water
1990. The authors report satisfactory comparison Quality. F.W. Schaller and G.W. Bailey (editors).
between observed and simulated results. Iowa State University Press, Ames, Iowa, pp. 178-
199.
12. Contact
Knisel, W.G., R.A. Leonard and F.M. Davis. 1989.
? Agricultural Management Alternatives: GLEAMS
To obtain copies of the model please write or call Dr.
Model Simulations.? Proceedings of the Computer
Walt Knisel or Frank Davis at the following address:
Simulation Conference. Austin, Texas, July 24-27,
pp. 701-706.
USDA-Agricultural Research Service
Southeast Watershed Research Lab
Lane, L.J. and V.A. Ferreira. 1980. ? Sensitivity
P.O. Box 946
Analysis.? In: CREAMS: A Field-Scale Model for
Tifton, Georgia 31793
Chemicals, Runoff, and Erosion from Agricultural
(912) 386-3462
Management Systems. W.G. Knisel (editor). U.S.
Department of Agriculture, Conservation Report
13. References
No. 26, U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington, D.C., pp. 113-158.
Beasley, D.B. and D.L. Thomas. 1989. Application of
Water Quality Models for Agricultural and Leonard, R.A., W.G. Knisel and D.A. Still. 1987.
Forested Watersheds. Southern Cooperative Series ? GLEAMS: Groundwater Loading Effects of
Bulletin No. 338. Agricultural Experiment Station, Agricultural Management Systems.? Trans. of the
University of Georgia, Athens, GA. ASAE, 30(5):1403-1418.

Crowder, B.M., H.B. Pionke, D.J. Epp and C.E. Young. Leonard, R.A. and V.A. Ferreira. 1984. CREAMS2 ? The
1985. ? Using CREAMS and Economic Modeling to Nutrient and Pesticide Models. Proc. Natural
Evaluate Conservation Practices: An Application. ? Resources Modeling Symposium. Agricultural
Journal of Environmental Quality, 14(3):428-434. Research Service. U.S. Department of Agriculture.

Foster, G.R. and V.A. Ferreira. 1981. ? Deposition in Leonard, R.A. and W.G. Knisel. 1984. Model Selection
82
 for Nonpoint Source Pollution and Resource
Conservation. In: Proc. of the International
Conference on Agriculture and Environment 1984.
Venice, Italy. pp. E1-E18.

Leonard, R.A., W.G. Knisel, F.M. Davis and A.W.

Johnson. 1990. ? Validating GLEAMS with Field
Data for Fenamiphos and its Metabolites.? Journal
of Irrigation and Drainage Engineering, 116(1):24-
35.

Morgan, R.P.C. and D.D.V. Morgan. 1982. ? Predicting

Hillslope Runoff and Erosion in the United
Kingdom: Preliminary Trials with the CREAMS
Model.? In: European and United States Case
Studies in Application of the CREAMS Model. V.
Svetlosanov and W.G. Knisel (editors).
International Institute for Applied Systems
Analysis. Laxenburg, Austria. pp. 83-97.

Smith, R.E. and J.R. Williams. 1980. ? Simulation of the

Surface Water Hydrology. ? In: CREAMS: A Field-
Scale Model for Chemicals, Runoff, and Erosion
from Agricultural Management Systems. W.G.
Knisel (editor). U.S. Department of Agriculture,
Conservation Report No. 26, U.S. Government
Printing Office, Washington, D.C., pp. 13-35.
Nonpoint Source Model Review

1. Name of the Method

Hydrological Simulation Program? Fortran (HSPF)

Stream Transport and Agricultural Runoff of Pesticides for Exposure Assessment (STREAM)

2. Type of Method

Surface Water Model: Simple Approach

xxx Surface Water Model: Refined Approach
Air Model: Simple Approach
Air Model: Refined Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Simple Approach
xxx Soil (Groundwater) Model: Refined Approach
Multi-media Model: Simple Approach
Multi-media Model: Refined Approach

3. Purpose/Scope

Purpose: Predict concentrations of contaminants in

xxx runoff waters

xxx surface waters
xxx ground waters

83
Source/Release Types:

xxx Continuous xxx Intermittent

xxx Single xxx Multiple xxx Diffuse

Level of Application:

xxx Screening xxx Intermediate xxx Detailed

Type of Chemicals:

xxx Conventional xxx Organic Metals

Unique Features:

xxx Addresses degradation products

xxx Integral Database/Database manager
Integral Uncertainty Analysis Capabilities
xxx Interactive Input/Execution Manager

4. Level of Effort

System setup: xx mandays xx manweeks manmonths manyear

Assessments: mandays xx manweeks xx manmonths manyear

(Estimates reflect order-of-magnitude values and depend heavily on the experience and ability of the assessor.)

84
5. Description of the Method/Techniques omitted. Option flags allow bypassing of whole
sections of the program where data are not available.
Hydrological Simulation Program? FORTRAN (HSPF) is
7. Output of the Assessment
a comprehensive package for simulation of watershed
hydrology and water quality for both conventional
and toxic organic pollutants. HSPF incorporates the HSPF produces a time history of the runoff flow rate,
watershed scale ARM and NPS models into a basic- sediment load, and nutrient and pesticide
scale analysis framework that includes fate and concentrations, along with a time history of water
transport in one-dimensional stream channels. It is the quantity and quality at any point in a watershed.
only comprehensive model of watershed hydrology Simulation results can be processed through a
and water quality that allows the integrated sim- frequency and duration analysis routine that produces
ulation of land and soil contaminant runoff processes output compatible with conventional toxicological
with instream hydraulic and sediment-chemical measures (e.g., 96-hour LC50).
interactions.
8. Limitations
The result of this simulation is a time history of the
runoff flow rate, sediment load, and nutrient and
HSPF assumes that the ? Stanford Watershed Model ?
pesticide concentrations, along with a time history of
hydrologic model is appropriate for the area being
water quantity and quality at any point in a
modeled. Further, the instream model assumes the
watershed. HSPF simulates three sediment types
receiving water body model is well-mixed with width
(sand, silt, and clay) in addition to a single organic
and depth and is thus limited to well-mixed rivers
chemical and transformation products of that chemi -
and reservoirs. Application of this methodology
cal. The transfer and reaction processes included are
generally requires a team effort because of its
hydrolysis, oxidation, photolysis, biodegradation, a
comprehensive nature.
volatilization, and sorption. Sorption is modeled as a
first-order kinetic process in which the user must
9. Hardware/Software Requirements
specify a desorption rate and an equilibrium partition
coefficient for each of the three solid types.
Resuspension and settling of silts and clays (cohesive The program is written in standard FORTRAN 77 and
solids) are defined in terms of shear stress at the has been installed on systems as small as IBM
sediment-water interface. For sands, the capacity of compatibles (80386/486). A hard disk is required for
the system to transport sand at a particular flow is operation of the program and a math co-processor is
calculated and resuspension or settling is defined by required. No special peripherals other than a printer
the difference between the sand in suspension and the are required. The program is maintained for both the
capacity. Calibration of the model requires data for IBM PC-compatible and the DEC/VAX with VMS
each of the three solids types. Benthic exchange is operating system. Executable code prepared with the
modeled as sorption/desorption and desorp- Lahey FORTRAN compiler and Phar Lap DOS
tion/scour with surficial benthic sediments. Underly- extender is available for the MS/DOS environment.
ing sediment and pore water are not modeled. Source code only is available for the VAX
environment.
6. Data Needs/Availability
The program can be obtained in either floppy disk
format for MS/DOS operation systems, or through
Data needs for HSPF are extensive. HSPF is a
the CEAM BBS or the CEAM Internet node
continuous simulation program and requires
earth1.epa.gov with interactive installation program.
continuous data to drive the simulations. As a
This program has been installed on a wide range of
minimum, continuous rainfall records are required to
computers world-wide with no or minor
drive the runoff model and additional records of
modifications.
evapotranspiration, temperature, and solar intensity
are desirable. A large number of model parameters
10. Experience
can also be specified although default values are
provided where reasonable values are available. HSPF
is a general-purpose program and special attention HSPF and the earlier models from which it was
has been paid to cases where input parameters are developed have been extensively applied in a wide
85
variety of hydrologic and water quality studies distributions tapes contain documentation covering
(Barnwell and Johanson, 1981; Barnwell and Kittle, installation instructions on DEC systems, FORTRAN
1984) including pesticide runoff testing (Lorber and source code files, and test input data sets and output
Mulkey, 1981), aquatic fate and transport model files that may be used to test and confirm the
testing (Mulkey et al., 1986; Schnoor et al., 1987) installation of the model on your system. Users are
analyses of agricultural best management practices responsible for installing programs.
(Donigian et al., 1983a; 1983b; Imhoff et al., 1983) and
as part of pesticide exposure assessments in surface Requests for PC versions of the models should be
waters (Mulkey and Donigian, 1984). accompanied by 6 formatted double-sided, high-
density (DS/HD), error free diskettes. Please do not
An application of HSPF to five agricultural send 5.25" diskettes. Model distribution diskettes
watersheds in a screening methodology for pesticide contain documentation covering installation
review is given in Donigian (1986). The Stream instructions on PC systems, DOS batch files for
Transport and Agricultural Runoff for Exposure compiling, linking, and executing the model,
Assessment (STREAM) Methodology applies the executable task image(s) ready for execution of the
HSPF program to various test watersheds for five model(s), all associated runtime files, and test input
major crops in four agricultural regions in the U.S., data sets and corresponding output files that may be
defines a ? representative watershed? based on used to test and confirm the installation of the model
regional conditions and an extrapolation of the on your PC or compatible system.
calibration for the test watershed, and performs a
sensitivity analysis on key pesticide parameters to To obtain copies of the models, please send
generate cumulative frequency distributions of appropriate number of formatted diskettes to the
pesticide loads and concentrations in each region. The attention of Model Distribution Coordinator at the
resulting methodology requires the user to evaluate following address:
only the crops and regions of interest, the pesticide
application rate, and three pesticide parameters ? the Center for Exposure Assessment Modeling
partition coefficient, the soil/sediment decay rate, and U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
the solution decay rate. Athens Environmental Research Laboratory
Athens, Georgia 30605
11. Validation/Review (706) 546-3549
USA
The program has been validated with both field data
Program and/or user documentation, or instructions
and model experiments and has been reviewed by
on how to order documentation, will accompany each
independent experts. Numerous citations for model
response.
applications are included in the References below.
Recently, model refinements for instream algorithms
13. References
related to pH and sediment-nutrient interactions have
been sponsored by the USGS and the EPA Chesapeake
Bay Program, respectively. Barnwell, T.O. 1980. An Overview of the Hydrologic
Simulation Program? FORTRAN, a Simulation
12. Contact Model for Chemical Transport and Aquatic Risk
Assessment. In: Aquatic Toxicology and Hazard
Assessment: Proceedings of the Fifth Annual
The model is available from the Center for Exposure
Symposium on Aquatic Toxicology, ASTM Special
Assessment Modeling at no charge. Mainframe
Tech. Pub. 766, ASTM, 1916 Race Street,
versions of the programs compatible with the DEC
Philadelphia, PA 19103.
VAX systems are available on standard on-half inch,
9-track magnetic tape. When ordering tapes, please
Barnwell, T.O. and R. Johanson. 1981. HSPF: A
specify the type of computer system that the model
Comprehensive Package for Simulation of
will be installed on (VAX, PRIME, HP, Cyber, IBM,
Watershed Hydrology and Water Quality. In:
etc.), whether the tape should be non-labeled, if non-
Nonpoint Pollution Control: Tools and Techniques for
labeled specify the storage formate (EBCDIC or
the Future. Interstate Commission on the Potomac
ASCII), or if the tape should be formatted as a VAX
River Basin, 1055 First Street, Rockville, MD 20850.
files-11, labeled (ASCII) tape for DEC systems. Model
86
 Donigian. 1984. Hydrological Simulation
Barnwell, T.O. and J.L. Kittle. 1984. ? Hydrologic Program? FORTRAN (HSPF): Users Manual for
Simulation Program? FORTRAN: Development, Release 8.0, EPA-600/3-84-066, Environmental
Maintenance and Applications.? In: Proceedings Research Laboratory, U.S. EPA, Athens, GA. 30613.
Third International Conference on Urban Storm
Drainage. Chalmers Institute of Technology, Johanson, R.C. 1989. Application of the HSPF Model
Goteborg, Sweden. to Water Management in Africa. In: Proceedings of
Stormwater and Water Quality Model Users Group
Bicknell, B.R., A.S. Donigian Jr. and T.O. Barnwell. Meeting. October 3-4, 1988. Guo, et al., eds. EPA-
1984. Modeling Water Quality and the Effects of 600/9-89/001. Environmental Research Laboratory,
Best Management Practices in the Iowa River Athens, GA.
Basin. J. Wat. Sci. Tech., 17:1141-1153.
Lorber, M.N. and L.A. Mulkey. 1982. An Evaluation of
Chew, Y.C., L.W. Moore, and R.H. Smith. 1991. Three Pesticide Runoff Loading Models. J. Environ.
? Hydrologic SImulation of Tennessee's North Qual. 11:519-529.
Reelfoot Creek watershed? J. Water Pollution
Control Federation 63(1):10-16. Moore, L.W., H. Matheny, T. Tyree, D. Sabatini and
S.J. Klaine. 1988. ? Agricultural Runoff Modeling in
Donigian, A.S., Jr., J.C. Imhoff and B.R. Bicknell. 1983. a Small West Tennessee Watershed,? J. Water
Modeling Water Quality and the Effects of Best Pollution Control Federation 60(2):242-249.
Management Practices in Four Mile Creek, Iowa.
EPA Contract No. 68-03-2895, Environmental Motta, D.J. and M.S. Cheng. 1987. ? The Henson Creek
Research Laboratory, U.S. EPA, Athens, GA. 30613. Watershed Study? In: Proceedings of Stormwater
and Water Quality Users Group Meeting. October
Donigian, A.S., Jr., J.C. Imhoff, B.R. Bicknell and J.L. 15-16, 1987. H.C. Torno, ed. Charles Howard and
Kittle, Jr. 1984. Application Guide for the Assoc., Victoria, BC, Canada.
Hydrological Simulation Program? FORTRAN EPA
600/3-84-066, Environmental Research Laboratory, Mulkey, L.A., R.B. Ambrose, and T.O. Barnwell. 1986.
U.S. EPA, Athens, GA. 30613. ? Aquatic Fate and Transport Modeling Techniques
for Predicting Environmental Exposure to Organic
Donigian, A.S., Jr., D.W. Meier and P.P. Jowise. 1986. Pesticides and Other Toxicants ? A Comparative
Stream Transport and Agricultural Runoff for Study.? In: Urban Runoff Pollution, Springer-Verlag,
Exposure Assessment: A Methodology. New York, NY.
EPA/600/3-86-011, Environmental Research
Laboratory, U.S. EPA, Athens, GA. 30613. Nichols, J.C. and M.P. Timpe. 1985. Use of HSPF to
simulate Dynamics of Phosphorus in Floodplain
Donigian, A.S., Jr., B.R. Bicknell, L.C. Linker, J. Wetlands over a Wide Range of Hydrologic
Hannawald, C. Chang, and R. Reynolds. 1990. Regimes. In: Proceedings of Stormwater and Water
Chesapeake Bay Program Watershed Model Quality Model Users Group Meeting, January
Application to Calculate Bay Nutrient Loadings: 31? February 1, 1985. T.O. Barnwell, Jr., ed. EPA-
Preliminary Phase I Findings and 600/9-85/016, Environmental Research Laboratory,
Recommendations. Prepared by AQUA TERRA Athens, GA.
Consultants for U.S. EPA Chesapeake Bay Program,
Annapolis, MD. Schnoor, J.L., C. Sato, D. McKetchnie, and D. Sahoo.
1987. Processes, Coefficients, and Models for
Hicks, C.N., W.C. Huber and J.P. Heaney. 1985. Simulating Toxic Organics and Heavy Metals in
Simulation of Possible Effects of Deep Pumping on Surface Waters. EPA/600/3-87/015. U.S. Environ-
Surface Hydrology Using HSPF. In: Proceedings of mental Protection Agency, Athens, GA. 30613.
Stormwater and Water Quality Model User Group
Meeting. January 31? February 1, 1985. T.O. Schueler, T.R. 1983. Seneca Creek Watershed
Barnwell, Jr., ed. EPA-600/9-85/016. Environ - Management Study, Final Report, Volumes I and II.
mental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA. Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments,
Washington, DC.
Johanson, R.C., J.C. Imhoff, J.L. Kittle, Jr. and A.S.
87
Song, J.A., G.F. Rawl, W.R. Howard. 1983. Lake
Manatee Watershed Water Resources Evaluation
using Hydrologic Simulation Program? FORTRAN
(HSPF) In: Colloque sur la Modelisation des Eaux
Pluviales. Septembre 8-9, 1983. P. Beron, et al., T.
Barnwell, editeurs. GREMU ? 83/03 Ecole
Polytechnique de Montreal, Quebec, Canada.

Sullivan, M.P. and T.R. Schueler. 1982. The Piscataway

Creek Watershed Model: A Stormwater and
Nonpoint Source Management Tool. In:
Proceedings Stormwater and Water Quality
Management Modeling and SWMM Users Group
Meeting, October 18-19, 1982. Paul E. Wisner, ed.
Univ. of Ottawa, Dept. Civil Engr., Ottawa, Ont.,
Canada.

Weatherbe, D.G. and Z. Novak. 1985. Development of

Water Management Strategy for the Humber River.
In: Proceedings Conference on Stormwater and
Water Quality Management Modeling, September
6-7, 1984. E.M. and W. James, ed. Computational
Hydraulics Group, McMaster University,
Hamilton, Ont., Canada.

Woodruff, D.A., D.R. Gaboury, R.J. Hughto and G.K.

Young. 1981. Calibration of Pesticide Behavior on a
Georgia Agricultural Watershed Using HSP-F. In:
Proceedings Stormwater and Water Quality Model
Users Group Meeting, September 28-29, 1981. W.
James, ed. Computational Hydraulics Group,
McMaster University, Hamilton, Ont., Canada.

Udhiri, S., M-S Cheng and R.L. Powell. 1985. The

Impact of Snow Addition on Watershed Analysis
Using HSPF. In: Proceedings of Stormwater and
Water Quality Model Users Group Meeting,
January 31? February 1, 1985. T.O. Barnwell, Jr., ed.
EPA-600/9-85/016, Environmental Research
Laboratory, Athens, GA.
Nonpoint Source Model Review

1. Name of the Method

Pesticide Root Zone Model? PRZM

2. Type of Method

xxx Surface Water Model: Simple Approach

Surface Water Model: Refined Approach
Air Model: Simple Approach
Air Model: Refined Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Simple Approach
88
xxx Soil (Groundwater) Model: Refined Approach
Multi-media Model: Simple Approach
Multi-media Model: Refined Approach

3. Purpose/Scope

Purpose: Predict concentrations of contaminants in

xxx runoff waters

surface waters
xxx ground waters (vadose and root zone)

Source/Release Types:

Continuous xxx Intermittent

Single xxx Multiple xxx Diffuse

Level of Application:

xxx Screening xxx Intermediate xxx Detailed

Type of Chemicals:

Conventional xxx Organic Metals (pesticides)

Unique Features:

xxx Addresses degradation products

Integral Database/Database manager
Integral Uncertainty Analysis Capabilities
Interactive Input/Execution Manager

4. Level of Effort

System setup: xx mandays xx manweeks manmonths manyear

Assessments: mandays xx manweeks xx manmonths manyear

(Estimates reflect order-of-magnitude values and depend heavily on the experience and ability of the assessor.)

89
5. Description of the Method/Techniques SAFTMOD are linked together through an execution
supervisor which allows users to build models for site
specific situation. In order to perform exposure
Pesticide Root Zone Model (PRZM) was developed at
assessments, the code is equipped with a Monte Carlo
the U.S. EPA Environmental Research Laboratory in
pre and post processor (Dean et al., 1989).
Athens, Georgia by Carsel et al. (1984). It is a one-
dimensional, dynamic, compartmental model that can
6. Data Needs/Availability
be used to simulate chemical movement in
unsaturated zone within and immediately below the
plant root zone. The model is divided into two major The meteorological data needed by the model consist
components namely, the hydrology (and hydraulics) of daily rainfall, potential evaporation, and air
and chemical transport. The hydrology component temperature. If pesticide volatilization is to be
which calculates runoff and erosion is based upon the simulated then additional meteorological data
Soil Conservation Service curve number procedure consisting daily wind speed and solar radiation are
and the Universal Soil Loss Equation respectively. needed. Soils and land use data are required which
Evapotranspiration is estimated directly from pan can be obtained from local USDA-SCS field offices.
evaporation or by an empirical formula if pan The data regarding pesticide input parameters can be
evaporation data is not available. Soil-water capacity obtained from the user's manual or from published
terms including field capacity, wilting point, and research.
saturation water content are used for simulating
water movement within the unsaturated zone. 7. Output of the Assessment
Irrigation application is also within model
capabilities.
Predictions are made on a daily basis. Output can also
be summarized for a daily, monthly, or annual period.
Pesticide application on soil or on the plant foliage are
Daily time series values of various fluxes and soil
considered in the chemical transport simulation.
storages can be written to sequential files for further
Dissolved, adsorbed, and vapor-phase concentrations
evaluation. In addition, a Special Action' option
in the soil are estimated by simultaneously
allows the user to output soil profile pesticide
considering the processes of pesticide uptake by
concentrations at user specified times (Dean et al.,
plants, surface runoff, erosion, decay, volatilization,
1989).
foliar washoff, advection, dispersion, and retardation.
The user has two options to solve the transport
8. Limitations
equations using the original backward difference
implicit scheme or the method of characteristics
(Dean et al., 1989). As the model is dynamic it allows One of the model limitation is that it one-dimensional
considerations of pulse loads. in the vertical direction and hence does not handle
lateral flow. PRZM only simulates downward
PRZM is an integral part of a unsaturated/saturated movement of water and does not account for diffusive
zone model RUSTIC (Dean et al., 1989). RUSTIC (Risk movement due to soil water gradients. This process
of Unsaturated/Saturated Transport and has been identified to be important when simulating
Transformation of Chemical Concentrations) links the effects of volatilization by Jury et al. (1984). The
three subordinate models in order to predict pesticide model only simulates organic chemicals, for example
fate and transport through the crop root zone, and pesticides.
saturated zone to drinking water wells through
PRZM, VADOFT, SAFTMOD. 9. Hardware/Software Requirements

VADOFT is a one-dimensional finite element model

The program is written in standard FORTRAN 77 and
which solves Richard's equation for water flow in the
has been installed on IBM PC/AT-compatibles. A
unsaturated zone. VADOFT can also simulate the fate
hard disk is required for operation of the program
and transport of two parent and two daughter
and a math co-processor is required. The program can
products. SAFTMOD is a two-dimensional finite
be obtained on floppy disk for MS/DOS operating
element model which simulates flow and transport in
systems.
the saturated zone in either an X-Y or X-Z
configuration. The three codes PRZM, VADOFT, and

90
10. Experience Risk of Unsaturated/Saturated Transport and
Transformation of Chemical Concentrations
(RUSTIC). EPA/600/3-89/048a. U.S. Environ-
PRZM has been used to study Aldicarb application to
mental Protection Agency. Environmental Research
citrus in Florida (Jones et al., 1983), and potatoes in
Laboratory, Athens, GA.
New York (Carsel et al., 1985) and Wisconsin (Jones,
1983). It has also been used for Metalaxyl application
Jones, R.L. 1983. ? Movement and Degradation of
to tobacco in Florida and Maryland (Carsel et al.,
Aldicarb Residues in Soil and Ground Water. ?
1986) and to Atrazine and chloride application to corn
Presented at the CETAC Conference on
in Georgia (Carsel et al., 1985).
Multidisciplinary Approaches to Environmental
Problems, November 6-9, Crystal City, VA.
11. Validation/Review
Jones, R.L., P.S.C. Rao and A.G. Hornsby. 1983. ? Fate
The PRZM model has undergone testing with field of Aldicarb in Florida Citrus Soil 2, Model
data in New York and Wisconsin (potatoes), Florida Evaluation.? Presented at the Conference on
(citrus), and Georgia (corn) (Carsel, et al., 1985, Jones Characterization and Monitoring of Vadose
1983, Jones et al., 1983). The results of these tests (Unsaturated) Zone, December 8-10, Las Vegas,
demonstrate that PRZM is a useful tool for evaluating NV.
groundwater threats for pesticide use.

12. Contact

To obtain copies of the user's manual and the

computer program contact

Center for Exposure Assessment Modeling

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Research Laboratory
Athens, GA. 30605
(706) 546-3549

13. References

Carsel, R.F., C.N. Smith, L.A. Mulkey, J.D. Dean and

P. Jowise. 1984. User's Manual for the Pesticide
Root Zone Model (PRZM): Release 1. EPA-600/3-
84-109. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA.

Carsel, R.F., L.A. Mulkey, M.N. Lorber and L.B.

Baskin. 1985. ? The Pesticide Root Zone Model
(PRZM): A Procedure for Evaluating Pesticide
Leaching Threats to Ground Water? Ecological
Modeling 30:49-69.

Carsel, R.F., W.B. Nixon and L.G. Balentine. 1986.

? Comparison of Pesticide Root Zone Model
Predictions with Observed Concentrations for the
Tobacco Pesticide Metalaxyl in Unsaturated Zone
Soils? Environ. Toxicol. Chem. 5:345-353.

Dean, J.D., P.S. Huyakorn, A.S. Donigian, Jr., K.A.

Voos, R.W. Schanz, Y.J. Meeks and R.F. Carsel. 1989.
91
92
 Nonpoint Source Model Review

1. Name of the Method

Simulator for Water Resources in Rural Basins? (SWRRB)

Pesticide Runoff Simulator? (PRS)

2. Type of Method

Surface Water Model: Simple Approach

xxx Surface Water Model: Refined Approach
Air Model: Simple Approach
Air Model: Refined Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Simple Approach
xxx Soil (Groundwater) Model: Refined Approach
Multi-media Model: Simple Approach
Multi-media Model: Refined Approach

3. Purpose/Scope

Purpose: Predict concentrations of contaminants in

xxx runoff waters

surface waters
xxx ground waters

Source/Release Types:

Continuous Intermittent
Single Multiple xxx Diffuse

Level of Application:

xxx Screening xxx Intermediate xxx Detailed

Type of Chemicals:

xxx Conventional xxx Organic Metals

Unique Features:

Addresses degradation products

Integral Database/Database manager
xxx Integral Uncertainty Analysis Capabilities
Interactive Input/Execution Manager

93
4. Level of Effort

System setup: xx mandays xx manweeks manmonths manyear

Assessments: mandays xx manweeks xx manmonths manyear

(Estimates reflect order-of-magnitude values and depend heavily on the experience and ability of the assessor.)

94
5. Description of the Method/Techniques Return flow is calculated as a function of soil water
content and return flow travel time. The percolation
component uses a storage routing model combined
Pesticide Runoff Simulator (PRS) was developed for the
with a crack flow model to predict the flow through
U.S. EPA Office of Pesticide and Toxic Substances by
the root zone. The crop growth model (Arnold et al.,
Computer Sciences Corporation (1980) to simulate
1989) computes total biomass each day during the
pesticide runoff and adsorption into the soil on small
growing season as a function of solar radiation and
agricultural watersheds. PRS is based on SWRRB
leaf area index.
(Simulator for Water Resources in Rural Basins)
originally developed by Williams et al. (1985) at the
The pollutant transport portion is subdivided into one
USDA.
part handling soluble pollutants and another part
handling sediment attached pollutants. The methods
The PRS hydrology and sediment simulation is based
used to predict nitrogen and phosphorus yields from
on the USDA CREAMS model. The SCS curve
the rural basins are adopted from CREAMS (Knisel,
number technique is used to predict surface runoff.
1980). The nitrogen and phosphorus calculations are
Sediment yield is simulated using a modified version
performed using relationships between chemical
of the Universal Soil Loss Equation and a sediment
concentration, sediment yield and runoff volume.
routing model.
The pesticide component is directly taken from Holst
The pesticide component of PRS is a modified version
and Kutney (1989) and is a modification of the
of the CREAMS pesticide model. Pesticide application
CREAMS (Smith and Williams, 1980) pesticide model.
(foliar and soil applied) can be removed by
The amount of pesticide reaching the ground or plants
atmospheric loss, wash off by rainfall, and leaching
is based on a pesticide application efficiency factor.
into the soil. Pesticide yield is divided into a soluble
Empirical equations are used for calculating pesticide
fraction and an adsorbed phase based on an
washoff which are based on threshold rainfall
enrichment ratio.
amount. Pesticide decay from the plants and the soil
are predicted using exponential functions based on
The model includes a built in weather generator based
the decay constant for pesticide in the soil, and half
on temperature, solar radiation, and precipitation
life of pesticide on foliar residue.
statistics. Calibration is not specifically required, but
is usually desirable.
6. Data Needs/Availability
Simulator for Water Resources in Rural Basins (SWRRB)
was developed by Williams et al. (1985), and Arnold Meteorologic data comprising of daily precipitation
et al., (1989) for evaluating basin scale water quality. and solar radiation are required for hydrology
SWRRB operates on a daily time step and simulates simulations. Another set of input data consists of
weather, hydrology, crop growth, sedimentation, and soils, land use, fertilizer, and pesticide application.
nitrogen, phosphorous, and pesticide movement. The The soils and land use data can be obtained from
model was developed by modifying the CREAMS USDA-SCS soil survey maps. Some guidance is
(Knisel, 1980) daily rainfall hydrology model for available in the manual for estimating parameters
application to large, complex, rural basins. required for nutrient and pesticide simulation.

Surface runoff is calculated using the Soil 7. Output of the Assessment

Conservation Service Curve Number technique.
Sediment yield is computed for each basin by using
The model predicts daily runoff volume and peak
the Modified Universal Soil Loss Equation (Williams
rate, sediment yield, evapotranspiration, percolation,
and Berndt, 1977). The channel and floodplain
return flow, and pesticide concentration in runoff and
sediment routing model is composed of two
sediment.
components operating simultaneously (deposition
and degradation). Degradation is based on Bagnold's
8. Limitations
stream power concept and deposition is based on the
fall velocity of the sediment particles (Arnold et al.,
1989). There is very minimal model documentation. In the
hydrology component the snow accumulation

95
processes are ignored, and for the case of pesticides Model for Soil and Water Resources Management.?
no comprehensive instream simulation is available. Texas A&M Press. 255 pp. (In Press).
Nutrient transformations along with pesticide
daughter products are not accounted for in the model. Arnold, J.G. and J.R. Williams. 1987. ? Validation of
SWRRB? Simulator for Water Resources in Rural
9. Hardware/Software Requirements Basins.? J. of Water Resources Planning and
Management. 113(2):243-256.
The PRS model is operational on the EPA National
Computer Science Corporation. 1980. Pesticide Runoff
Computer Center on an IBM 370/168 computer under
Simulator User's Manual. U.S. EPA, Office of
MVS. The model may be accessed via WYLBUR for
Pesticides and Toxic Substances, Washington, D.C.
modification of the source code, creation or
modification of input datasets, and submission of
Holst, R.W. and L.L. Kutney. 1989. ? U.S. EPA
batch executions of the model.
Simulator for Water Resources in Rural Basins.?
Exposure Assessment Branch, Hazard Evaluation
The SWRRB program is written in standard
Division, Office of Pesticide Programs, U.S. EPA
FORTRAN 77 and has been installed on IBM PC/AT
(draft).
and compatibles. A hard disk is required for operation
of the program and a math co-processor is highly
Knisel, W.G. (ed.). 1980. ? CREAMS, A Field Scale
recommended.
Model for Chemicals, Runoff, and Erosion from
Agricultural Management Systems.? USDA
10. Experience
Conservation Research Report No. 26, 643 pp.

The SWRRB model has been used by the Exposure Smith, R.E. and J.R. Williams. 1980. ? Simulation of the
Assessment Branch, Hazard Evaluation Division, and Surface Water Hydrology. ? In: CREAMS, A Field
the Office of Pesticide Programs of the USEPA Scale Model for Chemicals, Runoff, and Erosion
(Arnold et al., 1989). from Agricultural Management Systems. W.G.
Knisel editor. USDA Conservation Research Report
11. Validation/Review No. 26, pp. 13-35.

Williams, J.R. and H.D. Berndt. 1977. Sediment yield

SWRRB was tested on 11 large watersheds by Arnold
prediction based on watershed hydrology.
and Williams (1987). These watersheds were located
Transactions of the ASAE. 20(6):1100-1104.
at eight Agricultural Research Service locations
throughout the United States. The results showed that
Williams, J.R., A.D. Nicks and J.G. Arnold. 1985.
SWRRB can realistically simulate water and sediment ? Simulator for Water Resources in Rural Basins.?
yield under a wide range of soils, climate, land-use,
ASCE J. Hydraulic Engineering. 111(6):970-986.
topography, and management systems.

12. Contact

For copies of the SWRRB program and the user

manual contact

Nancy Sammons
808 East Blackland Road
Temple, Texas 76502
(817) 770-6512

13. References

Arnold, J.G., J.R. Williams, A.D. Nicks and N.B.

Sammons. 1989. ? SWRRB, A Basin Scale Simulation

96
 Nonpoint Source Model Review

1. Name of the Method

Unified Transport Model for Toxic Materials? UTM-TOX

2. Type of Method

Surface Water Model: Simple Approach

xxx Surface Water Model: Refined Approach
Air Model: Simple Approach
xxx Air Model: Refined Approach
Soil (Groundwater) Model: Simple Approach
xxx Soil (Groundwater) Model: Refined Approach
Multi-media Model: Simple Approach
xxx Multi-media Model: Refined Approach

3. Purpose/Scope

Purpose: Predict concentrations of contaminants in

xxx runoff waters

xxx surface waters
ground waters (vadose and root zone)

Source/Release Types:

xxx Continuous Intermittent

Single xxx Multiple xxx Diffuse

Level of Application:

Screening Intermediate xxx Detailed

Type of Chemicals:

xxx Conventional xxx Organic xxx Metals

Unique Features:

Addresses degradation products

Integral Database/Database manager
Integral Uncertainty Analysis Capabilities
Interactive Input/Execution Manager

97
4. Level of Effort

System setup: xx mandays xx manweeks manmonths manyear

Assessments: mandays xx manweeks xx manmonths manyear

(Estimates reflect order-of-magnitude values and depend heavily on the experience and ability of the assessor.)

98
5. Description of the Method/Techniques 7. Output of the Assessment

Unified Transport Model for Toxic Materials (UTM-TOX) The output can be obtained in terms of plots and
was developed by Oak Ridge National Laboratory for tables summarizing the average monthly and annual
the U.S. EPA Office of Pesticides and Toxic chemical concentrations in the 8 wind sectors, in
Substances, Washington, D.C. (Patterson et al., 1983). saturated and unsaturated soil layers, in runoff, out of
UTM-TOX is a multimedia model that combines each reach, and in the stems, leaves, roots and fruits
hydrologic, atmospheric, and sediment transport in of vegetation.
one computer code.
8. Limitations
The model calculates rates of flux of a chemical from
release to the atmosphere, through deposition on a
The model ignores the interaction between chemicals
watershed, infiltration and runoff from the soil, to
and sediment in streams. There is a large time and
flow in a stream channel and associated sediment
spatial resolution of ATM portion of the model
transport. From these calculations mass balances can
relative to the hydrologic processes. The model is
be established, chemical budgets made, and
quite complex and requires significant user expertise.
concentrations in the environment estimated.
9. Hardware/Software Requirements
The atmospheric transport model (ATM) portion of
UTM-TOX is a Gaussian plume model that calculates
dispersion of pollutants emitted from point (stack), UTM-TOX is large computer program and is written
area, or line sources. ATM operates on a monthly time is FORTRAN IV. The program was developed for IBM
step, which is longer than the hydrologic portion of 370/3033 or VAX 11/780 systems.
the model and results in the use of an average
chemical deposition falling on the watershed. 10. Experience

The Terrestrial Ecology and Hydrology Model

An earlier version of the model has been applied by
(TEHM) describes soil-plant water fluxes,
Munro et al. (1976) to evaluate the movement of lead,
interception, infiltration, and storm and groundwater
cadmium, zinc, copper and sulphur through Crooked
flow.
Creek Watershed. This earlier version was also used
by Huff et al. (1977) to Walker Branch Watershed. One
The hydrologic portion of the model is from the
of the current application of the model is reported by
Wisconsin Hydrologic Transport Model (WHTM),
Patterson (1986) for estimating lead transport budget
which is a modified version of the Stanford
in the Crooked Creek Watershed. No current
Watershed Model (SWM). WHTM includes all of the
references since 1986 on the application of the model
hydrologic processes of the SWM and also simulates
are available.
soluble chemical movement, litter and vegetation
interception of the chemical, erosion of sorbed
11. Validation/Review
chemical, chemical degradation in soil and litter, and
sorption in top layers of the soil. Stream transport
includes transfer between three sediment components The model components have been field validated by
(suspended, bed, and resident bed). several researchers (Culkowski and Patterson, 1976;
Munro et al., 1976; and Raridon, Fields, and
6. Data Needs/Availability Henderson, 1976).

12. Contact
The input data includes monthly wind, hourly
precipitation, solar radiation, daily maximum and
minimum temperatures, soil characteristics, To obtain copies of the model and the manual contact
topographic information, surface water
characteristics, sediment characteristics, and the
physiochemical properties and transformation rates
associated with the chemical.

99
 Dr. M.R. Patterson
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
Mail Stop 6243
Oak Ridge, Tennessee 37831
(615) 574-5442

13. References

Culkowski, W.M. and M.R. Patterson. 1976. A

Comprehensive Atmospheric Transport and
Diffusion Model. ORNL/NSF/EATC-17.

Huff, D.D., G.S. Henderson, C.L. Begovich, R.L.

Luxmoore and J.R. Jones. 1977. The Application of
Analytic and Mechanistic Hydrologic Models to
the Study of Walker Branch Watershed. In:
Watershed Research in Eastern North America. A
Workshop to Compare Results. D.L. Corell (editor).
Vol. II, pp. 741-766.

Munro, J.K., R.J. Luxmoore, C.L. Begovich, K.R.

Dixon, A.P. Watson, M.R. Patterson and D.R.
Jackson. 1976. Application of the Unified Transport
Model to the Movement of Pb, Cd, Zn, Cu, and S
through the Crooked Creek Watershed.
ORNL/NSF/EATC-28.

Patterson, M.R., T.J. Sworski, A.L. Sjoreen, M.G.

Browman, C.C. Coutant, D.M. Hetrick, B.D.
Murphy and R.J. Raridon. 1983. A User's Manual
for UTM-TOX, A Unified Transport Model. Draft.
Prepared by Oak Ridge National Laboratory, Oak
Ridge, TN, for U.S. EPA Office of Toxic Substances,
Washington, DC.

Patterson, M.R. 1986. Lead Transport Budget in

Crooked Creek Watershed. In: Pollutants in
Multimedia Environment. Plenum Press. 1986. pp.
93-118.

Raridon, R.J., D.E. Fields and G.S. Henderson. 1976.

Hydrologic and Chemical Budgets on Walker
Branch Watershed? Observations and Modeling
Applications. ORNL/NSF/EATC-24.

100